| By Author | [ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z | Other Symbols ] |
| By Title | [ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z | Other Symbols ] |
| By Language |
|
Download this book: [ ASCII | HTML | PDF ] Look for this book on Amazon Tweet |
Title: Every Boy's Book: A Complete Encyclopædia of Sports and Amusements
Author: Various
Language: English
As this book started as an ASCII text book there are no pictures available.
*** Start of this LibraryBlog Digital Book "Every Boy's Book: A Complete Encyclopædia of Sports and Amusements" ***
TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES:
The following transcriptions have been used:
Italic text in the original work have been transcribed between
underscores as in _text_.
Small capitals in theoriginal work have been transcribed as ALL
CAPITALS.
Letters with a dot below them have been transcribed as [t.],
[h.] and [g.].
Letters that are intended to describe a shape have been
transcribed between square brackets, as in [S] or [X] for S- and
X-shaped.
Depending on the software used and its settings not all used
symbols and characters may display correctly.
More Transcriber’s Notes may be found at the end of this text.
[Illustration:
EVERY
BOY’S
BOOK
GEORGE ROUTLEDGE & SONS
LONDON
AND NEW YORK.]
EVERY BOY’S BOOK:
A COMPLETE ENCYCLOPÆDIA
OF
_SPORTS AND AMUSEMENTS_.
EDITED BY
EDMUND ROUTLEDGE.
With more than Six Hundred Illustrations
FROM ORIGINAL DESIGNS.
LONDON:
GEORGE ROUTLEDGE AND SONS,
THE BROADWAY, LUDGATE.
NEW YORK: 416, BROOME STREET.
1869.
_R. Clay, Son, and Taylor, Printers,
Bread Street Hill, London._
EDITORS PREFACE.
The twelve years that have passed since the first edition of EVERY BOY’S
BOOK was published, have brought so many changes in our national sports
and pastimes, and have seen the introduction of so many new games, that
it has been thought desirable to remodel this work, in order to bring it
down to the requirements of the present time. In carrying out this plan
effectually, EVERY BOY’S BOOK has been almost entirely rewritten; and
scarcely anything now remains of the old work except the title.
All the articles that were in the former edition have been thoroughly
revised, and papers on Boxing, Canoeing, Croquet, Fives, Golf, Rackets,
Sliding, Billiards, Bagatelle, Dominoes, Spectrum Analysis, Canaries,
Hedgehogs, Jackdaws, Jays, Magpies, Owls, Parrots, Ravens, Boats,
Cryptography, Deaf and Dumb Alphabet, Dominoes, Mimicry and
Ventriloquism, Shows, Stamp Collecting, and Tinselling, appear now for
the first time.
In carrying out this work much valuable assistance has been given by
Professor Pepper, the Rev. J. G. Wood, W. B. Tegetmeier, Clement Scott,
Sidney Daryl, J. T. Burgess, Dr. Viner, Thomas Archer, W. Robinson of
the _Field_, Cholmondeley Pennell, and other well-known writers on
sports.
The articles at the end of this work on American Billiards, Base Ball,
and the Canadian sport of La Crosse, have been contributed by Henry
Chadwick, the leading authority on these games in America.
CHRISTMAS, 1868.
PREFACE TO THE ORIGINAL EDITION.
It would be impossible for a single author to produce a book of this
description with a fair prospect of success, because it necessarily
treats of many subjects; and a perfect acquaintance with some of the
more important would occupy a lifetime. The reading and researches of
one man would not be sufficiently extensive to embrace the rich variety
of the materials required. Being fully convinced of this fact, the
Publishers have endeavoured to obtain the aid of the most distinguished
writers in the various departments of knowledge which the following
pages are intended to illustrate. Thus each contributor, in furnishing
his quota of information for the work, has been engaged in a congenial
task, one best suited to his peculiar turn of mind, as well as to his
individual acquirements, and one upon which he could, therefore, with
the greatest ease and accuracy dilate. This brief explanation will show
in what spirit the Publishers embarked in the undertaking; and the
accompanying list of the writers may be received as a proof that they
have succeeded in securing the services of the most competent
authorities. With that portion of the book with which he was practically
acquainted each of the following gentlemen has dealt: W. Martin, Esq.,
C. Baker, Esq., R. B. Wormald, Esq., J. F. Wood, Esq., A. McLaren, Esq.,
Stonehenge, author of “Rural Sports,” and the Rev. J. G. Wood, author of
several works on Natural History, who also furnished some of the
designs. The remaining illustrations are by William Harvey and Harrison
Weir; and the credit for the able manner in which they have been
engraved is due to the brothers Dalziel.
2, FARRINGDON STREET,
_February, 1856_.
CONTENTS.
PART I.
EASY GAMES WITHOUT TOYS.
OUTDOOR.
PAGE
Hop, Step, and Jump 1
Hopping on the Bottle 2
Hop-Scotch 2
French and English 3
Drawing the Oven 4
I Spy 4
Pitch-Stone 3
Duck-Stone 5
Prisoner’s Base, or Prison Bars 5
Fox 7
Baste the Bear 7
Leap-Frog 8
Fly the Garter 8
Spanish Fly 9
Touch 10
Touch-Wood and Touch-Iron 10
Buck, Buck, how many Horns do I hold up? 10
Warning 10
Follow my Leader 11
The Fugleman 11
Hare and Hounds 11
Steeple Chase 13
Duck and Drake 13
Simon Says 14
King of the Castle 14
Battle for the Banner 14
Snow-Balls 15
Snow Castle 16
Snow Giant 17
Jack! Jack! show a Light! 18
Jingling 19
Jump little Nag-tail! 19
Jumping Rope 20
My Grandmother’s Clock 20
Rushing Bases 21
See-saw 21
Thread the Needle 22
Tom Tiddler’s Ground 22
Two to One 22
Walk, Moon, Walk! 22
Want a day’s work? 23
Will you List? 23
Whoop! 24
High Barbaree! 24
Bull in the Ring 24
Cock Fight 25
Dropping the Handkerchief 25
INDOOR.
Blind Man’s Buff 26
Bob-Cherry 26
Buff 27
Concert 27
Consequences 28
Cross Questions & Crooked Answers 28
Dumb Motions 29
Family Coach 29
Frog in the Middle 30
The Four Elements 31
Hand 31
Hot Boiled Beans 32
Hot Cockles 32
How? Where? and When? 32
Hunt the Slipper 33
Hunt the Ring 33
Hunt the Whistle 33
Magic Music 34
Post 34
Proverbs 35
Puss in the Corner 36
Red-Cap and Black-Cap 36
Shadow Buff 37
Slate Games 37
Trades 40
Trussed Fowls 40
The Two Hats 40
What is my Thought like? 41
EASY GAMES WITH TOYS.
OUTDOOR.
BALLS 43
Catch Ball 43
Doutee-Stool 43
Egg-Hat 44
Feeder 44
Monday, Tuesday 45
Nine-Holes 46
Northern Spell 46
Rounders 46
Sevens 48
Stool-Ball 48
Trap, Bat, and Ball 48
HOOPS 49
The Hoop 50
Encounters 50
Hoop Race 51
Posting 51
Tournament 52
Turnpike 52
KITES 53
How to make a Kite 53
Flying the Kite 54
Messengers 55
Calico Kites 55
Fancy Kites 55
MARBLES 57
Bounce Eye 58
Conqueror 58
Die Shot 58
Eggs in the Bush 59
Increase Pound 59
Knock out, or Lag out 59
Long Taw 60
Nine-Holes, or Bridge Board 60
Odd or Even 61
Picking the Plums 61
The Pyramid 61
Ring Taw 61
Spans and Snops, and Bounce About 62
Teetotum Shot 62
Three-Holes 62
Tipshares, or Handers 63
TOPS 64
The Humming-top 64
Peg-top 65
Spanish Peg-top 65
The Whip-top 65
Chip-stone 66
Peg-in-the-Ring 66
MISCELLANEOUS TOYS 68
The Apple Mill 68
Aunt Sally 68
Baton 69
Cat 69
Cat and Mouse 70
Knock-’em-down 71
Pea-shooters 71
Quoits 71
Nine-pins 72
Skittles 72
Dutch-pins 73
Throwing the Hammer 73
The Boomerang 74
The Skip-jack, or Jump-jack 74
The Sling 74
Walking on Stilts 76
The Sucker 76
INDOOR.
Battledore and Shuttlecock 78
Bandilor 79
Cup and Ball 79
The Cutwater 79
Fox and Geese 80
Goose 81
Head, Body, and Legs 81
Knuckle-bones 82
Merelles, or Nine Men’s Morris 83
Paper Dart 83
The Popgun 84
Push-pin 84
Schimmel 84
Spelicans 86
PART II.
ATHLETIC SPORTS AND MANLY EXERCISES.
ANGLING 89
A Word about Fish 90
About the Rod 91
Choosing the Rod 91
Lines or Bottoms 92
Shotting the Line 93
The Float 93
Reels or Winches 94
Reel Lines 94
Hooks 94
How to bait a Hook 95
Baits 95
To Bait with Greaves 97
To Scour and Preserve Worms 97
The Plummet 97
Plumbing the Depth 97
Landing-hook and Landing-net 98
Clearing Ring and Line 98
Drag-hook 98
Bank Runner 98
Live-bait Kettle 99
Disgorger 99
Angling Axioms 99
Salmon 100
Trout 100
Jack or Pike 101
Gudgeon 103
Roach 104
Dace 105
Perch 106
Grayling 107
Chub 108
Carp 109
Tench 110
Pope, or Ruff 110
Bream 111
Flounder 111
Eels 112
Stickleback and Minnow 113
Barbel 114
Natural Fly-fishing, or Dipping 115
Fly-fishing and Artificial Flies 115
Materials for making Flies 115
ARCHERY 121
The Long-bow 122
The Cross-bow 122
Feats of the Bow 123
Length of Bows and Arrows, and how used in
Ancient Times 124
Marks for Shooting at 124
Equipment for Archery 125
Ancient Directions for Archery 125
Decline of Archery 125
Modern Archery 126
The Bow 126
The String 126
Stringing the Bow 127
The Arrows 127
The Quiver 128
The Tassel, Brace, Belt, and Pouch 128
Shooting Glove, and Grease Pot 129
The Target 129
Butts 130
How to draw the Bow 130
Flight Shooting 131
Clout Shooting 131
Roving 131
General Hints for Archers 132
BOXING 133
CANOES AND CANOEING 140
CRICKET 143
The Bat 145
The Ball 145
The Stumps 145
Pads or Guards 146
Batting Gloves 147
Wicket-keeping Gloves 148
The Laws of Cricket 148
The Laws of Single Wicket 152
The Batsman.--Hints to Young Players 153
Fielding 159
Bowling 162
The Wicket-keeper 165
Long-stop 166
Point 166
Short-slip 166
Cover-point 167
Long-slip 167
Long-on 167
Long-off 167
Leg 167
Mid-wicket on and off 167
Third Man up 167
Diagram I.--Fast Round-arm Bowling 168
Diagram II.--Medium Pace Round-arm Bowling 169
Diagram III.--Slow Under-hand Bowling 169
CROQUET.--Materials of the Game 170
The Mallets 170
The Balls 171
The Hoops 171
The Posts 172
Clips 172
Marking Board 173
Tunnel 173
The Cage 173
A Croquet Stand 174
How the Game is played 174
Diagram, No. I. 177
„ „ II. 178
„ „ III. 179
„ „ IV. 180
Rules 181
Striking 181
Order of Playing 181
The Croquet 182
The Posts 185
The Rover 185
Hints to Young Players 186
DRIVING 192
Introduction 192
The Horse in Harness 193
The Horse 194
The Harness 194
The Carriage 195
Putting to 196
Directions for Driving 196
FENCING 198
The Guard 199
Advance 200
Retreat 201
The Longe 201
The Recover 201
The Engage 202
Parades 202
Quarte 203
Tierce 203
Seconde 205
Demi-Cercle 205
Octave 206
Contre-Parades 206
Attacks 207
The Straight Thrust 207
The Disengagement 207
The One-Two 208
The Beat and Thrust 208
The Beat and Disengagement 208
Cut over the Point 208
Cut over the Disengagement 208
Double 209
All Feints 209
The Assault 209
General Advice 210
Broadswords 210
Positions 211
Target 212
Cuts and Guards 213
Cuts 213
Points 214
Guards 215
Parry 215
Hanging Guard 216
Inside Guard 216
Outside Guard 217
Attack and Defence 217
Draw Swords 218
Recover Swords 219
Carry Swords 219
Slope Swords 219
Return Swords 219
Practices 220
Second Practice 220
Third Practice 220
Fourth Practice 221
Fifth Practice 221
Fort and Feeble 222
Drawing Cut 222
General Advice 222
FIVES 223
FOOT-BALL 224
GOLFING 226
GYMNASTICS 228
Introduction 228
Historical Memoranda 229
Modern Gymnastics 230
Walking 230
The Tip-toe March 231
Running 232
Jumping 232
Leaping 233
To climb up a Board 234
Climbing the Pole 234
„ „ Rope 235
„ Trees 235
The Giant Stride, or Flying Steps, and its
capabilities 235
Parallel Bars 241
The Horizontal Bar 243
The Horse 246
The Swing 249
Throwing the Javelin 253
The Trapeze, Single and Double 254
Tricks and Feats of Gymnastics 262
HOCKEY 265
RACKETS 268
RIDING 270
The Horse 271
The Marks of Age in the Horse 271
The Paces of the Horse 272
Terms used by Horsemen 274
Form of the Horse 274
Varieties of the Horse suitable for Boys 274
The Accoutrements and Aids 275
Mounting 277
Dismounting 278
The Management of the Reins 278
The Seat 279
The Control of the Horse 280
Management of the Walk 280
The Trot and Canter 281
The Management of the Gallop 282
Leaping 282
Treatment of Vices 284
ROWING 288
Historical Memoranda 288
Construction of Ancient Ships and Galleys 289
Roman Galleys, Ships, &c. 290
Of Boats 291
The Component Parts of Boats 292
The Oars and Sculls 293
Sea Rowing 293
River Rowing 293
Management of the Oar 294
The Essential Points in Rowing 295
Management of the Boat 295
Rowing together 296
Caution to Young Rowers 296
SAILING 297
Characters of a Yacht 301
Various kinds of Yachts 302
Description of the Cutter Yacht 303
Construction of the Hull 303
Something about the Masts, Spars, Ropes, &c. 306
Sailing a Yacht 308
Bringing up 310
Making Snug 310
Going back 310
Jibing 310
Bringing up at Moorings 310
Of the Mariners’ Compass, and various Nautical
Terms 311
Cautions and Directions 312
Nautical Terms 312
SKATING 316
The Skate 317
Putting on the Skates 318
How to start upon the Inside Edge 319
Movement on the Outside Edge 319
Forward Roll 320
The Dutch Roll 320
The Figure of Eight 321
The Figure of Three 321
The Back Roll 321
General Directions to be followed by Persons
learning to Skate 322
SLIDING 323
SWIMMING 325
Places and Times for Bathing and Swimming 327
Entering the Water 328
Aids to Swimming 328
Striking off and Swimming 329
How to manage the Legs 330
Plunging and Diving 330
Swimming under Water 331
Swimming on the Side 332
Swimming on the Back without employing the Feet 332
Floating 333
Treading Water 333
The Fling 333
Swimming on the Back 334
Thrusting 334
The Double Thrust 335
To Swim like a Dog 335
The Mill 335
The Wheel backwards and forwards 335
To Swim with one Hand 336
Hand over Hand Swimming 336
Balancing 336
The Cramp 337
Saving from Danger 337
Sports and Feats in Swimming 338
Bernardi’s system of Upright Swimming 338
The Prussian System of Pfuel 339
TRAINING 342
PART III.
SCIENTIFIC PURSUITS.
ACOUSTICS 347
Difference between Sound and Noise 347
Sounds, how propagated 347
To show how Sound travels through a Solid 347
To show that Sound depends on Vibration 347
Musical Figures resulting from Sound 347
To make an Æolian Harp 348
The Invisible Girl 348
Ventriloquism 349
AERONAUTICS 350
Balloons 350
How to make an Air-balloon 351
How to Fill a Balloon 352
To make Fire-Balloons 352
Parachutes 352
CHEMISTRY 353
Gases 357
Oxygen Gas 358
Experiments 359
Nitrogen 360
Experiments 361
Atmospheric Air 362
Hydrogen 364
Experiments 364
Water 365
Experiment 366
Chlorine 367
Experiments 368
Muriatic Acid Gas, or Hydric Chloride 369
Experiments 370
Iodine 371
Experiments 371
Bromine 371
Experiments 371
Fluorine 372
Experiment 372
Carbon 372
Experiments 373
Carbon and Hydrogen 374
Experiment 375
Coal Gas 376
Experiment 376
Phosphorus 377
Experiments 377
Sulphur 378
Metals 379
Potassium 381
Experiments 381, 382, 383
Crystallization of Metals 383
Experiment 383
To form a Solid from two Liquids 384
To form a Liquid from two Solids 384
Experiments 384
Changes of Colour produced by Colourless Liquids 385
ELECTRICITY 386
Simple Means of producing Electricity 386
Attraction and Repulsion exhibited 387
How to make an Electrical Machine 388
The Conductor 389
The Plate Electrical Machine 389
How to draw Sparks from the tip of the Nose 389
How to charge a Leyden Jar 390
The Electrical Battery 390
Dancing Balls and Dolls 391
The Electrical Kiss 391
Ringing Bells 391
Working Power of Electricity 392
The Electrified Wig 392
Imitation Thunder Clouds 393
The Lightning Stroke imitated 393
The Sportsman 394
GALVANISM, OR VOLTAIC ELECTRICITY 395
Origin of Galvanism 395
Simple Experiment to excite Galvanic Action 396
With Metal Plates in Water 396
To make a Magnet by the Voltaic Current 397
Effects of Galvanism on a Magnet 397
Change of Colour by Galvanism 397
The Galvanic Shock 398
The Electrotype 398
How to make an Electrotype Apparatus 398
To obtain the Copy of a Coin or Medal 399
HEAT 399
Heat or Caloric 399
Expansion 402
HYDRAULICS 404
The Syphon 405
The Pump 405
The Hydraulic Dancer 406
The Water Snail or Archimedean Screw 407
MAGNETISM 408
Relation of Magnetism to Electricity 408
To make Artificial Magnets 409
How to Magnetise a Poker 409
To show Magnetic Repulsion and Attraction 409
North and South Poles of the Magnet 410
Polarity of the Magnet 410
The Magnetic Fish 410
„ Swan 411
To suspend a Needle in the Air by Magnetism 411
To make Artificial Magnets without the aid either
of Natural Loadstones or Artificial Magnets 411
Horse-shoe Magnets 412
Experiment to show that soft Iron possesses
Magnetic Properties while it remains in the
vicinity of a Magnet 412
Electro-Magnetism 413
Power of the Electro-Magnet 413
The Mariner’s Compass, and Experiments with a
Pocket Compass 413
Variation of the Needle 414
Dip of the Needle 414
Useful Amusement with the Pocket Compass 414
Interesting Particulars concerning the Magnet 415
MECHANICS 417
Experiment of the Law of Motion 417
Balancing 418
The Prancing Horse 418
To construct a Figure, which being placed upon a
curved surface and inclined in any position,
shall, when left to itself, return to its former
position 418
To make a Carriage run in an inverted position
without falling 418
To cause a Cylinder to roll by its own weight
up-hill 418
The Balanced Stick 419
The Chinese Mandarin 419
To make a Shilling turn on its edge on the point
of a Needle 419
The Dancing Pea 420
Obliquity of Motion 420
The Bridge of Knives 421
The Toper’s Tripod 421
THE MICROSCOPE 422
The Compound Microscope 432
OPTICS AND OPTICAL AMUSEMENTS 455
Light as an Effect 455
Refraction 456
The Invisible Coin made Visible 456
The Multiplying Glass 457
Transparent Bodies 457
The Prism 457
Composition of Light 457
A Natural Camera Obscura 458
Bullock’s-eye Experiment 458
The Camera Obscura 458
The Camera Lucida 459
The Magic Lantern 460
Painting the Slides 460
To exhibit the Magic Lantern 461
Effects of the Magic Lantern 461
Tempest at Sea 461
The Phantasmagoria 462
Dissolving Views 462
How to raise a Ghost 462
The Thaumatrope 463
The Bird in the Cage 463
Construction of the Phantasmacope 464
Curious Optical Illusions 464, 465
The Picture in the Air 465
Breathing Light and Darkness 466
To show that Rays of Light do not obstruct each
other 466
Optics of a Soap-bubble 467
The Kaleidoscope 467
Simple Solar Microscope 468
Anamorphoses 468
The Cosmorama 470
Distorted Landscapes 470
PHOTOGRAPHY 472
How to make the Negative on Glass, using
Collodion bromoiodized for Iron development 472
PNEUMATICS 477
Weight of the Air Proved by a pair of Bellows 477
The Pressure of the Air shown by a Wine-glass 478
Another Experiment 478
Elasticity of the Air 478
Reason for this 479
The Air-Pump 479
To prove that Air has Weight 479
To prove Air elastic 480
Sovereign and Feather 480
Air in the Egg 480
The Descending Smoke 480
The Soundless Bell 481
The Floating Fish 481
The Diving Bell 482
Experiments 482, 484, 485
With Ice or Snow 485
Without Snow or Ice 485
SPECTRUM ANALYSIS 486
How to use the Spectroscope 488
To obtain the Bright Lines in the Spectrum given
by any Substance 488
Professor Stokes’ Absorption Bands 489
To Map out any Spectrum 489
PART IV.
DOMESTIC PETS.
BEES AND BEE-KEEPING 493
THE CANARY 497
DOGS 506
GOLD AND SILVER FISH 516
Glasses 517
Feeding 517
Diseases 517
THE GUINEA PIG 518
THE HEDGEHOG 520
THE JACKDAW 521
THE JAY 523
THE MAGPIE 524
OWLS 526
THE PARROT 532
PIGEONS 541
Varieties of Pigeons 545
Blue Rock Dove 545
The Antwerp, or Smerle 546
The Pouter 547
The Carrier 548
The Dragon 549
The Tumbler 549
The Barb 550
The Owl 551
The Turbit 551
The Fantail 551
The Trumpeter 552
The Jacobin 553
POULTRY 554
Fowls 554
Fattening 555
Laying 555
Hatching 555
Rearing of Chickens 556
The Pintado, or Guinea Fowl 557
Ducks 558
THE RABBIT 560
THE RAVEN 570
SILKWORMS 574
Food of the Silkworm 576
Hatching, Feeding, and Temperature 576
Moultings 577
The Cocoon 577
The Aurelia 578
Winding the Silk 578
The Moth 578
General Remarks 579
THE SQUIRREL 580
WHITE MICE 587
PART V.
MISCELLANEOUS.
BAGATELLE 591
English Bagatelle 591
The French Game 591
Sans Egal 591
The Cannon Game 592
Mississippi 592
BILLIARDS 593
The Angles of the Table 597
The American Game 602
Pyramids, or Pyramid Pool 602
Winning and Losing Carambole Game 602
Pool 603
Italian Skittle Pool 604
BOAT-BUILDING 605
Cutter 606
Smack 607
Schooner 607
Lugger 608
CARPENTERING 609
The Shop and Bench 609
Of Planes 610
Saws 611
The Spoke Shave 613
Stock and Bits 613
How to make a Wheelbarrow 613
The Way to make a Box 615
To cut the Dovetails 615
The Bottom of the Box 616
THE GAME OF CHESS 617
The Laws of the Game 618
The King’s Knight’s opening 620
Game I.--Philidor’s Defence 621
„ II.--Petroff’s „ 622
Variation A. on White’s 5th Move 622
Game III.--The Giuoco Piano 622
Variation A. on White’s 6th Move 622
Game IV.--The Evans’ Gambit 623
Variation A. on White’s 9th Move 623
„ B. „ „ „ 624
„ A. on Black’s 10th Move 624
The Gambit declined 625
Game V.--Ruy Lopez Knight’s Game 626
Variation B. on Black’s 3rd Move 627
„ C. „ „ „ 627
Game VI.--The Scotch Gambit 627
Variation A. on Black’s 4th Move 628
The King’s Bishop’s Opening 630
Game I.--The Lopez Gambit 630
Variation A. on White’s 4th Move 631
Game II.--The Double Gambit 631
Game III. 631
Variation A. on Black’s 4th Move 632
The King’s Gambit 632
Game I. 632
The Salvio Gambit 633
Variation A. on Black’s 4th Move 633
Game II.--The Muzio Gambit 633
Game I.--The Allgaier Gambit 635
Game II. 635
Game I.--The Bishop’s Gambit 636
Game II. 636
The Gambit refused 638
Game I. 638
Game II. 639
The Centre Gambit 639
Game I. 639
Variation A. on Black’s 3rd Move 640
Game II. 640
The Queen’s Gambit 641
Game I. 641
Variation A. on Black’s 3rd Move 641
Game II. 642
THE YOUNG CONJURER 643
Sleight of Hand 645
The Flying Shilling 645
Another Method 646
The Beads and Strings 646
To get a Ring out of a Handkerchief 647
To tie a Knot in a Handkerchief which cannot be
drawn tight 647
The Three Cups 648
To tie a Handkerchief round your Leg, and get it
off without untying the Knot 648
The Magic Bond 649
The Old Man and his Chair 649
To tie a Knot on the Left Wrist without letting
the Right Hand approach it 651
The Handcuffs 651
To pull a String through your Button-hole 652
The Cut String restored 652
The Gordian Knot 653
The Knot loosened 653
To put Nuts into your Ear 654
To crack Walnuts in your Elbow 654
To take Feathers out of an empty Handkerchief 654
Tricks requiring Special Apparatus 654
The Die Trick 655
The Penetrative Pence 656
The Doll Trick 657
The Flying Coins 657
The Vanished Groat 658
The Restored Document 658
The Magic Rings 658
The Fish and Ink Trick 659
The Cannon Balls 659
The Shilling in the Ball of Cotton 660
The Egg and Bag Trick 660
The Dancing Egg 661
Bell and Shot 661
The Burned Handkerchief restored 662
The Fire-Eater 662
Tricks with Cards 663
To make the Pass 663
To tell a Card by its Back 664
The Card named without being Seen 664
The Card told by the Opera Glass 664
The Four Kings 666
Audacity 666
The Card found at the Second Guess 666
The Card found under the Hat 667
To call the Cards out of the Pack 667
Heads and Tails 667
The Surprise 668
The Revolution 668
The Slipped Card 668
The Nailed Card 668
To ascertain the Number of Points on three Unseen
Cards 669
To tell the Numbers on two Unseen Cards 669
The Pairs repaired 669
The Queen digging for Diamonds 670
The Triple Deal 670
The Quadruple Deal 671
Tricks with Cards that require Apparatus 671
The Cards in the Vase 671
The Metamorphosis 672
To change a Card in a Person’s Hand 673
CRYPTOGRAPHY 674
THE DEAF AND DUMB ALPHABET 682
The Alphabet 682
The Numbers 685
DOMINOES 685
The ordinary Boy’s Game 686
All Fives 687
The Matadore Game 687
All Threes 687
Tidley-Wink 688
The Fortress 688
Whist Dominoes 688
DRAUGHTS 689
How to play the Game 690
The Moves 690
Laws of the Game 690
Games for Practice 691
Game I. 691
Game II. 692
FIREWORKS 693
Gunpowder 693
How to make Touch-paper 694
Cases for Squibs, Flower-pots, Rockets, Roman
Candles, &c. 694
To choke the Cases 694
Composition for Squibs, &c. 694
How to fill the Cases 695
To make Crackers 695
Roman Candles and Stars 695
Rockets 696
Rains 696
Catherine Wheels 696
Various Coloured Fires 696
Crimson Fire 696
Blue „ 697
Green „ 697
Purple „ 697
White „ 697
Spur „ 697
Blue Lights 697
Port or Wild Fires 697
Slow Fire for Wheels 697
Dead Fire for Wheels 697
Cautions 697
To make an Illuminated Spiral Wheel 698
The Grand Volute 698
A brilliant Yew-tree 699
GARDENING 700
On Laying out a Small Garden 702
Planting the Ground with Trees, Flowers, &c. 703
The Noblest Kind of Gardening for Boys 703
The Boy’s Flower Garden 710
„ „ Fruit Garden 717
Cropping the Ground 719
Digging 719
Hoeing 720
Raking 720
Weeding 720
Sowing Seeds 721
Transplanting 721
Watering 722
Various Modes of Propagation 723
Layers 723
Pipings 723
Grafting 724
Tongue-Grafting 724
Budding 725
Inarching 725
Grafting Clay 726
Pruning 726
Training 726
Insects and Depredators 727
Protection from Frost 727
The Young Gardener’s Calendar for the Work to be
done in all the Months of the Year 728
January 728
February 729
March 729
April 729
May 730
June 730
July 731
August 731
September 731
October 732
November 732
December 732
MIMICRY AND VENTRILOQUISM 733
PUZZLES 736
The Divided Garden 736
The Vertical Line Puzzle 736
The Cardboard Puzzle 736
The Button Puzzle 736
The Circle Puzzle 737
The Cross Puzzle 737
Three-Square Puzzle 737
Cylinder Puzzle 737
The Nuns 738
The Dog Puzzle 738
Cutting out a Cross 738
Another Cross Puzzle 738
The Fountain Puzzle 738
The Cabinet-maker’s Puzzle 739
The String and Balls Puzzle 739
The Double-headed Puzzle 739
The Row of Halfpence 740
Typographical Advice 740
The Landlord made to Pay 740
Father and Son 740
ANSWERS TO PUZZLES 741
The Divided Garden 741
Vertical Line Puzzle 741
Cut Card Puzzle 741
Button Puzzle 741
Circle Puzzle 741
The Cross Puzzle 742
Three-Square Puzzle 742
Cylinder Puzzle 742
The Nuns’ Puzzle 742
The Dog’s Puzzle 742
Cutting out a Cross Puzzle 743
Another Cross Puzzle 743
The Fountain Puzzle 743
The Cabinet-maker’s Puzzle 743
String and Balls Puzzle 744
Double-Headed Puzzle 744
The Row of Halfpence 744
Typographical Puzzle 745
The Landlord made to Pay 745
Father and Son 745
SHOWS 746
Punch and Judy 746
Fantoccini 749
The Sailor 751
The Juggler 751
The Headless Man 751
The Milkwoman 751
POSTAGE-STAMP COLLECTING, OR PHILATELY 752
TINSELLING 768
THE AMERICAN GAME OF BASE-BALL 769
American Billiards 797
La Crosse 812
PART I.
EASY GAMES WITHOUT TOYS.
OUTDOOR.
[Illustration]
HOP, STEP AND JUMP.
Make a mark on the ground at a place called the “starting point.” At ten
yards’ distance from this make another, called the “spring.” Then let
the players arrange themselves at the starting point, and in succession
run to the second mark called the spring. From the spring make first a
_hop_ on one leg, from this make a long _step_, and from the step a long
_jump_. Those who go over the greatest space of ground are of course the
victors.
HOPPING ON THE BOTTLE.
Various games are in vogue among boys, in which hopping on one foot is
the principal object. Among these is one which not only assists in
strengthening the limbs, but also teaches the performers the useful art
of balancing themselves upon a movable substance. A wooden bottle, a
round wooden log, or something of that description, is laid upon the
ground, a mark is made at a certain distance, and the players have to
hop from the mark upon the bottle, and retain their possession while
they count a number agreed upon. In the olden times of Greece, this was
considered an exercise of sufficient importance to give it a place at
the public games. The performer in this case had to hop upon inflated
leather bags, carefully greased, and of course, by their inevitable
upsettings and floundering, caused great amusement to the spectators.
The sports took place on the Dionysia, or festivals of Bacchus, when the
vintage was gathered in, and the victor was appropriately rewarded with
a cask of wine. The rustics in many parts of England introduce a
modification of this game in their rural festivals. Two men place
themselves opposite to each other, the right knee of each being
supported on a wooden cylinder, while the remaining foot is totally
unsupported. When they are fairly balanced, they grasp each other by the
shoulders, and endeavour to cast their opponent to the ground, while
themselves retain their position upon their fickle support.
HOP-SCOTCH.
This is a game played by hopping on one foot and kicking an oyster-shell
or piece of tile from one compartment to the other, without halting the
lifted foot, except in one case, to the ground, and without suffering
the shell or tile to rest on any of the lines. A diagram is first drawn
similar to the subjoined. It consists of twelve compartments, each being
numbered, and at its further end the pleasant and inviting picture of a
plum pudding with knife and fork therein stuck. In commencing the game,
the players take their stand at the place marked by a star, and “quoit”
for innings. The object is, that of doing what every boy is supposed to
like above all things to do, _i. e._ “pitch into the pudding,” and he
who can do this, and go nearest to the plum in the centre, plays first.
[Illustration]
_Method of Playing._--The winner begins by throwing his shell into No.
1; he then hops into the space, and kicks the tile out to the star *; he
next throws the tile into No. 2, kicks it from No. 2 to No. 1, and
thence out. He then throws it into No. 3, kicks it from 3 to 2, from 2
to 1, and out. He next throws it into No. 4, kicks it from 4 to 3, from
3 to 2, from 2 to 1, and out; and so he proceeds till he has passed the
cross and comes to No. 7, when he is permitted to rest himself, by
standing with one foot in No. 6 and the other in No. 7; but he must
resume hopping before he kicks the tile home. He then passes through the
beds 8, 9, 10 and 11, as he did those of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, &c., and so on,
till he gets to plum pudding, when he may rest, and placing his tile on
the plum, he is required, while standing on one foot, to kick it with
such force as to send it through all the other beds to * at one kick. If
one player throws his tile into the wrong compartment, or when he is
kicking it out, he loses his innings, as he does also if the tile or his
foot at any time rests on a line, or if he kicks his tile out of the
diagram.
FRENCH AND ENGLISH.
This is an old Greek game, and, like very many simple boys’ games, has
retained its popularity to the present day. Its Greek name was rather a
jaw-cracking one, but may be literally translated by “Pully-haully.” It
consists of two parties of boys, who are chosen on different sides by
lots. One party takes hold of one end of a strong rope, and the other
party of the other end. A mark being made midway between the parties,
each strives to pull the other over it, and those who are so pulled
over, lose the game.
In this game, two leaders should be appointed, who must calculate the
powers of their own side, and concert plans accordingly. The leader of
either side should have a code of signals, in order to communicate with
his own friends, that he may direct them when to stop, when to slacken,
or when to pull hard. So important is the leader’s office, that a side
with a good leader will always vanquish a much superior force which has
no commander to guide it. For example, when all the boys are pulling
furiously at the rope, the leader of one side sees that his opponents
are leaning back too much, depending on their weight more than on their
strength. He immediately gives the signal to slacken, when down go half
the enemy on their backs, and are run away with merrily by the
successful party, who drag them over the mark with the greatest ease. Or
if the enemy begins to be wearied with hard pulling, an unanimous tug
will often bring them upright, while they are off their guard, and once
moved, the victory is easily gained. We have seen, assisted, and led
this game hundreds of times, and never failed to find it productive of
very great amusement. No knots are to be permitted on the rope, nor is
the game to be considered as won, unless the entire side has been
dragged over the line.
DRAWING THE OVEN.
This is a game not very dissimilar to the preceding, but not so much to
be recommended, as the clothes are very apt to be torn, and if the
players engage too roughly, the wrists are not unfrequently injured. The
method of playing the game is as follows:--Several boys seat themselves
in a row, clasping each other round the waist, thus fantastically
representing a batch of loaves. Two other players then approach,
representing the baker’s men, who have to detach the players from each
other’s hold. To attain this object, they grasp the wrists of the second
boy, and endeavour to pull him away from the boy in front of him. If
they succeed, they pass to the third, and so on until they have drawn
the entire batch. As sometimes an obstinate loaf sticks so tight to its
companion, that it is not torn away without bringing with it a handful
of jacket or other part of the clothing, the game ought not to be played
by any but little boys.
I SPY.
This is a capital game for the summer months. The players divide
themselves into two parties, one party remaining at a spot called
“Bounds,” and concealing their faces, while the other party goes out and
hides. After waiting for a few minutes, the home party shouts, “Coming,
coming, coming.” After a short pause they repeat the cry, and after
another short interval they again shout, “Coming.” If any out-player is
not concealed, he may cry, “No,” and a few minutes more are allowed. At
the last shout, the home players, leaving one to guard bounds, sally
forth in search of their hidden companions. Directly one of the seekers
sees one of the hiders, he shouts, “I Spy,” and runs home as fast as he
can, pursued by the one he has found, who tries to touch him before he
can reach bounds. If he succeeds, the one so touched is considered
taken, and stands aside. If the hiding party can touch three, or more,
if especially agreed upon, they get their hide over again. The object of
the hiders is to intercept the seekers, and prevent them from reaching
bounds without being touched. The worst player is left at the bounds, in
order to warn his companions, which he does by the word “Home,” as any
hider may touch any seeker.
PITCH-STONE.
This game is played by two boys, each of whom takes a smooth round
pebble. One player then throws his pebble about twenty feet before him,
and the next tries to strike it with his stone, each time of striking
counting as one. If the two pebbles are near enough for the player to
place one upon the other with his hand, he is at perfect liberty to do
so. It is easy enough to play at this game when the pebbles are at some
distance apart; but when they lie near each other, it is very difficult
to take a good aim, and yet send one’s own pebble beyond the reach of
the adversary’s aim. Two four-pound cannon balls are the best objects to
pitch, as they roll evenly, and do not split, as pebbles always do when
they get a hard knock.
DUCK-STONE.
This game may be played by any number of players. A large stone is
selected, and placed on a particular spot, and the players first “Pink
for Duck,” that is, they each throw their stones up to the mark, and the
one who is farthest from it becomes “Duck.” The Duck places his stone on
the other, while the rest of the players return to the bounds, and in
succession pitch their stones at his with the endeavour to knock it off.
If this is accomplished, Duck must immediately replace it, and the
throwers must pick up their stones and run to the bounds. As soon as
Duck has replaced his stone, he runs after any of the other players, and
if he can succeed in catching or merely touching any one of them, the
player so touched becomes Duck.
[Illustration]
PRISONER’S BASE, OR PRISON BARS.
This is a most delightful game, and is a very great favourite among boys
of all classes. It is commenced by choosing Captains, which is either
done by lot or by the “sweet voices” of the youths. If by lot, a number
of straws of different lengths are put in a bunch, and those who draw
from one end, the other being hidden, the two longest straws, are the
two “Captains;” each of which has the privilege of choosing his men: the
drawer of the longest of the two straws has the first choice. When this
has been arranged each Captain selects, alternately, a boy till the
whole are drawn out.
This method is, however, often attended with considerable inconvenience,
as it is not impossible that the lots may fall on the two worst players.
It is very much better to let the boys choose the two Captains, as the
two best players will then assuredly be elected, and most of the success
of the game depends on the Captains.
The leaders being thus chosen, the next point is to mark out the homes
and prisons. First, two semicircles are drawn, large enough to hold the
two parties, the distance between the semicircles being about twenty
paces. These are the “homes,” or “bounds.” Twenty paces in front of
these, two other semicircles, of a rather larger size, are marked out.
These are the prisons; the prison of each party being in a line with the
enemy’s home. These preliminaries being settled, the sides draw lots;
the side drawing the longest straw having to commence the game. The
Captain of side A orders out one of his own side, usually a poor player,
who is bound to run at least beyond the prisons before he returns.
Directly he has started, the Captain of side B sends out one of his men
to pursue, and, if possible, to touch him before he can regain his own
home. If this is accomplished, the successful runner is permitted to
return home scathless, while the vanquished party must go to the prison
belonging to his side; from which he cannot stir, until some one from
his own side releases him, by touching him in spite of the enemy. This
is not an easy task; as, in order to reach the prison, the player must
cross the enemy’s home. It is allowable for the prisoner to stretch his
hand as far towards his rescuer as possible, but he must keep some part
of his body within the bounds; and if several prisoners are taken, it is
sufficient for one to remain within the prison, while the rest, by
joining hands, make a chain towards the boy who is trying to release
them. When this is accomplished, both the prisoner and his rescuer
return home, no one being able to touch them until they have reached
their home and again started off. But the game is not only restricted to
the two originally sent out. Directly Captain A sees his man pressed by
his opponent, he sends out a third, who is in his turn pursued by
another from side B; each being able to touch any who have preceded, but
none who have left their home after him. The game soon becomes spirited;
prisoners are made and released, the two Captains watching the game, and
rarely exposing themselves, except in cases of emergency, but directing
the whole proceedings. The game is considered won, when one party has
succeeded in imprisoning the whole of the other side. Much depends upon
the Captains, who sometimes, by a bold dash, rescue the most important
of their prisoners, and thereby turn the fate of the battle; or, when
the attention of the opposite side is occupied by some hardly-contested
struggle, send some insignificant player to the rescue; who walks
quietly up to the prison, and unsuspectedly lets out the prisoners one
by one. No player is permitted to touch more than one person until he
has returned to his home; when he can sally out again armed with fresh
strength, like Antæus of old, who could not be conquered at wrestling,
because whenever he touched the ground his strength was renewed by his
mother Earth.
FOX.
This game was extensively played at the school where our boyhood was
passed; but we never saw it elsewhere. It used to afford us such
amusement in the long summer evenings, that it deserves a place in this
collection of sports. One player is termed Fox, and is furnished with a
den, where none of the players may molest him. The other players arm
themselves with twisted or knotted handkerchiefs, (one end to be tied in
knots of almost incredible hardness,) and range themselves round the den
waiting for the appearance of the Fox. He being also armed with a
knotted handkerchief, hops out of his den. When he is fairly out, the
other players attack him with their handkerchiefs, while he endeavours
to strike one of them without putting down his other foot. If he does so
he has to run back as fast as he can, without the power of striking the
other players, who baste him the whole way. If, however, he succeeds in
striking one without losing his balance, the one so struck becomes Fox;
and, as he has both feet down, is accordingly basted to his den. The den
is useful as a resting-place for the Fox, who is often sorely wearied by
futile attempts to catch his foes.
[Illustration]
BASTE THE BEAR.
This is a funny game. The players generally draw lots for the first
Bear, who selects his own Keeper. The Bear kneels on the ground, and his
Keeper holds him with a rope about four feet long, within a circle of
about five feet in diameter. The other players tie knots in their
handkerchiefs, and begin to strike or baste the Bear, by running close
to, or into the ring. Should the Keeper touch any of the boys while they
are at this sport without dragging the Bear out of the ring, or should
the Bear catch hold of any player’s leg, so as to hold him fast, the
player so touched or caught becomes Bear. The second Bear may select his
Keeper as before, and the play continues.
[Illustration: AN INSTRUMENT OF TORTURE.]
LEAP-FROG.
This is an excellent game of agility, and very simple. It consists of
any number of players; but from six to eight is the most convenient
number. Having by agreement or lots determined who shall give the first
“back,” one player so selected places himself in position, with his head
inclined and his shoulders elevated, and his hands resting on his knees,
at ten yards’ distance from the other players; one of whom immediately
runs and leaps over him,--having made his leap, he sets a back at the
same distance forward from the boy over whom he has just leaped. The
third boy leaps over the first and second boy, and sets a “back” beyond
the second; and the fourth boy leaps over the first, second, and third,
and sets a “back” beyond the third, and so on till the players are out.
The game may continue for any length of time, and generally lasts till
the players are tired; but the proper rule should be, that all who do
not go clean over should be out. Those who “make backs” should stand
perfectly stiff and firm; and those who “make leaps” should not rest in
their flight heavily upon the shoulders of their playmates, so as to
throw them down, which is not fair play.
FLY THE GARTER.
Chalk or make a line, or, as it is usually termed, “a garter,” on the
ground; on this line one of the players must place himself and bend down
as in leap-frog, while the other players in rotation leap over him, the
last one as he flies over calling out “Foot it.” If he should fail in
giving this notice, he is out, and must take the other boy’s place at
the garter. The boy, immediately the word is given, rises, and places
his right heel close to the middle of the left foot; he next moves the
left forwards and places that heel close up to the toes of his right
foot, and bends down as before. This movement is called a “step,” and is
repeated three times. The other players should fly from the garter each
time a step is made, and the last player must invariably call out “Foot
it” as he leaps over. After making the three “steps,” the player giving
the back takes a short run, and, _from_ the spot where he made his last
step to, jumps as far forwards as he possibly can, and bends down again;
the others jump from the garter and then fly over. Should any of the
players be unable to jump easily over the one giving the back, but
rather slide down upon, or ride on him, the player so failing must take
the other’s place at the garter, and the game be begun again; if, also,
through the impetus acquired in taking the jump from the garter, a
player should happen to place his hands on the back of the player
bending down, and then withdraw them in order to take the spring over,
he is out, and must take his turn at the garter. It is usual, in some
places, for the boy giving the back to take a hop, step, and a jump
after he has footed it three times, the other players doing the same,
and then flying over.
SPANISH FLY.
This game is capable of being varied to any extent by an ingenious boy,
but it is generally played in the following way:--One boy, selected by
chance, sets a back, as in “fly the garter,” and another is chosen
leader. The game is commenced by the leader leaping over the one who
gives the back, and the other players follow in succession; the leader
then leaps back, and the others follow; then they all go over in a cross
direction, and return, making, in all, four different ways. The leader
then takes his cap in both hands, and leaves it on the boy’s back while
he is “overing,” and his followers perform the same trick; in returning,
the last man takes the lead, and removes his cap without disturbing the
others, and each boy does the same: this trick is repeated in a cross
direction. The next trick is throwing up the cap just before overing,
and catching it before it falls; the next, reversing the cap on the
head, and so balancing it while overing, without ever touching it with
the hands; both tricks must be performed while leaping the four
different ways. The leader, with his cap still balanced, now overs, and
allows his cap to drop on the opposite side; the others do likewise, but
they must be careful not to let their caps touch the others, nor to let
their feet touch any of the caps in alighting; the leader now stoops
down, picks up his cap with his teeth, and throws it over his head and
the boy’s back; he then leaps after his cap, but avoids touching it with
his feet. The other players follow him as before. The next trick is
“knuckling,”--that is to say, overing with the hands clenched; the next,
“slapping,” which is performed by placing one hand on the boy’s back,
and hitting him with the other, while overing; the last, “spurring,” or
touching him up with the heel. All these tricks must be performed in the
four different directions, and any boy failing to do them properly goes
down, and the game begins afresh.
TOUCH.
This is a brisk game, and may be played by any number of boys. One of
the players being chosen as Touch, it is his business to run about in
all directions after the other players, till he can touch one, who
immediately becomes Touch in his turn. Sometimes when the game is played
it is held as a law that Touch shall have no power over those boys who
can touch iron and wood. The players then, when out of breath, rush to
the nearest iron or wood they can find, to render themselves secure.
Cross-touch is sometimes played, in which, whenever another player runs
between Touch and the pursued, Touch must immediately leave the one he
is after to follow him. But this rather confuses, and spoils the game.
TOUCH-WOOD AND TOUCH-IRON.
These games are founded on the above. When the boys pursued by Touch can
touch either wood or iron they are safe, the rule being that he must
touch them as they run from one piece of wood or iron to another.
BUCK, BUCK, HOW MANY HORNS DO I HOLD UP?
This is a very good game for three boys. The first is called the Buck,
the second the Frog, and the third the Umpire. The boy who plays the
Buck gives a back with his head down, and rests his hands on some wall
or paling in front of him. The Frog now leaps on his back, and the
Umpire stands by his side: the Frog now holds up one, two, three, five,
or any number of fingers, and cries, “Buck! Buck! how many horns do I
hold up?” The Buck then endeavours to guess the right number; if he
succeeds, the Frog then becomes Buck, and in turn jumps on his back. The
Umpire determines whether Buck has guessed the numbers rightly or not.
In some places it is the custom to blindfold the Buck, in order to
prevent him seeing. This plan, however, is scarcely necessary.
WARNING.
This is an excellent game for cold weather. It may be played by any
number of boys. In playing it “loose bounds” are made near a wall or
fence, about four feet wide and twelve long. One of the boys is
selected, who is called the Cock, who takes his place within the bounds;
the other players are called the Chickens, who distribute themselves in
various parts of the playground. The Cock now clasps his hands together,
and cries, “Warning once, warning twice, a bushel of wheat, and a bushel
of rye, when the Cock crows out jump I.” He then, keeping his hands
still clasped before him, runs after the other players; when he touches
one, he and the player so touched immediately make for the bounds; the
other players immediately try to capture them before they get there; if
they succeed, they are privileged to get upon their backs and ride them
home. The Cock and his Chick now come out of the bounds hand-in-hand,
and try to touch some other of the players; the moment they do this they
break hands, and they and the player now touched run to the bounds as
before, while the other players try to overtake them, so as to secure
the ride. The three now come from the bounds in the same manner, capture
or touch a boy, and return. If, while trying to touch the other boys,
the players when sallying from the grounds break hands before they touch
any one, they may immediately be ridden, if they can be caught before
they reach the bounds. Sometimes when three players have been touched
the Cock is allowed to join the out party, but this is of no advantage
in playing the game.
FOLLOW MY LEADER.
This may be played by any number of boys: one being selected as the
Leader, and the others are the Followers. The Followers arrange
themselves in a line behind the Leader, who immediately begins to
progress, and the others are bound to follow him. The fun of this sport
is in the Leader carrying his Followers into “uncouth places,” over
various “obstacles,” such as hedges, stiles, gate-posts, &c., through
“extraordinary difficulties,” as ditches and quagmires,--every player
being expected to perform his feats of agility; and those who fail are
obliged to go last, and bear the emphatic name of the “Ass.” The game
lasts till the Leader gives up, or the boys are all tired out.
THE FUGLEMAN.
This is a game something like the above. It consists of the Fugleman and
his Squad. The Fugleman places himself in a central spot, and arranges
his Squad before him in a line. He then commences with various odd
gestures, which all the Squad are bound to imitate. He moves his head,
arms, legs, hands, feet, in various directions, sometimes sneezes,
coughs, weeps, laughs, and bellows, all of which the Squad are to
imitate. Sometimes this is a most amusing scene, and provokes great
laughter. Those who are observed to laugh, however, are immediately
ordered to stand out of the line, and when half the number of players
are so put out, the others are allowed to ride them three times round
the playground, while the Fugleman with a knotted handkerchief
accelerates their motions.
HARE AND HOUNDS.
[Illustration]
This is perhaps the very best game that can be introduced into a school.
The principle of it is very simple, that one boy represents the Hare and
runs away, while the others represent the Hounds and pursue him. The
proper management of the game, however, requires some skill. When we
were at school in the north, this game was extensively played; and in
more recent times, when we ourselves were masters instead of scholars,
we reduced the game to a complete system. The first thing to be done is
to choose a Hare, or if the chase is to be a long one, two Hares are
required. The Hare should not be the best runner, but should be daring,
and at the same time prudent, or he may trespass into forbidden lands,
and thereby cause great mischief. A Huntsman and Whipper-in are then
chosen. The Huntsman should be the best player, and the Whipper-in
second best. Things having advanced so far, the whole party sally forth.
The Hare is furnished with a large bag of white paper torn into small
squares, which he scatters on the ground as he goes. An arrangement is
made that the Hare shall not cross his path, nor return home until a
certain time; in either of which cases he is considered caught. The
Hounds also are bound to follow the track or “scent” implicitly, and not
to make short cuts if they see the Hare. The Hare then starts, and has
about seven minutes’ grace, at the expiration of which time the Huntsman
blows a horn with which he is furnished, and sets off, the Hounds
keeping nearly in Indian file, the Whipper-in bringing up the rear. The
Huntsman is also furnished with a white flag, the Whipper-in with a red
one, the staves being pointed and shod with metal. Off they go merrily
enough, until at last the Huntsman loses the scent. He immediately
shouts “Lost!” on which the Whipper-in sticks his flag in the ground
where the scent was last seen, and the entire line walks or runs round
it in a circle, within which they are tolerably sure to find the track.
The Huntsman in the meanwhile has stuck his flag in the ground, and
examines the country to see in what direction the Hare is likely to have
gone. When the track is found, the player who discovers it shouts Tally
ho! the Huntsman takes up his flag, and ascertains whether it is really
the track or not. If so, he blows his horn again, the Hounds form in
line between the two flags, and off they go again. It is incredible how
useful the two flags are. Many a Hare has been lost because the Hounds
forgot where the last track was seen, and wasted time in searching for
it again. Moreover, they seem to encourage the players wonderfully. We
used often to make our chases fourteen or fifteen miles in length; but
before such an undertaking is commenced, it is necessary to prepare by a
series of shorter chases, which should however be given in an opposite
direction to the course fixed upon for the grand chase, as otherwise the
tracks are apt to get mixed, and the Hounds are thrown out. The Hare
should always carefully survey his intended course a day or two
previously, and then he will avoid getting himself into quagmires, or
imprisoned in the bend of a river. A pocket compass is a most useful
auxiliary, and prevents all chance of losing the way, a misfortune which
is not at all unlikely to happen upon the Wiltshire downs or among the
Derbyshire hills.
STEEPLE CHASE.
This is a trial of speed and agility, and may be played by any number of
boys. It consists in the boys agreeing upon some distant object for a
mark, such as a conspicuous tree, or house, or steeple. The players then
start off in whatever direction they please, each one being at liberty
to choose his own course. In a long run of a mile or so it very often
happens that hedges, ditches, and other obstructions, have to be got
over, which adds great interest to the play, and the best climbers and
jumpers are the most likely to come in victors. He who comes in first to
the appointed object is called the King, the second the Duke, the third
the Marquis, the fourth the Viscount, the fifth the Earl, the sixth the
Knight. The last receives the dignified appellation of the Snail, and
the last but one the Tortoise.
At Oxford there were in our undergraduate days two clubs for the purpose
of Steeple-chasing, one named the Kangaroo Club, and the other the
Charitable Grinders, whose performances over hedges and ditches were
really astonishing. There was also a club which kept a set of beagles,
and used to hunt a red herring with intense perseverance.
DUCK AND DRAKE.
This is a very simple sport, but necessarily restricted to those spots
where there is a river, or a pond of some magnitude. It consists in
throwing oyster-shells, flat stones, or broken tiles along the water, so
as to make them hop as often as possible. One hop is called Dick, the
second Duck, and the third Drake. The sea-shore is a capital place for
this sport, as, if the player can only succeed in making the stone touch
the top of a wave, it is tolerably certain to make a succession of hops
from wave to wave. If a rifle-bullet is shot along the water, it will go
a great distance, making very long hops, and splashing up the water at
every bound. In war, this method of firing at an enemy that lies low is
extensively made use of, and is called “ricochet practice.” It is also
much used in naval warfare.
SIMON SAYS.
This, if well managed, is a very comical game. The players are arranged
as in Fugleman, the player who enacts Simon standing in front. He and
all the other players clench their fists, keeping the thumb pointed
upwards. No player is to obey his commands unless prefaced with the
words, “Simon says.” Simon is himself subjected to the same rules. The
game commences by Simon commanding,--“Simon says, _turn down_:” on which
he turns his thumbs downwards, followed by the other players. He then
says, “Simon says, _turn up_,” and brings his hands back again. When he
has done so several times, and thinks that the players are off their
guard, he merely gives the word, “Turn up,” or “Turn down,” without
moving his hands. Some one, if not all, is sure to obey the command, and
is subject to a forfeit. Simon is also subject to a forfeit, if he tells
his companions to turn down while the thumbs are already down, or _vice
versâ_. With a sharp player enacting Simon, the game is very spirited.
KING OF THE CASTLE.
This is a very good game, and to play it properly there must be in the
centre of the playground a small hill or hillock. One player, selected
by choice or lot, ascends this hill, and is called the King; and the
object of the other players is to pull or push him from his elevation,
while he uses his endeavours to keep his “pride of place.” Fair pulls
and fair pushes are only allowed at this game; the players must not take
hold of any part of the clothes of the King, and must confine their
grasps to the hand, the leg, or the arm. If a player violates these
rules, he is to sit down upon the ground, and is called “Dummy.” The
player who succeeds in dethroning the King, takes his place, and is
subjected to the like attacks.
BATTLE FOR THE BANNER.
This game is to be played from a mound, the same as the above, and it
may consist of any number of players. Each party selects a Captain, and
having done this, divide themselves into Attackers and Defenders. The
defending party provide themselves with a small flag, which is fixed on
a staff on the top of the mound, and then arrange themselves on its side
and at its base, so as to defend it from the attacks of their opponents,
who advance towards the hillock, and endeavour to throw down those that
oppose them. Those that are so thrown on either side, are called “dead
men,” and must lie quiet till the game is finished, which is concluded
either when all the attacking party are dead, or the banner is carried
off by one of them. The player who carries off the banner is called the
Knight, and is chosen Captain for the next game.
[Illustration]
SNOW-BALLS.
Every boy has played at snow-balls, from the time that his little
fingers were first able to grasp and mould a handful of snow. Elderly
gentlemen know to their cost how apt the youthful friend is to hurl very
hard snow-balls, which appear to pick out the tenderest parts of his
person, generally contriving to lodge just at the juncture of the chin
and the comforter, or coming with a deafening squash in the very centre
of his ear. Even the dread policeman does not always escape; and when he
turns round, indignant at the temporary loss of his shiny hat, he cannot
recognise his assailant in the boy who is calmly whistling the last new
nigger-song, as he saunters along, with both his hands in his pockets.
The prudent schoolmaster will also not venture too near the playground,
unless he has provided himself with an umbrella. It is rather a
remarkable fact, that whenever a Grammar-school and a National-school
are within a reasonable distance of each other, they are always at
deadly feud. So it was at the school where our youthful days were
passed. One winter’s morning, just after school had opened, the door was
flung violently open, and a party of National-school boys hurled a
volley of snow-balls at the head-master. He, after the door had been
secured, remarked in a particularly mild voice,--“Now, boys, if _I_ had
been at school, and _my_ schoolmaster had been assaulted by
National-school boys, _I_ should have gone out and given them a
thrashing. Remember, I do not at all advise you to do so, but merely
mention the course that I should have adopted under such circumstances.
We will resume lessons at three.” So saying, he took off his gown, put
on his hat and gloves, and walked out to see the fun. Now, the prospect
of a morning’s holiday would have made us attack a force of twenty times
our number, but as they only out-numbered us threefold, we commenced a
pursuit without hesitation. After a sharp engagement, we drove them back
to their own schoolroom. The cause of their yielding was, that they
threw at random among us, whereas each of our balls was aimed at the
face of an opponent, and we very seldom missed. When they had reached
their school, they closed and barred their door; at which we made such a
battering, that their master, a large negro, rushed out upon us, vowing
vengeance, and flourishing a great cane. He was allowed to proceed a few
yards from the door, when one snow-ball took off his hat, and two more
lodged in his face. He immediately went to the right-about, and made for
the school, which he reached under an avalanche of snow. We pursued, but
he had succeeded in fastening the door, and we could not open it for
some time. When we did, the school was deserted; not a boy was to be
seen. There was no back entrance to account for their disappearance, and
we were completely puzzled. At last, when we had quieted down a little,
a murmuring was heard apparently below our feet, and on examination we
found that the entire school had taken shelter in the coal-cellar. We
made a dash at the door (a trap-door), and in spite of the showers of
coal that came from below, fastened and padlocked the door, carefully
throwing the key among a clump of fir-trees, where it was not likely to
be found. Having achieved this victory, we had a snow-ball match among
ourselves, and then returned to school. About five o’clock, in rushed
the black schoolmaster, who had only just been liberated by the
blacksmith, and who came to complain of our conduct. So far, however,
from obtaining any satisfaction, he was forced to apologise for the
conduct of his boys.
SNOW CASTLE.
The object of this game is, that a castle of snow is built, which is
attacked by one party and defended by the other. The method of building
the castle is as follows:--A square place is cleared in the snow, the
size of the projected castle. As many boys as possible then go to some
distance from the cleared square, and commence making snow-balls,
rolling them towards the castle. By the time that they have reached it,
each ball is large enough to form a foundation-stone. By continuing this
plan, the walls are built about five feet six inches high, a raised step
running round the interior, on which, the defenders stand while hurling
the balls against their opponents. In the centre are deposited
innumerable snow-balls, ready made; and a small boy is usually pressed
into the service, to make snow-balls as fast as they are wanted. If the
weather is very cold, some water splashed over the castle hardens and
strengthens it considerably. The architect of the castle must not forget
to leave space for a door.
[Illustration]
SNOW GIANT.
This is made in the same way as the snow castle, that is, by rolling
large snow-balls to the place where the giant is to be erected, and then
piled up and carved into form. He is not considered completed until two
coals are inserted for eyes, and until he is further decorated with a
pipe and an old hat. When he is quite finished, the juvenile sculptors
retire to a distance, and with snow-balls endeavour to knock down their
giant, with as much zest as they exhibited in building him. If a snow
giant is well made, he will last until the leaves are out, the sun
having but little power on so large a mass of hard snow. There is a
legend extant respecting the preservation of snow through the warmer
parts of the year. A certain Scotch laird had for a tenant a certain
farmer. The laird had been requested by influential personages to
transfer the farm to another man directly the lease was run out. The
farmer’s wife, hearing of this from some gossip of hers, went to her
landlord, and besought him to grant a renewal of the lease. When she
called, he was at dinner with a numerous party of friends, and replied
in a mocking tone, that the lease should be renewed when she brought him
a snow-ball in July. She immediately called upon the guests to bear
witness to the offer, and went home. In due time the winter came, and
with it the snow. One day, her husband, an excellent labourer, but not
over bright, asked her why she was wasting so much meal. At that time,
she had taken a large vessel of meal to a valley, and was pouring it
into the space between two great stones. Upon the meal she placed a
large quantity of snow, which she stamped down until it was hard. Upon
this she poured more meal, and placed upon the meal a layer of straw.
The whole affair was then thickly covered over with straw and reeds. To
her husband, who thought she had fairly lost her senses, she deigned no
reply, except that the meal would repay itself. So affairs went on until
July, when the good dame, hearing that her landlord had invited a large
party to dine with him, many of whom had been at the party when the
promise was made, proceeded to the store of snow, which she found about
half diminished. The remainder she kneaded hard, and put it in a
wheelbarrow, well covered with straw, which she rolled up to the laird’s
own house. When once there, she took out her snow-ball, and presenting
it to her landlord, before all his guests, demanded the renewal of her
lease. It may be satisfactory to know, that the laird, struck with her
ingenuity and perseverance, at once granted her request.
[Illustration]
JACK! JACK! SHOW A LIGHT!
This game can only be played in the dusk of evening, when all the
surrounding objects are lost in the deepening gloom. The players divide
into two parties, and toss up for innings, which being gained, the
winners start off to hide themselves, or get so far away that the others
cannot see them; the losers remaining at the home. One of the hiding
party is provided with a flint and steel, which, as soon as they are all
ready, he strikes together; the sparks emitted guide the seekers as to
what direction they must proceed in, and they must endeavour to capture
the others ere they reach home; if they cannot touch more than two of
the boys, the hiders resume their innings, and the game continues as
before. It is most usual, however, for the boys at the home to call out,
“Jack, Jack! show a light!” before the possessor of the flint and steel
does so. When one party is captured, the flint and steel must be given
up to the captors, that they may carry on the game as before.
JINGLING.
The jingling match is a common diversion at country wakes and fairs, and
is often played by schoolboys. The match should be played on a soft
grass-plot within a large circle, enclosed with ropes. The players
rarely exceed nine or ten. All of these, except one of the most active,
who is the “jingler,” have their eyes blindfolded with handkerchiefs.
The jingler holds a small bell in his hand, which he is obliged to keep
ringing incessantly so long as the play continues, which is commonly
about twenty minutes. The business of the jingler is to elude the
pursuit of his blindfolded companions, who follow him by the sound of
the bell in all directions, and sometimes oblige him to exert his utmost
abilities to effect his escape, which must be done within the boundaries
of the rope, for the laws of the sport forbid him to pass beyond it. If
he be caught in the time allotted for the continuance of the game, the
person who caught him wins the match; if, on the contrary, they are not
able to take him, he is proclaimed the winner.
[Illustration]
JUMP LITTLE NAG-TAIL!
In this game, six or eight players on each side is the best number. The
two leaders should toss up for choice of partners, and after selecting
them, toss again for innings. The loser must then place himself quite
upright, with his face to a wall, against which he rests his hands; and
one of his partners should next stoop down, and put his head against his
leader’s skirts, as shown in the annexed illustration; another partner
also bends, and places his head against the skirts of the second player,
and the rest of the partners must take their places in the same manner,
one behind the other: when thus arranged, they are called “nags.” One of
the winning party next takes a run, and placing his hands on the back of
the last player or “nag,” endeavours to spring on to the back of the
first, or at least to clear as many “nags” as he possibly can, in order
to allow room for those following him to leap on the backs of the other
“nags,” which they should do in succession, until they are all fairly
astride. If any of the “nags” sink under the weight, or in trying to
support themselves touch the ground either with their hands or knees, or
if the riders can keep their seats without touching the ground, whilst
their leader counts twenty, or repeats the words, “Jump little nag-tail
one, two, three!” three times, concluding with “off, off, off!” the
riders resume their innings, and begin again; on the contrary, should
there not be sufficient space for all to leap on, or they are unable to
keep their seats on the backs of the “nags,” they lose their innings,
and become “nags” in their turn. The “nags” must, while in the line,
hold either by the trousers of the player before them, or else lean
their hands on their knees, or cross their arms on their breasts. Each
rider must call out “Warning” before he leaps on the back of one of the
“nags.”
JUMPING ROPE.
Two players swing round a long rope, and when the revolutions become
tolerably regular, one, two, or even more boys step forwards, and
allowing it to swing over their heads, jump up as it descends, so as to
let it pass under their feet as in the case of the common skipping-rope.
The leapers must step forwards the moment the rope is at its highest, in
order to be ready to skip over as it swings close to the ground; and
they should be careful to keep the same time with the motions of the
boys holding the rope, so as not to be struck by it in its circuit.
Another game may be played with a long skipping-rope, by the player at
one end holding the rope in his outside hand, making a step or two
towards the other player, and with his help swinging it round, and then
skipping over it.
MY GRANDMOTHER’S CLOCK.
In this amusing sport the players join hands, and extend their arms to
their full extent. One of the outside players remains stationary, and
the others run round him as fast as they can, which proceeding is called
“winding the clock.” In this manner the straight line becomes a confused
spiral, and all the players get huddled together in a most laughable
manner. The winding of the clock usually leads to such disorder that it
is next to impossible to unwind it without breaking the line of boys.
RUSHING BASES.
Two bases having been made, one at each end of the playground, all the
players take up their position in one of them, except one, who is
generally elected by counting out; this player, who is called “the
King,” stations himself midway between the bases, and endeavours to
catch the others as they rush through his territory from base to base.
Should the king succeed in catching one of the trespassers, he raps him
on the head, saying, “I crown thee king!” and the one so crowned joins
the first king between the bases, and helps to catch the other players.
When the out-players considerably outnumber those remaining in the
bases, they may enter the bases, and, if they are strong enough, pull
the others out and crown them. In this lively game the rule is, that a
player must run to the opposite base if he puts both feet outside his
own. In some parts of England this game is known by the name of “King
Cæsar.”
[Illustration]
SEE-SAW.
For this amusement a stout plank should be laid across a felled tree or
a low wall; it must be very nicely balanced if the players are of the
same weight; but if one is heavier than the other, the end on which he
intends to sit should be the shortest. Two players then take their seats
on the plank, one at each end, whilst a third stations himself on the
middle of it, as represented in the illustration; the name of this
player is in some places Jack o’ both Sides, and in others Pudding. As
the players by turns make slight springs from their toes, they are each
alternately elevated and depressed, and it is the duty of Pudding to
assist these movements by bearing all his weight on the foot, on the
highest end of the plank, beyond the centre of the tree or wall on which
it rests. This will be best understood by referring to the illustration:
thus, A is the trunk of a tree; across it a plank is laid, on which two
players, B, C, take their seats; D is “Pudding;” it will be seen that
his left foot is beyond the centre of the trunk A, on the highest end of
the board, and consequently his weight being added to that of B will
depress that end of the plank, and the end on which C sits must, of
course, rise; Pudding then bears on his right foot, and C in turn
descends; and thus the game continues during pleasure, Pudding bearing
alternately on each side.
THREAD THE NEEDLE.
This game can be played by any number of boys, who must all join hands;
the game is begun by the outside players at each end of the line holding
the following dialogue: “How many miles to Babylon?” “Threescore and
ten.” “Can I get there by candle-light?” “Yes, and back again.” “Then
open the gates without more ado, and let the king and his men pass
through.” The player and the one next to him at the end of the line
opposite the last speaker then elevate their joined hands as high as
they can, to allow the speaker to run under, and the whole line follows
him, still holding hands. This should be done, if possible, without
breaking the line by letting the hands go, and is styled “threading the
needle.” When all the boys have passed through, the same conversation
begins again, excepting that the respondent in his turn becomes the
inquirer, and runs between the opposite players, the others following as
before.
TOM TIDDLER’S GROUND.
This is a very favourite game with little boys, and may be considered as
a modification of rushing bases. A large base is formed by drawing a
line across the playground, and one boy, called “Tom Tiddler,” takes his
station within it, while the others run in crying out, “Here am I on Tom
Tiddler’s ground, picking up gold and silver.” If Tom Tiddler can touch
any boy while he is on his ground, the boy so touched takes his place as
the guardian of the imaginary gold and silver.
TWO TO ONE.
Two to one is a very capital exercise with a common skipping-rope. It is
done by skipping in the usual way for a short time, and then increasing
the rapidity of your movements, and leaping tolerably high, endeavouring
to swing the rope round so quickly that you can pass it twice under your
feet while you are taking the leap; practise this till you are quite
proficient, and then try to pass the rope three times under your foot
instead of twice.
WALK, MOON, WALK!
This may be played by any number of boys, who all tie large knots in one
corner of their pocket-handkerchiefs, and then toss up to see who shall
be “Moon;” the loser is the one to whom the part falls, and he must be
blindfolded. “Moon” now stands with his legs stretched apart, while his
playmates go behind him in succession, and jerk their handkerchiefs
between his legs, as far as they can and in whatsoever direction they
please. When all the boys have done this, one of them cries “Walk, Moon,
walk!” which is a signal for the blindfolded player to walk forwards
until he treads upon one of the handkerchiefs, when in an instant the
other players pick up their knotted handkerchiefs, with which they
belabour the unlucky owner of the one trodden upon by Moon, as he runs
to a distant base and back; after which he becomes Moon, and the game
continues as before.
WANT A DAY’S WORK?
This is a capital game when well played, and the antics and grimaces of
boys who are mimics cause great merriment. It also gives a boy a good
notion of how mechanical labour is done, as no boy will ask for work
unless he understands something of the nature of the business he
solicits to be employed upon. The game begins thus, and it matters not
how many boys are engaged in it:--A line is drawn; within that line is
the shop, and when a bad workman is discharged he is pushed across the
line. The employer, or master, should be a very sharp lad. A boy comes
up, and the master asks him if he wants a day’s work; the boy says he
does. He is then asked what trade he is; if he says a tailor, a coat is
supposed to be given to him to make; if a shoemaker, a pair of shoes; if
a tinker, a saucepan to bottom; if a stonemason, a stone to cut or saw,
and every boy must imitate the actions of the tailor, shoemaker, &c.,
while at work, whatever the trades may be. Then the master looks over
the work, finds fault, gets in a rage, discharges the workman, and, if
he can, turns him out of the shop. But if in the struggle the boy turns
the employer out, he then becomes master, and the other is set to work.
So that, after a few good-natured trials of strength, each boy in turn
generally becomes master.
WILL YOU LIST?
This is a very old game, and in some places is called “playing at
soldiers;” the whole ceremony of enlisting is gone through, taking the
shilling and swearing to serve the Queen, &c. But there ought to be two
parties of boys, of not less than a dozen, with a commanding officer on
each side. After learning their exercise, such as shouldering arms and
marching, war breaks out; then one party is English and the other the
enemy. Their weapons ought to be bulrushes, or stout reeds, such as are
used in building, or something that will not do any injury when the
charge commences. The side that breaks or takes away the most weapons is
the conqueror, and much skill may be displayed in capturing the arms of
others, and retaining your own. If boys can get some old soldier to
drill them a few times, this may be made as good a game as they can play
at. We have too few military amusements in our English games.
WHOOP!
One player takes his station at a spot called the “home,” while the
others go to seek out various hiding-places in which to ensconce
themselves; when all are ready, one of them calls out “Whoop!” on which
the player at the “home” instantly goes in search of the hiders, and
endeavours to touch one of them as they run back to “home;” if he can do
so, the one caught takes his place at the “home,” while he joins the out
players.
[Illustration]
HIGH BARBAREE!
In this game sides are chosen, and one party remains “at home,” while
the other hides. When the hiders are all ready, one of them calls out
“High Barbaree!” upon which the seekers sally forth to look for them, as
in “Whoop!” If the seekers can succeed in touching a certain number of
the hiders before they can get to “home,” they take their turn at
hiding. The number to be caught must be agreed upon beforehand, and of
course depends upon the number of players. It is usual to mention this
number in the cry--thus, “High barbaree! _three_ caught he!”--“_four_
caught he!” and so forth. As a general rule, the number to be caught
should exceed half the number of the hiders.
BULL IN THE RING.
This active, merry, noisy game can be played by any number of boys, and
commences by their joining hands and forming a ring, having enclosed
some boy in the middle, who is the Bull. It is the Bull’s part to make a
rush, break through the ring, and escape, and the part of the boys who
form the ring to hold their hands so fast together that he cannot break
their hold. Before making a rush the Bull must cry “boo” to give
warning, so that the boys may grasp their hands more tightly. The whole
ring generally replies to the Bull’s challenge by crying “boo” all
together, and a pretty noise they make. When the Bull breaks through the
ring he is pursued until captured, and the boy who seizes him first is
“Bull” when they return. A good “Bull” will lead them a pretty dance,
clearing hedges and ditches; and if he gets back and touches some mark
agreed upon, near to where he broke through the ring, he is “Bull”
again.
COCK FIGHT.
This humorous sport must not be confounded with the cruel battles
between game-cocks once so popular in England. Two boys represent the
feathered combatants; each hops upon one leg, with his arms folded, and
bumps against the other, endeavouring to compel him to put both feet to
the ground. The boy who keeps up longest wins the game.
DROPPING THE HANDKERCHIEF.
A tolerably large ring should be formed by several boys standing in a
circle and joining hands; another boy, who stands out, when all are
ready walks round outside the ring, drops a handkerchief behind one of
the players, and immediately runs off; he is instantly followed by the
one behind whom he dropped the handkerchief, and who must track him in
all his windings in and out under the arms of the boys in the ring, who
elevate them for the purpose, and indeed wherever he runs to; should the
pursuer be able to touch the pursued, the former takes the handkerchief
in his turn, and the latter joins hands in the circle. If the boy who
dropped the handkerchief is enabled to elude his follower by passing
through and about the ring, he walks again round and drops the
handkerchief behind some other player.
EASY GAMES WITHOUT TOYS
INDOOR.
BLIND MAN’S BUFF
[Illustration: “SEEING’S BELIEVING.”]
Consists in one person having a handkerchief bound over his eyes, so as
to completely blind him, and thus blindfolded trying to chase the other
players, either by the sound of their footsteps, or their subdued
merriment, as they scramble away in all directions, endeavouring to
avoid being caught by him; when he can manage to catch one, the player
caught must in turn be blinded, and the game be begun again. In some
places it is customary for one of the players to inquire of Buff (before
the game begins), “How many horses has your father got?” to which
inquiry he responds, “Three.” “What colours are they?” “Black, white,
and grey.” The questioner then desires Buff to “turn round three times,
and catch whom you may,” which request he complies with, and then tries
to capture one of the players. It is often played by merely turning the
blindfold hero round and round without questioning him, and then
beginning. The handkerchief must be tied on fairly, so as to allow no
little holes for Buffy to see through. Blind Man’s Buff is a very
ancient pastime, having been known to the Grecian youths. In England it
formerly went By the name of Hoodman Blind, because it was customary to
blind Buff with his hood.
BOB-CHERRY.
Attach a cherry to a piece of string, and then fasten it to a door,
sufficiently high to compel the player to jump a little in order to
catch the cherry in his mouth. The cherry is then set swinging; and the
players, ranging themselves in line, jump at the cherry, one after the
other. This game is productive of much amusement, and may be kept up for
a long time.
BUFF.
In this game one of the players enters the room, armed with a poker,
with which he taps on the floor. “Where do you come from?” inquires one
of the company. “Alas! from poor Buff, who is full of grief.” “And what
did he say to you?” “He spoke thus,” is the reply--
“Buff said ‘Baff,’
And gave me this staff,
And bade me not laugh
Till I came to his house again.”
Having thus spoken, the messenger leaves the room. While he has been
delivering his speech, the company, however, endeavour to make him
laugh, by asking him any absurd questions that may present themselves to
their imagination. If they do not succeed in this, the emissary of the
great Buff delivers himself of a more lengthy address:--
“Buff says ‘Baff’ to all his men,
And I say ‘Baff’ to you again;
But he neither laughs nor smiles
In spite of all your cunning wiles,
But keeps his face with a very good grace,
And carries his staff to the very next place.”
CONCERT.
A noisier game than this could scarcely be desired by the most
boisterous of our young friends. The players having selected a
“conductor,” seat themselves round him in a circle. The conductor now
assigns to each a musical instrument, and shows how it is to be played.
When all are provided with their imaginary instruments, the conductor
orders them to tune, and by so doing, he gives each musician a capital
opportunity for making all sorts of discordant noises. When the
different instruments have been tuned, the conductor waves an unseen
_bâton_, and commences humming a lively air, in which he is accompanied
by the whole of his band, each player endeavouring to imitate with his
hands the different movements made in performing on a real instrument.
Every now and then the conductor pretends to play on a certain
instrument, and the player to whom it belongs must instantly alter his
movements for those of the conductor, and continue to wield the _bâton_
until the chief player abandons his instrument. Should a player omit to
take the conductor’s office at the proper time, he must pay a forfeit.
The fun of this game greatly depends upon the humour of the conductor,
and the adroitness with which he relinquishes his _bâton_ and takes up
the instruments of the other players.
CONSEQUENCES.
The first player writes an _adjective_ on the upper part of a slip of
paper, and then folds the slip so that the written word cannot be seen
by the next player, who writes the _name of a gentleman_, real or
imaginary, on the paper, which he passes to another after having folded
it over again. The third player writes an _adjective_; the fourth, _a
lady’s name_; the fifth, the _name of a place_; the sixth, _what the
gentleman said to the lady_; the seventh, the _lady’s reply_; the
eighth, the _consequences_; and the ninth, _what the world said about
the whole affair_. One of the players now unfolds the slip and reads
what has been written by the different persons engaged in the game,
adding a few words to unite the disjointed members of the little
narrative. As a specimen of the ludicrous result which arises from each
player’s ignorance of what has been written by his companions, we give
the following pathetic tale, in which the words and phrases printed in
italics represent those written on the slip of paper:--“The
_ill-favoured Peter Wilkins_ met the _adorable Jenny Jones_ in _the
silver mine of Potosi_. He said to her, ‘_Will you love me then as
now?_’ and she replied, ‘_When did I refuse you anything?_’ The
consequences were, _he drowned himself in the water-butt and she married
the baker_, and the world said, ‘_Served them right!_’” When there are
only three or four players, the slip of paper is to be passed round from
one to another until it is filled up. When the players are numerous,
three or four slips may be commenced simultaneously by different
persons.
CROSS QUESTIONS AND CROOKED ANSWERS.
This game will be best described by a short dialogue.
_Harry._--I am going to put a question in a whisper to Tom, who is
seated on my right hand, to which he will reply in the same tone. _He_
will then put a question to _his_ next neighbour, and receive his
answer. When the tour of the circle is made, I shall commence by stating
aloud the question put to me by my left-hand neighbour, answering it by
the reply received in answer to my own from Tom. He will then do the
same, giving my question and his next neighbour’s reply.--(Whispers to
Tom.) Of what use are the bellows?
_Tom._--To blow up the fire.--(To Charles) Of what use is a fire-engine?
_Charles._--To put out a fire.--(To John) Of what use is a plough?
_John._--To plough up the ground.--(To James) Of what use is a cap?
_James._--To cover the head.--(To Edward) Of what use is a shoe?
_Edward._--To protect your foot.--(To William) Of what use is a black
pin?
_William._--To fasten your collar with.--(To Harry) Of what use is a
barometer?
_Harry._--To tell the weather.--(Aloud) William has just asked me the
use of a barometer? Tom replies, “To blow up the fire!”
_Tom._--Harry has asked me the use of the bellows; and Charles replies,
“To put out the fire!”
_Charles._--Tom wishes to know the use of the fire-engine, and John
tells him, “To plough up the ground,” &c.
Any mistake is punished by a forfeit.
DUMB MOTIONS.
The players form sides, and decide who shall be _masters_ and who _men_.
The principal aim of the _men_ is to keep working as long as possible,
and to prevent the _masters_ taking their places. The men consult
secretly among themselves, and decide upon some trade or profession, the
practice of which may be certain movements of the arms, hands, or legs.
They now range themselves opposite the masters, and the foreman tells
them the first and last letters of the trade they are about to exercise;
as for example, C--r for carpenter, D--t for druggist, B--h for
blacksmith, and so on. The men now set to work and express in dumb
motions the various labours belonging to the craft they have chosen. Let
us suppose that they have selected the trade of blacksmith: one of the
players will appear to be blowing the forge bellows, another will seem
to be filing something in a vice, while others will be violently
exerting themselves by wielding imaginary sledge-hammers round an unseen
anvil. If any of the men speak at their work, or make use of
inappropriate gestures, the whole side is out. The masters are allowed
one guess each, and if none of them can hit upon the right trade, the
men tell them their occupation, and then fix upon another. If the
masters can guess the name of the trade, the men are out and become
masters. The men need not continue their labours until all the masters
have guessed, but may stop working, and demand their wages, after having
plied their craft for a reasonable time. When the name of a trade
consists of two words, the men must tell the first and last letter of
each word, as C--h B--r, for coach builder.
FAMILY COACH.
The chief player in this amusing game must possess the faculty of
inventing a long story, as well as a tolerably good memory. This player
gives to each of the others the name of some person or thing to be
mentioned in the story he is about to relate. For example, he may call
one “the coachman,” another “the whip,” another “the inn,” another the
“old gentleman,” another the “footman,” another “the luggage,” and so
on, until he has named all the persons engaged in the game. The
story-teller now takes his stand in the centre of the room, and
commences his narrative; in the course of which he takes care to mention
all the names given to the players. When the name of a player is
mentioned, he must immediately rise from his seat, turn round, and sit
down again, or else pay a forfeit for his inattention; and whenever “the
family coach” is named, _all_ the players must rise simultaneously. In
the following example of a story, the names given to the different
players are printed in italics: “An _old gentleman_, dreading an attack
of the gout, resolved to pay a visit to the hot wells of Bath; he
therefore summoned his _coachman_, and ordered him to prepare THE FAMILY
COACH (all the players rise, turn round, and sit down again). The
_coachman_, not liking the prospect of so long a journey, tried to
persuade the _old gentleman_ that THE FAMILY COACH was out of repair,
that the _leader_ was almost blind, and that he (the _coachman_) could
not drive without a new _whip_. The _old gentleman_ stormed and swore
upon hearing these paltry excuses, and ordered the _coachman_ out of the
room, while the _little dog_ sprang from under his master’s chair and
flew at the calves of the offender, who was forced to make a precipitate
exit. Early the next morning, THE FAMILY COACH belonging to the _old
gentleman_ stopped at an _inn_ on the Bath road, much to the surprise of
the _landlord_, who had never seen such a lumbering conveyance before.
THE FAMILY COACH contained the _old gentleman_, the _old lady_ (his
wife), and the _little dog_ that had made such a furious attack on the
poor _coachman’s_ legs. The _landlord_ called the _landlady_, who came
bustling out of the _inn_ to welcome the _old gentleman_ and _old lady_.
The _footman_ jumped down from behind THE FAMILY COACH, and helped the
_old gentleman_ and the _old lady_ to alight, while the _boots_ and
_chambermaid_ belonging to the _inn_ busied themselves with the
_luggage_. The _little dog_ trotted after the _old lady_, but just as it
was going into the _inn_, the _coachman_ gave it a cut with his _whip_.
The _little dog_ howled, upon which the _old gentleman_ turned round,
and seeing the _coachman_ with his _whip_ raised, he seized him by the
throat. The _footman_ came to the assistance of his friend the
_coachman_, and the _ostler_ belonging to the _inn_ took the side of the
_old gentleman_. The _landlord_, _landlady_, _chambermaid_, _boots_,
_cook_, _stable-boy_, _barmaid_, and all the other inmates of the _inn_,
rushed into the road to see what was the matter, and their cries, joined
to the yells of the _little dog_ and the screams of the _old lady_, so
frightened the _leader_, the _white horse_, and the _brown mare_, that
they ran away with THE FAMILY COACH.” Of course this tale might have
been continued to any length, but the specimen we have given will be
sufficient to give the story-teller some idea of what is expected from
him to keep up the fun of the game.
FROG IN THE MIDDLE.
This is a highly amusing, though very simple game. One player seated on
the ground is surrounded by his comrades, who pull and buffet him till
he can catch one of them, when the person so caught takes his place, and
is buffeted in like manner. As the players sport round the Frog, they
usually cry, “Frog in the middle--can’t catch me!” but they frequently
find that this is vain boasting, as Froggy does catch them now and then.
THE FOUR ELEMENTS.
The party being seated in a circle, the player who has been chosen to
commence the game takes a knotted handkerchief, and throws it suddenly
into another’s lap, calling out at the same time either “Earth!”
“Water!” “Air!” or “Fire!” If “Earth” be called out, the player into
whose lap the handkerchief has fallen must name some _quadruped_ before
the other can count ten; if “Water!” he must name a _fish_; if “Air!” a
_bird_; and if “Fire!” he must remain silent. Should the player name a
wrong animal, or speak when he ought to be silent, he must pay a forfeit
and take a turn at throwing the handkerchief; but should he perform his
task properly, he must throw the handkerchief back to the first player.
Those who have never joined in this simple game can have no idea of the
absurd errors into which the different players fall when summoned
unawares to name a particular kind of animal.
HAND.
The game of Hand is of great antiquity, and is common to almost every
nation, whether savage or civilized. In many of the rural districts of
England this universal pastime is known by the name of “Coddem.” To play
at Hand, sides must be formed, and the players of each side must seat
themselves at a table opposite their antagonists. Chance decides which
of the sides shall first hide the _piece_; which may be any small object
that can be easily held in the closed hand of one of the players. One of
the fortunate players now exhibits the piece to his opponents; having
done which, he cries out, “Hands down!” at which signal he and his
comrades put their hands out of sight, and in the language of the game,
commence “working the piece,” which operation is performed by shifting
the piece from hand to hand, so as to deceive the opposite players as to
its whereabouts. When the piece has been properly worked, the chief
player calls out, “Hands up,” and he and all his comrades simultaneously
place their closed fists on the table. The top player on the opposite
side has now to fix upon the hand in which the piece is concealed. There
are two ways of guessing, either of which he may adopt; the first is to
point at once to the hand supposed to contain the piece, and cry out,
“Hand!” The second mode of guessing is to point to those hands which
appear to be empty, saying with each guess, “Take that hand away!” and
when most of the hands have been removed from the table, to fix upon the
most likely-looking one among those that remain. If the guesser can find
the piece without making a mistake, he claims it for his party, and is
entitled to guess again when the opposite side regains it; but if he
makes a mistake, either by ordering the hand that holds the piece to be
removed, or by “handing” an empty fist, his antagonists retain the
piece, and having concealed it, the second player attempts to discover
its whereabouts. From our description, the reader will probably regard
Hand as a mere frivolous game of chance; but we can assure him that
chance has little to do with the discovery of the piece. A good Hand
player watches the faces of his opponents while their hands are engaged
in working the piece under the table; he scrutinises the different
hands, and does not allow himself to be misled by any of the cunning
devices which the hiders employ to throw him off the right scent; again,
when he has the piece in his possession, he takes care not to let a
tightly-clenched fist, a guilty smile, or an anxious expression, betray
the fact to his wary antagonist.
HOT BOILED BEANS.
In this game, one of the players is sent out of the room, while the
others hide a handkerchief or any small article that can be easily
secreted. When the article has been concealed, the door is opened, and
the seeker is invited to enter in these words: “Hot boiled beans and
butter; walk in and find your supper.” The seeker now sets to work to
look for the hidden article. When he approaches the place of
concealment, his playmates must give him notice of it, by telling him
that he is “rather warm,” “very hot,” or, if he gets very near it, that
he “burns.” When he wanders away from the object of his search, he is
told that he is “cold;” and if he persists in his mistaken course, he is
informed that he “freezes.” Should the seeker succeed in finding the
hidden article, another player goes out of the room in his stead.
HOT COCKLES.
One player with his eyes bandaged lays his head on a chair, or in
another player’s lap, while the others strike him on his back with their
open hands. In this unenviable position he remains until he can guess
who strikes him, when the striker takes his place. The poet Gay
describes this pastime in the following lines:--
“As at Hot Cockles once I laid me down,
And felt the weighty hand of many a clown,
Buxoma gave a gentle tap, and I
Quick rose, and read soft mischief in her eye.”
HOW? WHERE? AND WHEN?
One of the players is sent out of the room, while the others fix upon a
subject, which may be anything to which the three questions, “How do you
like it?” “Where do you like it?” and “When do you like it?” will apply.
When the subject has been decided upon, the out-player is summoned. He
now puts the first question to the nearest player, who returns him a
puzzling answer; he then passes to the next, and repeats the same
question; then to the next, and so on, until he has made the round of
the room. If none of the answers enable him to guess the subject, he
tries each player with the second question, and if the answers to this
leave him still in the dark, he solicits a reply from each to the third
and last question. Should the player fail to guess the subject after
asking the three questions, he pays a forfeit and takes another turn
outside; but should he succeed in guessing it during his rounds, the
player last questioned must pay a forfeit, and go out of the room in his
place. The in-players should always endeavour to hit upon some word that
has two or three meanings for a subject, as such a word renders the
answers extremely confusing. For instance, if _Jack_ be the subject
decided on, one of the players may say, in answer to the first query,
that he likes it “fried,” referring to fish called the Jack; in answer
to the second, that he likes it “before the kitchen fire,” referring now
to a roasting-jack; and in answer to the third, that he likes it when he
is “dressing,” now regarding the subject as a boot-jack.
HUNT THE SLIPPER.
This old-fashioned pastime is so generally known that it is scarcely
necessary to describe it; however, as it forms one of the merriest
indoor sports for the long winter evenings, it would be absurd to omit
it in this work. Several boys seat themselves in a circle on the ground,
and another, taking his place inside the ring, gives a slipper to one of
them, by whom it is immediately and secretly handed to one of his
neighbours; it is now passed round from one sitter to another, with as
much dexterity as possible, so as to completely perplex the “hunter” (or
player standing in the middle) in his endeavours to “chase the slipper
by its sound,” and who must continue his search until successful. The
player in whose possession it is found must in his turn “hunt the
slipper,” whilst the former hunter joins the sitters.
HUNT THE RING.
A game almost similar to the former. A piece of tape, on which a ring is
fastened, is held by the players as they stand in a circle, with one in
the middle. The ring is passed from hand to hand, and the hunter’s
business is to find out in whose hand the ring is.
HUNT THE WHISTLE.
A boy who has never seen the game played is elected hunter; the others
seat themselves on the ground, as in Hunt the Slipper. The hunter,
having been shown the whistle, kneels in the centre of the circle, and
lays his head in the lap of one of the players until the whistle is
concealed. While he is in this posture, the whistle is to be secretly
attached to the back part of his jacket or coat, by means of a piece of
string and a bent pin. One of the players now blows the whistle and
drops it, and the hunter, being released, is told to find it; but this
is no easy task, as he carries the object of his search about his own
person. As the hunter kneels in the centre of the group, the different
players blow through the whistle and drop it, as the opportunities
occur. The puzzled hunter is sometimes fairly tired out before he
discovers the trick that is played upon him. We need scarcely say that
the whistle should be very small and light.
MAGIC MUSIC.
This is a very similar game to Hot Boiled Beans. One player having been
sent out of the room, the others arrange some simple task for him to
perform on his return. When this has been done, he is summoned by the
magic music, which is played by one of his comrades, either by tapping a
tea-tray with a key, or by rattling the poker and tongs together. The
boy who has been sent out of the room must perform his appointed task
under the guidance of the musician, who so regulates his performance on
the rude instruments that the music gets loud and noisy when the puzzled
player does what he ought not to do, and grows soft and quiet when he
does anything towards the performance of his task. To render this game
more intelligible, we will suppose the task to be the removal of a
certain chair from one room to another. The player having entered the
room is saluted by the magic music, the unmeaning clatter of which only
confuses him at first. He walks towards the side of the room where the
chair is stationed, and as he approaches it the clatter grows fainter;
this informs him that he is in the right path. He touches the table, but
removes his hand at the sound of the music, which suddenly gets terribly
noisy. He touches the chair; the music ceases. He now knows that he is
expected to do something with this particular chair, so he very
naturally sits down upon it; but he jumps up directly he hears the
“clatter, clatter, clatter” of the music. He lifts the chair, and as he
does so the music grows soft again. He now turns the chair upside down;
carries it into the middle of the room; places it on the sofa; but all
to no purpose, as he cannot stop the continual clatter of the magic
music. At last he carries the chair into the adjoining room; the music
ceases, and his troublesome task is accomplished. In this noisy but
amusing game the players go out of the room, and have tasks set them in
turns. The musician generally retains his office throughout the game.
POST.
This exciting game may be played by an unlimited number, and is
particularly adapted for a large party. One of the players, called “the
postman,” has his eyes bandaged as in Blind Man’s Buff; another
volunteers to fill the office of “postmaster-general,” and all the rest
seat themselves round the room. At the commencement of the game the
postmaster assigns to each player the name of a town, and, if the
players are numerous, he writes the names given to them on a slip of
paper, in case his memory should fail him. These preliminaries having
been arranged, the blind postman is placed in the centre of the room,
and the postmaster-general retires to some snug corner, whence he can
overlook the other players. When this important functionary calls out
the names of two towns,--thus, “London to Halifax,”--the players who
bear these names must immediately change seats, and as they run from one
side of the room to another, the postman tries to capture them. If the
postman can succeed in catching one of the players, or if he can manage
to sit down on an empty chair, the player that is caught, or excluded
from his place, becomes postman. The postmaster-general is not changed
throughout the game unless he gets tired of his office. When a player
remains seated after his name has been called he must pay a forfeit, or
if the game is played without forfeits he must go to the bottom of the
class, which is represented by a particular chair, and to make room for
him all the players who were formerly below him shift their places.
PROVERBS.
One player leaves the room, and while he is absent the rest fix upon
some proverb. The words are then distributed among them, and each
player, in reply to a question asked by the guesser, has to introduce
his particular word. When all the words have been introduced, the
guesser has to guess the name of the proverb, and another player takes
his place. If, however, he cannot make it out, he has to leave the room
again.
LIST OF PROVERBS.
A false friend is worse than a bitter enemy.
A penny saved is a penny gained.
A man is known by the company he keeps.
A bad workman quarrels with his tools.
All is not gold that glitters.
A friend in need is a friend indeed.
A good name is better than wealth.
A good word costs nothing.
A little rain lays much dust.
A little spark makes a great flame.
A bird in hand is worth two in a bush.
Better late than never.
Barking dogs seldom bite.
Cut your coat according to your cloth.
Empty vessels make the most sound.
Example is better than precept.
Evil beginnings have bad endings.
Friends are plenty when the purse is full.
Good ware makes quick markets.
Great cry and little wool.
Gather thistles, expect prickles.
Half a loaf is better than no bread.
Hear twice before you speak once.
In a calm sea every man is a pilot.
Idle folks have the least leisure.
It’s an ill wind that blows nobody good.
If a thing is worth doing, it is worth doing well.
It’s a sad heart that never rejoices
Least said is soonest mended.
Let them laugh that win.
Look before you leap.
Long looked for comes at last.
Make hay while the sun shines.
Many a slip between the cup and the lip.
Make the best of a bad bargain.
Marry in haste, repent at leisure.
Of two evils choose the least.
One good turn deserves another.
Opportunity makes the thief.
Out of sight out of mind.
Penny wise and pound foolish.
Prevention is better than cure.
Pride will have a fall.
Short reckonings make long friends.
Strike while the iron’s hot.
Still waters run deep.
Safe bind, safe find.
The best part of valour is discretion.
Waste not, want not.
Where there’s a will there’s always a way.
Wilful waste makes woful want.
PUSS IN THE CORNER.
Four players take their stations in the four corners of a room, and a
fifth, called “Puss,” places himself in the middle of it; the players in
the corners then change places by running to the opposite ends, and Puss
must endeavour to get into one of the vacant places before the opposite
player is able to reach it; if he can do so, the player left out becomes
Puss.
RED-CAP AND BLACK-CAP.
The players sit round in a circle, each taking a colour. Thus one is
red-cap, another black-cap, and so on. One of them, who takes the place
of master, and has no colour, taking up a cap says: “Hullo, here’s a
false stitch. Who made it, blue-cap?” Blue-cap then answers, “Who, sir?
I, sir?” “Yes, you, sir!” “Not I, sir.” “Who then, sir?” “Yellow-cap,
sir.” Yellow-cap then starts up and says, “Who, sir? I, sir?” and goes
through the dialogues, giving another colour. The player who neglects to
start up when his colour is mentioned, or who does not repeat the
question correctly, pays a forfeit.
SHADOW BUFF.
Shadow Buff differs very materially from Blind Man’s Buff, but it is
equally amusing. A large piece of white linen should be fastened neatly
up at one end of room, so that it hangs quite smooth; Buff (not blinded)
seats himself on a low stool with his face to the linen, and a table, on
which is a lighted candle, should be placed about four or five feet
behind him, and the rest of the lights in the room extinguished. Buffy’s
playfellows next pass in succession, between the candle and him,
distorting their features in as grotesque a manner as possible--hopping,
limping, and performing various odd antics, so as to make their
_shadows_ very unlike their usual looks. Buffy must then try to guess to
whom the shadows belong, and if he guesses correctly, the player whose
shadow he recognises takes his place. Buff is allowed only one guess for
each person, and must not turn his head either to the right or left to
see who passes.
SLATE GAMES.
_Birds, Beasts, and Fishes._--“Now, Tom,” said Harry, “get your slate
and pencil, and I’ll show you such a jolly game. Well now, look here, I
have put down h × × × a. Now that stands for a beast’s name, the first
and last letters of which are _h_ and _a_, with three letters between,
represented by the crosses.”
“Let’s see,” replied Tom, scratching his head, “I know--Hare.”
“You muff! There are only four letters in ‘hare,’ and five in my word.
Try again--mind you have only three guesses; so look out.”
Tom wondered again for a minute, and then suddenly blurted out, “I
know--Horse.”
“Wrong again,” replied Harry; “the last letter of Horse is _e_ and not
_a_. Now be careful, Tom, for this is your last turn.”
Again Tom scratched his head, bit his fingers, and after meditating for
at least two minutes and a half, shouted out in a moment of
inspiration--“Hyena!”
As he was right, it now became his turn to put down a name. So he wrote
on the slate s × × × × × w, at the same time telling Harry it was a
bird; for according to the rules of this game you must say whether this
name represents a beast, a fish, a bird, an insect, or a reptile.
Harry in a minute shouted “Sparrow!” and so the game went on; and such a
capital game did Tom and Harry have, that they sent this account of it
to us in the hope that we would make it known to the world in “Every
Boy’s Book.”
_French and English._--On the slate should be drawn a plan somewhat like
the following. The dots represent soldiers, one side being termed French
and the other English. Each player is provided with a sharply pointed
pencil, and the game is played as follows:--English, keeping the point
of his pencil on a spot denoted by a cannon, draws it quickly across the
slate in the direction of the other army. The pencil naturally leaves a
line to mark his track, and if this mark passes through any of the men
belonging to the other side, they are considered dead. The game is over
as soon as all the men on one side are dead. Each player has a certain
space on the slate allotted to him, and he may dispose his men in
whatever part of it he pleases. The track of the pencil must be straight
or curved; any shot in which there is an angle does not count. In p. 38
we give a battle-field where the strife is ended. In this the English
side has killed all the opposite side in eight shots, while the French
in eight have only been able to kill nine men.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
_Noughts and Crosses._--This is a capital game, and one which every
school-boy truly enjoys. A figure is drawn as follows, and the object of
the one player is to draw three crosses in a line before the other can
draw three noughts. Thus A begins by drawing a + in the centre division;
B follows with a nought in the top right-hand corner. A then draws a +
in the bottom right-hand corner, because by this means he gets two
crosses in a line, and spoils one of B’s chances. B in a hurry instantly
places a 0 in the top left-hand corner, and A follows by placing his +
between the two 0’s. B then, seeing that in the centre line A already
has two crosses, places a 0 in the third vacant space of the line; while
A, as a last resource, plants his + in the second space of the left-hand
line. Then when B puts a 0 in the centre space at the left-hand, A
places a + in the bottom left-hand corner, and the game is drawn, the
plan standing as above.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
TRADES.
Every player, except one who holds the office of reader, selects a trade
or profession, which he must retain throughout the game. When all have
chosen their trades, the reader opens a book at random, and reads a
passage from it aloud; but when he comes to any common noun, he looks at
one of the tradesmen, who must instantly name some article that he is
supposed to have for sale, or some implement connected with the exercise
of his craft. By this substitution of one noun for another, the most
pathetic passage is converted into an indescribable jumble of
absurdities. In the following burlesqued extract from an Eastern tale,
the words in italics are supposed to be supplied by the different
tradesmen, in place of the nouns omitted by the reader:--
“One offered the prince a _bucket_ of the most precious _mutton chops_
of Golconda; another a curious piece of a _Wellington boot_, made by a
European artist; another a piece of the richest _plum-pudding_ from the
looms of China; another _a gridiron_, said to be a sovereign remedy
against all poisons and infectious diseases; another a choice piece of
the most fragrant _Turkey rhubarb_, in _a warming-pan_, inlaid with
_acid drops_; another _a coffin_ full of genuine _treacle_; another _a
rocking-horse_ of the purest breed of Arabia; and another _a Flanders
brick_ of exquisite beauty. The whole court of the palace was overspread
with _gingerbread-nuts_; and long rows of slaves were continually
passing loaded with _corn-plasters_, _tenpenny-nails_, _bees’-wax_, and
other articles of high price.”
TRUSSED FOWLS.
Two boys having seated themselves on the floor, are _trussed_ by their
playmates; that is to say, each boy has his wrists tied together with a
handkerchief, and his legs secured just above the ancles with another;
his arms are then passed over his knees, and a broomstick is pushed over
one arm, under both knees, and out again over the other arm. The
“trussed fowls” are now carried into the centre of room and placed
opposite each other, with their toes just touching. The fun now begins;
as each fowl endeavours, with the aid of his toes, to turn his
antagonist over on his back or side, and the one who can succeed in
doing this wins the game. It frequently happens that both players turn
over together, to the great amusement of the spectators. On board ship
these comical encounters frequently take place between the boys, who are
trussed by their elder shipmates.
THE TWO HATS.
This game, although only two persons are engaged in it at a time,
furnishes much amusement, from the contradictory nature of its words and
actions. The rules relative to it are as follow:--If three mistakes are
made by the person who responds to the inquiries of the player who
brings the hats round, and whom for distinction’s sake we will call the
questioner, he must pay three forfeits, and is out of the game; when the
questioner desires the respondent to be seated, the latter must stand
up; when he begs him to put his hat on, he must take it off; when he
requests him to stand, he must sit; and in every point, the respondent
must take special care to do always the very reverse of what the
questioner wishes him. The questioner may sit down, stand up, put his
hat on, or take it off, without desiring the respondent to do so, or
giving him the least intimation of his intention; the latter must,
therefore, be always on his guard, so as to act in a contrary way in an
instant, else he incurs a forfeit. These rules being settled, the game
is simply this: one player places a hat on his head, takes another in
his hand, and gives it to one of the company; he then begins conversing
with him, endeavouring both by words and actions to puzzle him as much
as he can, so as to cause him to pay a forfeit. We will give a slight
specimen of a dialogue, describing the accompanying movements of the
hats, in which A is the questioner, B the respondent:
A. (_taking his hat off._) A very beautiful evening, sir.
B. (_putting his hat on._) Yes, indeed, a most lovely one.
A. (_putting his hat on, and sitting down_, B. _instantly taking his off
and getting up_.) Pray be seated, sir; I really cannot think of sitting
while you stand (_gets up, and_ B. _sits down_). Have you been out of
town this year? (_takes off his hat._)
B. (_putting his on._) I have not yet, but I think I shall, before (A.
_sits down_, B. _gets up_) the beauty of the season has entirely passed
away, venture a few miles out of town.
A. (_putting his hat on._) I beg ten thousand pardons, you are standing
while I am sitting; pardon me, your hat is on--you must pay a forfeit.
It generally happens, that before the dialogue has been carried thus far
the respondent has incurred three forfeits, and is, of course, out; the
questioner then goes in succession to the others, and the same scene is
repeated by each: the conversation, it is almost needless to add, should
be varied as much as possible, and the more nonsensical it is the
better.
WHAT IS MY THOUGHT LIKE?
The leader of the game commences it by asking each of his companions in
turn, “What is my thought like?” to which they reply at hazard, by
mentioning anything that first comes into their thoughts, of course
avoiding naming the same thing twice over, as that incurs the penalty of
a forfeit. The leader carefully notes down all the answers he receives,
and then revealing his thought, desires to know what the thing thought
of resembles in what it has been compared to.
_John._--Charles, what is my thought like?
_Charles._--A young girl.
_John._--James?
_James._--A queen.
_John._--Now, Harry?
_Harry._--A lion.
_John._--Tom?
_Tom._--Beauty.
_John._--You, William?
_William._--An oak-tree.
_John._--Alfred, it is your turn.
_Alfred._--A beautiful woman.
_John._--Andrew?
_Andrew._--Hope.
_John._--Arthur?
_Arthur._--A hedgehog.
_John._--Ben?
_Ben._--A rose.
_John._--And you, Cecil?
_Cecil._--A vine.
_John._--My thought was a rose; so now, Charles, tell me why a rose is
like a young girl.
_Charles._--Because it is loveliest when only half-blown.
_John._--And why a queen?
_James._--Because the rose is the queen of all flowers.
_John._--Harry, why is a rose like a lion?
_Harry._--Because it is one of the emblems of England.
_John._--And why, Tom, is it like beauty?
_Tom._--Because it soon fades.
_John._--William, why is it like an oak?
_William._--Because both spring from the earth.
_John._--And you, Alfred; why is a rose like a beautiful woman?
_Alfred._--Because its fragrance often remains after the charms are
faded.
_John._--Andrew, why is a rose like hope?
_Andrew._--Because in returning sunshine it forgets the past storm.
_John._--Arthur, why is a rose like a hedgehog?
_Arthur._--Because its thorns defend it from a rough grasp.
_John._--You, Ben, having fixed upon the same thing as myself, must pay
a forfeit. Cecil, why is a rose like a vine?
_Cecil._--Because in old times they were both considered essential to a
banquet. I can think of nothing better.
[Illustration: EASY GAMES WITH TOYS, OUTDOOR.]
EASY GAMES WITH TOYS.
OUTDOOR.
[Illustration: BALLS]
CATCH BALL.
This is very simple play. The ball is thrown into the air by one player,
the others standing round him. He calls out the name of the player, for
whom the ball is thrown. If it be caught by the player so called, before
the ball reaches the ground twice, he scores a point; if any of the
other players catch it, they score a point, and the other loses one.
DOUTEE-STOOL.
This is a variety of the above game. A certain number of stools are set
up in a circular form, and at a distance from each other, and every one
is occupied by a single player; when the ball is struck, which is done,
as before, by the hand, every one of them is obliged to alter his
situation, running in succession from stool to stool; and if he who
threw the ball can regain it in time to strike any of the players before
he reaches the stool to which he is running, he takes his place, and the
person touched must throw the ball, until he can in like manner return
to the circle.
EGG-HAT.
[Illustration]
All the players engaged in this favourite pastime must place their caps
on the ground, close to the wall, in such a manner that a ball may be
easily pitched into them. A line being marked on the ground about
fifteen feet from the wall, one of the players takes his station at it,
and begins the game by throwing the ball into one of the caps; the
moment this is done all the boys run away, excepting the one into whose
cap the ball is thrown, who immediately runs to take it out, and
endeavours to strike one of the fugitives by throwing the ball at him;
if he can do so, the one struck has a small stone, called “an egg,”
placed in his cap, and has to take his turn at pitching the ball. Should
the thrower fail to hit one of the boys as they are running away, an
“egg” is put into his cap, and he has to pitch the ball into the caps
again. If a player fails to throw the ball into a cap, he earns an
“egg,” but continues throwing until he succeeds. When a player gets
three “eggs” in his cap, he is out. When all the players but one have
been struck out, he is considered the winner, and the punishment of the
losers then commences; one of them standing near the wall bounces the
ball at it with all his force, and next stands with his back to the
wall, stretching out his right arm, and placing the back of his hand
quite close to the wall, while the winner, standing where the ball fell,
takes aim, and throws the ball at the said loser’s hand three times:
each of the losers likewise receives the same punishment from him. In
some places it is usual, when one boy gets out, for him to bounce the
ball against the wall, and all the other players, standing at the spot
where the ball first touched the ground, to have their three balls at
his back, as he stands with his face to the wall. Should the ball in
rebounding swerve either to the right or left, a line must be drawn,
from the spot where it falls, to a place directly in a straight line
from the boy at the wall; thus, suppose A is the boy who has just
bounced the ball, which instead of going direct to B, has deviated from
the straight line A B to C, a line should be drawn from C to B, and the
winner should stand at the latter.
FEEDER.
[Illustration]
In this game four or five stones or marks must be placed on the ground,
as in the annexed figure, A, B, C, D, E, about twelve or fifteen yards
asunder; these marks are called bases, and one of them, as A, is styled
“home.” The players next toss up for the office of “feeder,” who takes
his place about two yards in front of “home,” as at F, and the rest of
the players stand at and round the home. The feeder then calls out
“Play!” and pitches the ball to the first player, who endeavours to
strike it with a bat, as far as he possibly can; should he succeed in
hitting the ball, he immediately drops the bat, and runs to the first
base on his right hand, as E, while the feeder is going after the ball:
but if he can run all the bases and then home, before the ball is in
hand, so much the better. If, however, the feeder obtains the ball soon
enough to throw it at, and strike him with it as he is running from base
to base, the player is out; he is also out if the feeder catches the
ball: in either case the player becomes feeder, and the latter runs home
to join his playmates. Should any of the other players be out at the
bases, when one is caught or struck out, they also must run home. If the
first player could only reach the base E, after striking the ball, he
should, when the second player strikes it, run to the base D, as it is
not allowable for two persons to be at one base at one and the same
minute; he proceeds in the same manner to the third and fourth bases,
until he arrives home again, thus enabling the others to get to their
bases and home in their respective turns. The player with the bat is not
obliged to take every ball the feeder chooses to give him; if he does
not like a throw, he catches the ball and throws it back again. He is
not allowed to make more than three “offers” at the ball; if he does so
he is out, and must be feeder.
[Illustration]
MONDAY, TUESDAY.
This game, which takes its title from the names assumed by the players,
is played by seven boys, each of whom calls himself after one of the
days of the week. To show the manner of playing the game, we will
suppose that some boys are playing at it, and that the ball is taken by
“Wednesday;” he throws it up against a wall, calling out at the same
time the assumed name of any one of the other players, who should be
standing around--we will suppose, for instance, “Friday!” All the boys
but Friday run away, and he endeavours to catch it ere it falls to the
ground; if he can do so, he throws it up again, calling out another
boy’s name--say “Sunday!” Should the ball touch the ground before _he_
can catch it, he must pick it up and throw it at the retreating party;
and if he succeeds in hitting one of them, the boy struck has to throw
the ball up the next time; but if he cannot strike one he loses a point,
as in Egg-hat; indeed, in the rules respecting the punishment of the
losers, and the number of points each player is restricted to, it
resembles that game.
NINE-HOLES.
Dig near a wall nine holes, of about six inches in diameter, and three
deep. Let each player have one of these, according to his number, which
must be determined by lot. At about six yards from the holes draw a
line, and from this, as a fielding place, one player pitches the ball
into one of the holes. The boy to whom this hole is assigned immediately
runs to it, while all the other players run off in different directions.
The player snatches the ball from the hole, and throws it at one of the
“runners;” if he hits him, the one so hit becomes “pitcher,” and the one
that struck him marks one. Should he not hit him, the player who throws
the ball loses a point, and bowls. The player who misses his aim at
throwing the ball at his partners a second time becomes a “Tenner.” If
he loses a third hit, he is a “Fifteener;” if the fourth, he stands out
and can play no more. When all the players are thus out, the last player
remaining in wins the game, and he can compel each of the losers to
stand with their hands open against the wall, for him to throw at, and
give what is called the “Brandy Ball.” If the ball be a soft one, this
conclusion of the game is all very well; but if a hard ball be used, it
ought to be omitted, or the “Brandy” may be too strong.
NORTHERN SPELL.
This game is played with a trap and ball, which is struck with a bat or
bludgeon at the pleasure of the players; but the latter is most commonly
used. The performance of this game does not require the attendance of
either of the parties in the field to catch or stop the ball, for the
contest between them is simply who shall strike it the greatest distance
in a given number of strokes; the length of each stroke is measured
before the ball is returned, by means of a cord made fast at one end
near the trap, the other being stretched into the field by a person
stationed there for that purpose, who adjusts it to the ball, wherever
it may be.
The cord is divided into yards, which are properly numbered upon in it
in succession, so that the person at the bottom of the ground can easily
ascertain the distance of each stroke by the number of the yards, which
he calls to the players to place to their account, and the ball is
thrown back.
ROUNDERS.
This is a most excellent game, and very popular in some of our English
counties. It is played with a moderate-sized ball and a hand-bat,
_i. e._ a bat that can be held in one hand, and which is about two feet
in length, smooth, and round. Two parties play at the game, and there
ought not to be less than five on a side; and the first innings is
decided by throwing up the ball, the party catching it being allowed to
go in first.
[Illustration]
In playing the game, five stones, or stakes (called bases), or, if these
be not convenient, as many holes may be made, at about sixteen yards
apart, forming the five parts of a pentagon, as in the diagram. At the
centre of this figure is a station called the feeder’s place, being the
spot at which one of the out party stands to give the ball to the
batsman, or to “feed” him, as it is technically termed. The out party
are distributed over the field, except the feeder, who takes his station
at F to deliver the balls, while one of the in party takes the bat and
places himself at Fig. 1, which is enclosed within a circle, and called
the Home, and where all the rest of the in party stand. The feeder then
says “Play,” and delivers his ball to the batsman, who immediately
strikes it as far as he can. As soon as he has done so, he drops his
bat, and runs to as many of the stations as he can; but he must touch at
all, or he will be out. If while he is running to the second, or between
any of the bases, the returned ball is sent up and strikes him, he is
out, and the next of the in party takes up the bat. If he is not struck
while he runs, as soon as he reaches one of the stations the next of the
in party takes up the bat, another ball is given by the feeder, and he
runs to the first, or as many other of the stations as he can; the first
batsman does the same, so as to go the whole round of the bases to the
home at No. 1. The in player is also out if he tips the ball behind him,
or if he misses striking it when delivered. The in players as they
arrive at home take the bat again, till they are got out, according to
the rules of the game just given. When it happens that all are out but
two, the best of the two may, with the consent of the other, call for
“three fair hits for the rounder.” Standing at the home, the feeder then
gives him in succession three balls. He may decline as many balls as he
pleases, if they do not suit him; but if he strikes at the ball, he is
only allowed to do so twice without running. On the delivery of the
third ball, he must run the entire course, touching with his bat at
every one of the five points. If, during his progress, he be touched by
the ball, or it be grounded at the home while he is absent, he is
declared out, and the opposite side go in and take their places. If, on
the contrary, he reaches home without being struck or the ball grounded,
his side go in again, and continue the game as before. Should he miss
the ball when striking at it the third time, the rounder is lost. In the
play the feeder is allowed to make feint or pretence of throwing the
ball, in order to tempt a player to run from his base, so as to get a
chance of hitting him. It is usual also for the out party to place a
player behind the home, so that when a batsman makes a tip on the side
of the home, he may seize the ball and strike him out before he reaches
the first base.
SEVENS.
This game is very like Catch-ball. The object is to catch a ball seven
times in a particular fashion; hence the name. The player begins by
throwing the ball in the air and catching it seven times with both
hands. Then he catches it seven times with the right hand, next seven
times with the left. Then he throws the ball up, claps his hand while it
is in the air, and catches it seven times with both hands, then with the
right, and then with the left. The players are allowed to make as many
more variations as they please; and he who goes through the series first
wins the game.
STOOL-BALL.
This is an old English sport, mentioned by Gower and Chaucer, and was at
one period common to women as well as men. In the northern parts of
England, particularly in Yorkshire, it is practised in the following
manner:--A stool being set upon the ground, one of the players takes his
place before it, while his antagonist, standing at a distance, tosses a
ball, with the intention of striking the stool. It is the former
player’s business to prevent this, by breaking it away with the hand,
reckoning one to the game for every stroke of the ball; if, on the
contrary, it should be missed by the hand, and touch the stool, the
players change places. The conqueror of the game is he who strikes the
ball most times before it touches the stool.
[Illustration]
TRAP, BAT, AND BALL.
This game is so called from the trap used to elevate the ball when it is
to be struck by the batsman. It is one of the earliest games played with
the trap and ball, and we can trace it to the commencement of the
fourteenth century. The manner in which it was then played was somewhat
different to the style at the present day. As now played, the trap is no
longer elevated, but set on the ground, and is generally made in the
form of a shoe, the heel part being hollowed out for the reception of
the ball: but some boys, when they cannot get a trap, make a hole in the
ground, and having obtained the crochet bone of an ox, place it in a
slanting position, one end being in the hole and the other out of it.
The elevated end is then sharply struck with the bat, which causes the
ball to rise to a considerable height, and then all the purposes of a
trap are answered, especially if the ground be hard and dry.
It is usual in the present game of Trap and Ball to place two
boundaries, at a given distance from the trap, between which it is
necessary for the ball to fall when struck by the batsman, for if it
falls outside of either, he gives up his bat and is out. He is also out
if he strikes the ball into the air, so that it is caught by an opposite
player; and, again, if the ball when returned by an adversary touches
the trap, or rests within one bat’s length of it. Every stroke tells for
one towards the striker’s game.
There are some variations in the play of the game in different counties.
In Essex and Suffolk, for instance, the game is played with a cudgel
instead of a bat, which would seem to be a preferable weapon, as those
who strike with it rarely miss their blow, but frequently send it to an
astonishing distance, no boundaries being set.
The ball being stopped by one of the opposing party, the striker forms
his judgment of the ability of the person who is to throw it back, and
calls in consequence for any number of scores towards the game that he
thinks proper. It is then returned, and if it appears to his antagonist
to rest at a sufficient distance to justify the striker’s call, he
obtains his number; but when a contrary opinion is held, a measurement
takes place, and if the scores demanded exceed in number the length of
the cudgel from the trap to the ball, he loses the whole, and is out;
while, on the other hand, if the lengths of the bat are more than the
scores called for, the matter terminates in the striker’s favour, and
they are set up to his account.
[Illustration: HOOPS]
Trundling the hoop is a pastime of uncertain origin, but it has long
contributed to the health and amusement of the youth of Great Britain.
Iron hoops have almost superseded the old-fashioned wooden ones, and
instead of being trundled with a stick, they are usually guided by an
iron hook shaped like the annexed figure. On a cold frosty morning the
hoop is an invaluable companion to a boy, as he is enabled by its aid to
defy the weather, and dispense with overcoats, comforters, and all such
devices for keeping out the wintry wind. Often have we envied our
juvenile friends, as they have rushed past us with their hoops, and
lamented that custom should prevent grown-up people indulging in the
same healthful recreation.
[Illustration]
THE HOOP.
The proper and legitimate hoop, however, should be made of a stout ashen
lath, round on the outside and flat on the inside, and should be well
fastened at its point of juncture; it should be in height so as to reach
midway between the youngster’s elbow and shoulder, so that he may not
have to stoop while striking it. The stick should be about sixteen
inches long, and made of tough ash; and, in bowling the hoop, the bowler
should strike it vigorously in the centre, and in a direction horizontal
with the ground. Such hoop exercise is exceedingly good, and a good run
with such a hoop will warm the youth in the very coldest weather.
The games, properly so called, that can be played with the hoop are very
few, and not generally known.
ENCOUNTERS.
Two boys start at different ends of the playground with their hoops,
and, meeting in the middle, each endeavours to knock down the hoop of
his antagonist, while his own remains upright.
There is no small skill required in this game, for it is not always easy
to make the hoops touch each other at all. Then a light hoop has little
chance against a heavy one, unless it can strike it sideways, for if it
were struck directly in front, it would be certainly upset.
Also, a ready hand at recovering a falling or tottering hoop wins many a
game that appears to be hopelessly lost.
Wooden hoops, also, give due exercise to the arm; and there is some tact
required in knowing exactly where to strike a hoop, so as to propel it
with the greatest force.
This cannot well be done with iron hoops, and forms one of the
objections to them. Moreover, boys always complain that they soon lose
their round form, and are awkward to bowl. Still, there is something
cheering in the ringing sound of an iron hoop, as it rushes along under
the pressure of the curved iron rod that is used instead of a
hoop-stick; and as long as boys don’t drive them against the legs of
unwary passengers, they are very well in their way.
[Illustration]
HOOP RACE.
Any number of boys can join in this exciting sport, but they ought all
to be provided with hoops as nearly equal in size as possible. At a
given signal the players all start together, and each endeavours to
reach the winning post (which may be any distant object) before his
companions. He who arrives at the winning-post last is generally
received with groans, hisses, and other vocal signs of disapprobation.
POSTING.
Bases, called _posting-stations_, are formed at regular distances, in a
large circle or ellipse, and at each base a player is stationed. Every
player, except the hoop-driver, has charge of a base. Let us suppose
that there are seven players--A, B, C, D, E, F, and G, and that the
latter holds the hoop: the other six players having taken possession of
their stations, G now starts from the station belonging to F, and drives
the hoop towards A, who waits, with hoop-stick in hand, ready to relieve
G of his charge. G stops at the posting-station, while A trundles the
hoop to B, who takes charge of it, and delivers it to C. C trundles the
hoop to D; D transfers it to E; E delivers it to F; and F conveys it in
safety to the first player, G. In this way the game continues, until all
the players have worked round the circle five or six times. It is
considered very disgraceful to touch the hoop with the hand, or to allow
it to fall after it has been started on its journey. The game is
rendered much more lively by increasing the number of players, and
having two or three hoop-drivers to follow each other from base to
base.
TOURNAMENT.
This game is almost the same as Encounters. Two boys drive their hoops
one against the other, and he whose hoop falls in the encounter is
conquered. With eight players this game may be rendered very exciting.
Four of the players stand in a row, about six feet apart, and, at a
considerable distance, the other four take their stand, facing them. At
a given signal each player dashes towards his opponent, and strives to
overturn his hoop. The four victors now pair off, and charge two against
two. The conquerors then urge their hoops one against the other, and he
who succeeds in overturning the hoop of his antagonist wins the game.
Wooden hoops are more suitable for Tournament than iron ones, though the
game is usually played with the latter.
TURNPIKE.
Five or six boys can play at this game, though only one hoop is
required. Chance decides which of the players shall first take the hoop.
The other players become turnpike-keepers. Each turnpike is formed of
two bricks or stones, placed on the ground, and separated by about three
fingers’ breadths. These turnpikes are fixed at regular distances, and
their number is regulated by the number of keepers. When all is ready,
the first player starts his hoop, and endeavours to drive it through all
the turnpikes; should he succeed in this, he turns the hoop, drives it
back again, and retains it until it touches one of the turnpikes, the
keeper of which now becomes hoop-driver. When a player touches the hoop
with his hand, or allows it to fall, he must deliver it up to the
nearest turnpike-keeper. Each keeper must stand on that side of his
turnpike which is towards the right hand of the hoop-driver, and it
therefore follows that he must alter his position when the hoop-driver
returns. Should a keeper stand on his wrong side, the driver need not
send the hoop through his turnpike. When the players are numerous, there
may be two or more hoops driven at once.
[Illustration: HOOP STICKS.]
[Illustration: KITES]
The form of the kite and manner of flying it must be familiar to all our
readers. This favourite toy probably received its denomination from
having originally been made in the shape of the bird called the kite.
The flying of paper kites is a favourite pastime among the Chinese. On a
certain day they hold a sort of kite festival, and then people of all
ages hasten to the hills to fly their kites, the fantastic shapes and
gaudy colours of which produce an extraordinary effect. Philosophers
have occasionally taken the kite out of the hands of the schoolboy, and
have applied it to useful and curious purposes. By means of a kite
formed of a silk handkerchief stretched over a wooden frame, Dr.
Franklin drew down lightning from the clouds, and demonstrated its
identity with electricity. Many years ago Mr. Pocock, of Bristol,
travelled on the road between Bath and London in a carriage drawn by two
paper kites, supported at a moderate elevation, and impelled by the
wind. The paper kite has also been employed to convey a line over the
capital of Pompey’s Pillar. We do not expect our readers to perform any
electrical or locomotive experiments with their kites; but we are quite
sure that they may derive great amusement from these little aërial
machines, especially if they manufacture them with their own hands. We
know of no pleasanter occupation for a summer’s day than watching the
graceful flight of a well-made kite.
[Illustration]
HOW TO MAKE A KITE.
For the upright get a good straight lath, as A B, in the annexed figure,
and next procure half of a thin hoop or cane for the bow C D, and then
tie the hoop to the upright at A, and take care to have as much on one
side of the upright as on the other; otherwise your kite will be sure
to fall on one side when flying. Notch the two ends of the bow C D, and
tie a long piece of string to D; pass it round the upright at E, and
then fasten it at C; next carry the string to A, pass it down to D, and
tie it there: from thence it is to be continued to B, passed round a
notch there, and carried up again to C, then down the upright at F, and
up to D, where it is to be finally fastened off. The skeleton being thus
finished, the next thing to be done is to paste several sheets of paper
so as to form a surface large enough to cover the kite and allow of a
little turn over to fasten the outer edges; after you have pasted the
paper on to the skeleton, you must make two holes, in the upright, as at
G, G, through which the belly-band is to be passed, knotting the two
ends of the string to keep it from slipping through the holes. The wings
are to be made of several sheets of paper, cut into slips, rolled close
up, so as to bear some resemblance to a tassel, and tied to the sides of
the kite at C, D. The tail, which should be about fifteen times the
length of the kite, is made by folding a number of pieces of paper so as
to be about an inch in breadth, and four inches in length, and
afterwards tying them on a string at intervals of three inches, and is
finished by affixing to the end of the string a large tassel made in the
same manner as the wings. Tie the string with which you intend to fly
the kite to the belly-band, and your kite is complete and ready for
service.
FLYING THE KITE.
[Illustration]
We need not enter very minutely into the rules to be observed in flying
a kite, as every boy is acquainted with them. Unless there be a nice
breeze stirring, the kite-flyer need not expect to have much sport, as
nothing can be more vexatious than attempting to fly a kite when there
is not sufficient wind for the purpose. To raise the kite in the first
instance, the flyer will require the aid of another boy. The owner of
the kite having unwound a considerable length of string, now turns his
face towards the wind and prepares for a run, while his assistant holds
the kite by its lower extremity as high as he can from the ground. At a
given signal the assistant lets the kite go, and if all circumstances be
favourable it will soar upwards with great rapidity. With a
well-constructed kite, in a good breeze the flyer need not trouble
himself to run very fast nor very far, as his kite will soon find its
balance, and float quite steadily on the wind. The kite-flyer should be
careful not to let out string too fast. When a kite pitches, it is a
sign that it is built lop-side, or that its tail is not long enough.
MESSENGERS.
Some boys amuse themselves by sending messengers up to their kites when
they have let out all their string. A messenger is formed of a piece of
paper three or four inches square, in the centre of which a hole is
made. The end of the string is passed through the hole, and the wind
quickly drives the messenger up to the kite. The kite-flyer should be
careful not to send up too many messengers, lest they weigh down the
kite.
CALICO KITES.
Calico has many advantages over paper as a covering for kites; it is not
so liable to be torn, is not damaged by wet, and may be sewn on the
framework much more neatly than paper can be pasted. Being much heavier
than paper, it is, however, only suited for large kites. A portable
calico kite may now be procured at most of the toy-shops. The framework
of this kite is formed of two slender pieces of wood, which turn on a
common centre in such a manner that they can either be shut up, so that
one piece lies flat upon the other, or opened out into the form of a
cross. The calico covering is attached to this cross by means of tapes.
This portable kite can be rolled up and carried to the field without
inconvenience.
FANCY KITES.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
Ingenious boys now and then take a hint from the Chinese, and so shape
and paint their kites that they resemble different animate and
inanimate objects. The “officer kite,” which has the figure of a soldier
painted on it, and the “hawk kite,” which rudely represents a flying
hawk, are common forms of fancy kites. A very funny effect may be
produced by painting a kite like a sailor, and attaching moveable arms,
instead of the ordinary tassel wings, to the shoulders. We present our
readers with a few suggestive forms, which are quite novel. All fancy
kites should be painted with the most glaring colours, and the figures
on them drawn as coarsely as possible, as they are intended to be seen
at a great distance.
[Illustration: A HIGH FLYER.]
[Illustration: MARBLES]
In ancient times, when we were boys, and indulged in the luxury of
marbles, they were very different from their present form. They were
made of stone, nicely polished, and some of them, called “alleys,” of
the purest marble. Many of the stone marbles were beautifully
variegated, and now and then a fancy pet was treasured under the name of
“taw,” which had somewhat the virtues of a talisman, for to “lose it or
to give it” were “such perdition,” as Othello says, as could never be
exceeded. Of late years, marbles, like all other matters, have undergone
considerable change. Foreign marbles have been introduced, prodigiously
cheaper, it is true, than our old English marbles, but infinitely worse;
and various kinds of “patent marbles” have had their day. Some of these
go by the name of Dutchmen, others are called Frenchmen, and others
again Chinamen, while it is not quite impossible to procure some right
old English marbles, which, if they can be procured, are still the best.
We would advise all marble players to procure these, if they can, as
“marbles” is a royal game, and ought to be duly honoured.
[Illustration: HOW TO HOLD YOUR TAW.]
_How to Shoot your Marble._--The art of holding a marble to shoot it
properly seems to be lost among our London boys, who are generally
content to throw one marble at another, or if they shoot it to hold it
in the turn of the fore-finger, forcing it out by the thumb, which is
placed behind it. This, in our boyish days, was held to be a very
illegitimate way of proceeding, derogatory to the true marble-player,
and bore the dishonourable appellation of “fulking,” and any one who
made it his rule to hold a marble in such a manner was looked upon as a
charlatan, or almost a cheat. The true way to hold your taw is to place
it between the point of the forefinger and the first joint of the thumb,
and to propel it from the nail of the thumb with strong muscular force;
and so great was the skill attained by many boys, that they would
sometimes strike a marble at five yards’ distance, and frequently shoot
one to six or seven.
BOUNCE EYE.
This game is played by several players, each of whom puts down a marble
in a small ring. One player then stands in a perpendicular position over
the cluster of marbles, and, taking his own bounce in his hand, lets it
fall from his eye on to the heap, and those forced out of the ring by
this method are considered won. If he does not succeed in this, and his
marble falls within the ring, it belongs to the common stock, and is
there impounded.
CONQUEROR.
There is a game called “Conqueror,” which is extensively played in some
places. A piece of hard ground, and free from stones, is chosen for the
spot. The first player lays his marble on the ground, and the second
throws his own at it with all his force, and endeavours to break it. If
he succeeds, his marble counts one, and the vanquished player lays down
another marble. If two players have marbles that have already vanquished
others, the “Conqueror” counts all the conquered of the other party in
addition to his own. For example, suppose A, being conqueror of twenty,
breaks B, also a conqueror of twenty, A counts forty-one, _i. e._ twenty
of his own, twenty for the vanquished belonging to B, and one for B
itself.
Nuts, chestnuts, and other similar objects are also employed in this
game, only they are fastened to a string, and swung against the
opponent, instead of being thrown.
DIE SHOT.
[Illustration]
This is a very good game, and requires both skill and caution. It is
played by elevating a die upon a marble, whose sides are slightly ground
down, so that it will stand firmly, and firing at it from an offing,
which is generally at a distance of about four feet from it. The
die-keeper undertakes to pay to the shooter who knocks down the die the
number which falls uppermost, receiving one marble from each player as
he shoots.
EGGS IN THE BUSH.
This game is a great improvement upon odd or even. Dick asks Tom to
guess the number of “eggs in the bush”--that is, the number of marbles
in his closed hand. If Tom can guess the right number, he takes all; but
if he is out in his reckoning, he pays Dick as many marbles as will make
up or leave the exact number. Suppose Dick has six marbles in his hand;
now, if Tom should guess either four or eight, he would have to forfeit
two marbles to Dick, because four is two less, and eight is two more,
than the exact number. The players hold the “eggs in the bush”
alternately.
INCREASE POUND.
In most respects resembles Ring taw, the variations being, that if
before a marble is shot out of the ring one player’s taw is struck by
another’s (excepting his partner’s), or if his taw remains within the
ring, he puts a shot in the pound, continues in the game, and shoots
again from the offing before any of his companions. If his taw is struck
after one or more marbles have been driven out of the ring, if he has
taken any shots himself, he gives them to the player who struck him,
puts a taw in the ring, and shoots from the offing, as before. If,
however, he has not won any marbles during the game, before his taw is
struck, he is “killed” and put out of the game; he is likewise out if,
after any shots have been struck out, his taw gets within the pound--if
it remains on the line it is nothing. He then puts the marbles (if he
has won any) into the circle, adding one to them for the taw struck, and
shoots again from the offing. In case he cannot gain any shots after his
taw gets “fat,” as remaining in the ring is termed, he is killed, and
out for the rest of the game. When only one marble remains in the ring,
the taw may continue inside it without being “fat.” Each player seldom
puts more than one marble in the ring at the beginning or a game.
KNOCK OUT, OR LAG OUT.
[Illustration]
This game is played by knocking marbles against a wall, or perpendicular
board set up for the purpose; and the skill displayed in it depends upon
the player’s attention to what is called in mechanics the resolution of
forces: for instance, if an object be struck against the wall at A from
the mark at B, it will return again to B in a straight line; if it be
sent from C to A, it will, instead of returning to C, pass off aslant to
D, and its course will form the angle C A D; the angle of incidence
being equal to the angle of reflection.
The game is played by any number of players: the first player throws his
marble against the wall, so that it may rebound and fall about a yard
distant from it; the other players then, in succession, throw their
marbles against the wall, in such a way as to cause them to strike any
of those already lagged out, and the marble struck is considered won by
the owner of the taw that strikes it, in addition to which the winner
has another throw. When only two boys play, each successively throws out
till one of the “laggers” is struck, and he who strikes takes up all.
LONG TAW.
[Illustration]
Long taw is played by two persons in the following manner. One boy
places his marble on the ground at A, the other at B; then both retire
to the spot C. The first boy now shoots at B from a line marked at C. If
he strikes it, he takes it and shoots at A; if he strikes A, he then
wins the game. If, however, he misses B, the second boy then shoots at
B; if he strikes it, he can then either shoot at the first boy’s taw at
the place at which it lies, or he can shoot at A. If he hits his
opponent’s taw, he is said to kill him, and wins the game, or if he
shoots at A, and hits it. The boy who hits the last shot has the
privilege of shooting at the taw of the other, provided it has not
already been killed. If he hits it, the taw is taken, or the owner must
pay one, and the game ends; and if he misses it, the game is then at an
end also. Long taw is a game seldom played by London boys, but is very
common in the different English counties.
NINE-HOLES, OR BRIDGE BOARD.
This game is played by means of a piece of board cut into the form of a
bridge, having nine arches, and just large enough to let the marbles
pass through, as in the subjoined diagram. One of the players undertakes
to be “bridge-keeper,” and the stipulation usually made is, that he
should receive one for every unsuccessful shot, and pay to those who
shoot their marbles through the arches the numbers standing over them.
The place from which the players shoot their marbles is generally about
four feet from the bridge.
[Illustration]
ODD OR EVEN.
One player extends his closed hand containing some marbles, and asks his
opponent to guess whether their number is odd or even. Should he guess
wrong, he forfeits a marble, and his questioner tries him with another
lot; but should he guess right, the first player must pay him a marble,
and take a turn at guessing.
PICKING THE PLUMS.
[Illustration]
This game consists in each player placing a marble on a line drawn upon
the ground thus, and the whole shooting at them in succession from a
mark about four feet off. The order of the shots is determined
beforehand, by pitching at a marble from a six-feet offing, those
nearest being first, second, third, and fourth in order, as the marbles
lie. The marbles knocked off the line are won by the respective
shooters.
THE PYRAMID.
[Illustration]
In this game a boy generally sits upon the ground, with his legs open
wide, and, making a small circle, places in it three marbles at the
three points of a triangle, and the fourth on the top of them, so as to
form a small pyramid. A distance of about four feet is then chosen as
the point to shoot from, and the other players shoot at the pyramid.
Those that strike it have all the marbles they knock out of the ring;
but if they miss, they lose their shots.
RING TAW.
[Illustration]
Ring taw is a game requiring skill and judgment, and is a most excellent
game. It is played as follows. Two rings are drawn upon the ground, a
small one, six inches in diameter, enclosed by a larger one, six feet in
diameter. Into the small ring each player puts a marble, called “shot.”
The players then proceed to any part of the large ring, and from thence,
as an offing, shoot at the marbles in the centre. If a player knocks a
marble out of the ring he wins it, and he is entitled to shoot again
before his companions can have a shot. When all the players have shot
their marbles, they shoot from the places at which their marbles rested
at the last shot. If the shooter’s taw remain in the small circle, he is
out, and has to drop a marble in the ring, and he must put in besides
all the marbles he had previously won in that game. It is a rule, also,
that when one player shoots at and strikes another’s taw, the taw so
struck is considered dead, and its owner must give up to the striker of
the taw all the marbles he may have previously won during the game. The
game is concluded when all the marbles are shot out of the ring, or all
the taws are killed.
SPANS AND SNOPS, AND BOUNCE ABOUT.
This consists of one boy laying down his taw, and, giving a distance,
his antagonist shoots at it; if he misses, the first boy shoots at the
taw of the second, till one is struck, which the striker claims. Bounce
About is the same game played by throwing large marbles instead of
shooting smaller ones, he who strikes the other’s bounce being the
winner.
TEETOTUM SHOT.
[Illustration]
This is played on the same conditions as Die Shot. A teetotum is set
spinning by the keeper, and, when in motion, any player is allowed to
shoot at it, upon the payment of one marble, receiving, if he strikes,
turns over, and stops the teetotum, as many marbles as are indicated on
the side that falls uppermost. This is a very skilful game, and requires
good shots.
THREE-HOLES.
This game is played by making three holes in the ground, about a yard
and a half or two yards asunder. About two yards from the first hole a
line is drawn. The right to shoot first is decided by chance. The first
shooter now knuckles down at the line, and endeavours to shoot into the
first hole. If he does this he proceeds to the second, then to the
third, and wins the game; but this rarely occurs. If he misses the first
hole, the other players shoot their taws, and if neither of them enter
the hole, the first shot immediately does so; and then he has the
privilege either of proceeding to the second hole, or of killing the
other men by shooting at and hitting them, when they must either give up
their taws or drop one. Sometimes a player will kill all his antagonists
in succession without proceeding to any hole except the first, and thus
wins the game; at other times the game may be won by any of the players
killing their antagonists during any period of the game. It is a rule
that no one can “kill a taw” till he has been in the first hole.
[Illustration]
TIPSHARES, OR HANDERS.
This game is played by two or more players. To play it, a hole, of the
diameter of three inches, is first made on a smooth or level piece of
ground, and a line is marked at about seven feet from it. Each boy puts
down two, three, or four marbles, as may be agreed upon, and then the
whole party bowl for their throws, by retiring to three times the
distance already marked from the hole, and bowling one marble to it; the
order of throws being determined by the nearness that each boy’s marble
approaches the hole. When this is settled, the first thrower takes all
the marbles in his hand, and throws them in a cluster towards the hole.
If an even number falls in, such as 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, he wins all; but if
an odd number falls in, he loses all.
[Illustration: “MARBLES ARE OUT”]
[Illustration: TOPS]
The peg-top appears to be a modern invention, but the whip-top is of
great antiquity, it having been used in remote times by the Grecian
boys; it was well known at Rome in the days of Virgil, and in England as
early at least as the fourteenth century, when its form was the same as
it is now. Strutt, in his “Sports and Pastimes of the People of
England,” relates the following amusing anecdote of Prince Henry, the
eldest son of James I., which he met with in an old manuscript at the
British Museum: “The first time that the prince went to the town of
Stirling to meet the king, seeing a little without the gate of the town
a stack of corn in proportion not unlike to a top wherewith he used to
play, he said to some that were with him, ‘Lo, there is a goodly top!’
Whereupon one of them saying, ‘Why do you not play with it then?’ he
answered, ‘Set you it up for me and I will play with it.’”
THE HUMMING-TOP.
These cannot easily be made, but can very easily be purchased by those
who are so lucky as to have the money. They are made hollow, having at
their crown a peg, round which is wound a string; this, being pulled
through a kind of fork, gives motion to the top, and sets it
spinning--the fork and the string being left in the spinner’s hand. In
spinning the top, care should be taken to wind the string firmly and
evenly on the peg; and when it is pulled out, neither too much nor too
little force should be used, and a firm and steady hand should be
employed, while the top should be held in a perpendicular position. The
string should be drawn with a steadily increasing force, or the top will
not hum properly.
[Illustration]
PEG-TOP.
There are various kinds of Peg-tops, and they also vary in shape, some
being much rounder than others. Those are the best which are shaped like
a pear. There is also great variety as regards the shape and size of the
peg, which in some tops is short and thick, in others long and tapering.
Again, tops are made of different kinds of wood, some being made of
deal, others of elm, some of yew-tree, and others of boxwood. These last
are the Boxers so highly prized. Some of the very best tops are made of
lignum vitæ, with long, handsome pegs.
[Illustration]
SPANISH PEG-TOP.
[Illustration]
The Spanish peg-top is made of mahogany. It is shaped somewhat like a
pear; instead of a sharp iron peg, it has a small rounded knob at the
end. As it spins for a much longer time than the English peg-top, and
does not require to be thrown with any degree of force in order to set
it up, it is extremely well adapted for playing on flooring or pavement.
THE WHIP-TOP.
Whip-top is a capital sport when played by two persons; and is played by
first whirling the top into motion by turning it sharply with both
hands, and then by flogging it till its motion becomes very rapid. When
two persons play whip-top, the object should be for each to whip his top
to a certain goal, he who reaches it first being the victor.
CHIP-STONE.
This game is played by two boys, in the following manner: Two lines,
about six feet apart, are marked upon the ground, which ought to be
smooth and hard. Some small stones are then procured and placed midway
between the lines; they should not be larger than a small bean, and the
black and polished ones are the most sought after. The tops are now set
up spinning on the ground, and the players, being each provided with a
small wooden spoon, dexterously introduce them under the pegs of the
spinning tops, and then, with the top still spinning in the spoon, throw
the point of the peg against the stone, so as to chip it out of bounds;
he who does this the soonest being the victor. While the top continues
to spin, he may take it up with the spoon as many times as he can, and
when it spins out he must again wind up, pursuing the same plan till he
“chips out.”
_Directions._--In winding up the top do not wet the end of the line too
much, and take care to lay it closely and evenly within the grooves. In
throwing the top from you, the line must be pulled in with a peculiar
jerk of the hand, which practice alone can give. The string button
should be held close in the hand, between the last two fingers of the
hand. There is what is called an “underhand” way of spinning a top,
_i. e._ by holding it peg downwards, throwing it in a straight line
forward, and withdrawing the string; but as we dislike everything
underhand, we shall not recommend this practice any more than we shall
the Spanish tops, which are spun after this method.
[Illustration]
PEG-IN-THE-RING.
This game may be played by any number of boys. A ring about a yard in
diameter is first marked on the ground, and another ring surrounding
the first, and at a yard’s distance from it, is also marked. The players
must stand on this ring, and from it throw their tops. One player begins
by throwing his top spinning into the ring, and while it is there
spinning the other players are at liberty to peg at it as quickly as
they can. If none of them hit it while it is spinning, and if it rolls
out of the ring, the owner is allowed to take it up, and having wound
it, to peg at the others which may be still spinning in the circle.
Should any of the tops, when they cease spinning, fall within the ring,
they are considered dead, and are placed in the centre of the circle for
the others to peg at. The player who succeeds in striking any of the
tops out of the circle claims those so struck out. In some places each
player may ransom his top with a marble.
Sleeping tops are exposed to much danger in the play, for they offer a
fair mark to the “pegger,” and often get split, when the “peg” is taken
by the splitter as his trophy. Long-pegged tops are the best for the
game, for they lie more upon their sides after their fall, and, before
the spinning entirely ceases, are the more likely to spin out of the
ring.
There is a way of making the top spring out of the ring directly it has
touched the ground. Only long-pegged tops will execute this feat. It is
done by drawing the hand sharply towards the body just as the top leaves
the string. When the manœuvre is well executed, the top will drive any
opponent that it strikes entirely out of the ring, while it does not
remain within the dangerous circle itself for more than a few seconds.
[Illustration: “TOPS ARE IN.”]
[Illustration: MISCELLANEOUS TOYS]
There are some out-door games played with toys which do not fall under
any of our previous headings. These games we now lay before our reader,
together with a description of the toys in common use.
THE APPLE MILL.
The Apple Mill is made by boring a hole in a nut, just large enough to
pass a thin skewer through; the kernel should then be extracted, and
another hole bored in the side of the nut, as A in the annexed figure. A
skewer should next be cut or thinned, leaving it large enough at the top
to form a head, as shown in the cut. A piece of string is then to be
tied to the skewer, and passed through the hole in the side of the nut
at A, and an apple stuck on the end of the skewer. The mill being now
complete in all its works, it should be twirled round in the same manner
as the humming top to wind up the string, holding the nut stationary
between the forefinger and thumb of the left hand; when this is done,
the string must be pulled out quickly, and the mill will immediately
spin round. When an apple cannot be procured, a small potato will serve
equally well.
[Illustration]
AUNT SALLY.
This amusing game is of a very simple character, consisting essentially
in throwing at a small object. Aunt Sally herself is composed of a head
and bust cut out of a solid block of wood, and generally carved with
negro features, and painted black. In the middle of her nose, or between
her lips, a hole is bored, into which is stuck a short pipe. To break it
is the object of the game. An iron rod serves to support the wooden
figure at a proper elevation from the ground; and when in gala costume,
Aunt Sally is usually arrayed in a mob cap and a petticoat. The mode of
playing the game is as follows:--
The iron rod is stuck in the ground, a pipe put into the old lady’s
mouth, and a line drawn upon the ground, at twelve, sixteen, or more
paces. At this line the players stand, and each is furnished with three
short cudgels, about eighteen inches in length, which they hurl at Aunt
Sally’s head, in hopes of hitting the pipe. The best plan is to throw
the cudgels underhand, giving them a rapid rotatory movement at the same
time. Some persons insert an additional pipe into each ear; but this is
an innovation, and leads to careless throwing. It is better to hang a
sheet, net, or large cloth behind Aunt Sally, in order to catch the
sticks, and save the trouble of continually fetching them from a
distance. Within doors, the iron rod is furnished with a loaded
pedestal.
[Illustration]
BATON,
Or, “Throwing Sticks.” This very popular game among the Greeks was by
them called Kyndalismos. It was played with short batons, and required
considerable strength and quickness of eye. With us the game is played
in much the same manner as the Greeks played it. A stick is fixed in a
kind of cup or hole, about six inches deep, in a loose moist soil, and
the players consist of the Keeper and Throwers. The Keeper places on the
top of the stick some article, such as an apple or orange, and the
Throwers endeavour to knock it off, by throwing at it with short thick
sticks, or batons; whoever succeeds in doing this claims the prize,
whenever it falls without the hole. The Thrower will soon find in his
play, that to hit the stick is of little importance, as from the
perpendicular line of gravity which the apple or orange will take in its
descent, it is almost certain to fall into the hole. The aim, therefore,
should be to strike the object from the stick. This game is very common
at fairs and similar places, and three sticks, with articles upon them,
are usually set up, but which offer no advantage to the throwers.
CAT.
Tip Cat, although not altogether a nice pastime, ought to be noticed
here. It is a dangerous game, and should be played with great caution on
the part of the players. It is a rustic game, well known, and generally
goes by the name of Cat. It is played with a cudgel or bludgeon,
resembling that used for trap-ball. Its name is derived from a piece of
wood called a “Cat,” of about six inches in length, and an inch and
half, or two, in diameter, diminished from the middle to both the ends,
being of the shape of a spindle or double cone; by this contrivance the
places of the trap and ball are at once supplied, for when the Cat is
laid upon the ground, the player with his stick tips it at one end by a
smart stroke, which causes it to rise in the air with a rotatory motion,
high enough for him to strike it as it falls, in the same manner as he
would a ball.
[Illustration]
There are various methods of playing the game of Cat. The first is
exceedingly simple, and consists in making a large ring upon the ground,
in the middle of which the striker takes his station. His business is to
beat the Cat over the ring; if he fails in so doing he is out, and
another player takes his place; if he is successful, he judges with his
eye the distance the Cat is driven from the centre of the ring, and
calls for a number at pleasure to be scored for the game: if the number
demanded be found, upon measurement, to exceed the same number of
lengths of the bludgeon, he is out; on the contrary, if it does not, he
obtains his call.
The second method of playing Cat is to make four, six, or eight holes in
the ground, in a circular direction, and as nearly as possible at equal
distances from each other, and at every hole is placed a player with his
bludgeon. One of the opposite party who stands in the field tosses the
Cat to the batsman who is nearest him, and every time the Cat is struck
the players are obliged to change their situations, and run once from
one hole to another in succession. If the Cat be driven to any very
great distance, they continue to run in the same order, and claim a
score of one towards the game every time they quit one hole and run to
another. But if the Cat be stopped by their opponents, and thrown across
between any two of the holes, before the player, who has quitted one of
them, can reach the other, he is out.
CAT AND MOUSE.
This sport, which is of French origin, is for two players only. Both
being blindfolded, they are tied to the ends of a long string, which is
fastened by a loose knot in the middle to a post, and, as the knot is
very slightly tied, the players are enabled to move about with facility.
The player who takes the part of the “mouse” scrapes two pieces of wood
together, so as to make a grating noise, and for which purpose the edges
of one of the pieces of wood are notched: the sound attracts the other
player, who represents the “cat,” and he immediately uses his utmost
efforts to catch his prey, by following the noise as well as he can, the
“mouse” at the same time struggling about, in order to escape being
caught.
KNOCK-’EM-DOWN,
[Illustration]
A similar game to Aunt Sally, but a simpler one, is made by scooping a
hole in the ground, and placing in it an upright stick; on the top of it
is placed a stone, or similar substance. The player then retires to a
distance, and flings at the stone with cudgels or balls, the latter
being preferable. If the stone falls into the hole, the player only
counts one towards the game; but if it falls outside the hole, he counts
two. This is a capital game for the seaside, and can be played upon the
sands. This game is almost similar to Baton.
PEA-SHOOTERS.
The pea-shooter is a tube of metal, through which a pea may be propelled
with great force by a puff of air from the mouth. The ordinary tin
pea-shooters sold in the shops are comparatively worthless. We should
advise the reader to procure a straight piece of brass tube from two to
four feet long, and get a brazier to tin one end of it, so that the
brass may not corrode when placed in the mouth. With such a tube peas,
pellets of clay, and other projectiles may be shot with great precision
to a considerable distance. The game of puff and dart is played with a
long brass tube, and a small dart having a needle point. The dart is
blown through the tube at a target, on which there are divisions bearing
different numbers.
QUOITS.
The game of Quoits is very excellent. It seems to have derived its name
from the ancient discus, and with us in the present day is a circular
plate of iron perforated in the middle, not always of one size, but
larger or smaller to suit the strength or convenience of the several
candidates.
[Illustration]
To play at Quoits an iron pin called a hob is driven into the ground
within a few inches of the top, and at the distance of eighteen or
twenty yards, as may be agreed upon, a second pin of iron is also fixed.
The players are generally divided into parties, and the players pitch
the quoits from hob to hob; those who pitch the nearest reckoning
towards the game. But the determination is discriminately made; for
instance, if a quoit belonging to A lies nearest to the hob, and a quoit
belonging to B the second, A can claim but one towards the game, though
all his other quoits be nearer to the hob than all the other quoits of
B, because one quoit of B being the second nearest to the hob, cuts out,
as it is called, all behind it. If no such quoit had interfered, then A
would have reckoned all his as one each. Having all cast their quoits,
the players walk to the opposite side, and determine the state of the
play. Then taking their stand there, throw their quoits back again, and
continue to do so alternately, till the end of the game. A quoit that
falls with its flat side upward does not count.
[Illustration]
NINE-PINS.
[Illustration]
This game, as its name denotes, is played by means of nine pins, which
are set up in a regular order, the aim of the players being to throw
down as many as possible in the fewest attempts. Each player is
permitted to throw three times at the pins, and if he can knock them all
down in two throws, it is called a “single,” and they are again set up
for his last throw; or, if he can knock them down in one throw, it is
called a “double,” and they are set up. A heavy wooden ball, called a
“bowl,” is used to throw at the pins.
SKITTLES.
[Illustration]
Skittles is played in a manner somewhat similar to the preceding game,
but the number of pins is only four. These are very large, and are
arranged on a square framework, so as to present one of the angles to
the player. The bowl used for playing this game is of the shape of a
cheese, and is usually made of lignum vitæ, as being very heavy and hard
wood. The game requires more bodily strength than nine-pins, as the bowl
must be thrown upon the skittles, and not rolled up to them.
The best play is to throw the bowl with a round-handed swing of the arm,
so as to strike the nearest skittle at the right of its upper third. The
ball then springs to the second skittle, and from this generally twists
to the third, while the fourth skittle is sent down by the roll of the
one first struck. It is very difficult to make this throw successfully,
and many players prefer driving down the first and third skittles with a
straightforward shoot, and then making their second ball spring across
from the second to the fourth. This latter stroke appears very
difficult, but is soon learnt; the great point being to throw the bowl
high, so that it may drop as perpendicularly as possible on the left of
the upper third of the second skittle. In the long run, the constant
repetition of this practice will overbalance occasional brilliancy of
play.
DUTCH-PINS.
[Illustration]
This game is nothing more than a modification of nine-pins; the pins
being higher, and the centre one bearing the name of king, and a crown
upon its head. The great point in this game is to strike the king out of
the board without knocking down any of the subjects. If this can be
done, the game is won. In all other cases, the king counts for no more
than any of his subjects.
THROWING THE HAMMER.
This is a good athletic sport, but the Hammer can scarcely be called a
toy. The hammer used by rustics is generally the sledge-hammer of the
blacksmith, with a head weighing some twelve or fourteen pounds. The
players are all single and do not join in parties, and the prize is
given to him who makes the greatest number of long throws in a dozen. It
does not merely require strength to throw the sledge-hammer, but a nice
calculation of the area which the Hammer has to pass over in its flight,
combined with the strength of the thrower.
THE BOOMERANG.[1]
[Illustration]
This instrument is a curved piece of wood, flat on one side, and
slightly rounded on the other. It is used by the natives of New South
Wales, who can throw it so dexterously as to kill a man behind a tree,
where he may have fled for safety. It should be held horizontally in
throwing it, and cast by bringing the arm backwards, and after making a
variety of curves it will come back again to the person who send it. If
skilfully thrown, it may be made to go in almost any direction the
thrower pleases.
[1] The instrument represented in the cut is the Australian boomerang.
Those used in England have a sharper curve.
THE SKIP-JACK, OR JUMP-JACK.
The skip-jack is manufactured out of the merry-thought of a goose, which
must, of course, be well cleaned before it is used. A strong doubled
string must be tied at the two ends of the bone, and a piece of wood
about three inches long put between the strings, as shown in the
marginal illustration, and twisted round until the string acquires the
force of a spring. A bit of shoemaker’s wax should then be put in the
hollow of the bone at the spot where the end of the piece of wood
touches, and when the wood is pressed slightly on the wax the jack is
set; it adheres but a very short time, and then springs forcibly up. The
skip-jack is placed on the ground with the wax downwards, and in some
parts of the country it is usual to call out, “Up, Jack!” or “Jump,
Jack!” just before it springs.
[Illustration]
THE SLING.
[Illustration]
The art of slinging, or of casting stones with a sling, is of very high
antiquity. We see it represented on the Nimroud monuments, and the feat
of the divine youth, David, is familiar to every one. In the earliest
times there were bands of slingers, and probably whole regiments of
them, and there is little doubt that the art of slinging preceded that
of archery. The former seemed, however, to belong to the Asiatic, as the
latter did to the European nations. Our Saxon ancestors, also, seem to
have been skilful in their manner of holding the sling. Its form is
preserved in several of their paintings, and the manner in which it was
used by them, as far back as the eighth century, may be seen in the
annexed cut. We have also sufficient testimony to prove, that men armed
with slings formed part of the Anglo-Norman soldiery.
[Illustration]
In country districts, slinging of stones is a common sport; and the
sling so used consists simply of a piece of leather cut into the
subjoined form, to which are affixed two cords, one having a loop. In
using it, leather is suffered to hang from the strong downwards; the
slinger places his little finger in the loop, and holds the other end in
his hand, and then putting the stone in the hole of the sling at A,
which prevents its falling, whirls the whole round for three or four
times, to obtain a strong centrifugal force, and suddenly letting go of
that part of the sling held in his hand, the stone flies forward with
inconceivable rapidity, making a twanging sound in the ear as it flies.
Slinging is a very good exercise for imparting strength to the arm, but
young slingers should be very careful where they send their stones, or
they may do much damage.
[Illustration]
If any of my readers may wish to construct a better kind of sling, they
may do it in the following manner:--Get a currier to cut a piece of very
strong buckskin leather in this shape, the centre being cut into bars.
Two long strips of the same leather are then cut of this shape,
[Illustration]
two cuts being made along them, so as to leave three leather cords.
These are plaited together, and the flat ends firmly sewn to the
centrepiece. The shape will then be this:
[Illustration]
A sling made on this principle will carry a stone of a pound weight. The
loop and point should be whipped with silk. The accuracy that can be
obtained with such a weapon is astonishing, only the missiles should
always be leaden bullets of the same weight--two or three ounces being
the best average weight. At the school where my boyhood was spent, we
used to send such bullets just over the weather-cock of one of the
loftiest spires in England, and stripped a chestnut-tree of its
blossoms. One year there was a solitary blossom on the top of the tree,
which defied our efforts for many days. The blossoms were soon knocked
off, but the green stalk resisted the blows for a long time. It was
battered to pieces, but bent to the strokes, and had to be knocked off
in fragments. I mention this to show the accuracy of aim that can be
attained by practice.
WALKING ON STILTS.
[Illustration]
Among the Swiss, and in several districts in the South of France,
walking on stilts is not only an amusing, but a useful, practice, as by
means of these crane-like legs men and women transform themselves into
the order of “Waders,” emulating the long-legged storks and herons, and
can cross over marshes and flooded grounds without wetting their feet.
Stilts are easily made, being nothing but a pair of poles, with a wooden
step at the sides for the feet to stand on. The poles are kept in their
proper place by the hands. A little practice will soon render a youth
“easy on his stilts,” and they may be made an amusing and healthy
exercise.
[Illustration]
THE SUCKER.
The sucker is a toy of the simplest construction imaginable; it is made
by merely cutting a circular piece out of some tolerably stout leather,
boring a hole in its centre, and then passing a string through the hole,
taking the precaution to make a large knot at the end of the string, to
prevent its being drawn completely through the hole. Before using the
sucker, it must be steeped in water until it becomes quite soft and
pliable. If its smooth, moist surface be now pressed so closely against
the flat side of a stone or other body, that the air cannot enter
between them, the weight of the atmosphere pressing on the upper surface
of the leather will cause it to adhere so strongly, that the stone, if
its weight be proportioned to the extent of the disc of leather, may be
raised by lifting the string. If the sucker could act with full effect,
every square inch of its surface would support about the weight of
fourteen pounds. The feet of the common house-fly are provided with
minute natural suckers, by aid of which the insect is enabled to run up
a smooth pane of glass and walk along the ceiling.
* * * * *
Our young readers will in all probability remark that we have laid but
little stress on games with toys, and that comparatively few toys have
been mentioned. We have done so intentionally, because the book is
written expressly for boys, and those, English boys. Now an English boy
always likes a toy that will _do_ something. For example, he cares not
one farthing for all the elegant imitations of guns in the world, as
long as he can have his pea-shooter; and the walnut stock, the
glittering decorations, and the burnished but useless barrel of the toy
gun, are nothing in his eyes, when compared with the plain tin barrel of
his beloved pea-shooter, which will throw a missile with rifle-like
accuracy of aim.
For these reasons, we have mentioned but very few toys, looking with
contempt upon those innumerable fabrications that find their place in
the windows of toy-shops, and in ninety-nine cases out of a hundred are
only purchased for the immediate gratification of spoilt children, who
unconsciously illustrate the real objects of toys, by pulling them to
pieces, and converting the fragments to unexpected uses.
[Illustration: END OF TOYS.]
EASY GAMES WITH TOYS.
INDOOR.
There are many elaborate toys which are not included under this head, as
they are always sold with printed directions for using them. The games
which follow are played with toys of the simplest construction, many of
which may be easily manufactured by the reader.
BATTLEDORE AND SHUTTLECOCK.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
This game is so well known as to require but little remark. The
Battledores may be purchased at the toy-shops, as may also be the Cocks;
but many of our young friends who know anything about carpentry may
easily make both for themselves. The Battledores can be cut out with a
key-hole saw into the subjoined shape. They should be about a quarter of
an inch thick, the handles about six inches long, and the “spades” of
about five inches long, and five broad. The Shuttlecock may be made by
cutting a piece of cork into the following form, and placing a small
brass nail at its lower end. The top should be plumed with five feathers
standing outwards from the rim, being fastened by a little gum into
small holes cut therein. The practice of the game is for two players to
beat the Cock backwards and forwards from one to the other, and the one
that lets it fall, by failing to strike it with his bat, is to give to
the other a pea, bead, pin, or some other small article. Some
foreigners, particularly the Chinese, play at this game with the toes,
hands, elbows, and other parts of the body, and will keep the Cocks up
in a most amusing manner, in the midst of many grotesque gestures.
BANDILOR.
This toy is simply a wheel or pulley of hard wood, having a very deep
groove, round which a strong but fine cord is wound. The player holds
the free end of the cord between his finger and thumb, gives a rapid
rotatory motion to the bandilor, by allowing it to fall towards the
ground; by a sudden jerk he now tightens the cord in the groove, and the
toy rises towards his hand. A little practice will enable any one to
keep the bandilor in motion for a considerable time by causing it to
rise and fall alternately.
CUP AND BALL.
A ball of ivory or hard wood is attached to a stem of the same
substance, having a shallow cup at one end and a point at the other. The
player holds the stem in his right hand, as shown in the figure; and,
having caused the ball to revolve by twirling it between the finger and
thumb of his left, he jerks it up and catches it either in the cup, or
upon the spike, to receive which a hole is made in the ball. We need
scarcely say that the latter feat can only be performed by a skilful
player. Cup and Ball was the favourite pastime at the court of Henry
III. of France.
[Illustration]
THE CUTWATER.
The Cutwater is a circular piece of sheet lead, notched like a saw round
the edge, and having two holes pierced in it at some distance from each
other, through which is passed a piece of string, the two ends being
afterwards tied together. The annexed figure shows this toy, and the way
it is to be held by the player. To set the Cutwater in action, the
double string must be alternately pulled and slackened. Every time the
string is relaxed the disc revolves, in consequence of the impetus it
has acquired from the previous pull; and every time the string is
tightened, it whirls round in an opposite direction, as the double
string is then untwisted. If the edge of this toy be dipped in water, it
may be made to sprinkle the bystanders and the player; hence its title
of “Cutwater.”
[Illustration]
FOX AND GEESE.
[Illustration]
Fifteen ordinary draughtsmen compose the flock of geese. The fox may
either be two draughtsmen placed one upon another, or any small object
which may be at hand. The game is played on a board marked as shown in
the annexed engraving. The fox is placed in the middle of the board, and
the geese on the points on one side of it, as shown in the illustration.
The game is to confine the fox to some spot on the board, so that there
shall be either the edge of the board or else two rows of men round him.
When the fox cannot escape, the game is done, and the player of the
geese wins; but when one of the geese is left on a point next to that
occupied by the fox, and is not supported by another goose behind, or by
the edge of the board, the fox can take it, and by jumping over its head
to the next space, he may, perhaps, escape the persecutions of some of
the others, as all the geese are compelled to move forwards towards the
end of the board that was unoccupied at the commencement of the game.
The fox is allowed to move either backwards or forwards. Neither fox nor
goose must be moved more than one space at a time. If the fox neglects
to take when he has a chance, he is huffed, and one of the captured
geese is restored to the back of the board. The fox should avoid getting
into the lower square of the board if possible, as he will find it
difficult to extricate himself from a position which can be so easily
blockaded.
[Illustration]
There is another method of playing fox and geese on a chessboard;
namely, with four white men, representing the geese, and one black one,
representing the fox.
The geese are ranged on the four white squares nearest one player, and
the fox may be placed where his owner pleases. The best place for him is
that marked in the diagram, as he can manœuvre in a very puzzling way.
The geese can only move forward, and the fox moves either way. The
object of the geese is to pen up the fox so that he cannot move, and the
fox has to break through.
If the game is properly played, the geese must win, the secret being to
keep them all in line as much as possible. The fox tries to prevent this
plan from being followed up; and if he can succeed in doubling the
geese, or getting one to stand before another, he is nearly sure to pass
through them.
GOOSE.
To play at Goose a board must be made containing sixty-three circles,
placed so as to form some resemblance to the shape of a goose, and
numbered consecutively. Two dice and a box, and as many counters as
there are players, are required. Each player in turn throws the dice,
and according to the number he throws, so he reckons, counting from No.
1, and placing his counter on the number he obtains. The player who
first reaches sixty-three wins the game. But mark; he must throw
sixty-three exactly, or else he has to count the surplus number back
from sixty-three. For instance, suppose when at sixty he throws eight,
this makes sixty-eight, five over sixty-three. The player must,
therefore, take five back from sixty-three, and leave his counter at
fifty-eight. The game is called Goose from the fact that a goose is
usually drawn on every fourth and fifth ring; and the player who lands
on one of these, scores double the number he has just thrown. Several
obstacles occur, however, on the journey. On one ring is drawn a bridge,
to pass which a toll of one counter must be paid. A little farther on is
an inn, where the player halts for two turns and pays two to the pool;
but if he fall into the pond, the unfortunate wight has to stay there
until another player tumbles in too, when he is allowed to proceed on
his journey. The last hindrance is a gloomy prison, in which the same
rule holds good, except that the relieving party, instead of going on as
in the case of the pond, remains in durance vile until somebody else
enters the prison-house. Other obstacles may be inserted at the players’
option.
HEAD, BODY, AND LEGS.
One player takes an oblong piece of paper, and having divided it into
three equal parts by folding, he sketches a comic _head_, either with
pen or pencil, in the upper space; he then doubles the paper over, and
hands it to another, who draws a _body_ in the middle compartment, folds
the paper over once more, and passes it to a third, who completes the
figure by drawing a pair of _legs_ in the lower space. The player who
draws the head, must continue the neck a little way into the middle
space, and he who sketches the body must just commence the legs in the
lower compartment; this arrangement insures the connexion of head, body,
and legs. Our first illustration shows how the paper is to be folded
over for drawing the different parts of a figure. Each player should be
provided with a pen or pencil, and a few pieces of paper; having drawn a
head, he should fold his sketch in a proper manner and pass it to his
right-hand neighbour; in this way a number of figures may be finished
simultaneously. A knowledge of drawing is not expected of any player, as
the crudest notion of a head, a body, or a pair of legs, will fully meet
the requirements of the game. Those who have never played at Head,
Body, and Legs, can have no idea of the absurd combinations that spring
from the independent labours of the different players; thus, a man’s
body will sometimes get joined to a donkey’s head, and be supported by
the legs of an ostrich.
[Illustration]
KNUCKLE-BONES.
This game is played with five little bones from a sheep’s trotter. One
player tosses up the knuckle-bones, sometimes one at a time, sometimes
all together, and catches them either in the palm or on the back of his
hand, according to certain rules. Should he fail to perform one of the
tricks properly, he must hand the bones to his opponent, who attempts to
go through the same series of manœuvres with them. When the first player
regains the bones through the unskilful play of his adversary, he once
more attempts the feat he failed to accomplish before, and if he
succeeds he tries to pass through the subsequent stages of the game. The
player who first arrives at the end of the regulated series of tricks
wins the game. It would be impossible to give the reader a clear idea of
the manner of performing each trick without the aid of diagrams. In
almost every school may be found an experienced player at knuckle-bones,
whose directions will be of more value than any remarks we can make,
though we were to devote a couple of pages to this pastime. In some
parts of England a similar game, called “Jackstones,” is played with
small round pebbles.
MERELLES, OR NINE MEN’S MORRIS.
[Illustration]
This is an ancient English game, and ought not to be laid aside; so we
resuscitate it for the benefit of young England. It used to be played in
England on the ground with stones, but may be played best on a table
indoors. The form of the merelle-table, and the lines upon it, as it
appeared in the fourteenth century, are here represented. These lines
are still the same. The black spots at every angle and intersection of
the lines are the places for the men to be laid upon. The men are
different in form and colour, for distinction sake. The manner of
playing is briefly thus: Two persons, having each of them nine pieces,
or men, lay them down alternately, one by one, upon the spots; and the
business of either party is to prevent his antagonist from placing three
of his pieces so as to form a row of three without the intervention of
an opposing piece. If a row be formed, he that made it is at liberty to
take up one of his competitor’s pieces from any part he thinks most to
his advantage; excepting he has made a row, which must not be touched if
he have another piece upon the board that is not a component part of
that row. When all the pieces are laid down, they are played backwards
and forwards in any direction that the lines run, but can only move from
one spot to another at one time. He that takes all his antagonist’s
pieces, is the conqueror.
PAPER DART.
[Illustration]
To form this dart you must take an oblong piece of paper, and fold it
down the middle lengthwise; then double each of the lower corners up to
the middle crease, and fold the doubled paper over to the same mark; you
must now turn each folded side outwards, and your dart will resemble the
annexed figure. The paper dart, when thrown from the hand, rarely hits
the object aimed at, as it generally makes a graceful curve in passing
through the air. Boys sometimes amuse themselves by fighting sham
battles with these harmless weapons.
THE POPGUN.
[Illustration]
The best Popguns are made of a strong straight piece of elder-tree,
which ought to be cut from an inner branch, and should be about six
inches long. The pith of this should be pierced out by an iron ramrod
fitting the hole; and when the inside is made thoroughly smooth by
rubbing the rod up and down, it is ready for use. The pellets are made
with moistened tow--brown paper is a nasty thing to put into the mouth,
and we shall never advise the use of it. When the pellet is prepared, it
should be laid over the mouth of the gun in such a quantity as to
require squeezing and plugging in. The first pellet should be driven
through the gun to its other end; the second pellet is to be driven in,
in a similar manner to the first, and then it is forced through the gun:
the air between the pellets being incompressible beyond a certain point,
forces out the lower pellet with a loud “pop;” hence the the term
“Popgun,” which has been applied to them. Popgun-playing is not a very
healthy exercise, the pressing of the rammer against the pit of the
stomach frequently leading to derangement of that organ. To prevent
this, the lad who plays at popgun should have a small round board slung
over his neck by a string, hanging as low as the pit of his stomach,
like a “conductor’s ticket,” against which he should press the handle of
his ramrod when he fires off his popgun.
PUSH-PIN.
This trifling game is usually played by two boys. Each player places a
pin on the table, and then endeavours to push one pin across the other
with his finger-nail; should he succeed, both pins become his property.
At starting, the pins must be placed head to head, and the players push
alternately. Sometimes each player puts down two, three, or even more
pins.
SCHIMMEL.
To play this amusing game, which is of German origin, it is necessary to
be furnished with five cards, on which are painted the figures of a
white horse, an inn, a bell, a hammer, and a bell and hammer; with eight
little ivory cubes marked on one side only, six numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
6, and the other two marked, one with a bell and the other with a
hammer; with a box for throwing the dice, a hammer for disposing of the
cards by auction, and a proportionate quantity of counters for the
players. The cards, dice-box, and auctioneer’s hammer, are shown in the
annexed illustration. Any youth who can draw may easily prepare the
cards; the cubes may be procured from an ivory-worker’s and may be
marked with ink. The game can be played by as many persons as are
present. The counters are to be distributed by one of the players who
holds the office of cashier, their value having been previously
determined upon by the players. This being done, twelve are to be
deposited by each player in the pool. The cashier then disposes of the
five cards separately to the highest bidders, the produce of which is
also to be placed in the pool. The white horse is by far the most
valuable card, and therefore fetches the highest price in counters. The
inn ranks next, and is usually purchased by the most speculative player,
as its value depends upon circumstances. The bell and the hammer
generally fetch the same number of counters, these cards being equally
valuable, and the card upon which both bell and hammer are painted
fetches about half the number that is given for one of the single
figures. The bidders are not bound to confine themselves to the number
of counters dealt out to them at the beginning of the game; should they
exceed it, they may pay the remainder of the debt by instalments out of
their receipts in the course of the game.
[Illustration]
Each person is at liberty to purchase as many cards as he may think
proper.
The dice are then to be thrown by the players alternately, beginning
with the holder of the white horse, any one being allowed to dispose of
his throw to the highest bidder. When all blanks are thrown, each of the
players pays one to the holder of the white horse, and he pays one to
the inn. If with the blanks the bell, or hammer, or the bell and hammer
together are thrown, the possessor of the card so thrown pays one to the
white horse.
When numbers accompany the bell, hammer, or bell and hammer, the cashier
is to pay the counters, to the amount of numbers thrown, to the holder
of such card, from the pool; but if numbers are thrown unaccompanied,
the cashier then pays to the thrower.
When the pool is nearly empty there arises an advantage to the inn, for
if a player throws a figure greater than the quantity contained in the
pool he pays the overplus to the inn; thus: suppose 4 are in the pool,
if the players throws 10, he is to pay 6 to the inn; and if 2 are
thrown, those 2 are paid to him from the pool, and so on till a figure
is thrown which clears the pool, and so concludes the game.
If all blanks are thrown after the inn begins to receive, the players
pay nothing, but the owner of the white horse pays one to the inn; and
should the bell, &c. be thrown with the blanks, the holder of that card
pays one to the inn; and if numbers accompany the bell, &c. the holder
of that card must pay to the inn the number thrown above those remaining
in the pool. Nuts are sometimes used as counters, and the players keep
their winnings. Sometimes the cashier receives a halfpenny or a penny a
dozen for the counters, and when the game is finished the receipts are
divided among the players according to their winnings. Those who do not
hold cards frequently find themselves richer at the close of the game
than their speculative companions, whose winnings do not always exceed
the price paid for their cards.
SPELICANS.
Spelicans are made of thin pieces of ivory cut into different forms,
some being like spears, others saws, bearded hooks, &c.; of some of the
patterns there are duplicates, whilst of others only one. Each pattern
has a value assigned to it, the lowest being five, and the highest
forty; the numbers do not run in regular succession--as five, six,
seven, eight--but irregularly, as five, sixteen, twenty-five. Hooks,
made of bone, are used pointers.
The game is played as follows:--One player should take up all the
spelicans in a bundle, and holding them at a little height from the
table, let them fall down in a confused heap on it; each player must
then try alternately to take away a spelican from the heap without
moving any of the others, and this it is generally very easy to
accomplish at the first, for the top ones are mostly unconnected with
the rest, but as the players proceed it requires some tact to jerk them
out, with the help of the hook, made pointed for that purpose. The
player who, at the entire removal of the heap, has the greatest number
of spelicans, wins the game. Should any of the spelicans, while being
removed shake the others, they must be put back into the heap again. It
is usual in some places, instead of each player removing a spelican
alternately, for one to continue lifting up the spelicans until he
happens to shake one, when another player takes his turn until he in
like manner fails, when another tries his fortune; and so the game
continues, until all the spelicans are withdrawn.
PART II.
Athletic Sports and Manly Exercises:
INCLUDING
ANGLING,
ARCHERY,
BOXING,
CANOES AND CANOEING,
CRICKET,
CROQUET,
DRIVING,
FENCING,
FIVES,
FOOT-BALL,
GOLF,
GYMNASTICS,
HOCKEY,
RACKETS,
RIDING,
ROWING,
SAILING,
SKATING,
SLIDING,
SWIMMING,
TRAINING.
[Illustration: ATHLETIC SPORTS.]
[Illustration]
ANGLING.
“When I was a mere schoolboy,
Ere yet I learnt my book,
I felt an itch for angling
In every little brook.
“An osier rod, some thread for line,
A crooked pin for hook;
And, thus equipp’d, I angled
In every little brook.
“Where sticklebacks and minnows
Each day I caught in store,
With stone-roaches and miller’s thumbs:--
These brooks afford no more.
“But I a little angler,
With crooked pin for hook,
Would shun each noisy wrangler,
To fish the little brook.”
What can be more delightful than angling? Not indeed so much on account
of the fish we may catch, but for the pleasantness of the recreation
itself, for the cool streams, the shady trees, the little sunny nooks,
the tiny or gigantic cascades, the meandering rills, the still pools,
“with sedges overhung;” the picturesque mill-wheels, the deep
mill-ponds, “smooth sheeted by the flood;” and above all, for the
hair-breadth escapes, for the duckings, for the hazards, for the
triumphs. We do not wonder at boys being fond of angling, it is almost
an instinct with them, and has long been a favourite amusement with boys
of all degrees, ages and constitutions. Therefore we shall be somewhat
comprehensive in our notices of this interesting sport, that every boy
who can bait a hook and hold a line may be an angler if he will.
A WORD ABOUT FISH.
First, however, let us say a word about fish in general, before we come
to fish in particular. Fish or fishes are, to speak scientifically, a
class of vertebrated animals (having a backbone) inhabiting the water;
which breathe through the medium of that fluid by means of branchiæ or
gills, instead of lungs; which swim by means of fins, and are mostly
covered with scales. They are also generally furnished with a white
membraneous bag close to the backbone, called the air bladder, by the
dilatation or compression of which it is supposed they can rise or sink
in the water at pleasure. All parts of their bodies seem to aid them in
swimming in the water; their fins, their tails, and the undulation of
their back-bones assist progression, and their whole structure is as
much adapted for swimming as that of a bird is for flight.
The fins of fish consist of thin elastic membrane, supported by bony
rays, and are denominated according to their position--_dorsal_ on the
back, _pectoral_ on the breast, _ventral_ near the vent, _anal_ that
between the vent and the tail, and _caudal_ the tail fins. The dorsal
and ventral fins appear to balance the fish, and the pectoral to push it
forward; while the tail fins are the grand instruments of motion, and
enable the creature to dart forward almost as rapidly as the bullet from
a gun.
With regard to the senses of fishes, the eye holds the first place; but
this is best adapted for seeing under water. Of the organ of hearing
there is no outward sign. The organ of taste is thought to be very
unsensitive, and the sense of touch but slightly developed. To preserve
their own existence, and to transmit it to their posterity, seems to be
their only enjoyment; they move forward in pursuit of whatever they can
swallow, conquer, or enjoy, and their insatiable appetite impels them to
encounter every danger, whilst to their rapacity there seems to be no
bound. A single pike has been known to devour a hundred roach in three
days. The fecundity of fish is prodigious. The number of eggs in the
codfish often amounts to more than three millions; those of flounders
are above a million, of the mackarel 500,000, of the sole 100,000, and
of the lobster 20,000; but the sturgeon is far more productive than any
of these, as it has been known to have more than twenty millions of
eggs!
Without saying any more about “Fish in the abstract,” as the angler
called his “catch,” when he returned without one, we must go to the art
of “catching fish;” and the first thing to be attended to is the
necessary fishing apparatus, which may be increased to any extent; but
the _young_ angler would be wise to limit his stock as much as possible.
We have fished many a hundred miles of water, and killed many a thousand
of fish, with no better equipment than this:--One rod of about fourteen
feet long, with three tops,--one stiff top, for bottom fishing and
trolling, and two for fly-fishing. Two reels or winches, one holding a
silk and hair line of thirty-five yards in length for fly-fishing, and
the other holding a similar line, of forty yards, but much stronger, for
bottom fishing, trolling, &c. One moderate-sized creel or fishing
basket. One tin bait-box for worms or gentles; one tin live-bait can for
carrying pike baits or minnows; and one strong _bag_ for carrying
ground-bait. A landing-net; some shoemaker’s wax in a piece of soft
leather; a large clasp-knife; a pair of sharp-pointed scissors; a
pocket-book, the centre filled with leaves of flannel to hold flies, and
the remainder fitted up with gut, hooks, silk, baiting-needles, a pair
of small pliers, split shot, floats, &c.
[Illustration]
ABOUT THE ROD.
The rod is a material article in the young angler’s catalogue, and much
care should be taken to procure a good one. The fishing-tackle shops
keep a great variety, made of bamboo cane, hazel, hickory, and other
kinds of wood. Rods are of different lengths, some fitted as
walking-canes, and others made to pack in canvass bags; the latter are
preferred, because you may have them any length, and they are more true.
Those made of bamboo cane are the best for general angling; but the rods
made of the white cane much superior for fine fishing, particularly for
roach, being very light in weight, but stiff.
CHOOSING THE ROD.
In choosing a rod (not a school rod, for no one likes to choose that),
observe that it is perfectly straight, when all the joints are put
together and that it gradually tapers from the butt to the top, and is
from twelve to sixteen feet long. A bad rod is likely to snap in
striking a heavy fish. Rods fitted with several tops are at once the
best and most convenient. Some anglers have one rod for trolling,
another for barbel, perch, or other heavy fish, as well as one for
fly-fishing--which boys may have when they become men--but a thoroughly
good rod will suit the juvenile for all purposes. We have now one with
which we can fish for anything, from a bleak to a pike, by only changing
the top and second joints.
A good trolling rod should be made of the choicest stout and
well-seasoned bamboo cane, from fourteen to sixteen feet in length. When
trolling with the gorge, or live-bait fishing, a long rod is necessary,
to enable the angler to drop in his baited hook over high sedges,
rushes, &c. as also when the water is bright, for he should then keep as
far away from it as he can, which a long rod enables him to do while
dipping, casting, or spinning his bait. If either a jack or pike see
him, it is very rare indeed that he will take the bait; and again, with
a long rod you will be able to drop your baited hook in some very likely
place for jack or pike, such as a small hole, division, or clear place
among a bed of weeds, in a river or any other water where there are any
weeds.
There is some difference of opinion among anglers about the number of
rings necessary for _trolling rods_: those who have their line on a
thumb winder, or on a bank runner, seldom place more than two or three
rings on their rod, and others have only one large ring at the top; but
if a winch is used, there should be a ring to every joint including the
butt; make each ring of double twist wire, fixed so as always to stand
out, and nearly large enough to admit the top of your little finger; the
top joint should have two rings, the top one nearly three times the size
of the others; this prevents any obstruction of the line running, which
is of material consequence. When not in use, rods should be kept nicely
stowed in a moderately dry place, and they ought to be well scraped and
revarnished every three years; should the joints become loose by
shrinking, they should be slightly moistened. Should any accident befall
a rod while fishing, and you should not have a spare top with you, your
only remedy will be to splice your rod. To do this the ends of the
broken pieces for about two inches must be laid parallel to each other,
and then tightly bound together with waxed silk, or very strong yellow
hempen twine.
LINES OR BOTTOMS.
Next to the rod the line is of the utmost importance. Good lines should
be well twisted. The twisted lines should be made wholly of silk, or
silk hair, but those made of gut are the strongest and best for young
anglers; the twisted hair are the cheapest, and the single horsehair the
finest. The young angler will find a line of about four yards in length
the most useful. A single gut line, with a small porcupine float, is
commonly useful for general fishing; the plaited silk lines are the best
for trolling, and are less inclined to break or tangle than the
twisted.
SHOTTING THE LINE
The line must be shotted, that the float may partially sink in the
water; and in putting on the shots, place them all together within three
inches of the bottom loop of the line; to which loop fix the loop of the
hair or gut to which the hook is tied. When you make a line of silk,
gut, or hair, remember it must be always finest at the bottom, where the
hook is fastened, very gradually increasing in thickness to the top.
THE FLOAT.
There are various kinds of floats, each adapted for different kinds of
fishing. The principal are: 1. Tip-capped floats; 2. Cork floats; 3.
Plugged floats. The tip-capped floats are made of several pieces of
quills, or of reed for the middle, and ivory or tortoiseshell for the
top and bottom, and narrow at each end, gradually increasing in
circumference to the middle. They are superior to all others for angling
in waters which are not very rapid, particularly in roach fishing, as
the least movement or fine bite sinks them below the water. The
tip-capped float is also best for pond fishing for carp and tench, as it
requires but few shot to sink it, and consequently disturbs the water
but little when cast. The young angler should note that the caps which
fix the lines to the float are not rough at the edge, as this roughness
chafes and weakens a fine line; should this be the case, he should
smooth them before use. The best caps are made of gutta-percha.
[Illustration]
_Cork Floats_ are generally made of quills at the top, with a piece of
cork, which is burned or bored in the middle to admit the quill, and
then filed or ground down smooth and painted. The bottom is plugged with
wood, and has a ring to let the line pass through. Cork floats are well
calculated to fish in heavy or rapid streams, as they require a great
many shot to sink them, which weight of shot prevents the baited hook
from passing too rapidly over the bottom. Cork floats are made of
various sizes and forms; instead of common quills, some introduce the
quills of the porcupine, which make an excellent strong float. Except
for live-bait fishing a tapering cork float is preferable to a round
one.
_Plugged Floats._--These kind of floats are the cheapest, and made of
indifferent quills, some of them of one goose quill with a wooden plug
at the bottom, from which they take their name: they are very apt to
loosen by the plug coming out. They are often used by the young angler,
because they are cheap; but we may say in the words of the ancient
Roman, “Bad is the best.”
REELS OR WINCHES.
A reel or winch is a most necessary addition to the rod and line, as it
enables you to vary the length of your line at pleasure, and to play
your fish. The best winches are those to fix in a groove on the rod, and
are fastened with brass ferrules made for the purpose on the butt,
because you can fasten such a winch to any sized joint.
[Illustration]
There are three kinds of winches, check, multipliers, and plain: the
multiplying winch is apt soon to get out of order, unless carefully and
constantly oiled, and is otherwise the least efficient and most
expensive of the three. I would recommend young anglers at first, to
purchase a plain and strong winch, which will answer every purpose, and
be much less expensive. A check winch is, however, the best.
REEL LINES
Are mostly made of silk and horsehair, twisted or plaited together, but
some are made entirely of silk. I prefer the latter, as it is less
likely to twist, runs more freely, and is less likely to rot. The length
of lines vary from fifteen to eighty yards; but for general purposes
thirty or five-and-thirty yards is quite long enough. The line should
always be unwound after a day’s fishing, as, if it is allowed to remain
wet on the reel, it soon rots.
HOOKS.
Hooks are to be bought at the angling shops, of all sizes, and suitable
for the kind of fish to be caught. There are great controversies among
adept anglers about hooks, which are sometimes as violent as those upon
politics or religion. Some anglers prefer what are called the Limerick
hooks, some the Kendal; while others again prefer the Kirby or
Sneckbend. We are hooked to the Kirby, as we consider those to be by far
the best for holding the fish--a most important particular. The hooks
found most suitable for the following fish are these:--
BARBEL, 1, 7, 8, 9.
BLEAK, 11,12, 13.
BREAM, 10.
CARP, 7, 8, 9.
CHUB, 8, 9.
DACE, 10, 11, 12.
EELS, 8.
FLOUNDERS, 3.
GRAYLING, 10, 12.
GUDGEON, 9, 10.
LOACHES, 13.
MILLER’S THUMB, 13.
MINNOW, 13.
PERCH, 7.
ROACH, 10, 11, 12.
RUDD, 10.
RUFFE, 10.
SMELT, 9, 10.
TENCH, 9, 10.
TROUT, 6, 10.
HOW TO BAIT A HOOK.
To bait a hook with a worm, use the following method: First enter the
point of the hook close to the top of the worm’s head, and carry it
carefully down to within a quarter of an inch of its tail; to do which
you must gently squeeze or work up the worm with your left thumb and
finger, while with your right you are gradually working the hook
downwards. The small lively piece of the worm at the point of the hook
moving about will entice the fish; but, mind, if too much of the worm
hangs loose, though it may entice fish to nibble, yet they will seldom
take the whole in their mouth, so as to enable the angler to hook them;
on the contrary, he is frequently tantalized with a bite, and, when he
strikes, finds part of his worm gone, and his fish too. Therefore, to
bait a hook well with a worm is necessary to ensure hooking a fish when
you strike; and it consists in drawing the worm without injuring it (use
him as you would a friend, Walton says) quite over and up the shank of
the hook, leaving only a small lively part of the tail below. If you
bait with half a worm, prefer the tail end, and enter the point of the
hook into the top part, and bring it down nearly to the end of the tail,
leaving only a very small piece of it loose. If you bait with two worms
on the same hook, draw the first up above the shank, while you put the
second on in the same manner as directed with one worm, but enter the
hook near the tail of the second worm; then draw the first one down on
the second over the shank of the hook, and all will then be well
covered, and the bait will be a very _bon-bon_ for perch, chub, carp,
barbel, and all large fish; but when angling for gudgeon, and other
small fish, half a red worm is sufficient, and the tail end is best. If
blood-worms are used, put on two or three, in doing which be tender, or
you will burst them.
BAITS.
The principal baits are--
1. THE LOB-WORM.
2. THE BRANDLING.
3. THE MARSH-WORM.
4. THE TAGTAIL.
5. THE ASH-GRUB.
6. COWDUNG BAIT.
7. CATERPILLARS.
8. CABBAGE-WORMS.
9. CRAB-TREE-WORMS.
10. GENTLES.
11. CAD-WORMS.
12. FLAG-WORMS.
13. GRASSHOPPERS.
14. WASP-GRUB.
15. COCKCHAFERS.
16. BREAD PASTE.
17. CHEESE PASTE.
1. _Lob-worms_ are found in gardens or churchyards, late in the evening;
they have a red head, a streak down the back, and a broad tail. This is
a good worm for salmon, chub, trout, barbel, eels, and large perch.
2. _Brandling_ is found in old dunghills, rotten earth or cow-dung, and
the best in tanners’ bark. It is a good bait for any kind of fish.
3. The _Marsh-worm_ is found in marshy grounds, or on the banks of
rivers; and is a good bait for trout, perch, gudgeon, grayling, and
bream.
4. The _Tagtail_ is found in marly lands or meadows, after a shower; and
is a good bait for trout when the water is muddy.
5. The _Ash-grub_ is found in the bark of trees. It is a good bait for
grayling, dace, roach, or chub.
6. _Cowdung Bait_ is found under cowdung, from May to Michaelmas; and is
good bait for grayling, dace, roach, or chub.
7. _Caterpillars_ can be found on almost every tree or plant. Almost any
small caterpillar will answer.
8. The _Cabbage caterpillar_ is found on cabbages.
9. The _Crabtree-worm_ can be taken by beating the branches of the
crab-apple.
10. _Gentles._ These are bred in putrid meat--liver producing the
best--or may generally be obtained from the butchers. They are an
excellent bait for most kinds of fish.
[Illustration: THE CADDIS FLY.]
11. _Caddis_ is found in ditches, or on the sides of brooks. It is an
excellent bait for trout, grayling, roach, dace, or chub.
12. _Flag-worms_ are found among flags in old pits or ponds, and are
good bait for grayling, tench, bream, carp, roach, and dace.
13. _Grasshoppers_ are found in sun-burnt grass, and are good bait for
chub, trout, and grayling.
14. _Wasp-grubs_ are to be obtained from wasps’ nests, and are a good
bait for most fish that will take gentles.[2]
[2] Wasp-grubs will keep better, and be easier to fit on the hook, if
they are baked for half-an-hour.
15. _Cockchafers_ are found humming round the bushes at about dusk on a
summer evening, and everywhere, and sometimes in cowdung; are a capital
bait for chub, though not for anything else.
16. _White-bread Paste_ is prepared by dipping white bread in water
(soaking and squeezing it in the corner of a pocket-handkerchief is the
best way), and then working it a little in the palm of the hand. It is a
good bait for carp, tench, chub, or roach. Some add a little honey.
17. _Cheese Paste_ is made with fresh cheese, worked up in the hand. It
is a good bait for chub.
18. _Ground Bait_ should be used in the spot about to be fished, and, if
possible, the night before, and should be fresh. For carp, chub, roach,
or dace, use white bread soaked in water, and mixed with bran, pollard,
or meal. For barbel, chandler’s greaves, boiled and worked up into a
ball with clay. Gentles may also be used as ground bait for any of the
above.
TO BAIT WITH GREAVES.
First select the whitest pieces from those you have soaked, and put two
or three of them upon your hook, or as much as will cover it from the
bend to and over the point; these pieces should be put on the hook
separately, one after the other--not a large piece doubled, as some
slovenly boys will do, for then the hook is prevented from entering
firmly the fish you may strike. These little particulars of baiting are
of considerable advantage to young anglers, who ought to remember also
that it is a bad practice to soak greaves in hot water, for it makes
them rotten, and they in consequence soon fall off the hook.
TO SCOUR AND PRESERVE WORMS.
To do this, the young angler should provide himself with a quantity of
fresh moss. Wash out all the earth and squeeze it, but not too dry; then
put it into a jar and squeeze it lightly down: throw in the worms upon
it. The jar should be kept in a cool place in summer, and the moss
changed once in three or four days. Gentles should be thrown into a
mixture of damp sand or bran to scour them, and will be ready in two or
three days.
THE PLUMMET.
Plummets are used by anglers for sounding the depth of a stream or hole.
They are of two kinds, either the folding plummet, or the common
plummet. The folding plummet, which is the better, is made of a slip of
sheet lead, folded up; and this the young angler should never be
without.
PLUMBING THE DEPTH
[Illustration]
Is performed in the following manner: If a folding plummet, unfold about
two inches of it, pass the hook over its side, and then fold the plummet
up again: your hook is now secured from drawing away from the plummet.
As success depends much in angling at a proper depth, the young angler
should take due pains, and measure the depth accurately before he begins
fishing. When the plumb-lead touches the bottom, and the top of the
float is even with the surface of the water, you will have the true
depth.
LANDING-HOOK AND LANDING-NET.
[Illustration]
The landing-hook or gaff is a large hook, which is sometimes barbed like
a fish-hook, and sometimes plain, fastened to one end of a handle; this
latter is occasionally composed of several pieces, which run one into
another, like the slides of a telescope. A landing-net is a small net
mounted on a iron ring, which is fastened, like the landing-hook, to the
end of a handle or pole.
CLEARING RING AND LINE.
The clearing-line is made of several yards of strong small cord, to the
end of which is fastened a heavy ring of lead or brass. If the hook
should get fast in a heavy weed, post, or anything else, this ring is
put over the butt of the rod, and suffered to slip down the line to the
hook. The rod should be held in the right hand, the top pointing
downwards, the clearing-line in the left, the ring falling on the hook,
from its weight, generally clears the hook from what it may have struck
against. If not, the angler should hold the rod firmly, and draw the
line sideways, and break away. In this case, the angler seldom loses
more than a hook, if he acts as above directed; but without the
assistance of a clearing-line he frequently loses his float as well as
his hook and line, and sometimes breaks his top joint. The brass
clearing-rings are to be preferred, because they are jointed, and in
consequence can be used when the angler has a winch in his rod, in which
case the leaden ring could not be passed over the winch.
DRAG-HOOK.
The drag is a piece of iron with three or four stout wire hooks without
barbs, placed back to back, fastened to a strong cord line, and which is
used to draw away weeds.
BANK RUNNER.
The bank-runner is mostly used in the day-time, when the angler is
fishing for roach, barbel, &c. It is stuck in the bank, the bottom
being strong turned wood, sharpened for the purpose, with a winder at
the top for the line, which should be from forty to sixty yards long,
made of silk, thin cord, or plaited Dutch twine. But there should be a
cork and bullet to the line, and the bait a dace or gudgeon, which
should swim about mid-water.
LIVE-BAIT KETTLE.
This should be of an oblong form, and not round; bright inside, and
brown out. In getting out the bait, never put your hand into the water,
which frightens the fish, and, by heating the water, makes them sickly
and dull; but make use of a small net, which is easily carried in the
fish-kettle, by having a piece of the lid cut away in one corner.
DISGORGER.
This is an instrument with a forked top, about six inches long, made of
iron, brass, or bone. Its use is to get the hook from a fish when
swallowed; and in using it, the forked end is thrust down upon the
swallowed hook with one hand, while the line is held tight with the
other: pressure disgorges the hook, and it is then easily drawn out. In
attempting to get a gorged hook from a fish without this instrument, you
run a hazard of breaking the hook and hurting yourself. When the fish is
hooked through the lip, the angler has only to hold the fish steadily in
one hand, while with the other he carefully disengages the hook.
ANGLING AXIOMS.
1. Never fish any water without leave from the proprietor, unless it be
water that is free to all comers.
2. Never use unfair bait, or attempt to take fish in any but a fair and
sportsmanlike manner.
3. Never start on a day’s fishing without first considering the wind,
weather, and water.
4. Never let your shadow fall on the water.
5. Use the finest tackle of which your fishing will admit.
6. Never begin bottom fishing without first plumbing the depth.
7. Never intrude upon another fisherman’s water.
8. And always remember that nothing is lost by politeness.
ACCOUNTS OF THE VARIOUS FRESH-WATER FISH,
WITH THEIR HABITS, HAUNTS, SEASONS, AND THE METHODS OF TAKING THEM.
THE SALMON.
The Salmon is the king of fresh-water fish. It is handsome in form, its
head is small, its nose pointed, its back and sides grey, its belly
silvery, and its flesh the well-known salmon colour. The male may
generally be distinguished by its having the lower jaw more “hooked,” or
turned up at the point, than the female; the head is also generally
somewhat longer, in comparison to the rest of the body.
[Illustration]
Salmon bite best from six till eleven in the forenoon, and from three in
the afternoon until sunset, especially when there is a moderate breeze
upon the water. The chief months to angle for them are March, April,
May, and June. They are to be fished for with lob-worms, or in spinning
with minnows, but a large artificial fly is the most killing bait. The
rod, for a boy, should not be less than fifteen feet long, with a good
running line, and the reel should contain at least fourscore yards. The
hook must be large and long in the shank. Few of our young readers,
however, will be able to go salmon fishing till they have reached
maturity, and, therefore, to give detailed instructions as to the modes
of capturing the fish would be superfluous.
THE TROUT.
This beautiful fish is much prized. Izaak Walton says of it, “It is more
sharp-sighted than any hawk, and more watchful and timorous than your
high-mettled merlin is bold.” In its habits it is a very solitary and
predacious fish.
The trout are found in lakes and rivers and minor streams, and are
finest in appearance from the beginning of April to the end of July or
middle of August: their principal spawning time is from November to
January. The most brilliant and beautiful trout are generally found in
streams that flow rapidly over rocky or chalky bottoms. They feed upon
worms, minnows, and other small fish, but their favourite food consists
of insects, flies, caterpillars, &c. upon which they thrive and fatten
prodigiously.
[Illustration]
In angling for the trout we must have a stout rod and running tackle.
The principal baits for him are natural and artificial flies, minnows,
and worms. The minnow is, perhaps, the most taking bait for large trout:
it should be cast lightly on the water, and drawn trippingly against the
current so as to spin. The angler must strike directly his bait is
seized. The favourite haunts of the trout are scours, mill tails,
eddies, pools, the roots of overhanging trees, and the “nethers” of
bridges and weirs.
THE JACK OR PIKE.
The mighty luce or pike, says Walton, is taken to be the tyrant, as the
salmon is the king, of the fresh waters. His aspect is savage but by no
means repulsive, and when in fine condition a large pike is altogether a
grand-looking fish. His teeth are very sharp and very numerous, being
upwards of seven hundred, and his voracious appetite is such that
nothing comes amiss to him. He has been known to swallow the plummet,
and the clay and bran balls of ground bait of the angler, and he will
prey upon “rats and mice and such small deer,” with ducks, geese, and
even swans, which he has been known to pull under water. He often grows
to an enormous size (no wonder), and has been taken upwards of ninety
pounds in weight.
Pike are fond of dull, shady, and unfrequented waters, with a sandy,
chalky, or clayey bottom, and are found among or near flags, bulrushes,
or water docks. They seldom seek a very rapid stream, although weirs and
mill-pools are often their favourite retreat in the early summer
months--that is, in June and July, when they have recently spawned. In
winter they retire into the depths, eddies, and waters little acted upon
by the current.
[Illustration]
The pike is in its prime during October and November, but is in season
from June to February; the baits used for it are gudgeon, minnows, chub,
and bleak, and should be about three or four inches in length. The rod
should be strong; the line of dressed silk, at least sixty yards long,
wound upon the winch already described. Hooks for trolling, called dead
gorges, and other sorts for trolling, snap, &c. and fishing needles, are
to be bought at every shop where fishing tackle is sold; in the choice
of the first, let them not be too large, nor their temper injured by the
lead on the shanks, nor the points stand too proud; and although usually
sold on wire, it is recommended to cut off the wire about half an inch
from the lead, and with a double silk, well waxed, fasten about a foot
of good gimp to the wire, with a noose at the other end of the gimp
large enough to admit the bait to pass through to hang it upon the line.
The best baits are gudgeon and dace of a middling size; put the baiting
needle in at the mouth and out at the middle of the tail, drawing the
gimp and hook after it, fixing the point of the hook near the eye of the
fish; tie the tail to the gimp, which will not only keep it in a proper
position, but prevent the tail from catching against the weeds and roots
in the water. Thus baited, the hook is to be fastened to the line and
dropped gently in the water near the sides of the river, across the
water, or where it is likely pike resort; keep the bait in constant
motion, sometimes letting it sink near the bottom and gradually raising
it. When the bait is taken, let the pike have what line he chooses. It
will be soon known when he has reached his hole, which he generally
flies to, by his not drawing more. Allow him ten minutes for gorging the
bait, wind up the line gently till you think it is nearly at its
stretch, and then strike. Manage him with a gentle hand, keeping him,
however, from roots and stumps, which he will try to fasten the line
upon, till he is sufficiently tired, and a landing net can be used; but
by no means, however apparently exhausted he may be, attempt to lift him
out with the rod and line only.
[Illustration]
In trolling, the bait hook should never be thrown too far; in small
rivers the opposite bank may be fished with ease, though the violence of
its falls upon the water in long throws soon spoils the bait by rubbing
off its scales. In angling for pike always prefer a rough wind. If a
pike goes slowly up a stream, after taking the bait, it is said to be
the sign of a good fish.
THE GUDGEON.
Is one of the most delicious fish for eating, although small in size. It
bites freely from the latter end of spring until autumn, in gloomy warm
days, from an hour after sunrise to within the same space of its
setting; and during the rest of the year, in the middle of the day, when
it is warmest.
In angling for gudgeon the tackle must be very fine, a single hair or
fine gut fine, a hook No. 8 or 9, a short rod and line, and a small
tapering cork float. The gudgeon will take the small red-worm greedily,
and blood-worms--the first is perhaps the best. A rake or the boat-hook
should be kept frequently stirring the bottom. To the spot so stirred
gudgeon assemble in shoals, expecting food from the discolouring of the
water. They are apt to nibble at the bait; the angler ought not,
therefore, to strike till the float goes well down.
[Illustration: GUDGEON AND BREAM.]
Should any young angler desire a good day’s fishing for gudgeon, and a
pleasant walk into the bargain, he should seek out some sequestered
gravelly stream, and providing himself with a rake with a long handle,
he may have sport till he is tired of it. He will find the fish
scattered up and down every river in the shallows during the heat of
summer, but in winter they get into deeper water. Gudgeon are to be
fished for there with your hook always touching the ground.
THE ROACH.
The roach is a handsome fish either in or out of the water. It inhabits
many of our deep still rivers, delighting most in quiet waters. It is
gregarious, keeping in large shoals. It delights in gravelly, sandy, or
a kind of slimy marl bottom, under a deep gentle running stream; in
summer it often frequents shallows near the tails of fords, or lies
under banks among weeds, under the shades of boughs, and at or opposite
the mouth of a rivulet or brook, that empties itself into a large river.
In winter the roach like to get into clear, deep, and still waters.
The tackle for roach must be fine and strong, a twelve-foot rod and a
five-foot line, a porcupine float, and hooks No. 11 or 12. The bait,
gentils, bread-paste, boiled wheat or red worms. The ground bait should
be damp meal or bran, mixed with soaked bread or clay (the former best).
In fishing for roach in ponds, chew and throw in white bread. The hook
should be No. 6, and the bait either touch the bottom or lie within one
inch of it. As many gentils should be put on the hook as will cover it,
all but the barb. Strike _directly_ the float goes down.
The season for roach fishing in the Thames begins about the latter end
of August and continues through the winter. To London Bridge and among
the shipping below it, numbers of roach return in June and July, after
having been up the river to spawn, and many of them are taken by means
of a strong cord, to which is fastened a leaden weight, more or less,
according to the strength of the current; a foot above this lead a twine
twelve feet long is joined to the cord, and to this twine at convenient
distances are tied a dozen hair links, with roach hooks at the ends;
these are baited with white snails or periwinkles, the fisherman holds
the cord in his hand, and easily feels the biting of the fish, which is
a signal to pull up, and frequently five or six are taken at a haul.
[Illustration: ROACH AND DACE.]
THE DACE.
Dace are gregarious--are great breeders--very lively--and during summer
fond of playing near the surface. Their haunts are deep water, near the
piles of bridges, where the stream is gentle, and has a sandy or clayey
bottom. They like deep holes that are shaded by water-lily leaves, and
under the foam caused by an eddy; in the warm months they are to be
found in shoals on the shallows and gravels.
The baits for dace are red-worms, gentles, and small flies, natural or
artificial, used as in fly-fishing for trout. In angling for dace with
worms, maggots, &c. the tackle cannot be too fine, the float small, the
hook No. 9, the shot a foot from it; by baiting the place with a few
maggots before fishing, the diversion will be increased. If you angle in
an eddy between two mill streams, and the water is only two or three
feet deep, there will be a greater chance of success than where it is
deeper; bait and strike as in roach fishing. The ground-bait may also be
the same.
Fish for dace within three inches of the ground, especially where the
ant fly is the bait under water. In fishing, take advantage if you can
of a still, warm, gloomy day, or go in a summer’s evening to a gravelly
or sandy shallow, or tail end of a mill-stream, and as long as the light
continues the dace will yield diversion.
THE PERCH.
“Perch feed on perch,” is an old maxim; the perch being the only one of
all fresh-water fish that feeds on its own kind. His excuse is a
prodigious appetite, like that of Saturn, who ate his own offspring.
Notwithstanding this wicked propensity, the perch is a beautiful fish,
the back and part of the sides being a deep green, marked with broad
black bars, pointing downwards; the spaces between are golden, the belly
white, and the fins tinged with scarlet. They vary greatly in size. The
largest perch we ever caught weighed three pounds twelve ounces, and was
taken with a roach bait near Richmond. Their general length is about ten
or twelve inches.
[Illustration]
Perch are found in ponds and in clear rivers with pebbly, clayey, or
sandy bottoms. They are fond of water moderately deep, and frequent
holes near to gentle streams where there is an eddy, the hollows under
banks, among weeds and roots of trees, piles of bridges, or in ponds
which are fed by a brook or rivulet. The perch is a bold biter in the
summer, but scarcely ever in the winter. In the middle of a warm
sunshiny day, you are sure to have him with a proper bait. In the winter
he bites best in large quiet eddies, to which he retreats after the
first heavy flood.
The baits for perch are various, as well as the manner of using them. Of
worms, the best are brandlings, and red dunghill-worms, well scoured.
The hook may be varied from No. 2 to 6, being well whipped to a strong
silkworm gut, with a shot or two a foot from it. Put the point of the
hook in at the head of the worm, out again a little lower than the
middle, pushing it above the shank of the hook upon the gut; then put
the point of the hook into the worm again the reverse way, and draw the
head part down so as to cover the hook entirely. This is the most
enticing method that can be adopted in worm-fishing. Use a small cork
float to keep the bait at six or twelve inches from the bottom, or
sometimes about mid-water. In angling near the bottom, raise the bait
very frequently from thence almost to the surface, letting it gradually
fall again. Should a good shoal be met with, they are so greedy that
sometimes they may be all caught.
Other baits for perch are cadbait and gentles; but the best and most
enticing bait is a live minnow. If you find the fish shy, try not long
in one spot. In baiting your hook with the minnow, fix your hook through
his upper lip, and use a small reel with your rod. Your hook should be
No. 5, fastened to a link of gut.
THE GRAYLING.
The grayling is a fish of elegant form; the back is of a dusky purple,
the sides of a fine silvery grey, with the scales in long parallel rows
or lines (from which the fish derives its name), marked with black
spots, irregularly placed. It is rather a hog-backed fish; and, from the
nose and belly touching the ground together, is supposed to feed mostly
at the bottom. In length it seldom exceeds sixteen inches, but some have
been caught upwards of five pounds in weight.
[Illustration]
The haunts of the grayling are in rapid, clear streams, particularly
such as flow through mountainous countries. They are usually taken in
the same manner as the trout, and with similar baits. They do not bite
freely till late in August, or early in September, and may be found at
the tails of sharp streams and in deep water. They rise more boldly than
the trout, and if missed several times will still pursue the bait. They
will bite during the whole of the cold cloudy days; but the preferable
time to look after them is between eight and twelve o’clock in the
morning, and from four in the afternoon till after sunset. Grasshoppers,
wasp-grubs, maggots, and the artificial fly, are the most killing baits.
THE CHUB.
This fish takes its name from the shape of the head, not only in our
own, but in other languages. The head and back are of a deep dusky
green, the sides silvery. The tail is forked, and very black at the end,
and altogether the chub is rather a handsome fish, although its flesh is
not much in esteem.
The haunts of the chub are in rivers whose bottoms are of sand or clay,
or which flow over a gravelly bottom, in deep holes, under hollow banks;
in summer, particularly where shaded by trees, &c. they frequently float
on the surface, and are sometimes found in streams and deep waters,
where the currents are strong. In ponds fed by a rivulet they grow to a
large size.
[Illustration]
To fish for chub at the bottom, you should have a stout long rod, a
strong line (and if you use a reel, you will be the better able to fish
under bushes), with two yards or more of the best silkworm gut at
bottom; a hook proportionate to the bait used; a swan-quill float; and
the line so shotted, eight or ten inches from the hook, as to sink the
float to a quarter of an inch above the surface. The same groundbait is
to be used as for carp. The best baits are greaves, cheese paste, or the
tail end of a well-scoured lob-worm. The cockchafer is also a very
tempting bait, especially towards dusk: no float or shot are required
for this.
After baiting your hook with a cockchafer, move it two or three times
near the surface, as in the act of flying; then drop it in the water,
tapping the rod gently, which will cause the appearance of its
struggling to escape. This attracts the chub, who are so fond of this
bait, that they will rise two or three at a time to seize it. But mind
and be ready with your landing-net.
The chub will take a grub, wasps, maggots, paste of fine new bread
worked in the hand, and tinged with vermilion, to make it look like
salmon-roe; but the best bait for bottom or float-fishing for the chub
is new Cheshire cheese, worked with the crumb of a new roll, or the pith
from the backbone of an ox. In baiting with the cheese, put a round lump
the size of a cherry on a large hook, so as to cover the bend, and some
way up the shank; fish six inches from the bottom, or in cold weather
the bait may lie on the ground. When there is a bite, the float will be
drawn under water: strike immediately, and give him play, holding a
tolerably tight line, to keep the fish clear from weeds and stumps.
The best time for fishing for chub is chiefly before sunrise to nine in
the morning, and from four till after sunset in the summer; but, in
winter, the middle of the day is best. In hot weather, the chub is to be
fished for at or near the top of the water, and not deeper than
midwater; and in cold weather, close to or near the bottom; and the main
point in taking the fish is for the angler to keep himself out of sight.
A very deadly way of killing chub, and certainly the most artistic
method, is with the artificial fly, used as in trout fishing. Flies are
made expressly for this purpose, and of these the best are red and black
palmers, and the Marlow buzz.
THE CARP.
Carp are esteemed among the richest fresh-water fish we have in the
kingdom, and are as cunning as foxes. The angler, therefore, must be
“wide awake” to catch him, and also as patient as a saint. He may,
however, fish for him at any time in the day during warm weather. The
bait may be either worms or paste. Of worms, the bluish marsh or meadow
is the best; but a red-worm, not too big, will do: of paste, the best is
made of bread and honey; and the spot intended should be well baited
beforehand. In a large pond, to draw them together, throw in either
grains, or soaked bread worked up with meal or bran; follow this with a
few of the small baits you intend to angle with.
[Illustration]
Whilst you are fishing, chew a little bread, and throw it in about the
place where your float swims. In fishing for carp in ponds, the bait and
about half a foot of the gut nearest the hook should _lie on the
bottom_; otherwise the carp will continually suck the bait off. When the
carp has fairly taken the bait, you will perceive the float move
steadily away or under water, then strike, and not till then. In this
way, with due patience, you will prove a match for these crafty fish.
THE TENCH.
The tench is one of our most useful fresh-water fishes, for the ease
with which it may be preserved, and the goodness of its flesh. It is
very usual to breed it in ponds, but naturally, like many others of the
carp tribe, it is generally found in lakes and still waters; its
favourite haunts are in places well shaded with bushes or rushes. In
standing waters, it lies under weeds, near sluices, and at pond-heads.
[Illustration]
The best baits for tench are bread paste and red worms, but he usually
prefers the latter. He feeds best in the three hot months. The worm
should be put on the hook in the method directed for perch, but the hook
itself should be of a somewhat smaller size. Use a light float and
strong gut line, and let the bait swim within an inch or two of the
bottom.
THE POPE, OR RUFF,
Is something like a perch in shape, but more bluff and bulky. He is
found principally in slow, deep, quiet rivers, which have a loamy
bottom. The spawning time is in April. The best baits for him are
red-worms and brandlings. The places where he is to be had are where
the water is deep and still; and these places should be baited with some
clay-balls, with which worms are mixed. Should the water be muddy, worms
will do alone; but if clear, clay must be used to render it opaque
before you fish. The fish will bite at any time of a warm summer’s day,
when the sky is cloudy. In angling, use a No. 8 or 9 hook, with a quill
float; and the moment you see the float disappear, strike.
[Illustration]
THE BREAM.
The bream, at full growth, is a large and stately fish, and is
oftentimes as fat as a hog. He is principally found in large ponds or in
lakes, and in still rivers where the waters are deep and shaded by
weeds; and may be taken throughout the latter part of summer and autumn.
The baits are many: paste made of white bread and honey, gentles,
wasp-grubs, and brandlings; but much the best general bait is the tail
end of a lob-worm. Use lob-worms, cut in pieces, brewers’ grains, or
greaves, as groundbaits in the places where you intend to angle. Use a
gut line, quill float, and hook the same as for perch. Sound the bottom,
which should be eight or ten feet deep, and stand at least two yards
from the bank from which you fish; the bait should just touch or trip
along the bottom.
THE FLOUNDER.
The flounder is a well-known flat-fish very common about our own coasts;
and should any of our young friends be at the seaside, it is well that
they should know how to take flounder. They are also found in rivers, at
some distance from the sea. They may be taken in May, July, and
August,--not in June, as that is their spawning time. The best baits
are red-worms and marsh-worms, on a No. 6 hook; and you should fish at
the bottom.
[Illustration: THE FLOUNDER.]
EELS.
Eels are denizens of the mud; but they are fond of clean not foul mud,
and ought never to be sought after in filthy places. There are many
modes of taking them: by rod and line, by dead line, by sniggling, by
bobbing, and by spearing. When a rod is used, you should put a brandling
or red-worm on a No. 8 hook; the bait should touch the bottom; and, when
you have a “bite,” the float should be drawn quite under water before
you strike.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
The dead line is a line of whipcord, with hooks about two feet asunder,
baited with lob-worms or small fish, and having a weight at the end. You
should also have a bank-runner--a reel on a pin or stake stuck into the
ground on the edge of the bank; the line and baits should be thrown in,
and left for the eels to amuse themselves with,--looked to, and drawn up
at your leisure.
In sniggling, a lob-worm is put upon a stout worsted needle; the line is
on a winder; and the fish will be found near flood-gates, wharfings,
bridges, piles, holes in the banks of rivers, ponds, and canals. The
bait should be put into the lurking-places of the eel, by means of a
stick with a forked head; and when the bait is taken, which will easily
be known by the pull of the string, strike.
Bobbing for eels.--In this process long red-worms are strung on threads
of worsted, until a bunch as large as the two fists is formed around a
piece of lead. The whole is sunk to the bottom, or nearly so, then
raised a little, then depressed, so as to induce the eels to bite. When
this occurs, heave up without hurry. The number of eels taken in this
way is often prodigious.
In spearing eels, the spearer usually goes into the mud in a pair of
pants or mud pattens, pieces of square board fastened into the heel to
prevent sinking. He takes an eel-spear in his hand, something like
Neptune’s trident, and progs the mud all over, and the eels are caught
between the forked blades of the spear. Great numbers of eels are taken
in this way on the muddy ooze of salt or fresh-water rivers.
THE STICKLEBACK AND MINNOW.
[Illustration]
The stickleback is a dark-coloured little fish, found in ditches and
ponds. They are best caught with a small hand-net, and are occasionally
used as bait for perch. The minnow is very beautiful in appearance,
being of a rose colour underneath, and may be taken with a worm and a
No. 13 hook at any time of day; but more easily with a small hand-net.
They are commonly found in little rivulets, rills, or small sandy
streams, and are highly prized by the angler as baits for many kinds of
fish.
THE BARBEL.
The barbel is a bold, sturdy, handsome-looking fish, although its flesh
is coarse to the eater; but he is a rare fellow for sport, and often
affords great amusement as well as chagrin to the angler by his bolting
off with the line by a “coup de barbel,” and breaking it with his tail.
Izaak Walton says, that barbel “flock together like sheep.”
Barbel are to be found in the strongest runs of water. In summer, they
love the shallowest and sharpest streams, and will lurk under weeds, and
will root and dig in the sand like pigs. Sometimes he retires to deep
and swift bridges, or to flood-gates or weirs, and will rest himself
against piles or hollow places. In winter he gets into deep water.
[Illustration: BARBEL WITH GOLD CARP.]
In fishing for barbel in large streams, you should go out in a boat
provided with greaves, gentles, and red-worms; and, before you begin
fishing, you should throw in plenty of groundbait--such as soaked
greaves, bran and clay made into small balls, maggots, or lob-worms.
They may be angled for with a stout rod, strong running line, cork
float, and No. 7 or 8 hook, baited with marshworms or greaves. The
barbel being a sharp biter, strike the moment you feel a nibble. He may
be caught from May to October all day, but best in the morning and
evening. After he is struck he will frequently make a run, but you must
play him gently; keep him clear of weeds, and try to get him into deep
water; and when you have him, mind he does not bounce out of your hand
and drop down the stream again.
NATURAL FLY-FISHING, OR DIPPING.
Fishing with a fly may be practised either with the natural fly, usually
called “dipping,” or with the artificial fly; in which latter case the
sport is called “fly-fishing,” or sometimes “whipping.” Dipping requires
a moderately long and _stiff_ rod, of about twelve or thirteen feet. The
line should not be above a yard in length from the end of the rod, but
the reel should contain sufficient to play the fish if necessary. When
the river is much overhung with bushes, it is a good plan to wind the
line round the end of the top joint, leaving only a few inches
dependent; and then, having thrust the rod through some small opening in
the bushes, gradually to unwind the line by turning the rod in the hand,
so as to drop the fly on the water in the most gentle manner. In this
insidious way large fish are often taken with any of the flies which are
in season and found at the time on the banks of the river which is
fished, especially if they are only just coming out, and the fish are
not yet satiated with them. It is quite needless to give a list of the
natural flies which are likely to prove serviceable to the fisherman,
because he has only to look for those which _at the time_ are tempting
the fish, and then to endeavour to find them on the banks, and at once
to try their powers. In the case of chub, however, he will find
grasshoppers and humble-bees more useful than any of the flies, and yet
they are neither of them often seen upon the waters, and may be
considered exceptional cases. The fish which will generally take the
natural fly are grayling, trout, chub, and dace.
FLY-FISHING AND ARTIFICIAL FLIES.
For this delightful sport, which captivates alike the sexagenarian and
the schoolboy, rods and tackle of the finest quality are required. It is
true, that a good workman will take fish even with a willow wand, but
still he would do far better with a rod turned out by a good maker; and
few young hands will be able to do much without a well-finished specimen
of the art of rod-making. The rod should be strong, yet fine, and either
of dressed silk, or silk and hair mixed. The lower portion, called the
foot-length, is of gut, generally occupying about five or six feet of
it, to which one, two, or three flies are attached, the one at the end
being called a stretcher, and the others droppers.
The fly-fisher should be able to make his own flies, as there is a great
advantage in being able to “do for oneself;” and it may sometimes happen
that he may be out of a particular fly when far away from “fly shops.”
MATERIALS FOR MAKING FLIES.
Feathers of various kinds; hairs of various kinds; very fine sewing
silk; gold and silver twist. Of the first, the young fly-fisher must
provide himself with the feathers of the duck, cock, grouse, snipe,
bittern, woodcock, partridge, landrail, starling, jay, golden plover,
and peacock. Of the second, the fur from Tommy’s tail, from the skins of
squirrels, moles, and water rats, camel’s hair, hare’s ear, fur from its
neck, the yellow fur from the neck of the martin, mohairs of different
shades, camlets, black horsehair, hog’s down dyed various colours. And
with these, gimps, silks, and tinsel, a good pair of pliers, and a pair
of fine-pointed scissors.
In making your fly, imitate as nearly as possible the natural fly you
wish to represent; to do this properly, it will be well to dissect a
natural fly, and to imitate its several parts, and then to reconstruct
it with a reference to the whole. With a hook of the proper size, and a
feather of the right colour, the fly-maker may now commence. His feather
must be stripped down on each side, leaving just so much as will do for
the wings at the fine end; a piece of fine gut, free from imperfection,
and properly tested as to its strength; dubbing or hackle; and a piece
of fine silk well waxed with shoemaker’s wax.
Let the essay be now made. Hold your hook in the left hand, wrap the
silk round the bare hook two or three times, and put the finest end of
the gut on the under side of the hook. If you are working for a tackle
fly, begin at the band and work up to the head, after turning three or
four times round the hook and gut; fasten on the tackle, and continue
the winding of the silk until it reaches the end of the hook, then turn
it back two or three times, to form the head. The dubbing must now be
twisted round the silk, and wrapped upon the hook for nearly half the
proposed length of the body; fasten it there by a single loop, that both
hands may be at liberty to manage the tackle.
When sufficient of the feather is wound upon the hook, the remainder
should be held under the thumb of the left hand, and the entangled
fibres picked out with a needle. The silk and dubbing must now be
twisted over the end of the tackle, until the body of the fly is of the
length required, and then fastened. If gold or silver twist is used, the
twist should be fastened to the lower end of the body before the dubbing
is applied to the silk.
_To make a winged fly_, the same method must be observed in tying on the
hook; then take the feather which is to form the wings, and place it
even on the upper side of the shank, with the roots pointing towards the
bend of the hook; fasten the feathers, by winding the silk over it, and
cut the root end close with a pair of scissors, and divide the wings as
equally as possible with a needle, passing the silk two or three times
between them, to make them stand in a proper position; bring the silk
down the shank of the hook the proposed length of the body, and fasten
it, then apply the dubbing to the silk, and twist it towards the wings;
fasten in the hackle for legs, and wind it neatly under the wings, so as
to hide the ends of the cut fibres: the silk must be fastened above the
wings--be careful of this.
It would be impossible for us, nor would it be very useful to the young
fly-fisher, to give him directions for making every kind of fly. We may,
however, throw out a few hints concerning the making of most of the
flies in common use, and of the materials employed.
[Illustration]
1. _The green drake or May fly._--This is one of the most killing trout
flies, but it is seldom in the water for a longer period than three
weeks. The time of its appearance varies in different rivers, but it
generally rises about the last week in May, and continues for about
three weeks. The wings are made of the light feathers of a grey drake,
dyed a pale yellow-green colour, by being boiled for a minute or two in
a decoction of green vitriol. The body is formed of amber-coloured
mohair or silk ribbon, with dark green silk; the head of peacock’s harl,
and the tail of three long hairs taken from a sable muff.
2. _The black gnat._--The body of this fly is made of black ostrich
harl, and the wings of a pale starling’s feather; it must be dressed
short and thick. It is in use from the end of April till the end of May,
and is a good killer when the water is low.
3. _Hare’s ear._--The wings are made from the feather of a starling’s
wing, the body from the fur of the hare’s ear, the legs of a ginger
cock’s hackle.
4. _Cock tail._--Wings of the light feather from a snipe’s wing, the
body of yellow mohair.
5. _Whirling dun._--Wings of a snipe’s feather, body of blue fur wrapped
with yellow silk, and a blue cock’s hackle for legs; the tail of two
hairs from a coloured muff.
6. _Grey drake._--Wings of a dark grey feather of the mallard, the body
of white silk, striped with dark silk, the head of a peacock’s harl, and
the tail of three hairs from a sable muff.
7. _Cowdung fly._--The wings of the feather of a landrail, the body of
yellow camlet, mixed with a little brown bear-fur, and a ginger hackle
for legs; the wings should be dressed flat.
8. _Bee fly._--The body of thread of various colours, arranged in
stripes of the following order:--black, white, light yellow, white,
black, white; the legs of a black hackle; the wings from the feathers of
a blue pigeon’s wing: the body must be dressed thick.
9. _Red palmer._--The body of dark-red mohair, ribbed with gold twist,
and wrapped with a red cock’s hackle.
10. _Peacock palmer._--The body of a peacock’s harl, wrapped with a
dusky-red cock’s hackle.
11. _Kingdom fly._--Wings of a woodcock’s feather, the body of white
silk, striped with green, and the legs of a red cock’s hackle.
12. _White gnat._--The wings of a small white feather, the body of white
silk, and the legs of a red cock’s hackle.
13. _Blue dun._--The wings of a starling’s feather, the body of blue fur
from a water rat, mixed with a little lemon-colour mohair; the tail is
forked, and should be made of two fibres from the feather used for the
wing.
14. _Red ant._--The wings of a light starling’s feather, the body of
peacock’s harl made thick at the tail, and a ginger hackle for legs.
15. _Gold spinner._--Wings of a starling’s feather, body of orange silk,
ribbed with gold twist, and the legs of a red hackle.
16. _Great white moth._--Wings of a feather from the wing of a white
owl, the body of white cotton, and a white cock’s hackle wrapped round
the body.
17. _Governor._--Wings of a woodcock’s feather, the body of a peacock’s
harl, tied with orange silk.
18. _March brown._--Wings of the dark mottled feather from the tail of a
partridge, the body of fur from a hare’s ear, well mixed with a little
yellow worsted, and a grizzled cock’s hackle for legs.
19. _Stone fly._--Wings of a dusky-blue cock’s hackle, or a mottled
feather from a hen pheasant, the body of dark-brown and yellow camlet
mixed, and a grizzled hackle for legs; the wings should be flat.
20. _Black silver palmer._--The body of black ostrich harl, ribbed with
silver twist, and wrapped with black cock’s hackle.
21. _Willow fly._--The wings of dark grizzled cock’s hackle, the body of
blue squirrel’s fur, mixed with yellow mohair.
22. _Yellow palmer._--The wings of white hackle, dyed yellow, the body
of yellow silk.
23. _Black palmer._--The body of black ostrich’s harl, wrapped with a
black cock’s hackle.
24. _Black palmer ribbed with gold._--The body of peacock’s harl,
wrapped with a black cock’s hackle, and ribbed with gold twist.
25. _Marlow Buzz or Cock-a-Boundhu._--This is one of the most killing
flies known, and should never be off the line during the trout season.
The body of peacock’s harl, ribbed with gold twist, and a dark-red
cock’s hackle over all.
26. _The Grouse Hackle._--This is also a very killing fly, especially
late in the evening, during June, July, and August. Body of brown fur,
ribbed with gold twist, and a grouse hackle over all; hook No. 10.
The foregoing list comprises twenty-six of the most killing flies; and
the following are the months in which they will be found to kill best.
_February_, red cowdung fly, blue dun; _March_, brown; _April_, black
gnat, stone fly, gravel or spider fly, the green tail, brown, blue dun;
_May_, green drake, grey drake, oak fly, hazel fly, little iron blue and
yellow sally; _June_, hare’s ear, cock tail, whirling dun, marlow buzz,
bee fly, kingdom fly, white gnat, blue gnat, blue dun, governor, fern
fly; gold spinner; _July_, red ant, red spinner, yellow dun, coachman,
fern fly; _August_, whirling blue, red spinner, pale yellow dun;
_September_, willow fly, silver twisted blue, whirling blue.
It would of course be impossible, in a work of this description, to give
a list of all the artificial flies used by experienced fishermen, but
the above are a few of the most killing. For bleak, dace, roach, chub,
&c. a piece of a maggot, or a small piece of white leather, should be
placed at the end of the hook.
Having thus given the “order of flies,” natural and artificial, we may
imagine the young fly-fisher, with rod in hand, proportionate to his
strength and the breadth of the stream, ready to throw his fly; but let
his rod and running tackle be in good order, and the idea of the
coachman’s whip out of his mind. He is not to flog the water, but to
tickle it. The novice should teach himself to handle the line, by
beginning with it alone, (_i. e._ without flies or hook,) trying a short
length first, and lengthening it gradually. In using the rod, it should
be drawn vigorously back, though without a jerk, and thrown forward
again _when the line has reached its full extent behind_. Take care in
doing this, that the fly be not whipped off. When tolerably expert, put
on one fly, and try awhile with that, adopting two or three when able to
use them properly.
In fly-fishing keep as far from the water as possible, especially if
fishing for trout. Let only the flies touch the water, and keep moving
them gently and slowly on the surface. When a fish rises, let not a
moment elapse before you strike, and do it sharply.
When you have two flies on your line, you must try to throw your line so
that the bottom fly shall reach the water first; it must be done always
as lightly as possible, so that it may resemble a natural fly settling
upon the water. You must suffer the line to float gently down the
stream, at the same time working it towards you.
The best time for angling with the fly is when there is a gentle breeze
upon the water; south and west winds are to be preferred, when the water
has been disturbed by heavy rains and is just resuming its natural
colour, or when the day is dull and cloudy. The best time, morning and
evening. In cold weather the fish bite deeper, and you should then let
the fly sink a little. Take care to have the wind in your back, and the
sun in your face, if possible.
When you see a rise, throw your fly about half a yard above the fish’s
nose, and let it fall down with the stream; watch it narrowly, and
strike as the fish rises, giving him an “infinite little moment” to
taste. When you have hooked, play your fish carefully, keeping up his
head and running him down the stream, at the same time steering him
towards you. If you see a fish rise at a natural fly, throw your bait a
little before him, so that he may take it as “one of the number.”
To know what flies the fish are most likely to take, observe what
natural flies are about the water, or on the grass, trees, or bushes in
the vicinity of the river; and take that fly which is the most in
abundance, either natural or artificial at your discretion.
Such are a few practical particulars concerning angling and fly-fishing,
sufficient to enable any young angler to begin. For more abundant
information we refer him to Mr. Stoddart and Mr. Stewart, for
fly-fishing, Mr. Cholmondeley Pennell for pike-fishing, “Hewitt
Wheatley” for grayling fishing, and Mr. Francis Francis for the various
modes of bottom fishing.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
ARCHERY.
“And he was clad in coat and pode of grene;
A shefe of pecocke arrows bryght and shene
Under his belt he bare, ful threftely.
Well coude he dresse his tackle yomanly.
His arrows drouped not with feathers lowe,
And in his hande he bare a myghty bowe.”--CHAUCER.
The skill of the English in archery was always very great. Our ancestors
used the bow for a double purpose: in time of war, it was a far more
dreadful instrument of destruction than our present soldier’s musket;
while in the “piping times of peace,” it became an object of amusement.
The victories the English obtained over their enemies in times of war
were many, and what the world calls glorious; and they stand upon record
in our history, where the young reader may peruse them with interest and
advantage.
[Illustration: SAXON BOW AND ARROW.]
The Anglo-Saxons and the Danes were certainly well acquainted with the
use of the bow, which they used, not so much for war purposes, as in
the sports of the field. But it is well known that the Normans used the
bow as a military weapon, and under their government the practice of
archery was not only much improved, but generally diffused throughout
the kingdom. The long-bow was an instrument of Norman introduction, and
there seems good reason to believe that the arbalist, or cross-bow, was
used by these sturdy invaders.
THE LONG-BOW.
[Illustration: NORMAN-BOW.]
The use of the English long-bow arrived at the highest perfection in the
reign of Edward III.; and, notwithstanding the introduction of
fire-arms, continued for a long time after to be successfully
cultivated. Cressy, Poictiers, Agincourt, and many other victories, were
obtained by its use; and Sir John Fortescue writes, “That mighte of the
realme of Englande standyth upon her archers,”--as it will now upon our
riflemen or sharpshooters, when our army shall get the right kind of
gun.
THE CROSS-BOW.
[Illustration]
The cross-bow, or arbalist, was a popular weapon with the Etolians, and
was introduced into England in the thirteenth century. The arrows shot
from it were called “guorrels.” It was fastened upon a stock, and
discharged by means of a catch or trigger, which probably gave rise to
the lock on the modern musket. One historian informs us, that Richard
the First was wounded by an arrow from a bow of this kind; and also,
that the English cross-bow was used chiefly at sieges of fortified
places, and on ship-board in battles upon the sea. It was, however, used
in recreation, and acquired great reputation among the citizens of
London, who had “butts” in various places for the practice of this kind
of archery; as at Newington Butts, Brentford Butts, and other spots,
which still retain the name of Butts: and in the reign of Edward IV. an
act passed, which directed that butts should be in every township,
where the inhabitants should shoot on every feast-day, under a penalty
of a halfpenny when they shall omit the exercise.
[Illustration]
FEATS OF THE BOW.
Mr. Grose informs us that an archer could shoot six arrows in the time
necessary to charge and discharge a musket; and even in modern days, a
practised bowman has been known to shoot twelve arrows in a minute into
a circle not larger than the circumference of a man’s hat, at a distance
of forty yards. Of the power of the bow, and of the distance it will
carry, some remarkable anecdotes are told. Xenophon mentions an
Arcadian, whose head was shot through by a Carduchian archer. Stuart
mentions a random shot of a Turk, which he found to be 584 yards; and
Mr. Strutt saw the Turkish ambassador shoot 480 yards in the old
archery-ground in London. An old author speaks of a Turkish bow, the
arrow of which was known to pierce a steel target two inches thick. In
the journal of King Edward VI., it is mentioned that 100 archers of the
king’s guard shot at an inch board, and that some of the arrows passed
through this, and into another board behind it, although the wood was
extremely solid and firm. William de Brensia relates that a Welshman
having directed an arrow at a horse-soldier of his, who was clad in
armour, and had his leathern coat under it, the arrow, beside piercing
the man through the hip, struck also through the saddle, and mortally
wounded the horse on which he sat. Another Welsh soldier having shot an
arrow at one of his horsemen, who was covered with strong armour, the
shaft penetrated through his thigh, and fixed in the saddle; but what is
most remarkable is, that as the horseman drew his bridle aside, in order
to turn round, he received another arrow in the opposite thigh, which
passing through it, he was firmly fixed to the saddle on both sides. Mr.
Barrington, in the “Archæologiæ,” relates a tradition that one Leigh, an
attorney (it must have been a barrister), shot an arrow a mile in three
flights; and Carew, speaking of the Cornish archers two centuries back,
says that the butts for long shooting were placed 480 yards apart. Such,
my good friends, are the feats you may emulate with the bow.
LENGTH OF BOWS AND ARROWS, AND HOW USED IN ANCIENT TIMES.
[Illustration: NORMAN BOWMAN EQUIPPED FOR BATTLE.]
The length of the bow varied, but was usually the height of the bearer,
as the Act of Edward IV. commands every man to have a bow his own
height. The arrows were of different weights and sizes; the lighter
sort, for long ranges, about two feet three inches; while the heavy were
a cloth yard in length. The heads had various shapes, among which the
broad arrow extended in width to nearly four inches to the extremity of
the wings. Of these, 24 in a sheaf were put into a quiver, and, in
action, about 12 in the girdle. They were trimmed with three goose-quill
feathers each, and when the archers shot in volley, the quantity of
arrows in the air was compared by Froissart to a fall of snow. The
farthest range of arrows was estimated at eleven score yards. The
archers, in order of battle, generally carried, beside the bow, axe, and
target, a stake pointed at both ends. They formed in open ranks, in
files eight deep. When on the point of engaging, they advanced a few
paces beyond the intended line, and fixed their stakes, inclined towards
the enemy, in the ground. They then stepped backward, and from behind
these chevaux-de-frise dealt forth their destructive arrows; and when
the enemy were thrown into confusion, they sallied, and with small
battle-axes and swords completed the defeat.
MARKS FOR SHOOTING AT.
The marks usually shot at by the archers for pastime were “butts,”
“prickes,” and “rovers.” The “butt” was a level mark, made by placing a
target on a slope of a hill or bank of earth, and required a strong
arrow. The “pricke” was a “mark of compass,” but always of one distance,
and had some emblem on a pole for shooting at; and to this mark strong
swift arrows of one flight, with a middling size feather, were best
suited. The “rover” was a mark of uncertain length, and often an arrow
shot forth from a bow. Other marks were used, as the standard, the
target, hazel-wands, rose-garlands, and the popinjay, which was an
artificial parrot or peacock, or sometimes the common cock, set upon a
post or pole, as seen in the engraving.
[Illustration: SHOOTING AT THE POPINJAY.]
EQUIPMENT FOR ARCHERY.
Roger Ascham, who was well versed in the subject of archery, says that
it was necessary for the archer to have a bracer, or close sleeve, to
lace upon the left arm; and to this was added a shooting-glove for the
protection of the fingers. The bow was to be made of elm, ash, or yew;
the bow-string to be composed of good hemp, flax, or silk; the arrows
were to be made of oak, hornbeam, or birch. The feathers from a goose,
and especially of a grey goose, he thought preferable to any for the
pluming of an arrow.
ANCIENT DIRECTIONS FOR ARCHERY.
Ascham says: “First take care of a graceful attitude.” The archer should
stand fairly and upright with his body, his left foot at a convenient
distance from his right, holding the bow by its middle, with his left
arm stretched out, and with the first three fingers and the thumb of his
right hand on the lower part of the arrow affixed to the string of the
bow. The notch of the arrow to rest between the fore-finger and the
middle finger of the right hand. The arrow, in drawing the bow, was to
be elevated to the right ear. The shaft of the arrow below the feathers
to be rested on the knuckle of the fore-finger of the left hand. The
arrow was to be drawn to the head, and not held too long in that
situation, but neatly and smartly discharged. Among the requisites
necessary to constitute a good archer are, a clear sight steadily
directed to the mark,--a proper judgment of distances, to determine the
length of the ground. He ought also to know how to take advantage of a
side-wind, and to be well acquainted with what compass his arrows would
take in their flight. “Courage,” he says also, “is an indispensable
requisite; as he who shoots with the least trepidation is sure to shoot
badly.”
DECLINE OF ARCHERY.
Notwithstanding the great advantages of archery in ancient days, somehow
or other it began to decline even at the time of its zenith; so that,
from time to time, acts of parliament were made to compel the citizens
of London, and other towns, to practise it. Some of our monarchs made
sumptuous archery entertainments. In the reign of Queen Elizabeth, a
grand shooting-match was held in London of all the archers in the
surrounding districts; and these meeting at the appointed time, with
their different companies, proceeded in a pompous march from Merchant
Tailors’ Hall, numbering 3,000 archers, sumptuously apparelled, every
man having a long-bow and four arrows; 940 of them had gold chains about
their necks. This splendid company was attended by 4,000 whifflers and
bellmen. The queen met them in Smithfield, and presided at their
sports. But still the art continued to decline, and, with the increase
of other warlike weapons, became at last almost extinct. Within these
few years, however, it has again become a somewhat favourite exercise,
near London, and in various parts of the country. In Scotland, the
“Royal Company of Archers”--the Queen’s body-guard for
Scotland--comprises many of the Scottish nobility, and King George IV.
recognised it. It now comprises about 500 members, who meet weekly, and
at certain seasons contend for several annual prizes.
Convinced as we are that the practice of archery possesses, in point of
health, all the advantages of field sports, without their cruelty to
animals, and demoralizing oppression to our fellow-creatures, we
strongly recommend it to our juvenile friends. It is an exercise adapted
to every age and every degree of strength; and especially adapted to
young ladies, whose sedentary occupations,--rendered still more
injurious by the pestiferous Berlin wool,--disposes them to disease and
consumption. I do not wish to sing the praises of the art to their full
extent, but I wish to see it universally cultivated, and should hail
with pleasure the time when it can be again said, as with Statius,
“Pudor est nescere sagittas.”
MODERN ARCHERY.
Proceeding now to the modern practice of the art, we must first begin
with
THE BOW.
The Bow may be made of the yew-tree, laburnum, thorn, or acacia, and is
generally formed of two pieces of wood joined together, the back piece
being of a different wood to the front, and the grain reversed. It is of
great importance to secure a good bow. We would not, therefore, advise
the young archer to make one, but to buy one at a good archery shop,
where they may be had at all prices. Upon making a purchase, he should
examine the bow well, to observe whether it be well set in all its
parts, of an elegant cut or shape, and free from flaws, knots, or
cracks. He should look well at the ends, and to those points on which
the bow-string is fixed, which ought to be tipped with horn. The proper
length of a bow for a youth is about five feet. The flat or outward part
of a bow is called its back, and the inward part its belly; and in
stringing it the young archer should be particularly careful to keep the
belly inwards, or the bow will break.
THE STRING.
The string of the bow should be made of hemp, and whipped with sewing
silk at that part of it which receives the arrow, marked C in the
annexed plan. The thickness of the string should depend upon the length
of the bow, and should never be too thin for its powers, as the
snapping of a string sometimes causes the snapping of the bow. The young
archer should never use a string in the least out of order, and should
avoid cat-gut strings especially. A bow five feet long, when bent,
should have a string about five inches from the centre. This will be a
guide in stringing the bow. The young archer should take great pride in
the care of his bow, especially of the string, and look carefully, after
every day’s shooting, at the “whipping” of the string, and at the
wearing points, repairing the least defect. He ought also to place his
bow in an oil-skin case, lined with baize; and when put away for the
season it should be well rubbed with oil, and polished. He should also
have always two or three spare strings in readiness, in case the one in
use may fly.
[Illustration]
STRINGING THE BOW.
The young archer must be very careful in performing this feat, or he
will fail in the attempt; to do so safely, he must take the bow in his
right hand by the handle, the flat part towards him; then let his arm
rest against his side, then put the lower end of the bow against the
inside of the right foot, bring his left foot forward, and place the
centre of the left wrist on the upper level of the bow below the loop of
the string, the fore-finger knuckle on one edge of the bow, and the top
of the thumb upon the other; then up with the bow and loop it. This
feat, however, can be best learned by seeing another expert person
perform it. In unstringing the bow, the short horn should be placed on
the ground against the right foot, the middle of the bow grasped in the
right hand, and the left wrist placed on the upper horn, so that the
fore-finger may unloop the string when the bow is brought down, as in
the manner of stringing it.
THE ARROWS.
[Illustration]
Arrows are generally made of some white wood, such as ash, deal, or the
wood of the orbele poplar, and are sometimes varnished. They are both
blunt and sharp. The sharp ones are for target shooting, the blunt ones
principally for roving; they also vary as regards length, some being
long, and some short. In purchasing them, the principal thing to be
attended to is, that they are perfectly straight, well made, and that
the plumes are securely fitted. There should be three on each arrow;
one, which is of a darker colour than the rest, is called the cock
plume, and in shooting should be placed uppermost. The length and weight
of the arrows should be in proportion to the size of the bow. The nicks
of arrows should be cased with horn, and they should fit the string
exactly.
THE QUIVER.
[Illustration]
The quiver is used to contain the arrows, and is usually made of wood,
or tin, or leather, those made of the latter material being the most
serviceable and convenient to wear. It should be long enough to contain
the arrows up to the feather, without bruising or crushing the plumes,
which ought always to be kept perfectly straight and unruffled. The
quiver in shooting is not carried, but the arrows are placed in a pouch
attached to the belt.
[Illustration: TASSEL.]
[Illustration: BRACE.]
THE TASSEL, BRACE, BELT AND POUCH.
_The Tassel_ is usually made of green worsted, and is used by the archer
for the purpose of cleansing the arrow from dirt after being taken from
the ground. It is usually suspended on the left side of the archer.
[Illustration: THE BELT.]
_The Brace_ is of leather, and is buckled on the arm to save it from
being hurt by the string upon the discharge of the arrow. It ought to
be very smooth on its surface, so as to offer no impediment to the
bow-string.
_The Belt_ is made of leather, and is buckled round the waist. It has
fastened to it a _pouch_, for the temporary reception of the arrows in
shooting.
SHOOTING GLOVE, AND GREASE POT.
_The Shooting Glove_ is made of cow-hide, or horse ball leather. It has
places or stalls for three fingers only, with a wrist strap to fasten it
on. Its use is to protect the fingers from the action of the string, and
in selecting it the young archer should be careful that the finger
stalls are neither too long nor too short for the hand.
[Illustration: THE GLOVE.]
[Illustration: THE GREASE POT.]
_The Grease Box_ hangs usually by the side of the tassel, and contains a
small portion of grease composed of suet and bees-wax well compounded.
This is used for rubbing on the fingers of the shooting glove, and is
indispensable to the archer.
THE TARGET.
Targets are made with plaited straw bands, wound round a centre, and
sewn together. Over this body is placed a facing of canvass, the ground
of which is painted white; upon the white are painted four circles, and
a gold centre called the bull’s eye. The first circle close to the eye
is red; the next white, called the inner white; the third black; and the
fourth white, called the outer white; while the outside verge, called
the petticoat of the target, is painted green.
[Illustration]
A certain value in shooting is given to each circle of the target, which
is thus computed: Outer white 1; Black 3; Inner white 5; Red 7, and the
Gold Eye 9.
There are usually two targets in an archery field, placed at certain
distances from each other, which shortens the labour of walking; for if
one target only be used, a great deal of time is lost in going from the
shooting mark to the target to fetch the arrows, and in returning to the
spot again.
The prizes usually shot for in archery matches are gold and silver
medals, silver cups, silver arrows, silver gilt bugles, prize bows and
arrows. There are generally two prizes given; the first for the shots
nearest the gold centre, the second for the number of shots put into the
target, according to their value.
A person is usually appointed to register the shots at the targets, who
has a card similar to the form given below, by which he takes an account
of the hits as they are made.
+=======+======+=====+=======+=======+=======+=======+=======++
| NAMES | GOLD | RED | INNER | BLACK | OUTER | TOTAL | VALUE ||
| | | | WHITE | | WHITE | | ||
+-------+------+-----+-------+-------+-------+-------+-------++
|_Smith_| 2 | 3 | 7 | 3 | 11 | 26 | 100 ||
|_Jones_| 1 | 6 | 5 | 8 | 7 | 27 | 107 ||
|_Brown_| 3 | 4 | 9 | 7 | 18 | 41 | 139 ||
+-------+------+-----+-------+-------+-------+-------+-------++
The markings are usually made by the marker with a pin, holes being less
liable to obliteration than pencil marks.
BUTTS.
Are usually made of pieces of turf piled one upon another, and laid one
upon the other in the following shape. They are usually about six feet
high and four feet broad at the face, upon which a circular piece of
thin white pasteboard, about six inches in diameter, is affixed with
pegs. Butts are generally placed in the field in sets of four, so as not
to stand in the way of each other. And when shot at, the arrows placed
in the pasteboard mark are alone reckoned, and those who here place the
greatest number of shots are the winners of the prize.
[Illustration]
HOW TO DRAW THE BOW.
The ancient directions for drawing the bow, or rather the arrow, have
been already given. The archer having placed himself opposite to the
target, with his face a little inclined to the right, should swing
himself slightly round, so that his eye and the target are in an exact
line. He should stand quite upright, his left foot slightly in advance.
Holding the bow horizontally in his left hand, he should draw an arrow
from his pouch and carry it under the string and over the left side of
the bow. The fore-finger of the left hand now holds the arrow secure on
the wooden part of the bow at its centre, while the right hand fixes the
nick of the arrow on the string, where it is held fast between the first
and second fingers, the cock feather being uppermost. The fore-finger of
the left hand may now be removed from the arrow, and the centre of the
bow grasped tightly. The bow is now raised gradually by the left hand,
at the same time that the string is pulled by the right; and when the
arrow is drawn about two-thirds of its length, the neck of it should be
brought close to the right ear and the aim should be taken. The aim
should be taken quickly, and the string loosened freely from the fingers
with a peculiar touch, which no books can teach, and which nothing but
experience and skill can give. In long shots the right hand must be
lowered, and the arrow sent so as to form a greater curve in its flight.
The archer should look at his _mark_, not at his shaft, and when he has
shot should retreat to the leftward, and take his position behind the
person with whom he is shooting.
[Illustration: POSITION IN SHOOTING.]
FLIGHT SHOOTING.
This is principally engaged in for the purpose of ascertaining the
greatest distance to which the arrows can be sent by the respective
shooters. It requires no skill in aiming, but much care in drawing the
arrow, as nothing is more likely to fracture the bow than flight
shooting. The archer who sends his arrows to the greatest distance is
the winner.
CLOUT SHOOTING.
In clout shooting the target is only a small piece of white pasteboard
attached to a stick about five feet from the ground, and placed at a
distance of from 120 to 150 yards. In it seven makes the game, and all
arrows that fall within two bows’ length of the foot of the stick are
marked in counting.
ROVING.
So called from the shooters roving from place to place, over field,
heath, moor, common, finding their marks in trees, posts, bushes, &c.
The distances constantly varying, give to young archers a great deal of
practice; besides which, the variety of the scenery, and the various
incidents that occur in a day’s roving, are often highly interesting and
exciting. By roving the eye gets a habit of measuring distances, and the
hand and arm strength for the bow. Blunt-headed arrows are the best for
roving, of which about a dozen ought to be carried by each archer. Sharp
arrows would imbed themselves too deeply in trees to be easily
extracted. In a roving party, arrows that reach within five bows’ length
of the mark tell, and those which are nearest cut the others out. Each
archer measures with his own bow. The number of the game is often nine,
but generally twelve.
GENERAL HINTS FOR ARCHERS.
1. In commencing archery never begin with a stiff bow, but select one
adapted to your strength, and change this for a stronger from time to
time.
2. Never shoot with another person’s bow.
3. Never put an arrow in the string when any one stands between you and
the target, or you may shoot out an eye.
4. Never talk, jibe, or jest at the time of shooting.
5. Always study to take a graceful attitude in shooting, or in moving
about the field.
6. Never draw a bow near another person; as, should it snap, the danger
will be greater to him than yourself.
7. Never let your bow-string get untwisted or ravelled by neglect.
8. Never exhibit impatience at the tardy efforts of your compeers, or
chagrin at your own failures.
9. Never shoot alone if you can help it, as it leads to negligence and
indifference.
[Illustration]
BOXING.
We will first give briefly some of the reasons why we have determined to
mention this branch of the manly exercises. Firstly, we do so because we
have a great personal esteem for the art, though none can be more
sternly opposed to its abuse. Secondly, because it affords one of the
finest exercises in the world, employing every limb and every muscle in
the body, giving at the same time readiness of hand and quickness of
eye, while it tests and improves the patience and endurance. And,
thirdly, because every one likes to know how to use the weapons which
Nature has given him, and will contrive to acquire the desired knowledge
whenever he can find an opportunity. All Englishmen, and therefore all
English boys, are proud of their natural weapon, and compare it with the
knife, the loaded stick, the knuckleduster, and the pistol of other
nations. The principle of fair play and justice is strongly developed in
an English breast, and in nothing is the principle so thoroughly carried
out as in boxing. No unfair advantage is allowed to either side, no
striking upon the vital parts of the body is permitted, and the use of
the foot, tooth, or nail is forbidden under the severest penalties. Even
in the very prize ring, where men are trained for the express purpose of
hitting each other with the utmost force of which human arms are
capable, there is little harm done, and in a few days both combatants
look as if nothing had happened to them. It is not so even in a
wrestling county, or in some few parts of our own land where men fight
like brute beasts, and use their best endeavours to maim or blind their
adversaries for life. A well-known American writer has expressed, in his
own humorous language, the astonishment which he felt at witnessing a
short “turn up” at an English cattle-fair. The grave propriety of the
affair, and the admirable order in which it was conducted, struck him
with profound admiration, as contrasted with the “inglorious and
inevitable Yankee _clinches_, followed by a general _mêlée_,” which in
popular language is termed a “free fight,” and in which every one
attacks every one else with any weapons and in any manner.
Before proceeding to our genuine English Boxing, we must just mention
the French “_savate_,” of which we have heard so much of late. We have
seen it practised and taught in the _salles d’armes_, and for it, as a
system for boxing, we have the profoundest contempt; as also for that
execrable French custom of striking upwards with the knee when at close
quarters--an atrocity for which we should like to see a man soundly
horsewhipped on the spot.
Now, the _savate_ simply consists in this. You make a feint, as if to
strike in the usual manner, and then, instead of striking with the fist,
you kick with the foot. Or, when your antagonist is pressing you
sharply, you send the point of your toe into his chest, and stop him.
Or, you retreat from him, suddenly turn round, and kick at him
backwards--of course being quite unable to tell where the blow will
alight, and possibly inflicting an injury the effects of which will be
felt for life.
Those who are practised in this manœuvre will employ it with wonderful
skill. They will hit you on the nose or on the forehead without the
least apparent effort, and with the greatest certainty; they will fling
you back from your advance with stunning force, and the effect of the
lash-out is terrific. Indeed, if the object of boxing be to use all
means of offence and defence, the _savate_ is indispensable.
Having many opportunities of visiting several schools of arms, we
carefully considered this system, which was then totally unknown to us;
and after watching it well for some time, during our residence in Paris,
we came to the conclusion that the _savate_ is useful enough in case you
are attacked by ruffianly fellows, whom you must needs maim, lest they
should maim you; and that by the combined use of the _savate_ and a
stick, or even the fist, a man may knock over a couple of assailants
simultaneously and effectually.
And if a Frenchman who uses the _savate_ were opposed to an Englishman
who never heard of it, the probability is that the former would win,
because the latter would lay himself open to a mode of attack which he
had always been taught to consider unfair and unmanly. But we do not
believe that it would be of the slightest value against any one who knew
that his antagonist would employ it, and think that the person
attempting to use it would find himself hurled to the ground, and
probably discover that his leg was violently sprained. So much for the
_savate_.
It is not easy to teach any branch of the science of arms in a book, and
boxing is perhaps as difficult to be learned from books as fencing.
Still, something can be done even through the medium of ink and paper;
and the reader can, at all events, learn to avoid the errors to which a
total novice is subject.
The first and most important point is the position in which the boxer
stands.
This is not very dissimilar to that of a left-handed fencer, except that
the right arm, instead of being raised, is brought across the body, so
that it defends the pit of the stomach (technically called the “mark”),
and only leaves a very small portion of the chest open to a blow. The
left arm is rather higher than if it held a foil, and the elbow is kept
well to the side. This latter point is most important, as it is
impossible to hit straight from the shoulder if the elbow should project
from the side.
The weight of the body rests mostly on the right leg, so that the boxer
can step backwards or forwards, while still keeping his side to the
adversary. If you stand opposite a good sparrer in boxing attitude, you
will be surprised to find how well guarded he is, and how difficult it
is to hit him, even if he neither moves nor attempts to return the blow.
His left hand keeps you well away from him, and his right is ready
either to stop or throw off your blow.
[Illustration]
It will be seen from the foregoing description, as well as by reference
to the illustration, that a right-handed boxer stands with his left side
towards the opponent, uses his left hand for the chief part of the
hitting, and reserves the right for stopping, parrying, or returning
blows when at close quarters, or what is technically called a “rally.”
Practise this attitude before a glass. You will soon see if you lay
yourself open, and will learn to stand in a correct position. Advance
and retreat also before the glass, and so make sure that you do not
expose some weak point while so doing. I met a French gentleman who had
made himself really a creditable boxer, merely by practising before his
mirror; and after a few days of practical work with the gloves he became
quite a formidable antagonist.
[Illustration]
Another important point is the making up of the fist--not such a simple
matter as it seems. The fingers must be clenched tightly, and the thumb
doubled down outside them, so that when presented towards your
antagonist he can see no part of it projecting over the fingers. This
can also be practised at the glass. If the hand be rightly held, it will
be seen that the knuckles form a kind of arch, of which the middle
knuckle is the keystone. It is with this knuckle that you strike; and be
sure to clench the hand with all your power as you deliver the stroke;
otherwise you will run a sad risk of dislocating either a finger or a
thumb.
The position of the head is of no small importance. On no account bear
forwards, as is the way of muffs, but keep it lightly thrown back, and
never take your eye off that of your opponent. Greenhorns always lower
the head, and rush at their antagonist with their arms flying about like
the sails of a windmill; and the natural consequence is, that their
opponent quickly steps aside, lets them pass, and knocks them neatly
over by a blow on the temple, which they cannot possibly see or guard.
Having got our attitude and doubled our fist, we now learn to strike.
Deliver your blow straight and from the shoulder, not merely with the
arm. Put all your body into the stroke, and aid it with the spring of
the right foot against the ground. Thus you add to the blow the force of
a kick, and the stroke comes with such terrific force that I have seen a
tall man lifted fairly off the ground and deposited on his back by a
straight shoulder-hit, even though the two were merely sparring with the
gloves.
Never draw back your hand before you strike, as that tells your opponent
what you are contemplating. Your stroke should flash out like the
lightning, without warning and straight to the mark. You cannot strike
too rapidly, and you cannot recover yourself too quickly. Practise this
repeatedly before a glass, and note the length of your reach, for in a
knowledge of distance lies half the art of boxing. As a general rule, if
you can get your left toe on a level with your antagonist’s heel, you
have your proper distance. This rule, however, is necessarily variable,
as in the case of the contest to which allusion has just been made,
where one party could reach a full foot beyond the other, and had, in
consequence, the advantage of twelve inches of space at his disposal.
Now that we have practised the left hand and arm, let us turn to the
right. Except when striking, you need not trouble yourself to close the
fist very tightly, but may let the hand lie in an easy and unconstrained
position across the chest, ready for use in any direction that may be
required.
The chief use of the right hand and arm are for parrying and stopping,
which are thus achieved:--
If your opponent delivers a blow at the face or upper part of the chest,
and you find yourself in a good position, do not retreat from it, but
fling your right arm sharply outwards and upwards, catching the
opponent’s arm by the wrist, and throwing it out of the direction in
which it was aimed. The effect of the parry is very powerful, as it
mostly lays open the antagonist’s head, and gives opportunity for a
smart return blow with the left hand; it is then near the opponent’s
head, and has only a short distance to traverse. This return blow is
technically called the “counter,” and is usually very effective, as it
takes effect just at the moment when the antagonist is expecting his
own blow to strike, and turns the tables on him after a rather
discouraging fashion.
Practise this also before the glass, parrying an imaginary blow from the
opponent, and simultaneously shooting your own left hand against the
spot where your antagonist’s head ought to be. I have often found that a
quick double blow when countering is very embarrassing, and gives an
opportunity of stepping in and planting your right hand after your left
with enormous effect.
Stopping is performed in another manner, and must often be used where
the parry is impracticable. For example, if your antagonist strikes at
the body the parry cannot be accomplished, and you must either get away,
stop, or take the blow in hopes of retaliation. In stopping you receive
the blow on your arm, and thereby break its force, while, unless your
opponent is possessed of herculean strength, the arm scarcely feels the
stroke, yielding before the assault and acting like the cotton bales
that have saved many a ship from the enemy’s cannon.
If you are fortunate enough to find a good boxer, get him to give you a
few lessons in the practical department of the art, and in all cases be
careful to keep your temper. I know that few things are more annoying
than when you have made a telling plan of attack, and are just about to
begin its execution, to be checked by a short dab on the nose, which
makes your eyes water and the lids blink, and forces you to act on the
defensive for the next few minutes, while the tears are streaming down
your cheeks, and you cannot use a handkerchief by reason of the gloves.
Remember that there are two golden rules for a boxer, namely, hit
straight and keep your temper. Fail in either of these requisites, and
you will probably come off second best; fail in both, and you will
certainly do so. Listen to an account of a battle where strength and
weight and anger were overmatched by skill and coolness:--“As the
assailant rushed in he ran a prominent feature of his face against a
fist which was travelling in another direction, and immediately after
struck the knuckles of the young man’s other fist a severe blow with the
part of his person known as the epigastrium to one branch of science,
and the bread-basket to another. This second round closed the battle.”
So we say again, keep your temper and hit straight. You see a circular
blow takes more time to deliver than a straight one, and if your
opponent swings his arm round at you, while you dart out your own fist
at him, your blow will have taken effect long before his clumsy
circumgyratory attempt has completed its journey.
Let me here offer another piece of advice. Do not buy cheap gloves. You
may get them at a saving of half-a-crown or so, but you will soon wish
that you had expended the money in obtaining a better pair. Gloves
require the best horsehair, arranged after a peculiar fashion, in order
to give them the mixed softness and elasticity which they require.
Inferior gloves soon become hard and knotty, the stuffing gets thin in
some places, especially just in those very parts where it is most
required. The consequence is, that the gloves become practically
useless, and the blows are nearly as severe as if struck with the bare
hand.
Remember that, although we strongly approve of boxing, it is not to be
understood that we want every one to be fighting. We very much approve
of fencing and single-stick, but we certainly have no wish that every
one who learns to use the foil or the single-stick in mimic combat
should want to try his rapier or his broadsword in deadly fight.
As a mere exercise it stands supreme; but it is even something beyond an
exercise. It shows that superior strength and height and weight are
powerless before superior skill, and that a small boy who knows how to
box will certainly conquer a big one who is ignorant of the art. We say
again, we do not recommend fighting; but still it is good to know how to
stand up in one’s own defence, and we heartily wish that when we went to
school some kind friend had taught us the rudiments of the art.
The brutal bully of a school never holds his own when he meets with an
antagonist who is skilful in the use of his hands, and is forced to
confess that his brute strength and cruel nature are useless in such a
contest. We once saw a school bully get his deserts in a charming
manner. He had fallen upon (of course) a much smaller boy, and was
chasing him down a passage between a double row of forms. Suddenly his
victim turned round, and delivered a right-and-left blow on the chin of
his tormentor, astonishing him in no slight degree. The bully pressed
on, thinking to annihilate his impertinent antagonist, but could not do
so on account of the narrowness of the passage. As he pressed forward
the bold little fellow retreated backwards, step by step, popping in his
blows sharp and quick, and stepping back just as those of his persecutor
were delivered. The bully never guarded a single blow or succeeded in
hitting one, and by the time that they had made their way through the
defile he was obliged to confess himself beaten, and was deposed for
ever from the despotic throne which he had so long disgraced.
[Illustration]
CANOES AND CANOEING.
Despite the assertion of even so great an authority as Mr. Macgregor,
whose name has now become a household word, canoeing is an amusement
that must necessarily involve a considerable amount of danger, and ought
to be indulged in by no one who has not, according to the Eton phrase,
passed in swimming. Whether or not it is a very comfortable means of
locomotion is purely a matter of personal feeling; but in face of the
fact that the Canoe Club now numbers upwards of a hundred members, and
that the boat-builders have had extensive orders for canoes, it is only
fair to suppose that those who venture enjoy the new mode of locomotion.
There is one circumstance that will, no doubt, obtain for canoes great
favour, especially with young people, and that is, their cheapness.
Messrs. Searle at Lambeth, Simmons at Putney, or Wheeler at Richmond,
will build a good stout travelling canoe, after the fashion of the _Rob
Roy_, for 15_l._; which price includes mast, sails, apron, paddles, and
all necessaries. Any respectable boatbuilder would no doubt do the same,
when he is once provided with the necessary instructions, which, I need
scarcely add, it is essential should be carried out to the letter, for
the slightest deviation from the recognised standard might cause the
most disagreeable results. The following points are the most important.
In having a canoe built, it is a matter of considerable moment, that in
certain portions of its framework it should be constructed for and
peculiarly adapted to the particular person who is going to use it. The
length of the foot decides the height the canoe should be from keel to
deck; the length of the legs the space required for the “well;” while
the weight, of course, decides the displacement that is to be accounted
for, and must be taken into consideration at the same time as the amount
of luggage that it is proposed to carry. Oak is the best wood that can
be used, with the top streak of mahogany and the deck of fine cedar.
These were the materials of the _Rob Roy_, and as her weight with all
her fittings was only 71 lbs., it would be unreasonable to want one
lighter; indeed, for anything like knocking about flimsy canoes are
utterly and entirely useless, and only aggravate the labour of paddling.
The length over all should be 14 feet; beam, 26 inches; depth, from top
of deck to bottom of keel, 12 inches, though towards the gunwale this is
reduced to 8½ inches. The well should be 32 inches long and 20 broad,
and protected by a combing of oak half an inch in height. If your canoe
is intended for travelling purposes, the beam should be 6 inches abaft
midships; so that when stores, provisions, sails, and so on, are stowed
away forward, it brings the craft to very nearly an even keel.
Otherwise, it should only be 1 foot abaft midships. The boards that
compose the floor, and on which you have to sit, resting your back
against the backboard, are about two feet long, and are fitted so that
the knees just touch the combing, while the heels are against the
footboard on the keel, thus obviating the discomfort that would follow
on having to keep the legs stretched out straight at full length. As I
take it for granted that no one would think of going to the expense of
having a canoe built without securing the services of some one who could
supply him with the many minor details that it would be impossible to
give here, I shall not enter more minutely into any of the less
important matters, but would add, that a comfortable backboard, after
the following pattern, goes a long way to lightening the labour of
paddling. It should be made of two strips of oak, 18 inches long, 2½
inches wide, arched by two crosspieces, one of which should be grooved,
so as to rest on the combing, and work after the fashion of a hinge, it
being fastened thereon by a stout cord. The result is that the muscles
down the back are supported and rested while the spine is left free. The
greatest possible care should be taken in selecting the apron, which is
too often left to the last moment and chosen in a hurry. Being intended
to prevent the water making its way over the deck into the well, and at
the same time to avoid being fastened in any way likely to impede the
canoeist in case of an upset, it may readily be understood that it
requires nice discrimination and handiwork. It should fit close to
him--in short, he should be measured for it as for a coat. Mr. Macgregor
has invented a new apron, the receipt for which may be easily obtained,
as well as any other particulars, at Messrs. Searle’s at Lambeth.
I should recommend the novice in canoeing to rest content with
propelling himself by the aid of his paddle for a while--in fact, until
he is thoroughly at home in his craft and the way to manœuvre her.
Spruce-fir is the best wood of which to have it made, as it combines
lightness and durability, two qualities that can be readily appreciated
after a day’s locomotion. The action, though it need not be violent,
except in currents and so on, is very fatiguing, owing to the motion the
body takes from side to side. At the same time, practice will prove to
the novice that he requires to move but very little from one side to the
other. There can of course be no harm in having a mast fitted to your
canoe, and as soon as you feel capable of the risk, set it up, hoist
your sail, and be prepared to capsize. This latter alternative is only
added by way of warning. With caution nothing of the sort need happen,
for the stiffness of canoes under sail in a strong wind and heavy
weather has been satisfactorily proved on more than one occasion.
Messrs. Silver and Co. of Bishopsgate Street, make the sails according
to a regulation pattern that has been supplied them, while the boom,
yard, and woven cord can best be obtained at Mr. Farlow’s, the
fishing-tackle maker’s, in the Strand. I have thought it advisable to
give these names, as they are recommended by Mr. Macgregor himself, who
speaks in their favour with that best of all good reasons for doing so,
namely, that he has found their wares satisfactory. In conclusion, I am
bound to add that I am under much obligation to him for the information
he has afforded me concerning this pleasant and novel form of aquatic
amusement.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
CRICKET.
“Come on, lads! come on: come on, one and all:
Now shoulder the bat, and spin up the ball.
Take the field like young Trojans; your prowess essay:
While the batsman cries, Ready, the bowler says, Play:
Then run like wild deer pursued by the hounds,
And ground your bat proudly just over the bounds.”--CUNNINGHAM.
The game of cricket is the noblest of English pastimes. It combines
athletic power, grace, quickness of eye and of hand, nimbleness of leg,
and scientific skill. It is played by high and low, rich and poor, man
and boy; and there is no game, either native or foreign, can compete
with it for manliness, fairness, and healthfulness. Every one should
learn to play it, and all should begin early. How it originated, or who
evolved its beautiful laws and regulations, it is now difficult to
discover. We have nothing like it among the sports of the Greeks and
Romans, and we can only trace it to an old English pastime in the reign
of Edward III., called “club-ball.” Strutt, in his “Pastimes of the
People of England,” gives the following engravings, representing two
specimens of club-ball: the first from a MS. in the Bodleian Library,
dated 1344,--and exhibits a female figure in the act of throwing a
ball to a man, who elevates his bat to strike it. The next specimen
of ball, taken from a drawing more ancient than the former, _i. e._ a
genealogical roll of kings of England to the time of Henry III., in the
Royal Library, presents two players only; and he who is possessed of the
bat holds the ball also, which he either threw into the air, and struck
with his bat as it descended, or cast forcibly upon the ground, and beat
it away when it rebounded. But we should be rather inclined to trace the
game of cricket to trap-ball, which was, no doubt, an improvement upon
the early games played with the bat and ball. This may be traced as far
back as the fourteenth century, and a curious specimen of the manner in
which it was then played is given in a beautiful MS. in the possession
of Francis Douce, Esq. Here are only two players; but the game then
consisted of six or eight of a side, and the size of the bat indicates
the holder to have possessed no great judgment in striking the ball.
There was another game, called “stool-ball,” from which some have
supposed cricket to have been derived; but there is no evidence in
favour of this position, and it seems rather more reasonable to look
upon it as a modification of “trap-ball” than any other game.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
THE BAT.
The regulation size of the bat, called by Felix the mighty sceptre of
delight, is 38 inches in length, of which 25 inches are taken up by the
pod, or, according to the more modern term, the blade, and 13 by the
handle.
No bats are made longer than this, although, of course, they are allowed
to be of various smaller proportions, in order to suite the height of
the player.
[Illustration]
We must strongly impress on all young players the great importance of
using a bat in proportion to their strength. If they use a very heavy
bat, they will not be able to move it quickly enough to play the ball
properly, and are apt, in consequence, to get into a sluggish style of
play, which is almost sure to stick to them all their lives. A very
light bat is equally injurious: the batsman sees an easy ball approach,
plays hard at it, when, instead of going right over the head of long-on,
it drops an easy catch into mid-wicket’s hands, in consequence of there
not being enough driving power in the bat to send it further.
[Illustration]
THE BALL.
The present style of ball, with the exception of some very slight
modifications, seems to have been in use since cricket assumed anything
like its present form. According to the rules of the present day, it
must not be more than 9 inches in circumference, and must not weigh more
than 5¾ or less than 5¼ ounces. Match balls are always treble-seamed,
and are sold at the average price of 7_s._ 6_d._ But for ordinary
practice, a double-seamed ball, at about 6_s._, will be found quite good
enough, and will answer just as well as the more expensive article.
THE STUMPS.
The stumps have undergone more change during the last hundred and fifty
years than any of the accessories to cricket.
At first they were two in number and only 12 inches high. A third stump,
2 feet in length, was laid across them, although, with the exception of
being knocked down by the bowler, it was similar in no respect to the
bails of the present day, as the wicket-keeper was obliged, in order to
stump a person, to place the ball in a large hole dug between the two
stumps.
[Illustration]
In the year 1780 the width between the two stumps was decreased to 6
inches. It was also at this time that a bail was introduced, for it is
almost impossible to dignify the transverse stump, 2 feet long, which
was in use till this date, by that appellation. In 1781 a third stump
was added, and the height of the wickets increased to 22 inches. The
addition of a stump was mainly owing to the fact, that Lumpy, a
celebrated bowler of that day, sent the ball almost three times running
between the two stumps. This was thought so unfair for the bowler, that
it was resolved to increase the number of stumps in order to give him a
better chance.
In 1814 we find that the wickets were increased in height to 26 inches,
and in width to 8 inches, and in 1817 another inch was added to their
length. This, with the exception of dividing the bail into two equal
parts, is the last change that has taken place.
PADS OR GUARDS.
Since the introduction of round-hand bowling, pads or guards have come
into vogue, and at the present time it is really a dangerous feat to
play without them. The first notion of a leg-guard was two thin boards
placed anglewise on the right shin. Since that time improvements have
been effected in them at various times, until they have arrived at their
present state of excellence.
[Illustration]
The leg-guard itself is now so well-known as to render any description
of it needless; but as there are two or three fastenings in use, it will
perhaps be as well to state what they are, and also which is the best.
The first consists of three sets of tape, one round the ancle and two
round the knee. These naturally take a great deal of time to fasten
properly, and if one breaks, the pad is rendered useless for some time.
The next is three pieces of elastic, with a catch which fastens almost
instantaneously; but in course of time it loses its elasticity, and the
pad dangles on one leg in a loose and awkward manner. The third, and in
our opinion the best fastening, is two sets of straps, with holes
pierced at very slight intervals. The player can then have his pad as
tight as he pleases, without the chance of the fastenings breaking or
becoming loose, as in the case of the other two. There are several other
guards, such as elbow and private-guards; but they are scarcely ever
used.
[Illustration]
BATTING GLOVES.
These are now made with the palm cut clear away, thus enabling the
batsman to hold the bat in a much firmer manner than he could were the
palm of his hand covered by the glove. As will be seen by referring to
the accompanying cut, the india-rubber is placed differently on the two
hands. This difference will be more particularly noticed on the two
thumbs. The left one, as it is always behind the handle of the bat,
requires no guard; but the back of the left hand being in front of the
bowler, is covered with a semicircle of india-rubber, while the strips
of the india-rubber on the fingers are much longer than those on the
right hand. It may be urged by those who object to the use of batting
gloves, that the ball is likely to fly off them and give a catch. This,
although true, very rarely happens, and besides, if the ball came with
enough force to fly into the air off the glove, is it not very probable
that, without a glove to shield them, the fingers would be broken by the
same collision?
[Illustration]
WICKET-KEEPING GLOVES.
These might be more appropriately termed gauntlets, for they are much
longer than the ordinary gloves, and entirely cover the wrist. Thanks to
the suggestions of the best wicket-keepers of the day, they have now
been greatly improved, and have padding only in those parts where it can
possibly be required. It is absurd to try to keep wicket well without
wearing these gauntlets; therefore let no young cricketer be fool-hardy
enough to attempt the feat. As the right and left hand gloves are
precisely the same, the artist has drawn one glove in two positions, in
order to show the front and back of it.
THE LAWS OF CRICKET.
The following are the laws which govern the game everywhere. They have
been recently revised by the Marylebone Club, usually considered the
highest authority in the game.
1. _The Ball_ must weigh not less than 5½ ounces, nor more than 5¾
ounces. It must measure not less than 9 inches, nor more than 9¼ inches,
in circumference. At the beginning of each innings either party may call
for a new ball.
[It is, however, not customary to have a new ball at the beginning
of each innings. One a match is usually considered sufficient.]
2. _The Bat_ must not exceed 4¼ inches in the widest part; it must not
be more than 38 inches in length.
3. _The Stumps_ must be 3 in number, 27 inches out of the ground; the
bails 8 inches in length; the stumps of equal and of sufficient
thickness to prevent the ball from passing through.
4. _The Bowling Crease_ must be in a line with the stumps; 6 feet 8
inches in length; the stumps in the centre; with a return crease at each
end towards the bowler, at right angles.
5. _The Popping Crease_ must be 4 feet from the wicket, and parallel to
it, unlimited in length, but not shorter than the bowling crease;
unlimited in length, so that the batsman may keep out of the way of the
ball when it is thrown in.
6. The wickets must be pitched opposite to each other by the umpires, at
the distance of 22 yards.
7. It shall not be lawful for either party during a match, without the
consent of the other, to alter the ground by rolling, watering,
covering, mowing, or beating, except at the commencement of each
innings, when the ground shall be swept and rolled, unless the side next
going in object to it. This rule is not meant to prevent the striker
from beating the ground with his bat near to the spot where he stands
during the innings, nor to prevent the bowler from filling up holes with
sawdust, &c. when the ground is wet.
8. After rain the wickets may be changed with the consent of both
parties.
9. The _Bowler_ shall deliver the ball with one foot on the ground
behind the bowling crease, and within the return crease, and shall bowl
four balls before he change wickets, which he shall be permitted to do
only once in the same innings.
[In a one day’s match six balls are usually allowed as an over.]
10. The ball must be bowled; if thrown or jerked, the umpire shall call
“no ball.”
11. He may require the striker at the wicket from which he is bowling to
stand on that side of it which he may direct.
12. If the bowler shall toss the ball over the striker’s head, or bowl
it so wide that in the opinion of the umpire it shall not be fairly
within the reach of the batsman, he shall adjudge one run to the party
receiving the innings without an appeal, which shall be put down to the
score of wide balls; such balls shall not be reckoned as one of the four
or six balls: but if the batsman shall by any means bring himself within
reach of the ball, the run shall not be scored.
13. If the bowler deliver a “no ball” or a “wide ball,” the striker
shall be allowed as many runs as he can get, and he shall not be put out
except by running out. In the event of no run being obtained by any
other means, then one run shall be added to the score of “no balls” or
“wide balls,” as the case may be. All runs obtained for “wide balls” to
be scored to “wide balls.” If the ball shall first touch any part of the
striker’s dress or person (except his hands), the umpire shall call “leg
bye.”
[If, however, the batsman runs two byes from a wide or a no ball,
they are scored as two wides only. Many young players are in the
habit of running a single bye off a wide ball, without ever thinking
that they endanger their wicket without the slightest possible
chance of advantage to themselves.]
14. At the beginning of each innings the umpire shall call “play;” from
that time to the end of each innings no trial ball shall be allowed to
any bowler.
[This rule is very seldom enforced, as a new bowler is almost
invariably allowed a trial ball, though not on the wicket.]
15. _The Striker is Out_ if either of the bails be struck off, or if a
stump be bowled out of the ground;
16. Or, if the ball, from a stroke of the bat or hand, but not the
wrist, be held before it touches the ground, although it be hugged to
the body of the catcher;
17. Or, if in striking, or at any other time while the ball shall be in
play, both his feet shall be over the popping-crease, and his wicket put
down, except his bat be grounded within it;
18. Or, if in striking at the ball, he hit down his wicket;
19. Or, if under pretence of running or otherwise, either of the
strikers prevent a ball from being caught, the striker of the ball is
out;
20. Or, if the ball be struck, and he wilfully strike it again;
[This does not prevent the batsman from hitting the ball off his
wicket when it glides in from not being blocked with sufficient
force.]
21. Or, if in running the wicket be struck down by a throw, or by the
hand or arm (with ball in hand), before his bat (in hand) or some part
of his person be grounded over the popping-crease. But if both the bails
be off, a stump must be struck out of the ground;
22. Or, if any part of the striker’s dress knock down the wicket;
23. Or, if the striker touch or take up the ball while at play, unless
at the request of the opposite party;
24. Or, if with any part of his person he stop the ball, which in the
opinion of the umpire at the bowler’s wicket shall have been pitched in
a straight line from it to the striker’s wicket, and would have hit it.
[On the 15th of April, 1863, the M. C. C. altered this rule as
follows:--“Or, if the ball hit any part of his person which in the
opinion of the umpire at the bowler’s wicket shall have been placed
in a straight line from it to the striker’s wicket.” But at their
next meeting, discovering that their former proceedings were
informal, they cancelled their new rule; so that the law remains as
before.
It is almost impossible for a round-arm bowler, unless he bowl over
the wicket, to pitch the ball in a straight line.]
25. If the players have crossed each other, he that runs for the wicket
which is put down is out.
26. A ball being caught, no runs shall be reckoned.
27. A striker being run out, that run which he and his partner were
attempting shall not be reckoned.
28. If a lost ball be called, the striker shall be allowed six runs; but
if more than six shall have been run before “lost ball” shall have been
called, then the striker shall have all which have been run.
29. After the ball shall have been finally settled in the
wicket-keeper’s or bowler’s hand, it shall be considered dead; but when
the bowler is about to deliver the ball, if the striker at his wicket go
outside the popping-crease before such actual delivery, the said bowler
may put him out, unless (with reference to the 21st law) his bat in
hand, or some part of his person, be within the popping-crease.
30. The striker shall not retire from his wicket and return to it to
complete his innings after another has been in, without the consent of
the opposite party.
31. No substitute shall in any case be allowed to stand out, or run
between wickets for another person, without the consent of the opposite
party; and in case any person shall be allowed to run for another, the
striker shall be out, if either he or his substitute be off the ground
in manner mentioned in laws 17 and 21, while the ball is in play.
32. In all cases where a substitute shall be allowed, the consent of the
opposite party shall also be obtained as to the person to act as
substitute, and the place in the field which he shall take.
33. If any fieldsman stop the ball with his bat, the ball shall be
considered dead, and the opposite party shall add five runs to their
score; if any be run, they shall have five in all.
34. The ball having been hit, the striker may guard his wicket with his
bat, or with any part of his body except his hands; that the 23rd law
may not be infringed.
35. The wicket-keeper shall not take the ball for the purpose of
stumping until it has passed the wicket; he shall not move until the
ball be out of the bowler’s hand; he shall not by any noise incommode
the striker; and if any part of his person be over or before the wicket,
although the ball hit it, the striker shall not be out.
36. The umpires are the sole judges of fair or unfair play; and all
disputes shall be determined by them, each at his own wicket; but in
case of a catch, which the umpire at the wicket bowled from cannot see
sufficiently to decide upon, he may apply to the other umpire, whose
opinion shall be conclusive.
37. The umpires in all matches shall pitch fair wickets; and the parties
shall toss up for choice of innings. The umpires shall change wickets
after each party has had one innings.
38. They shall allow two minutes for each striker to come in, and ten
minutes between each innings. When the umpire shall call “play,” the
party refusing to play shall lose the match.
39. They are not to order a striker out unless appealed to by the
adversaries;
40. But if one of the bowler’s feet be not on the ground behind the
bowling-crease, and within the return-crease, when he shall deliver the
ball, the umpire at his wicket, unasked, must call “no ball.”
41. If either the strikers run a short run, the umpire must call “one
short.”
[The run is of course not scored.]
42. No umpire shall be allowed to bet.
43. No umpire is to be changed during a match, without the consent of
both parties, except in case of violation of the 42nd law; then either
party may dismiss the transgressor.
44. After the delivery of four or six balls the umpire must call “over,”
but not until the ball shall be finally settled in the wicket-keeper’s
or bowler’s hand; the ball shall then be considered dead; nevertheless,
if an idea be entertained that either of the strikers is out, a question
may be put previously to, but not after, the delivery of the next ball.
45. The umpire must take especial care to call “no ball” instantly upon
delivery; “wide ball” as soon as it shall pass the striker.
46. The players who go in second shall follow their innings, if they
have obtained eighty runs less than their antagonists, except in all
matches limited to only one day’s play, when the number shall be limited
to sixty instead of eighty.
47. When one of the strikers shall have been put out, the use of the bat
shall not be allowed to any person until the next striker shall come in.
NOTE.--The Committee of the Marylebone Club think it desirable that,
previously to the commencement of a match, one of each side should
be declared the manager of it; and that the new laws with respect to
substitutes may be carried out in a spirit of fairness and mutual
concession, it is their wish that such substitutes be allowed in all
reasonable cases, and that the umpire should inquire if it is done
with the consent of the manager of the opposite side.
Complaints having been made that it is the practice of some players
when at the wicket to make holes in the ground for a footing, the
Committee are of opinion that the umpires should be empowered to
prevent it.
THE LAWS OF SINGLE WICKET.
1. When there shall be less than five players on a side, bounds shall be
placed 22 yards each in a line from the off and leg-stump.
2. The ball must be hit before the bounds to entitle the striker to a
run, which run cannot be obtained unless he touch the bowling-stump or
crease in a line with his bat, or some part of his person, or go beyond
them, returning to the popping-crease, as at double wicket, according to
the 21st law.
3. When the striker shall hit the ball, one of his feet must be on the
ground, and behind the popping-crease, otherwise the umpire shall call
“no hit.”
4. When there shall be less than five players on a side, neither byes
nor overthrows shall be allowed, nor shall the striker be caught out
behind the wicket, nor stumped out.
5. The fieldsman must return the ball so that it shall cross the play
between the wicket and the bowling-stump, or between the bowling-stump
and the bounds; the striker may run till the ball be so returned.
6. After the striker shall have made one run, if he starts again he must
touch the bowling-stump, and turn before the ball cross the play, to
entitle him to another.
7. The striker shall be entitled to three runs for lost ball, and the
same number for ball stopped with bat, with reference to the 28th and
33rd laws of double wicket.
8. When there shall be more than four players on a side, there shall be
no bounds. All hits, byes, and overthrows shall then be allowed.
9. The bowler is subject to the same laws as at double wicket.
10. Not more than one minute shall be allowed between each ball.
THE BATSMAN.--HINTS TO YOUNG PLAYERS.
The first point to be considered in batting is the sort of bat to be
used. Many young cricketers cramp their play by using a bat much too
heavy for them. Now, it stands to reason that one should be able to have
a complete mastery over the weapon one wields. A bat weighing about two
pounds will be found quite heavy enough for most schoolboys. It may,
however, be urged that the heaviest bats drive the farthest, and that
many of the old-fashioned players made some of their famous hits with
them; but it must also be borne in mind that those were the days of
underhand bowling, and that at the present time cutting and leg-hitting,
in consequence of the swift round-arm bowling, are infinitely more
prevalent than forward drives, and that in many cases the position of
field-on is done away with altogether. Therefore let us beg young
players to use a light bat, one that feels almost as a whip in their
hands, and one with which they can play back as quickly as is
necessitated by the speed of the bowling.
And now a few words with regard to guard. Of course, in many instances,
the distance from the wickets depends considerably upon the pace and
pitch of the bowling, but as a rule the safest guard is about four
inches from the popping-crease. This block not only gives you a better
chance of stopping shooters, but also enables you to play forward
better, since you can cover more ground than if your block were nearer
the wicket. A leg hit can also be made sooner, and consequently squarer,
and with a good long block there is less chance of hitting your wicket
in playing back, and more chance of stopping a full-pitched ball before
it touches the ground.
The left foot should be at right angle to the wickets, and the other
parallel with them. Free hitters keep their hands at the upper part of
the handle of the bat, whilst some players, who have a reputation for
steadiness, hold it with the hands three or four inches apart. The
former position enables a player to hit much sooner, and also to have a
much longer reach. The advantages of the position are readily discovered
when there is a chance of a cut or a leg-hit.
The batsman should stand quite erect, endeavouring to make the most of
his height. Before the ball is delivered, the bat should be raised, with
the full face presented to the bowler, and covering as much of the
wicket as possible.
The moment the bowler is about to deliver the ball, raise your bat
slightly from the block, keeping it almost straight to him. If you hold
it, as some players do, still on the block-hole until the ball
approaches, you are almost sure to be too late for the ball; and
although, if it be straight, you may keep it off your wicket, yet it is
a hundred chances to one that you will miss all the leg balls, or those
which come to the off-side.
Play, too, as low as possible. It is much better to hit a ball well
along the ground for two, than to send one high into the air, although
you get four or five for it. Sooner or later you will lose your wicket,
for the ball is sure at some time to be caught by long-on or long-off.
Assuming that the player has taken up his position at the wicket, we
must now fully impress upon him _the importance of not being in a hurry
to score_. In fact, nothing is so injurious as making runs in the first
over. The best maxim to be observed is, play steadily until you can
understand the bowling. It is astonishing how much confidence you gain
after you have played a dozen balls or so. Then, when you have, as it
were, taken the measure of your opponent, lunge out, as soon as you get
a chance, and show the field your favourite drive, and prepare to make a
score.
In writing the last sentence, we are reminded of the many mishaps and
even serious accidents that have occurred on the cricket-field in
consequence of the careless manner in which some players run. They rush
between the wickets, watching the course of the ball rather than the
wicket towards which they are going; occasionally they run too far and
lose time, or else do not run far enough and lose runs; or, what is even
worse, a collision takes place between the two batsmen, and one is run
out, if not seriously injured by the bat or body of his comrade. The
simplest plan, therefore, is always to run on the right side, _to keep
the bat in the right hand, and to watch the wicket towards which you are
running_.
It has often been remarked that the most difficult balls to play are
shooters, and those that are well pitched up and just take the bail off.
Indeed, some shooters are almost sure to take a wicket; the moment,
therefore, that a ball shoots, drop the bat back close to the stumps,
and chop down upon the ball. Stopping a shooter is always a sign of good
play, and often at Lord’s produces more applause than a hit which scores
two or three runs. Some players, like Parr and Carpenter, can stop
shooters so well, that although they only chop down upon them, yet the
force of the stroke often drives the ball far enough to obtain a run.
How happens it that so many players miss the cut, although they attempt
this stroke at almost every ball that rises to the off? As a rule, young
players hit too soon, and if they touch the ball, in most cases they
give either point or cover-point an easy catch; others hit in time, but
play with a horizontal bat, the face of which is presented to the
bowler. The ball then rises in many instances either to slip or
long-slip, with the usual result. In cutting, the batsman should wait
until the ball has almost passed the wicket, and then drop down upon it,
with the face of the bat almost towards the ground. This keeps the ball
down and drives it in the direction required. In cutting, the left foot
acts as a pivot, and the right foot is drawn back. The advantage of
taking a long block is here shown, as occasionally this leg knocks down
the wicket; and if the block is near the stumps, they are easily struck
by the bat itself.
In leg-hitting, on the contrary, the right acts as a pivot, and the left
is thrown forwards. The sooner the hit is made the squarer the ball
goes, and, as a rule, the greater distance also. Since then, in swift
bowling, long-on is generally done away with, a leg ball that is hit in
front of long leg is safe to obtain more runs than if hit much behind
the wicket.
A very common habit among young players is to strike at wide balls. Many
and many a time have we seen a batsman rush out to a wide off-ball, and
send it into point’s or cover’s hands, thus depriving himself of his
innings and his side of a run. Before we conclude this somewhat
desultory chapter, we must urge upon everybody the importance of wearing
both gloves and leg-guards when playing against swift bowling. The many
dangerous accidents that have happened in consequence of the legs and
hands having no protection, should induce every person to guard himself
as much as possible. One can stand up to the wicket much better, and
have far more confidence, when one knows that a blow from the ball upon
the legs is likely to produce no ill effect. The absence of pads causes
many players to run away from the ball, and if the ball turns, the
off-stump in most cases will soon be prostrate.
Be careful, too, in running, that you ground your bat on the
popping-crease. Nothing is so tantalizing to a player as to lose a run
through the carelessness of his companion, who in his excitement runs an
inch or so short of the proper distance.
The moment the ball has left the bowler at your wicket, walk a yard or
two; you may by this means steal many a run that it would be impossible
to obtain if you were at your own wicket when the ball was hit.
Never, if you can possibly avoid it, hit a ball on the wrong side. How
disgusting it is to see a big awkward player swipe a ball right round to
the off-side which he should have drawn or played to mid-wicket on!
[Illustration: THE LEG HIT.]
Do not run away from the ball. If you do, you can never get a good leg
hit; besides, you naturally expose your wicket, and if the ball turns in
(as it often will do), you will find it almost impossible to be back in
time to save your off-stump.
As a rule, play forward whenever you can; but be sure you don’t run out
of your ground to hit unless you feel perfectly confident of your
success.
Waiting for the ball is always a dangerous experiment, and will often
result in your playing back so far that you upset your own wickets when
in the act of achieving a most scientific cut.
Be careful to keep one foot steadily planted within the popping-crease;
it is sometimes impossible to help being bowled or caught, but the worst
player in the world can always prevent the wicket-keeper stumping him.
Mind, too, that the bat ought to strike the ball, and not the ball the
bat.
Be always cautious of straight balls, however tempting they may appear.
Remember that if you miss them, you are safe to lose your wicket;
therefore always treat them with the respect that they deserve.
Balls, too, that come about five inches above the bails should generally
be allowed to pass, for unless you are well skilled in the art of
hitting down, you are sure to give a catch.
And now a word or two with regard to the three leg hits--the draw, the
forward, and the backward leg hit.
When a ball seems pitched at the leg stump, hold your bat straight, as
it were, for a block; but the moment the bat meets the ball, turn the
face of it a trifle round towards you, and the ball will then slip off
between your legs and the stumps. This is called the draw.
This play, however, requires a great deal of practice, and should very
rarely be attempted by inexperienced players.
The forward leg hit is made in the following manner:--When a ball is
pitched rather wide on the near side, advance the left foot in front of
the wicket, turn half round, and hit down upon the ball as hard as you
can.
When the ball is pitched inside the near stump, step back with the right
foot, and with an upright bat play it off the wicket. The ball will fly
rapidly along the ground, and usually between leg and long-stop.
Recollect, the sooner you hit at a leg ball the squarer it goes.
The cut is the most difficult of all, and can only be accomplished when
the ball rises a little wide of the off-bail. Even then you are very
likely to play either too soon or too late at it, and it is very rare
indeed that a player makes a really good legitimate cut.
When you see the ball about to rise a foot away from off-bail, draw the
right leg backwards, and, with a horizontal bat, give the ball something
between a pat and a push, between point and short-slip.
This is very far from being a scientific definition of this delightful
stroke; but I think, from the plain manner in which I have stated it,
that it will be more likely to be understood.
[Illustration: THE CUT.]
The technical names for the various balls the batsman is likely to
receive are--the full pitch, the tice, the hop, the half volley, the
ground ball, and the shooter.
Leg balls and balls to cut we have already explained.
At first sight, a full pitch would seem one of the easiest balls to
play; but in reality it is not; and many a good batsman, who could play
any number of well-pitched balls, has lost his wicket by playing rashly
or across a toss. Again, if hit carelessly, it is almost sure to be
caught by one of the long-fields; and often, when the batsman tries to
play it down, it hits the top of his bat, and goes into long-stop’s
hands. The best plan (if you are not very tall), when you think it is
too high to take your wicket, is to leave it alone altogether; but when
you feel persuaded that if you miss the ball it will take the stumps,
either play it down, or else hit it where there is no field.
The tice is almost a full pitch. If you have a long reach, go in and
play it forward; if not, however, keep your bat down and block it.
Running in is generally a bad habit, as it is sure to engender a loose
style of play.
The long hop, if straight, should be played very carefully, and with an
upright bat. Those batsmen who have, as it is called, “got their eye
in,” can usually strike at one with impunity; but as the ball is liable
to twist every time it reaches the ground, the young player should be
very careful in striking at it.
A half volley is a ball which rises well from the pitch. Catches are,
however, often the result of hitting right at a half volley.
A ground ball is perhaps better known among our young friends as a
sneak. If played at with a high bat, the wicket is almost sure to fall.
The best plan is to keep the bat well down, and play forward at it. If
the bat is kept in a straight line with the ball, you cannot miss it,
and often by playing it forward you can send it past the bowler.
A shooter is the most difficult ball to play, and if not treated with
proper respect, is sure to take the wicket. The moment the ball shoots,
play back, dropping the bat down on it within an inch of the stumps. You
are by this means very likely to keep it off your wicket, but do not try
to hit it. Left-hand bowling generally turns in from the off; therefore
play forward at it.
FIELDING.
Although not of so interesting a character as batting and bowling, yet
fielding is in itself of too much importance to be overlooked, or even
carelessly practised, by anybody who desires to become a cricketer. Many
a match has been lost by loose fielding, and instances without number
have occurred of a man who, after being missed before he has made a run,
has sent his score up to fifty before receiving his dismissal. It is
astonishing how many runs may be saved by careful fielding. Hits which
at first seem good for four, only obtain one through good fielding, and
that even a sharp run.
Quick fielding should be practised by the tyro, before either of the
other two departments of the game. As soon as a boy gets a ball in his
hand, he tries to catch it, or to get a companion to throw it to him;
and thus before he even knows how to handle a bat, many a boy has in him
the elements of a good field. As, however, the fascination of batting
grows upon him, he cares less for the other parts of the game; and thus
it happens that although we have many gentlemen cricketers who bat just
as well as professionals, yet the latter obtain the mastery through
their superior bowling and fielding, which they are obliged to practise
as often as batting, in order to obtain the reputation of good players.
I have, however, heard it stated that no finer fielding can be seen than
that shown in the University match. This is generally admitted; but it
must be borne in mind that the University match is played by young men
whose ages vary from twenty to five-and-twenty, whereas most of the
players are over thirty, and some rapidly approaching to forty, an age
at which the bones are not so lissom as those that have just arrived at
man’s estate.
As a proof of this I may cite the Gentlemen and Players’ match at
Lord’s, a contest (if such it can be called) which is only worth seeing
on account of the excellent bowling and fielding of the professional
players. It is satisfactory to know that it is the opinion of most
judges of the game, that as long as the gentlemen persist in practising
batting only, they will scarcely have a chance against the players.
No advice, however, will produce the same good upon a young player in
the matter of fielding as watching a match in which some of the best
players take part. In this he should bear well in mind the manner in
which the ball is stopped and thrown to the wicket-keeper.
Supposing that our cricketer can stop and catch a ball pretty well, the
next point for him to study is to throw it in carefully. How many men
that should have been run out save their wickets through the bad
throwing of a field, who, either through hurry or nervousness, pitches
the ball over the wicket-keeper’s head, or sends it in so much along the
ground as to render the picking up of it sharply by the wicket-keeper a
matter of impossibility! The best plan is to throw in a catch to the top
of the bails. A long hop occasionally meets with success; but if the
ground is bumpy, and the ball is thrown in from a distance, it is very
possible that it will go over the man’s head.
One of the most prominent failings of a young eleven is the careless
manner in which they back up. Overthrows in a professional eleven are
almost a matter of impossibility, for if the ball passes one field there
is almost sure to be another behind him to stay its progress; whereas,
in some clubs, if there is one man to back up the wicket-keeper, the
ball is considered safe, and as he generally stands within a few yards
of the wicket, he usually misses the ball if it passes the amateur
Lockyer. If, however, it is expedient to throw the ball to the bowler,
and he does not wish to hurt his fingers, an overthrow is sure to
follow, for long-on or long-off scarcely ever thinks it his duty to
stand behind the bowler’s wicket when the ball is thrown in. Overthrows
in themselves are not only annoying, because they are obtained through
no merit of the batsman, but because they always produce a merciless
laugh from the spectators, and occasionally epithets of a not very
complimentary character. It is therefore the captain’s bounden duty to
make his eleven back up well, and not to consider the ball safe unless
two or three people are behind the wicket at which it is thrown.
One naturally imagines that the wicket-keeper’s hands get occasionally
damaged from the sharp throwing to which he is subjected. Whatever he
would do without his thick gauntlets, it is unpleasant to imagine. Care
should on all occasions, therefore, be taken to save his hands, and when
the batsmen are not running, there is no need to throw the ball as hard
as possible at him. The long-stop, who returns the ball to the
wicket-keeper oftener than any other field, should send it in gently
when there is no run, and the wicket-keeper ought, in throwing it to the
bowler, to toss it as quietly as he can, in order not to deaden the
fingers of that important functionary.
Whilst writing about bowler and wicket-keeper, we cannot allow the
opportunity to pass of requesting all players to obey with the utmost
fidelity any order given to them in the field. The wicket-keeper can, by
raising his hand, change the positions of the field unknown to the
batsman, who, hitting a ball to a place which he thinks is not covered,
and finding it suddenly stopped, sees that he must play more carefully
in future.
Two of the most important positions in the field are the mid-wickets and
cover-point, and no player, unless he is a safe catch, and can return
the ball sharply, should ever be placed there. It has been computed that
mid-wicket runs more out than any other field. Anybody who has seen R.
Daft in this place will be surprised at the rapidity with which he picks
up the ball and sends it in. The space that a good cover-point can
command is really astonishing. Players seeing that the ball has passed
point feel sure that it is safe for one, whereas, if cover runs in and
sends it in well to the wicket-keeper, one of the batsmen will probably
have “run out” to his name.
Long-stop should on no account be too close to the wicket. If he takes a
position where he feels sure he can stop one run, he will do much more
service than nearer the stumps. Not only will he be able to stop some
balls which might have gone over his head, but he may stay the progress
of many leg-hits and slipped balls, besides standing a better chance of
a catch.
Catching comes so naturally that we need say little about it. The chief
point to be remembered is to keep the hands well together. Occasionally
one sees--in catching--the ball slip through a man’s hands altogether.
At other times the ball lodges in the hands for an instant, and then
drops to the ground, because the arms were not drawn back with the ball,
but held out to meet it. In catching, the arms should always be drawn
back as the ball comes, as this lessens the force with which the ball
strikes the hands. A good plan, but one which, however, requires much
practice, is to pat the ball up as it comes, and then to catch it. It is
evident that when the ball has thus been sent up, it descends much more
slowly than when it comes direct from the bat.
Even, however, if, in spite of advice and practice, one of the field is
unfortunate enough to miss a catch, the captain should not allow any
unfeeling remarks to be made. The anguish of the unfortunate player is
quite deep enough without being aggravated by growls and sneers from
comrades who may perhaps do the same thing in a few minutes.
The captain should also do all he can to prevent talking in the field.
It is time to do that when a wicket falls, but very unlike a true
cricketer to endeavour to attract the field’s attention just as the
bowler is about to deliver the ball.
BOWLING.
We have read in a manual of Cricket that there are four styles of
bowling, and Felix, we believe, in his excellent work on the Bat, states
that there are five modes, all of which are in general use. For the
present purpose, however, we think it will be sufficient if we confine
our remarks to two styles,--
1. Round-arm Bowling.
2. Underhand Bowling.
The former is an innovation upon the latter, and, like all improvements,
met with a great deal of opposition at first, since it was more
difficult to play, and made the innings shorter. Now, however, the
batting seems to have obtained as much mastery over the round-arm
bowling as before it had over the underhand, and it is even probable
that in a few years a new style will be introduced, in order to decrease
the inordinate length which innings assume now-a-days.
The following hints apply to the round-arm bowling:--
The ball should be held with the fingers across the seams, as this
occasionally makes the ball twist, and renders the defence of the
batsman a matter of more difficulty. Many bowlers, however, can never
get what is technically called “a twist on,” whereas others, after an
hour’s practice, can manage to make the ball twist in any direction they
please.
It is also important to take a run of a few yards, increasing the
distance in proportion to the pace. This allows the bowler to get his
arm into swing, and increases the impetus with which the ball is
delivered.
The bowler should always stand with his body well towards the other
wicket. We have seen a man run almost round the wicket and deliver the
ball without looking at the stumps he is supposed to aim at. Long
practice had enabled him to bowl pretty well, but the absurdity of his
position was so apparent that it provoked a laugh from all who saw it.
It must not be imagined, however, that a bowler should always deliver
the same style of ball. Many a wicket (paradoxical as it may seem) falls
from a ball that is not straight. A batsman who has had a hit to leg for
four, becomes at once anxious to get another. Very often, if a bowler
pitches the ball in a different manner, the batsman endeavours to give
another specimen of his favourite hit, and equally often loses his
wicket. Practise, therefore, change of pace and pitch, as catches are
almost sure at some time to be the result.
Nyren, one of the earliest writers on Cricket, speaks of this plan in
the following manner:--
“When it is difficult to part two batsmen, and either of them has a
favourite hit, I have often succeeded in getting him out by opening the
field where his hit is placed, at the same time hinting to the bowler to
give him a different style of ball. This, with the opening of the field,
has tempted him to plant his favourite hit, and in his anxiety to do so
he has not unfrequently committed an error fatal to him.”
In writing of round-arm bowling let us recommend young bowlers to
practise bowling over the wicket in preference to what is usually termed
round or outside it. The former plan is the only mode that necessitates
straight bowling, since, from the position of the arm, the ball may be
straight all the way, whereas, in the latter, the ball must come in from
the leg side. Again, it will be recollected that in the late discussion
about leg before wicket, many of the best judges gave it as their
opinion that the batsman could not be given out l. b. w. unless the ball
was delivered over the wicket. To these advantages may be added the fact
that a much better view of the opponent’s stumps can be obtained, and
that the distance is also shorter than from the outside of the wicket.
Among the most common faults of young players may be cited a habit of
not pitching the ball far enough. This is mainly owing to a want of
power in the arms, but still a little careful practice will considerably
assist the player. Those nice specimens of bowling known as bailers,
when the bail is knocked off, can only be obtained by a ball that is
well pitched up. Shooters, also, are the result of balls that touch the
ground near the wicket. We may also add that a ball that is pitched
short is easy to play, since it can be seen well, and its coming in
contact with the ground deadens its force and checks its speed.
Another practice which is often condemned is a habit of bowling fast.
Now, it is a great mistake to imagine that fast bowling is the most
difficult to play, as may be ascertained by the fact that our fastest
bowlers by no means take the most wickets, excepting Jackson, whose
bowling, however, is not so successful now as it was at one time. Fast
bowling does not so readily allow accuracy of pitch as a slower style;
besides, a fast bowler soon gets tired, then bowls loosely, and then
gets taken off. Those tips (for they are nothing else) to the slips for
four or five, are more the result of the bowler than the batsman. Let
us, therefore, earnestly recommend young bowlers to begin bowling
slowly, and to increase their pace as they grow older and stronger. Many
a promising bowler has been irretrievably spoilt by beginning to bowl
too fast for his strength, and finding in a short time that he has no
style at all, and that the fruit of his labour is principally found in
the number of byes scored off him.
Particular care must also be taken to avoid bowling over the shoulder.
It is a pity that there is not some more stringent rule than at present
exists with regard to law 10, although in such a case the most
successful bowlers would find their occupation gone; besides, as the
no-balling of a bowler by an umpire usually causes the greatest
unpleasantness in a match, spoiling the amicable feeling which almost
invariably exists in the cricket-field, it is much better to avoid the
head and front of the offending, by practising the best means to prevent
the arm getting over the shoulder. We recollect at school a big sturdy
fellow, who, not content with bowling over his shoulder, delivered the
ball always as fast as he could. His bowling, however, (as might be
expected) was so loose that his services were never called into
requisition at a match; but at practice he occasionally handled the
ball, much to the dread of the batsman he opposed. One day he was
bowling against the present writer in his usual headstrong style, and
actually sent a ball over the wicket-keeper’s head into long-stop’s
hands. This naturally frightened us, as we thought it just possible that
the next might hit us on the chest. A narrow escape we had, for the very
next was pitched so high, that, had we not quickly dropped on the
ground, it would have hit us on the head with such force as probably to
stop cricket with us for ever.
Our remarks on underhand bowling, or slows, must necessarily be brief.
That good slows are effective, particularly against county twenty-twos,
is proved by the analysis of R. C. Tinley’s bowling, and the destructive
power of Mr. V. E. Walker’s slows is well known to most of those who
have played against him.
It is often a good plan to begin with a fast bowler at one end and slows
at the other. The change of pace and delivery is very puzzling to the
batsman, who is compelled to play the two styles on a different plan.
If, however, a slow bowler is hit about much, he should be changed at
once, as the hits from slows generally add up quicker than those from
round-arm.
If change of pitch is advantageous in the swift bowling, it is the very
soul of slows. Full pitches, leg balls, off balls, shooters, all styles
and forms, should be allowed full play. The bowler, too, must dodge
about, and make himself an extra field, going wherever he imagines the
ball will be hit. In writing about slows we cannot pass unmentioned the
great advantage derived from making a ball twist in from the leg. It is
always understood that the leg stump is the hardest to defend, and
consequently the best to attack.
A slow ball is pitched a little wide of the leg, the batsman runs away
from his guard, and, in his imagination, sees the ball hit to square leg
for four. In reality, however, he finds his off-stump knocked down by
this same leg ball at which, in his ignorance, he struck too soon, and
therefore saw it hit his stump before he could be back to stop it.
The positions of the field may be varied according to the opinion of the
bowler.
[Illustration]
THE WICKET-KEEPER.
The duties of the wicket-keeper are to stop the balls when missed by the
striker, to stump him when off his ground, and to catch the ball, and
knock the wickets down before the striker, when running, can ground his
bat over the popping-crease. Since the introduction of fast bowling this
position has become the most dangerous in the field, and a wicket-keeper
seldom gets through a match without receiving some bruises. He should
always wear pads and gloves. Some people recommend a guard for the
abdomen, but this is scarcely ever used.
The wicket-keeper should, if possible, be captain of his eleven. As he
is behind the striker, he can by a motion of his hand move any of the
field closer or further, unknown to the batsman. This naturally requires
great tact, and is often the means of saving many a run, or of getting a
wicket.
He should stand in a somewhat stooping position, his left leg well
forward and his hands close together, while his eyes should watch every
movement of the ball. He should be very cautious about taking leg balls,
as, if he gets too near, he is likely to receive a blow from the
batsman.
As soon as the ball is thrown to him from the long-stop, he ought to
advance two or three yards (provided, in the meantime, the batsmen are
not running), and send it gently into the bowler’s hands.
The moment a hit is made, he should stand on that side of the wicket
farthest from the ball, and wait quietly till it is thrown in. The ball
should be thrown in by one pitch, and not in long hops, as is often the
case among bad players. Above all, he should knock the wicket down as
seldom as possible, but content himself with striking a bail off when he
thinks the batsman is out of his ground.
LONG-STOP.
Stands behind the wicket-keeper, in order to prevent byes.
He must be careful not to be too far away from the wicket, or else
clever players are apt to steal a bye before the ball has reached him.
The moment he gets the ball, he should return it sharply into the
wicket-keeper’s hands, and scarcely ever throw it over to the bowler. He
should assist in backing up short slip, and also endeavour to save runs
on the leg side. When slows are put on in a match, the long-stop is
usually changed to a position about twelve yards behind the bowler’s
head.
POINT.
Stands in a direct line with the popping-crease, at a distance of about
twelve yards on the off-side, for fast bowling. The faster the bowling,
the sharper he should stand. He should commence at first at the distance
we have just mentioned, and approach when he sees the player about to
strike. A sharp point may often stop a hard hit to cover-point. This
position is, however, rather dangerous in fast bowling, and, at the same
time, one of the most important. For slow bowling, he should come in to
about five yards, and stand at a more acute angle than when the delivery
is very swift.
SHORT-SLIP.
Stands a few yards behind the wicket on the off-side. As this position
does not entail much running, it is usually allotted to the bowlers. The
balls come in very sharply when the bowling is swift, and the person
occupying this position has to watch the ball very attentively, or he
stands a very good chance of receiving it in his face. It is also his
duty to back up the wicket-keeper, and to take his place at the wicket
when that functionary runs after the ball.
COVER-POINT.
Stands some distance behind point, to prevent a second run. The sharper
the bowling is, the squarer he should stand. He must also be particular
in backing up, as he can prevent many an overthrow.
LONG-SLIP.
Performs the same duties, and occupies the same position, with regard to
slip as the last-mentioned field does to point. He should, when he can,
back up long-stop and save a second run.
LONG-ON.
Stands deep on the on-side. When the bowling is very swift, he can take
the place of mid-wicket on, as a ball in such a case is seldom hit fair,
either on the on or off side. He must be a good catch, a good thrower,
and very swift on his legs.
LONG-OFF.
Occupies the same position as long-on at the other side of the wicket.
LEG.
Stands about the same distance behind the wicket on the on-side as
long-on does before it. He must possess a quick eye and great agility.
Leg-hits, after touching the ground, usually turn off in quite a
different direction from what one would expect. Leg should therefore try
to get them before they pitch, or else be careful in running to meet
them.
MID-WICKET ON AND OFF.
Stand halfway between the long-fields and the striker’s wicket. As many
catches come to these parts of the field, they should be very sharp and
active, and try to prevent the ball going past them.
THIRD MAN UP.
In very swift bowling the long-on often takes this position. He stands
between point and short-slip, in a direct line with the bowling-crease,
at a distance of about twelve yards.
* * * * *
And now, having given the functions of the fieldsmen, we propose to
show, by diagrams, their positions with regard to fast and slow
bowling.
DIAGRAM I.--FAST ROUND-ARM BOWLING.
[Illustration: S. Striker; 1. The Bowler; 2. Wicket-Keeper; 3.
Long-Stop; 4. Short-Slip; 5. Point; 6. Long-Slip; 7. Mid-Wicket on; 8.
Long-off; 9. Cover-Point; 10. Third Man up; 11. Long-Leg; U. Umpire.]
DIAGRAM II.--MEDIUM PACE ROUND-ARM BOWLING.
[Illustration: S. Striker; 1. Bowler; 2. Wicket-Keeper; 3. Long-Stop; 4.
Short-Slip; 5. Point; 6. Long-Slip; 7. Long-on; 8. Long-off; 9.
Cover-Point; 10. Mid-Wicket on; 11. Leg; U. Umpire.]
DIAGRAM III.--SLOW UNDERHAND BOWLING.
[Illustration: 1. Bowler; 2. Wicket-Keeper; 3. Leg; 4. Short-Slip. 5.
Point; 6. Extra Long-on; 7. Long-on; 8. Long-off; 9. Mid-Wicket off; 10.
Mid-Wicket on; 11. Square-Leg; S. Striker. U. Umpire.]
* * * * *
As in very swift bowling the ball is often hit to the off, it will be
seen that in Diagram I. we have placed no less than six out of the
eleven on that side. Mid-wicket on and long-off should be a little
nearer the bowler, and long-slip nearer the long-stop, than represented
in the illustration.
In Diagram II. third man up is made mid-wicket on, while cover-point
comes in nearer than when the bowling was very fast.
In Diagram III., as the bowling is slow, no long-stop is required; he is
therefore sent as an additional field behind the bowler. Short-slip
stands in very close to the wickets.
CROQUET.
MATERIALS OF THE GAME.
THE MALLETS.
[Illustration]
The mallet, of which in a Croquet set there are eight, varies in length
from 32 to 39 inches. The handle is thin and round, and is fastened into
the head somewhat in the manner of an ordinary mallet used for knocking
in tent pegs. The head slightly resembles in shape a dice-box, inasmuch
as it is narrower in the centre than at the ends. The mallet is the
active agent in the game, just as the bat is at cricket; and as the
mallet is always in the hands of the striker, care should be taken that
it is well planed. Towards the top of the handle a few circular lines
may be cut with advantage, as they give a firmer hold to the hand. At
the bottom of the handle is usually painted a colour, or a number of
lines, corresponding to the marks on one of the balls. Such an
arrangement, although not absolutely necessary--since a player can use
any mallet without interfering with the game--is of advantage in
according to each player the same coloured mallet as his ball; and were
the mallets uncoloured, disputes would probably arise about one which
was a greater favourite than the others. Some people prefer to have the
colour of all the balls painted on their mallets. This is a very good
plan if one is in the habit of playing with inattentive people, who will
not recollect when it is their turn to play. As the hard surface of the
end of the mallet-head coming sharply in contact with a ball often
cracks, chips, or breaks it in two pieces, it has been suggested that a
piece of wash-leather should be let in at each end of the head, in order
to deaden the force of the stroke. We do not, however, recommend the
adoption of this plan, as it is very expensive, and the wash-leather is
not only likely to be soon torn, but in the course of the game may come
out altogether; besides, a Croquet-ball can always be replaced for a
trifling sum, and, if played with carefully, ought to last twelve months
at least.
[Illustration: CROQUET.]
[Illustration]
THE BALLS.
The balls are eight in number, and are generally painted different
colours--blue, pink, black, yellow, brown, orange, red, green. The size
varies from 3 inches to 3⅝ inches in diameter. The balls of some of the
better Croquet games are not entirely covered with paint, but adorned
simply by a band of paint, about half an inch in width, or with lines of
blue and red, varying from one to four in number, as in the
illustration. Balls coloured thus are, however, not so easily
distinguishable as those which are painted all over.
THE HOOPS.
[Illustration]
The hoops, ten in number, are made of iron. They are about 16 inches
high, and 12 inches wide; although these dimensions are not of much
importance. In some games the hoops are of bronze, or else are painted a
golden colour. Usually, however, they are of a black, iron tint. The set
with which we generally play is painted white. This plan is in many
respects advantageous, for as the shades of evening close round the
players the contrast between the grass and the hoops becomes less vivid,
and consequently in the excitement of the game a player occasionally
tumbles over a hoop, and probably hurts his legs; when, however, the
hoops are painted white, the play can be continued to a late hour
without the chance of such a casualty as the breaking of one’s shins
against the iron hoops.
THE POSTS.
The posts, two in number, should be from 24 to 36 inches high. One end
must be sharpened into a point, in order to allow it to stick well in
the ground. One is called the starting, the other the turning post. The
top half is, in the cheaper sets, divided into eight divisions, each of
which is painted according to the colours of the ball. Thus, beginning
from the top, we trace the divisions into the following order:--
1. Blue.
2. Pink.
3. Black.
4. Yellow.
5. Brown.
6. Orange.
7. Green.
8. Red.
The order of the colours acts as a guide to the players; and since those
on each side play alternately, it follows that in a game of eight, the
dark balls--blue, black, brown, and green--are matched against the light
balls--pink, yellow, orange, and red. The advantage of this arrangement
is plainly manifest, since, during the game, the players, without
referring to the peg, will know that the light colours play alternately
with the dark. We admit, however, that opinion may be divided about the
lightness of red as a colour; and we therefore hope that the
Croquet-makers will change it into white, which is not likely to be
confounded with the yellow, for the latter, in consequence of being in
more frequent use, is sure to become dark in much shorter time than the
former. Some, however, as in the illustration, have red and blue
divisions, marked from one to four, to correspond with the number of
rings painted on the balls.
[Illustration]
CLIPS.
[Illustration]
A set of Croquet-clips--little pieces of tin, coloured according to the
colours of the balls, in order to slip over the hoops, and thus show the
hoop through which the player has next to pass--has been lately
introduced. We do not, however, recommend the use of them, as they are
liable to cause much confusion, and certainly give a great deal of
trouble to those players who adopt them.
MARKING BOARD.
A gentleman has invented a marking-board, on which is placed the
position of each player after his stroke is made; but as this requires
an umpire to mark the positions of the balls, we do not think the plan
worth adoption.
[Illustration]
TUNNEL.
In some games a very narrow hoop--scarcely wide enough for the ball to
pass through--has been introduced under the name of tunnel. It certainly
adds to the complication of the game.
[Illustration]
THE CAGE
Is another novelty, formed by placing two hoops across each other, and
fastening a bell at the point of intersection, which has to be struck by
the ball passing through.
[Illustration]
A CROQUET STAND
Is one of the best of the recent inventions in Croquet, and is to be
recommended as a great improvement over the unwieldy box, which contains
usually a Croquet set, and which is generally so badly arranged that a
quarter of an hour is occupied in taking out the Croquet implements, and
about double that time in replacing them after the game is over.
HOW THE GAME IS PLAYED.
Sides are chosen in the usual manner, the captain of one side taking the
first ball and the captain of the other the second; while the remaining
balls are given to the other players in the order in which they are
chosen. Eight persons can play at this game, but any smaller number will
do equally well. If only six or four play, the same number of balls must
be used; but if two play, the game is improved by each player taking two
balls and playing them alternately as usual. If there be an odd number
of players--either three, five, or seven--the players play against each
other, or else one person takes two balls and plays for each side. It
has been suggested that to amuse a large party two games should go on at
once, through the same hoops, one side to begin at the starting-post and
the other at the turning-post. The confusion, however, caused by the
balls getting in each other’s way would quite spoil all chance of good
play.
Assuming that each player has a ball and a mallet, that the hoops are
arranged in either of the three positions given on pages 177, 178, 179,
180, we now come to the mode of playing the game. The object is to drive
the balls through all the hoops, in the direction indicated by the
dotted lines on the diagrams, and to strike the two posts. The side all
of whose members succeed in performing this feat first wins the game.
Now, although this is the chief object of the game, yet the act from
which it derives its title, to wit “Croquet,” is of much greater
importance than would at first be imagined. If a player hit with his
ball any of the others, he is allowed to place his own against the ball
he has struck, and setting his foot upon his own ball, he hits it with
the mallet, and the force of the blow drives the opponent’s ball a
considerable distance in the direction towards which the mallet is
directed. As the player is allowed to croquet either friend or foe, it
is evident that he can do a great deal of damage or service, according
to his inclination, since he is at liberty to drive the ball in any
direction he pleases. (_See_ Rules of the Croquet, page 182.) It must,
however, be borne in mind that no player can croquet or be croqued until
he has been through the first hoop.
The holder of the first ball, placing his ball a mallet’s length in any
direction from the starting-post, endeavours by striking it with the end
of his mallet to drive it through the first hoop. If he succeeds, he
continues his turn, and attempts to send the ball through the second
hoop, and then through the third; for driving the ball through a hoop or
croquing another ball imparts the privilege of an additional stroke.
When he has finished, the second goes on, and the other players follow
in the order in which the balls are marked upon the post. Till a player
has gone through the first hoop he is not allowed to have an extra turn,
if his ball hit that of another. In a short time is palpably shown the
great advantage of the croquet. Often when a player has his ball in a
good position in front of a hoop, another will hit it and drive it to
the other end of the croquet-ground, compelling the croqued ball to take
two or three turns before it can regain its former position.
Occasionally two or three balls lie close to each other, and one is
struck by a ball which was some distance off. The striker is now allowed
to place his ball by the side of the one he has struck, and then, after
croquing it, is almost sure of hitting the two others, since his last
stroke has brought him very near to them.
The player who reaches the turning-post first has great advantages for a
time, for as soon as he touches it he commences his return journey, and
meeting the other players on their road to the farthest point of their
voyage, he is able to croquet them and considerably impede their
progress. While writing about the turning-post, we cannot refrain from
calling attention to a strange rule which appears in a recently-issued
manual of Croquet. In this work it is stated that on touching the post
the striker discontinues playing, and is not allowed for the act the
same privilege that he obtains for passing through a hoop. This
regulation is, we think, so unfair that we cannot allow this work to go
to press without taking the opportunity of recording our protest against
the adoption of the rule in question. It must be evident to anybody who
knows anything about the game that it is a more difficult task to strike
the post than to pass through a hoop. Now, touching the post is a point
in the game, for it is one of the stations that everybody must pass on
the journey; and as for each other point, such as passing a hoop or
croquing, the player is allowed an additional turn, surely it stands to
reason that the same advantage should be accorded to a player who
performs the feat of striking the turning-post. Captain Mayne Reid and
all the other writers on Croquet (with one exception) agree with us in
the view we have taken on this subject, to which we have at some length
drawn attention, in the hope that the author of the obnoxious rule will
think fit to make the necessary alteration.
When a player has passed through all the hoops, he becomes what is
called in the technical language of Croquet a Rover, and is privileged
to rove about over the ground croquing his friends and foes (_see_ page
185). It is therefore obvious that a good player can prove, when thus
situated, of immense advantage to his side, and should on no account hit
the starting or winning post till all on his side have passed through
the last hoop (_see_ page 191). Good players, however, generally content
themselves with passing through all the hoops but two, as it often
happens that if a Rover is tiresome his adversaries unite in their
efforts to drive his ball against the starting-post, and thus kill him.
This, of course, they cannot do until he has passed through all the
hoops. The excitement towards the end of the game is almost
inconceivable; each stroke is watched with the keenest interest.
Gradually one by one the players hit the post, until perhaps only two
remain, and now occurs an opportunity for skilful play. If the two
opponents are good players, they afford a rare treat to the bystanders.
The object of each is first to hit the post, and, failing in that, to
keep as far off his adversary as he can. Both endeavour, at the same
time drawing nearer to the great object in view, to keep the post
between their own and the other ball. At length one plays at the post,
misses it, and sends his ball near his adversary, who first hits it,
next croquets it away, and then strikes the post, while all his side
wave their mallets aloft, and loudly shout “Victory!”
[Illustration: DIAGRAM NO. 1.--This position, which is the simplest of
those we have drawn, is the one which we recommend all young players to
adopt. The space between the hoops and between the hoops and the posts
should be about six feet, although it can be varied in proportion to the
capabilities of the different players. The course of the ball is
indicated by the dotted lines, and the arrows show the direction in
which at starting the ball should travel. Although it may appear rather
a simple matter to go through the two first hoops by one straight
stroke, yet the unfortunate player will soon find out his mistake by
experience, and that, in attempting to pass through the hoops, “Slow and
sure” is the best maxim to adopt.]
[Illustration: DIAGRAM NO. 2.--In this, the second, diagram it will be
seen that the two centre side hoops are done away with, and that one is
placed in the centre of the game instead: but although in the play we
now require one hoop less than in the former diagram, yet the player
will have to pass through the same number of hoops as before, since he
travels twice through the hoop in the centre--once on his way to the
turning-post, and once on his return. This position is necessarily not
so simple as the last one, for now all chance of going through the three
side hoops in one turn is done away with, and few players will be able
to make the passage in less than three turns.]
[Illustration: DIAGRAM NO. 3.--In this the same number of hoops is used
as in the first diagram, but the hoops numbered respectively 4 and 9,
instead of being placed parallel to the others, are now at right-angles
to them: thus, in playing from 3 to 4, one has to keep to the right of
the second ring, and then to pass through it from the outside of the
game--a much more difficult arrangement than either of the other
positions we have described. As the player’s knowledge of Croquet
increases, many other positions will suggest themselves; but those we
have printed are the simplest, and are the diagrams in general use at
the present time.]
[Illustration: DIAGRAM NO. 4.--In this diagram the cage is introduced;
otherwise it is nearly the same as Diagram No. 2.]
The reader is now requested to give his attention to the following
Rules, which we believe will be found to meet all the requisites of the
game.
RULES.
STRIKING.
1. At the commencement of the game the ball is to be placed a mallet’s
length from the starting-post in any direction, and the player
endeavours to drive it through the first hoop.
[As the distance between the first post and the first hoop depends so
much upon the size of the Croquet-ground, the first rule may be altered
to suit the convenience of the players; but if the length is less than a
mallet, the player will probably strike the post with his own mallet.]
2. In striking the ball, the player must stand on one side of the ball,
and not behind it.
3. In striking, the mallet must be about an inch from the ground, and
must not be pushed along it when the stroke is made, except when the
distance between the ball and some other object is too small to admit
the mallet lengthwise.
[Some players wish only one hand to be used in striking. Most of the
large sets, however, are too heavy to allow this rule to be generally
carried out.]
4. The ball must be struck with an end of the mallet, and not by the
side.
ORDER OF PLAYING.
5. The balls are to be played in the order in which they are marked upon
the post.
6. If any player play out of his turn, he finishes the stroke; but for
the violation of the last rule he is deprived of the next turn.
[It may perhaps be suggested that a player, seeing a good opportunity
for some effective stroke, would purposely play out of his turn. This we
doubt; for not only would the deprivation of his next turn do him a
great deal of damage, but the chances are that one of the other players
would stop him before he had commenced the stroke.]
7. If a player play with a wrong ball, he has to replace the ball and
lose his next turn.
[This penalty is not enforced against a player if the error be not
discovered before the arrival of his second turn.]
8. If a player by a stroke of his mallet drives his ball through the
next hoop in the order of his course, he is allowed to continue his
stroke.
9. A player may in one stroke drive his ball through more than one hoop.
10. If a ball, in going through a hoop, strike another ball, the player
can either continue his stroke at the next hoop, or else croquet the
ball that is struck; but he is not allowed two turns for passing through
a hoop, and then hitting a ball.
11. If a ball strike another ball, and then pass through a hoop, the
player can either croquet or continue his stroke, and has not to pass
through the same hoop again.
[From this rule the reader may infer, that if a ball go through its hoop
either by striking another ball or by hitting the sides of the hoop, it
is considered to have passed the hoop.
It has been suggested that a ball is dead directly it croquets another,
and that therefore any stroke it makes after that is of no avail; but as
this not only does away with Rule 11, but prevents any player croquing
two balls in one stroke, we cannot adopt it.]
12. If a ball, instead of playing at its hoop, play at a ball on the
other side of the hoop, and consequently have to be moved by the hand
through its own hoop in order to croquet, it is not considered to have
gone through the hoop, but must return to the proper side of the hoop in
the ordinary manner.
13. A ball is not through a hoop if the handle of the mallet when laid
across the two sides of the hoop from whence the ball came touches the
ball without moving the hoop.
14. If a player strike a ball which he cannot croquet, and by that
stroke go through a hoop, the last stroke holds good, and he has another
turn.
15. If a ball, when croqued through its hoop in a wrong direction, roll
back through the hoop, it has not to pass through the same hoop in the
same direction again.
THE CROQUET.
[When the game of Croquet first came into fashion, there was only one
mode of the croquet, which was that usually known as the tight croquet.
Since then other forms, known as the loose and slipping croquet, have
come into fashion, and have met with so much favour that it is
impossible to deny their claims to our attention. In the tight croquet
the player must keep his foot upon his own ball, and is not allowed to
move it while he makes the stroke; but in the loose croquet he need not
even put his foot on his own ball at all, and is able consequently to
drive not only his adversary’s ball, but also his own, in any direction
he pleases. The adoption of this plan, even although it lengthens and
complicates the game, affords so much pleasure to the players
themselves, that it is becoming universally adopted. Some writers,
however, insist that to rovers only should the privilege of the loose
croquet be accorded; whilst others, on the other hand, would allow the
privilege only to those who are not rovers. In fact, so much is to be
said on each side, that the better plan is to allow the players to
choose which of these courses they think fit to adopt. In some places,
in addition to the loose croquet, a practice prevails which is usually
known by the term “taking two off.” Thus if a player croquet a ball, he
is allowed to drive his own ball in any direction he pleases, without
touching the croqued ball. After this he has another stroke, so that he
is enabled to get close to any ball on the ground. This plan seems to us
so highly objectionable, and so thoroughly subversive of all good play,
that we must decline to recommend it. It should also be known that many
of our correspondents object to loose croquet altogether, on the ground
that it tends greatly to prolong the turns, and thus spoils the game, as
people, grown tired of waiting, lose all interest in it, and forget when
their turn comes to play. What expressions more common on the ground
than “Whose turn is it now?”]
16. A player is allowed the privilege of croquing whenever his ball
strikes another, except when by doing so he makes the ball that is
struck hit the winning-post, if it have passed through the hoops.
17. In the tight croquet the player must keep his foot firmly upon his
own ball, and if the stroke move it the ball must afterwards be brought
back to the position it occupied before it was struck.
[Some writers insist that if the croqueur’s ball slip, he loses his
turn. This arrangement is too absurd to be tolerated for an instant.]
18. No ball can croquet, or be croqued, until it has passed through the
first hoop.
[It has been the custom to allow a player to take up his ball, and play,
when his turn comes, from the starting-post again, if he misses the
first hoop. This plan, however, has nothing to recommend it. It would
enable a player who wished to play last to do so at ease by
intentionally missing the hoop, and is obviously so unfair that we have
no wish to adopt it.]
19. No ball (except a rover) can croquet the same ball twice, until it
(the croqueur) has passed through a hoop or touched the post since its
first croquet.
[If, however, the croqueur be a rover, he cannot croquet the same ball
twice in one turn. In either case, however, he is at liberty to strike
the same ball twice, but this act does not allow him the privilege of a
fresh stroke.]
20. A croquet need not necessarily be a distinct stroke. If the striking
ball in its passage hit either a post or a hoop, and then cannon upon a
ball, the privilege holds good; and if, also, one ball strike two or
more others, each of these is croqued in the order in which they were
struck; but the striker has only one additional stroke when he has
croqued the lot, and not one for each ball he has struck.
21. As the moving of the croquing ball in the tight croquet is of itself
illegal, it stands to reason that if this ball during the stroke slip
and touch another ball, the player has not the right to claim the
privilege of the croquet.
[In the loose croquet a player may by his croquing stroke drive his own
ball through a hoop.]
[Illustration: THE TIGHT CROQUET.]
22. A player, after striking a ball, is not necessarily compelled to
croquet it, but is allowed to play in any direction he pleases.
[It must, however, be understood that he must play from the place where
his ball is, and not, since he abnegates the privilege of it, as after a
croquet, from a position touching the ball he has struck.]
23. If a player hit a rover, and by the blow force the other ball
against the winning-post, he cannot croquet the ball, as it is plainly
dead; he however retains the privilege of another turn. As the ball is
dead, it must be moved at once.
24. If a player in the act of croquing do not move the croqued ball at
least 6 inches, he is at liberty to take the stroke over again.
[Of course the croqued ball must be placed in the position it occupied
before it was struck.]
25. If a ball go through a hoop and then croquet a ball, both strokes
count.
26. If a player croquet a ball illegally, both balls must be restored to
their former positions.
27. If a ball hit two or more balls by one stroke, and croquet one, it
is forced to croquet all it has struck, and is not allowed to croquet
one and leave the others alone.
THE POSTS.
Some writers give certain privileges for passing two hoops at a time,
and for striking the posts--such as placing the ball a mallet’s length
in any direction from its original position. This plan, however, is very
irregular, and affords too great an advantage to one player to be
adopted.
28. Striking the posts enables the player to have a fresh turn, and is
in all respects equivalent to passing a hoop.
29. A player who, having gone through all the hoops, strikes the
winning-post, is dead; and being out of the game, is not allowed to have
a fresh turn.
30. If either of the posts be struck by a ball that is driven thither by
a croquing or croqued ball, or in passing through the next hoop to it in
the right direction, the stroke holds good.
31. If a ball be moved by a player when it should not have been touched,
it must be restored to its former position, even if the stroke have sent
it against a post or through a hoop.
32. If any ball (or balls) be struck by the ball moved, as in the last
rule, it must be at once replaced in its former position.
33. If a ball, in the tight croquet, slip from under the feet and strike
the turning-post, the stroke does not count.
[By the same rule, if a player in croquing strike the winning-post, the
stroke does not count.]
34. If a ball be hit off the ground on a gravel-walk or a flower-bed, it
is to be placed at once 12 inches at right-angles from the limit of the
boundary.
THE ROVER.
35. As a rover has passed through all the hoops, he is not allowed to
croquet the same ball twice in one turn.
36. A rover has only the right to play a second time when he croquets
another ball.
37. A ball is dead as soon as it has passed through all the hoops and
struck the two posts.
38. A rover who hits another ball, and then the post, is dead, and
cannot take another turn.
[A rover who croquets another ball against the post is according to Rule
23 allowed another turn; but if a rover, in croquing a ball, lets his
ball slip against the post, he is dead according to the principles of
loose croquet.]
39. The game is finished when all the players on one side have gone
through all the hoops and struck the two posts.
40. A match is the best of three games.
41. A tournament is the best of three matches.
HINTS TO YOUNG PLAYERS.
It is almost impossible (as the reader will already have perceived) to
overestimate the great importance that “the croquet” bears upon the
game. A player who devotes all his efforts to pass through the hoops
will find himself soon left behind by those who look upon that
department of the game as merely subservient to the more fascinating
task of driving away a foe, or of helping a friend; and this fact
becomes more and more patent when the number of players is six or eight.
True, when only two play, if one gets a good start, it is a somewhat
difficult matter for the other player to stay his progress; and as this
inevitably takes away half the interest of the game, we recommend a pair
of players to use a couple of balls, since by so doing one can assist
the other, and develop the croquet to great advantage; but then, again,
it is not expedient to devote the whole of one’s energies to produce a
collision between two balls. The player’s first rule should be to pass
through a hoop; if, however, he sees an equal chance of passing through
it after he has gone out of his route to drive an adverse player away,
he should at all times make use of the croquet; for it must be
remembered that keeping an enemy back is almost equivalent to making
progress, and that the game cannot be lost as long as a foe’s ball is
behind one’s own. The art of the tight croquet consists in placing the
striking ball in juxtaposition to that ball which has been croqued, and
then, setting the left foot upon his own ball, the striker hits it
sharply with his mallet, and consequently the other ball is driven by
the power of the stroke to a distance in proportion to the force with
which the ball was struck. In the loose croquet, however, the player
need not place his foot upon the ball at all, but by adopting the
following stroke can drive the two balls forward in the same direction,
or by hitting his own ball with a slanting mallet can drive the balls
away at an angle to each other. The purpose of this feat is either to
aid a friend or to do damage to an enemy. A friend can by croquing send
a partner through the hoop he wishes to pass, or else drive an
enemy--who has obtained a good position, and who feels certain of going
through a hoop at his next turn--exactly in the opposite direction to
that in which he wishes to travel. In order, however, to make this
stroke very effective, great care must be taken with regard to the way
in which the ball is driven. Many thoughtless players think nothing of
driving a foe close to a friend, or, in the hopes of assisting their
side, send a friend in the immediate neighbourhood of a foe--thus
improving the position of the adverse side, and damaging that of their
own. The difference that a few thoughtful players make to a side is
wonderful. Whilst others hit their balls about without ever thinking
that at his next turn a foe will probably croquet them, the careful
players, anticipating the positions of the other bails, place themselves
in a position from which, when their next turn comes, they can either go
through a hoop, or croquet the ball of a more careless player. Thus, if
foe B is behind a hoop through which A has to pass, but requires two
turns for the passage, it would be very absurd if A were to place
himself close to B, in the hope of passing through next time, since B
would be sure to croquet him, and place him in even a worse position
than he occupies in the illustration. A should content himself by
playing to C, for B would not go so far out of his way to croquet him,
and then A could go through the ring the next time he plays.
[Illustration]
If A is at the side of a hoop through which he cannot possibly pass in
one turn, he should play behind the ring to the spot marked B, and not
in a line marked A C, or else he would probably go either too far or not
far enough, and be forced to accomplish in three turns what, if he had
gone to B, he could probably have done in two.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
Suppose B to be placed in front of the fourth hoop (_see_ Positions of
Hoops, Diagram No. 2), and A, whose turn it is, to be behind No.
2;--many players would just go through No. 2, and then quietly drop down
to No. 3, in the hope of passing through at the next turn. A thoughtful
player, however, would, by driving his ball sharply through hoop No. 2,
obtain a position close to B, and next, taking a second turn for going
through the hoop, would be able to croquet B, and drive him a long way
off his hoop, and then return to a good position behind No. 3.
The following position will show one of the advantages of the loose
croquet. It is the turn of the ball C to play, and he has to go through
the hoop _e_ in the direction _e_ A. In his present position it is
impossible for him to go through the hoop at one turn. If, however, he
croquets D, and then indulges in the loose croquet, he can drive his own
ball to B, and send the other to A. He can then pass through the hoop,
and can croquet D again at the spot A.
[Illustration]
We have mentioned this problem more as an example for young players than
because it is a recognised rule. Many such plans, equally advantageous
to follow, will readily present themselves to players in the course of
the game, and in no more forcible manner can they show their good play
than by disregarding the passage of a hoop in order to croquet a foe and
thus spoil his position. It can be easily understood that a player who,
by passing through all the hoops, obtains the title of “Rover,” and may
therefore rove wherever he pleases, has far more power than one whose
flight is fettered by being compelled to pass through the little iron
hoops that dot the Croquet-ground. He can either keep close to a laggard
friend, and aid him by the croquet, or he can take up a position a
little in advance of a forward foe, and delay his progress in a very
unpleasant manner. Suppose that A has just passed through the last hoop
but two, and that B, a rover, has taken up a position close to the hoop,
in such a manner that a portion of it intervenes between him and A. If,
then, the latter play near the hoop, B is sure to croquet him and drive
him away. He is therefore compelled to keep some distance off the hoop
until a friend comes to aid him, unless a change in his position allows
him to croquet B, which, if the latter is a good player, is not likely
to occur. Now, having shown how a rover can worry a foe, let us
demonstrate how he can aid a friend. A is close to the hoop through
which he has to pass, and B, a rover of his own side, is in a line with
him. If B hit A, he will probably drive him off his hoop and spoil his
turn; but if B play to C, a spot halfway between the two hoops, A can go
through his hoop, croquet B at C, drive him to D, and then go through
the next hoop, croquet B at D (for he has been through a hoop since he
last croqued him), drive him to the other side of the next hoop, and so
on. A rover playing with another ball can be of more help to him than
hindrance to a foe; and as it is more important to get the balls of
one’s own side forward than to delay those of a foe, the former plan
should, when feasible, be adopted. Thus it will be seen that a good
rover is of the greatest service to the side, and that the sooner he is
placed _hors de combat_ the better for the opposite side. The rovers on
the other side should therefore do all they can to make the rover’s ball
hit the post by croquing it against it, if possible; for although if all
on his side hit the post before those on the other side the game is won,
yet when the best player, being dead, is able to render no further
assistance, the game often goes against that side. This plan, however,
must be adopted with the greatest precaution and care, and on no account
whatever should a bad player be thus disposed of, since the mere fact of
keeping him in the game is of the highest importance, as his services
are of little avail to his own side, who cannot win as long as one of
their party remains in the game. With these few desultory hints we
conclude this article, which all beginners should study carefully, and
(we hope) with advantage.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
DRIVING.
“The rash boy Phaeton his proud chariot drove
Till he was smitten by almighty Jove:
Take heed, young driver, while you like him boast,
You are not ‘spilled’ against an ugly post.”--_Swift._
INTRODUCTION.
Our young friends ought to know, not only how to ride, but also how to
drive. From the very earliest times, horse and chariot races were
considered the noblest of sports, and Apollo is represented as driving
the chariot of the sun. The four horses were typical of the four seasons
of the year. Four horses driven abreast was common also to the Olympic
games, and the Hippodrome was the scene of chariot races in which even a
greater number was sometimes used.
It was, indeed, an imposing sight to see the Hippodromic course at the
time of one of these chariot festivals. The place set apart for the
contest was about a mile in length. Over a bar that ran across the
entrance of the lists was placed a brazen dolphin, and upon an altar in
the middle of the barrier stood an eagle of the same metal. By means of
a machine, put in motion by the president of the games, the eagle
suddenly sprang up into the air with its wings extended, so as to be
seen by all spectators; and at the same moment the dolphin sank to the
ground, which was a signal for the cars to arrange themselves in order
for the race. Besides the statue of Hippodamia, and the table on which
were placed the crowns and palm-branches, there were several images and
altars in the course, particularly that of the genius Taraxippus, who,
as his name imports, was said to inspire the horses with a secret
terror, which was increased by the shrill clangour of the trumpets
placed near the boundary, and the deafening shouts and outcries of the
multitude.
While the chariots were ranged in line ready to start, the horses, whose
ardour it was difficult to restrain, attracted all eyes by their beauty,
as well as for the victories which some of them had already gained.
Pindar speaks of no less than forty chariots engaged at one and the same
time. If we recollect that they had to run twelve times the length of
the Hippodrome, in going and returning, and to steer round a pillar or
goal erected near each extremity, we may imagine what confusion must
have ensued when, upon the signal trumpet being sounded, they started
amid a cloud of dust, crossing and jostling each other, and rushing
forward with such rapidity that the eye could scarcely follow them. At
one of the boundaries a narrow pass was left only for the chariots,
which often baffled the skill of the expertest driver; and there were
upwards of twenty turnings to make round the two pillars; so that at
almost every moment some accident happened, calculated to excite the
pity or insulting laughter of the assembly. In such a number of chariots
at full speed, pushing for precedence in turning round the columns, on
which victory often depended, some were sure to be dashed to pieces,
covering the course with their fragments, and adding to the dangers of
the race. As it was, moreover, exceedingly difficult for the charioteer,
in his unsteady two-wheeled car, to retain his standing attitude, many
were thrown out, when the masterless horses plunged wildly about the
Hippodrome, overturning others who had, perhaps, previously escaped
every danger, and thought themselves sure of winning. To increase the
confusion, and thereby afford better opportunities for the display of
skill and courage, there was reason to believe that some artifice was
employed for the express purpose of frightening the horses when they
reached the statue of Taraxippus. So great sometimes was their
consternation, that, no longer regarding the rein, the whip, or the
voice of their master, they broke loose, or overturned the chariot, and
wounded the driver.
Such is the ancient description given by a Greek writer of the chariot
races of the Hippodrome. We have no coach racing now-a-days, except
omnibus racing in the streets: not a great deal of “coaching.” Now and
then, indeed, we see the “Brighton four-horse,” and start with wonder at
the sight. But still there are necessities for private driving, more
important at the present than at any former period; and we hold driving
to be not only a necessary, but an indispensable accomplishment to every
young gentleman.
THE HORSE IN HARNESS.
A horse fully equipped in harness, attached to a dennet or stanhope, is
one of the most beautiful things to look at in the world: few boys are
trusted to drive a pair; nor have they physical power for the task. We
will therefore confine our attention chiefly to single harness, adding
only a short description of the various kinds of carriages in common
use. If, however, the youthful charioteer can drive a single horse well,
he will find no difficulty in controlling a pair, provided their mouths
are sufficiently tender for his strength to manage. The horse is here
represented harnessed to a light dennet-gig.
THE HORSE
May be either a full-sized harness horse, or a galloway, or a pony; the
two last being the best fitted for juvenile driving.
[Illustration]
THE HARNESS,
In every case, is composed of the same parts, which consist of three
essential divisions: 1st, the driving, or guiding part; 2d, the drawing
part; and 3d, that for holding up the shafts. The driving part comprises
the bridle and reins. The bridle is made up of a front piece (1), a head
piece (2), two cheek pieces and winkers (3), a nose band (4), and a
throat lash (5). The cheek pieces are buckled to the bit (6) by means of
leather loops, called billets, as also are the driving-reins (7), and
the bearing-rein, which is attached to a separate bit called the bridoon
(a plain snaffle), and then is hooked to the pad-hook. This is now very
generally dispensed with, as shown in the cut at the head of this
article; but for young drivers it is often desirable when they have not
strength to check the fall of a horse. The drawing parts consist of a
padded oval ring fitted to the shoulders, and called the collar (10),
sometimes replaced by a padded strap across the chest called the
breast-strap. On the collar are fastened two iron bars called hames
(12), by means of a strap at the top and bottom (8-11), and these hames
have a ring in the upper part for the reins to pass through, called the
hame terret (9); and nearer the lower part, a strong arm of iron covered
with a coating of brass, silver, or leather, which receives in its eye
the tug of the trace (13.) The trace (17) is a long and strong strap of
double leather, stitched, which runs from the collar to the drawing bar,
and may be lengthened or shortened by a buckle. The part for holding the
gig up consists of a pad or saddle, which is buckled on to the horse by
the belly-band (16), and from which the shaft is suspended by the
back-band and shaft-tug. It is prevented from slipping forward by the
crupper, which is slipped over the tail. Besides these parts, some
horses have in addition a breechen (18-19) which holds the shafts back
in going down hill; and when they are addicted to kicking, a strap is
buckled over their hips to the shaft which is called a kicking-strap.
[Illustration]
THE CARRIAGE.
[Illustration: THE BRITZSCHKA.]
The Dennet-gig, as represented in the last page, is the most common form
for a two-wheeled carriage; but there are also the Stanhope, the
Cabriolet, as here shown, the Tilbury, and the Dog-cart. The various
open four-wheeled carriages are the Britzschka, Barouche, and Phaeton;
and of closed four-wheeled carriages there are the Brougham and Clarence
on elliptic springs, and the chariot and family coach with c springs.
When these two last are made to open, they are called the Landaulet and
Landau.
[Illustration: NEW BROUGHAM.]
[Illustration: THE FAMILY COACH.]
PUTTING TO.
Before driving, it is necessary that the horse or pony should be “put
to,” which is effected as follows: 1st, slip the shafts through the
tugs, or, if there are hooks, drop them down into them; 2d, put the
traces on to the drawing-bar, either hooking them on, or else slipping
them on to the eyes, and being careful to place the leather stops in
these, to prevent the trace coming off; 3d, buckle the belly-band
sufficiently tight; and 4th, buckle the kicking-strap, or breechen, if
either is used. After this, the reins are taken from the terrets, where
they were previously placed, and the horse is ready.
DIRECTIONS FOR DRIVING.
In driving, the reins are held differently from the mode already
described as used in riding, the fore-finger being first placed between
them, and then both the reins are grasped by all the other fingers, and
the near-side rein is also held firmly against the fore-finger by means
of the thumb. In this way, on an emergency, the near or left rein may be
pulled by itself, by holding it firmly with the thumb, and suffering the
other, or off rein, to slip through the fingers, or _vice versâ_. The
most usual way is to pull the left rein with the left hand, and the
right with the right hand, by hooking one or two fingers over it while
held firmly in the left. In this manner, with the whip also held in the
right hand, the horse is guided or stopped. The young driver should take
care and keep his feet well before him, with his knees as straight and
firm as possible, so that in case of a fall of the horse he may not be
thrown forwards out of the vehicle he is driving. He should also sit
square to his work, with his elbow held easily to his side, and his left
thumb pointing to his horse’s head, by which, as in riding, his elbow is
pretty sure to be properly placed. The bit should not be too firmly
pulled against, but a light and “give and take” kind of handling is the
best, by which the horse is allowed freedom of action, and yet is
checked if he makes a mistake. In meeting other vehicles, the rule is to
keep to your left, and in passing them, to leave them also on your left.
This should be rigidly adhered to for fear of the accidents which would
otherwise constantly happen.
[Illustration]
In reference to driving in America, nothing better can be given than the
rules of the English school for driving. In America the rule governing
the side to pass another rider on is the reverse of the English rule. In
America the law is “drive to the right.” In England it is to the left.
The former appears to us to be the “right” one.
[Illustration]
FENCING.
Fencing is the art of using the small-sword or rapier. The small-sword
has a straight blade, about thirty-two inches in length, outside the
guard, and is fashioned for _thrusting_ only. Although it is an art of
the greatest antiquity, very great improvements have been made in it
during the last half-century, chiefly by French masters, who excel those
of all other countries. This has been attributed to various causes; by
some to the agility and acknowledged power of rapid physical action
possessed by this nation; by others, to their natural vivacity and
mental quickness. In my opinion, however, a more direct and powerful
cause may be traced in the great encouragement and universal patronage
which it has ever received from every grade of a chivalrous and military
people. Every regiment has its maître d’armes, and every barrack its
fencing-school. Indeed, in so important a light was the proper teaching
of this art held, that one of the French kings (Louis XIV.) granted
letters-patent to twenty eminent masters, who alone were permitted to
teach in Paris. When a vacancy occurred, no interest and no favour could
enable a candidate to obtain this privilege: he had to fence in public
with six of these chosen masters; and if by any of them he was beaten by
two distinct hits, he was considered unqualified to teach in the
capital. Independent of its value as the scientific use of the
sword,--the gentleman’s weapon of defence, _par excellence_,--fencing
stands unrivalled as an _exercise_; and it is in this sense that it will
now be treated. The most eminent physicians which this country have
produced have all, in the most earnest manner, recommended it to the
attention of the young. Thus, Dr. Clive says:--
“Muscular exertion is essential in perfecting the form of the body, and
those exercises which require the exercise of the greatest number of
muscles are the most conducive to this end. Fencing causes more muscles
to act at the same time than most other exercises. It promotes the
expansion of the chest, and improves respiration, whereby the functions
of the most important organs of the body are more perfectly performed.”
Sir Anthony Carlisle uses similar language:--
“According to my judgment, the exercise of fencing tends to promote
bodily health, and the development of athletic powers. It is likewise
apparent, that the attitudes and exertions of fencing are conducive to
the manly forms and muscular energies of the human figure.”
Again, Sir Everard Home, in still stronger terms:--
“Of all the different modes in which the body can be exercised, there is
none, in my judgment, that is capable of giving strength and velocity,
as well as precision, to the action of all the voluntary muscles of the
body in an equal degree as the practice of fencing, and none more
conducive to bodily health.”
I shall give one more extract from another physician of equal eminence,
Dr. Babbington:--
“I am of opinion that, in addition to the amusement which this exercise
(fencing) affords, it is particularly calculated to excite in young
persons a greater degree of energy and circumspection than they might
otherwise possess; and it is obvious that, in respect of health, that
mode of exertion is _superior to all others_, which, while it gives
motion and activity to every part of the body, produces at the same time
corresponding interest in the mind.”
Sir John Sinclair, Dr. Pemberton, &c., speak in terms equally
recommendatory.
To avoid all danger in the lessons and practice, foils are substituted
for real swords. Strong wire masks are worn on the face, a well-padded
glove on the hand, and the upper part of the body, at which alone the
thrusts are aimed, is protected by a strong jacket, the right side and
collar of which should be of leather.
The first movement a beginner has to learn is the manner of placing
himself in the position called
THE GUARD.
It is from this position that all movements are made, whether offensive
or defensive. Let the beginner be placed with his knees straight, his
feet at right angles, heel to heel; the right foot, right side, and face
directed to the master. The body must be held upright and firm, the arms
hanging down by the side, but easily and without constraint; the left
hand holding the foil a few inches beneath its guard. Next let him bring
the right hand across the body, and seize the foil-handle; by a second
movement, bring the foil above the head, the hands separating as they
ascend, until both arms be nearly extended upwards and outwards. Here
pause. This may be called the _first position_ of the Guard.
These movements should be frequently practised, as they accustom the
arms to move independently of the body, flatten the joints of the
shoulders, and give prominence to the chest.
[Illustration]
To arrive at the _second position_ of the Guard, the right arm, with the
foil, is brought down to the front, until the right elbow is a little
above and in advance of the waist; the fore-arm and foil sloping
upwards; the point of the foil being the height of the upper part of the
face; then, by a second movement, the learner must sink down, separating
the knees, and stepping forward with the right foot fourteen or sixteen
inches; for, of course, the guard of a tall man will be wider than that
of a short one. However, his own comfort in the position will direct him
as to the distance; and the general rule is, that the knee of the left
leg will jut over the toes of the left foot, and the right leg from
ankle to knee be perpendicular. It is in this position that he will
receive all attacks from an adversary, and from this position will all
his own attacks be made. Also in this position will he
ADVANCE
upon an adversary, when beyond hitting distance. The step in the advance
is usually about that of the width of the Guard, although of course
this would vary with circumstances. The step is made by advancing the
right foot the distance I have named; and on its reaching the ground,
the left foot is brought up, and takes its place. To
RETREAT,
the reverse of the above movement is made. The left foot takes the lead,
stepping to the rear about as far as the right had stepped to the front;
the right occupying its place on its taking up its new position. The
next movement,
THE LONGE,
is a very important movement, and is rather difficult to make properly,
and fatiguing to practise. Indeed, the first movements in fencing are
the most trying to the learner; and he must not be discouraged if he
fails to do them correctly at first--practice only will give him this
power. The Longe is that extension of body which accompanies every
attack, and is thus made: The right arm is extended straight from the
shoulder, the arm and blade being on the same level; by a second
movement, the right foot is raised from the ground, and a step made
forward, about eighteen inches in length, while the left remains firmly
planted in its place. At the instant that this step is made, the left
hand is allowed to fall within a few inches of the left thigh, and the
left knee is stiffened back until the leg is perfectly straight.
[Illustration]
The thigh of the right leg will now be in a position nearly horizontal;
from the knee downwards, perpendicular. Having executed the Longe, the
next movement to be made is
THE RECOVER;
that is, to return from the position of the Longe to that of the Guard,
and is thus effected: The left arm is nimbly thrown up to its place, the
right arm drawn in, and the left knee re-bent. These movements must be
made at the same time, as it is their _united_ action that enables a
person to recover from so extended a position as the Longe quick enough
to avoid a thrust if his own attack has failed.
These movements must be frequently practised before any others are
attempted--the Guard, the Advance, the Retreat, the Longe, and the
Recover; and when the learner has attained some proficiency in them, he
may begin the more delicate movements of attack and defence. Of these I
will now speak.
THE ENGAGE.
It is customary for adversaries, on coming to the Guard, to _Engage_, or
to join blades, on what is called the _inside_, that is, the _right_
side; although there are occasions on which it is advisable to engage on
the _outside_, or on the left; otherwise called the _Quarte_ or _Tierce_
sides.
Two men thus opposed to each other will at once perceive that there are
two lines of attack open to them, _i. e._ the line inside and the line
outside the blade--these, and no more. But these may be, and in fencing
are, subdivided into inside above the hand, and inside under the hand,
and the same subdivision for outside. This gives four lines of
attack--or, to speak more simply, gives four openings through which an
adversary may be assailed. Now, to protect each of these assailable
points, are four defensive movements, called
PARADES.
Each opening has its own parade or defence, and each parade will guard
its own opening, and, strictly speaking, no other. The opening inside
above the hand is defended by two parades.
[Illustration]
As its name imports, the first and most natural parade is that of
_Prime_. The action of drawing the sword from its sheath is almost
exactly the movement made use of in the parade of Prime.
In this parade, the hand is raised as high as the forehead, so that the
fencer can see his opponent’s face under his wrist. The blade of the
foil is almost horizontal, but the point is rather lowered towards the
ground. As this parade will throw the right side of the body open to the
adversary’s sword, it is good play to disengage from left to right, and
deliver a rapid thrust at the adversary, in order to anticipate him
before he can bring his own sword round for another thrust. His point
will be thrown far out of line, so that he is behind-hand in point of
time.
This is a very useful parade for fencers of short stature, as they can
sometimes get in their blade under their adversary’s arm, after they
have parried his thrust.
The other parade is that of
QUARTE.
It is thus formed. On the approach of the point of an adversary’s blade
(and how these approaches are made I will presently explain), the right
hand is moved a few inches--three or four will be enough--across the
body on the inside; the hand being neither depressed nor raised, and the
foil being kept on the same slope as in the Guard. This guards the body
on the inside above the hand, but (and here comes an important law in
fencing) the very movement which has guarded the body on one side has
exposed it on the other: this is the case with all the simple parades.
[Illustration]
Suppose, now, that the exposed part _outside above_ the hand were
assailed, then the defence for it is the parade of
TIERCE.
It is formed by turning the hand with the nails downwards, and crossing
to the opposite side some six or eight inches; the hand and point at the
same elevation as before: this will guard this opening. If, however, the
attack had been made _under_ instead of over the hand, then the proper
parade would have been _Seconde_.
[Illustration]
There is another method of parrying, called _Quarte_, over the arm,
which is executed by making almost the same parade as in Tierce, with
this exception--first, the hand is retained in its original position,
with the nails upwards; and, secondly, the point is not raised above the
eye of the adversary.
[Illustration]
It is rather more delicate than tierce, but wants its power and energy.
The Ripostes, or reply thrusts, are made, as they would have been had
the parade been that of Tierce.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
SECONDE
is formed by turning the hand in the same position in which it was
turned for Tierce, but the point of the foil slopes as much downwards as
in Tierce it did upwards; the direction and distance for the hand to
traverse being the same. Again, had the attack been delivered at none of
these, but at the _inside under_ the hand, then the proper parade would
have been
DEMI-CERCLE,
which, as its name expresses, is a half-circle, described by a sweep of
the blade traversing the _under_ line. Next comes the parade of
OCTAVE.
In this parade the hand is held as in Quarte; the hilt of the foil is
kept lower than that of the opponent; the blade is almost horizontal,
the point being only slightly lower than the hilt, and directed towards
the body of the adversary.
[Illustration]
Octave is extremely useful when the fencer misses his parade of
Demi-cercle, as there is but a short distance for the point to traverse,
and it generally meets the blade of the adversary before the point can
be properly fixed. Moreover, it brings the point so near the adversary’s
body, that he will not venture to make another thrust until he has
removed the foil.
Thus I have enumerated, and partly explained, the forms and uses of
these four parades: they are called Simple Parades, to distinguish them
from another set of defensive movements, called
CONTRE-PARADES.
I have said and shown that a man standing foil in hand, in the position
of the guard, is exposed in four distinct places to thrusts from an
adversary within longing distance. I have also shown that he has a
defence for each of these exposed places; but if a man has but _one_
defence for each assailable part, then his adversary, knowing beforehand
what the defence must be, would be prepared beforehand to deceive him.
But if he has a reserve--if he has a _second_ defence for each part,
then the adversary cannot tell what the defence will be, until his
attack, false or real, is begun.
To meet this contingency, a second series of defences have been devised,
which are of an entirely different nature from the _Simple_ Parades.
Again, as each of the simple parades is framed to guard only one
opening, it was found desirable that the contre-parades should be of a
more comprehensive character. They are therefore devised so that each is
capable of protecting the entire front. It is evident that this object
could not be attained without the sacrifice of quickness, because a
larger space must be traversed, and therefore more time is occupied with
a contre than a simple parade.
To know one contre-parade is virtually to know all, as they are all
formed on the same plan. They are all full circles in the position of
hand and direction of foil of the different simple parades; or more
clearly speaking, each simple parade has a contre-parade; there are,
therefore, four simple and four contre-parades, which may be thus
arranged:--
Quarte Contre de Quarte.
Tierce Contre de Tierce.
Seconde Contre de Seconde.
Demi-cercle Contre de Cercle.
I have said that a contre-parade is a full circle in the position of
hand and direction of blade of its simple; thus, contre de quarte is
made by retaining the hand in the position of quarte, while the foil
describes a circle descending on the inside, and returning by the
outside to the place of its departure. So with all the others, the foil
_following the direction of the simple_ parade, of which it is the
contre. These complete the entire system of defences.
I now come to movements of an opposite nature, namely, the
ATTACKS,
and shall begin with the most simple of them. I will again suppose two
adversaries standing, _en guard_, within longing distance of each other:
now the most simple movement that the attacking party could make would
be,
THE STRAIGHT THRUST
to the outside or inside, according to his line of engagement. I have,
in describing the longe, in effect described the straight thrust; it is
but a longe in a straight line, taking care, however, to feel firmly the
adversary’s blade, but taking care also not to press or lean on it
during the delivering of the thrust.
Next in character comes
THE DISENGAGEMENT.
This attack is made by dropping the point of the foil beneath the
adversary’s blade, and raising it on the opposite side, at the same
time, rising with the arm fully extended; on the completion of the
extension the longe is made and the thrust delivered.
THE ONE-TWO
is but a double disengagement, the first being but a feint or false
attack, to induce the adversary to form a parade to cover the part
threatened, for the covering of one part of the body exposes the
opposite: the second disengagement is made to take advantage of this
exposure. The arm is extended halfway on the first, and then wholly on
the second, to be immediately followed by the longe.
THE BEAT AND THRUST.
This is another variety of attack. Supposing the adversary’s blade to be
firmly joined to yours, when you wished to deliver a _straight thrust_,
there would then be danger of your falling upon his point. This danger
is avoided by giving a slight beat on his blade the instant preceding
your extension of arm, of course to be followed _en suite_ by the longe.
The companion attack to this attack is
THE BEAT AND DISENGAGEMENT.
The _beat_ here takes the character of the first disengagement in
_one-two_, _i. e._ becomes a _feint_, and is intended to induce the
adversary to return to the place he occupied when the beat was made. You
then immediately pass to the opposite side of his blade in the manner
described in the _disengagement_.
It will be seen that all these movements pass _under_ the adversary’s
blade. However, there are certain situations in the _assault_, as a
fencing bout is called, when an adversary is more assailable _over the
point_ than under the blade; for this purpose there is what the French
call the _coupé sur point_, or
CUT OVER THE POINT.
It is thus made: By the action of the hand, and without drawing it back
at all, the foil is raised and brought down on the opposite side of the
adversary’s blade, the arm being extended during its fall to the
horizontal position, on attaining which the longe is delivered.
CUT OVER AND DISENGAGEMENT
is on the same principle as the _one-two_ and the _beat and
disengagement_. On the adversary opposing the first movement (the cut)
with a parade, the second movement (the disengagement) is made to the
opposite side, to be followed of course by the longe; the extension of
the arm being divided between the two movements.
These attacks are called simple attacks, because they may be parried by
one or more simple parades, according to the number of movements in the
attack. In fact, every attack can be parried, and every parade can be
deceived: it is the _additional_ movement last made which hits or
guards.
Thus, you threaten by a disengagement to the outside; your adversary
bars your way effectually by the parade of _tierce_; you make a second
disengagement to the inside, which is now exposed from the very fact of
the outside being guarded (for both lines of attack cannot be guarded at
the same time), thus converting your attack into _one-two_; but if your
adversary parries quarte on your _second_ movement, your attack would be
warded off. This can be carried much further, but the above will, I
think, be sufficient to explain the nature of simple parades and
attacks.
To deceive a _contre_-parade, a separate movement, called a _doublé_, or
DOUBLE,
has been invented; it is very simple in principle, and admirably answers
the purpose. For instance, if you were to threaten your adversary by a
disengagement to the outside, and if, instead of tierce, he parried
_contre de quarte_, the double is then made by your making a _second_
disengagement _to the same side as the first_, for it will be found that
his _contre de quarte_ has replaced the blades in the positions they
occupied previous to your disengagement. You will then have an opening,
and may finish the attack by the longe.
As all the contre-parades are on the same plan and principle, so are all
the doubles. Of course, it is understood that you will make all the
movements of the double _en suite_, and without allowing your
adversary’s blade to overtake yours.
ALL FEINTS.
The foregoing movements having been well practised in the lesson, the
next step is that of _all feints_ and _all parades_, and may be
practised either with a master or fellow-pupil. The practice consists of
one pupil standing on the defensive _entirely_, while another assumes
the offensive, and attacks him with _all_ the _feints_ of which he is
master, the other, of course, defending with all his parades. It is
excellent practice, as it accustoms the pupil to think for himself
gradually, he having thus but one set of movements to think about. He is
therefore enabled to make them boldly, without having to encounter
unknown movements from his adversary.
It also enables him to see the extent of his resources, both for attack
and defence. When he can both attack and defend with some presence of
mind, he may then begin
THE ASSAULT;
that is, he may encounter an adversary, to attack or defend as occasion
presents. He is then left to his own resources entirely. The following
GENERAL ADVICE,
given by a very eminent fencer and excellent teacher, cannot fail to be
of use:--
“Do not put yourself on the position of the guard within the reach of
your adversary’s thrust, especially at the time of drawing your sword.
“If you are much inferior make no long assaults.
“Do nothing that is useless; every movement should tend to your
advantage.
“Let your movements be made as much within the line of your adversary’s
body as possible.
“Endeavour both to discover your adversary’s designs, and to conceal
your own.
“Two skilful men, acting together, fight more with their heads than
their hands.
“The smaller you can make the movements with your foil, the quicker will
your point arrive at your adversary’s body.
“Do not endeavour to give many thrusts on the longe, thus running the
risk of receiving one in the interim.
“If your adversary drops his foil by accident, or in consequence of a
smart parade of yours, you should immediately pick it up, and present it
to him politely.
“Always join blades (if possible) previously to another attack, after a
hit is given.”
BROADSWORD.
The principal distinction between the broadsword and the rapier is, that
the latter is formed only for thrusting, while the former is adapted for
cutting also. Indeed, those who use the broadsword are, in my opinion,
too apt to neglect the use of the point, and to give their attention
almost exclusively to the cuts.
The first lesson in the sword exercise is necessarily to know how to
stand. The learner should be instructed to perform the different
movements by word of command, remembering to consider the first parts of
the word as a caution, and not to stir until the _last_ syllable is
uttered. At the last syllable, the movement should be performed smartly.
In giving the word, the instructor always makes a slight pause, in order
to give his pupils time to remember what they must do. For example, the
words Draw Swords, is given thus, Draw . . . . . Swords--the word swords
being spoken smartly, in order that the movement may correspond.
POSITIONS.
_First Position._--Make the target[3] about fourteen inches in diameter,
and place it on the wall, having its centre about four feet from the
ground. Draw a perpendicular line from the spot at the bottom of the
target to the ground, and continue it on the floor, in order to ensure
the proper position of the heels. The learner stands perfectly upright
opposite the target, with his right side towards it, his heels close
together, his right toe pointing to the target, and his left foot at
right angles with the left. His arms must be clasped behind his back,
his right palm supporting the left elbow, and his left hand grasping the
right arm just above the elbow. In this position, he must bend both
knees and sink down as far as possible. This will not be very far at
first, but he will soon sink down quite easily. See accompanying figure
(1).
[3] For target, see next page.
[Illustration: Fig. 1.]
[Illustration: Fig. 2.]
_Second Position._--This is accomplished by placing the right foot
smartly in front, about sixteen or fourteen inches before the left. See
(2). He must accustom himself to balance himself so perfectly on his
left foot, that he can place the right either before or behind it,
without losing his balance.
_Third Position._--The third position must then be learned. This
consists in stepping well forward with the right foot, until the left
knee is quite straight, and the right knee exactly perpendicularly
placed over the right foot. Great care must be taken to keep the heels
exactly in the same line, and the body perfectly upright. See Figure
(3).
[Illustration: Fig. 3.]
These preliminaries having been settled, the learner stands upright
before the target, as in (1). A sword is then put into his hand, and the
target is explained as follows:--
[Illustration]
TARGET.
The interior lines represent the cuts. Cut one being directed from No. 1
diagonally through the target, coming out at 4. Cut two is the same,
only from left to right. Three is made upwards diagonally, and four is
the same, only in the opposite direction. Cut five is horizontally
through the target, from right to left, and six from left to right. Cut
seven is perpendicularly downwards. Care must be taken that the cuts are
fairly given with the edge.
The swords drawn on the target represent the guards. The seventh guard
ought, however, not to be made directly across, but must have the point
directly rather forwards and downwards, as a cut 7 glides off the blade,
and can be instantly answered either by a thrust or by cut 1.
The two dark circles represent the places where the thrusts take effect.
[Illustration]
The learner begins by taking the sword in his right hand, having its
edge toward the target and its back resting on his shoulder. His right
arm is bent at right angles, and the elbow against his side. The left
hand must rest upon the hip, the thumb being to the rear. At the word--
CUTS AND GUARDS.
CUTS.
_Cut 1._--The young swordsman extends his right arm, and makes the cut
clear through the target. When the point has cleared the target,
continue the sweep of the sword, and by a turn of the wrist bring it
with its back on the left shoulder, its edge towards the left. The arm
is then ready for
_Cut 2._--Bring the sword from 2 to 3, continue the movement of the
sword, and turn the wrist so that the point is below the right hip and
the edge towards the ground.
_Cut 3._--Cut through the target diagonally, bringing the sword from No.
3 to No. 2, and bring the sword onwards, so that it rests with the edge
downwards, and point below the left hip. At
_Cut 4._--Cut from 4 to 1, and bring the sword round until its point is
over the right shoulder, and its edge well to the right.
_Cut 5._--At the word Five, make a horizontal cut from 5 to 6, and sweep
the sword round until it rests on the left shoulder, with its edge to
the left, and its point well over the shoulder.
_Cut 6._--Cut horizontally through the target, from 6 to 5, and bring
the sword over the head, with its edge upwards, and its point hanging
over the back. From this position,--
_Cut 7._--Make a downward stroke until the sword reaches the centre of
the target. Arrest it there, and remain with the arm extended, waiting
for the word
POINTS.
_First Point._--Draw back the sword, until the right wrist is against
the right temple, the edge of the sword being upwards. Make a slight
pause, and then thrust smartly forward towards the centre of the target,
raising the right wrist as high as No. 1, and pressing the left shoulder
well back.
[Illustration: FIRST POINT.]
_Second Point._--Turn the wrist round to the left, so that the edge
comes upwards, draw the hand back until it rests on the breast, and give
the point forwards, to the centre of the target, raising the hand as
before.
[Illustration: SECOND POINT.]
_Third Point._--Give the handle of the sword a slight twist in the hand
to the right, so that the edge again comes uppermost, and the guard
rests against the back of the hand. Draw back the hand until it rests
against the right hip, and deliver it forwards towards the spot at the
bottom of the target, raising the wrist as high as the spot in the
centre. The object in raising the wrist is to deceive the eye of the
opponent, who will be more likely to notice the position of your wrist
than of your point. In all the thrusts, the left shoulder should be
rather brought forward before the point is given, and pressed well back
while it is being delivered.
[Illustration: THIRD POINT.]
GUARDS.
Wait after the third point has been delivered for the word
_Defend._--At this word draw up the hand smartly, and form the first
guard. Make the other guards in succession as they are named, while the
instructor proves their accuracy by giving the corresponding cuts. The
guards must be learned from the target, by placing the sword in exactly
the same position as those delineated. The guards are these:--
A First guard.
B Second.
C Third.
D Fourth.
E Fifth.
F Sixth.
G Seventh.
The two spots H and I mark the places towards which the points are made,
H for the first and second point, I for the third.
PARRY.
The parry or parade of a thrust is executed with the back of the sword.
The firmest way of parrying is to hold the sword perpendicular, with its
edge to the right and its hilt about the height of and close to the
right shoulder; then, by sweeping the sword round from left to right,
any thrust within its sweep is thrown wide of the body.
The parry is executed with the wrist and not with the arm, which must
not move.
HANGING GUARD.
When the pupil is acquainted with both cuts and guards, he should learn
the hanging guard, a most useful position, as it keeps the body well
hidden under the sword, and at the same time leaves the sword in a good
position to strike or thrust.
It is accomplished in the following way. Step out to the second
position, as in Figure 2, raise the arm until the hand is just over the
right foot, and as high as the head. The edge of the sword is upwards,
and the point is directed downwards and towards the left. The left
shoulder is pressed rather forward, and the neck and chest drawn inward.
In this position, the swordsman is in a position to receive or make an
attack as he may think fit. It is rather fatiguing at first, owing to
the unaccustomed position of the arm and head, but the fatigue is soon
overcome, and then it will be found that there is no attitude which
gives equal advantages.
[Illustration: HANGING GUARD.]
There are two other modes of standing on guard, each possessing their
peculiar advantages. These are, the inside and outside guard. The inside
guard is made as follows:--
INSIDE GUARD.
Stand in the second position, having the wrist of the right hand nearly
as low as the waist, the hand being exactly over the right foot. The
point of the sword is raised as high as the eyes, and the edge is turned
inwards, as will be seen from the accompanying engraving.
[Illustration: INSIDE GUARD.]
OUTSIDE GUARD.
The outside guard is formed in the same manner as the inside, with the
exception that the edge of the sword is turned well outwards.
[Illustration: OUTSIDE GUARD.]
To get to the hanging guard, the words are given as follows:--inside
guard--outside guard--guard.
ATTACK AND DEFENCE.
The swordsman having learned thus far, is taught to combine the three
movements of striking, thrusting, and guarding, by the following
exercise:--
1. Inside Guard.
2. Outside Guard.
3. Guard.
4. Cut One.
5. First Guard.
6. Cut Two.
7. Second Guard.
8. Cut Three.
9. Third Guard.
10. Cut Four.
11. Fourth Guard.
12. Cut Five.
13. Fifth Guard.
14. Cut Six.
15. Sixth Guard.
16. Cut Seven.
17. Seventh Guard.
18. First Point. [Prepare for the point in First Position.] Two.
[Thrust in Third Position.]
19. Second Point. [Prepare for it in First Position.] Two. [Thrust in
Third Position.]
20. Third Point. [Prepare.] Two. [Thrust.]
21. Parry. [Prepare to parry in First Position.] Two. [Parry.]
22. Guard.
The young swordsman must remember that in this, as in all the exercises,
the cuts and points must be given in the third position, as in the
accompanying illustration, which shows the swordsman just as he has
delivered the seventh cut, and is waiting for the next word before he
resumes the first position.
[Illustration: SEVENTH CUT.]
The guards, on the contrary, are given in the first position, as is seen
in the figure on p. 219, which illustrates the seventh guard.
These exercises are always learned with the single-stick, or
basket-hilted cudgel, in order to avoid the dangers which would be
inevitable if the sword were used. But as the single-stick is only an
imitation of the sword, I will give the method of getting the sword out
of the sheath into any position required.
DRAW SWORDS.
The first word of command is _draw swords_. At the word _draw_, seize
the sheath just below the hilt, with the left hand, and raise the hilt
as high as the hip, at the same time grasping the hilt with the right
hand, turning the edge of the sword to the rear, and drawing it
partially from the sheath, to ensure its easy removal.
[Illustration: SEVENTH GUARD.]
At the word _swords_, draw the blade smartly out of the scabbard,
throwing the point upwards, at the full extent of the arm, the edge
being still to the rear.
RECOVER SWORDS.
The wrist is now smartly lowered until it is level with the chin, the
blade upright, and the edge to the left. This is the position of recover
swords. The elbow must be kept close to the body, as in the cut.
[Illustration: RECOVER SWORDS.]
CARRY SWORDS.
The wrist is now sharply lowered until the arm hangs at its full length,
the wrist being in the line with the hip, the edge of the sword to the
front, and its back resting in the hollow of the shoulder, the fingers
lightly holding the hilt. The left hand hangs at the side until the word
_inside guard_, when it is placed on the left hip.
SLOPE SWORDS.
At the word _swords_, raise the right hand smartly, until it forms a
right angle at the elbow.
RETURN SWORDS.
At the word, raise the blade until it is perpendicular, move the hilt to
the hollow of the left shoulder, drop the point of the sword into the
scabbard (which has been grasped by the left hand and slightly raised,)
at the same time turning the edge to the rear. Pause an instant, and
send the sword smartly into the sheath, removing both hands as the hilt
strikes against the mouth of the scabbard: drop them to the side, with
the palms outwards, and stand in the first position.
PRACTICES.
There are many exercises with the broadsword, called _Practices_. I have
given one of them, which is to be practised alone; but when the pupil
has attained some confidence in the use of his weapon, he must be placed
opposite another pupil, and they must go through them, each taking the
attack and defence in turn.
The young swordsman must be provided with a very stout wire mask, which
defends the face and part of the neck, and which should be worked in a
kind of helmet above, to guard against the disastrous consequences of
receiving the seventh guard. No practices, loose or otherwise, should be
permitted without the masks, as neither party would be able to cut or
thrust with proper confidence.
SECOND PRACTICE.
This is very useful in teaching the point and parry, as well as giving
steadiness on the feet. Two boys are placed opposite each other, at just
such a distance, that when perfectly erect they can touch the hilt of
their adversary’s sword with the point of their own.
The one who gives the first point is called Front Rank, (there may be a
dozen in each rank, each having tried the distance to his right by
extending his sword,) and the one who gives first parry is called Rear
Rank.
WORD OF COMMAND. FRONT RANK. REAR RANK.
Guard. Hanging Guard. Hanging Guard.
Third Point. Prepare to give Third Point. Prepare to Parry.
Point. {Give Third Point, and when } Parry Third Point,
{parried spring back to First } and prepare to
{Position, and prepare to parry.} give Third Point.
Point. {Parry Third Point, and prepare } Give Third Point,
{for Third Point. } and prepare to
{ } Parry.
Point, &c. &c.
This should be continued until both are weary. Both swordsmen should
learn to do it more rapidly every time they practise. Next time of going
through it, front rank and rear rank change places, as they must do in
all the practices.
THIRD PRACTICE.
WORD OF COMMAND. FRONT RANK. REAR RANK.
Guard. Hanging Guard. Hanging Guard.
Leg. Cut Four. Cut Seven.
Inside Guard. Inside Guard. Inside Guard.
Leg. Cut Six [at Leg]. Cut Six [at Neck].
Outside Guard. Outside Guard. Outside Guard.
Leg. Cut Five [at Leg]. Cut Five [at Neck].
Guard. Hanging Guard. Hanging Guard.
Slope Swords. Slope Swords. Slope Swords.
In this and the other practices, the cuts must be delivered in the
third position, and the guards in the first. In the third and fourth
practices, the cuts must be given lightly, as many of them are not
intended to be guarded, but merely to show the powers of the sword in
various positions.
FOURTH PRACTICE.
WORD OF COMMAND. FRONT RANK. REAR RANK.
Guard. Hanging Guard. Hanging Guard.
Head. Seventh Cut. Seventh Guard.
Head. Seventh Guard. Cut Seven.
Leg. Fourth Cut. Seventh Guard.
Leg. Seventh Guard. Fourth Cut.
Head. Seventh Cut. Seventh Guard.
Head. Seventh Guard. Seventh Cut.
Guard. Hanging Guard. Hanging Guard.
Slope Swords. Slope Swords. Slope Swords.
In this and the preceding exercise, the power of shifting the leg is
shown. If two swordsmen attack each other, and No. 1 strikes at the leg
of No. 2, it will be better for No. 2 not to oppose the cut by the third
or fourth guard, but to draw back the leg smartly, and cut six or seven
at the adversary’s head or neck.
In loose play, as it is called, _i. e._ when two parties engage with
swords without following any word of command, but strike and guard as
they can, both players stand in the second position, because they can
either advance or retreat as they choose, and can longe out to the third
position for a thrust or a cut, or spring up to the first position for a
guard with equal ease.
It is often a kind of trap, to put the right leg more forward than
usual, in order to induce the adversary to make a cut at it. When he
does so, the leg is drawn back, the stroke passes harmless, and the
deceived striker gets the stick of his opponent on his head or
shoulders.
We now come to a very complicated exercise, called the
FIFTH PRACTICE.
WORD OF COMMAND. FRONT RANK. REAR RANK.
Draw Swords. Draw Swords. Draw Swords.
Inside Guard. Inside Guard. Inside Guard.
Outside Guard. Outside Guard. Outside Guard.
Guard. Hanging Guard. Hanging Guard.
Head. Seventh Cut. Seventh Guard.
Head. Seventh Guard. Seventh Cut.
Arm. Second Cut [at Arm]. Second Guard.
Head. Seventh Guard. Seventh Cut.
Head. Seventh Cut. Seventh Guard.
Arm. Second Guard. Second Cut [at Arm].
Head. Seventh Cut. Seventh Guard.
Head. Seventh Guard. Seventh Cut.
Right Side. Sixth Cut. Sixth Guard.
Head. Seventh Guard. Seventh Cut.
Head. Seventh Cut. Seventh Guard.
Right Side. Sixth Guard. Sixth Cut.
Guard. Hanging Guard. Hanging Guard.
This practice is capital exercise, and looks very imposing. All these
practices ought to be so familiar, that the words of command are not
needed, the only word required being First, Second, or Third Practices,
as the case may be.
I remember once, that two of my pupils had attained such a mastery of
their weapons, that we used often to go through the practices with real
swords. On one occasion, we were acting a charade, and my eldest pupil
and myself were enacting the part of two distinguished foreigners
(country unknown) who were to get up a fight. So we began by a little
quarrel, and finally drew our swords and set hard to work at the fifth
practice, which we could do with extreme rapidity, and without the use
of words of command. The spectators were horrified, and the ladies
greatly alarmed; for there seems to be no particular order in that
practice, and an inexperienced eye would certainly fancy that the
combatants were in earnest.
FORT AND FEEBLE.
The half of the sword blade next the hilt is called the “fort,” because
it is the strongest place on which the cut of an adversary can be
received. Always parry and guard with the fort of your sword, as, if you
try to guard a cut with the “feeble,” which is the remaining half of the
blade, your guard will be forced, and the cut take effect.
DRAWING CUT.
The drawing cut is made best with a curved sword, and is executed by
placing the edge of the sword on the object, and drawing it over it
until it is severed. A good large mangel worzel is capital practice.
Place the root loose on a table, stand at arm’s length from it, lay the
edge of the sword lightly on it, and slice the root by repeatedly
drawing the sword over it. This is very difficult, although it looks
easy enough, and is sure to jar the arm from the wrist to the shoulder
the first time or two, while the sword glides off as if the root were
cased in polished steel. However, a little practice will soon overcome
the difficulty. This cut is much in use among the Sikhs.
GENERAL ADVICE.
Never look at your own sword, but watch the eye and sword wrist of your
opponent.
Remember that the great point in this exercise, as in fencing, is to
gain time. Endeavour, therefore, to advance your point nearer your
adversary than his is to you.
Begin the assault out of distance, so that neither party can complain of
being taken by surprise.
If the two parties exchange a cut or a thrust at the same moment, the
one who gave his cut or thrust in the third position is victorious.
When a cut or thrust is made, the one who receives it passes his sword,
_i. e._ stick, into his left hand, and his opponent comes to inside
guard.
Always spring back to the second position after delivering a cut or
thrust.
Keep the line of direction carefully, or you will leave an open space
for the adversary to get his sword into.
Last and most important, Don’t lose your temper.
[Illustration]
FIVES.
It is impossible to play at this excellent game unless there be a high
wall, free from abutments, and a smooth, dry, paved ground before it.
When this can be procured, a line is drawn on the wall, about 38 inches
from the ground; another line is drawn on the ground, about 10 feet from
the wall, A; and two others are drawn on each side as boundaries, B C.
The instruments used in the play are a ball of tightly-sewn leather and
a fives-bat. It has a long handle, and an oval bowl of wood. The ball is
hard, rebounding, small, and white. The game may be played by two or
four people; in the last case, two on each side. The method of play is
as follows:--The game may be played either single-handed or with
partners. When it is played with partners, the players toss up for
innings. The first player takes the ball, and strikes it against the
wall with his bat _above the line on the wall_, and so that it may fall
_without the line on the ground_. The other then strikes it, and the
players continue to hit it against the wall, either before it comes to
the ground or at the first bounce, until one of them missing it, or
driving it out of bounds, or beneath the wall-line, loses or goes out.
Of course the ball may fall anywhere within the side boundaries, after
being once struck up by the player who is in. The game is usually
fifteen, but is sometimes extended to twenty-five. The game above
described is that known as bat-fives, and differs little from the game
of rackets, except that it may be played in any open court, and that a
differently-shaped bat and a larger ball are employed. Fives was
originally played with the hand, instead of a racket, and in the
fourteenth century was called Hand Tennis in England, and in France,
Palm Play. It is said to have obtained the name of Fives, from ten of
the Earl of Hertford’s servants having played before Queen Elizabeth,
five of a side; but more probably on account of the five fingers of the
hand. This game of “hand-fives” is the one ordinarily played by boys,
and known technically as “fives.” The ball is hit against the wall
entirely by the hand, and no bat of any description is used. The game
may be played by two or more people, and is usually fifteen. Players
with tender hands usually play with an ordinary kid or padded glove,
either of which is quite admissible. There are variations of the game at
different schools, owing to peculiarities in the shape of the courts. At
Eton, for instance, a buttress of the chapel abuts into the court, and
the Eton courts at Oxford are made on a similar plan. But the game as
ordinarily played is that as described above.
FOOT-BALL.
Uncertain as to the date of its origin, there is no English game which
is at once so popular and about which so much difference of opinion
exists. All agree as to its manly character, its capabilities for
endurance, activity, hardihood, and strategical skill, but there are
very few who agree entirely as to the rules by which the game should be
played.
In ancient records there is no mention of the game before the reign of
Edward III.; and at that period it seems to have been so popular that by
royal edict it was put down, as being antagonistic to the royal
amusement of archery. But that it flourished, and flourished
considerably, beyond that date, there is no doubt. In many market-towns
of England and Scotland, and notably in that of Kingston-on-Thames, all
business is suspended on Shrove Tuesday, and a great game of foot-ball
is played in the market-place. All is officially conducted, and the
mayor is honoured with the privilege of “kick-off.”
It would seem a pity at first sight that there is no authority like that
of the Marylebone Club to revise the laws of foot-ball and insist upon
their being observed in all places where the game is played. Foot-ball
as now constituted is not, and cannot be, a national game. There are
hardly two schools in England that agree in its first principles, and
that are not continually wrangling and disputing as to how the game
should be played. To touch the ball with the hands is in some eyes a
heresy, and in others an uncommon virtue. Some schools advocate running
with the ball, while others consider such licence as antagonistic to the
proper principles and well-being of the game. And, indeed, looking round
at the various head-quarters of foot-ball in England, it really does
seem a difficult matter to reconcile the games as now played so as to
suit all tastes. Rugby and Eton foot-ball can hardly be looked upon as
the same game.
[Illustration: FOOTBALL.]
We have one set of people advocating the employment of only eleven, or
at most twenty, players on a side, and another maintaining that a
hundred or so on a side matters little. We have one school playing the
game against a brick wall, another using boundaries of canvas, another
dashing the ball about in narrow cloisters, and another marshalling a
little army of players, with regularly organized back and forward
players, reserve forces, vanguard, scouts, runners, all of whom have
their direct influence on the fate and fortunes of the game.
The great essentials for foot-ball are pluck, endurance, and good
temper. Half the disputes at foot-ball which are ascribed to “hacking”
and “shinning” would not have occurred had good temper been observed. No
one “hacks” or “shins” wilfully, except he loses his temper; and a
player in foot-ball, as in other games, who cannot keep his temper is
unfit in every way to enjoy the game. As a match at foot-ball is now
made, two parties, containing any number of competitors, take the field,
and, having tossed up for sides, stand between two goals, placed at a
distance of some eighty yards apart. The party that loses the toss has
the privilege of “kick-off.” The goal is marked by two upright poles,
driven into the ground about ten yards apart. The ball, which used
formerly to be made of a blown bladder, is now made of an inflated
vulcanized india-rubber case, inclosed again in a case of laced and
well-sewn leather. The object of each party is to drive the ball through
the goal of their antagonists. The skill of the players is best employed
in attacking and defending the goals.
In the game of football the fewer the rules, and the simpler those rules
are, the better. The great “bone of contention” with lovers of the game
is, as to whether players should be allowed to touch the ball with their
hands or not. Eton and Westminster players will be arguing for ever that
the game is foot-ball, and not _hand_-ball; while Rugbæans, on the other
hand, will contend that without the use of the hands as well as the feet
the game is robbed of one of its principal charms. In the following
rules a medium course is advocated, as, while nothing looks so bad as to
see a lazy or inactive player, who does not care to follow the ball,
playing fives with it whenever it comes within his reach, it would be
equally absurd to stop a player who catches the ball fairly either on
the full or first bound from running a yard or so with it in his hands,
in order to allow him to get up the necessary impetus for a strong
drop-kick. With regard also to “off-side,” it is essentially necessary
that some clear and definite rules should be laid down. What can
possibly look worse than to see a player, again one of those who are too
indolent to “follow up” the ball, coolly stand in the middle of the
course, or, worse still, at the very door of his neighbour’s goal,
waiting until the ball is kicked up to him, in order that he, fresh and
full of wind as he is, may follow it in to the goal? It is hoped that
the following rules may give general satisfaction, and prevent disputes
and obstacles:--
1. A goal may be obtained by a fair full kick or drop-kick off the hand,
provided the ball goes over the bar which runs between the goal-posts;
or a goal may be obtained by a fair foot-ball “bulley,” which sends the
ball through all obstacles anywhere between the posts.
2. The foot-ball course must be marked by side boundaries. When the ball
is kicked outside these boundaries, a player of either side may kick it
into the course again in a straight line from where it went out.
3. A player who shall not have been behind the last player on his own
side who kicked the ball shall be considered “off his side.”
4. No player who shall be “off his side” shall be allowed to kick the
ball until it shall have touched one of the opposite side, when he
becomes on his side again, and may join in the game.
5. A player who obtains a fair catch of the ball, either full or on the
first bound, may take a short run, in order to obtain a “drop-kick,” or
may kick it at once full off his hands.
6. Any player of the opposite side may use his best endeavours to
prevent a drop or full kick after a fair catch.
7. No “holding” must be allowed at any period of the game.
8. No “shinning” or “hacking” is to be allowed.
9. At the commencement of the game the captains of each side shall
determine mutually how long the game is to last.
10. At the end of the time, no matter in what position the game is, one
of the captains shall cry “no game,” and the game shall immediately
cease.
GOLFING.
[Illustration]
Golfing is played with a club and ball. The club is from three to four
feet long, according to the height and length of arm of the player. It
is curved and massive towards the end, to give strength and weight. This
knob is formed for strength from some very tough wood, as beech, and as
it curves and proceeds upwards is planed off, so as to adapt itself to
the handle, to which it is partly glued and tightly corded down. A want
of due attention to these particulars in the making of it will render
the head liable to split and fly off by either a very hard or indirect
stroke. The face of the club is further secured by a piece of hard bone,
and occasionally of ivory, at least half an inch thick. It is also
loaded with from four to six ounces of lead, according to the will of
the player. The handle is usually bound with cord, list, or velvet, at
the pleasure of the owner. It is, however, to be remembered, that the
form of the club, the materials of which it is made, and the numbers
taken to the golfing ground, vary considerably, according to the
circumstances and habits of the players, the attendant cad or caddie
having usually many varieties, to suit every peculiarity under which the
ball may be placed; for in many clubs it can never be touched by the
hand until holed.
The golf ball is about the size of an egg, and is made very hard. It is
composed of stout leather, which, having been previously soaked in
boiling water, allows of its being first very firmly sewed, and then
turned inside out, leaving a small opening only, by which it is very
forcibly stuffed with feathers. The leather being yet wet, it contracts
into a ball of the dimensions stated, but never gets circular, as that
used in the game of cricket. It is afterwards painted over with several
coats of white paint; in doing which it is requisite that the lead used
should be very pure and exceedingly well ground down, as well as that
each coat laid on should be perfectly dry and hard before another is
applied.
The game is played by two or more persons, so that there be an equal
number on each side; but only two balls are used, one belonging to each
party, each party also striking in turn: but if the last striker does
not drive his ball as far as that of his opponent, one of his party must
then strike one, or perhaps two more, and the game is thus marked by
calling out one, two, or three more, as the case may be. If more than
two are playing, the same person does not strike twice in succession: a
miss is considered one. The party who puts the ball into the hole in the
fewest strokes wins the game.
The grounds used for this sport vary in different parts of Scotland.
Some are nearly square, in which case a hole is made in each corner; but
if it be irregular in figure, it is not uncommon to place one at each
angle, so that the party shall traverse the whole surface, and finish at
the spot from whence he started; a quarter of a mile being usually
allowed between each hole. Besides the stick, or club, already
described, there are others, usually carried by an attendant for each
party. These are called, by way of distinction, putters--of which,
however, there are several sorts, one being short, stiff, and heavy,
similar in figure, but longer on the head, for making a steady and
direct stroke when near the hole. Another, formed of iron, instead of
wood, is used for making a hit at a ball when very unfavourably placed,
as in a rut, where the common club would be in danger of breaking. When
a ball falls into a hole or rut, from which it is impossible to strike
it out, the party is allowed, by a special agreement, in some clubs, to
take it out with his hand, and throw it up in a line with the spot,
which is accounted as one, and he then strikes from where it chances to
rest; but, as already observed, this indulgence does not extend to every
Golfing Society.
[Illustration]
GYMNASTICS.
INTRODUCTION.
The study of Gymnastics is of the utmost importance to young persons, as
its object is to call into exercise, and to train to perfection, all the
corporeal or bodily powers. It is the education of the limbs, joints,
and muscles; and includes not only the systematic training of these, but
also assists the sciences of riding, driving, wrestling, rowing,
sailing, skating, swimming, &c.
In the following gymnastic exercises we have determined to introduce
only those more simple and useful feats which may be said to make up the
“Alphabet of the Science,” and all the individual and progressive
exercises are susceptible of being everywhere introduced. They may be
performed in very small spaces, and require no particular preparation,
expense, or place. By attention to the directions any pupil between the
ages of twelve and sixteen may train and exercise himself, and a number
of other children younger than himself; and this excellent study may
thus become a source of amusement and delight.
[Illustration: GYMNASTICS.]
HISTORICAL MEMORANDA.
The first gymnasium is said to have been established at Sparta, and some
years afterwards at Athens. In the former city the exercises partook of
a rude military character; but among the Athenians, who were always
disposed to mingle the elements of the beautiful in whatever they
undertook, gymnastics were refined, and the Gymnasia became temples of
the Graces. In each there was a place called Palæstra, in which
wrestling, boxing, running, leaping, throwing the discus, and other
exercises of the kind were taught. Gymnastics were afterwards divided
into two principal branches--the _Palæstræ_, taking its name from the
Palæstra, and the _Orchestræ_. The former embraced the whole class of
athletic exercises; the latter dancing, and the art of gesticulation and
declamation.
The Gymnasia were spacious edifices, surrounded by gardens and a sacred
grove. Their principal parts were: 1. The Portices, furnished with seats
and side buildings, where the youths met to converse. 2. The Ephebeion,
that part of the edifice where the youth alone exercised. 3. The
Apodyterion, or undressing room to the Conisterium, or small court in
which was kept the yellow kind of sand sprinkled by the wrestlers over
their bodies after being anointed with the aroma, or oil tempered with
wax. 5. The Palæstra properly was the place for wrestling. 6. The
Sphæristerium, where the game of ball was played. 7. Aliterium, where
the wrestlers anointed themselves with oil. 8. The Area or great court,
where running, leaping, and pitching the quoit were performed. 9. The
Xysta, open walks in which the youths exercised themselves in running.
10. The Balanea, or baths. Behind the Xysta lay the Stadium, which, as
its name imports, was the eighth of a mile in length; and in this were
performed all sorts of exercises, in the presence of large numbers of
persons and the chiefs of the state.
To all these branches of gymnastics the Grecian youth applied themselves
with peculiar eagerness, and on quitting the schools devoted to them a
particular portion of their time, since they regarded them as a
preparation for victory in the Olympic and other games, and as the best
possible means for promoting health and ripening the physical powers;
nor could anything be better adapted for those whose heroism was
liberty, and whose first great aims were to be good citizens and the
defenders of their country.
The Romans never made gymnastics a national matter, but considered them
merely as preparatory to the military service; and, though forming a
part of the exhibitions at festivals, they were practised only by a
particular class trained for brutal entertainments, at which large bets
were laid by the spectators, as is still the custom on our own
racecourse: but when all the acquisitions of the human intellect were
lost in the utter corruption of the Roman empire and the irruptions of
wandering nations, the gymnastic art perished.
MODERN GYMNASTICS.
The commencement of tournaments during the Dark Ages in some degree
revived athletic exercises; but the invention of gunpowder, the use of
the small sword, the rifle, and scientific tactics, by which battles
were gained more by skill than force, kept down the training of the body
for athletic feats. But in the last century, when men broke loose from
the yoke of authority, and education began to be studied, it was found
that physical education had been forgotten. Salzmann, a German
clergyman, invented a system of physical exercises, principally confined
to running, leaping, swimming, climbing, and balancing; and at the
commencement of the present century a German of the name of Volker
established the first gymnasium in London, while Captain Clias, a Swiss,
established one in the Royal Military Asylum; and since then many of the
best schools and colleges have a gymnasium attached to their
establishments.
It generally happens that the pupils of a gymnasium, after a time, lose
their interest in the exercises. The reason of this appears to be that
little or no difference is made in the exercises of different ages, and
it is natural that an exercise repeated for years should become
wearisome. Gymnastics, therefore, when they are taught, should be
divided into two courses. In the first course we would include walking
and pedestrian excursions, elementary exercises of various tests,
running, leaping in height, in length, in depth, leaping with a pole (in
length and height), vaulting, balancing, exercises on the single and
parallel bars, climbing, throwing, dragging, pushing, lifting, carrying,
wrestling, jumping (1. with the hoop; 2. with the rope), exercises with
the dumb bells, various gymnastic feats or games; and, lastly, swimming,
skating, fencing, riding on horseback, rowing, &c.
Gymnastic exercises may be begun by a boy of about eight years of age,
or may be commenced at any age; but in all cases he should begin gently,
and proceed gradually, without any abrupt transitions. They should be
commenced before breakfast in the morning, or before dinner or supper;
but never immediately after meals: and the pupil should be very careful,
after becoming heated by exercises, of draughts or cold, and especially
refrain from lying on the damp ground, or from standing without his coat
or other garments; and rigidly guard against the dangerous practice of
drinking cold water, which, in many instances, has been known to produce
immediate death.
WALKING.
In all gymnastic exercises walking, running, and jumping deserve the
preference, because they are the most natural movements of man, and
those which he has most frequent occasion to use. This exercise, within
the reach of everybody, ought to be placed among the number of those
which are direct conservators of health, and which have the most
important beneficial effects upon our mental and moral economy. Walking
provokes appetite, assists digestion, accelerates the circulation,
brings the fluids to the skin, strengthens the memory, and gives
cheerfulness to the mind, and in fatiguing the limbs gives repose to the
senses and the brain.
It might be supposed that every one knows how to walk: not so, however;
some persons crawl, some hobble, some shuffle along. Few have the
graceful noble movement that ought to belong to progression, or, however
well formed, preserve a really erect position and an air of becoming
confidence and dignity. To teach walking--that is to say, to teach young
persons to walk properly--we should advise a class of them to unite,
that they may be able to teach themselves, which they may readily do if
they follow the instructions given below.
A company of boys being formed, the eldest, or the one best adapted to
the task, should act as captain, and at the word of command, “Fall in,”
all the boys are to advance on the same line, preserving between each
the distance of about an arm’s length. At the word “Dress” each boy
places his right hand on the left shoulder of the next, extending his
arm at full length, and turning his head to the right. At the word
“Attention” the arms fall down by the side, and the head returns to the
first position. The captain should now place his little regiment in the
following manner:--1. The head up. 2. The shoulders back. 3. The body
erect. 4. The stomach in. 5. The knees straight, the heels on the same
line. 6. The toes turned very slightly outwards. The captain now stands
before his men, and advancing his left foot, his knee straight, and his
toe inclined towards the ground, he counts one, two, placing his boot on
the ground, the toe before the heel; he then directs his pupils to obey
him, and to follow his motions, and says, “March,” when each foot is
advanced simultaneously, till he gives the word “Halt.” He then makes
them advance, wheel to the right and left, in slow time, quick time,
always observing the position of the body, and requiring that they move
all together.
THE TIP-TOE MARCH.
This movement is preparatory to running and jumping. The boys being in
line, the word “On tip-toes” is given: each boy places his hands on his
sides, and waits for the word, “Rise;” when they all gently raise
themselves on their toes, joining their heels together, and keeping the
knees straight, remain in this position till the word “Rest” is given,
when they fall back slightly on their heels, their hands at the same
time falling down by their sides. Proceeding in this manner through a
few courses, with such changes as may present themselves, the pupils
will soon acquire a habit of graceful walking, of the highest
importance to every one who studies a gentlemanly bearing.
RUNNING.
Running is both useful and natural; it favours the development of the
chest, dilates the lungs, and, when moderate, is a highly salutary
exercise. To run fast and gracefully one should as it were graze the
ground with the feet, by keeping the legs as straight as possible whilst
moving them forward. During the course the upper part of the body is
inclined a little forward, the arms are as it were glued to the sides,
and turned in at the point of the hips, the hands shut, and the nails
turned inwards. The faults in running are swinging the arms, raising the
legs too high behind, taking too large strides, bending the knees too
much, and in not properly managing their wind. In all running exercises
the young should begin gradually, and never run themselves out of breath
at any time. By careful practice a boy may soon acquire the power of
running a mile in ten minutes; this is called moderate running: in what
is called prompt running a thousand yards in two minutes is thought very
good work, and in quick running 600 yards in a minute is considered
good. The first distance that children, from eight to ten years of age,
may be made to run is about 200 yards; the second, for those more
advanced, 300 yards; and the third, for adults, 400 yards. It is however
most essential, that in running boys should not over-tax their strength
or “wind.” We are not all constituted alike, and a boy who could last
for 200 yards or so might injure himself considerably by racing for a
mile.
JUMPING.
Of all the corporeal exercises jumping is one of the most useful; and
during our lives very many instances occur of a good jump having done us
essential service. To jump with grace and assurance one should always
fall on the toes, taking care especially to bend the knees on the hips:
the upper part of the body should be inclined forwards, and the arms
extended towards the ground. The hands should serve to break the fall
when jumping from a great height. In jumping we should hold the breath
and never alight on the heels. Boys should exercise themselves in
jumping, by jumping in length, and jumping from a height, with attention
to the above cautions. They may make progressive exercises in _length_
by varying the distance from time to time, and in height by jumping from
a flight of stairs or steps, increasing a step at a time: they will soon
be able to jump in length three yards, and from a height six feet,
without injury.
LEAPING.
Leaping is somewhat different to what is called jumping, as the object
is to pass over an obstacle; and, as in jumping, it is of great
importance to draw in the breath, while the hands should be shut, the
arms pendent, to operate after the manner of a fly-wheel or pendulum. It
may be practised by a leaping stand, which can be easily made of two
sticks or stakes sunk in the ground, in which little catches are made at
various distances, on which an even piece may be laid, that may readily
be knocked over, so as to offer no resistance to the jumper, and injure
him by an ugly fall.
The principal exercises in leaping are:--1. The high leap without a run.
2. The high leap with a run. 3. The long leap without a run. 4. And the
long leap with a run. In the first of these the legs and feet are
closed, the knees are bent till the calves nearly touch the thighs, and
the arms are thrown in the direction of the leap, which increases the
impulse. This leap may be practised at the following progressive
heights,--eighteen inches, twenty-four inches, thirty-two inches,
forty-eight inches, which last is perhaps what few lads would attain.
_The high leap with a run._--The run should never exceed twelve paces,
the distance between the point of springing and the obstacle to leap
over to be about three-fifths the height of the obstacle from the
ground; and in making it the leaper should go fairly and straightly over
without veering to the side, and descend on the ball of the foot just
beyond the toes. The heights that may be cleared by the running leap
vary from three to six feet. A good leaper of sixteen years old ought to
leap four feet six inches, and an extraordinarily good leaper five feet.
Adults well trained will leap six, and some have been known to leap
seven feet.
_The long leap without a run._--The long leap may be marked out from
four to eight feet, according to the agility and strength of the leaper;
and the object to be cleared, a small block of wood, which should in
this kind of leap be never more than six inches high, placed midway. In
leaping the body is bent forward, the feet are closed, the arms first
sway forwards, then backwards, and then forwards at the moment of taking
the leap. In this kind of leap ten or twelve feet is considered good
work.
_The long leap with a run._--The run should be on firm level ground. The
body should be inclined forward, and the run consist of about twelve
paces, a small block of wood, as before, being placed mid distance in
the leap. The spring should be principally on the right foot, and the
arms should be thrown forwards at the time of the leap. In descending,
if the leap be a very long one, the leaper should descend principally
upon his toes; if the leap be not very long, he may descend on the balls
of the toes. The leap is considered good if fifteen feet be cleared, but
twenty may be done by a good leaper, and one or two individuals have
fairly reached twenty-three feet.
_Vaulting._--Vaulting is performed by springing over some stationary
body, such as a gate or bar, by the aid of the hands, which bear upon
it. To perform it, the vaulter may approach the bar with a slight run,
and placing his hands upon it, heave himself up and throw his legs
obliquely over it. The legs should be kept close together: while the
body is in suspension over the bar, the right hand supports and guides
it, while the left is free. The vaulter may commence this exercise with
a bar or a stile three feet high, and extend it gradually to six feet.
_Leaping with a Pole._--A great variety of leaps may be practised with a
pole, which should be of a sufficient length, and shod at one end with
iron, so as to take hold of the ground. The leaper should grasp with his
right hand that part of the pole a little below the level of his head,
and with his left that part of it just below the level of his hips; he
should then make a slight run, and, placing the pole on the ground, take
a spring forward, and swing himself slightly round, so that when he
alights the fall may be brought towards the place from which he rose.
The pole is also employed in both long and deep leaps. In both of these
the mode of holding the pole is similar; but in leaping from a height
the pole should be grasped at the level of the knee, and then the
leaper, with a slight circular swing, should descend on the balls of his
toes.
TO CLIMB UP A BOARD.
This should be firmly fixed at an angle of thirty degrees. The climber
should seize both sides with his hands, and place his feet in the middle
on the soles. This will teach him to hold firm by his hands, and to
cling with his feet. As the climber gets used to this exercise, the
angle of the board may be increased. The young gymnast can ascend when
the plank is perfectly perpendicular. A pole may be mounted in the same
manner.
CLIMBING THE POLE.
The pole should be about nine inches in diameter, and firmly fixed in
the ground in a perpendicular position. In mounting, the pole is to be
grasped firmly with both hands, the right above the left. The legs are
alternately to grasp the pole in the ascent by means of the great toe,
which is turned towards the pole. In descending, the friction is to be
thrown on the inner part of the thighs, and the hands are left
comparatively free.
Climbing the mast is similar to climbing the pole; but in this exercise
the climber is unable to grasp it with his hands, but holds it in his
arms: the position of the legs is the same as for the pole.
CLIMBING THE ROPE.
In climbing the rope, it is firmly grasped by the hands, which are
placed one above the other, and so moved alternately. The heels are
crossed over the rope, which is held fast by their pressure, the body
being supported principally by them. In the sailor’s method the rope
passes from the hands round the inside of the thigh, under the
knee-joint, over the outside of the leg, and across the instep. But the
enterprising gymnast will not be satisfied until he can climb the rope
by his hands only, allowing the rest of his body to hang freely
suspended.
CLIMBING TREES.
In climbing trees the hands, and feet, and knees, are all to be used;
but the climber should never forget that it is to the hands that he has
to trust. He should carefully look upwards and select the branches for
his hands, and the knobs and other excrescences of the trees for his
feet. He should also mark the best openings for the advance of his body.
He should also be particularly cautious in laying hold of withered
branches, or those that have suffered decay at their junction with the
body of the tree, in consequence of the growth of moss, or through the
effects of wet. In descending, he should be more cautious than in
ascending, and hold fast by his hands. He should rarely slide down by a
branch to the ground, as distances are very ill-calculated from the
branches of a tree.
THE GIANT STRIDE, OR FLYING STEPS, AND ITS CAPABILITIES.
The valuable and invigorating apparatus which is called the Giant Stride
in some places, and the Flying Steps in others, is to be found in many
schools where an inclosed open-air playground can be secured. Excepting
on a few occasions, or when the charm of novelty induces the boys to
exercise, it is seldom in much favour, and is usually seen idle, with
the ironwork rusting, the beam rotting, and the ropes yielding to
exposure.
In fact, it really seems as if the masters and teachers were doing their
best to weaken their apparatus, and to cause a severe accident whenever
it breaks down, as such is always the case, sooner or later. The rusty
iron gives way to a harder pull than usual, the ropes snap, or the
upright post breaks off level with the ground, and falls with dreadful
force. We knew of a boy being killed by such an accident, and in
consequence the parents of the other pupils laid the blame on the Giant
Stride itself, instead of on those who allowed it to get into such a
state of decay.
Boys, too, soon get tired of it; they take hold of the ropes, run round
a few times, and then leave it, naturally, seeing no interest in such a
proceeding. But in reality the Giant Stride is a most useful article in
the muscular education, as it exercises at the same time the arms and
legs, is capital for the lungs, and strengthens those invaluable muscles
about the loins which we so sadly neglect, and by reason of whose
weakness many dangerous injuries occur to young and old.
There is something most fascinating in the exercises that can be
achieved on this apparatus; the gymnast seems to be almost endowed with
wings, and in his aërial course hardly touches the ground with his toes,
flying, like feathered Mercury, through the air, and literally basking
in the pure element. The common posture of holding the bars close to the
breast, and then running round the post, is radically false, and
deprives the Giant Stride of all its use, and the greater part of its
pleasure. Being ourselves ardent advocates of this instrument as
affording an amount of healthy exercise not to be obtained by any other
means, we gladly take this opportunity of describing the manufacture and
capabilities of the Giant Stride.
Having fixed upon a suitable spot of level ground, well laid with
gravel, and carefully drained, dig a hole at least seven feet in depth,
and fill about eighteen inches with stones about the size of the fist,
or, to use a homely but expressive simile, as if a sack of potatoes had
been emptied into it. Pound and press the stones well down, and then
pour rough gravel upon them until you have made the surface tolerably
level. The object of these stones is to prevent the water from
accumulating round the post and rotting it.
Now for the post. This should be at least twenty feet long, so as to
leave about fifteen feet projecting when set upright in the hole. The
butt should be left very large, as is done with ordinary wooden
gate-posts, and the whole affair ought to be made of thoroughly seasoned
wood. Unless this is the case, it is sure to rot, and then down it comes
some day, when least expected. Triangular steps should be nailed upon
opposite sides, like those on railway signal-posts, as otherwise the
daily task of removing and replacing the ropes will be very irksome.
[Illustration]
Get a blacksmith to make a stout iron pin, such as is shown at _a_,
having a projecting shoulder, to prevent it from entering too far into
the wood. He should also make a strong iron collar to put over the top
of the pole, as is seen at _b_, where the pin is also shown fixed. The
last piece of blacksmith’s work is an iron disc, having a cap or thimble
in the middle, which is intended to receive the iron pin, and to enable
the disc to spin round freely. Four holes are bored through the edge of
the disc, as seen at _c_. Purchase four iron [S] hooks, and the same
number of swivels, and good store of well-made half-inch rope, and the
machine may then be set up.
First char carefully the whole of the butt that is to enter the ground,
and for about six inches above, in order to prevent the wood from being
injured by wet. Place it upright in the hole, testing it by a plumb-line
tied to the top, and fill in the hole with earth, pounding it down
firmly with a heavy rammer. You cannot be too careful about this
process, and the apparatus should not be used until the earth has had
time to settle. While waiting for this operation, cut the rope into
appropriate lengths, and fasten one end of each rope to a swivel, and
the other to the centre of a stout bâton of elm or oak wood, about
eighteen inches long. Unless you are very sure of your powers of
splicing ropes and making “eyes,” let the ropemaker do this for you, as
it is a most important operation, and involves the security of the
gymnast in no slight degree. It is necessary to have swivels, as the
ropes would otherwise become so twisted as to lose their freedom of
play, or even to weaken their structure. These preparations being
completed, mount the post by the steps, taking the cap with you, grease
the pin well with an end of tallow-candle, and slip the cap upon it,
taking care to spin it well in order to assure yourself that all is
right. Hang the swivels to the circular plate by means of the [S] hooks,
one curve of which passes through the hole in the plate, and the other
through the loop in the swivel.
The ropes should be just so long that when they hang loosely along the
pole the cross-bar should be two feet from the ground. As, however, new
ropes stretch in a wonderful manner, it is needful to allow considerably
for this property.
One thing more is needed, and then the whole apparatus will be complete.
Measure the greatest distance which can be reached by the feet of any
one swinging round by the ropes, and about one yard beyond that line
erect a slender pole nearly as high as the central post, having pegs
driven at intervals of four inches. This is intended to aid the learner
in leaping, and the mode by which this object is accomplished is seen in
fig. 1.
[Illustration: FIG. 1.]
Having now everything ready, we first look to all the fastenings, a
precaution which must never be neglected; see that the pin and swivels
are well greased, take the cross-bar of one rope in both hands, and
retire from the post as far as the outstretched arms will permit. Of
course, if there are four performers, each takes his stand exactly
opposite his neighbour. It is better not to exercise alone, on account
of the unequal strain on the post; and it is evident that the opposite
players should be as nearly as possible of similar weights, so as to
balance each other in their course. It may easily be imagined that the
strain upon the base of the post is enormous, there being a leverage of
fifteen feet, and that some precautions are necessary to prevent injury.
Keeping our right sides to the post, and the rope tightly stretched, we
begin to run, throwing as much weight as possible on the rope, and as
little as possible on the feet. As the pace increases, the feet are
taken off the ground, and touch it at longer intervals, until, when at
full speed, they only come to the ground occasionally, just sufficient
to maintain the impetus.
Having kept up this speed as long as is agreeable, we slacken the pace
gradually, and stop. Next time we take care to run the contrary way,
keeping the left side towards the pole. This is done to exercise equally
the muscular system on both sides of the body; and to save time and
space, we will say, once for all, that when any feat is described, it
must be accomplished in either direction with equal ease.
We will now explain the method of leaping, one of the most exciting of
all these exercises.
Set the string to quite a low elevation,--say two feet from the
ground,--stand with your back to it, the cross-bar in your hands, and
run quickly round. When you come about one quarter of the distance, try
to fling yourself into the air, not by jumping with the legs, but by
letting the whole weight depend on the rope, so that the centrifugal
force takes you off your feet. As you touch the ground, take about three
long steps, and at the third step hurl yourself again off the ground,
with the body straight, and the feet extended well behind, and the
impetus will carry you over the string, and land you neatly on the other
side. You will soon learn to increase the height of the jump, until you
can pass over the string at an elevation of ten feet with perfect
certainty.
Another very pretty, though not so dashing, a feat is to spin round on
your own axis as you run round the course. At first it is needful to
manage this cautiously, as a slip of the foot is sure to disturb your
balance, and send you ignominiously scraping your way over the gravel in
a derogatory and rather painful position. When, however, you have
mastered this art, you can go round revolving the whole time, keeping
your legs straight, feet together, and toes pointed.
There are many modifications of these exercises which I should right
well like to describe; but as our space is limited, we must content
ourselves with two more. At the same time I may say, that if any of the
readers of this book succeed in achieving them, they will bid fair to
attain no mean position in the gymnastic art.
[Illustration: FIG. 2.]
In the first of these exercises the performer never moves hand or foot,
but holds himself straight, stiff, and immovable as an Egyptian statue,
and in the course of his progress round the central post his feet
describe a series of circles, or rather spirals, while his hands merely
move in a circle, and serve as the axis on which the body revolves. This
feat is not very easily made intelligible, but with the help of two
diagrams we hope that our readers will comprehend it. Fig. 2 shows the
method of commencing it. The performer grasps the cross-bar in both
hands at the full stretch of his arms, holds himself quite straight and
stiff, points his toes, and then falls forward, as shown in the
engraving. If he has the strength and nerve to hold himself quite stiff,
though his face comes rather near the ground, the whole body swings off
the ground, the hands being the pivot, and the feet take the course
denoted by the dotted line, the hands retaining their position. It is
possible, by dint of practice, to manage so as to make the entire
circuit of the pole in four such revolutions, and the course of the
performer is shown by the accompanying diagram (fig. 3), where the dark
circle in the centre represents the pole, the dotted line is the course
taken by the hands, and the continuous line the course of the feet.
[Illustration: FIG. 3.]
This is a most elegant and graceful performance, and never fails to
elicit the admiration and applause of the bystanders. There seem to be
no means of propulsion, and the performer appears, to an uninitiated
spectator, to be impelled by a simple act of volition.
The last is the most daring and difficult of all the feats, being
nothing less than passing over the string with the head downwards and
the feet in the air. This need not be attempted by any but a tolerable
gymnast, and is achieved by running at the string in the manner already
described, and just as the body is rising in the swing drawing the hands
smartly to the breast, throwing the feet into the air, and clasping the
rope between them. It is a most dashing feat, and generally takes
spectators entirely by surprise.
We should well have liked a longer disquisition on a favourite subject,
but must now take our leave, merely assuring the reader that the few
exercises which we have described are the keys to the thorough mastery
of the Giant Stride.
As a last caution, let us recommend that the ropes should be taken down
every evening and put in a dry spot, as they are liable to be much
weakened if permitted to hang in the open air. In wet weather the same
precaution should be taken.
PARALLEL BARS.
These are two pieces of wood, from six to eight feet in length, and
about four inches square, the edges rounded. For lads, they are fixed at
about eighteen inches apart, and supported by two round standards,
firmly fixed in the ground, from three to four feet high, according to
the stature of the boys.
_Balancing._--Being placed between the bars and in the centre, put your
hands right and left on the bars at the same time. After a little jump
upwards, preserve your equilibrium on both wrists, the legs close; this
is called the first position. Then communicate to your body a gentle
movement of balancing from behind, forwards, and continue this for
several times, the body moving as it were upon a pivot. This should be
practised until the body swings freely backwards and forwards.
[Illustration]
_To bring both legs over._--From the first position, after a little
movement of balancing, bring both legs, close and at once, over one of
the bars forwards, without touching it or moving your hands from the
place. The same ought to be made backwards, from right to left.
[Illustration]
_To jump out._--After having communicated to the body a movement of
balance, the moment at which the legs are raised over the bars, jump
backwards over the right without touching it with the feet or waist;
then perform the same jump forwards. By the vaulting jump you may easily
come between the bars, and also bring your body over both without
touching them otherwise than with your hands.
[Illustration]
_To rise and sink down._--Being in equilibrium in the middle of the
bars, place the legs backwards, the heels close to the upper part of the
thigh. From this position, come gently down, till the elbows nearly meet
behind the back, then rise up gently without any impulse or touching the
ground with your feet.
_To kiss the bar behind the hands._--In the same position as before,
bring the body gently down between the bars without touching the ground
with your knees; kiss the bar behind each hand alternately, and then
rise up in the first position.
_Jumping on the Bars._--Keep the knees straight and jump along the bars
backward and forward. Afterwards, do the same with the fingers turned
inside. These will be learned easier, if the young gymnast tries them
first with bent knees.
[Illustration: WALKING ON THE BARS.]
_Walking on the Bars._--Walk on the hands to the end and back again. In
walking backwards, take care to keep the elbows straight, or you will
come down. When this is done with ease, do the same, only keep your
fingers inside the bars.
[Illustration: L.]
L.--Sit on the ground between the bars; take hold of the bars with your
hands and raise your body still in the sitting position, and stay there
as long as you can. When that is learned, jump along the bars in the
same attitude. Keep your knees straight, and don’t mind if your limbs
ache a little.
[Illustration]
_The Arm Swing._--Rest the fore arms on the bars, and swing. When tired
of swinging, let the body hang straight, and then rise on the hands. Not
easy at first, but soon done with practice.
_The Roll._--Rest on the fore arms, swing backward, and turn completely
over, catching the bars under the arms. It looks difficult, but is easy
enough, only wanting a little nerve.
_The Janus._--Sit astride the bars, having your hands rather behind. Now
raise the feet, swing through the bars, and come up astride on the other
side. Your arms will then be twisted, and your face will be looking in
the opposite direction. Swing boldly, or the shins will be knocked
against the bars.
[Illustration]
_The Sausage._--Kneel on the bars. Stretch the hands as far forward as
possible, and hitch the toes over the bars behind, at the same time
stretching them backwards as far as possible. Now let the body sink
between the bars, being supported by the hands and insteps. Now rise
again. Difficult, but soon learnt.
[Illustration]
_To stand on a bar._--Sit astride one of the bars. Place the heel of the
right foot on the bar, hitching the left instep under it. Draw yourself
up by means of the left instep. Take care of your balance. This is a
very useful accomplishment, and may possibly stand the gymnast in good
stead.
_The Drop._--Stand on the bars with each foot over one of the posts.
Spring slightly into the air, put the feet together, and come down
stiff, catching yourself by your hands. This should be done over the
posts, as the bars might be broken, were the weight of the faller to
come in the middle.
[Illustration]
_The Spring._--Swing at one end, and with a sudden impulse leap to the
other on your hands. Take care of the balance of the body, or you will
come on your back between the bars.
[Illustration]
_The Barber’s Curl._--Hang on one end of the bars as in the L. Keep the
knees straight, and turn over slowly, not letting the feet come to the
ground. Stay there while you count ten, and come back the same way.
THE HORIZONTAL BAR.
Let two strong upright posts be firmly fastened into the ground, about
six feet apart, and let a wooden bar be strongly mortised into their
tops. The bar should be made of white deal, about two inches and a half
in diameter. The bar must have no knot in it, or it will break. It
should be so high from the ground that a spring is required to reach it
with the hands. The surface of the bar should be free from all
roughnesses, but not polished.
_The Grasp._--The fingers should be hooked over the pole, keeping the
thumb on the same side as the fingers. Hang as long as possible, first
with both hands, then with each hand by turns.--See p. 244.
_The Walk._--Hang by the hands, and walk by them from one end of the
pole to the other, backwards and forwards. Do not slip. Do it first with
both hands on the same side of the pole, afterwards with a hand at each
side.--See p. 244.
[Illustration: THE GRASP.]
[Illustration: THE WALK.]
[Illustration: BREASTING THE BAR.]
_Breasting the Bar._--Hang by the hands, and draw up the body slowly
until the chest touches the bar. Practise this as often as
possible--knees straight.
[Illustration]
_Kicking the Bar._--Hang by the hands and draw up the feet very slowly
until the instep touches the pole. Do it several times. Difficult at
first, but soon learned. Do not kick about, or jerk yourself upward, or
you may strain yourself.
[Illustration]
_Swinging._--Hang by the hands and swing backwards and forwards.
Practise this until your heels are considerably above your head each
way. After a while, let go of the pole as you swing back, and catch it
again as you come down. An inch or two at first is enough, but do not be
satisfied until the hands can have a space of eight or ten inches
between themselves and the bar.
[Illustration]
_To sit on the Bar._--Hang by the hands, and pass one of your feet
through them, hitching your knee over the bar. Then give a good swing
backwards, and come up sitting on the bar with one leg. Now draw the
other leg over, and do not tumble off.
_Circling the Bar._--Hang by the hands, and curl the body gently over
the bar. If it is too difficult, stop for a minute or two, try something
else, and after an interval try it again. It will be soon learned.
_The true Lover’s Knot._--Grasp the bar; pass the left knee through the
right arm, so as to let the knee rest in the elbow; pass the right knee
over the instep of the left foot; let go with the left hand, and with it
grasp the right foot. You will now be suspended by the right hand, and
will be packed up in a remarkably small space. Take care of the right
wrist, or you will spin round and twist off.
[Illustration: CIRCLING THE BAR.]
[Illustration: TRUE LOVER’S KNOT.]
[Illustration: PASSING THROUGH THE ARMS.]
_Passing through the Arms._--Hang by the hands, and bring the feet
between them, permitting them to pass through until they can nearly
touch the ground; now return in the same way. This cannot be done
properly without practising, as the muscles of the shoulder blades must
be capable of great relaxation, together with great power.
[Illustration: THE GRASSHOPPER.]
[Illustration: HANGING BY THE LEGS.]
_The Grasshopper._--Sit on the pole, grasping it with the fingers to the
front. Slide gradually off, until the small of the back rests against
the pole, while the arms are elevated at the elbows like a grasshopper’s
legs. Now draw yourself up again.
_Hanging by the legs._--This is easy enough, and a capital preservative
against determination of the blood to the brain. First practise it with
both legs over the pole; then take off the left leg and hitch it over
the right instep; then learn to hang by one leg only, while you try to
carry a weight in your hands. When you are perfect and confident, sit on
the pole, and drop off backwards, catching yourself by the legs. This
must be done with a fall like a plummet, or the body will swing, and
probably unhitch the legs from the pole.
[Illustration: THE ARM-CHAIR.]
_The Arm-chair._--Hang on the bar by the arms just below the elbows,
keeping the elbows firmly pressed to the side. The hands should be lower
than the bar, to counteract the swing of the body.
[Illustration: HANGING BY THE FEET.]
_Hanging by the feet._--Hang by the hands, and curl up the body, until
the insteps are well hitched over the bar. Let go the hands cautiously,
and permit the body to hang at full length. The best way to reach the
bar again is to seize one of your legs, and pull yourself up by it.
_To leave the Bar._--Never get on the bar or leave it in a clumsy
manner; there should be art about everything. To leave the bar
effectively is well worth practising. Here are six modes:--
1. Sit on the bar; drop and hang by the legs, at the same time giving
the body a swing forwards which will loosen the hold of the legs. Alight
on the hands, and get gently on the feet. This is rather a brilliant
finish, and not so difficult as it appears.
2. Sit on the bar, place both hands on one side, and vault over.
3. Sit astride, place both hands on the bar in front, bring up both
feet, at the same time springing upright; run along the bar and jump off
the end, or slide down the post if it is too high to jump.
4. Hang by the hands, draw up the body until the chest touches the bar;
spring off backwards by the force of the arms.
5. Hang by the hands, and swing completely round once, letting the
impetus hurl you forward. Take care to cross the feet and come down on
the toes.
6. If you are tired and cannot perform any of these things, merely hang
by the hands, and come round through them, but never merely loose the
pole.
THE HORSE.
There is not a more graceful or more interesting series of exercises
than those performed on the Wooden Horse. They are very useful also, as
they give exceeding pliancy to the limbs, and teach the gymnast how to
take advantage of the weight of each member. They have also the
advantage of requiring some daring, and a spirited lad will always
surpass at these exercises.
The horse is made of a great cylinder of wood mounted on four legs,
which are firmly fastened into the ground--their ends should be charred
as was directed for the Giant Stride.
Nearer one end than the other a piece of stout rough leather is firmly
nailed, to represent the saddle, and two curved pieces of wood bound the
saddle and represent the pommels. The hind pommel should be nearly half
an inch higher than the other. They may be covered with leather also.
On the off side of the horse a pit about a foot deep and four feet
square should be dug and filled with sawdust, while on the near side the
paving should be either very fine gravel, or, if possible, sand.
There should be several horses, adapted to the different sizes of boys
who are to practise on them. When a boy can place his chin on a level
with the saddle, he should change to a higher horse, as the top of the
saddle ought to be on a level with the nose of the gymnast.
_Mounting._--Stand by the horse, place one hand on each pommel, spring
up, so that the body is supported by the hands, while the legs rest
lightly against the horse. Keep the body upright and knees straight.
Down and up again several times. Always come down on the toes.
[Illustration]
Now do the same thing; but, in springing up, throw out the right leg
until it is nearly at right angles with the body, then the left.
Afterwards spread both legs as widely as possible.
When this can be done with ease, spring up as before, rest a moment,
then throw the right leg easily over the saddle, removing the right
hand, and there you are.
_Dismounting._--Put the left hand on the fore pommel, right hand on the
saddle, spring off and come to the ground, keeping your right hand still
on the saddle. Be sure in all these exercises to come down on the toes.
[Illustration]
_Sustaining the body._--1. Spring up as in mounting, and throw the body
away from the horse, bringing it back again without coming to the
ground.
2. Mount, and putting both hands on the front pommel, raise the body as
high as you can. Don’t be afraid of going too high.
3. Do the same, but swing the body backwards and forwards. Hard work,
but capital exercise.
4. Do the same, and slap the soles of your shoes together.
_Knee practice._--1. Put your hands on the pommels, spring up, and lodge
your right knee on the saddle. Down, and then the left knee. Then both
knees. Practise these well.
2. Hands on pommels, leap up and touch the saddle with both toes.
[Illustration: KNEE PRACTICE.]
[Illustration: TOUCH SADDLE.]
[Illustration: JUMPING OFF.]
3. Kneel on the saddle with both knees; now lean well forward and jump
off. Very easy, but requires confidence.
_Swinging practice._--1. Sit behind the saddle, put the left hand on the
front pommel, and the right hand on the other. Raise the body and swing
round the horse, seating yourself on his neck, _before_ the saddle.
Change hands, and swing round until you regain your former position.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
2. Put both hands on the front pommel, raise the body, and suddenly
swing boldly upwards, turning round and crossing the legs, so that you
will sit on the saddle with your face to the tail. Keep the hands in
their places, and swing back again in the same manner.
_Miscellaneous Exercises._--Hands on pommels, spring up and put the
right leg through the arms, letting the left hang straight. Withdraw the
right leg, and spring up again, using the left leg, and letting the
right hang down.
Hands on pommels, spring up, and seat yourself like a lady behind the
saddle; spring down to the ground, and seat yourself in a similar manner
before the saddle.
Hands on pommels, spring up, cross your feet, pass them through the
hands, and come to the ground on the opposite side.
[Illustration]
Take a short run, place the hands on the pommels, and vault completely
over the horse, keeping the knees straight.
[Illustration]
Sit behind the saddle, put both hands on the hind pommel, and throw
yourself off over the horse’s tail.
Hands on pommels, spring up, make the body into an L, let the feet pass
through the hands and rest suspended without touching the saddle. Knees
quite straight.
[Illustration]
A good one for a finish.--Take a run, put both hands on the very top of
the pommels, and throw yourself over in a regular somerset. That is not
bad, but you can do better after the somerset has been well learned.
[Illustration]
Throw the somerset as before, only do not let go the hands. You will now
be standing with your back to the horse, the spine considerably bent,
and your arms thrown over your head. Wait so for a few seconds, and then
with a powerful effort throw yourself back again, so as to come on the
ground on the same side of the horse from which you started. This is
really difficult, as it requires practice, strength, and confidence, but
it looks so well that it is worth learning. The writer of these few
instructions has often astonished the natives with it, and has lately
repeated it after two years’ absence from any gymnasium.
THE SWING.
Let no one despise this exercise. It is worth learning, if only as a
preservation against sea sickness. If any one can stand a twenty-feet
swing for half-an-hour, the sea may toss its worst, for he will come off
unscathed. Now, I do not mean to say that merely sitting on a board and
getting swung by some one else is any great object: far from it. But
there are some very graceful exercises to be managed on the swing. Here
are some:--
1. The way to get into the swing is as follows:--Take one rope in each
hand, just above the seat; walk backwards until the ropes are freely
stretched. Now run sharply forwards, letting the hands glide up the
ropes as far as possible, and the instant that you feel a check, grasp
the rope tightly, and spring into the seat standing. When there, work
easily up by alternately bending and straightening the knees. (See 1.)
[Illustration: _Fig. 1._]
2. When in good swing, slip the feet off the seat (which should not be
more than four inches wide); let the hands slide down the ropes, and
come down sitting. To recover the standing position, reach upwards with
the hands as high as possible, and draw yourself upwards as the swing is
going forwards, when the seat will place itself exactly under your feet.
3. Now for some feats.
Let the swing go very gently. Place both hands at the level of the
shoulders, and suddenly extend them, keeping the arms straight. Take
care, as there will be a violent vibration, and you will be shot out of
the swing before you know where you are. Practise it first while the
swing is still, but do not be satisfied until you can do it while in
strong swing, and without closing the hands, merely letting the palms
rest against the ropes. (See 2.)
[Illustration: _Fig. 2._]
Swing still. Stand up on the seat, and grasp the rope with the hands as
low as possible, without bending the body or the knees. Now lean
forward, making your hands the pivot, and do not be astonished at
finding your heels in the air, and your head downward. To recover
yourself, the body must be bent a little. (See 3.)
[Illustration: _Fig. 3._]
Stand sideways on the seat, grasp one rope with both hands leaning your
back against the other, taking care to have the rope well between the
shoulder blades. Put the inner centre of the left foot against the
opposite rope, and fix the right foot in the same manner against the
left heel. Now let go both hands, and lean well backwards, when you will
be exactly balanced. When you are secure with a quiet swing, practise it
while the swing is moving, until you can lie securely against the rope
while you are moving freely. The balance is entirely kept by the
shoulder blades against the rope, and the arms must be folded in order
to throw the shoulder blades well back. If the gymnast gets alarmed, and
puts his hands out to save himself, the rope slips off his back, and out
he goes. (See 4.)
[Illustration: _Fig. 4._]
While the swing is working, suddenly hang out at one side, supporting
yourself by one hand on the rope, and one foot on the seat. Practise
this on both sides. (See 5.)
[Illustration: _Fig. 5._]
Seize the left rope with both hands, press the feet firmly against the
ropes where they join the seat, and fall out forwards. The ropes will
now cross, and when the swing is in full operation, the curves described
are most elegant. To recover the ordinary position, wait until the swing
is going backwards, and a powerful twist of the body will uncross the
ropes, when the right hand should take hold of the right rope and steady
the swing. (See 6.)
[Illustration: _Fig. 6._]
When the swing is in motion, grasp the ropes as tight as possible, and
raise the feet until they are high in air between the ropes. Take care
of the balance in the back swing, as, if the body is suffered to bend
backwards, the hands will hardly bear the strain. Now slide slowly and
carefully down the ropes until the head rests on the footboard.
To make a telling exit from the swing, two ways may be adopted. First
way:--Get the swing into a firm, steady movement, sit down, and bring
both hands inside the ropes; and just as the swing has passed its
centre, strike the seat away with the hands and you will shoot forward
several yards. Take care to come down on the toes, and to lean well
backwards as you leave the swing, as the impetus will bring you upright
as you touch the ground. (See 7.)
[Illustration: _Fig. 7._]
The second method is, to seat yourself in the same manner, and as the
swing crosses its centre backwards, lean well forwards and strike away
the seat. You will then be hurled backwards, and if your balance is
good, will come to the ground in a very elegant attitude. Be sure to
lean well forward, cross the feet, clasp the hands, and come down on the
toes. (See 8.)
[Illustration: _Fig. 8._]
Great care must be taken to lean well backwards if you shoot out
forwards, and well forwards as you shoot backwards, or in the one case
you will come with your nose on the ground, and in the other you will
find the back of your head rather damaged. So practise with gentle
swings at first, and then increase. I have often done it with the swing
at full speed, and in one instance in a public gymnasium, I shot so far
forward that the spot was marked by a row of iron nails driven into the
floor.
In a volume of this nature, it is impossible to give more than a
comparatively slight sketch of any subject. I am sure, however, that if
the reader will master even these short instructions in gymnastic
exercises, he will be able to realize that great blessing, the sound
body, in which only a sound mind can reside. His trained eye will be
accustomed to measure instinctively any obstacle in his way, and the
training of his body will enable him to put forth the full power of his
muscles to overcome the obstacle. Danger will lose half its perils to
him who thus knows how to meet it. A strong rope will be as safe as a
staircase to him; it will be perfectly indifferent to him whether his
head or his heels be uppermost, and he will be enabled by the presence
of mind which such studies engender to think out calmly modes of escape
from danger which would instantly overwhelm those whose bodies are
uninstructed.
But even to pass by the question of utility, it is a duty of man to
preserve his body in health, and to develop its powers. Every man would
think himself wrong to neglect the mind; surely then, every man ought no
less to think it wrong to neglect the body, which is made by the same
mighty Hand that implanted the mind within it. Indeed, the neglected
body is sure to injure the mind, and therefore those who improve their
bodies are at the same time improving their minds.
I know one young man, who owes all his health, and probably his life, to
gymnastic exercise. From his earliest childhood he was always ailing,
and through the whole of his childhood was never suffered to sleep
unwatched. When he entered upon manhood, the childish illness changed
into annual fevers, which held their sway until he had been for some
time at one of the Universities.
His medical attendant advised him to take regular exercise, and
recommended the study of gymnastics. He rapidly improved in health and
strength, his fever has not attacked him for eight or nine years, and he
actually led the gymnasium for a whole year.
Were I to have the charge of a school, I should consider the gymnasium
as part of the regular school discipline, and take care that the boys
were exercised as carefully in their bodily as their mental powers.
THROWING THE JAVELIN.
[Illustration]
This play is very interesting, and gives strength to the arm, and
exactness to the eye. In playing it, a square target must be procured,
made of thick wood, about four feet in diameter, and on which should be
marked concentral circles, the same as those of a target in archery.
This should be well supported behind by two stout back pieces, resting
in the ground, so as to prevent the target from being easily overturned.
The circles may be several in number; the centre should be black, and
about six inches in diameter, and count ten; the second circle should be
red, and should count five; and the third should be light blue, and
count three. The other parts of the target to count as may be agreed.
The javelins should consist of poles of ash or fir, about an inch and
half in diameter, and should be five feet six inches in length. They
should have a spike in one end, which should be surrounded with a rim of
iron; the spike should be about two inches long, thick, and strong, so
as to enable it to become fixed in the target without splitting it. The
game may be played by any number of boys, and is commenced as follows:--
One player takes a javelin in his right hand, and walking to a distance
from the target, previously agreed upon by the players, he poises his
javelin, by holding it in the hollow of his hand, between the ball of
the thumb and the fleshy part at the side, and his elbow is at the same
time bent, and his arm elevated so that his hand is a little above his
ear, the javelin being at the same time nicely balanced with the smaller
fingers, touching it so as to direct its course; it is then launched
forward at the target, and, if properly poised, directed and thrown,
will go to it in a direct line. The point at which it strikes the target
is then marked, and then the other players follow in the same way for
twelve times in succession: the person who scores the most marks being
the victor.
[Illustration]
The javelin will fly better and straighter if a rotatory movement is
communicated to it by a slight pull of the little finger as it leaves
the hand. When some skill has been obtained in darting, blunt javelins
with padded ends should be procured, and the players should accustom
themselves to avoid, parry, or catch a javelin thrown at them. When they
can do so with certainty, they may storm a fort. The best fort is a
hedge with gaps. The players divide into two parties, one defending and
the other attacking. Each player should be furnished with three javelins
at least, well padded and nicely balanced. The art of catching and
returning a javelin is exceedingly useful in this game. We well remember
an occasion when, on storming a fort, one of our opponents, whose frame
was larger than his soul, had prudently retired into the background
until all our spears were exhausted, but, on seeing us weaponless, he
with great courage ran up to the hedge and hurled his spear, as we were
running forward to pick up a fallen lance. The moment he had thrown the
javelin he ran away as fast as he could, but was overtaken by his own
weapon, which took him in the rear, and toppled him over in beautiful
style. We have only known one accident at this game, and that was caused
by the impetuosity of one of the garrison, who on seeing an enemy
crawling up through the gap, and finding himself without a spear,
snatched up a _bow_ that was lying near, and made a thrust at him, which
sent the sharp horn tip of the bow through his under lip.
THE TRAPEZE: SINGLE AND DOUBLE.
Should the intending gymnast possess a strongly-built barn or outhouse,
which is large enough to permit the trapeze to have fair play, and
strong enough to endure the stress of the swinging weight, the ropes can
be suspended from a beam, either belonging to the building or inserted
for the express purpose, and resting at each end on strong brackets. But
as such buildings are very seldom to be obtained, we here give a sketch
of a plan invented, we believe, by Messrs. Snoxell, the well-known
furnishers of gymnasia. Although its structure may appear to be light
and flimsy, it is in reality possessed of strength which renders a
fracture impossible, and is indeed far more fitted to resist the
enormous strain which is laid upon it, than if it were made of massive
beams morticed.
[Illustration]
In the first place the upright poles (_a_) do not pass into the ground,
but are supported upon stone slabs, so there is no fear of that terrible
enemy of the gymnasium--rotting wood, which silently decays and suddenly
snaps off level with the surface of the ground. The cross piece (_b_) is
affixed to the uprights by a simple cap, bent at right angles, as is
seen at _f_. The cross piece is permanently secured into the cap, but
the uprights can be slipped in and out without difficulty. At _c_ may be
seen four slender wire ropes, the upper ends of which are fastened to
the uprights, and the lower ends are furnished with hooks. These hooks
are intended to be slipped into the staples (_e_), which are firmly
secured into the ground, just as the old bull-rings were fixed. At _d_
are seen the tightening screws, which are simply turned by hand, and
shorten the wire ropes just as the connecting screws of a railway train
draw the carriages together.
The apparatus is so perfectly simple that it can be set up or taken down
by two boys in five minutes, or by one boy in rather a longer period.
The process is as follows:--
The uprights are slipped into the caps, and the hooks at the ends of the
wire ropes or stays are hitched into the staples of one side, say at
_e_. The uprights are then reared, and their bases set on the stones.
The hooks of the opposite stays are then hitched into the staples at _e
e_, and the screws at _d_ turned until the stays are quite tight and the
uprights are perfectly perpendicular.
It seems rather a complicated process to read about, but it is
remarkably simple when reduced to action. We have mounted and dismounted
one of these ingenious contrivances in a wonderfully short space of
time, and without any assistance.
For practising the feat of passing through the air from one trapeze to
another a double set of apparatus is required; but for most useful
purposes one set is sufficient. The ropes by which the bar is suspended
must be thoroughly stretched before they are attached to the bar, or
there will be no certainty in the swing. Few persons who have not had
practical experience on this subject would imagine how greatly the
length of a rope is increased by the process of stretching, and how
absolutely necessary is this precaution.
The ropes are passed at each end over an iron eye, the upper one of
which is hitched over a hook on the cross bar, and the other receives
the hook which suspends the bar. On looking at the illustration the
reader will notice these hooks just above the bar. They are useful,
because, when needed, a pair of rings can be substituted for the bar,
and permit certain variations in the performances, Still, their presence
or absence is quite optional, and the only remark that need be made is,
that they should be furnished with springs like the fastening of a
breguet chain, so as to guard against the possibility of slipping. The
bar itself must be very heavy, or otherwise it will not have sufficient
weight to keep the cords at full stretch, and in consequence will not
swing truly. Those which were employed by Leotard were iron, with a mere
shell of wood, so as to give a pleasant hold for the hands, and we have
seen them made of iron, coated with leather. The last point that needs
notice is the perch or stand from which the performer launches himself.
This may be fixed at any convenient elevation, and its centre should
exactly coincide with the centre of the bar. Having now the apparatus
ready, let us commence the performance.
Set the bar swinging boldly; ascend the perch quickly, and seize the bar
in both hands. Wait for a moment, until the ropes are fully stretched,
and then launch yourself for a swing. Now there are two ways of doing
everything--a right and a wrong way; and the present instance affords no
exception to the rule. The wrong way--and the usual way--is to fall
forwards from the perch. Now this is quite wrong; and if you act in such
a manner you will bungle your sway, and will not retain sufficient
impetus to enable you to return to the perch.
The right mode of starting is as follows: Stand as seen in the
accompanying illustration--the spine well bent backwards, the body
tolerably stiff, and leaning well against the heavy bar. Now draw
yourself up gently by the arms, as if you were trying to lift your chin
above the bar, and you will find yourself started without any trouble.
Keep the back still bent, and as you descend allow the arms gradually to
assume a perfectly straight position. You will then swing out fairly and
boldly, and by the least possible sway at the end of the swing will
retain sufficient impetus to enable you to resume your stand on the
perch.
Even in this there is an art. If you merely allow yourself to swing back
as you swing forward, you will be disagreeably reminded of your error,
by hitting the back of the leg smartly against the edge of the perch. In
order to avoid this misfortune, draw up the legs sharply just before you
reach the end of the return swing, and you will find them come down on
the perch with perfect ease.
If you are using the rings instead of the bar, you can vary this part
of the performance by turning round in the air, and crossing the ropes
so that you alight on the perch with your back towards the trapèze,
though it is necessary to give a sharp twist as your foot touches the
perch, and so to turn in the direction in which you started.
[Illustration]
Take notice that the arms are always at full length during the swing,
and that the illustrations which represent the performer swinging with
bent arms are entirely erroneous. There is another fault into which the
artists mostly fall. Thinking that they are obtaining pictorial effect,
they represent the ropes which sustain the bar as forming an angle with
the arms of the performer, whereas the arms, body, and ropes are, or
ought to be, all in the same line.
The real attitude in the trapèze is given in the accompanying
illustration, wherein it will be seen that the ropes, the arms, and the
body are all in the same line; and, indeed, a little reflection will
prove that they must be so. Note the position and action, or rather the
non-action of the body, and be careful to imitate it. During the swing,
let the body and limbs hang at full length, and be sure to keep the feet
nearly together, and the toes pointed. The illustrations are all wrong
in this respect. They always _will_ show the performer in an attitude
which the draughtsman is pleased to think a graceful one; but it is
inexpressibly graceless and ridiculous in the eyes of a gymnast.
[Illustration]
When you have accomplished the swing and return satisfactorily, you may
advance another step. Swing off as usual; and, when you have reached the
extremity of the swing, you will find yourself balanced for a moment
motionless, the attraction of gravitation being balanced by the impetus
of the swing. Just at this important point, shift your hold on the bar,
and change sides, as you would do if the bar were hanging quietly.
You will then face the spot whence you started, and in landing on the
perch you must be careful to give yourself a twist as you place your
feet on the perch, and with a slight exertion of the arms you will draw
yourself upright without difficulty, and without running the risk of
falling off the perch again--a frequent and ignominious misfortune.
It will now be time to practise the descent from the swinging trapèze to
the ground. Begin by sitting on the bar, grasping it with the hands, and
falling off backwards, taking care to come to the ground with pointed
toes and crossed feet. The reason of this precaution is that, if the
feet are crossed, the knees are separated, and that when the body
yields--as it must do when it touches the earth--there is no danger of
hitting the chin against the knee, and thereby receiving a momentary
shock to the brain by the teeth striking together.
When you can manage the “fall-back,” as it is called, with tolerable
ease and certainty, seize the bar with the hands, set it swinging,
keeping your face to the perch, and when you are nearly at the full
extent of the swing loosen your hold, and allow yourself to come to the
ground. Be very careful to point the toes, as has already been
described, and continue the practice until you can stand on the perch,
launch yourself backwards, and fly off at the highest point of the
swing.
Always leave the bar while you are swinging _backwards_, because the
attitude of the body is then such as to insure your coming to the ground
in the correct position; whereas, if you do so while swinging forward,
you are nearly certain to overbalance yourself, and either fall on your
nose, or go staggering along in a very ignominious style.
The next process is to start as usual, raise yourself in a sitting
position on the bar, and ask some one to remove the perch. Fall back as
before, only, instead of coming on the ground, hang by the legs, and
accustom yourself to swing in this attitude. When you can accomplish
that feat without difficulty, and feel no nervousness at your strange
position, remove one leg from the bar and hang by the other. Practise
this with both feet. It is not nearly so difficult as it looks, and is
an important feat to perform, because it gives such perfect presence of
mind.
The next feat looks positively awful, but, as usual in gymnastic
performances, is perfectly easy, requiring no skill at all and only a
little courage. Sit on the bar when it is still, and do the “fall-back.”
But, instead of allowing the feet to pass between the ropes, spread the
legs as far apart as possible, and bend up the feet rigidly. The
consequence is, that the insteps hitch in the ropes, slide down them,
and the body becomes suspended by the feet, which are firmly hitched
between the ropes and the bar, as seen in the accompanying illustration.
[Illustration]
If you possess a second trapèze, you may now proceed to the beautiful
series of performances which are achieved upon them.
Let them at first be set moderately near each other, so that when the
bar of the first trapèze is at full swing, it passes within a yard or
four feet of the second. Start off as usual, and just as you are well on
the rise, after passing through the upright, loose your hold of the bar,
and you will pass through the air towards the second bar which you catch
rapidly.
If you perform the feat nicely, you will have so much impetus to spare
that you will be carried along on the second bar, and may either attempt
to return or quietly drop to the ground at the end of the swing. If you
prefer the latter course, be sure to turn through your arms and come
down on your toes.
You will find that the return to the perch, simple as it looks, is by
far the most difficult feat that has yet been mentioned. Make but the
least mistake and failure is certain. If you do not catch the bar
exactly at the right moment, you lose your impetus, and if you do not
seize it exactly in the right place you do not swing truly between the
uprights, and consequently cannot land on the spot at which you aim.
The method of performing this feat is as follows: Swing off the perch,
pass to the second bar, and while at the full extent of the swing,
change sides, and give yourself a slight impulse with the feet. You will
now meet the first bar swinging towards you, and if you can seize it
just at the right moment, you will find yourself with sufficient impetus
to reach the perch. If not, swing once more, give yourself a hearty
impulse with the legs and try it again. Failure is certain at first, but
after a little practice the feat becomes easy.
Here we must protest against the totally erroneous ideas of artists
respecting the attitude of the body while the performer passes from one
bar to another. We think that without an exception they all represent
him as shooting horizontally through the air, with his hands stretched
out, and with one leg bent and the other straight. Now, if any one will
watch a performer on the trapèze, he will see that the attitude is
nearly perpendicular, and that any other position is really absurd and
impracticable.
[Illustration]
In the accompanying illustration, we have given a sketch of the real
attitude of the performer, wherein it will be seen that the body is
nearly perpendicular, and that the arms are kept bent, with the hands
close to the shoulders, ready to be darted out in a moment when the
trapèze swings within distance.
We are the more particular in giving these illustrations, because they
are needed in order to correct the very false notions which are
prevalent respecting this beautiful exercise. Parents especially are apt
to form their judgments from the illustrations which are seen upon
advertising bills and in illustrated journals, and thinking that the
exercise must be attended with great danger, do not like to give their
permission for their sons to learn it.
Let our readers be assured that there is no more danger in this
beautiful exercise than in jumping over a chair--perhaps not quite so
much--while the manner in which it develops the muscular powers of the
arms, shoulders, and loins, is unapproachable by any other system.
One caution is, however, needful. Take care that every loop and splice
be perfectly secure, look over the whole of the apparatus daily, and
never venture upon the trapèze until you have ascertained that nothing
is likely to give way. If you perceive the slightest feeling of
insecurity, the whole enjoyment of the exercise is lost, and no benefit
can be expected from it.
TRICKS AND FEATS OF GYMNASTICS.
_The book._--Fix a book between the toes of the feet, and, by a jerk,
throw it over the head.
_The chalk line._--Draw a line with chalk on the floor; against this
place the toes of both feet; then kneel down, and rise up again without
leaving the line, or using the hands.
_Stepping through._--Take a small piece of cane about a foot long, and
holding it between the hands, leap through it. Afterwards take a
tobacco-pipe, and perform the same feat without breaking; after this,
join the hands together, and leap through them, which is not very
difficult of accomplishment.
_Armless._--Lying upon the back with the arms across the chest, the
attempt must be made to rise on the feet again.
_Hop against the wall._--Stand with one toe close against the wall,
about two feet from the ground, and turn the other over it, without
removing the toe from the wall.
_Stoop if you can._--One boy having placed his heels against the wall,
another must place near his toes a shilling, and tell him he may have it
if he can pick it up. This he will find to be impossible for him to do
while his heels touch the wall, as there is no room for his back to
balance the other parts of his body.
_The spring from the wall._--Placing yourself at a proper distance from
the wall with your face opposite to it, throw yourself forward until you
support yourself by one hand. Then spring back into your former
position. Begin this feat at a short distance from the wall, and
increase the distance by degrees. The “athlete” will, in a short time,
be able to stand at nearly the length of his body from the wall. This
feat is sometimes called the palm spring, but the palm has really
nothing to do with it. The thumb spring is similar, but dangerous, and
many have sprained their thumbs in attempting it.
[Illustration]
_The long reach._--This is a somewhat difficult feat, and requires great
caution in its performance. A line is chalked on the floor, at which the
toes must be placed, and from which they are not to remove. The left
hand is then to be thrown forward in a long reach until the body
descends upon it, without any part touching the floor in its descent;
the right hand is now to be stretched out as far forward as possible,
and with a piece of chalk, a mark is made on the floor at its fullest
extent, the body being sustained by the left hand during the operation.
The boy should now recover the upright position on his legs, by
springing back from the left hand without touching the floor in any way.
The length reached, and the perfection with which the body recovers
itself, distinguishes the winner of the game.
[Illustration]
_The stooping stretch._--In this feat a line is drawn on the floor, at
which the outer edge of the left foot is placed, and behind this, at a
short distance, the right heel. Taking a piece of chalk in the left
hand, the youngster passes it between the legs, and under the bend of
the left knee, chalking the floor with it as far forward as he can. He
then recovers his position without moving his feet from the line at
which they had been fixed.
[Illustration]
_The chair feat._--Place three chairs in the situation indicated in the
cut (p. 264), and lay down upon them, the head resting on one, the heels
upon another, and the lower part of the body on the third or middle
chair, which should be much lighter than the others. Then, by stiffening
the body and limbs, and throwing up the chest into a state of rigidity,
it will not be difficult for a boy to remove the middle chair, and to
pass it quite over on the other side of him.
[Illustration]
_The poker feat._--Take a common poker and hold it the lower end
downwards, in the manner shown in the cut, _i. e._ by the fingers,
thumb, and ball of the palm. Then, by the mere motion of the fingers and
thumb, and the fulcrum of the palm, work the poker upwards till you
raise it through the whole length to that part of it which goes into the
fire. This trick depends mainly upon the strength of the muscles of the
hand and fingers, combined with a certain knack to be acquired by
practice.
[Illustration]
_The stick feat, or from hand to mouth._--Take a piece of stick of the
length of the fore arm, measuring from the elbow to the end of the
middle finger. Hold it in the hand horizontally before you, the knuckles
being down and the nails upwards, and the elbow being on a line with the
hand. Then raise the left end of the stick from the breast to the mouth,
without any other movement of the hand than the arm at the wrist. This
is a difficult feat, but may be easily acquired by practice.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
_Walking on stilts._--Among the Swiss, and in several districts in the
South of France, walking on stilts is not only an amusing, but a useful
practice, as by means of these crane-like legs men and women transform
themselves into the order of “Waders,” emulating the long-legged storks
and herons, and can cross over marshes and flooded grounds without
wetting their feet. Stilts are easily made, being nothing but a pair of
poles, with a wooden step at the sides for the feet to stand on. The
poles are kept in their proper place by the hands. A little practice
will soon render a youth “easy on his stilts,” and they may be made an
amusing and healthy exercise.
HOCKEY.
In all the general principles, hockey bears a great resemblance to
foot-ball, the game consisting in driving a ball through a goal. The
ball, however, is of much smaller dimensions, even where a ball, and not
a bung, is used; and it is impelled, not by the foot, but by certain
sticks, or clubs, called hockeys, or hookeys, because the end with which
the ball is struck is more or less hooked.
The shape and dimensions of the hockey-stick are entirely arbitrary,
being left to the peculiar taste of the owners. Some like their hockeys
to be sharply hooked, while others prefer them merely bent over at the
end. Some players like a very thick, heavy stick, which can be put down
in front of the ball in order to neutralize the blows of the opposite
side, while others can play best with a slight and springy weapon, that
can be used with one hand, and is employed to tap the ball away just as
an opponent is about to strike, and to coax it, as it were, towards the
goal through the mass of adverse sticks.
[Illustration]
The four sticks shown in the engraving are very good samples of the
forms best adapted for use. Fig. 1 is much in favour with some players,
and is therefore given; but for our own part we never could play to our
satisfaction with it, the large and deep curve deceiving the eye and
causing the player to let the ball pass through the hook, besides
running the risk of entanglement in the opponent’s stick.
Fig. 2 is usually a favourite, but the angle of the head with the handle
is arranged according to the fancy of the player. Some like the head to
be made of horn, backed with lead like a golf-stick; but this formation
is hardly necessary, costing a rather large sum, and not conveying
correspondent advantages.
Fig. 3 is a queer and eccentric form, which is not suitable to every
player on account of its weight and generally large proportions. We
have, however, seen it employed with extraordinary effect by a player
who was accustomed to drive his opponents into a state of considerable
excitement by his faculty of stopping the ball with this overgrown
weapon, and then planting it so firmly that all the opposing sticks
could not get at the ball in spite of their battering. In this way he
would save many a game that had well-nigh been given up as hopeless, and
by thus checking the ball on its way to the goal, would give time for
his own side to come up and turn the tables. The great hooked end of
this club was bound with very strong iron wire.
The same player was equally successful with a stick the exact reverse of
the preceding, and represented as fig. 4. This was a very slight ashen
stick, with a small, but rather heavy head, so that when shaken it would
bend and spring like whalebone. This little stick was used for darting
among the struggles and clatter of contending weapons, and giving the
ball just a wee pat now and then at critical moments, so as to edge it a
little nearer the goal, and at the same time to knock it away just as
the blow of the opponent descended.
[Illustration]
The ball used for this game is sometimes an ordinary cask bung. As this
would speedily be knocked to pieces, it is generally quilted with
string, as shown in the illustration, for the better preserving its
integrity. Sooner or later, however, it goes to pieces, for the string
is sure to be cut or worn through, and the cork soon gives way. Balls,
too, are apt to get their jackets knocked off, and if struck hard will
sometimes fly in the face of a player, who cannot avoid it at so short a
distance, and do no small damage. A hollow india-rubber ball is very
good; but the best that we have yet seen, was a common globular
india-rubber bottle, such as can be procured at any stationer’s, with
the neck cut off, and partly filled up by leaving a strip of the neck
and securing it by the proper varnish.
It made a capital ball. Nothing could hurt it, and it could hurt no one.
We have had it driven into our face at two yards’ distance, and felt
little the worse for it five minutes afterwards. It would not roll very
far by itself, but required to be edged carefully by the sticks; it
never could get cut against flints, or spoiled by thorns or splinters;
it was big enough to be easily seen if knocked into a ditch or over a
hedge, and if struck into water it would not sink but come to the
surface at once, bobbing about as if to draw attention to its presence.
It remained in constant action for two years to our knowledge, had been
employed for several seasons before we made its acquaintance, and for
aught we know may be in use now. In fact, if it were only kept out of
the way of a fire or an ostrich, we know nothing that would hurt the
ball except burning or swallowing. Even in the latter case we fancy that
the ostrich would be the sufferer rather than the ball.
Having now described the instruments, we will proceed to the method of
playing the game.
As has already been mentioned, this game is in principle similar to
foot-ball. Two goals are set up, at a convenient distance from and
exactly opposite to each other, as in foot-ball. The same goals indeed
will answer as for that game, only the cross pole should be lashed to
the uprights at a much lower elevation, say three feet six inches or
four feet from the ground, and the uprights should be within six feet of
each other. Very good and simple goals can be made by taking long
osiers, willow branches or brambles, pointing the two ends, bending them
over and sticking the pointed extremities into the earth, so as to make
an arch. A peg is driven exactly half-way between the goals, goal-lines
are drawn as at foot-ball, and the ground is then laid out.
The players, having previously chosen their sides, arrange themselves
between the goals, facing each other, and always having their left sides
towards the enemy’s goal and their right towards their own. The ball is
then thrown in the air, so as to fall on or near the wooden peg, and
each party try with their sticks to drive it through the goal of the
enemy.
The rules of this fine game are few and simple.
1. The game is won by the ball passing through the enemy’s goal.
2. The ball must be struck through the goal with the stick, not thrown
or kicked.
3. Each player shall strike from right to left, and any player
infringing this rule is liable to the penalty of a blow on the shins
from any of the opposite side.
4. Each player shall remain on his own side, and if he crosses to that
of the opponents is liable to the same penalty.
5. No player shall raise the head of his stick higher than his shoulder,
on pain of the same penalty.
6. The ball may be stopped with the stick, or with any part of the
person, provided that the intervening player is on his own side.
7. If the ball be kicked or thrown through the goal, or if struck beyond
the goal-lines, it is to be fetched by the junior player of the side who
struck the last blow, and gently thrown towards the centre peg.
8. Any player wilfully striking another, except when inflicting the
penalty contained in rules 3, 4, and 5, is immediately to be excluded
from the game.
By means of these rules, the game of hockey is shorn of the danger
consequent on the loose and unrestrained play that is sometimes seen,
the sticks brandished in all directions, and the two sides so intermixed
that it is hardly possible to discriminate between them. Many a person
has been seriously damaged by such undisciplined play, and teeth have
been struck out, or even eyes lost in the contest. By strict adherence,
however, to the above rules, there is no fear of incurring any
injuries, and this really fine game is rendered as safe as it is
exciting.
As a general rule, a good player seldom if ever strikes the ball with
any violence, but keeps it well in hand, trundling it along rather than
knocking it forcibly, and endeavouring, if he finds it likely to pass
out of his control, to strike it gently towards another of his own side,
who may keep it in its course towards the enemy’s goal.
A bad player, on the contrary, rushes about without any definite
purpose, shouts continually at the top of his voice, brandishes his
stick to the danger of other persons’ eyes and the detriment of his own
hands, which are sure to be painfully blistered in half an hour, and
exhausts his strength and breath so early in the game, that he fails
just at the critical moment, and sees the ball driven past him without
being able to check it.
As a parting word of advice, let us recommend to our readers to play
this game as quietly as they can contrive to do, and as a golden rule,
always to keep the head of the hockey-stick close to the ground.
Above all, keep your temper intact, and don’t lose it even if one of
your own side should make some stupid mistake, and lose you a winning
game. Take especial care to keep strictly to the rules, and if your
opponent should break them and render himself liable to the penalty, be
merciful to his shins, and inflict the punishment as a warning to deter
from future transgression, and not as a spiteful opportunity for giving
a blow which cannot be returned.
RACKETS.
This game is not easily played without what is called a racket ground,
which consists of a large space of ground, a parallelogram, of not less
than fifty yards long, by twenty-five broad. Where such an advantage
presents itself, the game may be easily attempted. Sometimes the high
dead wall of a garden may be made into a racket wall, by fixing up some
boards and net-work along the top, supposing there is space enough
below, when the game may be played in a small way. The wall should be
painted black, and the ground be divided into four equal divisions,
which should be distinctly marked either by chipping a groove in it by a
spade, or by chalk. It is very essential, however, that the flooring of
the court should be paved. These divisions are, two close to the wall,
as A and B, and two in front of them, as C and D, which divisions are
occupied by those who play the game. The wall should be marked by a
broad line of white paint at forty-two inches from the ground, and above
this line every ball must strike. The ball is, according to law, only to
weigh one ounce, and is either white, or made so from time to time by
dipping into a bag of chalk, that it may be the better seen against the
black wall by the players. The ball is made of pure white and
tightly-sewn leather. The bat used to propel the ball is of a legal
make, and its lower end of a spoon form, over which is placed a strong
net-work of silk-wire, or catgut. The bat is called a racket.
[Illustration]
_How the game is played._--Rackets is a very simple game, and may be
played either by two or more players. When it is played by four persons,
one stands in each of the compartments, A, B, C, D; those near the wall
being called in-hand, and those furthest from it out-hand players. When
two play, each player takes two of the divisions, and the one who takes
the A first from the wall is called in-hand player, and the other
out-hand player. Having determined by lot who is to begin the game, the
in-hand player nearest the wall strikes his ball against it; if it
strikes under the line, goes over the wall, does not rebound into the
out-hand spaces, or goes beyond the racket ground, the striker is out,
and the out-hand player takes his place; but if the player is more
successful, and the ball rebounds into the out-hand spaces, and hopping
from the ground is sent back to the wall again, to rebound into one of
the in spaces, the game goes on. In a close-court game the “server” who
serves the ball properly above the line but not accurately into his
adversary’s court is allowed three trials before his “hand” is out. The
play of the game is, that the in-player should send the ball in such a
manner against the wall that, on its rebound, the opposite party, or
player, shall be able to pick it up or hit it. Whenever this happens, he
who struck the ball counts one point, or an ace, and the play is
continued until one player or party scores eleven, or, as is sometimes
and now more frequently played, fifteen.
This capital game, so conducive to health and affording such excellent
exercise, may be played either in an open court--that is, a court with
only one wall, against which the game is played--or in a closed court
which is surrounded by four walls. Sometimes a compromise is made by the
employment of the ordinary high front wall, and a smaller back wall,
omitting the side walls altogether. The closed court game is the best
and far the most scientific, but the great expense necessary for
erecting a proper court compels many to content themselves with an
ordinary old-fashioned open court game, for there seems little doubt
that the open court game is the oldest and the one which in old days was
held in highest favour.
[Illustration]
RIDING.
“Fleet as the wind, he shoots along the plain,
And knows no check, nor heeds the curbing rein;
His fiery eyeballs, formidably bright,
Dart a fierce glory, and a glowing light;
Proud with excess of life he paws the ground,
Tears up the turf, and spurns the sand around.”--_Blacklock._
A boy on horseback is a king on his throne; he feels more than “boy” the
moment he gets astride of anything in the shape of a nag. Boys have an
instinct for riding, an impulse they cannot resist, like the instinct
for eating, breathing or moving. In his earliest days, in the very
“boyhood of being,” “Ride a-cock horse to Banbury Cross” is a ditty of
infinite delight, and long before the days of corderoys the equestrian
exercise of “Grandfather’s Stick” affords him “joy ineffable.” Then
comes the noble game of Hippas, or the wooden “Bucephalus,” on which he
feels greater than Alexander; and last, though very little, yet still
not _least_, the “pet Shetland,” which adds to the bliss of being
mounted, a positive progressive locomotion, and the “greater than
Alexander” is made greater still. Considering, therefore, that all boys
love riding, it is for us to tell them how they may “mount the fiery
Pegasus,” and ride with elegance and safety,
“To witch the world with noble horsemanship.”
[Illustration: RIDING.]
THE HORSE.
The horse is one of the most beautiful and graceful animals in nature,
and perhaps the most useful to man, though in this respect it would be
difficult to say which of the four or five domesticated quadrupeds bears
the palm. During life, the horse and the dog would each contest the
point; while in relative value after death, the bullock, sheep, and
swine, are fairly entitled to an equal share with them. But there is
something very captivating in the appearance of the horse, whether used
for the purposes of war, or for racing, or for hunting, or road-work;
and in all these several capacities the readers of this book may
possibly admire him, though it is chiefly as the riding-horse, or hack,
that he usually attracts their notice.
In the animal kingdom, the horse belongs to the division VERTEBRATA, and
class MAMMALIA, he having a back-bone composed of vertebræ, and his
young being suckled. His broad and undivided hoof places him among the
_ungulata_; and lastly, his teeth are as follows, viz. six front teeth,
above and below, called “nippers;” two canine in each jaw, called
“tusks;” and the remainder, consisting of grinders, having flat surfaces
opposed to each other, with rough ridges on them, by which the grass,
hay, and corn are rubbed or ground down to a fine pulp, adapted to the
stomach. These teeth are moved or rolled on each other by a peculiar
action of the muscles of the jaw, so as to aid the process.
THE MARKS OF AGE IN THE HORSE.
By means of the gradual wearing down of the front teeth, or nippers, the
age of the horse may be known. Each of the nippers has a hollow in its
upper surface, which is very deep and black when the tooth first rises
above the gum, and is gradually effaced by the friction caused by the
cropping of the grass, or by biting at the manger, or other kinds of
rubbing; but as these vary a good deal according to circumstances, so
the precise degree of wearing away will also be liable to fluctuations;
and the rules laid down only approximate to the truth, without positive
accuracy as to a few months. There are also two sets of teeth; a milk
set, which first rise, beginning at once after birth, and a permanent
set, which replace the milk-teeth as they fall out. The milk-teeth come
up two at a time, but all are up by the end of the first year. The
permanent teeth, also, make their appearance by twos, the first pair
showing themselves in the place of the two middle milk-teeth in the
third year, and being generally level with the other milk-teeth by the
end of the fourth year, by which time the next pair have fallen out, and
the permanent teeth have shown themselves in their places. At five years
of age the horse has lost all his nippers, and his corner permanent
teeth have nearly completed their growth. The tusks are also above the
gums. The centre nippers are now much worn, and the next are becoming
slightly so. At six years old the “mark” in the centre nippers is quite
gone; at seven years of age this disappears from the next pair, and at
eight from the corner nippers; after which, none but a professed judge
is likely to make out the age of the horse by an inspection of his
mouth; and, indeed, at all times the tyro is liable to be deceived by
the frauds of the low horse-dealer, who cuts off the top of the teeth,
and then scoops out a hollow with a gouge; after which a hot iron gives
the black surface which in the natural state is presented to the eye.
This trick is called “bishoping.”
THE PACES OF THE HORSE.
The natural paces of the horse are the walk, trot, and the gallop; to
them are added by man the canter, and sometimes the amble and the run.
In the walk, each leg is taken up and put down separately, one after the
other, the print of the hind foot in good walkers generally extending a
few inches beyond that of the fore foot. The order in which the feet
touch the ground is as follows: 1st, the off fore foot; 2d, the near
hind foot; 3d, the near fore foot; and 4th, the off hind foot.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
The gallop consists of a succession of leaps, during a great part of
which all the feet are off the ground. As the feet come to the ground
they strike it in regular succession; but the exact order will depend
upon the lead, which may be either with the off or near fore leg. When
in action and the horse is leading with the off fore foot (which if
well broken he would do), the off hind and near fore feet touch the
ground simultaneously next the near hind foot, and lastly, the off fore
foot which he leads with. In the trot, the two legs of opposite sides
are moved exactly together, and touch the ground at the same moment;
whilst in the amble the two legs of _each side_ move together, and the
horse is supported for the instant upon the half of his usual and
regular foundation. To counteract this deficiency in the centre of
gravity, the body is balanced from side to side in a waddling manner.
TERMS USED BY HORSEMEN.
The left side is called the “near side,” the right the “off.” Four
inches make “a hand.” The upper part of the horse’s neck is called his
“crest;” the bony ridge in front of the saddle the “withers,” the part
between the saddle and the tail the “croup;” the bony points, one on
each side the bosom, the “shoulder points;” and the line between these
and the back of the withers, corresponding with the shoulder blade, is
the “line of the shoulder.” The body between the hip and shoulder line
is called the “middle piece.” In the fore legs, the two divisions are
called the “arm” and “cannon;” above which is the “elbow-joint,” and
between them the “knee-joint.” In the hind leg, the two parts are called
the “thigh” and “cannon;” and the joints are the “stifle” and “hock.”
Below these, in both the hind and fore legs, are the upper and lower
“pasterns,” then the “coronet,” or ring between the leg and foot, and
lastly, “the hoof.”
FORM OF THE HORSE.
It is a common observation of the horseman that the horse can go in all
forms; and this is borne out by the fact, that he does occasionally do
so; but nevertheless, it is well known, that among a large number it
will be found that those whose form is most in accordance with the shape
considered the best by good judges, will turn out the best movers. In
technical language, the horse whose “points” are the best will be the
best horse. These points are considered to be: a neat head well set on a
lean wiry neck, the latter with a very gentle curve, whose convexity
looks upwards (the opposite form to this makes the “ewe neck”);
moderately high withers; a sloping shoulder, wide in the blade, which
should be well furnished with muscles; strong muscular loins; a croup
not too straight nor too drooping, with the tail set on with an elegant
sweep; ribs well rounded, and carried back near to the hips, so as to
make the horse what is called “well ribbed;” circumference or girth of
good dimensions, indicating plenty of “bellows’ room;” thighs and arms
muscular; hocks and knees bony and large, without being diseased; cannon
bones large and flat, with the suspensory ligament and tendon large,
strong, and clearly defined; fetlock joints strong, but not round and
inflamed. The eye should be full, clear, and free from specks; and the
ears should be moderately small and erect; the feet should be round, and
not contracted at the heels, with a well-formed frog.
VARIETIES OF THE HORSE SUITABLE FOR BOYS.
Besides the several kinds of horses suitable for grown people, those for
boys are the galloway, the cob, and the pony. The first of these may be
considered either a small horse or a large pony, and is usually about
fourteen hands high; and though strong and capable of carrying weight,
yet of a moderately light and active make. He is so called from the
district where he was originally bred in large numbers. The cob is a
thick and very strong pony, or galloway, frequently made to look still
more so by cutting his tail and mane short, called “hogging” them,
thus--
[Illustration]
Correctly speaking, a pony is understood to be under thirteen hands in
height, a galloway between thirteen and fourteen and a half, anything
over that a horse.
Many ponies are now bred almost of pure Arabian blood, and they are well
suited for lads who have mastered the early difficulties connected with
keeping the seat under all ordinary circumstances; but as they are
generally very high-spirited, they are scarcely suited for the beginner,
and he had better content himself with an animal of more plebeian
pedigree and sluggish temperament.
THE ACCOUTREMENTS AND AIDS
Required by the young amateur, are either a pad or saddle, according to
his age, together with a bridle and a whip or stick. Spurs are seldom
desirable for any but the accomplished rider, as they are apt to
irritate the pony if not used with discretion, and it is rather
difficult to put an old head upon young shoulders. If the learner is
very young, a pad which is made without any tree affords a better hold
for the knees than a regular saddle, and will also enable him to ride
without stirrups, which feat he will hardly manage on an ordinary smooth
saddle. The stirrups are of the following form, but are often, for boys,
made much lighter. They ought always to be used with strong stirrup
leathers, and these should be attached to the saddle by spring-bars,
which release the stirrups in case of the leg being entangled in them
after a fall. The groom should always remove the leathers after the
ride, and replace them on the opposite side of the saddle, by which
means their tendency to hang as shown at (_a_), is rectified, and they
assume the position indicated by the one marked (_b_), both representing
the left, or near, side.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
The bridle is either a single or a double-reined one, according to the
mouth of the pony ridden. A single-reined bridle is usually a snaffle,
it being very improper to allow any one to ride with a curb alone,
unless he has very steady and light hands. The snaffle bit is merely a
jointed bar of iron (5 5) in the accompanying sketch, but when used
alone it has a light cross-bar as well as the ring there shown, in order
to prevent the bit being pulled through the mouth. This, however, in the
double-reined bridle is omitted, since it would interfere with the
action of the curb. Snaffles are either smooth or twisted, and are made
of all sizes, the smallest being only adapted for occasional use, and
not for the hands of the learner, who should have a large smooth one.
The curb-bit consists of three parts; the mouthpiece (1), which usually
has a bend in it called the port, for the purpose of pressing against
the roof of the mouth; secondly, of the cheek-piece (2), which has a
ring (3) at the lower end for the attachment of the rein, and another at
the upper end for the head-piece of the bridle; and thirdly, the
curb-chain (4). This chain is pressed against the outside of the lower
jaw, by the upper arm of the curb used as a lever, and it should be
hooked up sufficiently tight to act upon it by pulling the rein, whilst
at the same time it should be loose enough to prevent its fretting the
jaw. This delicacy of adjustment requires some little practice, and the
young rider should always ask his teacher to show him the proper mode of
applying the curb-chain. Sometimes a martingale is needed, in order to
keep the pony’s head down, but generally the young rider is better
without it, if he will keep his hands well down, and avoid all jerking
of the mouth.
MOUNTING.
[Illustration]
The rider, even at the earliest age, should first examine the girths and
the bridle, and see if they are properly adjusted; for though when
leaving home he may be able to depend upon a steady and experienced
groom, yet, after putting up at strange stables, he is liable to be led
into an accident by careless servants, and therefore it is better to get
into the habit of always inspecting these essentials to safety and
comfort. If there is an attendant groom, he should hold the rein with
his right hand, standing by the off shoulder of the horse, so as with
his left hand to hold the stirrup iron for the rider’s right foot as he
throws it over the horse’s back. The next thing to be done is for the
rider to stand at the shoulder of the pony with his left side towards
that part. He then lays hold of the reins with his left hand, drawing
them up so short as to feel the mouth, and at the same time twisting a
lock of the mane in his fingers so as to steady the hand. Next, the left
foot is placed in the stirrup when the accompanying attitude is
presented, exactly as here shown. At this moment a spring is given from
the right foot, the right hand reaches the cantle of the saddle, and the
body is raised till the right leg is brought up to the level of the
left, when the slightest imaginable pause is made, and then the right
leg is thrown over the back of the pony, keeping the toe down and heel
elevated, or with the spur on mischief may happen, while the right hand
leaves its hold, and the body falls into its position in the centre of
the saddle; after which, the right foot has only to be placed in the
stirrup to complete the act of mounting.
DISMOUNTING
[Illustration]
Is exactly the reverse of the last process, and requires, first, the
reins to be shortened and held in the left hand with a lock of the mane;
secondly, the right leg is taken out of the stirrup, and is thrown over
the back of the horse until it is brought down to the level of the other
leg. After this, if the pony is of a small size, suitable to that of the
rider, the body is gently lowered to the ground, and the left leg is
liberated from the stirrup; but if the horse is too high for this, the
foot is taken out of the stirrup by raising the body by means of the
hands on the pommel and cantle of the saddle, and then the body is
lowered to the ground by their assistance.
[Illustration]
THE MANAGEMENT OF THE REINS
Is of great importance to the comfort of the rider, and also to his
appearance, for unless they are held properly, the body is sure to be
awkwardly balanced. When the single rein is used, the best position is
to place the middle, ring, and little fingers between the two reins, and
then to turn both over the fore-finger, where they are tightly held by
the thumb. In all cases the thumb ought to point towards the horse’s
ears, by which the elbow is sure to be kept in its place close to the
side, and a good command of the reins is insured. If a double-reined
bridle is employed, the middle finger separates the two snaffle reins,
and the little one those attached to the curb, all being turned over the
fore-finger, and firmly held by the thumb. In both cases the ends of the
reins are turned over the left, or near, side of the pony’s shoulder.
When it is intended to turn the horse to the left, it is only necessary
to raise the thumb towards the chest of the rider; and on the contrary,
when the desire is to turn him to the right, the little finger is turned
downwards and backwards towards the fork. In many well-broken ponies the
mere moving of the whole hand to the right or left is sufficient, which,
by pressing the reins against the neck, indicates the wish of the rider,
and is promptly responded to by the handy pony. This action, however, is
objected to by some good horsemen, though, in my opinion, most
erroneously, as it is capable of being made highly effective in
practice.
[Illustration]
THE SEAT
Should always be square to the front, without either shoulder being in
advance; the loins moderately arched inwards without stiffness; the
elbows close to the side, but held easily; the knees placed upon the
padded part of the flat _in front_ of the stirrup-leathers; toes turned
very slightly outwards, and the foot resting on the stirrup, the inside
of which should be opposite the ball of the great toe, and the outside
corresponding with the little toe. In hunting, however, it may be placed
“home,” that is, with the stirrup close to the instep. The heel should
be well lowered as far as possible beneath the level of the toe, which
gives a firm seat. But the great point is to obtain a good grasp of the
saddle by the knees, which should be always ready to lay hold like a
vice, without however constantly tiring the muscles by such an effort.
The left hand is now to be held very slightly above the pommel of the
saddle, and the right easily by the side of it, with the whip held in a
slanting position, as at page 273, in which however both hands are much
too high above the withers. In order to show the effect of an incorrect
mode of holding the reins, the rider has only to place his hands with
the knuckles in a horizontal position, and the elbow is sure to be
turned out in a most awkward manner.
THE CONTROL OF THE HORSE
Is effected by the reins, heels, voice, and whip, variously used
according to his disposition and temper. Some require only the most
gentle usage, which in fact is almost always the most efficacious,
especially by young people, for whom the horse and dog seem to have an
especial affection, and to be always more ready to obey them than might
be expected, when their want of strength to enforce their wishes is
considered. The young rider will therefore generally find it to his own
interest, as well as that of the noble animal he bestrides, to use his
whip and heel as little as possible, and to effect his object solely by
his voice and the gentlest pressure of the bit. In this way the most
high-couraged horses are kept in order by young lads in the racing
stables, and the amateur will do well to follow their example. It is
astonishing how fond horses and dogs are of being talked to by their
juvenile masters, and it is right to gratify their love of society by so
doing on all occasions. The reins serve, as already explained, to turn
to the right or left, or by drawing tight to stop the horse, and on the
contrary, by relaxing them to cause him to proceed, aided if necessary
by the voice, heel, or whip. When it is desired that the right leg
should lead in the canter or gallop, the left rein is pulled and the
left leg pressed against the flank, by which means the body of the pony
is made to present the right side obliquely forwards, and by consequence
the right leg leads off. On the other hand, if it is wished to lead with
the left leg, or to change from the right, the right rein is pulled, the
right leg pressed to the side, and then the left shoulder looks forwards
and the left leg leads off.
MANAGEMENT OF THE WALK.
When it is wished to make the pony walk, he must be quieted down by
soothing him with the voice if he has been excited by the gallop or
trot; and then, by sitting very quietly in the saddle, and loosing the
reins as much as will allow the head to nod in unison with the action of
the body and legs, the walk is generally at once fallen into, and there
is no farther difficulty except to prevent a stumble. A tight rein is
not desirable in this pace, since it prevents that liberty of action
which is required, and leads to a short walk, or very often a jog-trot;
and yet there should be such a gentle hold, or preparation for a hold
rather, as will suffice to check the mouth in case of a mistake. This is
a very difficult art to acquire, and is only learnt by long practice;
but as few ponies fall at this pace, great liberty may generally be
allowed to their mouths. Besides this, little is necessary, more than to
sit steadily, _but not stiffly_, in the saddle, and not to sway about
more than is sufficient to avoid the appearance of having swallowed a
poker.
THE TROT AND CANTER
Are effected by rather different methods, but both require a very steady
hand, and a quiet treatment. In order to cause the pony to trot, the
reins are taken rather short in the hand, and the mouth is held somewhat
firmly, but taking great care not to jerk it. The animal is then
slightly stimulated by the voice, and the body, if necessary, rises from
the saddle, as in the trot, so as to indicate what is wanted. This
seldom fails to effect the purpose, and the horse at once breaks into a
trot; or, if very irritable, he may be compelled to do so by laying hold
of an ear and twisting it, to avoid which he drops his head, and trots
as a natural consequence. The canter is also an acquired pace, and for
its due performance a curb-bridle is required. In order to make the pony
begin this pace, the left rein is pulled, and the rider’s left leg
pressed against the side, by which the horse’s right leg is made to lead
off, this being the most usual, and certainly the most comfortable
“lead” for the rider. The hands must make a very gentle and steady pull
on the curb-rein, and the body generally must be very quiet in the
saddle, whilst, at the same time, a very gentle stimulus is given by
the voice, which must be repeated at short intervals, or the canter will
be changed to a trot, or walk, both of which are preferred to it by most
ponies and horses. Young riders should avoid cantering long upon one
leg, as it leads to inflammation of the joints, and they should either
change the lead or alter the pace to a trot or walk.
[Illustration]
THE MANAGEMENT OF THE GALLOP
Requires little instruction, practice being the main agent in effecting
a good seat during this pace. The seat is either close to the saddle,
with the body inclining backwards (p. 275), or standing in the stirrups,
in which position the knees and calves only touch the saddle, and the
body is bent forwards over the withers (p. 273). It should be the
endeavour of the rider, while he bends his shoulders forwards, to throw
his loins well back, so as to avoid straining the horse’s fore-quarters,
by bearing too much weight upon them. This is done by the hold of the
knees on the saddle, and by keeping the feet back, also by rounding the
loins backwards, and thus throwing the centre of gravity as far as
possible behind the stirrup leathers. The object of standing in the
stirrups is to save the horse when at his full gallop, as in racing, or
in hunting, when he is going over ploughed ground or up hill. In either
of these cases, this attitude allows the horse to exert himself without
feeling the weight of the rider impede his movements more than can be
avoided.
LEAPING
Is only an extra exertion added to the ordinary spring of the gallop,
the attitude being exactly the same. It is best learnt by beginning with
small ditches, which the rider is soon able to clear without difficulty.
He may next try sheep-hurdles, or very low stiles; but the latter being
strong and firmly fixed, are dangerous to the rider, unless the pony is
very sure of clearing them. A leaping-bar, if procurable, should always
be adopted in preference to either, as a fall over it is not attended
with any bad consequences. The groom should place it at the lowest
notch, and the pony then may be suffered to clear it at a moderate
gallop; after which, if the young rider is able to sit pretty closely,
he may be indulged with a higher notch, and gradually it may be raised
until the limits of the pony’s powers are reached. In riding at a bar,
the learner should lay hold of a snaffle-rein in each hand, taking care
to keep them close together, by the right rein being held also in the
left hand. The pony is then to be urged to a smart canter or hand
gallop, and held straight to the bar in this way, so that he is obliged
to leap; or if disliking the act, being urged by the whip down the
shoulder, or the spur, or the groom’s voice and whip behind. Young
riders, however, should never be put upon a bad or reluctant leaper, but
should be taught upon one which is fond of the amusement. At the moment
of rising into the air for the leap the reins are relaxed, but should
not be left quite loose; while the pony is in the air the body becomes
upright, and as he descends it leans well back, until, after a high
leap, it almost touches the croup. During this period the reins should
be suffered to remain nearly loose, the hand barely feeling the mouth;
but as the pony reaches the ground a stronger hold is taken, in order to
guard against a mistake, which might require the aid of the rider to
prevent a fall. It is not that he can keep the animal up, but that he
checks him, and makes him exert himself in a double degree. There are
various kinds of leaping; as the flying leap, the standing leap, the
leap in hand, &c. The flying leap is merely one taken at a fast pace,
and when the rider can maintain a good seat in the gallop, it is the
easiest of all to sit. The standing leap is effected from a state of
quiescence, and is much more difficult to sit, because the horse rises
and falls more suddenly and abruptly. Between the two is the slow or
steady leap, which is only effected safely by the clever hunter or
well-broken pony; but when perfect it is almost as smooth as a
rocking-horse. This is the mode in which the young rider should be
taught to leap. Leaping in hand is necessary for most ponies in the
hunting field, which would otherwise never be able to compete with
full-sized hunters in the way they do. The young hunter, when he meets
with a gate or other strong fence, which he knows is too much for the
powers of his pony, at once gets off and leads him over by the rein; and
when well taught, these little creatures will often tilt themselves over
high timber, &c. in a marvellously clever manner, so that I have known
them in this way obtain a good place in long and severe runs. If,
therefore, my readers are allowed to partake in this exciting sport
during their Christmas holidays, they should teach their ponies to leap
in hand, or they will be sure to be thrown out.
[Illustration]
TREATMENT OF VICES.
The chief vices which are met with among ponies are--1st, Obstinate
Stopping; 2d, Stumbling from Carelessness; 3d, Rearing; 4th, Kicking;
5th, Shying; and 6th, Running Away.
[Illustration]
_Obstinate Stopping_, which in its worst forms is called “jibbing,” is a
very troublesome vice, and even in the saddle is sometimes attended with
danger, whilst in driving it is so to a dreadful degree.
The rider should never attempt to force his pony forward with the whip
or spur, which only aggravates the bad-tempered brute; but should
patiently sit quiet in the saddle, and keep his temper, until the pony
chooses to move forward again. In this way sometimes very vicious
animals are cured when they find that their stable is not the sooner
reached by their device; on the other hand, if the whip is used, the
pony, especially if of Welsh breed, is very apt to lie down and roll his
rider in the dirt, or even sometimes to bolt into a river, or pond, and
leave him in danger of his life. My young friends will therefore
remember my advice when being mounted upon an obstinate pony, and having
lost their tempers, they have proceeded to use their whips, and are
bemired or half drowned in consequence.
_Stumbling_ is more a defect of conformation than a vice; but
nevertheless, it greatly depends upon a want of spirit to keep up a
steady action of the fore legs. It often happens that a pony trots along
for a mile or two safely enough; but after going that distance he
becomes lazy and careless, and trips with one foot and then with the
other, a sure prelude to such a fall as the following, which would be a
very bad one, and sufficient to cut both knees to the bone, and to cause
serious damage to the rider. The only way to avoid such accidents is to
keep the pony at a steady pace, fast enough to keep him alive, but not
enough so to tire him. Loose stones and broken ground should be avoided,
and a careful hold should be kept upon the mouth, without being so tight
as to gag it. When a stumble actually takes place, the body should be
well thrown back and the mouth forcibly jerked, so as to make the pony
exert himself to keep his legs. An unsafe animal of this kind is,
however, wholly unfit for young riders, and they should never be allowed
to ride one.
[Illustration]
_Rearing_ is a very dangerous vice, and not very common among ponies
after they are once broken in. If the rider should, however, be placed
upon a rearer, he should be careful to avoid hanging upon the bit when
he rises in the air, but on the contrary should loose the reins
entirely, and clasp the neck, if the pony should rise very high in the
air. The accompanying sketch shows this vice in a very trifling degree,
and in such a case the seat thus represented is sufficiently forward to
prevent accidents.
[Illustration]
The rider will, however, observe that the reins are quite loose. It
often happens that this vice is produced by too tight and severe a curb
in a tender mouth, and that upon changing the bit, or letting out the
curb chain, the tendency to rise is entirely gone. Whenever, therefore,
the young rider finds his pony inclined to rear, let him look well to
his bit, and at once drop the curb rein if he has one. If, however, he
has only a snaffle, he may rest assured that it is a regular habit, and
at once make up his mind either to battle with it or to change his pony.
[Illustration]
_Kicking_ is much more common among ponies than rearing, and very many
of these little animals are given to practise it. It is perhaps partly
owing to the teasing of their young masters that it is so common; but
whatever the cause, there can be no doubt that it is too prevalent among
them. Sometimes it exists as a regular attempt to unhorse the rider,
which is a very troublesome habit, and one very difficult to break,
because it so often succeeds that the pony is tempted to try again. When
this vice is met with, the rider should do all in his power to keep his
pony’s head up, by jerking the bit, and at the same time he should sit
well back, with his feet well forwards, with heels down, and trust to
his knees in holding on. When kicking is only the result of high spirits
and “freshness,” the best remedy is a smart gallop, which soon stops all
these pranks, and makes the most riotous animal quiet.
_Shying_ is also very common among ponies, and in them is often the
result of cunning, which leads them to pretend a greater degree of
shyness than they really possess. The best mode of treatment is to take
as little notice as possible of the shying, but carefully to make the
pony pass the object at which he is looking, without regarding how this
is effected. The whip should seldom be used at all, and never _after_
the object is passed.
_Bolting, or Running Away_, is often the result of want of exercise, but
sometimes it is a systematic vice. A powerful bit and a steady seat,
with good hands, are the best means of grappling with this habit, which
is sometimes a very dangerous one. If the pony really runs away, the
rider should not pull dead at his mouth, but should relax his hold for a
short time, and then take a sharp pull, which is often effectual. A good
gallop until he is tired will often cure a runaway for the rest of his
life. There are a variety of bits intended expressly to counteract this
vice, such as the Hanoverian Pelham, the curb with a high port, &c.; but
nothing is perfectly effectual where there is a determination to run
away. A nose-band has lately been invented for the purpose, which
answers better than anything hitherto brought out; it consists of a long
nose-band which crosses behind the jaw and then hooks on to the bit in
the same way as the ordinary curb-chain. When the rein is pulled hard,
this nose-band is drawn tight round the jaw, by which the mouth is
closed, and the port is pressed strongly against the roof of the mouth,
causing a great degree of pain, sufficient to stop most horses. This
powerful remedy, which has been named the Bucephalus nose-band, should
not lightly be used; but in the case of a runaway horse, or pony, it is
the only really efficacious one.
[Illustration]
ROWING.
“A boat, a boat, is the toy for me,
To rollic about in on river and sea;
To be a child of the breeze and the gale,
And like a wild bird on the deep to sail,
This is the life for me!”--_Procter._
HISTORICAL MEMORANDA.
The sea service is the glory of Old England, notwithstanding all the
glorious land service of ancient and modern days. A country having
nearly ten thousand miles of sea-coast, with numerous ports, harbours,
estuaries, river mouths, and capacious bays, must ever be a maritime
nation, and look for its supremacy to the sea--to her sons being
amphibious; and nothing is better calculated to develop the inherent
instinct for sea duties than the amusements of boating, of rowing, of
sailing, and other aquatic sports. Every young gentleman in England
should know how to manage a boat, and to sail a cutter; and it will be
our duty to initiate him into the methods of doing so.
The origin of ships must be traced to the ark of Noah; but this was not
a sailing or a rowing vessel, but simply a large floating house or
receptacle for Noah and his family, and the various types of animated
nature. The first navigators were the Phœnicians, who sailed in various
seas. They were succeeded by the ships of Carthage, Egypt, Venice,
Genoa, Holland, and Portugal. The Saxons under Alfred, and the Danes
under Canute, had formidable navies. Alfred, who ascended the throne in
872, commenced the first English fleet in person, and is said to have
suggested a variety of improvements in the structure, as well as greatly
to have increased the size of the vessels, some of the largest of which
carried sixty oars. After the death of Alfred, the naval power of
England seems to have lain dormant; and this, no doubt, tempted the
Norman invasion in 1066, under William the Bastard, who sailed for the
coast of England with a fleet of 900 vessels; and so sensible was he of
the importance of the naval service, that he gave certain privileges to
certain towns on the sea-coast, which were from their number called the
Cinque Ports. Richard I. fitted out large fleets; and his successor,
John, asserted the exclusive right of the English nation to the dominion
of the seas. The reign of Edward I. was also distinguished for successes
at sea. Henry VII., on gaining the throne, in 1485, put the navy into a
respectable condition; and a large ship, called the “Great Harry,” which
may properly be termed the first _ship_ of the British navy, was built
at a cost of 14,000_l._ The discovery of America, about the period of
the accession of Henry VIII., gave a new stimulus to our navy, and many
ships were then built of large tonnage, some of a thousand tons. But
Queen Elizabeth, deeply impressed with the maxim, that “whosoever
commands the sea, commands the trade of the world,” and that “whosoever
commands the trade, commands the riches of the world,” and consequently
the world itself, so encouraged and restored the marine, that she may be
called the “Restorer of the naval power of England;” and, in a few years
after, the invasion of the Spanish Armada put our naval power to the
proof. Charles I., the great and courageous Cromwell, and even the
pleasure-loving Charles II., were all impressed with the great
advantages of a formidable navy; and in the reign of Anne, fifty-two
French ships, containing more than 3,000 guns, were captured. And during
the reign of George III. the naval superiority was placed by a series of
glorious successes beyond all dispute; and it is to be hoped that the
reign of our beloved Queen Victoria, who is herself a sailor, and full
of every generous aspiration that belongs to a British Tar, will,
notwithstanding the “mistakes of the Admiralty,” prove that England
still retains the sovereignty of the ocean, and on that element she will
defy the world.
CONSTRUCTION OF ANCIENT SHIPS AND GALLEYS.
The Egyptian vessels are the earliest of which any well-authenticated
graphic illustration has been preserved. We here give a view of one of
their earliest sailing vessels. The celebrated Egyptian vessel called
the “Isis” is said to have been in length 180 feet, in breadth 45 feet,
and in height, from the upper edge of the deck to the bottom of the
well, 43 feet. The well-known ship of Hiero, king of Syracuse, was
nearly 400 tons burden.
[Illustration]
ROMAN GALLEYS, SHIPS, ETC.
[Illustration]
They were in length about 125 feet, and in breadth 10 feet. Their first
requisite was swiftness, and no part of the side was left vacant where
an oar could be put out; hence they had often three banks of oars, one
above the other. In most ancient ships, there was placed at the prow an
image called “the sign.” The part of the vessel that cut the water was
called the “goose.” At the stern, which generally resembled a shield,
was set or some way delineated a representation of the deity to whose
tutelary favour the ship was committed, and to which daily prayer and
sacrifice were offered. War ships were chiefly rowed with oars, that
they might be able to tack about. The first long ships were rowed with
fifty oars, but afterwards a larger number was used. In the more perfect
condition of ancient navigation, there were some ships that had as many
as five tiers of oars, and three hundred rowers. Two large holes at the
prow of the vessel, occasionally used for oars, were called the ship’s
“eyes;” and a wooden projection at the prow, covered with brass, was
called a “beak;” and pieces of wood placed on each side of the prow of a
vessel, to ward off the force of the enemy’s beak, were called the
ship’s “ears.” Over these vessels were certain raised platforms, and on
their forecastles were towers on which the soldiers stood, whose shields
were usually hung upon the railings which begirt the ship. The sides of
the prow were called “cheeks.” The anchors at first used were often
large stones, or even bags of sand; afterwards, however, the ancient
ships carried anchors with one, two, and four flukes. The larger anchor
was called the “sacred anchor,” and reserved for the most trying
occasions. Among the ancients, ships were usually termed “horses,” which
explains many ancient fables. The elder Pliny, for instance, tells us of
a boy who was carried by water some miles every day on the back of a
dolphin to school; the vessel, in all probability, having a dolphin at
the prow. Arion, the famous musician of Lesbos, having made great wealth
in foreign parts by his profession, was returning home by ship, when the
sailors resolved to kill him, and seize upon his riches. Playing once
again, at his last request, a favourite tune, he leaped into the sea. A
dolphin, attracted by his melody, received him safely on its back, and
carried him again to the coast where Periander lived. Arion, doubtless,
escaped by a boat, the fore-part of which consisted of a dolphin.
Having thus given the young reader a notion of ancient boats and ships,
we shall now proceed to make him acquainted with the modern practices of
rowing, boating, sailing, &c.
OF BOATS.
A _Boat_ is properly a vessel propelled by oars. In a more extensive
sense the word is applied to other small vessels, which differ in
construction and name, according to the services in which they are
employed. Thus they are light or strong, sharp or flat-bottomed, open or
decked, according as they are intended for swiftness or burden, deep or
shallow water, &c.
The _Barge_ is a long, light, narrow boat, employed in harbours, and
unfit for sea. The _Long Boat_ is the largest boat belonging to a ship,
generally furnished with two sails, and is employed for cruising short
distances, bringing the cargo and bales on board, &c.
The _Launch_ is more flat-bottomed than the long boat, which it has
generally superseded. The _Pinnace_ resembles the barge, but is smaller.
The _Cutters_ of a ship are broader and deeper than the barge or
pinnace, and are employed in carrying light articles, single passengers,
&c. on board.
_Yawls_ are used for similar purposes to the barge and pinnace. A _Gig_
is a long, narrow boat, used for expedition, and rowed with six or eight
oars. The _Jolly Boat_ is smaller than a yawl, and is used for going on
shore. A merchant ship seldom has more than two boats,--a long boat and
a yawl.
A _Wherry_ is a light, sharp boat, used in a river or harbour for
transporting passengers. A _Punt_ is a flat-bottomed boat, chiefly used
for fishing on a fresh water river. A _Skiff_ is a small sharp-nosed
boat, used in rivers. A _Dingy_ is a very small stiff boat used by
yachts. A _Yacht_ is a pleasure sailing-boat. A _Lugger_ is a boat
which is furnished with sails of a peculiar cut. A _Funny_ is a small
light boat used in river rowing, and made with her bow and stern nearly
alike.
THE COMPONENT PARTS OF BOATS.
[Illustration]
Rowing boats consist of the bows (1); the stem, or entrance (2); the
stern (8), where are the rudder and the lines for steering; the rowlocks
(3), for giving purchase to the oars; and the thwarts, or seats (4). At
the bottom are the foot-boards (5), which are easily removed, in order
to bail out any water which may leak into the boat. Besides these parts
there is a board placed across the boat for the feet of the rower,
called a stretcher. The whole boat is composed of one or more planks,
called streaks, nailed upon a light oak framework, called the timbers,
or ribs; and the upper streak, upon which the rowlocks are placed, is
called the wale-streak. Boats with two rowlocks opposite each other are
called sculling boats, and are propelled by a pair of light oars called
sculls, the art being called “sculling.” When a boat is fitted with a
pair of rowlocks not opposite each other, it is called a pair-oared
boat. If with two in the middle opposite each other, and two others, one
before and the other behind, but not opposite each other, it is called a
_randan_. When a boat has four rowlocks, none of which are opposite one
another, it is called a four-oared boat, and so on up to ten oars, which
is the utmost limit in common use for any kind of boat but the pleasure
barge, which sometimes has twenty-four oars, as in the City barges of
London. The rowlock nearest the bow is called the bow rowlock, or No. 1;
the next No. 2, and so on; and the oars used in them receive the same
number, the one nearest the stern being called the “stroke oar.” The
rowlocks in river and sea boats are somewhat different in shape though
identical in principle, both consisting of a square space of about the
breadth of a man’s hand, and both lying on the wale-streak; but in river
boats being generally bounded before and behind by a flat piece of oak
or ash called, respectively, the thowl-pin and stopper; whilst in sea
boats they are merely common round wooden pins dropped into holes made
in the wale-streak, but still receiving the same names. The thowl-pin is
for the purpose of pulling the oar against, whilst the stopper prevents
the oar from slipping forwards when the rower is pushing it in that
direction after the stroke.
THE OARS AND SCULLS.
[Illustration]
A scull is a small oar used with one hand, and requiring a pair, as in
the case of oars, one being placed in the rowlock on each side the boat,
and the pair being used by one person with his right and left hands.
Oars are used by both hands, and a pair-oared boat consequently requires
two oarsmen; a four-oared boat four, and so on. Both sculls and oars
consist of the same parts, except that the handle of the _oar_ is made
long enough for both hands, as at (_b_). In every case there is a
rounded handle (_a b_), a loom, square in form, and extending from the
handle to the button, or about one-third of the length of the oar; and
beyond the button is the blade, which is first nearly round, and then
gradually widens, until it assumes the form best adapted for laying hold
of the water, which is now found to be broad rather than long, as was
formerly thought to be desirable. The button is a piece of leather
nailed on to prevent the oar from slipping through the rowlock, but only
used in river rowing, as it is not adapted for the rough work which is
often met with in sea rowing.
SEA ROWING.
This is necessarily less elegant than river rowing, because of the rough
nature of the element on which the exercise is pursued. The oar must be
held firmly in the hands, the inside hand being placed at (_b_), and the
outside at (_a_), and both hands grasping the oar between the thumbs and
fingers. The whole art consists in the crew moving backwards and
forwards together, called “swinging,” and laying hold of the water as
well as they can, taking care to avoid pulling in the air with great
force when there is a trough or interval between two waves, and on the
other hand equally avoiding a heavy wave, which has a tendency to dash
the oar out of the hand. All this requires practice in the rowers, and
also in the steersman, called the coxswain, who should watch for the
high waves, and warn his men when a heavy one is coming. He should also
take care to cross the roll of the sea as much as possible, so as to
avoid being struck on the side of the boat called “the counter,” which
would either swamp her, or else knock the oars out of the rowlocks. In
this kind of rowing, the “feathering” of the oar, to be presently
described, is not attempted, on account of the roughness of the water,
but it merely is pulled steadily, but strongly, backwards, and is then
pushed forwards in the rowlocks.
RIVER ROWING.
The art of river rowing is capable of a high degree of elegance, and few
sights are more pleasing to a lover of graceful forms than that of a
crew of fine lads, or young men, rowing well together and in good style.
To do this requires great practice, and attention to a few essential
points, which I will here endeavour to describe.
MANAGEMENT OF THE OAR.
The rower should, as far as possible, take some good oarsman for his
model, and endeavour to imitate him in every respect, which is the only
mode of acquiring a good style. Description is useful in putting the
learner in the way of acquiring what is to be taught, but it is not
all-sufficient for the purpose. In the first place, the learner should
place himself square on the seat, with his feet straight before him, and
the toes slightly turned out. The knees may either be kept together, in
the Newcastle or Clasper style, or separated considerably, as practised
generally in England, the latter being in my opinion the better mode, as
it allows the body to come more forward over the knees. The feet are to
be placed firmly against the stretcher, which is to be let out or
shortened, to suit the length of the individual; and one foot may be
placed in the strap which is generally attached to the stretcher in
modern boats. The oar is then taken in hand, raising it by the handle,
and then either at once placing it in the rowlock, or else first
dropping it flat on the water, and then raising the handle it may gently
be lowered to its place. The outside hand is placed upon the handle at
(_a_), with the thumb as well as the fingers above it, while the other
hand firmly grasps it lower down at (_b_), keeping the nut towards the
person. The arms are now quickly thrust forward till they are quite
straight at the elbows, _after which_ the back follows them by bending
forward at the hips, carefully avoiding any roundness of the shoulders.
When the hands have reached their full stretch they are raised, and the
blade quietly and neatly dropped into the water; immediately after
which, and with the water just covering the blade, the body is brought
back with a graceful yet powerful action, till it reaches a part a
little behind the perpendicular of the back of the seat, when the hands
are brought back to the ribs, the elbows gliding close by the hips; and
at the last moment, as the hand touches the rib, the wrist of the inside
hand is depressed, the knuckles being at the same time brought against
the chest, and the oar is made to rotate in the rowlock, which is called
“feathering” it, and by which it is brought cleanly out of the water.
The next action is to push the oar rapidly forward again, first however
restoring it to its original position in the rowlock, which is effected
by raising the wrist, and then darting the arms forward till the elbows
are quite straight, which brings the rower to where we started from in
the description. In “backing water” the reverse of these actions takes
place. The oar is first reversed in the rowlock, and then it is _pushed_
through the water with as much power as is needed, and _pulled_ through
the air. When the oars on one side are pulled, and those on the other
are backed, the boat is made to turn on its own water. “Holding water”
is effected by the oars being held in the position of backing without
moving them.
THE ESSENTIAL POINTS IN ROWING.
1st. To straighten the arms before bending the body forward; 2d, to drop
the oar cleanly into the water; 3d, to draw it straight through at the
same depth; 4th, to feather neatly, and without bringing the oar out
before doing so; 5th, to use the back and shoulders freely, keeping the
arms as straight as possible; and 6th, to keep the eyes fixed upon the
rower before them, avoiding looking out of the boat, by which means the
body is almost sure to swing backwards and forwards in a straight line.
MANAGEMENT OF THE BOAT.
Every boat without a rudder is manœuvred in the water, either by pulling
both sides alike, in which case it progresses in a straight line, or by
reversing the action of the oars, equally on both sides, pushing them
through the water instead of pulling them, and called backing water,
when the boat recedes; or by pulling one side only, on which the boat
describes a segment of a circle, which is made smaller by pulling one
oar, and backing the other. By means of a rudder the boat is made to
take a certain course, independent of the rowers, called “steering,” the
chief art in which consists in keeping the rudder as still as possible,
by holding the lines “taut,” and avoiding pulling them from one side to
the other more than is absolutely necessary. Some steersmen think it
necessary to swing backwards and forwards with a great effort, but this
is quite useless, and the more still they keep the better. Every
coxswain should know the course of the stream or tide; and when meeting
other boats he should, if he is going down stream, give them the side
nearest the shore, so as to allow them the advantage of the slack water,
which is quite prejudicial to him. When a crew are steered by a
competent coxswain, they ought to be perfectly obedient to his commands,
rowing exactly as he tells them. His orders are communicated by the
following words, viz. when desiring his crew to row he says, “Pull all;”
or if wishing any one oar to be pulled, he says “Pull bow,” or “Pull,
No. 3,” or 4, &c. as the case may be. If they are to stop rowing, he
says “Easy all,” or for any one oar, “Easy bow,” or No. 2. The same kind
of order is conveyed when “backing” or “holding water” is desired; the
only variation, as before, being between confining his order to any one
or more oars, or extending it to all. In this way all the evolutions
practicable on the water are managed, and the coxswain has complete
control over the boat, being able to cause her to be rowed slowly or
quickly, or to be stopped, backed, or turned on her own centre.
ROWING TOGETHER
Is of the utmost importance to the success of a boat when she is manned
by a crew; and they should all endeavour to attain the same style as the
“stroke-oar,” who should be the best in the boat, and as free from
faults as possible. In a four or eight-oared boat, every one of the crew
would do well to imitate his stroke by rowing with him occasionally in a
pair-oared boat, or else, if this is not practicable, by pulling behind
a waterman who rows in the same style as the stroke-oar. In this way an
uniform kind of rowing is attained, and the boat is propelled equally by
all at the same time. The great object is for all to lay hold of the
water at the same moment, and pull their oars through it and out with
the same power and at the same time; this is called “keeping stroke.”
“Keeping time” means, all “feathering” the oar together, by which the
peculiar click of the oars in the rowlocks is made exactly at the same
instant. When this is not done precisely together, the “time” is
defective, and the ear at once detects the error; but even when the
“time” is ever so good, the want of keeping stroke is fatal to the speed
of any boat, however good the individuals may be.
CAUTIONS TO YOUNG ROWERS.
Do not be over anxious to avoid “catching crabs,” which is an event
likely to occur in early practice; and should it happen, throw the oar
quickly upwards out of the rowlock, and no mischief will ensue. The
young rower should be at once shown how to free his oar in this way, and
then he may pull with that freedom from restraint which is necessary to
produce a good style. Do not stand on the seats, or lean out of the
boat, and never attempt any practical jokes on the water, as it is a
dangerous element to trifle with.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
SAILING.
“The tar’s a jolly tar, that can hand, reef and steer,
That can nimbly cast-off and belay;
Who in darkest of nights finds each halliard and gear,
And dead reckoning knows well, and leeway:
But the tar to please me must more jolly be,
He must laugh at the waves as they roar.”--_Dibdin._
It would be very difficult to trace to its origin the art of sailing.
Perhaps the curled leaf passing over the water, with one end erect,
might have given to observant man the first notion of a sail. It has
been supposed that the _Nautila_, _Argonaut_, or sailor-fish, was
suggestive of the first sailing-vessel; but long before the Argonaut had
been noticed, sails of some kind or other had no doubt been common. A
man could not stand in the simplest boat without perceiving that the
wind exerted a power upon him and his boat; and therefore the idea of a
sail must have been identical with the first launching of the rudest
boat. The _science_ of sailing, however, has grown up gradually through
a succession of ages, and has now reached a perfection of which the
ancients had no idea.
We will first speak of the various kinds of vessels, which are
distinguished principally by the number of masts, and the number and
shape of their sails.
A _Sloop_ is properly a vessel with one mast, having her sails, with the
exception of her topsails, set in the plane of her length, which is
technically called “set fore and aft.” Her topsail is a square sail,
rigged at right angles to the plane of her length. The bowsprit is
generally elevated from the bows, inclining slightly to the deck. The
term “sloop” is now usually applied to a man-of-war, ship-rigged, and
carrying less than 18 guns.
[Illustration]
A _Cutter_ differs from a sloop in being without a square sail, and in
having her bowsprit horizontal; her mast at the same time “raking” aft.
Her topsail is fore and aft, and triangular in shape.
A _Brig_ is a square-rigged vessel, with two masts.
[Illustration]
A _Schooner_ is a two-masted vessel, with fore and aft topsails, which
are called gaff-topsails. Sometimes she has a square fore-topsail and
top-gallantsail.
[Illustration]
A _Brigantine_ is something between a schooner and a brig, and is worked
either with oars (called sweeps) or sails.
[Illustration: DUTCH GALLEOT.]
A _Dutch Galleot_ is rigged like a schooner, but of a broader and more
Chinese build, her bottom being nearly flat.
A _Billy-boy_ is rigged sometimes like a sloop, and sometimes like a
schooner; but her bottom is nearly flat, and she draws but little water.
A _Smack_ is a small vessel with one mast like a cutter, used
principally for fishing.
A _Canoe_ is a boat used by savages, usually made of a trunk of a tree,
hollowed.
[Illustration]
A _Felucca_ has two triangular sails, is used in the Mediterranean, and
is particularly swift. It can also use oars in calm weather.
[Illustration]
A _Junk_ is a Chinese vessel, used either for war or merchandise, is
built very heavily.
A _Proa_ is used by the natives of the Ladrone Islands, and is
remarkable for its swiftness and sailing close to the wind. The lee-side
is quite straight, and the weather-side is convex, like a common boat.
Both head and stern are equally sharp; and in working her there is no
necessity to tack or turn at any time. Besides this peculiarity of
construction, the proa has on her lee-side what is called an
“out-rigger,” which is made of two poles, extending about 10 feet from
her side, having at their extremity a piece of solid wood. This prevents
her from having any lee-way. She will sail with a good wind twenty miles
an hour.
[Illustration]
The natives of the Society Islands use a canoe, averaging in length from
ten to forty feet. It is made of a trunk of a tree, hollowed out; and is
just wide enough for a person to sit down. It will carry from one to as
many as thirty persons. It also has an outrigger, like a proa. When a
native leaves one island to go to another, he joins two large canoes
together, and builds on them a small hut, which will hold all his
family. This is the most convenient way to travel in a canoe, for it is
difficult to see anything but one’s knees when sitting down in the
ordinary manner. These canoes carry a square sail in the fore-part.
We will now speak of the vessels we have most to do with--viz. yachts.
CHARACTERS OF A YACHT.
Speed, safety, and accommodation are the three first qualities of a
yacht. She ought to be pleasing to the eye when afloat, of such a
breadth as to carry her canvass with ease, and at the same time so
sharp in her bow and well-shapen astern as to displace her weight of
water smoothly and gradually, while she leaves it in the same way.
VARIOUS KINDS OF YACHTS.
Yachts are of various kinds, according to their size. If more than
eighty tons burden, the schooner is most suitable; for, as the spars are
more numerous, they are proportionally lighter. The schooner, as has
been before observed, has two masts--the foremast and mainmast; the one
bearing the sail called the boom-foresail, and the other a mainsail. She
has two or more headsails, called staysail, fore-staysail, and jib. Her
topsails are either square or fore and aft.
The _Cutter_ has one mast and four sails--viz. mainsail, maintopsail,
foresail, and jib. Some smaller craft have larger jibs, and no foresail.
The _Dandy-rigged Yacht_ differs from a cutter, in having no boom for
her mainsail, which can consequently be brailed up by a rope passing
round it. She has a mizen-mast standing in the stern, which sets a sail
called a mizen, and which is stretched on a horizontal spar, projecting
over the stern. This style of rig is more safe for a yacht, as the boom
in ordinary cutters is liable to sweep persons overboard; and the sail
can be taken in quicker by brailing it up than by lowering it down.
[Illustration]
The _Hatteener_ has only two sails, a fore and a main sail, of a
triangular shape. Each has a spar standing from the deck to the peak of
the sail, and a boom at the bottom, like a cutter. This rig, from
setting more canvass abaft, is well adapted for narrow waters.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
One of the most handy rigs for a young sailor is a triangular mainsail
and foresail rig, on a good-sized open boat. She should be at least
twenty feet long, and five feet on her beam. The foresail is carried
over the stem for about a foot, by means of an iron bowsprit, which
ships and unships on the nose of the boat. Her mainsail has a spar
reaching from the lower part of the mast to the upper corner of the
sail; a rope is fastened in the middle of this spar, and passes through
a block on the mast, by which the sail is hoisted. The advantages of
this rig are, that it can be easily managed, while under it the boat is
much safer than under most other kinds of rig; for, should a squall
arise, the yachtsman has only to let fly his foresheet and put his helm
alee, and the boat will right immediately. With this rig, a boat stands
very well to windward, and may be easily brought about.
DESCRIPTION OF THE CUTTER YACHT.
But the vessel with which we have most to do in our directions for
sailing is the Cutter Yacht, which stands closer to the wind than any
other kind of European boat; and of which we propose, in the first
instance, to give a general description.
CONSTRUCTION OF THE HULL.
The first step in the construction of the hull is laying down the keel
or backbone of the vessel; which is done by fixing a strong piece of
wood, generally oak, upon blocks, that the rest of the timber may be
securely added; the stem is then joined to the fore-post, nearly at
right angles, slanting a little forward as it ascends; and the
stern-post to its after or hinder part, sloping upwards and backwards.
The timbers and ribs are next cut out of solid wood, and placed
transversely on the keel, their width varying according to the lines of
a plan previously drawn out,--being, of course, farthest apart at the
beam; these, as well as the planks of larger craft, are made to bend
into the required shape by being steamed and bolted in while hot. The
skeleton being completed, her planks are then secured by copper or iron
nails to the timbers, and riveted. The deck is made of narrow planks,
running fore and aft. From the level of the deck, her sides are raised
by upright timbers, called “stancheons,” cased over by the bulwarks, and
surmounted by a rail called the “gunwale.” Some yachts are only
half-decked, the after-part being left open and fitted with seats; but,
in order to prevent the water from getting in, a portion of deck, called
water-ways, is left at each side; which opposes a further barrier by its
terminating on the inner edge in a high crest or combing. The stepping
the mast requires great care, since the good or bad sailing of the boat
depends very greatly upon it. If we divide the length of a good yacht
into three parts, the point at which the foremost part joins the middle
part will be the widest part, and there will be nearly the place for the
cutter’s mast. But the American builders have departed from this rule in
the construction of their celebrated yacht, “The America,” whose model,
after all the study and ingenuity that have been applied to
yacht-building, seems to resemble the simple yet beautiful model which
nature has given us in the duck. The bow of this vessel rises very
gradually for some distance along the keel, like the breast of the duck;
and, further imitating the same model, her beam or widest part is abaft,
or further back than the centre. This superior vessel will sail nearly
four points off the wind, and will probably work an entire change in
the present style of yacht-building. We have now glanced at all the
principal parts of the hull, except that all-important part, the rudder;
which swings by a hinge from the stern-post, and is moved by a handle
fixed to its upper part, bearing the name of “a tiller,” and which is
used to steer the boat. Before proceeding with our instructions for
sailing a yacht, it will be necessary to describe the action of the
rudder; as the art of steering is the nicest and most important branch
of seamanship.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
The rudder is a flat board, with a pole rising up on the side, which is
fastened to the vessel; on the top of which is fixed the tiller. In
large vessels, there are two ropes fastened to the tiller, which are
carried through blocks on each side of the vessel; then brought back
through blocks fastened on the mizenmast, and passed round a wheel, by
which means a greater command is obtained over the rudder. When the
tiller is moved to the right (starboard), the rudder, of course, is
forced in the water to the left (port). As the vessel moves on, the
water presses against the rudder on the port side, and thus forces her
stern to the starboard side, and her bow to the port. When the tiller is
moved to the left, it of course produces a contrary effect. If the ship
is moving backwards, then, by moving the tiller to the right, the bow is
also turned to the right; for the water presses against the rudder
behind it on the left side, and thus pushes the stern to the left. In
steering, care must be taken not to steer too much,--that is, not to
move the rudder too violently or more than is necessary,--as this
materially stops her way.
[Illustration: CUTTER AT ANCHOR.]
We here present the young yachtsman with a cutter at anchor, with her
ropes and spars numbered; and which ought to be thoroughly known, as
well as the uses to which they are applied in sailing a yacht:--
1. Stem.
2. Stern.
3. Tiller.
4. Anchor.
5. Cable.
6. Bowsprit.
7. Bobstay.
8. Mast.
9. Topmast.
10. Truck.
11. Vane and Spindle.
12. Cross-trees.
13. Trussle-trees.
14. Gaff.
15. Boom.
16. Topmast-shroud.
17. Topmast-backstay.
18. Topmast-stay.
19. Runner and Tackle.
20. Traveller for Jib.
21. Forestay.
22. Topping Lift.
23. Lift Blocks.
24. Mainsheet.
25. Peak Halliards.
28. Foresheet.
29. Signal Halliards.
30. Companion.
31. Forecastle.
32. Rudder.
SOMETHING ABOUT THE MASTS, SPARS, ROPES, ETC.
The _Mast_ (8) is a spar set nearly upright, inclining a little aft, to
support yards and sails. In a yacht, it is kept in its place by two
shrouds on each side, made of strong rope, and fastened to the sides of
the vessel.
The _Bowsprit_ (6) is a spar carried out from the forepart of a yacht,
secured at its inner end between two strong posts piercing the deck,
called “the bitts.” It is kept in its place by the bobstay (7), which is
fastened to the stem, and by a shroud on each side secured to the bow.
The _Boom_ (15) is that spar which sets out the mainsail below, and is
attached at one end to the mast by a swivel cable, called the
“goose-neck,” and is eased off or hauled in at the other by the
mainsheet (24), which is a rope passing from the end of the boom through
a block on the side of the vessel.
The _Gaff_ (14) sets out the mainsail above, and slides up and down the
mast by means of a crescent end, which embraces it. The sides of this
curve are called “horns.”
The _Topmast_ (9) stands above the mast, and is made to slide up and
down. On it a topsail (_i. e._ a gaff-topsail) is set in light winds;
but both sail and mast are generally lowered in squally weather. It is
kept steady by a backstay (17) on each side of the foretopmast-stay. The
latter is brought down to the bowsprit.
[Illustration: CUTTER BEFORE THE WIND.]
_Ropes._--There are various ropes to hoist and lower sails, called
haulyards (pronounced halliards). There are also other ropes of great
importance, especially those called the sheets, which are to haul in the
sails, and make them stand to the wind. In a yacht, the mainsail has
sometimes a sheet each side; and sometimes only one sheet reeved through
double blocks, which travel on an iron rod, called “a horse,” from side
to side. The jib has two sheets, the starboard and port (right and
left). The foresail has the same, except in some instances, when it has
but one sheet working on a traveller, like the mainsail. The topsail has
only one, which is rove through a sheave at the end of the gaff and a
block at the throat of the gaff, and then down to a cleat or fastening
place on the deck. Signal haulyards are for hauling up the colours, and
pass through a small sheave, in the truck (10), at the end of the
topmast. The ensign haulyards are reeved through a small block at the
peak end, and lead down to the boom. The other ropes on board a yacht
are for the support of the spars, and are called “standing rigging,”
while those used for the sails are called “running rigging.”
[Illustration: TOPMAST AND FORETOPMAST STAY.]
SAILING A YACHT.
If the reader has paid attention to our instructions, he ought now to be
pretty well conversant with build, rigging, spars, and sails of a yacht;
the next thing, therefore, is to explain the actual practical sailing of
a yacht. The number of hands must depend on the tonnage of the boat and
the number of sails. It is best to have a steersman, and one hand for
each sail. Our yacht is now lying at anchor, or moorings, which consists
of a chain and buoy, fastened to a heavy anchor sunk in the bed of the
river. Having got on board, by means of the little boat called a
“dingy,” we first unloose the fore and mainsail, and forestaysail; haul
out the jib on the bowsprit, ready for hoisting; hoist the colours, with
the name of the yacht or club to which she belongs, to the gaff-end; and
stand by to hoist the canvass. We will suppose it just past high water,
the yacht swinging ebb, and the wind up stream; we shall, therefore,
have tide with us, and the wind against us. We now hoist the throat and
peak halliards, till the former is well up block to block; then, by
hauling at the peak-halliards till the after part of the sail is taut
(tight), the mainsail is set, and she swings head to wind. The next
thing is to hoist the forestaysail and the jib, which must be well
purchased up, and the sheet well hauled in, before we can get her on the
wind, _i. e._ sail close up to the wind. The ropes must now be coiled
up, and hung on the cleat belonging to each. Our canvass being now up,
we may cast off, slack out the mainsail, haul in jibsheet on the
contrary tack to which we intend to sail, and we are under weigh.
We have already told the reader that “starboard” means right, and “port”
means left. Formerly, the word “larboard” was used for left; but, owing
to the similarity between the two words starboard and larboard, the word
port was substituted for the latter. A boat is said to be on the
starboard tack, when the wind is blowing from the starboard side; the
port side is then called the lee side, and the starboard the weather
side. She is on the port tack when the wind blows from the port side,
which is then called the weather side, and the starboard the lee side.
When in steering she is brought nearer the wind, she is said to “luff;”
and when further from it, to “bear away.” When the helm is put so as to
cause the boat to luff, the helm is “put up;” when it causes the boat to
bear away, it is “put down,” or a-lee.
Proceeding to our cruise, we must haul the jib-sheet well in, put the
helm up, and sail close to the wind; as, the wind being against us, we
shall have to “beat up,” that is, sail in a zigzag direction. In
sailing close to the wind, we must always take care _not to sail too
close, but always keep the canvass quite full_. Upon the skill of the
steersman, mainly depend the motions of the boat; he must endeavour to
attain the happy medium of keeping the boat close to the wind, and yet
not allowing the canvass to shake. The practised yachtsman feels with
his helm every variation of the wind, and meets it with a turn to port
or starboard; but the young sailor would do well to watch the colour at
the masthead, and, by keeping it in a line with the gaff, he will not
steer very wildly. We are now getting near the opposite bank from whence
we started, and must therefore tack. If the boat is quick in stays (_i.
e._ will go round quickly), and the bottom is not muddy, and is deep
enough for the boat, we may go pretty close to the bank before we tack;
but if she is a slow tub, we must begin in good time. First, we must see
that all the canvass is quite full; then the mainsail must be hauled to
the middle of the boat, or amidships, and the helm put gradually down.
When she is head to wind, let fly the jibsheet; if she is on the
starboard tack, haul in the port foresheet taut, which is called backing
the foresail; the wind, by blowing on the foresail, assists the boat
round. When she begins to fill on the other tack, cast off the port (now
the weather) foresheet, and haul in the leesheet and also the jibsheet,
and trim the mainsail (_i. e._ let go, or haul in, the mainsheet),
according to the direction of the wind. If when the boat is in stays, or
head to wind, she moves neither way, put the helm amidships; if she
moves back, put the helm the contrary way to what you had it before,
resuming its former position when she moves on again. When the wind gets
more on our beam (_i. e._ blows directly across us), we may slack out
the canvass a little; the more aft it blows, so much more we must square
our sails. There is a heavy cloud in the wind’s eye, that admonishes us
that a squall is brewing, and the dark ripple of the water to windward
tells us that it will soon be here. Keep her well full, that as the
squall strikes her she may have good way on; and luff into the wind as
soon as the squall begins: and if she does not right at once, let go jib
and foresheets; if that fails, cast off the mainsheet, and send a hand
to stand by the fore and jib halliards, which must be let go when the
squall becomes violent. We must now reef the mainsail; to effect
this, allow plenty of room for driving to leeward; set taut the
“topping-lift,” a rope which hoists up the end of the boom; lower the
halliards; hook at the end of the boom an earring which is higher up in
the sail, and tie up the reef-points; then, having set up our mainsail,
hoisted a smaller jib, and drawn in the foresheet, we are under sail
again.
We must take care always to observe the rules of sailing, when meeting
with another yacht. Whichever boat is running free must make way for one
close hauled; for a boat when close hauled cannot conveniently alter her
course, but when she is running free she is always able to move to which
side she pleases. As we get into wider water, we shall find more swell,
that impedes the boat to windward; but, if the waves be long enough,
there is a way of easing her over them, by putting down the helm
slightly, just before the highest of them strikes her bow; thus, by
stopping the boat’s way, she strikes the sea with less violence.
BRINGING UP.
Our destination outward bound being in sight, we must prepare to bring
up. The anchor must be got on deck; the cable passed through the
hawsehole, and shackled or fastened to the anchor, with its stock made
ready and secured; then suspended over the bowsprit shrouds, and made
ready to let go. Lower the head-sails, put down the helm till she is
head to wind, and when she is fairly stopped we may drop the anchor.
MAKING SNUG.
The mainsail may now be triced up, with the peak lowered, and with the
helm to one quarter or the other, according as the tide sets; we may
then hope to lie securely as long as we choose.
GOING BACK.
In getting under weigh once more, first haul the cable short; get all
the canvass ready to set up; weigh anchor, and, as the wind is fair, set
the head sails first and the mainsail afterwards; the peak should not be
too high in running, nor the back of the mainsail fast, but raised
slightly to let the wind into the head sails. The tide is now against
us; we must, therefore, keep out of the strength of it as much as
possible.
JIBING.
In rounding the next point we shall jib, or jibe, one of the most
difficult manœuvres in sailing; for in doing so there is danger of
broaching-to, so as to run on shore; of being swept overboard by the
boom as it passes from side to side; and of carrying away or snapping
the boom itself. To avoid these mischances, give the shore a wide berth;
take in the mainsheet, keeping its coils clear for running out; trice up
the tack of the mainsail, and if the breeze is strong, lower the peak;
you may then put your helm to the opposite side to which the boom
swings, and, on the instant the mainsail has traversed to the other
side, change your helm to the reverse and meet her;--this prevents the
broaching-to which would otherwise occur.
BRINGING UP AT MOORINGS.
We are still against the tide, and our moorings are in sight. To bring
her up handsomely calls for more skill than even handling her well. Our
object now must be to lay her still at the moorings from whence we
started, and at the same time to have enough way to reach them. In our
present case it will be best to round her to about an hundred yards
short of the moorings, and, when head to wind, lower the mainsail,
leaving the head sails standing--this with putting up the helm will
bring her head round again--then take in the jib, and, if she has way
enough, the foresail also; and with the opposing tide we may steer our
craft so steadily to the buoy as to take it on board with ease.
Having informed the young sailor of what is necessary to be done on
board, we will now impress on his mind a few useful nautical terms and
maxims, which may lead to the preservation of life and limb.
OF THE MARINERS’ COMPASS, AND VARIOUS NAUTICAL TERMS.
[Illustration]
The ancients, whose only guides over the trackless waters were the
heavenly bodies, so often obscured by clouds, could not venture far from
shore. It is the compass which has enabled us to steer boldly across the
deep. The directive power of the loadstone has been long known to the
Chinese, and it was brought over to Europe about the year 1260. The
communication of the magnetic power to steel and suspending it on a
pivot, is undoubtedly an European invention. The compass is composed of
a magnetic needle suspended freely on a pivot, and supporting a card
marked with the thirty-two points of direction into which the horizon is
divided, and which are thence called the points of the compass. The
needle always points nearly north, and the direction of the boat may be
easily seen by looking at the card. The whole apparatus on board a ship
is enclosed in a box with a glass cover, to allow the card to be seen
without being disturbed by the wind. This box is also sometimes
suspended, to prevent the needle being affected by the motion of the
vessel. The whole is then placed at the binnacle, in sight of the
helmsman. In the inside of that part of the compass-box which is
directly in a line with the bow, is a clear black stroke, called the
lubber line, which the helmsman uses to keep his course; that is, he
must always keep the point of the card which indicates her course
pointing at the lubber line. Every young yachtsman must learn to box the
compass; that is, to repeat all its points in order.
CAUTIONS AND DIRECTIONS.
1. Never leave anything in the gangway, and keep the decks clear.
2. Coil up all ropes; and have a place for everything, and everything in
its place.
3. Take care that in tacking or jibing the boom does not knock you
overboard.
4. Stand clear of ropes’ ends and blocks flying about, when you are
tacking, and the sails shaking.
5. Keep a good look out ahead, and also for squalls, which may generally
be observed to windward.
6. Always obey the orders of the steersman promptly.
7. Keep all your standing rigging taut.
8. When the boat is on the wind, sit on the weather side.
9. Should the boat capsize, keep yourself clear of the rigging, and swim
ashore.
The young yachtsman should on no account attempt to take command of a
boat till he is thoroughly experienced, and should never go in one
without having at least one experienced hand on board; he should also
always have his eyes open to what is going on, and be ever ready to lend
assistance with the greatest promptitude. Quickness and agility are the
characteristics of a sailor; without these, numerous would be the losses
at sea. The casting off or belaying a rope quickly, is often attended
with the most important consequences, in which the losing or saving of
life may be concerned; and we would therefore advise all who are emulous
of being sailors, to be attentive to their duties, quick in their
evolutions, and steady in all their doings.
NAUTICAL TERMS.
_Aback_, the situation of the sails when the wind presses their surfaces
against the mast.
_Abaft_, towards the stern; _e.g._, abaft the mainmast, behind the
mainmast.
_About_, on the other tack; going about, tacking.
_Abreast_, alongside of.
_Adrift_, broken from moorings.
_Afloat_, on the surface of the water.
_Ahead_, in the direction of the vessel’s head.
_Amidships_, in the middle of the vessel.
_Apeak_, when the cable is hove taut, so as to bring the vessel nearly
over the anchor.
_Astern_, in the direction of her stern.
_Avast_, an order to stop.
_Athwart_, across--as “thwart hawse.”
_Backstays_, ropes running from topmast and top-gallantmast to her
sides.
_Ballast_, heavy materials placed in the bottom of the boat, to bring
her low in the water.
_Beacon_, a post or buoy placed over a shallow bank, to warn vessels.
_Bearings_, the widest part of the vessel below the upper deck. The
bearings of an object is its direction according to the points of the
compass.
_Belay, to_; to make a rope fast.
_Bend, to_; is to make a sail fast to the yard, or a cable to the
anchor.
_Berth_, the place where the vessel lies; a man’s sleeping place on
board.
_Bulwarks_, the woodworks of a vessel above deck; also the wooden
partition between cabins.
_Bunting_, the woollen stuff of which ships’ colours are made.
_Buoy_, a floating cask or piece of wood.
_Cabin_, the after part of the vessel in which the officers live.
_Capstan_, a machine placed perpendicularly on deck, round which the
cable is passed, in order to hoist the anchor. It is moved round with
bars of wood stuck into it, which are called handspikes or capstanbars.
_Cathead_, large pieces of wood over the bow, having sheaves within
them, by which the anchor is hoisted or lowered.
_Cleat_, pieces of wood on which ropes are belayed.
_Combings_, raised woodwork round the hatches, to prevent the water
going down to the hold.
_Companion_, ladder leading down to the state cabins.
_Davits_, rods of timber or iron, with sheaves or blocks at their ends,
projecting over a vessel’s side or stern, to hoist boats up to.
_Draught_, the depth of water which a vessel requires to float her.
_Feather, to_; to lift the blade of the oar horizontally as it comes out
of the water.
_Fenders_, pieces of wood or rope hanging over the side of a boat, to
keep it from chafing.
_Fathom_, six feet.
_Flat_, a sheet is said to be hauled flat, when it is hauled down close.
_Fore and Aft_, lengthwise with the vessel.
_Forecastle_, the part of the vessel before the foremast.
_Foul Anchor_, when the cable has a turn round the anchor.
_Gaff_, a spar to which the head of a fore and aft sail is bent.
_Gage_, depth of water in a vessel--this water is called “bilge water.”
_Gangway_, that part of a vessel’s side through which people pass in and
out of the vessel.
_Gaskets_, pieces of rope or plaited stuff, used to fasten the sail to
the yard when it is furled.
_Give way, to_; to row more forcibly.
_Grapnel_, a small anchor with several claws, generally four, used to
secure boats.
_Gunwale_, (pron. _Gun’el_,) the upper rail of a boat or vessel.
_Gybe_, or _Jibe, to_; to shift over the boom of a fore-and-aft sail.
_Halliards_, ropes used for hoisting or lowering yards and sails.
_Hatchway_, an opening of the deck.
_Hatches_, the coverings of hatchways.
_Hawser_, a large rope.
_Helm_, the steering apparatus.
_Hold water, to_; to stop the progress of a boat, by keeping the oars in
the water.
_Jib_, a triangular headsail.
_Jib-boom_, a spar rigged out beyond the bowsprit.
_Jurymast_, a temporary mast rigged in the place of a lost one.
_Lee Board_, a board fitted to the lee side of flat-bottomed boats, to
prevent their drifting to leeward.
_Log_, a journal of the proceedings of a vessel; also a line with a
triangular piece of board, called the log ship, which is cast overboard
to ascertain the ship’s rate of sailing.
_Luff, to_; to steer the boat nearer the wind.
_Lurch_, the sudden rolling of a vessel to one side.
_Marling-spike_, an iron pin sharpened at one end, to separate the
strands of a rope.
_Martingale_, or _Dolphin-striker_, a short perpendicular spar under the
bowsprit’s end.
_Miss stays_, to fail going about.
_Oakum_, pieces of yarn picked to pieces, used for caulking.
_Overhaul, to_; when a rope is passed through two blocks, in order to
make a tackle, the rope which is hauled on is called the fall; if one of
the blocks gets loose, the act of hauling on the rope between the
blocks, in order to separate them, is called overhauling.
_Painter_, a rope attached to the bow of a boat.
_Pendant_, a long narrow flag at the mast-head.
_Quarter_, that part of the vessel between the stern and the main
chains.
_Ratlines_ (pron. _Rat’lin’s_,) ropes fastened across the shrouds, like
the steps of a ladder.
_Scud, to_; to drive along before a gale with no sail, or only enough to
keep her ahead of the sea. Also, low thin clouds flying swiftly before
the wind.
_Spanker_, or _Driver_, the after sail of a ship or bark. It is fore and
aft sail set with a boom and gaff.
_Splice, to_; to join two ropes together by entwining their strands; a
rope is generally formed of three strands twisted together.
_Spring, to_; to split a mast.
_Stays_, large ropes leading from the masthead forward.
_Staysail_, a sail hoisted on a stay.
_Steerage_, the part of the between decks just before the after cabin.
_Stretcher_, pieces of wood placed across a boat’s bottom for the rowers
to put their feet against.
_Surge_, large swelling waves breaking over rocks.
_Taut_, tight.
_Throat_, the inner edge of the gaff which embraces the mast.
_Unbend, to_; to untie.
_Unmoor, to_; to heave up one anchor, or to unfasten the ship from her
moorings.
_Vane_, a piece of bunting flying at the masthead to show the direction
of the wind.
_Waist_, the part of the upper deck between the quarterdeck and
forecastle.
_Wake_, the path that a ship leaves behind her in the water.
_Wear, to_; to come round on the other side of the wind without backing.
[Illustration: Let A B be the vessel, G the direction of the wind; A B
is sailing in the direction B C, and wants to change her course to A D;
if she tacks, she traverses the direction C H D; if she wears, she goes
off from the wind in the direction C E D.]
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
SKATING.
Skating is one of the finest gymnastic exercises, by which man, as
Klopstock says, “like the Homeric gods, strides with winged feet over
the sea transmuted into solid ground.” It is one of the healthiest
exercises, bringing the body into action by a great variety of motions.
The art is mentioned in the Edda, written eight hundred years ago, in
which the god Uller is represented as distinguished by beauty, arrows,
and _skates_.
[Illustration: SKATING.]
It is not known at what period skating was introduced into England, but
there are indications of it in the thirteenth century, for Fitz Stephen,
in his History of London, says, that it was in that time customary, when
the ice was sufficiently strong, for the young citizens of London to
fasten the leg-bones of animals under the soles of the feet by tying
them round the ancles, and then taking a pole shod with iron into their
hands, they pushed themselves forward by striking it against the ice,
and moved with a celerity equal to a bird flying through the air or an
arrow from a cross-bow.
Fitz Stephen describes another kind of diversion on the ice in these
words, which may be acceptable to the young reader. He says: “Others
make a seat of ice as large as a millstone, and having placed one of
their companions on it, they draw him along, when it sometimes happens
that moving in slippery places they all fall down together, which is
rare sport, provided no harm be engendered.” Ibral mentions, that in his
time it was customary to use sledges, which being extended from the
centre by means of a strong rope, those who are seated on them are moved
round with great rapidity.
The use of the modern skate is supposed to have been brought from
Holland, and for many years skating has been exercised with much
elegance in England and in Scotland. Somehow or other, we do not of late
years have those severe frosts which enable the skater to practise his
art with vigour; but there is now a skating club in London who
anticipate trips to Holland during the winter months, where the art may
be practised in all its perfection.
In early days we were “prodigiously,” as Dominie Sampson would say, fond
of the sport. Our first attempts were made during the great frost in
1813-14, which lasted eleven weeks, and during which time there was a
fair on the Thames, and skating was practised in a most delightful
manner. One of the finest and most beautiful skaters of that period was
Robert Fergusson, a Scotchman, who had been a “gentleman of means,” in
the early part of his life, but having shot, horsed, tandem’d, dog’d,
and skated away his substance, was so reduced as to become a teacher of
his favourite art, and near the water works of old London Bridge, on the
west side, he pitched his tent during the frost, inviting “gentlemen,”
who could afford a “crown” to become his pupils in the art of “Land
flying,” as he termed it. He boasted of having taught the Prince of
Wales, and he sported the three ostrich feathers and “Ich dien” over his
canvas. To him in youthful ardour we repaired, and the substance of his
teachings we subjoin for the special benefit of our young friends.
The first maxim of Fergusson to his pupils was, “Throw fear to the
dogs;” the next, “Put on your skates securely;” and the third, “Keep
your balance:” and premising this as a “start,” I shall now describe the
various kinds of skates, and the methods of using them.
THE SKATE.
There are various kinds of skates. Some, such as the Dutch skates, are
very large and somewhat cumbersome, but very safe for those who skate
with heavy loads on their shoulders, as they do in Holland, Denmark, and
Russia. In these the iron often projects above six inches from the wood,
and curls up towards the shin-bone above a foot, that the skater may
glide the more easily over the hillocks of snow common to large expanses
of ice.
[Illustration]
Some skates are what are called fluted, that is, they have a groove
running along the centre of the iron, which are the best for beginners,
as they take a better hold of the ice. The plain skates have no such
groove, and are better adapted for those who have partially acquired the
art, as with them the utmost velocity and elegance of movement may be
performed.[4]
[4] Fluted skates, however, are dangerous for any but those of light
weight, as the cut ice is apt to “ball” in the groove, and so to
throw the wearer, if he leans on one side.
The iron of the skate, which lies under the foot, is called its _blade_;
this varies in different kinds of skates, and the practised professor of
skating will choose a high or a low bladed skate, according to the
nature of the ice; but the beginner should never use a skate whose blade
is more than three quarters of an inch in depth and a quarter of an inch
in breadth, for when the blades are deeper than this, the balance of the
body is not so easily preserved, and the ancles are liable to be
sprained or twisted.
PUTTING ON THE SKATES.
In putting on the skate, the “youngster” should kneel on one knee and
fasten the skate on the foot of the other leg. If he should have a high
laced boot, called in the eastern counties a “high-low,” he will find
such an excellent support to the whole machinery. Or if he can provide
himself with a “skate boot,” in which the skate and shoe are all of a
piece, he will do better. Such skates were invented in the great frost
about seven years ago, but just as they were coming in the frost went
out; but they can still be procured. At all events, the skater should
bear in mind that the skate must be fastened securely and firmly to the
foot, by being well fastened to the heel and sole of the boot by means
of the screw and points, and well, but not clumsily, strapped round the
ancle, exactly so tight as to confine the foot without hurting it or
impeding the motions of the ancle joints. There is a new skate now in
use by the London Skating Club, called the elastic skate, or spring
skate, in which a spring is introduced at the bottom of the foot, which
keeps it fast in every part. Skates are also now made of gutta percha,
and these are well worthy the notice of the young skater.
HOW TO START UPON THE INSIDE EDGE.
[Illustration]
Having risen to the perpendicular, the learner should first ascertain,
by moving his feet about on the ice, whether the skates are firmly and
comfortably fixed on his feet. He should then walk a little on them,
supporting himself by a light pole about six feet in length, having an
iron spike at its end. Having in this manner got a little used to the
feel of the skate on his foot, he should then endeavour to throw away
all fear and strike out slowly with the right foot, leaning on the
inside edge of the skate, and making the pressure greatest at that part
of the skate opposite the ball of the great toe, at the same time
bending slightly forward. When the skate has moved about a yard forward
in this manner, the left foot should be brought to the ice in precisely
similar manner. The figure represents the skater starting and proceeding
on the inside edge.
MOVEMENT ON THE OUTSIDE EDGE.
Having practised on the inside edge for some days, to get used to the
skates, the learner may afterwards attempt the “outside edge,” which is
nothing more than throwing themselves upon the outer edge of the skate,
and making the balance of the body bend to that side which will
necessarily enable them to form a semicircle. In this much assistance
will be derived by placing a bag of lead shot in the pocket next to the
foot employed in making the outside stroke, which will produce an
artificial poise of the body at first very useful. At the commencement
of the outside stroke the knee of the employed leg should be a little
bent, and gradually brought to a rectilineal position when the stroke is
completed. The best method of getting to the “outside edge” is to form
the circle inwards--say with the right foot and with considerable force;
in the course of this, place the left foot down in front of the right,
and lean powerfully on the outside of the left heel. A little practice
and confidence in his balance will enable the student to lift his right
foot, and hang it behind while he proceeds to cut outside with his
_left_ foot. Let him then stop, and begin the inward circle with the
left foot, and slip down the outer edge of the right heel in the same
way.
The young skater has now learned to balance himself, and can venture to
strike out at once to the right, on the heel of the right foot, keeping
the left suspended behind, with its toe closely pointed to the heel of
the right. As he advances, the left must be brought past the inside of
the right with a slight jerk; this slight jerk produces an opposing
balancing motion of the body; the right foot then quickly poises, first
on the outside of the heel, and then on the inside of its toe, and by
placing the left foot down before it, and striking outside to the left,
giving at the same time a slight push with the inside of the right toe,
he passes from right to left. Having learned this much, the skater will
proceed to change from left to right, and then from right to left again,
without any trouble. To skate “outside edge” properly, the toe of the
suspended foot must be pointed close to the ice behind the other, and
kept there until the foot be regained, when it must be brought sharply
round to the change. The skater must keep himself erect, leaning most on
the heel.
This mode of skating having been acquired, an endless variety of
figures, devices, and modes of movement may be practised; such as “the
roll,” the figure of 3, of 6, or of 8, “the spread-eagle,” “the
mercury,” “the backward outside edge,” “the circle,” “the waltz,” “the
minuet,” “the pirouette,” “the quadrille,” &c.
The first step towards figure skating is the
FORWARD ROLL,
which is performed in the manner already prescribed in the directions on
the “outside edge.” To perform it gracefully, the skater should bring
his left shoulder forward, throw his right arm back, look over that
shoulder, and boldly incline his body to that side, proceeding
alternately, with ease, grace, and deliberation. When he wishes to stop,
he should bring both his feet together, and stop gradually; or he may
stop suddenly, by pressing on the heels of his skates, taking care not
to throw his toes up too much, or he will cut “all-fours.”
THE DUTCH ROLL
is so called from the motion being used in Holland by the travelling and
trading classes in their common avocation. The figures it presents on
the ice are small segments of very large circles; which enables the
skater to diverge but very slightly from the right line of his course,
and consequently accelerates his progress.
[Illustration]
THE FIGURE OF EIGHT.
[Illustration]
This is composed by merely finishing the great circles, of which the
above segments form a part. To produce it, when the skater comes to the
finish of the stroke on the right foot, he should throw the left quite
across it, which will make him bear hard on the outside of the right
skate, from which he must immediately strike. By completing the circle
in this manner on each leg, the figure subjoined is performed.
THE FIGURE OF THREE.
[Illustration]
This is performed principally on the inside edge backwards. The head of
the 3 is formed of half a small circle on the heel of the outside edge;
but when the circle is nearly completed, the skater leans suddenly
forward, and rests on the same toe inside, and a backward motion is
produced, which develops the tail of the 3. The right legged figure is
that of the 3 in its natural position, and the figure made by the left
leg is the same figure reversed; as per example. In these evolutions,
the motion is not, strictly speaking, backwards, but rather sideways, as
his face and body are always in the direction of his motions.
THE BACK ROLL.
By the “back roll,” as it is termed, the skater moves from one foot to
the other alternately. His face is turned towards the left shoulder. The
inside of the left skate bears on the ice, and the skater immediately
strikes from it to the outside back of the other, by pressing it into
the ice as forcibly as he can at the toe. The “back cross roll” is
performed in a similar manner, the stroke being from the outside,
instead of the inside of the skate.
[Illustration]
The above motions combine the elements of skating, and having acquired
these, the learner may perform an infinite variety of movements, such as
“the cornua ammonis,” “the Dutch maze,” “the fish,” “the kite,” “the
true lovers’ knot,” &c.; with any other devices his imagination may
suggest. He may also engage in the quadrille or waltz, and exhibit his
person in every variety of graceful form, at the same time that he
exercises every muscle of the body.
GENERAL DIRECTIONS TO BE FOLLOWED BY PERSONS LEARNING TO SKATE.
1. Let your dress fit closely, but at the same time be of sufficient
ease to ensure freedom of motion. Neither skirts to coats nor full
trowsers should be worn.
2. Let flannel be worn next the skin by the delicate, and an extra
under-garment by the robust. Let the chest be well defended against the
cold. A piece of brown paper laid between the waistcoat and shirt is one
of the best chest protectors.
3. Be careful in venturing upon the ice, unless it be sufficiently
strong to bear the weight of the number that flock to it; and watch for
the increase of numbers, that you may retire before danger ensues.
4. Avoid rough and very smooth ice, and look carefully out for
obstructions thereon; such as small twigs of trees, stones, or
“hobbles;” as well as for rotten ice, cracks where the ice has risen
higher on one side than the other, or holes. Should you suddenly come
upon rotten ice, do not stop, but pass over it as rapidly as possible.
Should you fall down upon it, roll lengthwise towards the firmer part,
without attempting to stand or walk upon it.
5. Should the skater fall into a hole, he should extend his pole or
stick across it, and hold on to it till assistance arrives: should he
have no stick, he may extend his arms horizontally across the edges of
the ice, till a rope can be thrown to him.
6. After an unlucky immersion in the water, the unfortunate skater
should immediately take off his skates, and, if able, run home as
quickly as he can. He should then pull off all his wet clothes, take a
tablespoonful of brandy in a glass of hot water, rub himself thoroughly
with dry towels, and go to bed.
[Illustration]
SLIDING.
What can be jollier or more enjoyable than sliding for an hour upon a
crisp wintry morning, when the snow is lying three inches deep on the
ground? You may say what you please about the pleasures of skating, but
if you talk for an hour you’ll never convince us that there’s more fun
in it than in sliding. We confess we gaze with admiration at a man
twisting about on the ice like a teetotum on a ricketty tea-tray, and
that when, like a crab, he goes backwards or waltzes round on one foot,
while the other is gracefully poised in the air, we feel a pleasure in
looking at him; but then, after watching a party of skaters for a short
time, we begin to wonder how it is that they all look so solemn, as if
each man were engaged on such an important task that he could not speak
a word to his neighbour, and then we come to the conclusion that there
is more display than real jolly pleasure in skating, and that the
highly-trained skater goes through his evolutions rather in the hope of
affording satisfaction to the spectators than of deriving enjoyment
himself, for we defy any jolly-tempered fellow to feel jovial on a
winter morning in company without laughing and shouting with glee at any
person he comes across.
Therefore, when on turning from the mystic movements of a troup of
skaters to a party of sliders, we hear them laugh and shout at each
other, “now, then, keep the pot boiling,” and other choice sentences,
and when we see a broad grin of pleasure plainly depicted on their rosy
faces, we cannot but think that the enjoyment of sliding shows itself in
a far more demonstrative manner than skating, and that more pleasure is
derived from looking at a crowd of merry urchins going gaily down a
slide than in seeing quadrilles danced, or names cut on the ice, by a
band of skilled _pâtineurs_.
We also like sliding on account of its simplicity. All that its devotees
require is a good sharp frost. What care they for ice? The hobnails in
London boys’ boots soon produce a shiny slippery surface, and in a short
time a respectable slide is made out of the drippings from a water-can,
which a servant may have filled at the pump the day before.
There are, we are sure, few English lads who do not know how to slide.
It seems to come as a matter of course to most boys; but still, lest
there be some benighted youth to whom the pleasures of the slide are
still unknown, we must insert a few hints on the subject.
Take a sharp run of about ten yards, and as soon as you feel that you
are upon the slide, push the sole of the left foot as far along as you
can, making the weight of the body rest almost upon it. You will then
slide away, the right foot following without any effort on your part. We
say advisedly do not push your foot until you feel well upon the slide,
for if you are not very careful about this point you will endeavour to
slide on that part of the earth which is not slippery, and although the
momentum may impel you as far as the slippery portion, yet your progress
will not be very great, as the force which was required to carry you
along the whole length of the slide is partly wasted by the resistance
which, at the start-off, the hard earth offers to your foot. Then, we
have seen many boys in their first attempts to slide, place the heel
upon the slide before the toe. The consequence is that they either fall
over, or else only slip along a few yards, for a moment’s reflection
will show that much greater force can be exerted by pushing the sole
along than is exerted when the heel takes its place, and in the latter
case, instead of the weight of the body assisting one’s progress, it
probably causes the youthful tyro to fall backwards upon Mother Earth,
and to wonder how it happens that he does not get on so well at first as
other boys.
And now surmising that the slider is proficient in the first rudiments
of the art, let us enumerate a few of the feats which a slider may
perform while on the glassy track.
Foremost amongst these stands the postman’s knock, in which a boy slides
upon one foot only, while with the other he gives double taps quickly
upon the ice, in imitation of the noise made by the red-coated messenger
at our street doors. This, however, should not be attempted until the
performer is well on the slide, or the result will probably be that
he’ll measure his length upon the ground. This is also known as
“knocking at the cobbler’s door.”
Then comes the “carambole,” which consists in the slider sinking down
two or three times during his journey, and rising as he reaches its
termination; unless, however, he is very careful the weight of his body
will drag him down altogether, and he will continue his journey on
another portion of his frame, rather than on his feet. But the best
accomplishment to be performed on a slide is the game known as
“turnpikes.” Two stones or bricks are placed on the slide, with
sufficient distance between them for a boy’s foot to pass through. The
turnpike, thus roughly made, is to be kept by one of the party. Off
start the sliders, taking care to pass through the pike, without
displacing or even touching its walls. Woe betide the unlucky wight
whose foot infringes this rule! He is instantly turned off the slide,
and has to wait until some other incautious player commits a like
offence, and is thus compelled to take his place.
Such are a few of the feats performed by adepts in this graceful art.
Most lads, however, will be able to invent many more for themselves, and
numerous are the sports that can be indulged in.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
SWIMMING
Swimming is the most useful of all athletic accomplishments, as by it
human life is frequently saved which might have been sacrificed. It is
also useful in the development of muscular strength, as well as highly
beneficial to the nervous system, and repairs the vital functions when
falling into decline. In places near the sea or rivers, to know how to
swim is an indispensable accomplishment. The ancients, particularly the
Greeks, held the art in such high estimation as to bestow rewards upon
the most perfect swimmers.
From the little familiarity with immersion in water which the
inhabitants of our over-grown towns and cities possess, a very great
proportion of the English population are but little acquainted with the
art of swimming, and with the mode in which they should conduct
themselves when risk of drowning presents itself. The English, above all
other persons, should be good swimmers, exposed as they are by their
insular situation, and commercial pursuits, and disposition to visit
other lands, so frequently to perils by sea; yet, while most towns on
the Continent abound in baths and swimming-schools, in British towns
they are still few in number.
Most animals have a natural aptitude for swimming, not found in man; for
they will at once swim when even first thrown into the water; but it
must be noticed that the motions they then employ much more resemble
their ordinary movements of progression than those made use of by men
under similar circumstances.
The children of many uncivilized nations, especially in warm climates,
frequent the water from an early age, and seem almost to swim by
instinct. The remarkable powers of endurance, agility, and strength
manifested while in the water by many individuals of savage tribes are
well known,--powers which often enable them to come off victorious in
struggles with some of the fiercest inhabitants of those rivers and
coasts.
The art of swimming is by no means difficult of attainment, and several
authors have supplied directions to facilitate its acquisition. Above
all things, self-confidence (not rashness leading into danger) is
required; and, when this is possessed, all difficulty soon ceases. Dr.
Franklin, himself an expert swimmer, recommends that at first a
familiarity with the buoyant power of water should be gained; and to
acquire this, he directs the learner, after advancing into the water
breast high, to turn round, so as to bring his face to the shore: he is
then to let an egg fall in the water, which, being white, will be seen
at the bottom. His object must now be, by diving down with his eyes
open, to reach and bring up the egg. He will easily perceive that there
is no danger in this experiment, as the water gets shallower, of course,
towards the shore, and because whenever he likes, by depressing his
feet, he can raise his head again above water.
The thing that will most strike beginners will be the great difficulty
they experience in forcing themselves through the water to reach the
egg, in consequence of the great resistance the water itself offers to
their progress: and this is indeed the practical lesson derivable from
the experiment; for the learner becomes aware of the very great
sustaining or supporting power of water, and hence has confidence. This
sustaining power of water is shown under many circumstances: thus, a
stone which on land requires two men to remove it, might in water be
easily carried by one. A man might walk without harm on broken glass in
deep water, because his weight is supported by the water. This knowledge
of fluid support constitutes the groundwork of all efforts in swimming,
or in self-preservation from drowning.
Should a person accidentally fall into the water, provided he retained
his presence of mind, a knowledge of the above facts would save him
probably from a “watery grave.” The body being but very slightly heavier
than the volume of water it displaces, will, with a very slight motion
of the hands under water, float. When the chest is thoroughly inflated
with air, it is lighter than water, and floats naturally, having half
the head above water; so that the person exposed to danger has only to
turn upon his back, in order that that half, consisting of his face,
with the mouth and nostrils, be above the water line.
But to float thus upon the water, the greatest care must be taken not
to elevate the arms or other parts above its surface; and it is in
remembering this caution, that presence of mind in the time of dangers
confers so much benefit; for, in the moment of terror, a person thrown
into the water almost instinctively stretches out his hands aloft to
grasp at some object, thereby depriving himself of a means of proceeding
which would frequently keep him afloat until succour arrived. By
elevating any part of the body in this way, we remove it from the
support afforded by the water, and thus render sinking inevitable.
Dr. Arnot, in allusion to this subject, says that many persons are
drowned who might be saved, for the following reasons:--
1. From their believing that their constant exertions are necessary to
preserve the body from sinking, and their hence assuming the position of
a swimmer, with the face downwards, in which the whole head must be kept
out of the water, in order to enable them to breathe; whereas, when
lying on the back, only the face need be above the water.
2. From the groundless fear that water entering by the ears may drown as
if it entered by the mouth or nose, and their employing exertions to
prevent this.
3. The keeping of the hands above water, already alluded to.
4. Neglecting to take the opportunity of the intervals of the waves
passing over the head, to renew the air in their chest by an
inspiration.
5. Their not knowing the importance of keeping the chest as full of air
as possible, which has nearly the same effect as tying a bladder full of
air around the neck would have.
But although floating in water is sufficient to preserve from immediate
danger, this will not alone enable us to swim. To swim, does not mean
simply to float, but to progress; and progression by this means depends,
like the flight of birds, upon the law in Mechanics of every action
being followed by a corresponding reaction, but in an opposite
direction; and thus, as the reaction of the air compressed by the
downward action of the bird’s wing, causes it to mount aloft in
proportion to the force it communicates by that motion; so the backward
stroke communicated by the simultaneous movement of the hands and feet
of the swimmer, causes his forward progress in the water. When once
familiarised with the support derived from the water itself, he soon
learns to make the stroke correctly, especially if aided and supported
by some more experienced friend,--a far better assistant than corks and
bladders.
PLACES AND TIMES FOR BATHING AND SWIMMING.
It is presumed that most young lads who go to bathe will take the
opportunity of learning to swim. In crowded cities there are but few
places in which the youngster can learn the art; but in the country
there are many rivers, ponds, canals, or lakes, where both bathing and
swimming may be indulged in without annoyance. The best kind of place
for bathing is on a shelving gravelly shore, on which the water
gradually deepens, and where no awkward sweep of current may take the
bather off his legs. The spot should also be free from holes, weeds, and
hard stones; and a muddy bottom is to be avoided by all means. Should
the banks of such a spot be shaded by a few trees, and should there be
close by an open space for a run on the grass after the bathe, so much
the better; and the young learner will then have the chief inducement to
venture the sudden dip or head-long plunge.
The best time of the day for bathing or swimming is either before
breakfast, between the hours of six and eight in the summer-time, or
between eleven and twelve o’clock in the forenoon. Delicate persons
should not bathe early in the morning; and it would be always well to
munch a biscuit before early bathing at all times. No one should ever
think of entering the water on a full stomach, or immediately after
dinner, and never when over-heated and exhausted by fatigue. He should
also avoid entering it when cold, or with a headache. Before bathing, it
is best to take a moderate walk of about a mile, and, while the system
is in a glow, to undress quickly and plunge in. It is bad to walk till
you get hot, then to sit down and cool, and afterwards to enter the
water; many have lost their lives by this. It is also very wrong to
enter the water during rain, as the clothes are often wetted or damp,
which gives the bather cold.
ENTERING THE WATER.
Having stripped the body, the bather should select the best place on the
bank for going down to the stream; and then, proceeding cautiously but
quickly, wade up to his breasts, turn his head to the shore, and dip. He
then technically, as the boys say, gets his pinch over. Should he not be
man enough to proceed in this way, he should, as soon as he gets his
feet wet, splash some water over his head, and go into the water more
gradually, and try the rapid rush and dip when he gets bolder. He must
not attempt to swim or strike out till he can master the feat of going
into the water up to his arm-pits, and till he feels himself confident
and void of timidity.
AIDS TO SWIMMING.
Many aids have been used for the benefit of young swimmers: corks and
bladders fastened under the arms are the common ones; but they offer
dangerous temptations for bathers to go out of their depth, and then
should cramp, cold, or any other accident occur, the event may be fatal.
Besides, these aids often slip about from one place to the other. We
remember, in our younger days, of the “corks” slipping to the hips, and
of seeing a young friend, now an old man, suspended in the water with
his head downwards; while collapsing of bladders and of air-jackets is
by no means uncommon. The best aid to a young swimmer is a judicious
friend, himself a good swimmer, who will hold up his head, when he
strikes off, by the “tip of the finger to the tip of the chin,” and who
at the same time will show him how to strike off, and how to manage his
hands and feet. It is not a bad plan to put out a spar from a boat, to
which a rope is attached, which the young learner may make use of by
affixing it to a belt round his body under his arms, which will afford
him support while he learns to strike his legs in the water. The rope
may also be held in the hand of a friend, by the side of the boat, and
the learner may strike off hands and feet as the boat proceeds. The
plank is a dangerous aid, from its tendency to slip about, and to take
the swimmer out of his depth; and, although it has many advantages, is
very unsafe. The safest plan of all is, as we have before stated, for
the learner to advance gradually up to his arm-pits in the water, and
then, turning about, to strike slowly out towards the shore, taking care
to keep his legs well up from the bottom. Rigid perseverance in this
course will in a very short time enable the youngster to feel himself
afloat, and moving at “all fours,”--a delight equal to that experienced
by the child who first feels that he can walk from chair to chair.
STRIKING OFF AND SWIMMING.
[Illustration]
In striking off, the learner, having turned himself to the shore, as
before recommended, should fall towards the water gently, keeping his
head and neck perfectly upright, his breast advancing forward, his chest
inflated; then, withdrawing the legs from the bottom, and stretching
them out, strike the arms forward in unison with the legs. The back can
scarcely be too much hollowed, or the head too much thrown back, as
those who do otherwise will swim with their feet too near the surface,
instead of allowing them to be about a foot-and-half deep in the water.
The hands should be placed just in front of the breast, the fingers
pointing forward and kept close together, with the thumbs to the edge
of the fore-fingers: the hands must be made rather concave on the
inside, though not so much as to diminish the size. In the stroke of the
hands, they should be carried forward to the utmost extent, taking care
that they do not touch the surface of the water; they should next be
swept to the side, at a distance from, but as low as, the hips; and
should then be drawn up again, by bringing the arms towards the side,
bending the elbows upwards and the wrists downwards, so as to let the
hands hang down while the arms are raising them to the first attitude.
HOW TO MANAGE THE LEGS.
The legs, which should be moved alternately with the hands, must be
drawn up with the knees inwards, and the soles of the feet inclined
outwards; and they should then be thrown backwards, as widely apart from
each other as possible. These motions of the hands and legs may be
practised out of the water; and whilst exercising the legs, which can
only be done one at a time, the learner may rest one hand on the back of
a chair to steady himself, while he moves the opposite leg. When in the
water, the learner must take care to draw in his breath at the instant
that his hands, descending to his hips, cause his head to rise above the
surface of the water; and he should exhale his breath at the moment his
body is propelled forward through the action of the legs. If he does not
attend precisely to these rules, he must invariably have a downward
motion, and, as the boys say, swim furthest where it is deepest.
PLUNGING AND DIVING.
[Illustration]
There are two kinds of plunging; that belonging to shallow, and that
belonging to deep water. In shallow-water plunging, the learner should
fling himself as far forward as possible into the stream at a very
oblique angle; and when he touches the water, he should raise his head,
keep his back hollow, and stretch his hands forward. In the deep-water
plunge, his body is to descend at a greater angle; his arms are to be
stretched out, his hands closed and pointed, and his body bent, so that
his nose almost touches his toes.
[Illustration]
Diving is one of the greatest amusements connected with swimming. There
are many kinds; the two most common and easiest and necessary modes of
going below the surface, are--
1. The feet-foremost jump.
2. The head-foremost jump.
In the first, the legs, arms, and head are to be kept perfectly rigid
and stiff. The pupil must not allow fear, or the strange sensation felt
in the bowels in leaping from considerable heights, to induce him to
spread the arms or legs, or to bend his body.
In the second mode, or head-foremost plunge,--which is the safest mode
for persons who are heavily built about the chest and shoulders, if they
have to enter the water from heights,--the head is drawn down upon the
chest, the arms stretched forward, and hands closed to a point; and as
soon as the swimmer feels that he has left the bank, his knees, which
till then were bent, are to be stiffened. The diver must avoid striking
on the belly--the general consequence of fear; and turning over so as to
come down on his back or side--the consequence of pushing with the feet.
When he has gone as deep as he wishes, the arms are to be raised and
pressed downwards.
SWIMMING UNDER WATER.
When under the water, the swimmer may either move in the usual way, or
keep his hands stretched before him, which will enable him to cut the
water more easily, and greatly relieve his chest. If he observes that he
approaches too near the surface of the water, he must press the palms of
his hands upwards. If he wishes to dive to the bottom, he must turn the
palms of his hands upwards, striking with them repeatedly and rapidly
whilst the feet are reposing; and when he has obtained a perpendicular
position, he should stretch out his hands like feelers, and make the
usual movement with his feet, then he will descend with great rapidity
to the bottom. It is well to accustom the eyes to open themselves under
the water, at least in those beds of water that admit the light, as it
will enable the swimmer to ascertain the depth of water he is in.
SWIMMING ON THE SIDE.
In this, the body is turned either on the left or right side, while the
feet perform their usual motions. The _arm from under_ the shoulder
stretches itself out quickly, at the same time that the feet are
striking. The other arm strikes at the same time with the impelling of
the feet. The hand of the latter arm begins its stroke on a level with
the head. While the hand is again brought forward in a flat position,
and the feet are contracted, the stretched-out hand is, while working,
drawn back towards the breast, but not so much impelling as sustaining.
As swimming on the side presents to the water a smaller surface than on
the waist, when rapidity is required, the former is often preferable to
the latter.
SWIMMING ON THE BACK WITHOUT EMPLOYING THE FEET.
[Illustration]
This is twofold: 1. _In the direction of the feet._ The body is placed
in a horizontal position, the feet are stretched out stiffly, and the
heels and toes are kept in contact; then the body is to be somewhat
curved at the seat, the hands are to be stretched flatly forward over
the body, and, slowly striking in small circles, the loins are somewhat
drawn up at each stroke. 2. _In the direction of the head._ The body is
placed horizontally, but somewhat curved in the seat, the head in its
natural position, the arms are kept close to the body, with the elbows
inclined inwards, and the hands describe small circles from the back to
the front, at about a foot-and-half from the hips. These modes serve to
exercise and strengthen the arms in an extraordinary degree without in
the least fatiguing the breast.
FLOATING.
The body is laid horizontally on the back, the head is bent backwards as
much as possible, the arms are stretched out over the head in the
direction of the body, the feet are left to their natural position; if
they sink, the loins must be kept as low as possible. In this position,
the person, who is specifically lighter than water, remains, and may
float at pleasure. The lungs should be kept inflated, that the breast
may be distended and the circumference of the body augmented. In order
not to sink while in the act of taking breath, which the greater
specific weight of the body would effect, the breath must be quickly
expelled, and as quickly drawn in again, and then retained as long as
possible; for, as the back is in a flat position, the sinking, on
account of the resistance of the water, does not take place so rapidly
but the quick respiration will restore the equilibrium before the water
reaches the nose.
TREADING WATER.
This is a perpendicular position of the swimmer, and is of great use to
enable him to save a person from drowning. It is in general thought to
be extremely difficult, but it is very easy. There are two ways of
performing the action: in the first the hands are compressed against the
hips, and the feet describe their usual circle; the other mode consists
in not contracting both legs at the same time, but one after the other,
so that while the one remains contracted the other describes a circle.
In this mode, however, the legs must not be stretched out, but the
thighs are placed in a distended position, and curved as if in a
half-sitting posture.
THE FLING.
[Illustration]
The swimmer lays himself flat upon his waist, draws his feet as close as
possible under the body, stretches his hands forwards, and, with both
feet and hands beating the water violently at the same time, raises
himself out of the water. In this manner one may succeed in throwing
oneself out of the water as high as the hips. This exercise is very
useful, for saving oneself by catching a rope or any other object that
hangs from above the surface of the water, or from any perpendicular
height.
SWIMMING ON THE BACK.
[Illustration]
In this the swimmer turns upon his back in the water by the combined
motion of the arm and leg, and extending his body, his head being in a
line with it, so that the back and upper part of the head may be
immersed, while the face and breast are out of the water. The hands
should be placed on the thighs straight down, and the legs moved as in
forward swimming, taking care that the knees do not rise above the
surface in striking them out. Sometimes the hands are used after the
motion of a wing or fan, by which a slight progression is also made at
the same time that the surface of the body is well lifted out of the
water.
THRUSTING.
In the thrust the swimmer lies horizontally upon his waist, and makes
the common motions in swimming. He then simply stretches one arm
forwards, as in swimming on the side, but remains lying upon the waist,
and, in a widely described circle, he carries the other hand, which is
working under the breast, towards the hip. As soon as the arm has
completed this motion, it is lifted from the water in a stretched
position, and thrown forward in the greatest horizontal level, and is
then sunk with the hand flat into the water; while the swimmer thus
stretches forth the arm, he, with the other hand stretched as wide as
possible, describes a small circle in order to sustain the body; after
this he brings his hand in a largely described circle rapidly to the
hip, lifts the arm out of the water, and _thrusts_ it forward. During
the describing of the larger circle the feet make their movements. To
make the thrust beautifully, a considerable degree of practice is
required. This mode of swimming is useful where a great degree of
rapidity is required for a short distance.
THE DOUBLE THRUST.
In the performance of this the arm is thrust forwards, backwards, and
again forwards without dipping into the water; in the meantime the
stretched-forth arm describes two circles before it begins the larger
one.
TO SWIM LIKE A DOG.
[Illustration]
In this motion each hand and foot is used alternately as a dog uses them
when swimming, as the term implies. The hands are alternately drawn
towards the chin in a compressed form, and then expanded and slightly
hollowed, with fingers close, and as they strike the water the feet are
likewise drawn towards the belly, and struck backwards with a kind of
kick. This mode of swimming is of use to relieve the swimmer from time
to time when going a distance.
THE MILL.
The swimmer lays himself on his back and contracts himself so that the
knees are brought almost to the chin, and while one of the hands keeps
the equilibrium by describing circles, the other continues working. Thus
the body is kept turning round more or less rapidly.
THE WHEEL BACKWARDS AND FORWARDS.
In the _forward wheel_ the hands are put as far backwards as possible,
and so pressed against the water that the head is impelled under the
surface, and the feet, by a pressure of the hands in a contrary
direction, are rapidly flung above the head, which in this manner is
rapidly brought again to the surface.
In the _backward wheel_ the swimmer lies upon his back, he contracts
himself, the hands, stretched forward as far as possible, describe
rapidly small circles, the feet rise, and as the point of equilibrium
has been brought as near as possible to the feet, the head sinks and the
feet are thrown over.
TO SWIM WITH ONE HAND.
The learner to do this swims on one side, keeps his feet somewhat deeply
_sunk_, while the arm which in the meantime ought to work is kept
quiet--and might even be taken out of the water. It is a good practice
of strength to carry, first under and then over the water, a weight of
four or eight pounds.
HAND OVER HAND SWIMMING.
[Illustration]
In this process, the right hand is lifted out of the water from behind,
swung forwards through the air with a kind of circular sweep to the
extent of its reach forward, then dropped into the water edgeways, and
immediately turned, with the palm a little hollowed, downwards, the body
being at the same time thrown a little on one side, and the right leg
struck out backwards to its full extent. The hand descends towards the
thigh, and then passes upwards through the water in a kind of curve
towards the surface. The left hand and leg perform a similar movement
alternately with the right, and the measure of progression attained by
these combined similar movements is very considerable.
BALANCING.
[Illustration]
When the swimmer has obtained ease and confidence in the water, he will
find many things easy which before he deemed impossible. Balancing is
one of these. To perform it he has only, when out of his depth, to fall
gently back with his chin elevated to a line passing exactly through
the centre of his body from the chin to the toes, then, folding his arms
and remaining perfectly motionless, he may suspend himself
perpendicularly: but if he should extend his arms backwards, and pass
them gradually beyond his head, his toes, tips of his knees, abdomen,
and part of his chest, with the whole of his face will appear, and he
will be balanced and float horizontally without the slightest motion.
[Illustration]
THE CRAMP.
The cramp generally proceeds from acidity of the bowels, arising from a
bad state of the stomach, or from the effects of the cold water on the
muscular system. Some persons are very subject to it on slight
occasions, and such persons will do well never to go out of their depth.
But should a tolerable swimmer be seized with the cramp, he should not
be frightened, but the moment the cramp is felt in the foot or leg,
strike out that foot or leg with the heel elongated, and the toes drawn
upwards towards the shin-bone, never minding any little pain it may
occasion, as he need not fear breaking a bone, muscle, or tendon. Should
this not succeed, he should throw himself on his back, and float
quietly, and paddle himself gently to the shore. He may also swim with
his hands like a dog, and practise any of the motions of the upper part
of the body for keeping his head above water till assistance arrives.
SAVING FROM DANGER.
Above all things the good swimmer should be anxious to save life, and to
rescue those who are in danger, _without himself becoming the victim, as
it often happens_. The following rules are highly important to be
observed. The swimmer must avoid approaching the drowning person in
front, in order that he may not be grasped by him; for whatever a
drowning person seizes, he holds with convulsive force, and it is no
easy matter to get disentangled from his grasp; therefore he should
seize him from behind, and let go of him immediately if the other turns
towards him. His best way is to impel him before him to the shore, or to
draw him behind; if the space to be passed be too great, he should seize
him by the foot and drag him, turning him on his back. If the drowning
person should seize him, there is no alternative for the swimmer than to
drop him at once to the bottom of the water, and there to wrestle with
his antagonist; the drowning man, by a kind of instinct to regain the
surface, when drawn down to the bottom, usually quits his prey,
particularly if the diver attacks him there with all his power.
For two swimmers the labour is easier, because they can mutually relieve
each other. If the drowning person has still some presence of mind
remaining, they will then seize him one under _one arm, and the other
under the other_, and without any great effort in treading water, bring
him along with his head above water, while they enjoin him to keep
himself stretched out and as much as possible without motion.
SPORTS AND FEATS IN SWIMMING.
1. _The Float._--In this sport one swimmer lays himself horizontally on
the back, with the feet stretched out, the hands pressed close to the
body, and the head raised forward. The other swimmer takes hold of him
by the extremity of the feet, and, swimming with one hand, impels him
forward. The first remains motionless.
2. _The Plank._--One swimmer lays himself horizontally as before,
another lays hold of him with both his hands, immediately above the
ancle, and pulls him obliquely into the water, while he extends himself
and impels himself forward; thus both the swimmers drop rapidly the one
over the other.
3. _The Pickaback Spring._--One swimmer treads the water, the other
swims near him behind, places his hands upon the shoulders of the first,
and presses him down. He then leaves his hold, and puts his feet upon
his shoulders, and, flinging himself out of the water, pushes the first
towards the bottom. Now he treads water, and the first performs the part
of the second, and so on.
4. _The Shove._--Two swimmers place themselves horizontally on their
backs, the legs are strongly extended, and the soles of the feet bear
against each other; each impels forward with all his power, and he who
succeeds in pushing back the other is the conqueror.
5. _The Wrestle._--Two swimmers place themselves opposite to each other,
tread water and hold their right hands in the air; the question is, who
shall first force his opponent under the water by pressure. Only the
head of the adversary is to be touched, and that only by pressure.
BERNARDI’S SYSTEM OF UPRIGHT SWIMMING.
This system has been introduced into many of the naval and military
colleges on the Continent, and has for its distinguishing characteristic
the swimming in an upright position. The first object is to teach the
pupil how to float in an upright posture. He is taught the use of his
legs and arms for balancing the body in water, and then to imitate as
much as possible the movement of the limbs upon land. He then pays great
attention to the movements of the head, the smallest inclination of
which on either side instantly operates on the whole body. He next
learns the method of using his arms and legs; and for this purpose is
directed to stretch his arms laterally on each side, and then, by
placing one foot forward and the other backward, he is enabled to float
easily and progress slowly. The same circular sweep of the hands and the
action of the legs are next practised, and the feet should be struck
downwards and a little forwards, when the movement of the arms is the
reverse of the old methods of swimming. The young swimmer who has gone
through the various courses laid down by us, will easily comprehend the
principle of Bernardi’s system, and as easily carry it out if he will
take the trouble. It is much less fatiguing than the old plan, and can
be carried on for a longer period, and is of invaluable service to
troops who may have to cross rivers or dykes, and to all who may be
exposed to the various accidents of flood and field.
THE PRUSSIAN SYSTEM OF PFUEL.
The best of all methods for teaching swimming is that originally
introduced by General Pfuel into the Prussian swimming-schools. By this
method a person may be made a very good swimmer in a very short time.
The apparatus for teaching consists of a hempen girdle five inches in
width, of a rope from five to six fathoms in length, of a pole eight
feet long, and a horizontal rail fixed about three-and-a-half feet above
the platform, on which the teacher stands, to rest the pole on.
The depth of the water in the place chosen for swimming should, if
possible, be not less than eight feet, and the clearest and calmest
water should be selected. The pupil wears drawers, fastened by a band
above the hips and covering about half the thighs. He is now placed near
the horizontal rail, his hands resting upon it, while the teacher shows
him the motion which he will have to make with his legs in the water.
This he does by guiding the motion of one leg while the pupil rests, on
the other. This motion we shall explain presently.
The swimming girdle, about five inches wide, is now placed round the
pupil’s breast, so that its upper edge rests on the chest, without
getting tight. The teacher takes the rope, which is fastened to the ring
of the girdle, in his hand, and directs the pupil to leap into the
water, keeping the legs straight and close together, and the arms close
to the body, and, what is very important, to breathe out through the
nose as soon as his head rises above the water, instead of breathing in
first, as every man naturally does after a suspension of breath. The
object of this is to prevent the water from getting into the throat,
which produces an unpleasant feeling of choking and headache. This
expiration soon becomes perfectly natural to the swimmers.
The pupil is next invited to leap. He is drawn up immediately by the
rope, pulled to the ladder, and allowed to gain confidence gradually.
The rope is now fastened by a noose to the end of the pole, the other
end of it being kept in the hand of the teacher; the pole is rested on
the horizontal rail, and the pupil stretches himself horizontally on the
water, where he remains, supported by the pole. Next the arms are
extended stiffly forward, the hands clasped, the chin touches the water;
the legs are also stiffly stretched out, the heels being together, the
feet turned out, and the toes drawn up. This horizontal position is
important, and must be executed correctly. No limb is permitted to be
relaxed.
The movement of the limbs is now taught; that of the legs is taught
first. The teacher first says, loudly and slowly, “One;” when the legs
are slowly drawn under the body; at the same time the knees are
separated to the greatest possible distance, the spine is bent
downwards, and the toe kept outwards. The teacher then says briskly,
“Two;” upon which the legs are stiffly stretched out with a moderate
degree of quickness, while the heels are separated, and the legs
describe the widest possible angle, the toes being contracted and kept
outwards. The teacher then says quickly, “Three;” upon which the legs,
with the knees held stiffly, are quickly brought together, and thus the
original position is again obtained.
The point at which the motions “two” and “three” join are the most
important, because it is the object to receive as large and compact a
wedge of water between the legs as possible; so that when the legs are
brought together their action upon this wedge may urge the body forward.
In ordinary cases of swimming, the hands are not used to propel, but
merely to assist in keeping on the surface. By degrees, therefore, “two”
and “three” are counted in quick succession, and the pupil is taught to
extend the legs as widely as possible. After some time, what was done
under the heads “two” and “three” is done when “two” is called out. When
the teacher sees that the pupil is able to propel himself with ease,
which he frequently acquires the power of doing in the first lesson, and
that he performs the motions already mentioned with regularity, he
teaches the motions of the hands, which must not be allowed to sink, as
they are much disposed to do while the motion of the legs is practised.
The motion of the hands consists of two parts. When the teacher says
“One,” the hands, which were held with the palms together, are opened,
laid horizontally an inch or two under water, and the arms are extended
till they form an angle of 90°; then the elbow is bent, and the hands
are brought up to the chin, having described an arch downward and
upward; the lower part of the thumb touches the chin, the palms being
together. When the teacher says “Two,” the arms are quickly stretched
forward, and thus the original horizontal position is regained. The
legs remain stiffly extended during the motion of the hands. If the
motion of the hands is carefully and correctly performed, the legs and
arms are moved together; so that while the teacher says “One,” the pupil
performs the first motion of the hands and legs; when he says “Two,” the
second and third motions of the feet, and the second of the hands.
As soon as the teacher perceives that the pupil begins to support
himself, he slackens the rope a little, and instantly straightens it if
the pupil is about to sink. When the pupil can swim about ten strokes in
succession, he is released from the pole, but not from the rope. When he
can swim about fifty strokes, he is released from the rope too; but the
teacher remains near him with a long pole until he can swim 150 strokes
in succession, so that, should he sink, the pole is immediately held out
to him. After this he may swim in the area of the school, under the
superintendence of the teacher, until he proves that he can swim
half-an-hour in succession, so that, should he sink, the pole is
immediately held out to him; he is then considered fit to be left to
himself.
Such are the outlines of the German plan of swimming; and, much as we
dislike the German educational quackery, we are still obliged to confess
that schools for swimming might be, and ought to be, established in this
country in unison with the above system. No well-conducted
boarding-school ought to be without a swimming-school; and the hints
above given will be exceedingly useful to the swimmer who has to teach
himself, as well as to the gymnastic tutor who has to teach others the
art; and we conclude by earnestly recommending the accomplishment of
swimming to our young readers.
[Illustration]
TRAINING.
It is impossible that any one can indulge to any extent either in
pedestrianism or rowing without going into some sort of training,
however slight it may be. Before either can be thoroughly enjoyed, it is
essential that the body should be brought into condition, and the
constitution prepared for the severe tests to which it is sure to be
put. Until this has been satisfactorily accomplished (and it cannot be
done without much perseverance and self-denial) success at regattas or
in athletic sports is quite out of the question, and the most serious
results will attend any attempt to take part in such proceedings.
Courage and determination to win a race, whether on land or water, are
qualities very much to be admired, yet they are entirely after
considerations; the first and chief endeavour must be to reduce the
superfluous fat without weakening the system, to secure soundness in
wind and limb--in short, thoroughly to prepare the body, so that it may
be equal to the emergencies that may hereafter present themselves.
Training should not, however, be begun hastily. Before it is commenced,
care should be taken to get the stomach into condition for the dieting
it will have to undergo. These preliminary proceedings will be more or
less prolonged, according to the habits of life of the patient. If a boy
has been given to drinking large quantities of beer, eating indigestible
things, or smoking, he does not commence under such favourable
circumstances as those who have not so indulged themselves. Probably he
has injured his digestion and interfered, however slightly, with his
liver; a state of things that he can readily appreciate by the
restlessness of his night’s rest, and a furred tongue, and unpleasant
taste in his mouth in the morning. The first thing he must do is
gradually to lessen his quantity of beer daily, till he can leave it off
altogether if necessary, to eschew the pastry-cook’s and fruiterer’s,
and consign his pipe to the dust-hole. When once he has made up his mind
to go in for a system of training, he should commence by taking a mild
aperient dose, such as some salts and senna, or a rhubarb pill, the
latter followed in the morning, if necessary, by a black dose. He must
avoid going to the extreme, and purging himself too violently--the
medicine is solely intended to clear the stomach preparatory to its new
treatment--and having gone thus far he may, without any fear, put
himself upon the diet which shall presently be set out. He who has been
wise enough to satisfy himself with very little beer, and still less of
raspberry puff or unripe greengages, and has refrained altogether from
tobacco, which to young people is simply poison, may, unless of weak or
sickly constitution, begin to train without any preliminary
preparations. If his heart and soul are really in the contest for which
he desires to get himself into condition, and he possesses a small
amount of strength of mind, he will soon become accustomed to the daily
routine of food and exercise. It is no use beginning, and then yielding
to the temptation for this or that nice thing; when once the ordeal has
been commenced, it must be carried out strictly and accurately, or it
may as well be abandoned altogether. For the desired state of body can
only be arrived at by one means, namely, a large amount of self-denial
and close adherence to the prescribed diet.
There is of course some slight difference in the systems of training to
be pursued for rowing and pedestrianism; at the same time, in the chief
and important points precisely the same course has to be taken. If a boy
has a walking or running race in view, he must remember this, that he
has to suit his daily exercise according to the distance of the
competition in which he is going to take part. For short races he need
do little more than keep his digestion and wind in good order, taking
care to have say a couple of hours’ good exercise in the course of the
day. We would here venture to correct a grave mistake made very often by
young runners, who think that by continual practising and “spurting”
they learn to improve their pace. They can adopt no better means for
defeating their own end than this, as it will tend far more to diminish
their pace than to improve it. On the other hand, if they have a long
course of several miles to get over, speed is not so much a matter of
importance as endurance, and this latter quality can only be obtained by
accustoming the body to long and severe exercise. For young persons,
however, it is extremely injudicious to attempt too great distances, and
we would advise that two miles, and no more, be made the outside limit.
Longer spins than this are seldom, if ever, tried in ordinary amateur
races.
Accordingly as the match that is to be contested is in running or
walking, so must the day’s exercise be regulated. Avoid, if for the
former, taking too much running practice, and that never for a greater
distance than that of the race in which you are to take part. Good
sharp, brisk walking is more serviceable than anything else in getting
the body into order. And now, presuming that a boy is in sound health,
with good lungs and no unpleasant thumpings about his heart, let us see
how he should regulate his training. Six o’clock to get out of bed and
commence the day. No one who intends to train himself really seriously
will wish to lie longer. Then a cold tub with a big sponge and lots of
water, followed by a severe rubbing with a rough Turkish towel, that
leaves you all a-glow. Dress as quickly as you can, and go out for half
an hour’s walk, or run, as you feel inclined. Be sure, however, not to
fatigue yourself, and see that you come in to breakfast, say at
half-past seven, with a good appetite. Those who can eat porridge will
find it a capital thing to commence breakfast with, followed by the lean
portion of a broiled chop or steak, with bread at least two days old.
Tea we believe to be undesirable, and a pint of really sound bitter beer
will be found to agree much better.
There is no need to bind yourself down to a stipulated quantity of food;
eat what you feel to require, and no more. After breakfast get as much
rest as you can, say for a couple of hours; then take yourself off for a
couple of hours’ walking or running, getting back to dinner by about two
o’clock. The programme for this meal is simple enough: a joint of roast
meat, either mutton or beef, a potato, and sometimes a little
cauliflower, or brocoli, just to make a change, bread as before, and
another pint of bitter beer. The liquids are the things in which the
strictest care must be taken, and the daily quantity regulated. Poultry
is sometimes introduced, but we hardly think it good--in fact, as far as
you can, stick to the good plain joint, or chop, or steak, with bread
and beer, and you will be astonished how you will find your condition
improved. After dinner rest again for two or three hours, and then about
six o’clock take yourself off for another hour’s exercise, on your
return from which you will no doubt be fully prepared with an appetite
for supper. This meal should always be a light one, as it is bad at all
times, and especially in training, to go to bed on a full stomach.
Unless you feel you absolutely require it, do not take any meat;
otherwise, a chop is the least objectionable, and a half-pint of beer.
Never, under any circumstances, exceed three pints of beer a day.
Butter, spices, peppers, and sauces should on no account be taken, and,
as we said before, so we again repeat, smoking must be abjured. If the
directions given are followed out, defeat will not be occasioned through
any error in the system of preparation.
[Illustration]
PART III.
Scientific Pursuits:
INCLUDING
ACOUSTICS.
AERONAUTICS.
CHEMISTRY.
ELECTRICITY.
GALVANISM.
HEAT.
HYDRAULICS.
MAGNETISM.
MECHANICS.
MICROSCOPE.
OPTICS AND OPTICAL ILLUSIONS.
PHOTOGRAPHY.
PNEUMATICS.
SPECTRUM.
ACOUSTICS.
Acoustics is the science relating to sound and hearing. Sound is heard
when any shock or impulse is given to the air, or to any other body
which is in contact directly or indirectly with the ear.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN SOUND AND NOISE.
Noises are made by the cracks of whips, the beating of hammers, the
creak of a file or saw, or the hubbub of a multitude. But when a bell is
struck, the bow of a violin drawn across the strings, or the wetted
finger turned round a musical glass, we have what are properly called
sounds.
SOUNDS, HOW PROPAGATED.
Sounds are propagated on all bodies much after the manner that waves are
in water, with a velocity of 1,142 feet in a second. Sounds in liquids
and in solids are more rapid than in air. Two stones rubbed together may
be heard in water at half a mile; solid bodies convey sounds to great
distances, and pipes may be made to convey the voice over every part of
the house.
TO SHOW HOW SOUND TRAVELS THROUGH A SOLID.
Take a long piece of wood, such as the handle of a hair broom, and
placing a watch at one end, apply your ear to the other, and the
tickings will be distinctly heard.
TO SHOW THAT SOUND DEPENDS ON VIBRATION.
Touch a bell when it is sounding, and the noise ceases; the same may be
done to a musical string with the same results. Hold a musical
pitch-fork to the lips, when it is made to sound, and a quivering motion
will be felt from its vibrations. These experiments show that sound is
produced by the quick motions and vibrations of different bodies.
MUSICAL FIGURES RESULTING FROM SOUND.
Cover the mouth of a wine glass, having a foot-stalk, with a thin sheet
of membrane, over which scatter a layer of fine sand. The vibrations
excited in the air by the sound of a musical instrument, held within a
few inches of the membrane, will cause the sand on its surface to form
regular lines and figures with astonishing celerity, which vary with the
sound produced.
TO MAKE AN ÆOLIAN HARP.
This instrument consists of a long narrow box of very thin deal, about
six inches deep, with a circle in the middle of the upper side of an
inch and a half in diameter, in which are to be drilled small holes. On
this side seven, ten, or more strings of very fine catgut are stretched
over bridges at each end like the bridges of a fiddle, and screwed up or
relaxed with screw pins. The strings must all be tuned to one and the
same note,[5] and the instrument should be placed in a window partly
open, in which the width is exactly equal to the length of the harp,
with the sash just raised to give the air admission. When the air blows
upon these strings with different degrees of force, it will excite
different tones of sound. Sometimes the blast brings out all the tones
in full concert, and sometimes it sinks them to the softest murmurs.
[5] D is a good note for it. The upper string may be tuned to the
upper D, and the two lower to the lower D and D D. The “harmonics”
are the sounds produced.
A colossal imitation of the instrument just described was invented at
Milan in 1786, by the Abbate Gattoni. He stretched seven strong iron
wires, tuned to the notes of the gamut, from the top of a tower sixty
feet high, to the house of a Signor Moscate, who was interested in the
success of the experiment; and this apparatus, called the “giant’s
harp,” in blowing weather yielded lengthened peals of harmonious music.
In a storm this music was heard at a greater distance.
THE INVISIBLE GIRL.
[Illustration]
The facility with which the voice circulates through tubes was known to
the ancients, and no doubt has afforded the priests of all religions
means of deception to the ignorant and credulous. But of late days the
light of science dispels all such wicked deceptions. A very clever
machine was produced at Paris several years ago, and afterwards
exhibited in London under the name of the “Invisible Girl,” since the
apparatus was so constructed that the voice of a female at a distance
was heard as if it originated from a hollow globe, not more than a foot
in diameter. It consisted of a wooden frame something like a tent
bedstead, formed by four pillars _a a a a_, connected by upper cross
rails _b b_, and similar rails below, while it terminated above in four
bent wires _c c_, proceeding at right angles of the frame, and meeting
in a central point. The hollow copper ball _d_, with four trumpets _t
t_, crossing from it at right angles, hung in the centre of the frame,
being connected with the wires alone by four narrow ribbons _r r_. The
questions were proposed close to the open mouth of one of these
trumpets, and the reply was returned from the same orifice. The means
used in the deception were as follow: a pipe or tube was attached to one
of the hollow pillars, and carried into another apartment, in which a
female was placed; and this tube having been carried up the leg or
pillar of the instrument to the cross-rails, had an aperture exactly
opposite two of the trumpet mouths; so that what was spoken was
immediately answered through a very simple mode of communication.
VENTRILOQUISM.
This is an art by no means very difficult of acquirement, if the young
reader will take the pains. It is produced by a reflection of sound
within the mouth, the voice being brought to the lowest possible place
in the larynx. When the art is acquired by practice, the voice may be
made to appear as if coming from any part of a room, from up a chimney,
or from the depths of a cellar. The celebrated Dr. Wolcott, better known
as Peter Pindar, used to amuse his friends in a remarkable manner with
this art. He would represent his landlady as demanding payment of her
rent, and hold a colloquy with her, which would at last rise to terms of
reproach and fury, and end by a noise as if the landlady had been kicked
down stairs. The marvellous powers of Matthews, Le Lagg, Alexander, and,
lastly, Mr. Love, are familiar to most persons. To learn the art, the
young practitioner must have the power of enunciating well, and that
without motion of the lips,--of disguising the voice, so as to imitate
other sounds,--and of adapting the degree to the apparent source of the
sound. By practice this art is attainable by any person whose organs of
speech are completely and fully developed.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
AERONAUTICS.
BALLOONS.
The art of sailing or navigating a body through the air is called
aëronautics. In remote ages, Icarus is said to have risen so high in the
air that the sun melted his wings, and he fell into the Ægean sea, and
was drowned; and there is reason to believe, from some figures that have
recently been discovered on Egyptian and Assyrian monuments, that the
ancients possessed means of rising in the air with which we are not now
acquainted.
The air-balloon, as now constructed, is a bag of silk of large
dimensions, usually cut in gores, and is, when expanded by gas, of a
pear-shape. It ascends in the atmosphere because its whole bulk is much
lighter than the air would be in the space it occupies. It is, in fact,
a vessel filled with a fluid which will float on another fluid lighter
than itself.
HOW TO MAKE AN AIR-BALLOON.
The best shape for an air-balloon, or rather a gas-balloon, is that of a
pegtop. And in preparing the gores proceed as follows: Get some close
texture silk, and cut it into a form resembling a narrow pear with a
very thin stalk. Fourteen of these pieces will be found to be the best
number; and, of course, the breadths of each piece must be measured
accordingly. When sewing them together, it will be of advantage to coat
the parts that overlap with a layer of varnish, as this will save much
trouble afterwards, and hold the silk firmer in its place during the
stitching. The threads must be placed very regularly, or the balloon
will be drawn out of shape, and it will be found useful if the gores are
covered with an interior coating of varnish before they are finally sewn
together. Take care not to have the varnish too thick. To the upper part
of the balloon there should be a valve opening inwards, to which a
string should be fastened, passing through a hole made in a small piece
of wood fixed in the lower part of the balloon, so that the aeronaut may
open the valve when he wishes to descend; and this should be imitated on
a small scale, so that the young aëronaut may be perfectly familiar with
the construction of a balloon. The gores are to be covered with a
varnish of India-rubber dissolved in a mixture of turpentine and
naphtha. Over the whole of the upper part should be a net-work, which
should come down to the middle with various cords, proceeding from it to
the circumference of a circle about two feet below the balloon. The
circle may be made of wood, or of several pieces of slender cane bound
together. The meshes should be small at top, against which part of the
balloon the inflammable air exerts the greatest force, and increase in
size as they recede from the top.
[Illustration]
The car is made of wicker-work; it is usually covered with leather, and
is well varnished or painted. It is suspended by ropes proceeding from
the net which goes over the balloon. Balloons of this kind cannot be
made smaller than six feet in diameter, of oiled silk, as the weight of
the material is too great for the air to buoy it up. They may be made
smaller of thin slips of bladder, or other membrane glued together, or
of thin gutta-percha cloth, which is now extensively used for this
purpose; with this they may be made a foot in diameter, and will rise
beautifully.
HOW TO FILL A BALLOON.
Procure a large stone bottle which will hold a gallon of water, into
this put a pound of iron filings, or granulated zinc, with two quarts of
water, and add to this by degrees one pint of sulphuric acid. Then take
a tube, either of glass or metal, and introduce one end of it through a
cork, which place in the bottle, then put the other end into the neck of
the balloon, and the gas will rise into the body of it. When quite full
withdraw the tube, and tie the neck of the balloon with strong cord very
tightly. If freed it will now rise in the air.
TO MAKE FIRE-BALLOONS.
[Illustration]
Cut the gores, according to the forms already given, from well-woven
tissue paper, paste the gores nicely together, and look well over the
surface of the paper for any small hole or slit, over which paste a
piece of paper, and let it dry. Pass a wire round the neck of the
balloon, and have two cross pieces at its diameter a little bent, so
that a piece of soft cotton dipped in spirits of wine may be laid on
them. When all is prepared let some one hold the balloon from its top by
means of a stick, while you dip the cotton in spirits of wine till it is
thoroughly saturated, place it under the balloon and set fire to it, but
be very careful you do not set fire to the balloon. When the air is
sufficiently heated within, the balloon will indicate a desire to rise,
and when it pulls very hard, let it go, and it will ascend to a great
height in the air, and at night present a very beautiful appearance.
PARACHUTES.
[Illustration]
These are easily made by cutting a piece of paper in a circular form,
and placing threads round the edges, which may be made to converge to a
point, at which a cork may be placed as a balance. They ascend by the
air getting under them, and are frequently blown to a great distance.
[Illustration: SCIENTIFIC PURSUITS.]
[Illustration]
CHEMISTRY.
In the eleventh century, and during the reign of King Henry the First,
surnamed Beauclerk, or the fine scholar, there appeared for the first
time in certain books, professing to teach the art making of gold, the
words chemistry, chemist, derived from the Greek χημεία. Seven hundred
years and more have passed away, and that which was only the pursuit of
a shadow called alchemy, has resulted in the acquisition of a great and
noble science, now and again called chemistry. When we go to the French
Exposition, we shall doubtless pass by much that is worthy of notice,
and bring away with us only a general impression of the wonders it
contains. So it is with the great edifice Chemistry; we may, in these
brief pages, peep in at the open door, but should we desire to go beyond
the threshold, there are numerous guides, such as Roscoe, Wilson, and
Fownes, who will conduct us through the mazes of the interior, and
explain in elementary language the beautiful processes which have become
so useful to mankind.
Chemistry is one of the most comprehensive of all the sciences, and at
the same time one which comes home to us in the most ordinary of our
daily avocations. Most of the arts of life are indebted to it for their
very existence, and nearly all have been, from time to time, improved by
the application of its principles.
Chemistry is, in fact, the science which treats of the composition of
all material bodies, and of the means of forming them into new
combinations, and reducing them to their _ultimate elements_, as they
are termed, that is, bodies which we are unable to split up, as it were,
or separate into other bodies. To take a common substance as an
illustration; water, by a great number of processes, can be separated
into two other substances, called oxygen and hydrogen, in the proportion
by weight of 8 parts of the first to 1 of the second; but no power that
we at present possess can separate the oxygen and hydrogen into any
other bodies; they are therefore called ultimate elements, or
undecomposable bodies.
Again, sulphate of magnesia (common Epsom salts) can be very easily
separated into two other substances,--sulphuric acid and magnesia; and
in this instance, both these substances can again be sub-divided--the
acid into sulphur and oxygen, and the magnesia into a metallic body
called magnesium and oxygen; but sulphur, oxygen, and magnesium are
incapable of further division, and are therefore called _ultimate
elements_.
These ultimate elements amount to 64 in number, according to the present
state of our knowledge, and may be arranged in various ways; the
simplest plan, perhaps, is dividing them into Non-metallic and Metallic
elements.
The Non-metallic elements are:--1. Oxygen. 2. Hydrogen. 3. Nitrogen. 4.
Chlorine. 5. Iodine. 6. Bromine. 7. Fluorine. 8. Carbon. 9. Sulphur. 10.
Selenium. 11. Tellurium. 12. Silicon. 13. Boron. 14. Phosphorus. The
last-named element is the connecting link with the metals through
arsenic, which phosphorus closely resembles in its chemical properties.
The Metallic elements may be sub-divided into the metals of the
alkalies, the metals of the alkaline earths, the metals of the earths,
and the other metals sometimes called metals proper.
1st. The metallic bases of the alkalies:--potassium, sodium, lithium,
ammonium, cæsium, rubidium.
2d. The metallic bases of the alkaline earths:--calcium, strontium,
barium.
3d. The metallic bases of the earths:--aluminium, glucinum, zirconium,
thorium, yttrium, erbium, cerium, lanthanum, didymium.
4th. The metals proper, the most important of which are:--platinum,
gold, silver, mercury, copper, iron, tin, lead, nickel, zinc, bismuth,
antimony, manganese, cobalt, arsenic.
Now, from these elementary bodies, united together in various
proportions, is formed the infinite variety of substances around us,
whether animal, vegetable, or mineral; in fact, a few only are generally
employed;--in the case of animals and vegetables, oxygen, hydrogen,
carbon, nitrogen, with occasionally some sulphur, calcium, phosphorus,
and silicon, suffice for building up the beautiful forms of animated
nature; while the fabric of our globe itself consists for the most part
of the earths; silex, _i. e._ flint or crystal; lime, in the shape of
chalk, marble, or limestone, such as our flagstones are composed of;
slate and granite, which are compounds of aluminium, silica, and small
quantities of oxide of iron, and sometimes a little potash, &c.; and
through their masses are projected irregular streams--veins as they are
termed--of the metals, either in a pure state, as is the case sometimes
with gold, silver, platinum, mercury, and perhaps one or two others; or
combined with one of the non-metallic elements, or with one another.
Late calculations have determined the composition of the earth’s solid
crust in 100 parts by weight to be
Oxygen 44·0 to 48·7
Silicon 22·8 „ 36·2
Aluminium 9·9 „ 6·1
Iron 9·9 „ 2·4
Calcium 6·6 „ 0·9
Magnesium 2·7 „ 0·1
Sodium 2·4 „ 2·5
Potassium 1·7 „ 3·1
----- -----
100· 100·
===== =====
All these combinations are effected by certain powers, termed _forces_;
those which cause the union of the elements are called the forces of
attraction; those causing their separation, the forces of repulsion.
The force of attraction when exerted between masses of matter, is termed
gravitation; when it unites particles of matter of a similar kind and
produces masses, it is called the attraction of cohesion; when the
particles united are of a dissimilar character, it is then termed
chemical or elective affinity. For example, the crystals of Epsom salts
are formed from minute particles of the salt, united into a larger or
smaller mass by the attraction of cohesion, while the _elements_ of
which each particle consists, namely, the sulphur, oxygen, and
magnesium, are united by the attraction of chemical affinity.
Cohesion thus unites particles of a similar kind; chemical affinity, of
a dissimilar nature. It is to cohesion that the existence of _masses_ of
matter is owing, and its power increases as the squares of the distances
diminish, in an inverse ratio to the squares of the distances of the
particles on which it acts.
The power exerted by cohesion may be exhibited in various ways. This is
one: Procure two discs of glass about three inches in diameter, their
surfaces being ground extremely smooth; fix each into a square piece of
wood, taking care that they are placed accurately in the centre; then
put them together, by sliding their edges very carefully over each
other, so as to avoid any air getting between them, and you will find a
great force necessary to separate them. A hook should be fixed into the
centre of each piece of wood, so that they may be suspended, and a
weight hung to the lower one. It is almost impossible for any one to
separate them by merely pulling them with both hands; a weight of many
pounds is required for that purpose. In like manner two freshly-cut
surfaces of caoutchouc will, on being squeezed together, cohere so
perfectly, that it is difficult to tear them asunder, and it is in this
way that tubes of caoutchouc may be rapidly prepared for experiments,
where little or no pressure is exerted.
Chemical affinity is sometimes called _elective_, or the effect of
_choice_, as if one substance exerted a kind of _preference_ for
another, and chose to be united to it rather than to that with which it
was previously combined; thus, if you pour some vinegar, which is a weak
acetic acid, upon some pearlash (a combination of potash and carbonic
acid), or some carbonate of soda (a combination of the same acid with
soda), a violent effervescence will take place, occasioned by the escape
of the carbonic acid, displaced in consequence of the potash or soda
preferring the acetic acid, and forming a compound called an acetate.
Then, if some sulphuric acid be poured on this new compound, the acetic
acid will in its turn be displaced by the greater attachment of either
of the bases, as they are termed, for the sulphuric acid. Again, if into
a solution of blue vitriol (a combination of sulphuric acid with oxide
of copper) the bright blade of a knife be introduced, the knife will
speedily be covered with a coat of copper, deposited in consequence of
the acid _preferring_ the iron, of which the knife is made, a quantity
of it being dissolved in exact proportion to the quantity of copper
deposited.
[Illustration]
It is on the same principle that a very beautiful preparation, called a
silver-tree, or a lead-tree, may be formed thus:--Fill a wide bottle,
capable of holding from half a pint to a pint, with a tolerably strong
solution of nitrate of silver (lunar caustic), or acetate of lead, in
pure distilled water; then attach a small piece of zinc by a string to
the cork or stopper of the bottle, so that the zinc shall hang about the
middle of the bottle, and set it by where it may be quite undisturbed;
in a short time, brilliant plates of silver or lead, as the case may be,
will be seen to collect around the piece of zinc, assuming more or less
of the crystalline form. This at first is a case of elective affinity;
the acid with which the silver or lead was united _prefers_ the zinc to
either of those metals and in consequence discards them in order to
attach the zinc to itself, subsequently a voltaic current is set up
between the two metals, and the process will continue until almost the
whole of the zinc is taken up, or nearly the whole of the silver or lead
deposited.
Again, many animal and vegetable substances consist for the most part of
carbon or charcoal, united with oxygen and hydrogen in the proportion
which forms water. Now oil of vitriol (strong sulphuric acid) has so
powerful an affinity, or so great a _thirst_ for water, that it will
abstract it from almost any body in which it exists; if you then pour
some of this acid on a lump of sugar, or place a chip of wood in it, the
sugar or wood will speedily become quite black, or be _charred_, as it
is called, in consequence of the oxygen and hydrogen being removed by
the sulphuric acid, and only the carbon, or charcoal, left.
When Cleopatra dissolved pearls of wondrous value in vinegar, she was
exhibiting unwittingly an instance of chemical elective affinity; the
pearl being simply carbonate of lime, which was decomposed by the
greater affinity or fondness of lime for its new acquaintance (the
acetic acid of the vinegar) than for the carbonic acid, with which it
had been united all its life,--an example of inconstancy in strong
contrast with the conduct of its owner, who chose death rather than
become the mistress of her lover’s conqueror.
GASES.
The three permanent gaseous elements are oxygen, hydrogen, and nitrogen.
The compound gases are very numerous, some being combustible, and others
supporters of combustion.
Gases are for the most part transparent and colourless, with a few
exceptions, and of course, like the air of the atmosphere, invisible.
They are little affected by the attraction of cohesion, but rather, on
the contrary, the particles composing them have a constant tendency to
separate from each other, so that their force of expansion is only
limited by the pressure under which they may be kept, and the
temperature they may be exposed to. They have a tendency to _penetrate_
each other, as it were; for instance, if you take a jar of heavy gas,
such as carbonic gas, set it with its mouth upwards, then invert over it
another jar containing hydrogen, a gas nearly twenty-two times lighter;
in a very short time the two gases will have become thoroughly mixed,
the heavy carbonic acid having risen, and the light hydrogen fallen,
until the gases are thoroughly mixed, each jar containing an equal
quantity of each gas.
OXYGEN GAS.
This gas, so named from two Greek words signifying the maker of acid,
was discovered by Dr. Priestly in 1774. He obtained it by heating the
red oxide of mercury in a glass retort, when the gas escaped in
considerable quantities. In the ensuing year Scheele obtained it by a
variety of methods, and a few years afterwards Lavoisier discovered that
it was contained in atmospheric air, where it exists in the proportion
of about one-fifth, the remaining four-fifths being almost entirely
nitrogen.
Oxygen gas may be obtained for the purpose of experiment, by heating to
redness the black oxide of manganese in an iron bottle, to the mouth of
which a flexible tube is attached to convey away the gas as fast as it
is liberated from the manganese. The first portions should be allowed to
escape, being mixed with the air in the tubes and bottle, and the
remainder may be collected in a gasometer, or in glass jars inverted
over water.
Another method to obtain the gas, and one to be used only in the absence
of other ingredients, is to mix in a retort some of this same oxide of
manganese with about half its weight of strong sulphuric acid, and apply
heat to the retort, when the gas will come over in considerable
quantities; the first portions must be allowed to escape as before.[6]
If the gas is required _very_ pure, a small quantity of the salt called
chlorate of potassa may be heated in a retort, and oxygen gas will be
evolved, and may be collected as before. If you have an iron bottle, the
first mode is by far the cheapest, as the heat of a bright fire is
sufficient for the operation, and a large quantity of gas is obtained in
a short time from a very inexpensive material. The most rapid and
convenient process of all is to heat a mixture of two parts chlorate of
potash, and one of powdered black oxide of manganese, in a common clean
oil flask, to which a cork and bent tube has been adapted. Care must be
taken not to mistake sulphide of antimony for black oxide of manganese,
as very serious accidents have arisen from this cause.
[6] Some _boiling_ water should be added to the mass left in the
retort directly the gas has ceased to come away, or it will adhere
to the glass so firmly, that the retort will certainly be spoilt.
Oxygen is largely distributed over our globe, both in its uncombined
state, and in union with other substances. Besides forming one-fifth of
the atmosphere, it forms eight-ninths by weight of all the water in the
ocean, rivers, and springs on the face of the whole earth. It also, in
combination with various metals, forms the various earths and minerals
of which the crust of the earth consists, so that it is the most
abundant and widely distributed substance in nature, and in combination
with other elements, forms nearly half the weight of the solid earth.
In its uncombined state it is a colourless gas, somewhat heavier than
atmospheric air, without taste or smell. It is a powerful supporter of
combustion, and is absolutely necessary for the support of animal life,
which cannot exist for any time without a free supply of this gas, which
is constantly consumed in the act of breathing, and is replaced by an
equivalent portion of carbonic acid gas. The want of oxygen is partly
the cause of the oppression felt in crowded rooms, where the air cannot
be renewed so fast as is required for the number of persons who are
constantly consuming the oxygen; and if an animal be confined under a
glass jar inverted over water, it will presently die, just for the same
reason that burning tapers are extinguished under similar circumstances.
If a jet of this gas be thrown upon a piece of charcoal, sulphur, or
almost any combustible body in a state of ignition, it will make it burn
with great vividness and rapidity. For a complete series of experiments
with oxygen see “The Boy’s Play-book of Science.”
EXPERIMENT.
But by far the most intense heat, and most brilliant light, may be
produced by introducing a piece of phosphorus into a jar of oxygen. The
phosphorus may be placed in a small copper cup, with a long handle of
thick wire passing through a hole in a cork that fits the jar. The
phosphorus must first be ignited; and, as soon as it is introduced into
the oxygen, it gives out a light so brilliant that no eye can bear it,
and the whole jar appears filled with an intensely luminous atmosphere.
It is well to dilute the oxygen with about one-fourth part of common air
to moderate the intense heat which is nearly certain to break the jar if
pure oxygen is used.
[Illustration]
EXPERIMENT.
If a piece of charcoal, which is pure carbon or nearly so, be ignited,
and introduced into a jar containing oxygen or common atmospheric air,
the product will be carbonic gas only, of which we shall speak
presently. As most combustible bodies contain both carbon and hydrogen,
the result of their combination is carbonic acid and water. This is the
case with the gas used for illumination; and in order to prevent the
water so produced from spoiling goods in shops, various plans have been
devised for carrying off the water when in the state of steam. This is
generally accomplished by suspending over the burners glass bells,
communicating with tubes opening into the chimney, or passing outside
the house.
To show that oxygen, or some equivalent, is necessary for the support
of combustion, fix two or three pieces of wax-taper on flat pieces of
cork, and set them floating on water in a soup-plate, light them, and
invert over them a glass jar; as they burn, the heat produced may
perhaps at first expand the air so as to force a small quantity out of
the jar, but the water will soon rise in the jar, and continue to do so
until the tapers expire, when you will find that a considerable portion
of the air has disappeared, and what remains will no longer support
flame; that is, the oxygen has been converted partly into water, and
partly into carbonic acid gas, by uniting with the carbon and hydrogen,
of which the taper consists, and the remaining air is principally
nitrogen, with some carbonic acid; the presence of the latter may be
proved by decanting some of the remaining air into a bottle, and then
shaking some lime-water with it, which will absorb the carbonic acid and
form chalk, rendering the water quite turbid.
NITROGEN.
This gas is, as its name implies, the producer of nitre, or at least
forms a portion of the nitric acid contained in nitre. It is rather
lighter than atmospheric air, colourless, transparent, incapable of
supporting animal life, on which account it is sometimes called
azote--an objectionable name, as it is not a poison like many other
gases, but destroys life only in the absence of oxygen. This gas
extinguishes all burning bodies plunged into it, and does not itself
burn. It exists largely in nature, for four-fifths of the atmosphere
consists of nitrogen gas. It is also an important constituent of animal
bodies, and is found in the vegetable world.
Nitrogen may be most easily obtained for experiment by setting fire to
some phosphorus contained in a porcelain or metallic cup, placed under a
gas jar full of air, and resting on the shelf of the pneumatic trough,
or in a soup-plate filled with water.
Nitrogen combines in five different proportions with oxygen, producing
five distinct chemical compounds, named respectively nitrous oxide,
nitric oxide, nitric tri-oxide, nitric tetr-oxide, nitric pent-oxide,
which last, united with water, forms nitric acid, now called hydric
nitrate, as nitrous acid is termed hydric nitrite.
[Illustration]
Nitrous oxide gas is generally known by the name of “laughing gas,” from
the jolly sensations experienced on inhaling it. It may be procured by
distilling in a glass retort a salt called nitrate of ammonia, which
yields the gas in considerable quantities, and it should be kept
standing in jars over water for some hours before it is used. It should
be transferred into a silk air-tight bag, furnished with a stopcock and
mouthpiece, from which the gas may be breathed; a little practice is
required to do this easily, and more resolution to desist when the gas
begins to produce its effects, as it appears to fascinate the
experimenter, and actual force is often necessary to remove the bag from
the mouth. The effects produced vary according to the temperament of the
person inhaling it; they are, however, always of a highly pleasurable
nature, muscular action being generally greatly exalted, compelling the
individual to race round the apartment and execute leaps and pirouettes
perfectly astounding. Some persons shout and sing, and I have seen one
expend his superfluous animation in twisting his features into such
ludicrous grimaces as would be the envy of the candidates at a grinning
match, and beat them all out of the field. Sir H. Davy was the
discoverer of this gas, and of its peculiar effects on the nervous
system, and a full account of it may be found in his “Researches on
Nitrous Oxide Gas.”
This gas is heavier than air, and supports combustion nearly as
energetically as oxygen, as may be shown by introducing a piece of
ignited phosphorus into a jar of this gas. It will not, however, support
the life of small animals, such as mice, which introduced into it die
very quickly.
[Illustration: PLAN OF PNEUMATIC TROUGH.]
[Illustration: SECTION OF PNEUMATIC TROUGH.]
The next compound of nitrogen with oxygen, when one proportion of
nitrogen unites with two of oxygen, is termed nit_ric_ oxide gas. It may
be easily procured by heating in a retort some copper turnings in dilute
nitric acid. It is colourless and transparent, and has the property of
combining with oxygen to form other compounds.
EXPERIMENT.
Into a jar of this gas standing over water pass some oxygen gas. The jar
will be filled with red fumes, which will be rapidly absorbed by the
water. If atmospheric air be used instead of oxygen, there will remain
in the jar the nitrogen of the air, amounting to four-fifths of the air
employed.
This gas is destructive to animal life, in consequence of its property
of uniting with the oxygen in the lungs, and producing the highly
corrosive nitrous acid gas. It will, however, support the combustion of
a few substances, phosphorus for instance, provided it is sufficiently
heated before being plunged into the gas.
We pass over the third and fourth compounds of nitrogen with oxygen, as
they are not calculated for amusing experiments. Nitric acid is easily
prepared on the small scale, by gradually heating equal parts by weight
of nitric and sulphuric acid in a retort to which a receiver has been
adapted. The receiver, which may be a clean oil flask, should be kept
cool with wetted blotting paper.
Nitrogen combines with chlorine and iodine, forming detonating
compounds, the former being so extremely dangerous that it will be
better to pass it by.
The compound with iodine, called iodide of nitrogen, may very easily be
made by pouring strong solution of ammonia (a compound of nitrogen and
hydrogen) upon some iodine in a phial, shaking them well together, and
after letting them stand for a few hours, pouring off the fluid; the
black powder remaining in the phial is the explosive compound, the
iodide of nitrogen. When dry, it is very apt to detonate spontaneously;
it should therefore be shaken out of the phial while _wet_, and spread
in very small quantities on separate pieces of blotting paper, which
should be kept apart from each other. When thoroughly dry, the slightest
touch with the point of a feather, shaking the paper on which it rests,
or even opening too rapidly the door of a closet where it has been put
to dry, will cause it to explode, producing a quantity of
violet-coloured fumes. The explosion is somewhat violent, producing a
sharp cracking noise; and the greatest care should be taken in
experimenting with it.
ATMOSPHERIC AIR.
As has been already mentioned, nitrogen is the principal constituent of
the air of the atmosphere which surrounds our globe, extending to a
height of about forty-five miles above it, and playing a most important
part in the economy of nature, inorganic as well as organic.
This atmospheric air consists by volume of nearly four-fifths of
nitrogen, and rather more than one-fifth of oxygen, viz. seventy-nine of
the former to twenty-one of the latter, or twenty-three parts by weight
of oxygen and seventy-seven of nitrogen; it generally contains also a
variable proportion of the vapour of water, and a very small quantity of
carbonic acid gas, being only about four volumes to 10,000 of air. Its
constituent parts are easily separated, as it is a mechanical mixture
and not a chemical compound, though the mixture by diffusion is so
complete that chemists have not been able to ascertain any difference in
the composition of air taken from all parts of the world, and from
different heights, up to the highest point which has to this time been
attained.
The atmosphere presses on the surface of the globe, and every being on
it, with a force of about fifteen pounds to every square inch of
surface, but as it presses equally in all directions, upwards as well as
downwards, its weight cannot be perceived unless the pressure be removed
from one surface by some artificial means.
Atmospheric air contains, besides the oxygen and nitrogen, its principal
constituents, a small proportion of carbonic acid gas, as has been
mentioned, and this may be shown by filling a tube about half full of
lime-water, and shaking it with the air contained in the other half,
when it will become slightly turbid from the insoluble carbonate of lime
formed.
When we consider that every living animal is constantly consuming
oxygen, and replacing it by carbonic acid gas, and that all burning
bodies, fires in our dwellings, furnaces, artificial lights of all
kinds, act in the same way in abstracting the oxygen from the air, and
replacing it by immense quantities of carbonic acid gas, which is a
poison to all animals who breathe, or attempt to breathe it, we must
wonder what becomes of this irrespirable gas, as it is found to exist in
the air in quantities so minute, and by what means the oxygen is
restored, and the air again made fit for respiration. This is effected
by one of those laws which the wisdom of the Creator has impressed upon
matter, by which one part of creation as it were balances another, and
all proceeds in an endless circle of change. This carbonic acid, which
is so poisonous to animal life, is the food of the vegetable world,
plants having the power of taking up the carbonic acid into their pores;
converting the carbon into their own substance, and rejecting the
oxygen, which is again respired by animals, &c. In the same way, all
animal refuse is the food of vegetables, and is used under the name of
manures.
The atmosphere contains also a variable quantity of vapour of water,
invisible as long as it is in the state of vapour, but it may be
rendered obvious by bringing any very cold body into warm air, when the
vapour will condense on the cold body in the form of small drops of
water. A tumbler of fresh-pumped water brought into a crowded room, is
almost immediately covered with moisture, and it may also be seen on
bottles of wine which have been put into ice before coming to table.
Fogs are occasioned by the condensation of vapour produced by mixing a
current of warm air with a colder air. The banks of Newfoundland are
notorious for dense fogs, occasioned by the warm air brought from the
south by the great Gulf stream, mixing with the cold air from the Arctic
regions, and thus precipitating the vapour in a visible form, rendering
everything but itself invisible. The famous London fogs depend upon the
same precipitation of the vapour of water, with the addition of the
smoke from the numerous sea-coal fires, which give it that interesting
yellow tinge for which it is so remarkable.
Aqueous vapour appears to impart a transparency to air, and permits
objects to be seen more distinctly in proportion to its quantity; hence,
when distant hills appear nearer, and objects upon them more distinct
than usual, rain may be expected, the air being fully charged with
vapour ready to be deposited on the slightest cause.
HYDROGEN.
[Illustration]
Hydrogen gas is the lightest substance known, being fifteen times
lighter than atmospheric air. It is colourless and transparent,
incapable of supporting combustion or respiration, but is itself
combustible. Hydrogen, as its name implies (being derived from two Greek
words, signifying the generator of water), is a constituent of water in
the proportion of one-ninth by weight, and is always obtained by
decomposing that fluid, by presenting to it some body to take up its
other ingredient, oxygen, and so set the hydrogen at liberty. If the
steam of water be passed through a red-hot gun barrel, containing iron
filings, the water is decomposed, the iron taking the oxygen, and the
hydrogen comes over in torrents; but as every one has not a gun barrel
and furnace to heat it, the usual mode is to employ dilute sulphuric
acid, and iron filings, or zinc, in small pieces, and it may be
collected over water by means of a bent tube issuing from the bottle in
which it is formed. It is so light that it was used to fill balloons
before coal gas was to be had, and if you procure a light air-tight bag
of silk, or thin membrane such as a turkey’s crop, and fill it with the
gas, it will ascend rapidly, and dance about the ceiling of a room.
EXPERIMENTS.
1. Attach a tobacco-pipe to a bladder filled with this gas, and blow
some soap-bubbles with it; they will rise very rapidly, and if a lighted
taper be applied to them they burn.
If you mix in a soda water bottle one-third of oxygen with two-thirds of
hydrogen, and apply flame, the mixture will explode with a sharp report.
Great care must be taken in all experiments with the mixed gases. To
avoid danger the gases are placed in separate india-rubber bags, and are
only brought together at the jet. This is an expensive apparatus, and
should only be used by experienced persons.
[Illustration]
2. If a jar of this gas be held with its mouth _downwards_, and a
lighted taper passed up well into the jar, the taper will be
extinguished, and the gas take fire, and burn quietly at the mouth of
the jar; if mixed with oxygen or atmospheric air, it will explode.
[Illustration]
Hold over the jet of hydrogen issuing from a small tube, hollow
cylinders of glass or earthenware, Florence flasks, or hollow glass
balls, and musical sounds will be produced, which were supposed to
depend on some peculiar property of hydrogen gas, until Mr. Faraday
tried flame from coal gas, olefiant gas, and even the vapour of ether,
when the sounds were still produced, and he attributed them to a
continuous explosion, or series of explosions, produced by the union of
oxygen with the hydrogen of the flames.
WATER.
With oxygen, hydrogen unites to form the important compound water, which
exists not only in the obvious form of oceans, rivers, lakes, rains,
dews, &c. &c. but is found intimately combined with many substances,
giving them some of their peculiar properties. Many crystals have a
definite proportion of water combined with them, and on losing this
water they lose their crystalline form. Many acids also cannot exist as
acids without water. The slaking of lime depends upon the union of water
with the lime, the dry powder resulting from the process being a
_hydrate_ of lime, the water having become _solidified_, and in passing
from the fluid to the solid state gives out its latent caloric,
producing the heat observed during the process. When a large quantity
of lime, a barge-load for instance, has got wetted by accident, the heat
evolved has been sufficient to set fire to the barge.
At the temperature of 32° of Fahrenheit’s thermometer, water loses its
fluid form, and becomes ice. As it solidifies, it starts into beautiful
crystals, which unite and cross each other at determinate angles. Ice is
lighter than the water on which it floats, forming a protection to the
water beneath, and preventing it from being frozen so rapidly; else, if
the ice were _heavier_ than water, and consequently sank as soon as
formed, each portion of water would be frozen in its turn, until rivers
became solid throughout, and every living creature in them must be
destroyed. Now, the temperature of the water under the ice is seldom
much below 40°, and if care be taken to break holes at intervals to
allow access to the air, the fish and other aquatic animals seldom
suffer even in our coldest winters.
Although it is impossible to raise ice even one degree above 32° without
thawing, it is not difficult to reduce water many degrees below that
point without freezing it.
[Illustration]
In order to obtain both the constituents of water in a separate state,
it must be decomposed by galvanism, each pole of a battery terminating
in a separate tube containing water, when the result will be that at the
positive pole oxygen gas will be evolved, and hydrogen at the negative,
the latter being double the quantity of the former. Now, if you mix the
gases thus obtained, introduce them into a vessel called a “Eudiometer,”
and pass an electric spark through them from a Leyden phial, a sudden
flash will be seen, and the gases will entirely disappear, being again
converted into water. If you have a mercurial trough, and perform this
experiment over mercury, the inside of the eudiometer will exhibit
minute drops of water. Thus you have proved both by _analysis_ and
_synthesis_, that water consists of oxygen and hydrogen, in the
proportion of one volume of the former to two of the latter.
EXPERIMENT.
Take some perfectly pure distilled water, filter it, surround it with a
mixture of light snow, or powdered ice, and salt, taking care to keep it
perfectly still, a thermometer having been previously placed in it. The
mercury will gradually sink many degrees below the freezing point 32°
(it has been reduced as low as 4°), the water still remaining fluid;
when all at once, either from shaking the table, or simply because the
reduction can be carried no further, it suddenly starts into ice, and
the thermometer jumps up at once to 32°, where it remains until the
whole is frozen, when the temperature gradually sinks to that of the
surrounding medium.
Now if you remove the glass of ice from the freezing mixture into the
apartment, and watch the thermometer, you will find it gradually rise to
32°, and there remain until all the ice is melted, when it will
gradually acquire the temperature of the room. The reason of this is,
that the water in passing from the solid to the fluid form absorbs, and
in passing from the fluid to the solid form gives out caloric, so
maintaining the temperature at 32°, the point at which the change of
form takes place, until it is completed.
Between the temperature of 32° and 212°, water exists in a fluid form,
under ordinary circumstances; but at the latter point it assumes the
form of vapour or steam, and acquires many of the properties of gases,
being indefinitely expansible by heat, the force increasing as the
temperature is raised, provided the steam be confined, until it becomes
irresistible,--witness the frequent explosions of steam-engines even in
this country; and in America, where the engines are worked at a high
pressure, accidents are of daily occurrence.
The temperature at which water boils is modified by the pressure applied
to it. Thus, as you ascend a mountain, and so pass through a portion of
the atmosphere, water boils at a lower temperature, until at great
heights it boils at so low a heat, that good tea cannot be made because
it is impossible to heat the water sufficiently. Under the exhausted
receiver of an air-pump, water boils at about 140°.
CHLORINE.
Another gaseous element, sometimes called a supporter of combustion, is
named chlorine, from a Greek word signifying yellowish green.
This gas was formerly called “oxymuriatic acid,” being supposed to be a
compound of oxygen and muriatic acid gases, until Sir H. Davy, in a
series of masterly experiments carried on during the years 1808-9-10 and
11, proved that it contained no oxygen or muriatic acid, and that it was
in fact a simple or undecompounded substance, and changed its name to
chlorine, which name was, after some discussion, accepted by the
scientific world, and is still in use.
This gas may be obtained for experiment, by gently heating in a retort a
mixture of muriatic or hydrochloric acid, hydrochloride, as it is now
called, with some black oxide of manganese: the muriatic acid, a
compound of chlorine and hydrogen, is decomposed, and so is the oxide of
manganese, giving out some of its oxygen, which takes the hydrogen from
the muriatic acid to form water, while the chlorine gas, with which the
hydrogen had been united, is set at liberty, and may be collected in
jars over water.
[Illustration]
Chlorine gas is transparent, of a greenish yellow colour, has a peculiar
disagreeable taste and smell, and if breathed even in small quantities,
occasions a sensation of suffocation, of tightness in the chest, and
violent coughing, attended with great prostration. I have been compelled
to retire to bed from having upset a bottle containing some of this gas.
It destroys most vegetable colours when moist, and is in fact the agent
now universally employed for bleaching purposes.
It has also the power of combining with and destroying all noxious
smells, and is invaluable as a purifier of foul rooms, and destroyer of
infection. For these latter purposes it is used in combination with
lime, either in substance or solution, under the name of “Chloride of
Lime.”
Sir W. Burnett has lately discovered that the chloride of zinc answers
the same purposes as the chloride of lime, and has the advantage of
being itself destitute of smell, and his fluid is frequently substituted
for the other.
Chlorine gas is a powerful supporter of combustion, many of the metals
taking fire spontaneously when introduced in a fine state of division
into the gas.
EXPERIMENTS.
1. Into a jar of chlorine gas introduce a few sheets of copper leaf,
sold under the name of Dutch foil, when it will burn with a dull red
light.
2. If some metallic antimony in a state of powder be poured into a jar
of this gas, it will take fire as it falls, and burn with a bright white
light.
3. A small piece of the metal potassium may be introduced, and will also
take fire.
4. A piece of phosphorus will also generally take fire spontaneously
when introduced into this gas. In all these cases direct compounds of
the substances with chlorine are produced, called chlorides.
5. If a lighted taper be plunged quickly into the gas, it will continue
to burn with a dull light, giving off a very large quantity of smoke,
being in fact the carbon of the wax taper, with which the chlorine does
not unite; while the other constituent of the taper, the hydrogen, forms
muriatic acid by union with the chlorine.
6. This substance has the property of destroying most vegetable colours,
and is used in large quantities for bleaching calico, linen, and the
rags of which paper is made. It is a curious fact that it shows this
property only when water is present, for if a piece of coloured cloth is
introduced dry into a jar of the gas, also dry, no effect will be
produced--wet the cloth, and reintroduce it, and in a very short time
its colour will be discharged.
7. Introduce a quantity of the infusion of the common red cabbage, which
is of a beautiful blue colour, into a jar of this gas, and it will
instantly become nearly as pale as water, retaining a slight tinge of
yellow. A solution of sulphate of indigo can always be obtained, and
answers well for this experiment.
MURIATIC ACID GAS, OR HYDRIC CHLORIDE.
With chlorine, hydrogen forms a compound called muriatic, or
hydrochloric acid gas. It cannot easily be formed by the direct union of
its elements, but is procured from some compound in which it exists
ready formed. Common salt (chloride of sodium) is generally employed;
and when acted on by strong sulphuric acid (or oil of vitriol), the gas
is disengaged in abundance. It must be collected over mercury, for water
absorbs it, forming the liquid muriatic, or hydrochloric acid.
A lighted taper plunged into this gas is instantly extinguished. It is
very dangerous to animal life if respired. It has the property of
destroying animal effluvia, and was once employed to purify the
cathedral of Dijon, which was so filled with putrid emanations from the
bodies buried in it, that it had been closed for some time. It perfectly
succeeded, but it is so destructive to all metallic substances that it
is not used now, for the chlorides of lime and zinc have since been
discovered to act more effectually than the muriatic acid gas, without
its inconvenience.
The compounds of hydrogen with iodine are passed over.
With nitrogen, hydrogen unites and forms one of the most extraordinary
compounds in the whole range of chemistry,--the gas called ammonia. This
is the only gas possessing what are called alkaline properties; _i. e._
it changes the blue colour of certain vegetables to green, yellow to
deep brown, and unites with the acids to form neutral compounds, just as
the other alkalies, potash and soda, which are oxides of metals. It may
be procured in abundance by heating the hydrochlorate of ammonia, or sal
ammoniac, as it is usually called, with quick-lime, which takes the
hydrochloric acid, and sets free this remarkable gas. It must be
received over mercury, as it is absorbed to almost any extent by water,
forming the fluid sold as “spirits of hartshorn” in the shops.
This gas is colourless and transparent, lighter than atmospheric air,
and will not support combustion; it has a very pungent but not
disagreeable smell. Under certain circumstances it is combustible.
EXPERIMENTS.
1. Take a bottle containing chlorine gas, and invert over its mouth
another filled with ammoniacal gas; then if the bottles be held in the
hand (guarded by a pair of gloves), and suddenly turned, so that the
chlorine be uppermost, the two gases will unite so rapidly that a white
flame fills the bottles for an instant.
2. Substitute for the chlorine of the last experiment a bottle of
carbonic or hydrochloric acid gas; in either case the gases disappear,
and a light white powder settles on the sides of the bottles, being the
carbonate or hydrochlorate of ammonia, according to the acid used.
Carbonate of ammonia is the substance sold for “smelling salts;” and the
hydrochlorate, or muriate of ammonia, is the salt called “sal ammoniac,”
whence the alkaline gas was first obtained, and from which it got its
name of ammonia. The salt itself was so called, because it was formerly
brought from the deserts near the ruins of the temple of Jupiter Ammon.
This salt is, as has been shown, a compound of muriatic acid gas and
ammoniacal gas, containing therefore only _three_ simple
elements--hydrogen, chlorine, and nitrogen, all gases, and known only in
the gaseous state, its symbol being NH₄Cl; yet they by union form a
solid body, resembling in all essential qualities the salts of potash
and soda, which are oxides of known metals. Moreover, if some mercury be
placed in a solution of this salt, and subjected to the action of
galvanism, the _negative_ pole being applied to the mercury, and the
positive to the sal ammoniac, the mercury presently loses its fluidity,
increases greatly in size, and in fact presents the same appearance as
when it is mixed with some metal, forming what is called an “amalgam.”
When the battery ceases to act, a succession of white films forms on the
surface of the amalgam, and the mercury soon returns to its original
state. How is this to be explained? Some chemists have supposed that
there must be a _base_ united to the mercury, and have named this
hypothetical substance “ammonium,” to correspond to potassium and
sodium, the bases of potash and soda, which resemble ammonia in so many
properties. But what is this ammonium? and how is it formed? for
hydrogen and nitrogen are simple elementary bodies. Are _all_ metals
compounds of gases? and are there but a few elements instead of the 64
now enumerated? This, however, is a difficult question, not fitted for
discussion here.
Carbonate of ammonia may be obtained by mixing together powdered chalk
(which is a carbonate of lime) and muriate of ammonia, and heating the
mixture in close vessels, when the salt in question will rise in fumes,
and be condensed in a mass in the upper part of the vessel. It is,
however, so largely produced in other manufactures, particularly in
gas-works, that there is no necessity to resort to the more expensive
and direct method. It is the well-known “smelling salts.”
The only other salt of ammonia worth our notice here is the nitrate,
from the destructive distillation of which is obtained the nitrous
oxide, or laughing gas, already mentioned.
IODINE.
On the coasts of certain islands belonging to the Duke of Argyll, vast
quantities of sea-weed are occasionally torn up from their ocean beds
and deposited on the shores. This weed, after being partially dried by
exposure to the sun and air, is burnt in a shallow pit; the ashes are
then collected, and form the commercial raw material called kelp, from
which iodine is procured by a gradual series of processes.
EXPERIMENTS.
Iodine has a beautiful metallic lustre, with a bluish black colour, and
should be kept in a well-stoppered bottle. A small quantity placed in a
clear flask and heated, affords a magnificent violet vapour, which may
be poured from the flask into another glass vessel, when it condenses
again into crystalline plates. The colour of the vapour originates the
name of this element, so called from the Greek Ἰώδης, violet-coloured.
If a little iodine be placed in contact with a thin slice of phosphorus,
the latter takes fire almost immediately.
BROMINE.
So called from the Greek βρόμος, a bad odour, is most intimately allied
with chlorine and iodine; like these elements it belongs to the sea, and
is a constituent of sea-water. Bromine is a very heavy fluid, and should
be preserved by keeping it covered with water in a stoppered-bottle.
Experiments with liquid bromine are not recommended, as all the most
interesting ones can be performed with the vapour, which is easily
procured by letting fall a few drops of bromine into a warm dry bottle.
EXPERIMENTS.
Pounded antimony sprinkled into the vapour takes fire immediately.
A thin slice of phosphorus placed in a deflagrating ladle and placed
into the vapour of bromine ignites very quickly.
A solution of sulphate of indigo, or an infusion of red cabbage, are
easily bleached by being shaken violently with the vapour of bromine.
FLUORINE.
In many parts of England, especially in Devonshire, Cornwall, and above
all in Derbyshire, is found a very beautiful mineral, known by the name
of Fluor Spar, Derbyshire Spar, and called by the miners Blue John, to
distinguish it from another mineral found, in the same locality, called
_Black Jack_. It occurs in very regular and frequently large crystals in
the form of cubes, and occasionally in octoëdra. It is a compound of
calcium with fluorine, and is very abundant in certain fossil bones.
This element, in combination with hydrogen and called hydrofluoric acid,
acts so energetically upon all substances containing silica, that it
cannot be preserved in vessels of glass or porcelain--very few of the
metals are capable of resisting its action, lead being nearly the only
common metal possessed of this power. Gutta percha may also be employed
for vessels to hold it.
This property of dissolving silica, has caused this acid to be used for
engraving on glass.
EXPERIMENT.
Mix one part of powdered fluor-spar, quite pure, with two parts of oil
of vitriol, in a saucer, and apply a gentle heat, when the acid will be
disengaged in the form of vapour. Prepare a piece of glass after the
manner of engraving on copper, by coating it with a thin covering of
wax, placing a paper over the wax, and then drawing any design with a
sharp-pointed instrument, when, on removing the paper, the wax-coating
will be found to be removed wherever the instrument has passed over it.
Now invert, this glass over the fumes of the acid for half an hour or
so, and then heat the glass so as to soften the coating, and wipe it
off; the design will then appear “bitten in” as the term is, that is,
the acid will have dissolved the glass wherever it was not protected by
the wax, and will exhibit the design indelibly fixed on the glass.
This acid requires the greatest care in handling, for it is extremely
corrosive, producing very troublesome ulcers if it comes in contact with
the skin; even the fumes will produce smarting if the skin is long
exposed to them.
CARBON.
The next substance in our list of elementary bodies is named carbon.
The purest form of carbon is the precious stone called diamond, which
consists entirely of carbon in a crystallized form. The French chemist
Lavoisier was the first who proved the combustibility of the diamond;
and Sir H. Davy found that when once set on fire it would continue to
burn in oxygen gas air, and that the product of the combustion was
carbonic acid gas, exactly equal in quantity to the gas produced by
burning an equal weight of pure charcoal, the most common form of
carbon.
Plumbago, or “black-lead,” as it is very improperly called, is also
nearly pure carbon, a very small quantity of iron being united with it.
By far the greater part of all vegetable, and a very large portion of
animal bodies consists of carbon; and in the state of carbonic acid in
combination with lime and some other earths, it forms nearly the half of
all the chalk, marble, and limestone of our hills; so that it is, in one
shape or other, one of the most widely diffused bodies in nature.
Carbon forms two gaseous compounds with oxygen; the first, called
carbonic oxide, is easily obtained by boiling oxalic acid with its own
bulk of sulphuric acid, in a flask to which a cork and bent tube is
attached. The gas comes over in large quantities, and must be collected
in a gas jar, or the pneumatic trough. It is inflammable, and burns with
a lambent blue flame.
The other compound, carbonic acid, is transparent, colourless, much
heavier than atmospheric air, has an agreeable taste, has the power of
irritating the mucous membrane of the nose, (as any one can tell who has
drunk soda-water), without possessing any particular odour, is absorbed
by water, does not support respiration, and extinguishes flame.
Carbonic acid gas may be obtained with the greatest facility by pouring
some muriatic or sulphuric acid, diluted with about six parts of water,
upon some pieces of marble or limestone in a bottle with a tube
attached, when the gas comes over in torrents. It may be collected over
water.
EXPERIMENTS.
[Illustration: STOPPERED BOTTLE FOR HOLDING GAS.]
1. To show the great comparative weight of this gas, place a lighted
taper at the bottom of a tall glass jar, then take a jar full of
carbonic acid gas, and pour it as you would pour water into the jar
containing the lighted taper; you will soon find the taper will be
extinguished as effectually as if you had poured water on it, and the
smoke of the taper will float on the surface of the gas in very
beautiful wavy forms.
2. Heat a piece of the metal potassium in a metal spoon (platinum is
best), and if introduced in a state of ignition into the gas, it will
continue burning brilliantly, producing a quantity of dense smoke, which
is the carbon from the carbonic acid, the potassium having seized the
oxygen and being converted by it into potash.
3. If a mouse, bird, or other small animal, be placed in a jar of this
gas, it becomes insensible almost immediately, but if speedily removed
it will occasionally recover.
4. Shake up some water with some of this gas in a bottle; the greater
part of the gas will be absorbed by the water, which acquires a
sparkling appearance and a pleasant sharp taste; with the addition of a
little soda this becomes the well-known beverage called soda-water, so
famous for removing the morning headaches caused by “_that salmon_”
having disagreed at yesterday’s dinner.
It is the presence of this gas which renders it so dangerous to descend
into deep wells, for by its great weight it collects at the bottom, and
instantly suffocates any unfortunate person who incautiously subjects
himself to it. Hence it is prudent always to let down a lighted candle
before any one descends into a well, or other deep excavation, and if
the candle is extinguished, it is necessary to throw down several pails
of water, lime-water if possible, and again to try the candle, which
must burn freely before it is safe for any one to descend.
It is this same gas under the name of “choke-damp,” which proves so
dangerous to miners, particularly after an explosion of “fire-damp,” for
it is the principal product of the explosion, and it is by no means an
easy matter to dislodge it.
Carbonic acid gas has been condensed into the fluid form by causing it
to be disengaged under great pressure; the fluid acid has the appearance
of water. When the pressure is removed, as by allowing some of the fluid
acid to escape from the vessel in which it has been condensed, it
instantly reassumes the gaseous form, and in so doing absorbs so much
latent caloric that a portion of the acid is actually solidified, and
appears in the shape of _snow_, which may be collected and preserved for
a short time. After a lecture by Mr. Addams before the Ashmolean Society
of Oxford, I carried a kind of _snowball_ of carbonic acid for a
distance of 500 or 600 yards, and placed it in a saucer in a room. It
evaporated very rapidly, and left no residue, not even a mark where it
had lain. It was too _cold_ to be touched by the naked hand without
pain.
Carbonic acid and lime are mutually tests for each other. If a jar
containing a little lime-water be put into a jar of this gas, it
speedily becomes turbid, the gas uniting with the lime, and producing
chalk (the carbonate of lime), which is insoluble in water.
This gas is produced in large quantities by the respiration of animals,
as may be proved by respiring through a tube immersed in lime-water,
when the water will be instantly rendered turbid from the formation of
chalk.
CARBON AND HYDROGEN.
To the combination of these elements in various proportions, and with
the occasional addition of other substances, we are indebted for all, or
nearly all, our means of obtaining light and heat. Coal, wood, spirit,
oil, and all the varieties of fats, are composed principally of carbon
and hydrogen, and may easily be converted into the gas with which our
houses and streets are lighted, which is nearly pure carburetted
hydrogen.
The two chief definite gaseous compounds of these two elements are the
light carburetted hydrogen, and the heavy carburetted hydrogen, or
olefiant gas. The first is easily procured by stirring the bottom of
stagnant water on a hot summer’s day, and collecting the bubbles in a
bottle filled with water and inverted over the place where the bubbles
rise. This gas burns with a yellowish flame, and when mixed with a
certain proportion of air, or oxygen gas, explodes with great violence
on the application of a flame. It is the much dreaded fire-damp
generated so profusely in some coal-mines, and causing such fearful
destruction to life and property when accidentally inflamed.
The other compound, the heavy carburetted hydrogen, forms part of the
gas used for illumination; and, in fact, whatever substance is employed
for artificial light, whether oil, tallow, wax, &c. &c. it is converted
into this gas by heat, and then furnishes the light by its own
combustion.
This gas has some very curious properties, and may be obtained nearly
pure by mixing in a retort, _very carefully_, one part of spirits of
wine and four of sulphuric acid. A lamp must be placed under the retort,
when the gas will be speedily disengaged, and come over in great
abundance; it may be collected over water.
This gas is transparent, colourless, will not support combustion, but is
itself inflammable, burning with a brilliant white light, and being
converted into carbonic acid and water. If mixed with three or four
times its bulk of oxygen, or with common atmospheric air in much larger
proportions, it explodes with great violence.
This gas is sometimes called “olefiant gas,” from the property it has of
forming an oily substance when mixed with chlorine.
[Illustration: JAR FOR COLLECTING GASES.]
EXPERIMENT.
Into a jar standing over water half full of this gas, pass an equal
quantity of chlorine gas. The gases will speedily unite and form an
oily-looking liquid, which may be collected from the sides of the jar as
it trickles down. By continually supplying the jar with the two gases as
they combine, a considerable quantity of this substance may be
collected. Care should be taken that the olefiant gas is rather in
excess.
The substance produced is insoluble in water, with which it should be
washed by shaking them together in a tube, and has a pleasant sweetish
taste and aromatic smell, somewhat resembling ether.
COAL GAS.
The gas so universally employed for the purposes of illumination is a
mixture of the carburetted and the bi-carburetted hydrogen, with minute
portions of other gases scarcely worth mentioning. It is procured by
submitting coals to a red heat in iron retorts, having a tube passing
from one end, along which passes all the fluid and gaseous matter
separated from the coal, namely, gas tar, ammoniacal liquor, and various
gases, carburetted hydrogen, carbonic acid, sulphuretted hydrogen, &c.
&c. The tar and ammoniacal liquor remain in the vessel in which the
tubes from the retorts terminate, and the gaseous productions are
conveyed through water and lime to separate the impurities; the
remaining gas, now fit for use, passes into large iron vessels, called
gasometers, inverted over water (like the jars in a pneumatic trough),
whence it is sent through pipes and distributed where required. What
remains in the retorts is called coke. It consists principally of
charcoal, mixed with the earthy and metallic particles contained in the
coal.
EXPERIMENT.
If you possess an iron bottle, fill it with powdered coal, and attach a
flexible tube to it, and put it in the fire: as soon as it becomes red
hot, large quantities of smoke will escape from the end of the tube,
being the gas mixed with all its impurities. By passing it through water
(if mixed with lime it will be better), the gas may be collected in jars
standing over water, and submitted to experiment. If you do not possess
a bottle, take a tobacco-pipe with a large bowl, (a “churchwarden” for
example); fill the bowl with small coal, cover it with clay or putty,
and when dry put it into the fire, and the gas will soon appear at the
other end of the pipe, when it may be lighted, or the gas may be
collected over water, as in the former experiment.
The light carburetted hydrogen contained in this gas is given off
spontaneously in some coal-mines, and as it forms explosive mixtures
with atmospheric air, the mines where it abounds could not be worked
except at the greatest risk until about the beginning of the present
century, when Sir H. Davy, while prosecuting some researches on the
nature of flame, found that flame would not pass through metallic tubes,
and he gradually reduced the length of the tubes, until he found fine
iron wire gauze formed an effectual barrier against the passage of
flame. He then thought that if the light in a lantern were surrounded
with this gauze, it might safely be used in an inflammable atmosphere,
where a naked light would instantly cause an explosion. Upon submitting
the lamp to experiment, he found that by passing coal gas by degrees
into a vessel in which one of his lamps was suspended, the flame first
became much larger, and then was extinguished, the cylinder of gauze
being filled with a pale flame, and though the gauze sometimes became
red-hot, it did not ignite the gas outside. As the supply of coal gas
was diminished, the wick of the lamp was rekindled, and all went on as
at first. A coil of platinum wire was afterwards suspended in the lamps,
which becomes intensely heated by the burning gas, and gives out
sufficient light to enable the miner to see to work. As long as the
gauze is perfect it is almost impossible for the external air to be
kindled by the wick of the lamp, but the miners are so careless that
they will often remove the gauze to get a better light, to look for a
tool, or some cause equally trivial, and many lives have been lost in
consequence of such carelessness.
The effect of fine wire gauze in preventing the passage of flame may be
shown by bringing a piece of the gauze gradually over the flame of a
spirit-lamp, until it nearly touches the wick, when the flame will be
nearly extinguished, but the vapour of the spirit passes through, and
may be lighted on the upper side of the gauze, which will thus have a
flame on either side, though totally unconnected with each other. The
flame from a gas-burner will answer as well as the spirit-lamp.
Nearly all the fluids, and solids also, used for procuring artificial
light, such as naphtha, various oils, tallow, wax, spermaceti, spirits
of wine, ether, &c. &c. are compounds of carbon and hydrogen in
different proportions, with the occasional addition of some other
elements, especially oxygen and hydrogen, in the proportions to form
water; as a general rule, those bodies containing the greatest
proportion of carbon give the most light, though not necessarily the
most heat.
PHOSPHORUS.
The next body we have to notice is phosphorus, a most remarkable
substance, procured from the earthy part of bones by a process not worth
detailing here. It should be _always_ kept under water, and the naked
fingers should not be allowed even to touch it, for the smallest piece
getting under the nail will inflame the first time the hand comes near
the fire, and produce a sore very painful and difficult to heal. It
should be cut under water by a knife or scissors, and removed with a
pair of forceps. Its combustible properties have been frequently
mentioned. It has also the property of shining in the dark, so that if
you write on a wall with a solution of phosphorus in oil, the letters
will appear luminous in the dark--there is no danger, excepting from the
greasiness of the oil.
Of the compounds of phosphorus with oxygen we have nothing to do here,
but it forms with hydrogen a very curious gaseous compound, which takes
fire spontaneously on the contact of air, or almost any gas containing
oxygen.
EXPERIMENTS.
It may be procured in either of two ways, according to the purpose for
which it is wanted. The simplest way is to put a lump or two of
phosphuret of lime into a saucer, about two inches in depth, containing
some very diluted hydrochloric acid; bubbles of gas will speedily arise,
and bursting on the surface of the fluid will burn with a slight
explosion, and a circular wreath of smoke will rise into the atmosphere,
enlarging as it rises, and wreathing itself round and round in the most
elegant forms. Care must be taken that the phosphuret is _fresh_, and
has been kept in a well-closed bottle, or the experiment will fail. The
apartment must be free from draughts. If you desire to collect the gas,
another method must be employed.
[Illustration]
Fill a small retort _quite full_, neck and all, of a solution of caustic
potash, drop five or six pieces of phosphorus into it, place the finger
on the end of the retort, and immerse it in a basin also containing a
_hot_ solution of potash, remove the finger, and on applying the heat of
a lamp to the retort, the gas will soon be disengaged rapidly, and drive
out the fluid in the retort; it then escapes into the air, when it
inflames with the same appearances as before described. Or it may be
collected in gas jars filled with the potash solution, and held over the
mouth of the retort. The object in using _hot_ solution of potash in the
basin is, that when the gas ceases to be given off, and the heat of the
lamp is withdrawn, the hot fluid may gradually fill the vacuum which
will form in the retort, and so prevent its being broken.
This gas is transparent and invisible, like most other gases. It is very
poisonous if inhaled. If kept for any time, it loses its property of
spontaneous inflammation, and must therefore be made at the time it is
required.
SULPHUR.
Sulphur, or brimstone, as it is frequently called, is sold in the form
of sticks, or _roll_ brimstone, or in fine powder called flowers of
brimstone.
It is capable of showing electric phenomena when rubbed, giving out
slight sparks, and first attracting and then repelling light bodies,
such as small pieces of paper, &c. It is so bad a conductor of heat,
that if grasped suddenly in a hot hand, it will crack and split into
pieces just as glass does when suddenly heated or cooled--of course I am
speaking of the roll brimstone. Water has no effect on it, as may be
seen in the pans placed for pet dogs to drink out of, where the same
piece of brimstone lies for years entirely unaltered, though it is
supposed to prevent the dogs from having the mange!
Sulphur is largely used in the arts, principally in the manufacture of
gunpowder, and fireworks of various kinds.
It combines with hydrogen, and forms a gaseous compound called
sulphuretted hydrogen, which is almost the most poisonous of all the
gases. It fortunately has so abominable smell, that due notice is given
of its presence. Rotten eggs, a dirty gun-barrel, cabbage water, putrid
animal and vegetable matter, &c. are indebted to this gas for their
inviting odour; and it is found in certain mineral springs, as at
Harrogate, where the water contains a considerable quantity of this gas,
and is found useful in many diseases of the skin. It is also given off
in a gaseous form by some volcanoes.
This gas may be obtained by pouring dilute hydrochloric acid upon a
metallic sulphuret, such as that called crude antimony, being a native
sulphuret of that metal. The gas may be kept for a short time over
water. It is colourless and transparent, inflammable, but quite
irrespirable, a small bird dying instantly when placed in air containing
only 1/1500th of this gas. Its most remarkable property perhaps is the
effect it has on certain metallic oxides, and other metallic salts,
blackening them instantly. White paint is easily stained by this gas,
and it will darken the colour of a metal in a solution, especially of
lead, even when diluted with 20,000 times its weight of water. By way of
experiment, slips of riband, silk, or even paper, may be wetted with
various metallic solutions, such as silver, mercury, lead, &c. or words
may be written with the solutions, and on holding them over a stream of
this gas they will be instantly darkened.
If this gas be collected in the pneumatic trough, which is usually
painted _white_, you will have the pleasure of seeing the colour changed
to a very dark brown, when your experiments are finished. With this very
limited description of some of the non-metallic elements and their
combinations, we must, for want of space, take leave of this division of
chemistry; “the beginning of which is pleasure, its progress knowledge,
its objects truth and utility.”--(_Davy._)
METALS.
We have a few words to say about a class of bodies called metals, which
are of the utmost importance to mankind, and indeed without some of
them, especially iron, few of the arts of civilized life could exist.
Fifty substances are now included in the list of metals; some of them,
however, are only _supposed_ to exist, such as _ammonium_, the supposed
base of ammonia; and very many are to be viewed rather in the light of
chemical curiosities, as from their great rarity they are too expensive
for use, even if possessed of valuable properties of which others might
be destitute.
Several metals have been known from the earliest period of which we have
any record; such were iron, gold, silver, copper, lead, tin, mercury,
and probably zinc, or at least its ores; for brass, which is an alloy of
copper and zinc, is frequently mentioned in the early part of the Old
Testament. In the sixteenth century others were discovered, such as
antimony and bismuth. In the last century, cobalt, arsenic, platinum,
nickel, manganese, and chromium, together with several unimportant
metals, were discovered by various philosophers; while in the present
century, Dr. Wollaston discovered rhodium, the hardest and nearly the
most indestructible of all the metals; and a few years later, Sir
Humphry Davy found that the alkalies, potash, and soda, with many of the
earths as they were called, had each a metal for its base, to which he
gave the Latin name of the alkali or earth, with the termination _um_,
as potassi_um_, the base of potassa, sodi_um_ of soda, calci_um_ of calx
(lime), &c.
Until Sir H. Davy’s discovery of the metals of the alkalies, great
specific gravity was regarded as one of the most striking
characteristics of a metal, the lightest of them being much heavier than
the heaviest earth; but potassium is very much lighter than water, and
not much heavier than spirits of wine. The other metals vary from a
specific gravity of nearly twenty-one--or twenty-one times heavier than
an equal bulk of water--that of platinum, to somewhat less than seven,
which is the specific gravity of antimony.
When pure, they all have a lustre, differing indeed among themselves,
but so peculiar that it is called the metallic lustre, for instance,
gold and copper are yellow and red--nearly all the others white, but of
a different shade; still there is no mistaking their metallic character,
no other substances at all equalling them in this respect. They are also
opaque, although some, like gold, when reduced to thin films, allow
light to pass through them. They are all good conductors of heat and
electricity, though some possess that property to a greater extent than
others.
Many of them are what is called malleable, that is, may be extended or
spread out by rolling, or beating them with a hammer; and ductile, or
have the property of being drawn out into wire. Gold, silver, copper,
and iron, are the most remarkable in this respect.
All the metals are fusible, but some require very different degrees of
heat to render them fluid,--platinum requiring the heat of the
oxy-hydrogen blowpipe, while tin melts in the flame of a candle, and
mercury is fluid at all temperatures in this climate, but becomes solid
at 40° Fahr. below 0,--a temperature occasionally experienced in the
Arctic regions, where the mercurial thermometer is useless, the mercury
becoming solid.
They are all excellent conductors of heat and electricity, and have the
property of reflecting light and forming mirrors; for looking-glasses
owe their power of reflecting objects principally to what is called the
“silvering;” that is, a mixture of mercury and tin spread over the back
of the glass, which being transparent, allows the image reflected from
the metal to pass through it.
The following classification is most instructive, because it suggests to
the young student that there must be identical properties in the metals
thus placed together:--
_Class 1._ Ammonium, cæsium, lithium, potassium, sodium.
_Class 2._ Calcium, barium, strontium.
_Class 3._ Aluminium, cerium, didymium, erbium, glucinium, lanthanum,
thorium, yttrium, zirconium.
_Class 4._ Zinc class: cadmium, magnesium, zinc.
_Class 5._ Iron class: cobalt, chromium, indium, iron, manganese,
nickel, uranium.
_Class 6._ Tin class: niobium, tantalum, tin, titanium.
_Class 7._ Tungsten class: molybdenum, tungsten, vanadium.
_Class 8._ Arsenic class: antimony, arsenic, bismuth.
_Class 9._ Lead class: lead, thallium.
_Class 10._ Silver class: copper, mercury, silver.
_Class 11._ Gold class: gold, iridium, osmium, palladium, platinum,
rhodium, ruthenium.
POTASSIUM.
Potassium was discovered by Sir H. Davy in the beginning of the present
century, while acting upon potash with the enormous galvanic battery of
the Royal Institution, consisting of 2,000 pairs of 4-inch plates. It is
a brilliant white metal, so soft as to be easily cut with a penknife,
and so light as to swim upon water, on which it acts with great energy,
uniting with the oxygen, and liberating the hydrogen, which takes fire
as it escapes.
EXPERIMENT.
Trace some continuous lines on paper with a camel’s-hair brush dipped in
water, and place a piece of potassium about the size of a pea on one of
the lines, and it will follow the course of the pencil, taking fire as
it runs, and burning with a purplish light. The paper will be found
covered with a solution of ordinary potash. If turmeric paper be used,
the course of the potassium will be marked with a deep brown
colour.--_Corollary._ Hence, if you touch potassium with _wet_ fingers
you will burn them!
If a small piece of the metal be placed on a piece of ice, it will
instantly take fire, and form a deep hole, which will be found to
contain a solution of potash.
In consequence of its great affinity for oxygen, potassium must be kept
in some fluid destitute of that element, such as naphtha.
_Caution!_--As the globules of potassium after conversion into potash,
when thrown on ice or water burst, strewing small particles of caustic
hot potash in every direction, the greatest care should be taken to
keep at a sufficient distance whilst performing the above experiment.
Saltpetre, or nitre, is a compound of this metal (or rather its oxide)
with nitric acid. It is one of the ingredients of gunpowder, and has the
property of quickening the combustion of all combustible bodies.
Mix some chlorate of potash with lump sugar, both being powdered, and
drop on the mixture a little strong sulphuric acid, and it will
instantly burst into flame. This experiment also requires caution.
Want of space precludes us from considering the individual metals and
their compounds in detail; it must suffice to describe some experiments
showing some of their properties.
The different affinities of the metals for oxygen may be exhibited in
various ways. The silver or zinc tree has already been described, page
357.
EXPERIMENTS.
1. Into a solution of nitrate of silver in distilled water immerse a
clean plate or slip of copper. The solution, which was colourless, will
soon begin to assume a greenish tint, and the piece of copper will be
covered with a coating of a light grey colour, which is the silver
formerly united to the nitric acid, which has been displaced by the
greater affinity or _liking_ of the oxygen and acid for the copper.
2. When the copper is no longer coated, but remains clean and bright
when immersed in the fluid, all the silver has been deposited, and the
glass now contains a solution of _copper_.
Place a piece of clean iron in the solution, and it will almost
instantly be coated with a film of _copper_, and this will continue
until the whole of that metal is removed, and its place filled by an
equivalent quantity of _iron_, so that nitrate of _iron_ is found in the
liquid. The oxygen and nitric acid remain unaltered in quantity or
quality during these changes, being merely transferred from one metal to
another.
A piece of zinc will displace the iron in like manner, leaving a
solution of nitrate of zinc.
Nearly all the colours used in the arts are produced by metals and their
combinations; indeed, one is named _chromium_, from a Greek word
signifying colour, on account of the beautiful tints obtained from its
various combinations with oxygen and the other metals. All the various
tints of green, orange, yellow, and red, are obtained from this metal.
Solutions of most of the metallic salts give precipitates with solutions
of alkalies and their salts, as well as with many other substances, such
as what are usually called prussiate of potash, hydro-sulphuret of
ammonia, &c.; and the colours differ according to the metal employed,
and so small a quantity is required to produce the colour that the
solutions before mixing may be nearly colourless.
EXPERIMENTS.
1. To a solution of sulphate of iron add a drop or two of a solution of
prussiate of potash, and a blue colour will be produced.
2. Substitute sulphate of copper for iron, and the colour will be a rich
brown.
3. Another blue, of quite a different tint, may be produced by letting a
few drops of a solution of ammonia fall into one of sulphate of
copper--a precipitate of a light blue falls down, which is dissolved by
an additional quantity of the ammonia, and forms a transparent solution
of the most splendid rich blue colour.
4. Into a solution of sulphate of iron let fall a few drops of a strong
infusion of galls, and the colour will become a bluish-black--in fact,
_ink_. A little _tea_ will answer as well as the infusion of galls. This
is the reason why certain stuffs formerly in general use for dressing
gowns for gentlemen were so objectionable; for as they were indebted to
a salt of iron for their colour, buff as it was called, a drop of tea
accidentally spilt produced all the effect of a drop of ink.
5. Put into a largish test tube two or three small pieces of granulated
zinc, fill it about one-third full of water, put in a few grains of
iodine and boil the water, which will at first acquire a dark purple
colour, gradually fading as the iodine combines with the zinc. Add a
little more iodine from time to time, until the zinc is nearly all
dissolved. If a few drops of this solution be added to an equally
colourless solution of corrosive sublimate (a salt of mercury) a
precipitate will take place of a splendid scarlet colour, brighter if
possible than vermilion, which is also a preparation of mercury.
CRYSTALLIZATION OF METALS.
Some of the metals assume certain definite forms in returning from the
fluid to the solid state. Bismuth shows this property more readily than
most others.
EXPERIMENT.
Melt a pound or two of bismuth in an iron ladle over the fire; remove it
as soon as the whole is fluid; and when the surface has become solid
break a hole in it, and pour out the still fluid metal from the
interior; what remains will exhibit beautifully formed crystals of a
cubic shape.
Sulphur may be crystallized in the same manner, but its fumes when
heated are so very unpleasant that few would wish to encounter them.
One of the most remarkable facts in chemistry, a science abounding in
wonders, is the circumstance, that the mere contact of hydrogen, the
_lightest_ body known, with the metal platinum, the heaviest, when in a
state of minute division, called spongy platinum, produces an intense
heat, sufficient to inflame the hydrogen: of course this experiment
must be made in the presence of atmospheric air or oxygen.
Time and space (or rather the want of them) compel us to conclude with a
few experiments of a miscellaneous character.
TO FORM A SOLID FROM TWO LIQUIDS.[7]
Prepare separately, saturated solutions of sulphate of magnesia (Epsom
salts) and carbonate of potash. On mixing them the result will be nearly
solid.
[7] Saturated solutions are made by adding the salt to _boiling_ water
until it will take up no more, letting it stand till cold and then
pouring off the liquid.
Solutions of muriate of lime and carbonate of potash will answer as
well.
TO FORM A LIQUID FROM TWO SOLIDS.
Rub together in a Wedgewood mortar a small quantity of sulphate of soda
and acetate of lead, and as they mix they will become liquid.
Carbonate of ammonia and sulphate of copper, previously reduced to
powder separately, will also, when mixed, become liquid, and acquire a
most splendid blue colour.
The greater number of salts have a tendency to assume regular forms, or
become _crystallised_, when passing from the fluid to the solid state;
and the size and regularity of the crystals depends in a great measure
on the slow or rapid escape of the fluid in which they were dissolved.
Sugar is a capital example of this property; the ordinary loaf-sugar
being rapidly boiled down, as it is called: while to make sugar-candy,
which is nothing but sugar in a crystallized form, the solution is
allowed to evaporate slowly, and as it cools it forms into those
beautiful crystals termed sugar-candy. The threads found in the centre
of some of the crystals are merely placed for the purpose of hastening
the formation of the crystals.
EXPERIMENTS.
1. Make a strong solution of alum, or of sulphate of copper, or blue
vitriol, and place in them rough and irregular pieces of clinker from
stoves, or wire-baskets, and set them by in a cool place, where they
will be free from dust, and in a few days crystals of the several salts
will deposit themselves on the baskets, &c.; they should then be taken
out of the solutions, and dried, when they form very pretty ornaments
for a room.
2. Fill a Florence flask up to the neck with a strong solution of
sulphate of soda, or Glauber’s salt, boil it, and tie the mouth over
with a piece of moistened bladder while boiling, and set it by in a
place where it cannot be disturbed. After twenty-four hours it will
probably still remain fluid. Pierce the bladder covering with a
penknife, and the entrance of the air will cause the whole mass
instantly to crystallize, and the flask will become quite warm from the
latent caloric, of which we have spoken before, given out by the salt in
passing from the fluid to the solid state. It is better to prepare two
or three flasks at the same time, to provide against accidents, for the
least shake will often cause crystallization to take place before the
proper time.
CHANGES OF COLOUR PRODUCED BY COLOURLESS LIQUIDS.
Make a strong infusion of the leaves of the red cabbage, which will be
of a beautiful _blue_ colour; drop into it a few drops of dilute
sulphuric acid, and the colour will change to a bright red; add some
solution of carbonate of potash, or soda, and the red colour will
gradually give way to the original blue; continue adding the alkaline
solution, and the fluid will assume a bright _green_ colour. Now resume
the acid, and as it is dropped in, the colour will again change from
green to blue, and from blue to red. Now this simple experiment
illustrates three points: first, that acids change the colour of most
vegetable blues and greens to red; second, that alkalies change most
blues and reds to green; and third, that when the acid and alkali are
united together, they both lose their property of changing colour, and
become what is called a _neutral_ salt, _i. e._ a compound possessing
the properties of _neither_ of its constituents.
[Illustration]
ELECTRICITY.
No branch of science is more capable of affording amusement, combined
with instruction, than electricity, and there are few sciences in which
the experiments are more easily performed. We would therefore especially
recommend it to our young friends.
The term electricity is derived from the Greek word _electron_,
signifying amber, because electrical attraction was first discovered
from its being noticed that when amber was rubbed into a certain degree
of warmth, it had the power of attracting small bodies to itself.
Electricity therefore primarily treats of the phenomena and effects
produced by the friction or rubbing together of certain bodies called
electrics. These consist of glass, amber, resinous matters, silks, hair,
wool, feathers, various vegetable substances, and atmospheric air, and
the electricity so obtained is usually called Frictional Electricity, to
distinguish it from that produced by chemical action, and called Voltaic
Electricity.
SIMPLE MEANS OF PRODUCING ELECTRICITY.
To show the nature of electrical action, rub a piece of sealing-wax or
amber upon the coat-sleeve, and it will attract light bodies, such as
straws or small pieces of paper. If a clean glass tube be rubbed several
times through a silken or leather cloth, and presented to any small
substances, it will immediately attract and then repel them; and if a
poker suspended by a dry silk string be presented to its upper end, then
the lower end of the poker will exhibit the same phenomena as the tube
itself, which shows that the opposite electrical condition may be
induced upon other bodies by the mere neighbourhood and approach of
another electrified body, and the effect so produced is called induced
electricity.
[Illustration]
When an electrified conductor is supported by non-conductors, so that
the electric fluid cannot pass from the conductor to the earth, it is
said to be insulated: thus the human body is a conductor of
electricity--but if a person standing on a glass stool (as represented
in the drawing) be charged with electricity, the electric fluid cannot
pass from him to the earth, and he is said to be _insulated_; and if he
be touched by another person standing on the ground, sparks will be
exhibited at the point of contact, where also the person touching will
feel a pricking sensation.
[Illustration]
ATTRACTION AND REPULSION EXHIBITED.
[Illustration]
In order to illustrate certain remarkable facts in this science of an
amusing character, attention must be directed to the figure A B, which
is a metal stand; C is a small piece of cork or pith, which is suspended
from the hook by a dry silken thread. Having rubbed an electric, as a
dry rod of glass, and presented it to C, the ball will be
instantaneously attracted to the glass and will adhere to it. After they
remain in contact for a few seconds, if the glass be withdrawn without
being touched by the fingers, and again presented to the ball, the
latter will be _repelled_ instead of attracted, as in the first
instance. By being touched with the finger, the ball can be deprived of
its electricity, and if after this has been done we present a piece of
sealing-wax in the place of the glass formerly employed, the very same
phenomena will take place. On the first application the ball will be
_attracted_, and on the second _repelled_.[8]
[8] For a more complete account of this interesting science we would
refer the young reader to “The Boy’s Playbook on Science,” or, if
more advanced, to “Noad’s Manual of Electricity.”
Before the young reader can perform any very important experiments with
electricity, he must become possessed of an ELECTRICAL MACHINE, which is
an instrument contrived for the purpose of rubbing together the surfaces
of glass and leather. They generally consist of a cylinder, or plate of
glass, and a piece of silk or leather for it to rub against, covered
with an amalgam, the method of preparing which we shall hereafter
describe.
HOW TO MAKE AN ELECTRICAL MACHINE.
[Illustration]
It is very easy to make a glass machine of the cylindrical form, if the
maker cannot afford to buy one. First procure a common wine bottle of
good dimensions, and thickish glass. Drill a hole through its bottom,
with a file moistened with dilute sulphuric acid. A blacksmith, if
supplied with the acid, would undertake to do this part of the work.
Through this hole and the mouth pass a spindle, as represented in the
cut. The end of B should be squared to fix a handle on, and the spindle
should be fixed firmly in the bottle. The bottle is then to be fixed in
a frame in the following manner: the end of the spindle C passes through
a hole at B; and the other end at C has the handle for turning the
machine.
[Illustration]
Next make a cushion of wash-leather stuffed with wool, and fastened to
the top of a frame of the following figure. This frame is to be of such
a height that the cushion shall press against the sides of the bottle,
and a piece of black silk is sewn on to the top of the cushion, and
hangs over the bottle D. The cushion should be smeared with an amalgam,
formed by melting together in the bowl of a tobacco-pipe one part of tin
with two of zinc; to which, while fluid, should be added six parts of
mercury. These should be stirred about till quite cold, and then reduced
to a fine powder in a mortar, and mixed with a sufficient quantity of
lard to form a thickish paste. When all is done, the machine is
complete.
[Illustration: CUSHION.]
THE CONDUCTOR.
The electricity being generated by the friction produced between the
rubber and the bottle from the motion imparted by the handle, it is
necessary to draw it off for use. This is performed by what is called a
conductor. This is made by covering a cylinder of turned wood six inches
long and two and a half inches in diameter, and nicely rounded at the
ends, with tinfoil, which is then mounted on a stand on a glass rod.
When used, it is to be placed in the direction of the length. In it some
pins are inserted, with the points outside, in a line even with, and
about half an inch from, the bottle, and it should be of such a height
as to come just below the silk apron. When it is wished to charge a
Leyden jar, it is to be placed at the round end of the conductor. By
these simple means a great variety of pleasing experiments may be
performed; but to show the various phenomena connected with this
interesting study, we shall now describe an electrical machine of the
newest construction, and perform our experiments with it.
THE PLATE ELECTRICAL MACHINE.
[Illustration]
Formerly the electrical machine was made in the form of a cylinder, but
now it consists of a plate A, as seen in the engraving. The plate is
turned by the handle F through the rubber B B, which diffuses the
excitement over the glass. The points or balls at each side of the plate
carry off a constant stream of positive electricity to the prime
conductor C. Negative electricity is generated by insulating the
conductor to which the cushion is attached, and continuing the prime
conductor with the ground, so as to carry off the fluid collected from
the plate.
HOW TO DRAW SPARKS FROM THE TIP OF THE NOSE.
If the person who works the machine be supported on a stool having glass
legs, and connected with the conductor by means of a glass rod, the
electricity will pass from the conductor to him, and as it cannot get
away, owing to the glass on which he stands being a non-conductor, any
person on touching him can draw the electricity from him, which will
exhibit itself in small sparks as it passes to the person who touches
him. If touched on the nose, sparks of fire will issue from it.
HOW TO CHARGE A LEYDEN JAR.
[Illustration]
A most useful piece of electrical apparatus is called the Leyden jar,
here represented. It is employed for the purpose of obtaining a quantity
of electricity, which may be applied to any substance. It consists of a
glass jar, coated both inside and without, four-fifths of the way up,
with tinfoil. A knob rises through a wooden top communicating with the
inside of the jar. When it is wished to charge the jar, this knob is
applied to the prime conductor of the electrical machine when in action,
and a quantity of electricity being given off, the jar will remain
charged with it till a connexion is made, by some good conductor of
electricity, between the knob and the outside tinfoil. A piece of brass
chain must hang from the stem that carries the knob, and connect it with
the interior of the jar.
THE ELECTRICAL BATTERY.
[Illustration]
If several of these jars be united, a large quantity of electricity can
be collected; but, in arranging them, all the interior coatings must be
made to communicate by metallic rods, and a similar union must be
effected among the exterior coatings. When thus arranged, the whole
series may be charged as if they formed but one jar.
[Illustration]
For the purpose of making a direct communication between the inner or
outer coatings of a jar or battery, by which a discharge is effected, an
instrument called a discharging rod is employed. It consists of two bent
metallic rods, terminating at one end by brass balls, and connected at
another by a joint which is fixed to the end of a glass handle, and
which, acting like a pair of compasses, allows of the balls being
separated at certain distances. When opened to the proper degree, one of
the balls is made to touch the exterior coating, and the other ball is
then brought into contact with the knob of the jar, when a discharge is
effected; while the glass handle secures the person holding it from the
effects of the shock.
DANCING BALLS AND DOLLS.
[Illustration]
Get two round pieces of wood, A B, and coat them with tinfoil; or two
pieces of metal plate; attach one of them to the prime conductor by a
chain, and let it hang about two or three inches from the knob. Place
some pith-balls upon the bottom piece of wood B, and bring it under the
other. Immediately this is done, and the upper piece is charged with
electricity from the machine, the pith-balls will jump up and down, and
from one to the other with great rapidity. If some of the pith be formed
into little figures, they will also dance and leap about in the most
grotesque manner. The same may be made to dance by merely holding the
inside of a dry glass tumbler to the prime conductor for a few minutes,
while the machine is in action, and then if this be placed over them
they will jump about, to the astonishment of the spectators, as the
cause of their motions is not quite so apparent.
THE ELECTRICAL KISS.
This amusing experiment is performed by means of the electrical stool.
Let any lady challenge a gentleman not acquainted with the experiment to
favour her with a salute. The lady thereupon mounts the glass stool, and
takes hold of a chain connected with the prime conductor. The machine
being then put in motion the gentleman approaches the lady, and
immediately he attempts to imprint the seal of soft affection upon her
coral lips, a spark will fly in his face, which generally deters him
from his rash and wicked intention.
RINGING BELLS.
[Illustration]
Bells may be made to ring by electricity in the following manner. Let
three small bells be suspended from a brass wire, D D, and supported by
a glass pillar A, passing through bell B to the bell E. The electrical
apparatus being attached to the knob F, the electricity passes down the
wires D D to the bells, which are then positively electrified and
attract the clappers C C, that are negatively so, in consequence of
being insulated by the silken strings, which are not conductors. The
bells therefore attract the clappers till they are charged, when they
strike against the centre bell to discharge themselves, and thus a peal
is rung on the bells until the electricity is driven off.
WORKING POWER OF ELECTRICITY.
This may be shown in a variety of ways. The subjoined machine will
exhibit the principle upon which many ingenious toys may be made by the
young philosopher. In the figure A is a wooden board or stand, B B B B,
four pillars of glass, gutta-percha, or sealing-wax, having fine wires,
C C, stretched above. On these rest the rotatory wire or wheel F, having
its points turned the reverse ways. By means of a chain attached to the
conductor, and to the instrument at B, the electricity passes over the
pillar B, up the wire C into the wheel, and off at the points, which
causes it to be turned round on an inclined plane till it reaches the
top.
[Illustration]
THE ELECTRIFIED WIG.
While a person is on the electrical stool, if he be charged with much
electricity,
“Each hair will stand on end,
Like quills upon the fretful porcupine.”
[Illustration]
A wooden head--not your own, but a real wooden head--with a wig of
streaming hair, and a handsome face to correspond, may be made in the
following form, with a wire in the neck to support it by, and fixed in
the conductor of an electrical machine. When this is put in motion the
hair will rise up, as in the figure, in a manner to astonish even the
“big-wigs.”
IMITATION THUNDERCLOUDS.
[Illustration]
To show the manner in which thunderclouds perform their operations in
the air, A A is a wooden stand, on which are erected two uprights, B B;
C C are two small pulleys, over which a silken cord can pull easily; E
is another silken line stretched across from one upright to another; on
these silken cords two pieces of thin cardboard covered with tinfoil,
and cut so as to represent clouds, are to be fixed horizontally, and
made to communicate, by means of thin wires F and G, one with the
_inside_, and the other with the _outside_, of a charged jar, D. Now, by
pulling the loop of the silk line, the clouds will be brought near the
cloud 2; continue this slowly, until the clouds (which are furnished
with two small brass balls) are within an inch of each other, when a
beautiful flash, strongly resembling lightning in miniature, will pass
from one cloud to the other, restoring electrical equilibrium.
THE LIGHTNING STROKE IMITATED.
[Illustration]
If the jar D be put behind the stand, and the cloud 2 removed, a vessel
communicating by means of a wire with the outside of the jar may be swum
in water under the remaining cloud; the mast being made of two pieces,
and but slightly joined together, with a hollow space in one half of the
mast, into which the ends of the conductor pass, but do not touch,
leaving an interval of about a quarter of an inch between them. The
hollow is then filled with gun-cotton, and closed with cork. When the
cloud is passed over the vessel, the mast will be struck and shattered
to pieces. A strip of tinfoil, arranged with pins over the hollow part
of the mast, will show how a continuous conductor will convey the
discharge safely away.
THE SPORTSMAN.
This apparatus is capable of affording much amusement. A is a stand of
wood, B is a common Leyden jar, out of which proceed the wires H H--one
terminating in ball F, the other in the ball D--to which are attached a
number of pith birds by silken strings; E is a shelf for the birds to
rest upon; C is the sportsman; G his gun.
[Illustration]
To put this operation in motion the Leyden jar is to be charged with
electricity by affixing a chain to the bottom part of it, and connecting
it with an electrical machine in the usual manner, or by applying it to
a prime conductor, when the birds will fly off the knob to which they
are fixed in consequence of their being repelled. If the sportsman and
gun be then turned, so that the end of his gun shall touch the knob F,
an electric spark will pass from one to the other, a report will be
heard, and the birds will fall down as if shot, in consequence of the
electricity having been taken from the Leyden jar. There should be a
communication between the sportsman and the jar formed of tinfoil, or
some metal, as shown by the dotted line on the stand.
Such are a few of many numerous experiments which may be made by the
young experimenter, who is fond of science and has any ingenuity; but
should he like to amuse himself with an electrifying machine of little
cost, he may warm a sheet of brown paper, and then rub it briskly on a
teatray with india-rubber; on raising the paper in a dark room, he will
see many pretty electrical sparks.
The back of a black tom cat is sometimes recommended as a cheap
electrical machine; but as the wishes of the animal have to be
consulted, perhaps it is wiser to leave the cat alone.
[Illustration]
GALVANISM, OR VOLTAIC ELECTRICITY.
“To play with fire
They say is dangerous; what is it then
To shake hands with the lightning, and to sport
With thunder?”--TYLER.
Galvanism, or electricity of quantity, in contradistinction to
frictional electricity, called electricity of intensity, owes its name
to the experiments on animal irritability made in 1790 by M. Galvani, a
professor of anatomy at Bologna. These experiments were suggested by the
following circumstances.
ORIGIN OF GALVANISM.
It happened that the wife of Galvani, who was consumptive, was advised
to take as an article of food some soup made of the flesh of frogs.
Several of these creatures were killed and skinned, and were lying on
the table in the laboratory close to an electrical machine, with which a
pupil of the professor was making experiments. While the machine was in
action, he chanced to touch the bare nerve of the leg of one of the
frogs with the blade of the knife that he had in his hand, when suddenly
the whole limb was thrown into violent convulsions. Galvani was not
present when this occurred; but being informed of it, he immediately set
himself to investigate the cause. He found that it was only when a spark
was drawn from the prime conductor, and when the knife or any other good
conductor was in contact with the nerve, that the contracting took
place; and after a time he discovered that the effect was independent of
the electrical machine, and might be equally well produced by making a
metallic communication between the outside muscle and the crural nerve.
SIMPLE EXPERIMENT TO EXCITE GALVANIC ACTION.
If the young experimenter will obtain a piece of zinc of the size of
half a crown and place it on the top of his tongue, and place a
half-crown underneath it, and bring the edges of the half-crown and zinc
in contact in front of his tongue, he will notice a peculiar sensation
in the nerves of this organ, and some taste will be imparted to his
mouth at the moment of contact.
WITH METAL PLATES IN WATER.
[Illustration]
If we take two plates of different kinds of metal, platinum (or copper)
and zinc, for example, and immerse them in pure water, having wires
attached to them above, then if the wire of each is brought into contact
in another vessel of water, a galvanic circle will be formed, the water
will be slowly decomposed, its oxygen will be fixed on the zinc wire,
and at the same time a current of electricity will be transmitted
through the liquid to the platina or copper wire, on the end of which
the other element of water, namely, the hydrogen, will make its
appearance in the form of minute gas bubbles. The electrical current
passes back again into the zinc at the points of its contact with the
platina, and thus a continued current is kept up, and hence it is called
a galvanic circle. The moment the circuit is broken by separating the
wires the current ceases, but is again renewed by making them touch
either in or out of the water. If a small quantity of sulphuric acid be
added to the water, the phenomenon will be more apparent. The end of the
wire attached to the piece of platinum or copper is called the positive
pole of the battery, and that of the wire attached to the zinc the
negative pole.
The current of electricity here generated will be extremely feeble; but
this can be easily increased by multiplying the glasses and the number
of the pieces of metal. If we take six such glasses instead of one,
partially fill them with dilute sulphuric acid, and put a piece of zinc
and copper into each, connecting them by means of copper wire from glass
to glass through the whole series, a stronger current of electricity
will be the result. The experimenter must be careful not to let the wire
and zinc touch each other at the bottom of the tumblers, and must also
remember that the copper of glass 1 is connected with the zinc of glass
2, and so on.
[Illustration]
TO MAKE A MAGNET BY THE VOLTAIC CURRENT.
To effect this, make a connexion between the poles of the above or any
excited battery with the two ends of a wire formed into a spiral coil,
by bending common bonnet-wire closely round a cylinder, or tube, of
about an inch in diameter; into this coil introduce a needle or piece of
steel wire, laying it lengthways down the circles of the coil. In a few
minutes after the electric fluid has passed through the spiral wire, and
consequently round the needle or wire, the latter will be found to be
strongly magnetized, and to possess all the properties of a magnet.
EFFECTS OF GALVANISM ON A MAGNET.
If a galvanic current, or any electric current, be made to pass along a
wire under which, and in a line with it, a compass is placed, it will be
found that the needle will no longer point north and south, but will
take a direction nearly across the current, and point almost east and
west.
CHANGE OF COLOUR BY GALVANISM.
Put a teaspoonful of sulphate of soda into a cup, and dissolve it in hot
water; pour a little cabbage blue into the solution, and put a portion
into two glasses, connecting them by a piece of linen or cotton cloth
previously moistened in the same solution. On putting one of the wires
of the galvanic pole into each glass, the acid accumulates in the one,
turning the blue to a red, and the alkali in the other, rendering it
green. If the wires be now reversed, the acid accumulates eventually in
the glass where the alkali appeared, while the alkali passes to the
glass where the acid was.
THE GALVANIC SHOCK.
If the ends of the wires of a small galvanic battery are connected with
a proper electro-magnetic coil, which may now be purchased at a very
cheap rate, and the wires from the coil be placed in separate basins of
water, then, on dipping the fingers of each hand in the basin, a smart
shock will be felt, with a particular aching accompanied with trembling.
With a strong battery and larger coil this effect is felt as high as the
shoulders. The shock will also be felt by simply holding the wires of a
powerful galvanic battery, one in each hand, provided the hands be
moistened with salt and water. Several persons may receive the shock
from the battery and coil together by joining hands.
THE ELECTROTYPE.
The electro-galvanic current has in no case been more interestingly
employed than in the process of electrotyping. It consists of a mode of
obtaining the copy of coins, medals, engraved plates, and other objects,
which may be easily illustrated.
HOW TO MAKE AN ELECTROTYPE APPARATUS.
[Illustration]
Take an earthen jar and a porous tube; fill the tube with ten parts of
water and one of sulphuric acid; put it into the jar, into which pour as
much of a solution of sulphate of copper (blue vitriol) as will fill
three parts of it; place in the tube a piece of zinc, to which a copper
wire is soldered and bent round, so that one end be immersed in the
sulphate of copper; and a deposit of the copper will be immediately
formed upon the wire. If there be plenty of acid and water, so as to
allow of the action enduring for a long time, this process will go on
till it has deposited all the copper. This is the principle upon which
electrotyping proceeds,--a principle referable to electro-chemical
decomposition.
The diagram represents an outer vessel of wood, glass, or earthenware,
capable of holding a pint of liquid, within which there is suspended a
short lamp-glass A, the one end being open, and the other, B, closed
with a diaphragm of plaster of Paris; C is a small bag of crystals of
sulphate of copper, to keep up the strength of the solution; Z is the
zinc, and M the metal.
TO OBTAIN THE COPY OF A COIN OR MEDAL.
Never place the original medal in the apparatus, or the deposited copper
may adhere so tightly to it that the removal destroys the beauty of the
medal. Having taken an impression in sealing-wax, cover the latter with
black-lead, and attach a wire so that it is in contact with the
black-lead. To the wire and cast thus arranged a piece of sheet or cast
zinc, amalgamated with mercury, must be attached, and we are at once
furnished with the materials for the battery, as the object to be copied
supplies the place of the copper. The medal must always be placed
horizontally. Now let the apparatus be charged with the solution, by
pouring into the outer vessel a portion of the coppery solution, so that
it will stand about an inch above the medal; then pour in the glass the
dilute acid to the same height as the former; now introduce the zinc
into the acid, and the object to be copied into the solution of copper,
which will immediately be deposited on the medal, and when of a
sufficient thickness may be taken off.
HEAT.
HEAT, OR CALORIC.
The chief agent in causing the repulsion or separation of the particles
of bodies from each other is heat, or more correctly _caloric_, by which
is understood the unknown _cause_ of the effect called heat.
Philosophers are not agreed upon the nature of this wonderful agent. It
pervades all nature, is the cause of nearly all the changes that take
place both in organic and inorganic matter, and has great influence in
the meteorological phenomena which we observe in the atmosphere that
surrounds our planet. It appears to be intimately connected with light,
electricity, and magnetism,--subjects which the genius of Faraday and
others have investigated, and by their discoveries brought us nearer to
the knowledge of the real nature of these most wonderful forces.
Caloric, then, exists in all bodies, and has a constant tendency to
equalize itself, as far at least as its outward manifestation, called
temperature, is concerned; for if a _hot_ body be brought near colder
ones, it will give up heat to them, until by its loss and their gain
they all become of the same temperature; and this proceeds more or less
rapidly, according as the original difference of temperature was greater
or less. Some other circumstances also influence this equalization. The
converse will take place on introducing a cold body among warmer ones,
when heat will be abstracted from all the bodies within reach of its
influence, until it has absorbed sufficient caloric to bring its own
temperature to an equality with theirs. This is the true explanation of
the apparent production of _cold_. When, for instance, an iceberg comes
across a ship’s course, it appears to _give out_ cold, whereas, it has
abstracted the heat from the air and sea in its neighbourhood, and they
in turn act upon the ship and everything in it, until one common
temperature is produced in all the neighbouring bodies.
It does not follow that the bodies thus equalized in temperature contain
equal quantities of caloric; far from it. Each body requires a
particular quantity of caloric to raise its temperature through a
certain number of degrees; and such quantity is called its _specific_
caloric. A pound of water, for instance, will take just twice as much
caloric as a pound of olive oil, to raise its temperature through the
same number of degrees; the _specific_ caloric of water is therefore
double that of oil. Mix any quantity of oil at 60° of temperature with
an equal weight of water at 90°, and you will find the temperature of
the mixture to be nearly 80°, instead of only 74° or 75°, showing that
while the water has lost only 10° of caloric, the mixture has risen 20°.
If the oil be at 90°, and the water at 60°, the resulting temperature
will be only 70°, or thereabouts, instead of 75°, the mean; thus, here
the hot oil has lost 20°, while the mixture has risen only 10°; the
water, then, contains at the same temperature _twice_ as much caloric as
the oil; its specific caloric is _double_ that of the oil. This mean
temperature does result when equal weights of the _same_ body at
different temperatures are mixed together.
The sensations called heat and cold are by no means accurate measures of
the real temperature of any substances, for many causes influence these
sensations, some belonging to the substances themselves, others to the
state of our organs at the time. Every one has remarked that metals in a
warm room feel warmer, and in a cold room colder than wooden articles,
and these again than woollen or cotton articles of dress or furniture;
this arises from metals being what is termed better _conductors_ of heat
than wood, and this better than wool, &c., that is, they give out or
absorb caloric more rapidly than these last. Some philosophers, wishing
to ascertain how much heat the human body could endure, had a room
heated with stoves, every crevice being carefully stopped, until the
temperature rose so high that a beefsteak placed on the table was
sufficiently cooked to be eaten. They were dressed in flannel, and could
with impunity touch the carpets, curtains, &c., in the room; but the
iron handles, fire-irons, and all metallic substances, burnt their
fingers; and one who wore silver spectacles was obliged to remove them
to save his nose. The fallacy of our sensations may be easily shown by
taking two basins, placing in one some water at 100°, in another some
water at as low a temperature as can easily be procured--hold the right
hand in one, the left in the other, for a few minutes, and then mix
them, and place both hands in the mixture; it will feel quite _cold_ to
the hand that had been in the hotter water, and _hot_ to the other.
In order to arrive at a correct estimate of the temperature of bodies,
instruments are made use of called thermometers, or measurers of heat,
which show increase or diminution of temperature by the rising or
falling of a column of some fluid in a tube of glass, one end of which
is expanded into a bulb, and the other hermetically sealed. This effect
is produced by the expansion or swelling of the fluid as caloric is
added to, and its contraction when caloric is abstracted from it.
Coloured spirits of wine, or quicksilver, are the most usual
thermometric fluids, and the tube containing them is fixed to a wooden
or metallic frame, on which certain divisions are marked, called
degrees.
That in general use in England is called Fahrenheit’s, from the name of
the person who first introduced that particular scale. In this
thermometer, the point at which the mercury in the tube stands when
plunged into melting ice, is marked 32°, and the distance between that
point, and the point to which the mercury rises in boiling water, is
divided into 180 equal parts, called degrees; so that water is said to
boil at 212° = 180° + 32°. There are two other scales of temperature
used in different parts of the world, but it is not worth while to
notice them here.
Not only do different bodies at the same degree of temperature contain
very different quantities of caloric, but this also is the case with the
same body in different forms. Ice, water, and steam, are three forms of
the same body, but ice at 32° contains much less caloric than water at
the same temperature, and water at 212° contains much less caloric than
steam (or water in a state of vapour) at that temperature.
Place in a jar any given quantity of snow, or small pieces of ice, at
32°, and in another the same weight of water at 32°, pour on each an
equal weight of water at 172°, and you will find that in the first case
the ice will be melted, but the temperature will remain at 32° or
thereabouts, while the temperature of the water in the other vessel will
have risen to 100° or thereabouts, being as near as possible the half of
the excess of the temperature of the hot water, 140° over that of the
cold, namely 70° added to 32°, the original temperature. Now, what has
become of the heat which was added to the ice, and is apparently
lost?--it is _absorbed_ by the ice in its passage to the fluid state; so
that water may be said to be a compound of ice and caloric.
Again, take 10 ounces of water at about 50°, and add 1 oz. of water at
212°, and the temperature of the mixture will be about 66°; then
condense some steam at 212°, into another 10 oz. of water until it has
become 11 oz., and you will find the temperature will be nearly 212°.
Why does the ounce of steam at 212° raise the temperature of the water
so much higher than the ounce of water at the same temperature?
Obviously because it contains hidden in its substance a vast quantity of
caloric, not to be detected by the thermometer; in fact, that steam is a
compound of _water_ and caloric, as water is a compound of _ice_ and
caloric; and this caloric which exists, more or less, in all bodies
without producing any obvious effect, is called _latent_ caloric, from
the Latin verb _lateo_, to lie hid. The quantity of caloric thus
absorbed as it were by various bodies, differs for each body, and for
the same body in different forms, as mentioned above.
EXPANSION.
As a general rule, all bodies, whether solid, liquid, or gaseous, are
expanded by caloric. This may be shown by experiments in each form of
matter.
Have a small iron rod made, which when cold just passes through a hole
in a plate of metal; heat it, and it will no longer pass; after a time
the rod will return to its former temperature, and then will go through
the hole as before. The rod increases in length as well as width; if you
have a gauge divided into 1/100 of an inch, and place the rod in it when
cold, noting its position, on heating it will extend to a greater length
in the gauge, returning to its former place when cool.
The effect of caloric in causing fluids to expand is actually employed
as a measure of quantity in the thermometer, the rise of the fluid in
the tube when heated depending on the increased bulk of the fluid
occasioned by the addition of caloric. The same fact is to be noticed
every day when the cook fills the kettle, and places it on the fire. As
the water becomes warmer it expands, that is, takes up more room than it
did before, and the water escapes by slow degrees, increasing as the
heat increases, up to the point of boiling, when a sudden commotion
takes place from the condensation of a portion of the water into steam.
But it is in the form of vapour or gas, (which by the bye is not the
same thing,[9]) that the expansive force of caloric is most obvious. The
gigantic powers of the steam-engine depend entirely on the tendency of
vapour to expand on the addition of caloric; and this force of
expansion appears to have no limit; boilers made of iron plates an inch
or even more in thickness, and the buildings or ships containing them,
having been torn to pieces and scattered in all directions by the
expansive power of steam. Take a bladder, and fill it about half full of
air, and tie the neck securely; upon holding it to the fire it will
swell out, and become quite tense from the expansion of the contained
air.
[9] It may be well to state here, that by _vapour_ is generally
understood the aërial form of a substance usually existing in a
solid or fluid form at ordinary temperatures; as the vapour of
iodine, a solid; of mercury, water, spirits, and other fluids:
while the term _gas_ is applied to those bodies usually known in
the aërial state; thus oxygen, nitrogen, carbonic acid, hydrogen,
&c. &c., are called gases. It is, however, but an arbitrary
distinction; for many of these gases have, by the combined
influence of cold and powerful pressure, been converted into
fluids, and even solids--carbonic acid gas for instance!
The principal source of caloric is the sun, whose beams, diffused
through all nature by the refractive property of the atmosphere, are the
source of vitality both to vegetables and animals, and when concentrated
by a large convex lens, produce the most intense heat, sufficient to
light a piece of diamond, and melt platinum. Caloric is also produced or
evolved by combustion, by friction, percussion, chemical combination,
electricity, and galvanism.
The evolution of heat by friction may be witnessed daily in a thousand
instances. Lucifer matches are lighted by rubbing the highly inflammable
substances with which they are tipped against a piece of sand-paper.
Nearly all savage people procure fire by rubbing a piece of hard wood
violently against a softer piece. The axle-trees of steam-engines, and
even of carriages, have been known to be so heated by friction as to
endanger burning the carriage; and it is very usual to be obliged to
pour a quantity of cold water on the iron axle of the carriages of an
express train after an hour of constant and rapid work. If you merely
rub the blade of a knife rapidly on a piece of wood, it will become hot
enough to burn your hand.
Percussion is merely a more energetic kind of friction, and is often
resorted to by the blacksmith to light his furnace. He places a nail or
other piece of soft iron on his anvil, and beats it rapidly with the
hammer, when it becomes actually red hot. The production of sparks by
striking flint against steel, or two pieces of flint one against the
other, are familiar instances of heat produced by percussion.
One of the most powerful means of producing heat is the process of
combustion.
Combustion, as the word imports, is the _burning together_ of two or
more substances, a chemical union of oxygen generally with carbon and
hydrogen in some shape or other. In our ordinary fires we burn coal, a
hydro-carbon as it is called; and the gas which is now so universally
used for the purpose of illumination, is a compound of the same
bodies--so wax, tallow, oil of various kinds, both of animal and
vegetable origin, are all hydro-carbons.
On the application of a sufficient heat, and a free access of
atmospheric air, or of some other gas containing oxygen in a certain
state of combination, these bodies take fire, and continue to burn
either with flame, or a red or even white heat without flame, until they
are consumed; that is, until they have entered into new combinations
with the oxygen, and are converted into carbonic acid and water, the
carbon forming the first product, the hydrogen the other.
[Illustration]
The following experiment shows the production of heat by chemical action
alone. Bruise some fresh prepared crystals of nitrate of copper, spread
them over a piece of tin-foil, sprinkle them with a little water; then
fold up the foil tightly as rapidly as possible, and in a minute or two
it will become red-hot, the tin apparently burning away. This heat is
produced by the energetic action of the tin on the nitrate of copper,
taking away its oxygen in order to unite with the nitric acid, for
which, as well as for the oxygen, the tin has a much greater affinity
than the copper has.
Combustion without flame may be shown in a very elegant and agreeable
manner, by making a coil of platinum wire by twisting it round the stem
of a tobacco-pipe, or any cylindrical body, for a dozen times or so,
leaving about an inch straight, which should be inserted into the wick
of a spirit-lamp; light the lamp, and after it has burnt for a minute or
two extinguish the flame quickly; the wire will soon become red hot,
and, if kept from draughts of air, will continue to burn until all the
spirit is consumed. Spongy platinum, as it is called, answers rather
better than wire, and has been employed in the formation of fumigators
for the drawing-room, in which, instead of pure spirit, some perfume,
such as lavender water, is used; by its combustion an agreeable odour is
diffused through the apartment. These little lamps were much in vogue a
few years ago, but are now nearly out of fashion.
Experiments on combustion might be multiplied almost to any amount, but
the above will be sufficient for the present. When we come to treat of
the properties of the gases and some other substances, we shall have
occasion to recur to this subject.
The production of caloric by chemical combination may be exhibited by
mixing carefully one part of oil of vitriol with two of water, when
sufficient heat will be produced to boil some water in a thin and narrow
tube, which may be used as a rod to stir the mixture.
The production of heat by electric and galvanic agency belongs to
another subject. I will content myself with saying here, that these
forces afford the most powerful aid in decomposing and uniting various
bodies, and that it was by the immense power of a battery of 2,000 pairs
of plates, belonging to the Royal Institution in London, that Sir H.
Davy discovered the metallic bases of the alkalies and earths.
HYDRAULICS.
The science of Hydraulics comprehends the laws which regulate
non-elastic fluids in motion, and especially water, &c.
[Illustration]
Water can only be set in motion by two causes--the pressure of the
atmosphere, or its own gravity. The principal law concerning fluids is,
that they always preserve their own level. Hence water can be
distributed over a town from any reservoir that is higher than the
houses to be supplied; and the same principle will enable us to form
fountains in a garden, or other place. Should any of our young friends
wish to form a fountain, or jet d’eau, they may, by bringing a pipe from
T, a water-tank, which should be at the upper part of the house, convey
the water down to the garden. Then by leading it through the earth,
underneath the path or grass-plot, and turning it to a perpendicular
position, the water will spring out, and rise nearly as high as the
level of that in the tank. The part of the pipe at B should have a
turnkey, so that the water may be let on or shut off at pleasure.
THE SYPHON.
[Illustration]
The syphon B is a bent tube, having one leg shorter than the other. It
acts by the pressure of the atmosphere. In order to make a syphon act,
it is necessary first to fill both legs quite full of the fluid; and
then the shorter leg must be placed in the vessel to be emptied.
Immediately upon withdrawing the finger from the longer leg, the liquor
will flow. Any young person may form a syphon by a small piece of leaden
pipe, bent into the form above.
THE PUMP.
[Illustration]
The action of the common pump is as follows: When the handle A is
raised, the piston-rod B descends, and brings the piston-valve, called
the sucker, or bucket, to another valve, C, which is fixed, and opens
inwards towards the piston. When the handle is drawn down, the piston is
raised, and, as it is air-tight, a vacuum is produced between the two
valves; the air in the barrel of the pump, betwixt the lower valve and
the water, then forces open the lower valve, and rushes through to fill
up this vacuum; and the air in the pump being less dense than the
external atmosphere, the water is forced a short way up the barrel. When
the piston again descends to the lower valve, the air between them is
again forced out by forcing open the upper valve; and when the piston is
raised, a vacuum is again produced, and the air below the lower valve
rushes up, and the water in consequence is again raised a little
further. This operation continues until the water rises above the lower
valve; at every stroke afterwards, the water passes through the valve of
the descending piston, and is raised by it, on its ascent, until it
issues out of the spout.
THE HYDRAULIC DANCER.
[Illustration]
Make a little figure of cork, in the shape of a dancing mountebank,
sailor, &c. In this figure place a small hollow cone, made of thin leaf
brass. When this figure is placed upon any jet d’eau, such as that of
the fountain recommended to be constructed, it will be suspended on the
top of the water, and perform a great variety of amusing motions. If a
hollow ball of very thin copper, of an inch in diameter, be placed on a
similar jet, it will remain suspended, turning round and spreading the
water all about it.
THE WATER SNAIL, OR ARCHIMEDEAN SCREW,
[Illustration]
may easily be constructed. Purchase a yard of small leaden pipe, and
twist it round a pole, as in the following figure, A; place a handle at
its upper end, B, and let its lower end rest in the water. Between the
last turn of the pipe and the orifice place a paddle-wheel, C. Now,
should the water be that of a running stream, the force of the stream
will turn the pipe, and the water will rise in it till it empties itself
into the trough at D. Should the water have no motion, the turning of
the handle at B will elevate the water from the lower to the higher
level.
[Illustration]
MAGNETISM.
The attractive power of the loadstone has been known from a very remote
period. The natural magnet appears native in a grey iron ore in
octahedral crystals, composed of 168 parts of iron, and 64 parts of
oxygen, Fe₃O₄. Its properties seem to have been studied in Europe during
the dark ages, and a directive power is alluded to by Cardinal James de
Vitri, who flourished about the year 1200, who observed, that it was
indispensable to those who travel much by sea.
In modern times, the history as well as the nature of the magnet has
engaged remarkable attention; and it has been determined beyond all
dispute that the magnet was used by the Chinese under the name of the
_tche-chy_ (directing-stone) about 2604 years before Christ. It passed
from them to the Arabs, and was first used in Europe after the Crusades;
and Ludi Vestomanus asserts, that about the year 1500 he saw a pilot in
the East Indies direct his course by a magnetic needle like those now in
use.
RELATION OF MAGNETISM TO ELECTRICITY.
The most remarkable theories have been invented to account for the
phenomena of magnetism. Halley imagined magnetic globes to be moving to
and fro in the interior of the earth. Barlow’s theory, which refers the
whole to electrical currents, is the most rational. Dr. Faraday, for
whose kindness to us in early days we always feel grateful, in a series
of very curious experiments, has succeeded in identifying magnetism with
galvanism, by directing galvanic currents at right angles to the
direction of powerful magnets. And its connexion with this and the
common species of electricity has deprived it of all its conjuring
powers, and reduced it to the well-defined action of electrical bodies.
It is not for us to write either a history of this interesting subject,
or to treat it as a science to be acquired; but as it embodies a great
number of most instructive and amusing experiments, we think it proper
to introduce it here.
TO MAKE ARTIFICIAL MAGNETS.
This may be done by stroking a piece of hard steel with a natural or
artificial magnet. Take a common sewing-needle and pass the north pole
of a magnet from the eye to the point, pressing it gently in so doing.
After reaching the end of the needle the magnet must not be passed back
again towards the eye, but must be lifted up and applied again to that
end, the friction being always in the same direction. After repeating
this for a few times the needle will become magnetised, and attract iron
filings, &c.
HOW TO MAGNETISE A POKER.
Hold it in the left hand in a position slightly inclined from the
perpendicular, the lower end pointing to the north, and then strike it
smartly several times with a large iron hammer, and it will be found to
possess the powers of a magnet, although but slightly.
TO SHOW MAGNETIC REPULSION AND ATTRACTION.
Suspend two short pieces of iron wire, N S, N S, so that they will hang
in contact in a vertical position. If the north pole of a magnet N be
now brought to a moderate distance between the wires, they will recede
from each other, as in figure 1.
[Illustration: _Fig. 2_ _Fig 1._]
The ends S S being made south poles by induction from the north pole N,
will repel each other, and so will the north poles N N. This separation
of the wires will increase as the magnet approaches them, but there will
be a particular distance at which the attractive force of N overcomes
the repulsive force of the poles S S, and causes the wires to converge,
as in figure 2; the north poles N N still exhibiting their mutual
repulsion.
NORTH AND SOUTH POLES OF THE MAGNET.
Each magnet has its poles, north and south--the north or south poles of
one magnet, repel the north and south pole of another. If a magnet, as
in the following figure, be dipped in some iron filings, they will be
immediately attracted to one end. Supposing this to be the north pole,
each of the ends of the filings, not in contact with the magnet, will
become north poles, while the ends in contact will by induction become
south poles. Both will have a tendency to repel each other, and the
filings will stand on the magnet as in the figure.
[Illustration]
POLARITY OF THE MAGNET.
[Illustration]
The best method of proving this is to take a magnet or a piece of steel
rendered magnetic, and to place it on a piece of cork by laying it in a
groove cut to receive it. If the cork be placed in the centre of a basin
of water, and allowed to swim freely on its surface, so that it is not
attracted by the sides of the basin, it will be found to turn its north
pole to the north, and its south pole to the south, the same as the
mariner’s compass. If you fix two magnets in two pieces of cork, and
place them also in a basin of water, and they are in a parallel position
with the same poles together, that is, north to north, and south to
south, they will mutually repel each other; but if the contrary poles
point to one another, as north to south, they will be attracted.
THE MAGNETIC FISH.
[Illustration]
Fish are to be purchased at the toy-shops, by which the young
“magnétique” may perform this experiment; they are made hollow, and will
float on the water. In the mouth of each should be inserted a piece of
magnetic wire. The angling rod is like any other rod, and has a silken
thread for a line, and an iron hook also strongly magnetised. To catch
the fish it is only necessary to put the hook in contact with the noses
of the fish, and they will be taken without any of the baits mentioned
in the former part of this work.
THE MAGNETIC SWAN.
[Illustration]
The figure of a swan should be cut in cork, and within its beak a small
strongly magnetised piece of steel should be placed. The swan should
then be covered with a coating of white wax, and fashioned further into
the shape of a swan, and glass beads may be placed in its head for eyes.
This should be placed in a small tub or large basin of water, and to
make it swim about, you should place in a white stick about nine inches
long a magnetic bar, on which the north and south poles are marked. If
you wish to bring the swan towards you, present to him the north pole of
the wand, if you wish it to retire, present the south pole, and thus you
may direct the swan to any part you desire.
TO SUSPEND A NEEDLE IN THE AIR BY MAGNETISM.
Place a magnet on a stand to raise it a little above the table; then
bring a small sewing-needle containing a thread, within a little of the
magnet, keeping hold of the thread to prevent the needle from attaching
itself to the magnet. The needle in endeavouring to fly to the magnet,
and being prevented by the thread, will remain curiously suspended in
the air, reminding us of the fable of Mahomed’s coffin.
TO MAKE ARTIFICIAL MAGNETS WITHOUT THE AID EITHER OF NATURAL LOADSTONES
OR ARTIFICIAL MAGNETS.
[Illustration]
Take an iron poker and tongs, or two bars of iron, the larger and the
older the better, and fixing the poker upright, hold to it with the left
hand near the top P by a silk thread, a bar of soft steel about three
inches long, one fourth of an inch broad, and one twentieth thick; mark
one end, and let this end be downwards. Then grasping the tongs T with
the right hand a little below the middle, and keeping them nearly in a
vertical line, let the bar B be rubbed with the lower end L of the
tongs, from the marked end of the bar to its upper end about ten times
of each side of it. By this means the bar B will receive as much
magnetism as will enable it to lift a small key at the marked end; and
this end of the bar being suspended by its middle, or made to rest on a
joint, will turn to the north, and is called its north pole, the
unmarked end being the south pole. This is the method recommended by Mr.
Caxton, in his process, which he regarded superior to those in former
use, and of which a more detailed account will be found in his
interesting volume.
HORSE-SHOE MAGNETS.
[Illustration]
The form of a horse-shoe is generally given to magnetised bars, when
both poles are wanted to act together, which frequently happens in
various experiments, such as for lifting weights by the force of
magnetic attraction, and for magnetising steel bars by the process of
double touch, for which they are exceedingly convenient. The following
is the method of making a powerful magnetic battery of the horse-shoe
form. Twelve bars or plates of steel are to be taken, and having been
previously bent to the required form, that is, the horse-shoe shape,
they are then bound together by means of rivets at their ends; before
being finally fastened they are each separately magnetised, and
afterwards finally united.
Horse-shoe magnets should have a short bar of soft iron adapted to
connect the two poles, and should never be laid by without such a piece
of iron adhering to them. Bar magnets should be kept in pairs with their
poles turned in contrary directions, and they should be kept from rust.
Both kinds of magnets have their power not only preserved but increased,
by keeping them surrounded with a mass of dry filings of soft iron, each
particle of which will re-act by its induced magnetism upon the point of
the magnet to which it adheres, and maintain in that point its primitive
magnetic state.
EXPERIMENT TO SHOW THAT SOFT IRON POSSESSES MAGNETIC PROPERTIES WHILE IT
REMAINS IN THE VICINITY OF A MAGNET.
[Illustration]
Let M be a magnet and K a key, held horizontally near one of its poles,
or near its lower edge. Then if another piece of iron, such as a small
nail, be applied to the other end of the key, the nail will hang from
the key, and will continue to do so while the magnet is slowly
withdrawn; but when it has been removed beyond a certain distance, the
nail will drop from the key, because the magnetism induced in the key
becomes at that distance too weak to support the weight of the nail.
That this is the real cause of its falling off may be proved by taking a
still lighter fragment of iron, such as a piece of very slender wire,
and applying it to the key. The magnetism of the key will still be
sufficiently strong to support the wire, though it cannot the nail, and
it will continue to support it even when the magnet is yet further
removed; at length, however, it drops off.
ELECTRO-MAGNETISM.
The identity of magnetism with electricity alluded to in a former
paragraph, has led to the formation of a new science under the above
name, and to some of the interesting experiments connected with it, we
shall briefly allude for the amusement of the young reader.
POWER OF THE ELECTRO-MAGNET.
[Illustration]
The same influence which affects the magnetic needle already described,
will also communicate magnetism to soft iron. If a bar of that metal
bent, as in the drawing, be surrounded with a common bonnet wire, or a
copper wire prevented from touching the iron by a winding of cotton or
thread, and then if a current of voltaic electricity be sent through the
wire, the bar becomes a powerful magnet, and will continue so as long as
the connexion with the battery is preserved. On breaking the contact,
the magnetism disappears. This experiment may be easily made by the
young reader with a horse-shoe magnet, surrounded by several coils of
wire. P is the positive, and N the negative pole.
THE MARINER’S COMPASS AND EXPERIMENTS WITH A POCKET COMPASS.
The mariner’s compass is an artificial magnet fitted in a proper box,
and consists of three parts--1, the box; 2, the card or fly; and 3, the
needle. The box is suspended in a square wooden case, by means of two
concentric brass circles called gimbals, so fixed by brazen axes to the
two boxes, that the inner one, or compass-box, retains a horizontal
position in all motions of the ship. The card is a circular piece of
paper which is fastened upon the needle, and moves with it. The outer
edge of the card is divided into thirty-two points, as shown in the
engraving, called points of the compass. The needle is a slender bar of
hardened steel, having a hollow agate cup in the centre, which moves
upon the point of a pivot made of brass.
[Illustration]
VARIATION OF THE NEEDLE.
The magnetic needle does not point exactly north and south, but the
north pole of the needle takes a direction to the west of the true
north. It is constantly changing, and varies at different parts of the
earth, and at different times of the day.
DIP OF THE NEEDLE.
Another remarkable and evident manifestation of the influence of the
magnetism of the earth upon the needle is the inclination or dip of the
latter, which is a deviation from its horizontal place in a downward
direction in northern regions of its north, and in southern regions of
its south pole. In balancing the needle on the card, on account of this
dipping, a small weight or moveable piece of brass is placed on one end
of the needle, by the shifting of which either nearer to or further from
the centre, the needle will always be balanced.
USEFUL AMUSEMENT WITH THE POCKET COMPASS.
Pocket compasses are to be bought for five or six shillings, and may be
used in many ways. In travelling over mountains or a wide extended moor,
they are indispensably necessary; and no one should go a tour into
Wales, Scotland, or the lakes without such a companion, and it will be a
very useful and amusing exercise for any young person to take the
bearings of his own or some particular locality, and make out what may
be called a bearing card. This he may easily do in the following manner.
Supposing he wishes, for instance, to take the bearings of his own
house, he has nothing to do but to set his pocket compass upon a map of
the district,--a county map will do very well, unless his house stands
on the verge of a county, then two county maps will be necessary. He
must make the north of the map exactly coincide with the north, as
indicated by his compass, and having fixed his map in this situation, he
should take a ruler and piece of paper, and dot down the exact bearings
of each important town, or place, or village, around him. Let him
suppose himself, for instance, in the town of Cambridge, and laying down
his map as indicated by the compass, north to north and south to south,
he will find the following places due north, Wilberton, Wentworth;
Little Wilbraham, Teversham, due east; Duxford and Chesterfield, south;
Coton and St. Neots in Huntingdonshire, west. The other points of the
compass may be filled up in the same manner. Should therefore our young
friend be upon any elevated situation near his own dwelling, or upon any
other elevated spot from which the bearings have been taken, he will be
able to inform his young friends that such and such a place lies in such
a direction, that this place lies due north, the other north-west, a
third south-east, the fourth south-west, &c. &c.
[Illustration]
INTERESTING PARTICULARS CONCERNING THE MAGNET.
Fire-irons which have rested in an upright position in a room during the
summer months are often highly magnetic.
Iron bars standing erect, such as the gratings of a prison cell, or the
iron railings before houses, are often magnetic.
The great iron-clad ships, which have now replaced the wooden walls of
Old England, are powerfully magnetic, and therefore affect the compass
by which the vessel is steered; ingenious arrangements are therefore
made to correct the effect of the local attraction, so that the
man-of-war may be steered correctly.
Magnetism may be made to pass through a deal board; to exhibit which,
lay a needle on the smooth part above, and run a magnet along the under
side, and the needle will be found to follow the course of the magnet. A
magnet dipped into boiling water loses part of its magnetism, which
however returns upon its cooling.
A sudden blow given to a magnet often destroys its magnetic power.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
MECHANICS.
“These are machinations comical.”--FORD.
There is no subject of such importance as Mechanics, as its principles
are founded upon the properties of matter and the laws of motion; and in
knowing something of these, the tyro will lay the foundation of all
substantial knowledge.
The properties of matter are the following: Solidity (or
Impenetrability), Divisibility, Mobility, Elasticity, Brittleness,
Malleability, Ductility, and Tenacity.
The laws of motion are as follow:--
1. Every body continues in a state of rest or of uniform rectilineal
motion, unless affected by some extraneous force.
2. The change of motion is always proportionate to the impelling force.
3. Action and reaction are always equal and contrary.
EXPERIMENT OF THE LAW OF MOTION.
In shooting at “taw,” if the marble be struck “plump,” as it is called,
it moves forward exactly in the same line of direction; but if struck
sideways, it will move in an oblique direction, and its course will be
in a line situated between the direction of its former motion and that
of the force impressed. This is called the resolution of forces.
BALANCING.
The centre of gravity in a body is that part about which all the other
parts equally balance each other. In balancing a stick upon the finger,
or upon the chin, it is necessary only to keep the chin or finger
exactly under the point which is called the centre of gravity.
THE PRANCING HORSE.
[Illustration]
Cut out the figure of a horse, and having fixed a curved iron wire to
the under part of its body, place a small ball of lead upon it. Place
the hind legs of the horse on the table, and it will rock to and fro. If
the ball be removed, the horse would immediately tumble, because
unsupported, the centre of gravity being in the front of the prop; but
upon the ball being replaced, the centre of gravity immediately changes
its position, and is brought under the prop, and the horse is again in
equilibrio.
TO CONSTRUCT A FIGURE, WHICH, BEING PLACED UPON A CURVED SURFACE, AND
INCLINED IN ANY POSITION, SHALL, WHEN LEFT TO ITSELF, RETURN TO ITS
FORMER POSITION.
The feet of the figure rest on a curved pivot, which is sustained by two
loaded balls below; for the weight of these balls being much greater
than that of the figure, their effect is to bring the centre of gravity
of the whole beneath the point on which it rests; consequently the
equilibrium will resist any slight force to disturb it.
TO MAKE A CARRIAGE RUN IN AN INVERTED POSITION WITHOUT FALLING.
[Illustration]
It is pretty well known to most boys, that if a tumbler of water be
placed within a broad wooden hoop, the whole may be whirled round
without falling, owing to the centrifugal force. On the same principle,
if a small carriage be placed on an iron band or rail, it will ascend
the curve, become inverted, and descend again, without falling.
TO CAUSE A CYLINDER TO ROLL BY ITS OWN WEIGHT UP-HILL.
[Illustration]
Procure a coffee-canister, and loading it at F with a piece of lead,
which may be fixed in with solder, the position of the centre of gravity
is thus altered. If a cylinder so constructed be placed on an inclined
plane, and the loaded part above, it will roll up-hill without
assistance.
THE BALANCED STICK.
[Illustration]
Procure a piece of wood, about nine inches in length and about half an
inch in thickness, and thrust into its upper end the blades of two
penknives, on either side one. Place the other end upon the tip of the
fore-finger, and it will keep its place without falling.
THE CHINESE MANDARIN.
[Illustration]
Construct out of the pith of the elder a little mandarin; then provide a
base for it to sit in, like a kettle-drum. Into this put some heavy
substance, such as half a leaden bullet; fasten the figure to this, and
in whatever position it may be placed, it will, when left to itself,
immediately return to its upright position.
TO MAKE A SHILLING TURN ON ITS EDGE ON THE POINT OF A NEEDLE.
[Illustration]
Take a bottle, with a cork in its neck, and place in it, in a
perpendicular position, a middle-sized needle. Fix a shilling into
another cork, by cutting a nick in it; and stick into the same cork two
small table-forks, opposite each other, with the handles inclining
outwards and downwards. If the rim of the shilling be now poised on the
point of the needle, it may easily be made to spin round without
falling, as the centre of gravity is below the centre of suspension.
THE DANCING PEA.
[Illustration]
If you stick through a pea, or small ball of pith, two pins at right
angles, and defend the points with pieces of sealingwax, it may be kept
in equilibrio at a short distance from the end of a straight tube, by
means of a current of breath from the mouth, which imparts a rotatory
motion to the pea.[10]
[10] The pins are only used to hold the pea steady before it is blown
from the pipe, as the pea alone will dance quite as well.
OBLIQUITY OF MOTION.
Cut a piece of pasteboard into the following shape, and describe on it
a spiral line; cut this out with a penknife, and then suspend it on a
large skewer or pin, as seen in the engraving. If the whole be now
placed on a warm stove, or over the flame of a candle or lamp, it will
revolve with considerable velocity. The card, after being cut into the
spiral, may be made to represent a snake or dragon, and when in motion
will produce a very pleasing effect.
[Illustration]
THE BRIDGE OF KNIVES.
[Illustration]
Place three glasses, A A A, in the form of a triangle, and arrange three
knives upon them, as shown in the figure,--the blade of No. 1 over that
of No. 2, and that over No. 3, which rests on No. 1. The bridge so made
will be self-supported.
THE TOPER’S TRIPOD.
[Illustration]
Place three tobacco-pipes in the position shown in the engraving, the
mouth of the bowls downwards, and the lower end of the stems upon the
stem just by the bowls. This tripod, if carefully put together, will
support considerably more than a pot of “Lockwood’s home-brewed,”
equally celebrated with the trick.
THE MICROSCOPE.
At any time of the year or hour of the day there are few pursuits more
interesting, and at the same time instructive, than the study of Nature
by means of the microscope.
This instrument has revolutionized science, solved many problems that
had wearied the souls of older naturalists, and even in its simplest
form is beyond all value to those who love Nature and the objects which
they see around them. The microscope opens a new world to us. When the
first telescope was directed to the heavens, and unlocked the mysteries
of the skies, when it crumbled into dust all the theories of the past
centuries, and told mankind that the planets were not merely instruments
of fortune-telling, whose voices were intelligible to a chosen few, but
orbs far vaster than our own; even then the new world of thought into
which man entered was no wider than that which is displayed by the
poorest lens that possesses the power of magnifying.
All of us must admire the more than awful grandeur of that universe
whereof we form so infinitesimal a part, wherein the stars are scattered
as the sand on the sea-shore, and every star a sun, the centre of a
system of orbs too distant for the eye of man to perceive. Looking at
our nearest planet, and observing on her face vast mountain-chains,
ravines into which the light of the sun can never penetrate, and
volcanoes whose craters are so wide that they would take in the whole of
London, the whole of Birmingham, and all the country between them, we
can judge by analogy of the unseen wonders which must exist in the world
beyond our ken.
But to him who can read Nature rightly, the microscope is a teacher as
grand as its sister instrument, and the awful magnificence of Nature is
as evident in a midge’s wing as in the more patent glories of the sun,
moon, and stars. In the following pages we hope to put the readers of
this book in the way to read their microscope rightly--possibly to make
it--and to show that much can be done with small means when “there’s a
will,” and to indicate to them that objects of no small interest can be
found without stirring from the room in which we sit, or even from the
table on which our microscope is placed.
Some of our readers may say, when they read the heading of this paper,
that they should like a microscope very much, but that they have no
money to buy it, and that their parents cannot afford one.
This is just the feeling which we used to have when a boy, for in those
days microscopes were microscopes indeed, and you had your choice
between a little instrument, with a series of brass cups, having glasses
in them, which magnified slightly but defined clearly, or a great
composition of brass and iron, looking like a rocket-tube, with an
eye-piece at one end and a glass shot at the other. In was very costly,
very imposing, and magnified very highly; but it strained the eyes
painfully, had no defining capacities, and made all the objects look as
if they were seen through a thick fog. Practically, therefore, the
former was the only instrument that was available.
A still more useful instrument, however, was that which can always be
obtained for a few shillings, and which is now made wonderfully cheap
and wonderfully good; we mean the double or treble pocket-lens. So we
say, if you cannot afford a really good microscope, do not waste your
money upon inferior and pretentious instruments, but get a sound
pocket-lens.
It has a thousand advantages. It is portable, and is even more useful in
the fields than in the house. It defines very clearly, and needs little
trouble in manipulation. We need not say how difficult is the task of
getting a complicated instrument to define properly, how impossible with
a bad one. The object and the glass can be held in any light,--a matter
of no small consideration when examining anything new, and trying to
make out its structure. It is not easily put out of order, and if
treated with the most ordinary care, will last for a lifetime.
You can push it under water, and it will magnify as well as in the air;
and if you are wandering on the river-side, you can lie down on the
bank, dip the upper part of your head into the water, together with the
glass, and watch carefully the subaquatic objects without removing them.
The water will not hurt the eye in the least, though a non-swimmer may
perhaps find a little difficulty in his first attempt. It makes a good
burning-glass, should fire be needed, and no other means of procuring a
spark be at hand. It can be used so as to show the principle of a camera
obscura, and to illustrate the manner in which photographic portraits
are taken. It can be made into an admirable dissecting microscope, and
needs scarcely any practice in the manipulation. These are some of its
advantages, and there are many others which need not be mentioned.
Even if you should be able to procure a good microscope, get a
pocket-lens as well, for you will want them both, and we may say that
the most practised microscopists, and those who are possessors of the
most elaborate instruments, are the very men who are most certain to
have a pocket-lens about them, and to use it most frequently. Practise
well with the pocket-lens before you meddle with the compound
microscope. You will waste no time, but will rather gain by it; for you
will be learning the rudiments of a new science, and laying a solid
foundation on which to build. Whenever we see a lad take out his
pocket-lens in a business-like way, use it skilfully, and put it back
with a mechanical facility that tells of constant practice, we know that
there is a lad who has learned the chief lesson of a
naturalist,--namely, the art of observing. We speak highly of the
pocket-lens, because we think highly of it and owe much to it.
One or two practical remarks on the proper handling of the pocket-lens
may be of use. Do not always employ the same eye in looking through the
lens, but use the eyes alternately. There is always a temptation to
employ the same eye, which thus receives a kind of training in vision;
but it is a temptation always to be resisted. With some persons the
right eye is most in favour, and with others the left; and when the
favourite eye gets all the work, it too frequently suffers. Whether you
look with the right or the left eye, _keep both eyes open_.
It is a pitiful sight to see a human face all screwed up into a corner,
the lids of the unused eye convulsively squeezed together, and the mouth
slanting upwards, as if in sympathy with the eye. Not only does the
human face become repulsively mean and portentously ugly by such action,
but the sight of the eye is seriously strained, and sometimes impaired
for life. At first the beginner will find a little difficulty in
restricting his vision to one eye while the other remains open, just as
a beginner on the pianoforte feels himself puzzled when he tries to make
his right hand go one way and his left hand another; but in either case
a little practice and plenty of perseverance are sure to overcome all
obstacles, and in a wonderfully short time the difficulty will not only
be overcome, but forgotten.
We speak here with some feeling, because, while engaged on a work on the
microscope, we were necessarily obliged to work much at night, and
inadvertently employed the left eye more than the right; the consequence
of which imprudence was that we have been obliged ever since that time
to give the left eye perfect rest, as far as artificial vision goes,
and, except when looking through a binocular instrument, we have not
ventured to use it either to a microscope or telescope. The vision
accommodates itself to circumstances with wonderful ease, and the
observer learns the curious art of cutting off all communication between
the unused eye and the brain; so that, although the objects around may
imprint themselves upon the retina, the mind is as totally unconscious
of them as if they had no existence.
If possible, always examine an object _without removing it_, as thereby
you see it as it is, without altering any of the conditions with which
it is surrounded. Should this not be practicable, take the object to be
viewed in the left hand and the lens in the right. Place the wrists of
the two hands together, and then you will find that one supports the
other, and that the lens can be held in the proper focus without the
least difficulty. After you have used the lens for some little time, you
will learn to hit upon the right focus almost to a hair’s breadth,--so
as to lose no time, a matter of some importance when a living creature
is to be examined, especially if it be in motion.
As to the selection of objects, none is necessary. Look at everything;
and the uglier and more unpromising it is, let it be the closer
examined. We do not merely use our aids to vision for the sake of seeing
beautiful things, though the microscopist sees more beauty in a day than
others will see in a year. We want to see how the world and its
constituent parts are made; and though admiration will not be wanting,
yet it does not, or ought not, to hold the first place. Always have a
motive for looking at every object, and if you have none, try to make
one. One of our friends, known by name at least to most of my readers,
struck out, some years ago, a most curious train of thought while
looking at an object which is seen daily by thousands of human beings,
and will probably soon give the public the benefit of it. We have seen
the object hundreds of times, but the ideas which it suggested did not
happen to occur to us.
[Illustration]
We are now about to suggest a very simple piece of mechanism, by which
the pocket-lens can be converted into a microscope that will serve for
dissection and many other purposes. The accompanying sketch is taken
from an instrument of our own manufacture. It is of very rough make, and
by an old Indian officer would be contemptuously termed “cutcha.”
Measured, however, by its performance, it is quite as satisfactory as
those instruments which are made by professed opticians, and which the
same old Indian would class under the honoured title of “pucka.”
Melt three or four pounds of lead in an iron ladle, and make a mould,
consisting of a hollow hemisphere of paper or cardboard, through the
centre of which an iron rod has been passed. The hollow of the paper
should resemble an ordinary saucer. Pour the lead into the saucer, and
let it cool. The paper mould will be scorched by the heat and rendered
useless, but an outer coating of lead will be cool and hard before the
paper is quite destroyed. The rod and leaden stand will now appear as in
the illustration. Next take a piece of stout brass wire and a wine-cork;
twist the wire round the cork several times; cut off one end close to
the cork; sharpen the other, and turn it up as seen in the engraving.
Bore a hole through the cork, just large enough to allow the upright rod
to slip through it, and there is the “stand” of your microscope. Now
take your pocket-lens, and get an optician to bore a hole through one
end of it, just large enough to receive the upturned end of the wire;
slip the lens on the wire, and the microscope is complete.
The cork, though grasping the upright stem with tolerable firmness, can
be slid up and down so as to insure the correct focus, and can be pushed
aside whenever the object has to be viewed with the naked eye and must
not be removed from its place. This instrument is a capital one for
dissecting purposes, and will answer quite as well as those expensive
affairs that are to be purchased in the shops. If, however, our readers
would like to possess a real and well-made instrument, he cannot do
better than get one of Ross’s Dissecting Microscopes, which are very
steady, and, as may be seen, can be adjusted to almost any position. A
rack-and-pinion movement for elevating or lowering the sliding pillar
would be useful.
[Illustration: ROSS’S DISSECTING MICROSCOPE.]
If the object be transparent, and requires to be seen by transmitted
light, the following plan will answer:--Take a thin piece of wood, cut
or punch a round hole out of the middle, and support it on four legs.
Wires or wooden pegs fixed in corks will answer the purpose well, and if
the corks be glued to the corners of the board, the legs can be inserted
or removed at pleasure. The wood of which cigar-boxes are made will
answer the purpose very well. Its dimensions should be about three
inches in length by two in width. Now buy one of the doll’s
looking-glasses that are sold for a penny, and put it under the stand.
Lay a flat piece of glass over the hole, place the object upon it, and
direct the light through it by means of the mirror below. If such a
mirror cannot be obtained, it is easy enough to make one, by mounting a
piece of looking-glass in a cork frame, and making it swing on pivots,
like the glasses of our dressing-rooms.
The young microscopist must remember that when he is examining any
object by transmitted light, he must arrange it as flatly as possible on
the glass. In many cases, a still neater manipulation is required,--as,
for example, when the petals of flowers are under examination. Thin
glass is to be purchased at any optician’s, and if cut in squares,
instead of circles, is very much cheaper, and quite as useful for all
practical purposes. Lay the petal on the glass plate, place a piece of
the thin glass upon it, and press it gently while examining it. If it
still remains thick and dull, put a drop of pure water on the petal, and
replace the thin glass, when the structure will almost invariably be
detected.
Everything depends on the proper management of the object and the
arrangement of the light. Some opaque objects can be seen best by direct
light, and others by transmitted light. If a leaf be examined,
particularly if it be a thick and heavy one, like that of the ivy, the
upper and lower membranes must be stripped apart,--a task which is
easily performed by tearing a small slit, and then ripping it smartly
across. A pair of forceps will be required for this and other delicate
work, and may be obtained at a cheap rate. Care must be taken to keep
the points exactly even, and if at any time one of them appears to be
shorter than the other, they should be rubbed on a hone until they are
brought perfectly level.
[Illustration]
These should be made of steel; but the young microscopist will find that
a second pair made of brass, and much rougher in finish, are invaluable
aids as he takes his walks into the country. By their aid he can pick up
minute objects, draw insects out of crevices without damaging them, and
pluck the tiniest flowers without harming their petals. They can be
carried in the waistcoat pocket, and the cost is sixpence. Any lad who
knows how to handle solder can make a pair for himself in a few minutes.
A penknife with one blade kept scrupulously sharp is essential, and we
have found an old lancet of the greatest service. Lancets have gone so
much out of fashion, that the second-hand instrument shops abound with
them. We did not allow our own lancet to be shut up, but removed the
blade from the tortoise-shell handle, and fixed it upon a wooden handle,
about four inches in length, so that it looked very clumsy, but was
extremely useful.
Two pairs of scissors are needful,--one very fine, and the other
moderately strong. Both pairs, however, must have very short blades and
very long handles, and the scissors such as ladies use are of very
little use, the short handles causing the fingers of the right hand to
shade the object. As to the fine pair, it is hardly possible to have
the handles too long or the blades too short; for if the points can be
separated a quarter of an inch, nothing more is needed. If a pair of
bent scissors can also be obtained, they are extremely pleasant to work
with, and save much trouble.
[Illustration]
For arranging the objects under the microscope, there are no instruments
equal to those which are here engraved. They are nothing more than
ordinary needles stuck into the handles of camel’s-hair brushes. The
uppermost is made of the largest-sized darning-needle, and is useful for
making little holes, and similar purposes. The two next instruments are
the most generally useful, and several of each should be always at hand.
Nos. 4 and 5 are for special purposes; the former for holding tissues
aside, and the latter for lifting them up. The needles must not be
longer than those in the illustration, as they would otherwise be too
springy, and apt to tear the object instead of pulling or pushing it.
The bending is readily done in the flame of a spirit-lamp, or even of a
common candle; but in the latter case the needle is always covered with
soot, which must be wiped off before its shape can be seen. The
elasticity of the needles is lost by the operation, but is easily
restored by heating them red-hot, and plunging them immediately into
cold water. The end of the handle should be wrapped with thread, in
order to prevent it from splitting.
Pill-boxes of various sizes are of very great service to the
microscopist. We always have them arranged in “nests,” _i. e._ six or
seven inside each other, so that space is greatly economized, as long as
they are not in absolute use. All delicate objects should be placed in
separate boxes, and the predaceous insects must be treated in the same
manner, or they will certainly destroy one another, or, at all events,
inflict such injuries as will make them useless for microscopic
purposes.
[Illustration]
When the insects are to be killed on the spot, we employ another and a
very simple plan.
We take one of the old-fashioned wooden lucifer-match boxes, bore a hole
in the lid, and push through the hole a swan-quill or the barrel of one
of the swan-quill steel pens. A glass tube is still better, but is too
fragile. Beeswax is tightly worked into the junction of the tube with
the wood, so as to make it as nearly air-tight as possible. A cork
stopper is then cut to fit the tube. The accompanying illustration will
show the box completed. When this is finished, we take the
smallest-sized pill-box, bore a number of holes in it with a red-hot
needle, place a little piece of solid ammonia within it, and inclose it
in the lucifer-box. Its effects are almost instantaneous; for scarcely
has the insect touched the bottom of the box before it is helpless, and
in a very few moments it is quite dead, so powerful is ammonia towards
insects. The reader will of course understand that the pill-boxes must
never have been used for pills, and that the match-box must be carefully
cleaned before employing it in the microscopic service. Moreover, any
boxes that have been used for lepidopterous insects become useless,
inasmuch as the scales always fall from the wings, and cling to the
sides of the box, so as to mix with succeeding objects, and very much
puzzle the observer.
Aquatic and marine objects require bottles, and, as a general rule,
these bottles ought always to have wide mouths. Indeed, if there be no
shoulder at all, their purpose will be better served, as a small object
is very apt to be caught under the shoulder, and to give much trouble
before it can be removed without injury. Wide and short test-tubes
answer admirably for collecting; and it will always be advisable to have
a few small test-tubes ready fitted with corks, for the purpose of
isolating those specimens which might receive or cause injury by being
mixed with others.
To remove minute objects from one vessel into another is a very easy
process. Take a glass tube, mark off a portion about eight inches in
length, cut a little notch with a file, and bend it smartly, when it
will break neatly across, without leaving points or having the
regularity of its ends injured by gaps. Turn each end round and round in
the flame of the spirit-lamp, and you have an ordinary “pipette.” The
object of placing the ends of the tube in the flame is to render the
edges quite smooth and rounded.
Now mark off the same length of tube, and place the marked portion in
the flame, taking care to warm it well first, lest the sudden heat
should crack the glass. Keep it continually turning between the fingers,
and when it is quite soft, and of a fine red heat, draw the hands
smartly apart, and you will produce a couple of tubes tapering to very
fine points. Break off the tapering portions at any convenient point,
round the edges as before, and you will then have pipettes suitable for
small objects. As there are many specimens, especially the smaller
animalculæ, which have a habit of retiring into the remotest corner, it
is necessary to bend another pipette, so as to follow them. For our own
part, we prefer the pipette to be bent nearly to a right angle.
The mode of using these simple instruments is as follows:--Place the
forefinger or thumb firmly on the large end, and push the point under
water. When the opening is close to the sought-for object, lift the
finger suddenly, and admit the air into the tube. The water will
immediately rush in at the lower end, and if the orifice has been
properly directed, will carry the object into the tube. The finger is
again applied to the mouth of the tube, and the object can be then
carried off.
As with the pocket-lens almost every object is to be viewed by means of
direct light, the young observer will find himself much aided by a
suitable background. Any small object, such as a minute insect, a seed,
or a hair, becomes very indistinct if held up against the light, or even
when viewed against a broken background of trees, houses, or herbage.
The simplest plan of securing a proper background is to take a disc of
ivory, bone, or even of white cardboard, and to blacken one side of it.
The black paint which is used for this purpose must be without gloss,
and have what is called a “dead” surface. Ink answers very well for the
purpose, and so does ivory-black; but Indian ink is too glossy to be
serviceable.
To procure specimens from the water is a matter of some difficulty if
managed badly, but easy enough when the collector knows his business. It
is of course needful to attach the collecting vessel to the end of a
rod, and to plunge it into the spots which look most favourable. Now
even so simple a matter as this requires some little care, if the young
microscopist really wishes to obtain the best specimens. A common
walking-stick will answer most purposes; but the most efficient rod for
the purpose is one of the common walking-stick fishing-rods without the
top joint, as it can be carried without attracting attention, and can be
lengthened at will by adding the different joints.
[Illustration]
Many methods have been proposed by which the vessel is to be attached to
the rod; but that which I am about to describe is certainly the simplest
and most effective that I have tried. Get a piece of gutta-percha
tubing, just large enough to be slipped on the end of the rod or stick;
mark off an inch or so, and cut the tube nearly through, as at _a_ in
Fig. 1. Now cut it away longitudinally, so that a long tongue of
gutta-percha is left, as at _b_, and the instrument is completed.
Its application is as simple as its structure. Bend the tongue over, so
as to form a loop, and push the end through the short tube. Slip the
neck of the bottle into the loop, and draw the tongue until it is
tolerably tight. Push the end of the stick into the tube, taking care to
hold the tongue firmly in its place, and the vessel will then be
fastened at right angles to the stick.
The whole arrangement can be seen in Fig. 2, where _a_ represents the
gutta-percha tube, _b_ the tongue, _c_ the stick, and _d_ the vessel.
The method of collecting by means of this instrument is as
follows:--Immerse the vessel in the water, with the mouth downwards, so
that no water may enter. Push it gently towards the spot which is to be
investigated, move it about a little, so as to cause a disturbance, and
then turn the vessel with its mouth upwards. Water will instantly rush
in, carrying with it the objects which are to be examined. The contents
of the vessel may then be transferred to the large bottle, and another
dip made. Confervoid growths, especially those which accumulate in a
kind of scum on the surface, should be obtained very quietly, without
previous disturbance of the water.
After the pond or stream or ditch has been well searched, the bottle
should be roughly examined, by means of a pocket-lens, and the contents
sorted into the smaller tubes, as has already been mentioned. This
precaution is especially needful when any of the minute crustacea called
Entomostraca are captured, as they are most voracious beings, and will
make sad havoc among other specimens, unless they are placed in separate
bottles. They are mostly large enough to be detected with the naked eye,
and look something like little fleas, as they move along.
As the Entomostraca cast their shells repeatedly during their lives,
some species performing this operation every two days, a beautiful
series of objects can be obtained by gathering the cast shells, and
preparing them for the microscope, according to the directions that will
be found in the following pages. These shells are peculiarly valuable,
as they retain the chief external characteristics of the creature to
which they belonged, the limbs, plumes, and even the delicate bristles
being preserved entire. It is in the power of the microscopist to retard
or hasten the change of shell, heat and light aiding development, and
cold and darkness retarding it. The remarkable “ephippium,” or saddle,
which is found on the backs of the Daphnia, the Moina, and other
Entomostraca, and which is used as a receptacle for eggs, should be
searched for and preserved.
A very thin and very flat bottle is a most useful assistance in
detecting the character of any unknown object, especially if it be
living. Such a bottle may easily be made by heating one of the small
test-tubes in the spirit-lamp until it is of a glowing red heat, and
then pressing the sides together. Some little neatness is required in
this process, as an unskilful operator is apt to press the sides
unequally, and to leave a bulging projection at the end.
Should a higher power be required than is furnished by the pocket-lens,
a “Coddington” lens is the very best that can be obtained. In general
shape it resembles the well-known “Stanhope” lens; but the latter is so
very inferior an article, that it ought never to be purchased. The two
glasses can easily be distinguished by the shape of the ends; those of
the Coddington being alike, while in the Stanhope one is much more
convex than the other.
At first the young observer generally finds some difficulty in arranging
this lens, so as to hit off the focus exactly; but if he adopts the
following plan, he will soon handle a Coddington as easily as an
ordinary pocket-lens. The object should be held in the left hand and the
glass in the right. Let the wrists be placed firmly against each other,
and the lens brought as close as possible to the object, without quite
touching it. Now bring the eye to the lens, taking care not to disturb
the arrangement, and then gradually draw the object away from the lens.
The moment that the proper focus is obtained the object will be seen
with beautiful clearness, and by drawing the object from the lens,
instead of approaching the lens to the object, there is no danger of
injuring the one or the other by contact.
The great advantages of the Coddington are the exceeding clearness with
which it shows the object, the perfect definition of every line, its
achromatic character, and its freedom from colours, and the flatness of
the “field;” so that the circumference is defined as perfectly as the
centre. It can now be obtained very cheaply at any of our microscopical
opticians, and should always be mounted on a tolerably long handle.
THE COMPOUND MICROSCOPE.
We have already described the simpler forms of magnifying instruments,
together with the best method of using them. We now purpose to describe
the more complicated instrument called the compound microscope, and
hints will be given as to the best method of making preparations for it.
The great distinction between the simple and compound microscope is,
that whereas the former instrument magnifies the object, the latter
magnifies the magnified image of the object. In the least elaborate form
of this instrument there are two glasses, one at each end of a tube, the
small glass magnifying the object, and being therefore called the
“object glass,” while the other, which magnifies the image of the
object, is placed next to the eye, and is therefore termed the
“eye-glass.” In practice, however, this arrangement is found to be so
extremely defective, that the instrument was quite useless, except as an
experimental toy; for the two enemies of the optician, chromatic and
spherical aberration, prevailed so exceedingly, that every object
appeared as if surrounded with prismatic colours, and every line was
blurred and indistinct.
In this uncertain state the compound microscope remained for many years,
its superb capabilities being scarcely recognised. The chief fault was
thought to be in the material of which the object-glass was made, and
for a long series of years all experiments were conducted with a view to
an improvement in this respect. When, however, the diamond had been
employed as an object-glass, and had failed equally with those of less
costly material, attention was directed to the right point--namely, the
arrangement of the different glasses,--and at length opticians succeeded
in obtaining a pitch of excellence which can be almost termed
perfection. It would be impossible to describe the method which is
employed for this purpose, and it must suffice to say that the principle
is that of playing off one defect against another, and so making them
mutually correct their errors.
The magnifying powers of the compound microscope can be very great, and
it is therefore necessary that extreme care should be taken in its
manipulation. It will be possible for a clumsy person to do more damage
to a good instrument in three minutes than can be repaired in as many
weeks.
Before proceeding to the management of the microscope and the
construction of the “slides,” we will briefly describe one or two chief
forms of the compound microscope.
[Illustration]
The accompanying illustration represents the simplest form of the
compound microscope as at present made. It consists of a stand and a
sliding tube, in which are set the glasses which magnify the object and
its image. At the top is the tube, which is capable of being slid up and
down in the shoulder of the stand, so as to obtain the proper focus.
Above is seen the eye-glass; and the object-glass is shown at the bottom
of the tube. Below the object-glass is the “stage” on which the object
to be magnified is laid; and lowest of all is a mirror, which serves to
reflect the light upwards through the object, and which can be turned by
means of the knobs at the sides. The object-glass is composed of two
pieces, which can readily be separated. If both are used, sufficient
magnifying power is gained to show the scales on a butterfly’s wing and
similar minute objects; while, if one is removed, the object is not
magnified to so great an extent, but a larger portion can be seen, and
the definition is clearer. The cost of this instrument, together with a
few accessories, is half-a-guinea.
There is another microscope constructed on the same principle, which is
a very superior instrument, though it does not at first sight present
any remarkable difference. It possesses, however, four times the
magnifying power of that which has just been mentioned. Instead of two
magnifiers, there are four, and several subsidiary articles are sent
with it,--such as a condenser, a live box, an aquatic box, and half a
dozen slides ready prepared. This instrument costs one sovereign.
[Illustration]
But if the reader can by any possibility afford it, let us advise him in
the strongest terms to devote three guineas to the purpose, and get a
really good instrument. For this small sum a microscope may now be
obtained which could not have been purchased for twenty times three
guineas only a few years ago. One of these beautiful instruments is seen
in the accompanying illustration; in which may be seen the tube, with
its eye-piece and object-glass, and the stand, containing the stage and
the mirror. The arrangement, however, is very different; for the focus
is not obtained by sliding the tube up and down, but by turning the
large milled heads which we see on a level with the stage, and which
raise or depress the tube by means of a rack and pinion. As an extremely
high power can be used with this instrument, a still finer adjustment is
required, so as to obtain a very accurate focus. This is seen on the
front of the tube. The reader will notice that the microscope can be
inclined backwards, for it is so made that it can be set to any angle
which may best suit the observer. The value of this arrangement is very
great, as it permits the observer to sit at his ease in a chair, without
being forced to crane his neck over the microscope, and look
perpendicularly down. Another advantage attending this arrangement is
that the secretions which lubricate the eye do not interrupt the vision,
as is apt to be the case when looking directly downwards.
The mirror, too, can be turned in any direction, and its distance from
the stage lessened or increased by means of a draw-tube. Three different
powers are supplied with this microscope, together with a live-box,
dissecting and stage forceps, &c.; and the whole is made so as to admit
of additional apparatus. The microscope fits into a neat square box, in
which is plenty of room for various articles which will presently be
described. These three microscopes can be obtained from Messrs. Baker,
244, High Holborn; and we mention them, not because we wish to make any
invidious distinctions between the many excellent opticians who now make
microscopes, but because we happen to have used Messrs. Baker’s
instruments for some years, and can bear practical testimony to their
performance.
Another three-guinea microscope ought, however, to be mentioned. It is
the Society of Arts microscope, which is made by Messrs. Field,
opticians, of Birmingham. In form it closely resembles the instrument
which has just been mentioned, but differs in some of the details, as it
possesses a “diaphragm-plate” under the stage for regulating the
admission of light, and, instead of three object-glasses and one
eye-piece, has two object-glasses and two eye-pieces. Dr. Carpenter
mentions that, up to 1861, no less than eighteen hundred of these
microscopes had been sold. To this instrument the medal of the Society
of Arts was awarded.
Either of these microscopes affords all that an ordinary observer is
likely to need; and if he adds a few articles of supplementary
apparatus, he will find himself possessed of a microscope that will
serve all purposes except scientific controversy.
Presuming that the reader has supplied himself with one or other of the
compound microscopes, we will proceed to show the method of using them.
The manipulation of a compound microscope is not so easy as it looks.
The possessor of a really good instrument may fail hopelessly in his
attempts to see a single object. Now, there are three essential points
which a microscopist must attend to,--namely, the correct focus, the
proper light, and the preparation of the object. Of these the focus is
of course the most important, and can be best obtained as follows:--
Lay the object on the stage of the microscope, so as to get its centre
exactly under the centre of the object-glass, and illuminate it as you
best can. Put on the _lowest_ power, and, without looking through the
tube, lower the object-glass until it nearly touches the object. Now
look through the tube, and raise the object-glass gradually from the
object, until the right focus is obtained. The reason for taking these
precautions is, that if you look through the tube and lower it upon the
object, you will in all probability push the glass against the object,
and damage either the one or the other. When you have thus learned the
focus of the lowest power, add another, and repeat the process; and so
on until you have made out the focus of each object-glass. If you have
more than one eye-piece, try them both with each object-glass.
The proper light is our next point, and upon it rests the chief beauty
of the effect. The light which will suit one object will not suit
another, and even the same object should be examined under every variety
of light. Some objects are best shown when the light is thrown _upon_
them from above, and others when it is thrown _through_ them from below.
Again, the direction of the light is of vast importance; for it will
easily be seen that an oblique light will exhibit minute projections by
throwing a shadow on one side and brilliancy on the other, while a
vertical illumination would fail to show them. On the same principle,
one object will be shown better with the light in front, and another
when it is on one side.
[Illustration]
One of the most effective means of attaining this object is by using the
“bull’s-eye condenser,” which is sometimes fixed to the stage, but is
usually detached, as represented in the illustration. As the upright
stem is telescopic, the glass can be raised to a considerable height,
while the joint and sliding-rod permit the lens to be applied at any
angle which promises the most brilliant light.
As for the kind of light that is employed, there is nothing which equals
that of a white cloud; but as such clouds are rare, and are at the best
extremely transient, and can only be seen by day, various artificial
methods of illumination have been invented. Novices generally think that
when the sky is bright and blue they will be very successful in their
illumination, and feel grievously disappointed at finding that they
obtained much more light from the clouds, whose disappearance they had
anxiously been watching. Finding that the blue sky gives scarcely any
light at all, they rush to the other extreme, turn the mirror towards
the sun, and pour such a blaze of light upon the object, that the eye is
blinded by the scintillating refulgence, and the object is often
injured, because the mirror is capable of reflecting heat as well as
light.
In the daytime there is nothing better than the “white-cloud
illuminator,” which is made easily enough by means of plaster of Paris.
A sheet of thin white paper fastened against a window-pane is also
useful; and the simple plan of dabbing the glass with putty will have a
beneficial effect in softening the light, when the window has a southern
aspect. In default of these conveniences, it will be often sufficient to
fix a piece of white letter-paper over the mirror, or even to dull its
surface with wax. At all events, he who aspires to be a true
microscopist must be ready with expedients, and if he finds himself in a
difficulty, he must summarily invent a method of obviating it.
At night a lamp is necessary; candles are useless, because they have two
faults--they flicker, and they become lower as they burn. The latter
defect can be cured by using a candle-lamp, but no arrangement will cure
the flame of flickering; it is peculiarly trying to the eyes, and
destructive of accurate definition. An ordinary moderator lamp answers
pretty well, and a small one is even better for the microscopist than
one of large dimensions. The chief drawback to the moderator lamp is,
that the flame cannot be elevated or lowered, so that the only way to
procure a light at a higher elevation, is to stand the lamp on a block
of wood or a book. Small lamps are, however, made expressly for the
microscope, and, if possible, should be procured, and used for no other
purpose, and intrusted to no other hands.
If you want a really brilliant, clear, white light, you must trim the
lamp yourself. A small piece of pale blue or neutral-tint glass,
interposed between the lamp and the microscope, has a wonderful effect
in diminishing the yellow hue which belongs more or less to all
artificial lights which are produced by the combustion of oil or fat. We
have no doubt but that in a few years we shall be rid of the clumsy and
dirty machines that we call lamps, and have substituted for them the
pure brilliancy of the electric light.
Whatever lamp you use, a shade is absolutely necessary, in order to
defend the eyes. Let me here warn my young readers, that they cannot be
too careful of their eyes. In the exuberance of youthful strength and
health we are too apt to treat our eyes as unceremoniously as our
digestion, and in later years we awake to unavailing repentance.
[Illustration]
Many shades can be purchased; but it is far better to make your own
after the shape here exhibited. They are not pretty to look at, but
they save the eyes better than any other form, and whether for reading,
writing, or microscopic work, you should use no other. The peculiar
merit of them consists in the fact that the light is thrown on the spot
where it is wanted, and is cut off from everything except that spot.
Another point which calls for extreme attention is the perfect
cleanliness of the glasses. It is astonishing how a tiny dust-mote, or
the least condensation of damp, will diminish the powers of the
microscope, and how often the instrument is blamed for indistinctness,
when the real fault lies in the carelessness of the operator. Even when
the greatest care is taken, dust is sure to settle on the glasses,
especially on the eye-piece, and before using the microscope the glasses
ought to be carefully examined. Never wipe them with an ordinary
handkerchief, but get a piece of new wash-leather; beat it well until no
dust issues from it, and then put it into a box, with a tightly-fitting
cover. Use this, and nothing else, for cleaning the glasses, and you
will avoid those horrid scratches with which the eye-glass and
object-glass of careless operators are always disfigured.
Moisture is very apt to condense on the glasses and to ruin their
clearness. If the microscope be brought from a cold into a warm room,
the glasses will be instantly covered with moisture, just as the outside
of a tumbler of cold water is always covered with fine dew when brought
into a warm room. The microscope should therefore be kept at least an
hour in the room wherein it is to be used, so that the instrument and
the atmosphere may be of the same temperature. You should make the
microscope a trifle warmer than the surrounding atmosphere, and so avoid
all danger of condensation. When changing the object-glass or eye-piece,
always keep the hand as far away from the glass as possible, and
manipulate with the tip of the forefinger and thumb. The human skin
always gives out so much exhalation, that even when the hand is cold the
glasses will be dimmed; and it is a peculiarity of such moisture, that
it adheres to the glasses with great pertinacity, and does not evaporate
like the dew which is condensed from the atmosphere.
In order to insure perfect success in this important particular, the
young microscopist will do well to get the optician from whom he
purchased his instrument to explain its construction, and to give him a
lesson or two in the art of taking it to pieces and putting it together
again; for unless each glass can be separately cleaned, no one can be
quite sure that the instrument will perform as it ought to do. The best
method of ascertaining whether it is quite clean is to throw the light
upwards by means of the mirror, and then to turn the eye-piece slowly
round. If any dust or moisture has collected either upon the eye-glass
or the “field-glass,” which forms the second lens of the eye-piece, it
will be immediately detected. Turning the object-glass will in a similar
manner detect impurities upon its surface.
We will now proceed to the manner in which objects are examined.
Suppose, for example, that we take a buttercup-leaf, because it can be
found at almost any time of the year. Place a piece of glass on the
stage, lay the leaf on it, put on the lowest power, set the focus, and
then look at the leaf. You will probably be disappointed, and see
nothing but a confused mass of undulating dark green, like a green
carpet thrown carelessly on the ground, and seen in the dim twilight.
Two points are now needed; the first being to get the leaf flat, so as
to avoid the undulation, and the second being to throw a proper light
upon it.
Take out the leaf, and, instead of laying it entire under the
microscope, select the flattest part, and cut it out with scissors. A
piece the size of a silver penny will be amply large enough. Lay this
piece on the glass, get the focus afresh, and then look through the
microscope. The leaf will now appear much more regular, and will be seen
as a rough surface, mottled with white and traversed by pink and green
ridges, which are the large and small nervures. By means of a mirror or
the condenser throw a brighter light upon it, and it will be seen to be
covered with a slight roughness, the nature of which cannot be clearly
ascertained; then add the next highest power, and try if the structure
of that roughness can be made out. Curiously enough, although the
magnifying power has been more than doubled, the roughness has much the
same appearance as before; so that we must try another plan, and look at
the leaf edgeways.
Take the piece of leaf in the stage-forceps, but _do not touch it with
your hand_; fix the forceps on the stage and turn the leaf so that it
presents its edge to the object glass. Get your focus, and you will now
see the cut edge of the leaf, and will at once distinguish its
structure. On either side may be seen the upper and lower cuticle, and
in the centre the soft green substance, or “parenchyma,” as it is
called. From the cuticle project a number of short hairs, and when the
focus is accurately obtained, the cause of the roughness will be seen in
a vast number of minute projections, which are, in fact, identical in
structure with the hairs, though not so well developed. The
under-cuticle of the leaf is much more interesting than the upper.
[Illustration]
Now change the illumination, and, instead of throwing the light upon the
object from above, turn the mirror so as to direct it through the object
from below. No apparent result will follow, because the leaf is so thick
and opaque that the light cannot pass through it. Hold the leaf
horizontally, and, by means of the stage-forceps, rip it smartly across,
and if you do this rightly, you will find that the two cuticles are
partly separated, so as to allow either to be examined separately. At
first the leaf will most probably be torn along one of the large
nervures, so that the cuticles are not perfectly separated. Never mind
failure, but try again; and you are sure, after a few efforts, to hit
upon the right method of tearing the leaf.
[Illustration]
One of the most useful capabilities of the “live-box” is now shown. As
may be seen by the figure and section, it consists of an inner tube with
a thick glass, and an outer tube with a thin glass. The outer tube can
be taken off, water or any other substance laid on the thick glass, and
then the outer tube or cover is slid down upon it until the object is
pressed flatly between the two glasses. When you have succeeded in
getting a convenient slip of the leaf, lay it on the thick glass of the
inner tube, and put a drop of water on it. Put on the cover, and push it
down until the piece of leaf is pressed flat, without being squeezed.
Now look through the microscope, and you will see a beautiful sight,
showing how much there is in a despised leaf, which we daily tread under
foot.
[Illustration]
The cells of which the cuticle is chiefly composed are seen in many a
waving outline, while at their points of junction are placed the
remarkable contrivances called “stomata,” or mouths, which are the
apertures through which the atmosphere is enabled to penetrate into the
interior of the leaf. The two semilunar cells at the sides of the
opening may be considered as lips, which open and close according as the
plant needs the air or not. The numerous dots which are seen upon the
leaf are of a vivid green colour, and it is to their presence that the
leaf owes its hue.
We have given these details because they are applicable to the
examination of all leaves and petals, and show the young observer the
method which is to be adopted when looking for the first time at a
strange object.
[Illustration]
If the microscopist should follow up his work properly, and make
sketches of every object which he places under the microscope, he cannot
do better than use the camera-lucida, a neat little instrument, which is
fitted into the eye-piece of the microscope. Dr. Beale’s neutral glass
is as efficacious in careful hands, and only costs a fourth of the sum.
This instrument cannot be applied to the ten and twenty shilling
microscopes, as it requires that the tube should be perfectly
horizontal. The method of using it is simple enough.
After fixing the object and getting the right focus, set the instrument
horizontally, and arrange the light so that the object is well
illuminated, and its lines quite clear and well defined. Now remove the
cap of the eye-piece, and fix the camera-lucida in its stead. Lay a
drawing-pad on the table under the camera-lucida, look through the
square opening (or, if you use Mr. Beale’s glass, look through the
neutral glass), and you will see the object apparently projected on the
paper. We say apparently, because in reality the image is not thrown on
the paper at all, but on the camera, and the eye refers it to the paper,
as being the nearest object. In fact, the principle on which this
camera-lucida is arranged is exactly that of the Polytechnic ghost,
which appears to be in one place, whereas it is in another.
Now take a pencil, cut it to a very fine point, and trace the outline of
the object on the paper. At first you will think this to be an
impracticable task, for the point of the pencil will totally vanish.
Soon, however, the eye will so adjust itself as to see the pencil and
the object perfectly well, and by a little practice the observer will be
able to sketch every object as rapidly and firmly as if he were copying
a drawing, by means of tracing-paper. The neutral glass is perhaps to be
preferred to the camera-lucida, as it is learned more easily, and gives
less trouble than that instrument. Its cost is five shillings.
After you have practised yourself well in the handling of the
microscope, your ambition will take another step, and lead you to the
preparation of permanent objects. In order to set yourself up with the
needful apparatus, you will have to disburse about five shillings. A
small spirit-lamp will cost eighteenpence, and a small bottle of Canada
balsam, another of asphalte varnish, and another of Dean’s gelatine,
will make about eighteenpence or two shillings more. A few pence will
purchase a sheet or two of ornamental paper, and a few more a flat plate
of brass or copper, about five inches by three. The rest of the five
shillings may be expended in “slides” and thin glass, cut square.
Slides are merely slips of glass, three inches in length by one in
width, and the thin glass is used for laying upon the objects and
defending them from dust. We advise the square glass, because it
scarcely costs one quarter as much as the round glass, and is equally
effective when properly managed. There are several methods of “putting
up” preparations--namely, dry, in Canada balsam, in gelatine, and in
cells. We will take them in their order.
The simplest plan is, of course, the “dry” mode. Suppose that you want
to preserve a tiny piece of down, or the scales from a butterfly’s wing.
First wash all the slides and glasses well, by dipping them into a
strong solution of soda, and then into hot water, in order to get rid of
grease, taking care never to touch them with the hand, but to take them
out of the water with the forceps. This can be done at any time, and the
glasses carefully wrapped up and placed in a box ready for use.
You now select one of the slides, and lay the object exactly in its
centre. If very minute objects are used, they must be examined in order
to see whether they are properly disposed. The next process is, to take
one of the thin glasses with the microscope, and lay it very carefully
over the object. Then cut a piece of ornamental paper, about two inches
long and seven-eighths of an inch in width; cut or punch a circular
piece out of its centre, damp it well, and cover the wrong side
slightly, but completely, with paste. Lay it on the slide, so that the
centre of the hole shall coincide with that of the object, work it down
neatly with the fingers, and it will hold the square piece of thin
glass, which is technically called the “cover,” in its place. Watch it
occasionally as it dries, and be ready to press down any part of the
paper that may start up. Write, with ink, the name of the object on the
end of the slide.
When you have made a dozen or two of these preparations, it will be
time to letter and index them. On each slide paste a slip of white
paper, and on the paper write a brief notice of the object, thus--
+---------------+
| SCALES. |
| |
| D. HEAD MOTH. |
+---------------+
Then scratch with a bit of flint, or with a writing-diamond, if you have
one, a number on the end of the slide, and have a note-book with a
corresponding number opposite to which you enter the description at a
fuller length, thus:--
18--Scales of Death’s Head Moth (_Acherontia Atropos_), from centre
of under-surface of right fore wing. Dry. June 4, 1864. +
The cross signifies that you prepared the object yourself, and the
reason for adding the date is, that in after years you will have a
valuable guide as to the durability of your preparations. If the
specimen has been purchased or presented, always add the name of the
seller or donor, as well as the date. These precautions may seem to be
needlessly minute, but we have so often seen whole sets of valuable
preparations rendered useless for want of ticketing, that we cannot too
strongly impress on our readers the necessity for the note-book as well
as the label, the one acting as a check upon the other. When the label
has been affixed, and the details transferred to the note-book, the ink
may be washed off the end of the slide.
There is another convenient method of putting up the elytra of beetles,
parts of various insects, mosses, minute shells, and similar objects.
Take a common pill-box of the smallest size, and cut a little cylinder
of cork, that will nearly, but not quite, equal the height of the box,
and fasten one end to the bottom of the box with glue. Now blacken the
interior of the box and the cork cylinder. Put a little drop of Canada
balsam, Arabian cement, or gum Arabic on the top of the cylinder; put
the object on it, press it into its place, and, when the cement is hard,
the preparation is complete. The cover of the box serves to keep the
object from dust.
Now we come to the Canada balsam, a substance which produces beautiful
effects when rightly handled, but is most aggravating to the learner,
causing alternate irascibility and depression of spirits. Many objects,
such as the antennæ and feet of insects, will not show their full beauty
unless they are mounted in Canada balsam. The method of doing so is as
follows:--A week or two beforehand put the objects into ether or spirits
of turpentine, and allow them to remain there until wanted. Pile up some
old books, or take a couple of convenient wooden blocks; lay your brass
plate upon them; light the spirit-lamp, and put it under the plate so as
to heat it. Lay two or three slides on the plate, and all then can be
heated at the same time.
Warm the bottle of Canada balsam, and with a glass rod take out a very
little drop, and put it exactly in the middle of the slide. In order to
insure this point, I always put a dot of ink on the wrong side of the
slide. Stir it about with one of the needles mentioned on page 428, and
if any bubbles rise, break them. When the balsam is quite soft and
liquid, take one of the objects out of the bottle and put it into the
balsam, exactly over the black dot. Now add a little more balsam, so as
to cover it, and let it lie for a few moments. Take one of the glass
covers, put a very little balsam on its centre, and lay it neatly over
the object, pressing it down gradually and equally. Unless this be done,
the object will not remain in the centre, but will shoot out on one
side, and the whole operation must be begun _de novo_. Remove it from
the hot plate and lay it on a cool surface, still continuing the
pressure until the balsam has begun to harden. Lay a little leaden
weight--a pistol-bullet partly flattened is excellent for the
purpose--and on the cover write the name of the object, as already
mentioned, and then proceed to prepare another slide.
Twenty such slides may be prepared in the course of a morning, and when
they are finished they should be laid carefully in a cold place, where
they will be free from dust. In a week or so the balsam will be quite
hard, and then the slide may be completed. Take an old knife, which
should be kept for this special purpose; heat the blade in the
spirit-lamp, and then run it along the edges of the slide, so as to take
off the superfluous balsam which has escaped from beneath the cover.
This must be done very quickly, or the balsam inside the cover will be
heated by the knife, and the preparation spoiled. When this is done, cut
the ornamental paper, as already described, number and label the slide,
wash off the ink, and then the preparation is complete. Some objects are
very troublesome to prepare, and require to be soaked in turpentine and
boiled repeatedly in the balsam before they are completely penetrated
with it.
Objects which are put up in Deane’s gelatine are managed after a similar
fashion, save that the gelatine is to be heated by placing the bottle in
hot water, and that the turpentine is not needed. Vegetable structures
show beautifully when thus prepared. To remove the superfluous gelatine
use a _wet_ and not a hot knife.
Cells are very difficult to manage, and the novice had better not
attempt to make them, but is hereby advised to purchase them ready made.
Suppose that the young microscopist has dissected the digestive organs
of a bee, and wishes to preserve it in spirit; his best plan will be to
use a cell for the purpose. Let him buy a cell of sufficient depth,
float the preparation into it, fill it up with spirit, put the cover
loosely on, and leave it for a week, occasionally raising the cover and
stirring the preparation with a needle, in order to get rid of any
air-bubbles that may have been entangled in the tissues.
Then let him wipe the edges of the cell very dry, put on a slight layer
of gold-size or asphalte varnish--the former is preferable--fill up the
cell a “bumper,” and lay the cover very gently upon it, beginning at one
end and gently lowering it. With blotting-paper the liquid that escapes
must be removed, the edges dried afresh, a flattened bullet placed on
the cover, and with a very small camel’s-hair brush the slightest
possible coating of size painted round the edge of the cell. When it has
hardened another may be given, and so on, until a thick hard wall of
size has been built up round the edges and made the cover completely
air-tight.
We presume that the reader does not intend to use his microscope merely
as a toy, but that he desires to gain some insight into the works of
Nature, and is therefore willing to set to work in a systematic manner.
It is now known that both animal and vegetable structures are built up
by means of certain minute particles, technically called CELLS, and that
in every part of a plant or of an animal can be recognised the
constituents of which it is formed. We will, therefore, begin with the
vegetables.
[Illustration: CELL, STRAWBERRY.]
Some of the lowest plants, such as the minute algæ that inhabit the
water, afford excellent examples of the simple vegetable cell; but as
these plants are not readily procured by a beginner, we will select some
familiar object wherein the cells may be found. If any soft and pulpy
fruit be taken when it is quite ripe, and submitted to the microscope,
the vegetable cell will be seen in a tolerably perfect form. The three
rounded objects shown in the accompanying illustration are cells from
the strawberry, specimens of which can easily be seen, if a very thin
slice be cut with a razor or lancet, the latter being the preferable
instrument. Be careful to dip the blade in water before cutting the
fruit, and to float the slice from the blade to the glass slide by
placing them both under water. Unless this precaution be taken, the
section will not be flat, but will be crumpled up, and the cells will
not be properly seen.
Within each of these cells may be seen a small rounded object, which is
technically called the “nucleus;” and in some cases a smaller nucleus,
called the “nucleolus,” may be observed within the nucleus itself. The
increase of cells mostly takes place by a process of division. A line
passes across the nucleus, which presently separates into two distinct
parts, each of which recedes from the other, causing the cell to enlarge
and alter its shape. Presently a line is seen across the cell itself,
and in due time the cell is also divided into two parts, each having its
own nucleus.
In the present instance the cell is totally spherical, because the fruit
from which it was taken was soft, and allowed the constituent cells to
expand. When, however, the vegetable substance becomes hard, the cells
are pressed closely together, and their shapes are very much altered.
Sometimes, when the cells are of nearly the same size, and the pressure
is equal on every side, the cells form regular twelve-sided figures,
called “dodecahedra,” which, when that occurs, show a six-sided outline.
A very thin slice of raw potato will show the twelve-sided cells
beautifully, and has the further advantage of exhibiting the starch
globules with which the cells are filled. Here is a figure of a potato
cell, which presents a six-sided outline, just like that of a bee’s
waxen dwelling, and which is crowded with the beautiful globules of
starch. If the reader likes to make a few dozen balls of clay, and to
squeeze them together in a mass, he will find that the central balls
will have lost their globular shape, and assumed a more or less regular
twelve-sided form, very much like that of the potato cells.
[Illustration: CELL, POTATO.]
[Illustration: STELLATE TISSUE.]
Sometimes the cells run out longitudinally into cylinders, and attain
the really enormous length of three inches; sometimes they become
flattened, as the skin or epidermis of many plants; and oftentimes they
push out their sides into arms or rays, like stars, and form the tissue
which is technically called “stellate.” Here is a specimen of stellate
tissue taken from the pith of the common rush, wherein the rays are seen
to be very regular: generally, however, the rays are extremely
irregular, and require some little practice to detect them. Stellate
tissue may be seen in the white portion of orange-peel, in the thick
fleshy substance of many aquatic plants, in certain leaf-stalks, and in
many similar objects.
We will now see how the soft cells which form the pulpy fruit of the
strawberry can be changed into the hard timber of the oak or iron-wood
tree.
[Illustration: RINGED STRUCTURE.]
Wherever a cell is destined to form part of a _permanent_ tissue, it is
strengthened by receiving certain additions to its walls. These
additions are technically known as “secondary deposit,” and are made in
various ways. Sometimes they extend in a thin layer over the whole
cell-wall, leaving a number of little holes, which are called “pits,”
and earning the name of “pitted structures.” Very frequently the
secondary deposit is arranged in a series of rings, an example of which
is given in the accompanying illustration. This object is taken from the
mistletoe. Good examples of the ringed structures may be seen in the
anthers of many plants, and in the leaf-stem of the common rhubarb, an
example of which is shown in the next illustration. Another very common
form of secondary deposit is the spiral, which is generally used where
strength and elasticity are united. Two examples of the spiral form are
given in the illustration; the first taken from the lily, and the second
from the “rhizome,” or subterranean stem of the water-lily.
[Illustration: RINGED AND SPIRAL STRUCTURES.]
Another beautiful form of secondary deposit is seen in the fern root. If
the root be cut longitudinally, and the dark hard fibre dissolved
carefully out with nitric acid, the deposit will seem to have assumed
the shape of a winding staircase, and is then called “scalariform,” or
ladder-shaped. Similar structures may be found in asparagus.
[Illustration: WOOD-CELLS.]
The reader will see that the hardness of the structure depends entirely
on the amount of secondary deposit, and we accordingly find that when
the wood is hard and fit to be worked with tools the cells are almost
wholly filled with the secondary deposit. In this state they are called
“wood-cells.” Examples of these cells may be seen in the accompanying
illustration. In the first example, which is taken from the elder-tree,
four cells are shown in order to display the manner in which their
pointed ends are arranged. (The reader must remember that in all
wood-cells the ends are pointed.) In the next example, which is taken
from the chrysanthemum, the pitted structure is still retained; but in
the last figure, which is drawn from the lime-tree, the entire cell is
filled with secondary structure. The reader must understand that we can
only give the veriest outline of the subject, and profess to do nothing
more than indicate the method of observation, leaving the pupil to work
out the details by himself.
[Illustration: HAIR OF LAVENDER.]
Another curious development of the plant-cells is the formation of
HAIRS. These objects alone afford an inexhaustible field for the
microscopist, and any one who chooses to work out the subject will find
himself repaid if he makes a good series of preparations. In their
primary forms the hairs are seen merely as little projections on the
epidermis, whether of the stem, leaf, or petal, and by degrees assume
their varied and beautiful forms. In order to show the singular forms
which hairs sometimes assume, an illustration is here given of the hairs
of the lavender leaf. This is one of the hairs that give the leaf its
silvery gloss. It consists of an upright stem, from the top of which a
number of forked branches shoot out horizontally, much like an open
umbrella held upright. The object of this remarkable form is, that the
delicate vessels in which the perfume is held should escape injury. If
the reader will refer to the second figure, which represents a much
magnified view of the edge of the leaf, he will see the globular
perfume-gland standing under the shelter of the branching hairs.
The following plants afford valuable examples of hair:--Arabis, marvel
of Peru, sowthistle, tobacco, southernwood, hollyhock, snapdragon, pansy
(in throat of flower), deutzia (under-side of leaf), verbena, alyssum,
tradescantia, borage, cowhage, and many others. The beautiful effect
produced by the petals of flowers is caused by the imperfect hairs with
which their surfaces are studded.
The POLLEN of plants is always worth observing, and some specimens are
of remarkably beautiful shapes. Take that of althæa, crocus, cactus,
heath, violet, daisy, lily, snowdrop, wallflower, willow-herb (a very
beautiful form), hollyhock, periwinkle, primrose, &c. Put some up in
Deane’s gelatine, and dry some, besides examining them all when fresh.
The microscopist ought to examine the structures of WOOD by making
sections in the directions transverse and longitudinal. A razor will
answer very well for the purpose, and the wood should always be soaked
inside, and the razor wetted before the section is made. It is often
useful to make diagonal sections of several woods, especially those of
the pine and juniper. All the forest trees should be examined, and their
roots and bark should not be omitted. Cut sections of coconut-shell,
vegetable ivory, sugar-cane (a most beautiful object when mounted
opaque), bamboo, butcher’s broom, &c.
MOSSES are beautiful objects, and can always be found. Examine
particularly the fruit or seed-vessel, and note the structure of its
different parts. Put these on a slide, and breathe on them, noting at
the same time any change which may take place.
The SPORE CASES of ferns are extremely beautiful, and should be
carefully examined. The little brown dots or streaks that are seen on
the under surface of the fronds are called “sori,” and contain a large
but variable number of the sporanges. These consist of stalked sacs or
cases, and differ much in shape, according to the species of fern. If
the fern be fresh from which the sorus is taken, the sporanges may be
seen writhing and twisting like so many serpents, and sometimes it
happens that one of the sporanges bursts, and suddenly covers the field
of the microscope with minute black dots. These dots are the spores or
seeds of the fern, and when magnified with a very high power, they are
seen to be variously shaped. One of the most remarkable spores is that
of the equisetum, or mare’s tail of the water. This spore looks like a
ball with something coiled round it. As soon as the spore is discharged
from its case, four threads are seen to uncoil themselves from around
it, and by their elasticity to cause the spore to jump about as if
alive. These fibres are technically named elasters, and are
prolongations of the outer coat of the spore.
FUNGI of all kinds should be examined. There is never any difficulty in
finding fungi, though the autumn is the best time of year for this
purpose. “Mould,” as it is popularly called, is a form assumed by many
species of fungus, which, though objectionable to the careful housewife,
are full of interest to the microscopist. The well-known mushroom and
toadstools are the highest of the fungi. The black spots on leaves are
fungi, mostly belonging to the genus puccinia, and the best specimens
are generally found on the wild rose or bramble. The black “smut” of
wheat is another fungus, very pretty under the microscope, but very
obnoxious to the farmer; and the “bunt” also belongs to the same vast
tribe of plants, four thousand species of which are now known to exist.
The young observer should also look for the beautiful crystals which
exist in many vegetable cells. The RAPHIDES, as these crystals are
called, are of various forms, mostly shaped like curved needles, but
often assuming very pretty and regular outlines. Raphides are
plentifully found in the bulb of the onion, in the rhubarb, the lily,
the iris, &c. They are best mounted as opaque objects and, if the reader
can procure a binocular microscope, he will see the form of the
raphides better than with the single-tube instrument.
SEEDS of different plants should be carefully examined, especially those
of small dimensions, which often exhibit some wonderful beauties of
structure. The winged seed of various plants, such as the thistle, the
dandelion, the valerian, and the willow-herb, are extremely interesting
objects; while those of the yellow snapdragon, the mullein, the Robin
Hood, and the bur-seed, are remarkably beautiful in form, though they
have no parachute, as the feathery appendage is called.
Leaving dry land, we will devote a short time to the water. Let the
reader take with him the simple collecting apparatus mentioned on page
430, and secure specimens of the water from different ponds, ditches,
and streams. For collecting the larger objects a little net, which can
be purchased cheap, is of very great use. It is easily made by any
tinman, and if the young microscopist knows the use of solder, as all
experimental philosophers ought to do, he can put it together in a few
minutes. It is formed of a strip of zinc bent into the requisite form,
and with a socket, to which a handle can be attached. A piece of coarse
muslin, or, rather, fine “net,” is then stretched over the bottom, and
the apparatus is complete.
In the water is sure to be found one of the lowest forms of vegetable
life--namely, the “confervoid algæ.” Look for these in bright, clear
pools, placing the collecting bottle near any greenish film collected
around the stems of plants, or spread over the stones on the bed of the
pool. If this film be very carefully taken up, it will produce many
interesting forms of vegetable life. One of the most remarkable of these
vegetables is that which is called “volvox globator,” a figure of which
is here given.
[Illustration: VOLVOX.]
This wonderful object is about as large as the head of a very small pin,
so that it is visible to the naked eye, and looks like a tiny globule
passing through the water. When it is placed under a lens of moderate
power, say of an inch focus, it exhibits some very strange
peculiarities. It continually revolves, and by its revolution is able to
enjoy a moderate degree of locomotion, though without any apparent
object. Small dark spots are also seen upon it.
If a half-inch lens be now used, the structure of the volvox begins to
be exhibited. The whole surface is covered with a network of very fine
fibres, having a spot at the intersection of each mesh. On applying a
still higher power, say the four-tenths of an inch, the structure is
further elucidated, and the dots on the surface are seen to consist of
greenish bodies, each furnished with a pair of delicate fibres,
technically named cilia, which are constantly vibrating, and cause the
revolution of the general mass. The dark spots are now seen to be the
young plants in different stages of progress. From six to ten of these
are inclosed within the parent, and when the latter has reached its full
age, the membrane bursts asunder, and the little volvoces are liberated.
[Illustration: CLOSTERIUM.]
Another interesting form is the closterium, a genus which is sure to
produce several good examples. We may mention that the ponds in
Blackheath are very rich in these curious vegetables, and a very
considerable series of confervoids may be obtained from them. The
closteria are easily recognised by their resemblance to the Australian
“boomerang.”
As our space is rapidly waning, we must leave the vegetable, and proceed
to the animal kingdom.
As is the case with vegetables, the animal structure is composed of
cells, though they cannot be so easily traced as in the examples which
we have already noticed. The young observer may readily perceive the
animal cell, in its largest and simplest form, by placing a little of
the yolk of egg under the microscope. CARTILAGE, or gristle, is easily
seen to be composed of cells. The nails of the fingers afford good
objects for the microscopist in search of animal cells. If a thin
section be placed under the microscope, none but an experienced observer
will be able to make out the presence of cells at all; but if the
section be soaked in “liquor potassæ,” the cells immediately swell up,
and their shape is at once made plain. Take the BONE of a young chicken
or rabbit, and make a thin section that embraces both the bone and
cartilage, and there will then be a beautiful object for the
microscopist, showing how the cartilage is changed by degrees into bone.
[Illustration: BONE, TRANSVERSE.]
Sections of bone should also be made, both transverse and longitudinal.
The BLOOD is another object which must be carefully examined. The
“corpuscles” which give the colouring matter to the blood are cells of
different size, according to the creature from which they are taken. The
dimensions of the animal exercise no apparent influence on the
corpuscles, for those of “proteus anguinus,” a little creature not
larger than a lamprey, are many times larger than those of the ox. In
the accompanying illustration is shown a series of specimens, in order
to show the great difference in their shape and size, all being drawn to
scale and magnified by the same lens. The circular corpuscles in the
left-hand upper corner are those of man; immediately below is a single
corpuscle from the pigeon. The great central corpuscle is taken from the
proteus; the two in the lower right-hand corner are from the frog, one
of these being viewed edgeways; and of the remaining two, that on the
left hand belongs to the tortoise, and that on the right to a fish.
[Illustration: BLOOD CORPUSCLES.]
The insect tribes are an inexhaustible source of objects for the
microscopist, who may find that even a single fly will give him
employment for many months. The scales from the butterfly’s wing, the
wonderful compound eyes with which insects are gifted, the structure of
their feet, and their entire anatomy, are always at the service of any
microscopist who really cares for his work. It would, of course, be
impossible to give even a list of the interesting portions of the
different insects; so one or two examples must suffice us.
[Illustration: ANTENNÆ OF FLY.]
Take the ANTENNÆ of the insect tribes, and see how beautifully they are
formed, how graceful is the shape, and how elaborate the structure. A
low power will be useful for exhibiting their general shape and outline,
but it is not until we know how to use the higher powers that the real
beauty of these curious organs is seen. In the accompanying illustration
is given part of an antenna of the common blue-bottle fly, in order to
show the remarkable cavities which exist within the antennæ, and which
are thought by some anatomists to be organs of hearing, and by others to
be organs of smell.
[Illustration: WINGS OF BEE.]
The WINGS of insects are also most remarkable, and possess many
peculiarities of structure which cannot be detected without the aid of a
microscope. Take, for example, the wings of any hymenopterous insect,
say those of a humble-bee, and see how beautiful is the structure which
causes the four wings to be united into two when the insect is about to
fly. In the illustration may be seen a pair of these wings, together
with the row of hooks which bind them together. A still more magnified
representation of the hooks is placed near the wings.
It is now ascertained that the wings of insects are connected with the
breathing apparatus, and that the respiration of the insect extends even
to the very tips of these singular organs, which are not modifications
of existing limbs, as in the birds, but additional structures. The
circulation of insects may often be seen by placing a portion of a
transparent wing under a moderately high power. We have often seen it in
the wing of the great water-beetle. A series of very beautiful
preparations may be made in order to show the distinction between the
wings of different insects; and as the orders of insects are founded
upon their wings, there ought to be at least one example of each order.
The proboscis of insects is always worthy of careful examination.
As to the breathing apparatus itself, the best mode of examining it is
to open a caterpillar, remove a part of the large breathing tube which
runs along each side, and place it under the microscope. It should
always be taken so as to include one of the spiracles, or
breathing-holes. An example of a breathing-tube, taken from a silk-worm,
is given in the illustration.
[Illustration: BREATHING-TUBE, SILKWORM.]
HAIRS of animals are very curious and interesting objects. They should
be mounted in three modes--namely, dry transparent, dry opaque, and in
Canada balsam, transparent. Be sure to procure some hair of the bat, the
sheep, the mouse, the deer, the mole, and any of the weasel tribe. Many
insects have very beautiful hair, but the most lovely hair in the animal
kingdom is that which is obtained from the sea-mouse. Fish scales should
also be procured, and specimens should be taken from the lateral line.
MOLLUSCS of all kinds afford many beautiful objects, and the observer
should be very careful to examine the wonderful tongue-ribbon of the
snail, the slug, the periwinkle, the whelk, and other similar molluscs.
If meant to be examined by polarized light, the tongue-ribbon should be
mounted in Canada balsam.
CRYSTALS should always form part of a collection. Take those of common
salt, nitre, sugar, chlorate of potash, salicine, &c.; indeed, anything
that will crystallize should be prepared and mounted, as such objects
will often be most useful when examining unknown substances.
[Illustration: BIRD’S-HEAD PROCESS.]
[Illustration: NOCTILUCA.]
[Illustration: PEDICILLARIÆ.]
ZOOPHYTES must of course find a place in the cabinet, and the young
microscopist ought to put up a few specimens of the “bird’s-head”
processes which are found in the bugularia and other inhabitants of the
sea. The pretty noctiluca, to which is mostly owing the phosphorescence
of the sea, should be preserved, and the extraordinary appendages to the
skin of certain star-fish and sea urchins should be examined. These are
called pedicillariæ, and a sketch of them is given in the illustration.
[Illustration]
OPTICS AND OPTICAL AMUSEMENTS.
“’Seeing is believing,’ so the sages say,
To prove this false, hear me, my friends, I pray,
And very soon you all will be agreeing,
That nought is so deceptive as our _seeing_.”--MARTIN.
Optics is the science of _light_ and _vision_. Concerning the nature of
light, two theories are at present very ably maintained by their
respective advocates. One is termed the Newtonian theory, and the other
the Huygenean. The Newtonian theory considers light to consist of
inconceivably small bodies emanating from the sun, or any other luminous
body. The Huygenean conceives it to consist in the undulations of a
highly elastic and subtle fluid, propagated round luminous centres in
spherical waves, like those arising in a placid lake when a stone is
dropped into the water.
LIGHT AS AN EFFECT.
Light follows the same laws as gravity, and its intensity or degree
decreases as the square of the distance from the luminous body
increases. Thus, at the distance of two yards from a candle we shall
have four times less light than we should have, were it only one yard
from it, and so on in the same proportion.
[Illustration]
REFRACTION.
Bodies which suffer the rays of light to pass through them, such as air,
water, or glass, are called refracting media. When rays of light enter
these, they do not proceed in straight lines, but are said to be
refracted, or bent out of their course, as seen in the drawing. The ray
of light proceeding from B through the glass L G is bent from the point
C, instead of passing in the direction of the dotted line. But if the
ray F C falls perpendicularly on the glass, there is no refraction, and
it proceeds in a direct line to K; hence refraction only takes place
when rays fall obliquely or aslant on the media.
[Illustration]
THE INVISIBLE COIN MADE VISIBLE.
If a coin be placed in a basin, so that on standing at a certain
distance it be just hid from the eye of an observer by the rim or edge
of the basin, and then water be poured in by a second person, the first
keeping his position; as the water rises the coin will become visible,
and will appear to have moved from the side to the middle of the basin.
[Illustration]
THE MULTIPLYING GLASS.
The multiplying glass is a semicircular piece of glass cut into facets
or distinct surfaces; and in looking through it we have an illustration
of the laws of refraction, for if a small object, such as a fly, be
placed at D, an eye at E will see as many flies as there are surfaces or
facets on the glass.
[Illustration]
TRANSPARENT BODIES.
Transparent bodies, such as glass, may be made of such form as to cause
all the rays which pass through them from any given point to meet in any
other given point beyond them, or which will disperse them from the
given point. These are called lenses, and have different names according
to their form. 1. Is called the plano-convex lens. 2. Plano-concave. 3.
Double convex. 4. Double concave. 5. A meniscus, so called from its
resembling the crescent moon.
[Illustration]
THE PRISM.
The prism is a triangular solid of glass, and by it the young optician
may decompose a ray of light into its primitive and supplementary
colours, for a ray of light is of a compound nature. By the prism the
ray A is divided into its three primitive colours, blue, red, and
yellow; and their four supplementary ones, violet, indigo, green, and
orange. The best way to perform this experiment is to cut a small slit
in a window-shutter, on which the sun shines at some period of the day,
and directly opposite the hole place a prism P; a beam of light in
passing through it will then be decomposed, and if let fall upon a sheet
of white paper, or against a white wall, the seven colours of the
rainbow will be observed.
[Illustration]
COMPOSITION OF LIGHT.
The beam of light passing through the prism is decomposed, and the
spaces occupied by the colours are in the following proportions:--red,
6; orange, 4; yellow, 7; green, 8; blue, 8; indigo, 6; violet, 11. Now,
if you paste a sheet of white paper on a circular piece of board about
six inches in diameter, and divide it with a pencil into fifty parts,
and paint colours in them in the proportions given above, painting them
dark in the centre parts, and gradually fainter at the edges, till they
blend with the one adjoining. If the board be then fixed to an axle, and
made to revolve quickly, the colours will no longer appear separate and
distinct, but becoming gradually less visible they will ultimately
appear _white_, giving this appearance to the whole surface of the
paper.
[Illustration]
A NATURAL CAMERA OBSCURA.
The human eye is a camera obscura, for on the back of it on the retina
every object in a landscape is beautifully depicted in miniature. This
may be proved by the
BULLOCK’S EYE EXPERIMENT.
Procure a fresh bullock’s eye from the butcher, and carefully thin the
outer coat of it behind: take care not to cut it, for if this should be
done the vitreous humour will escape, and the experiment cannot be
performed. Having so prepared the eye, if the pupil of it be directed to
any bright objects, they will appear distinctly delineated on the back
part precisely as objects appear in the instrument we are about to
describe. The effect will be heightened if the eye is viewed in a dark
room with a small hole in the shutter, but in every case the appearance
will be very striking.
THE CAMERA OBSCURA.
[Illustration]
This is a very pleasing and instructive optical apparatus, and may be
purchased for four or five shillings. But it may be easily made by the
young optician. Procure an oblong box, about two feet long, twelve
inches wide, and eight high. In one end of this a tube must be fitted
containing a lens, and be made to slide backwards and forwards so as to
suit the focus. Within the box should be a plain mirror reclining
backwards from the tube at an angle of forty-five degrees. At the top of
the box is a square of unpolished glass, upon which from beneath the
picture will be thrown, and may be seen by raising the lid A. To use the
camera place the tube with the lens on it opposite to the object, and
having adjusted the focus, the image will be thrown upon the
ground-glass as above stated, where it may be easily copied by a pencil
or in colours.
[Illustration]
The form of a camera obscura used in a public exhibition is as
follows:--D D is a large wooden box stained black in the inside, and
capable of containing from one to eight persons. A B is a sliding piece,
having a sloping mirror C, and a double convex lens F, which may with
the mirror C be slid up or down so as to accommodate the lens to near
and distant objects. When the rays proceeding from an object without
fall upon the mirror, they are reflected upon the lens F, and brought to
fall on the bottom of the box, or upon a table placed horizontally to
receive them, which may be seen by the spectator whose eye is at E.
THE CAMERA LUCIDA.
[Illustration]
This instrument consists of a glass prism, C, D, D, E, having four sides
covered. The sides C, D, being exposed to the object to be delineated,
rays pass through the glass and fall on the sloping side D, E; from this
they are reflected to the top, and finally pass out of the prism to the
eye;[11] now from the direction at which the rays enter the eye, it
receives them as if coming from an image at A, B, and if a sheet of
paper be placed below the instrument, a perfect delineation of the
object may be traced with a pencil. This is a very useful instrument to
young draughtsmen.
[11] The eye is to be applied to the little circular hole seen on the
upper surface.
THE MAGIC LANTERN.
[Illustration]
This is one of the most pleasing of all optical instruments, and it is
used to produce enlarged pictures of objects, which being painted on a
glass in various colours are thrown upon a screen or white sheet placed
against the wall of a large room. It consists of a sort of tin-box,
within which is a lamp, the light of which (strongly reflected by the
reflector T,) passes through a great plano-convex lens E fixed in the
front. This strongly illuminates the objects which are painted on the
slides or slips of glass, and placed before the lens in an inverted
position, and the rays passing through them and the lens F, fall on a
sheet, or other white surface, placed to receive the image. The glasses
on which the figures are drawn are inverted, in order that the images of
them may be erect.
PAINTING THE SLIDES.
The slides containing the objects usually shown in a magic lantern, are
to be bought at opticians with the lantern, and can be procured cheaper
and better in this way than by any attempt at manufacturing them.
Should, however, the young optician wish to make a few slides of objects
of particular interest to himself, he may proceed as follows:--
[Illustration]
Draw first on paper the figures you wish to paint, lay it on the table,
and cover it over with a piece of glass of the above shape; now draw the
outlines with a fine camel’s hair pencil in black paint mixed with
varnish, and when this is dry, fill up the other parts with the proper
colours, shading with bistre also mixed with varnish. The transparent
colours are alone to be used in this kind of painting.
TO EXHIBIT THE MAGIC LANTERN.
The room for the exhibition ought to be large, and of an oblong shape.
At one end of it suspend a large sheet so as to cover the whole of the
wall. The company being all seated, darken the room, and placing the
lantern with its tube in the direction of the sheet, introduce one of
the slides into the slit, taking care to invert the figures; then adjust
the focus of the glasses in the tube by drawing it in or out as
required, and a perfect representation of the object will appear.
EFFECTS OF THE MAGIC LANTERN.
Most extraordinary effects may be produced by means of the magic
lantern; one of the most effective of which is a
TEMPEST AT SEA.
This is effected by having two slides painted, one with the tempest as
approaching on one side, and continuing in intensity till it reaches the
other. Another slide has ships painted on it, and while the lantern is
in use, that containing the ships is dexterously drawn before the other,
and represents _ships in the storm_.
[Illustration]
The effects of sunrise, moonlight, starlight, &c., may be imitated, also
by means of double slides, and figures may be introduced sometimes of
_fearful_ proportions.
[Illustration]
Heads may be made to nod, faces to laugh; eyes may be made to roll,
teeth to gnash; crocodiles may be made to swallow tigers; combats may be
represented; but one of the most instructive uses of the slides is to
make them illustrative of astronomy, and to show the rotation of the
seasons, the cause of eclipses, the mountains in the moon, spots on the
sun, and the various motions of the planetary bodies, and their
satellites.
THE PHANTASMAGORIA.
Between the phantasmagoria and the magic lantern there is this
difference: in common magic lanterns the figures are painted on
transparent glass, consequently the image on the screen is a circle of
light having figures upon it; but in the phantasmagoria all the glass is
made opaque, except the figures, which, being painted in transparent
colours, the light shines through them, and no light can come upon the
screen except that which passes through the figure, as is here
represented.
[Illustration]
There is no sheet to receive the picture, but the representation is
thrown on a thin screen of silk or muslin placed between _the spectators
and the lantern_. The images are made to appear approaching and receding
by removing it further from the screen, or bringing it nearer to it.
This is a great advantage over the ordinary arrangements of the magic
lantern, and by it the most astonishing effects are often produced.
DISSOLVING VIEWS.
The dissolving views, by which one landscape or scene appears to pass
into the other while the scene is changing, are produced by using two
magic lanterns placed side by side, and that can be a little inclined
towards each other when necessary, so as to mix together the rays of
light proceeding from the lenses of each, which produces that confusion
of images, in which one view melts as it were into the other, which
gradually becomes clear and distinct; the principle being the gradual
extinction of one picture, and the production of another.
HOW TO RAISE A GHOST.
[Illustration]
The magic lantern, or phantasmagoria, may be used in a number of
marvellous ways, but in none more striking than in raising an apparent
spectre. Let an open box, A B, about three feet long, a foot and a half
broad, and two feet high, be prepared. At one end of this place a small
swing dressing-glass, and at the other let a magic lantern be fixed with
its lenses in a direction towards the glass. A glass should now be made
to slide up and down in the groove C D, to which a cord and pulley
should be attached, the end of the cord coming to the part of the box
marked A. On this glass the most hideous spectre that can be imagined
may be painted, but in a squat or contracted position, and when all is
done, the lid of the box must be prepared by raising a kind of gable at
the end of the box B, and in its lower part at E an oval hole should be
cut sufficiently large to suffer the rays of light reflected from the
glass to pass through them. On the top of the box at F place a
chafing-dish, upon which put some burning charcoal. Now light the lamp G
in the lantern, sprinkle some powdered camphor or white incense on the
charcoal, adjust the slide on which the spectre is painted, and the
image will be thrown upon the smoke. In performing this feat the room
must be darkened, and the box should be placed on a high table, that the
hole through which the light comes may not be noticed.
THE THAUMATROPE.
This word is derived from two Greek words, one of which signifies
_wonder_, and the other _to turn_. It is a very pretty philosophical
toy, and is founded upon the principle in optics, that an impression
made upon the retina of the eye lasts for a short interval after the
object which produced it has been withdrawn. The impression which the
mind receives lasts for about the eighth part of a second, as may be
easily shown by whirling round a lighted stick, which if made to
complete the circle within that period, will exhibit not a fiery point,
but a fiery circle in the air.
THE BIRD IN THE CAGE.
Cut a piece of cardboard of the size of a penny piece, and paint on one
side a bird, and on the other a cage; fasten two pieces of thread one on
each side at opposite points of the card, so that the card can be made
to revolve by twirling the threads with the finger and thumb: while the
toy is in its revolution, the bird will be seen within the cage. A bat
may in the same manner be painted on one side of the card, and a
cricketer upon the other, which will exhibit the same phenomenon,
arising from the same principle.
[Illustration]
CONSTRUCTION OF THE PHANTASMASCOPE.
The above-named figure is a Thaumatrope, as much as the one we are about
to describe, although the term Phantasmascope is generally applied to
the latter instrument; which consists of a disc of darkened tin-plate,
with a slit or narrow opening in it, about two inches in length. It is
fixed upon a stand, and the slit placed upwards, so that it may easily
be looked through. Another disc of pasteboard, about a foot in diameter,
is now prepared and fixed on a similar stand, but with this difference,
that it is made to revolve round an axis in the centre. On this
pasteboard disc, paint in colours a number of frogs in relative and
progressive positions of leaping; make between each figure a slit of
about a quarter of an inch deep: and when this second disc is made to
revolve at a foot distance behind the first, and the eye is placed near
the slit, the whole of the figures, instead of appearing to revolve with
the disc, will all appear in the attitudes of leaping up and down,
increasing in agility as the velocity of the motion is increased. It is
necessary, when trying the effect of this instrument, to stand before a
looking-glass, and to present the painted face of the machine towards
the glass.
A very great number of figures may be prepared to produce similar
effects--horses with riders in various attitudes of leaping, toads
crawling, snakes twisting and writhing, faces laughing and crying, men
dancing, jugglers throwing up balls, &c.; all of which, by the peculiar
arrangement above detailed, will seem to be in motion. A little
ingenuity displayed in the construction and painting of the figures upon
the pasteboard disc will afford a great fund of amusement.
CURIOUS OPTICAL ILLUSIONS.
One of the most curious facts relating to the science of vision is the
absolute insensibility of a certain portion of the retina to the
impression of light, so that the image of any object falling on that
point would be invisible. When we look with the right eye, this point
will be about fifteen degrees to the right of the object observed, or to
the right of the axis of the eye, or the point of most distinct vision.
When looking with the left eye, the point will be as far to the left.
The point in question is the basis of the optic nerve, and its
insensibility to light was first observed by the French philosopher,
Mariotte. This remarkable phenomenon may be experimentally proved in the
following manner:--
Place on a sheet of writing-paper, at the distance of about three inches
apart, two coloured wafers; then, on looking at the left-hand wafer with
the right eye, at the distance of about a foot, keeping the eye straight
above the wafer, and both eyes parallel with the line which forms the
wafers, the left eye being closed, the right-hand wafer will become
invisible; and a similar effect will take place if we close the right
eye, and look with the left.
ANOTHER.
Cut a circular piece of white paper, about two inches in diameter, and
affix it to a dark wall. At the distance of two feet on each side, but a
little lower, make two marks; then place yourself directly opposite the
paper, and hold the end of your finger before your face, so that when
the right eye is open it shall conceal the mark on your left, and when
the left eye is open the mark on your right. If you then look with both
eyes at the end of your finger, the paper disc will be invisible.
ANOTHER.
Fix a similar disc of paper, two inches in diameter, at the height of
your eye on a dark wall; a little lower than this, at the distance of
two feet on the right hand, fix another of about three inches in
diameter; now place yourself opposite the first sheet of paper, and,
shutting the left eye, keep the right eye still fixed on the first
object, and when at the distance of about ten feet, the second piece of
paper will be invisible.
THE PICTURE IN THE AIR.
One of the numerous optical illusions which have from time to time been
evolved by scientific minds, is that of making an image or picture
appear in the air. This is produced by means of a mirror, and an object
in relief, upon which a strong light is thrown,--the mirror being set at
such an angle as to throw up the reflection of the image to a certain
point in the view of the spectator. This illusion is produced as
follows: Let a screen be constructed in which is an arched aperture, the
centre of which may be five feet from the floor: behind the screen is
placed a large mirror of an elliptical form. An object is now placed
behind the screen, upon which the light of a strong lamp is thrown from
a point above the mirror, and is received by the mirror and reflected to
the centre of the arched cavity in the screen, where it will appear to
the spectator. Care should be taken to place the image in an inverted
position, and the light, which must be very powerful, should be so
placed that none of it may reach the opening.
BREATHING LIGHT AND DARKNESS.
[Illustration]
The following experiment, if performed with care, is exceedingly
striking. Let S be a candle, whose light falls at an angle of 56° 45′
upon two plate glasses, A B, placed close to each other; and let the
reflected rays, A C, B D, fall at the same angle upon two similar
plates, C D, but so placed that the plane of reflection from the latter
is at right angles to the plane of reflection from the former. An eye
placed at E, and looking at the same time on the two plates, C and D,
will see very faint images of the candle, S; which by a slight
adjustment of the plates, may be made to disappear almost wholly,
allowing the plate C to remain where it is. Change the position of D,
till its inclination to the ray, B D, is diminished about 3°, or made
nearly 53° 11′. The distance may be easily found by a little practice.
When this is done, the image that had disappeared on looking into D will
be restored, so that the spectator at E, upon looking into the two
mirrors, C D, will see no light in C, because the candle has nearly
disappeared, while the candle is distinctly seen in D. If, while, the
spectator is looking into these two mirrors, either he or another person
breathes upon them gently and quickly, the breath will revive the
extinguished image in C, and will extinguish the visible image in D.[12]
[12] Explanation.--The light A, C, B, D is polarized by reflection
from the plates A B, because it is incident at the polarizing
angle 56° 45’ for glass. When we breathe upon the plates C D, we
form upon their surface a thin film of water, whose polarizing
angle is 53° 11′, so that if the polarized rays A, C, B, D fall
upon the plates C, D, at an angle of 53° 11′, the candle from
which they proceeded would not be visible, or they would not
suffer reflection from the plates C D. At all the other angles
the light would be reflected, and the candle visible. Now the
plate D is placed at an angle of 53° 11′, and C at an angle of
56° 45′, so that when a film of water is breathed upon them, the
light will be reflected from the latter, and none from the
former; that is, the act of breathing upon the glass plates will
restore the invisible, and extinguish the visible image.
TO SHOW THAT RAYS OF LIGHT DO NOT OBSTRUCT EACH OTHER.
[Illustration]
Make a small hole in a sheet of pasteboard, A, and placing it upright
before three candles, B, placed closely together, it will be found that
the images of all the candle flames will be formed separately on a piece
of paper, C, laid on the table to receive them. This proves that the
rays of light do not obstruct each other in their progress, although all
cross in passing through the hole.
OPTICS OF A SOAP-BUBBLE.
[Illustration]
If a soap-bubble be blown up, and set under a glass, so that the motion
of air may not affect it, as the water glides down the sides and the top
grows thinner, several colours will successively appear at the top, and
spread themselves from thence down the sides of the bubble, till they
vanish in the same order in which they appeared. At length, a black spot
appears at the top, and spreads till the bubble bursts.[13]
[13] The thinnest substance ever observed is the aqueous film of the
soap-bubble previous to bursting; yet it is capable of reflecting
a faint image of a candle, or the sun. Hence its thickness must
correspond with what Sir Isaac Newton calls the beginning of
black, which appears in water at the thickness of the seven
hundred and fifty thousandth part of an inch.
THE KALEIDOSCOPE.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
If any object be placed between two plane mirrors, inclined towards each
other at an angle of thirty degrees, three several images will be
perceived in the circumference of a circle. On this principle is formed
the kaleidoscope, invented by Sir David Brewster, and by means of which
the reflected images viewed from a particular point exhibit symmetrical
figures, under an infinite arrangement of beautiful forms and colours.
The kaleidoscope may be bought at any toy-shop, but it is requisite that
every young person should be able to construct one for himself. He must,
therefore, procure a tube of tin or paper, of about ten inches in
length, and two and a half or three inches in diameter. One end of this
should be stopped up with tin or paper, securely fastened, in which is
to be made a hole, about the size of a small pea, for the eye to look
through. Two pieces of well-silvered looking-glass, B B, are now to be
procured; they must be not quite so long as the tube, and they should be
placed in it lengthways, at an angle of 60 degrees, meeting together in
a point at A, and separating to the points C C, the polished surfaces
looking inwards. A circular piece of the glass is now to be laid on the
top of the edges of the reflectors, B B; which, by their not being quite
so long as the tube, will allow room for its falling in, and it will be
supported by the edges of the tube, which may be slightly bent over, to
prevent the glass from falling out. This having been done, now proceed
to make the “cap” of the instrument. A rim of tin or pasteboard must be
cut, so as to fit over the glass end of the tube; and in this, on the
outer side, a piece of ground glass must be fastened, so that the whole
may fit on the tube like the lid of a pill-box. Then, before putting it
on, obtain some small pieces of broken glass of various colours, beads,
little strips of wire, or any other object, and place them in the cap;
and by passing it over the end, so that the broken glass, &c. has free
motion, the instrument is complete. To use it, apply the eye to the
small hole, and, on turning it, the most beautiful forms will appear, in
the most wonderful combinations.
The following curious calculation has been made of the number of changes
this instrument will admit of. Supposing it to contain 20 small pieces
of glass, and that you make 10 changes in a minute, it will take an
inconceivable space of time, _i. e._ 462,880,899,576 years, and 360
days, to go through the immense number of changes of which it is
capable.
SIMPLE SOLAR MICROSCOPE.
Having made a circular hole in a window-shutter, about three inches in
diameter, place in it a glass lens of about twelve inches focal
distance. To the inside of the hole adapt a tube, having at a small
distance from the lens a slit, capable of receiving one or two very thin
plates of glass, to which the object to be viewed must be affixed by
means of a little gum-water exceedingly transparent. Into this tube fit
another, furnished at its extremity with a lens half-an-inch focal
distance. Place a mirror before the hole of the window-shutter on the
outside, in such a manner as to throw the light of the sun into the
tube, and you will have a solar magic lanthorn.
The method of employing this arrangement of lenses for microscopic
purposes is as follows:--Having darkened the room, and by means of the
mirror reflected the sun’s rays on the glasses in a direction parallel
to the axis, place some small object between the two moveable plates of
glass, or affix it to one of them with very transparent gum-water, and
bring it exactly into the axis of the tube; if the moveable tube be then
pushed out or drawn in, till the object be a little beyond the focus, it
will be seen painted very distinctly on a card, or piece of white paper,
held at a proper distance, and will appear to be greatly magnified. A
small insect will appear as a large animal, a hair as big as a
walking-stick, and the almost invisible eels in paste or vinegar as
large as common eels.
ANAMORPHOSES.
This is a very curious optical effect, producing a distorted and
grotesque figure from a regular one. The term is derived from two Greek
words, signifying a distortion of figure, and by its means many optical
puzzles may be produced geometrically.
Take any subject, such as the portrait of a head; divide it vertically
and horizontally with parallel lines, of which the outer sides shall
form the boundary, A, B, C, D, and the whole shall be equidistant. Then,
on a separate piece of paper, or cardboard, prepare a drawing similar to
Fig. 2 by the following means:--
1. Draw a horizontal line, _a b_, equal to A B, and divide it into as
many equal parts as the latter is divided.
2. Let fall a perpendicular line, _e v_, from the middle of _a b_, and
then draw _s v_ parallel to _a b_.
3. Both _e v_ and _s v_ may be any length at pleasure, but the longer
the first is, and the shorter the other, so will the anamorphoses be
more and more deformed. The proportions in our figures are sufficiently
different.
4. After having drawn from the point _v_ right lines, _v 1_, _v 2_, _v
3_, _v 4_, to the divisions of _a b_, draw the line _s b_, and through
each point where _s b_ intersects the divergent lines draw other
horizontal lines parallel to _a b_. We now have a _trapezium_, _a b c d_
divided into as many cells as the square in Fig. 1.
[Illustration: _Fig. 1._]
[Illustration: _Fig. 2._]
The next step is to fill up all the cells of Fig. 2 with portions of the
device, proportionate to their position in Fig. 1. For instance, in Fig.
1 the nose is in the second vertical division from the left, and in the
third and fourth horizontal divisions from the top, and that portion of
the face must accordingly be placed in a corresponding part of Fig. 2.
By these means we procure the anamorphosis seen in Fig. 2, which when
viewed from a particular position, will lose all its distortion, and
assume an appearance resembling that in Fig. 1. This position lies
immediately over the point _v_, and at a height above it equal to the
length of the line _s v_; and the means of determining it are as
follows.
Place the drawing horizontally before a window; take a slip of card, and
rest its lower edge on the line _s v_, the card being accurately
vertical; pierce a small hole in the card vertically over the point _v_,
and at a height from it equal to the length of the line _s v_, then with
the eye placed immediately behind the card, look through the orifice at
the anamorphosis, and it will be found that as soon as it has become
accustomed to the novelty of the experiment, the anamorphosis will lose
its distortion, and appear almost exactly like the symmetrical figure.
It would be very difficult, and would require geometrical reasoning of a
lengthened kind, to show why this particular form of construction should
lead to such results.
THE COSMORAMA.
[Illustration]
The principle upon which the cosmorama is formed is so simple, that any
person may easily fit up one in a small summer house, &c. Nothing more
is necessary than to fix in a hole a double convex lens of about three
feet focus, A, and at rather less than this distance a picture, B, is to
be hung. To absorb all the rays of light but those necessary for seeing
the picture, a squared frame of wood blackened on the inside is placed
between the lens and the picture. The picture may be hung in a large box
having a light coming in upon it from above, or in a small closet
illuminated in the same manner. Should it be wished to show it by
candle-light, a lamp, _c_, may be placed on the top of the wooden frame,
and if the light of this be converged by a lens to a moderate radius, it
will be more effective.
DISTORTED LANDSCAPES.
[Illustration]
Landscapes or other matters may be drawn so as to produce curious
optical illusions by the following method. Take a piece of smooth white
pasteboard and sketch the design upon it. Prick the outlines in every
part with a fine pin or needle, then place the pricked drawing in a
perpendicular position, and put a lighted candle behind it. Place before
it another piece of pasteboard, and follow with a pencil the lines given
by the light, and you have produced a distorted landscape. Now take away
the candle and the pricked drawing, and place your eye where the light
was, and the drawing will assume the regular form. To get your eye in
the proper position, it will be advisable to cut out a piece of card
according to the accompanying pattern, and raising it on its base, B,
look through the hole at A, when the object will appear in its proper
proportions.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
PHOTOGRAPHY.
“Come like shadows, but not so depart.”--SHAKSPEARE.
Associated with the use of iodine and bromine is an art which every
intelligent boy may practise, if he will attend to the following precise
details kindly furnished by Mr. Richard Thomas, of 10, Pall Mall, who
has devoted many years to the careful study of all the processes
connected with it, and from whom all the best apparatus and purest
chemicals required may be obtained.
HOW TO MAKE THE NEGATIVE ON GLASS, USING COLLODION BROMO-IODIZED FOR
IRON DEVELOPMENT.
1. The edges of the glass should be ground all round, also slightly on
the surface of the edges. This prevents contraction of the film,
enabling it to resist the action of a heavy stream of water. Mark one
side in the corner with a diamond, and upon this side bestow the
greatest care.
2. _To clean the glass, if new._--Make a mixture of spirits of wine and
solution of ammonia, equal parts; render it as thick as cream with
tripoli; with a piece of cotton-wool kept for this purpose rub a small
quantity over that side marked as described, wash well under a tap of
water, and wipe dry with a piece of old linen, washed without soap, and
kept scrupulously clean for this purpose. Plates should not, however, be
cleaned in the operating room with the above mixture; the vapour of
ammonia might prove injurious to the chemicals.
3. Now polish with an old white silk handkerchief. If this latter
precaution be not taken, small particles of linen will be left upon the
plate: these are perhaps only seen when draining off the collodion; they
form nuclei and eddies, checking the collodion in its course. Some of
these minute fibres are washed off, and contaminate the next picture. To
all lovers of clean pictures our advice therefore is, having well dried
the plate with old linen, lay it, clean side upwards, upon a few sheets
of common glazed demy paper (not blotting), and rub it hard with the
silk until sensibly warm: this has the double advantage of dispersing
fibres and moisture, for all glass plates are slightly in a hygrometric
condition. Double the silk rubber up to form a pad, and with this the
glass must be firmly dusted down just before pouring on the collodion,
which will then run most evenly: if the coated plate is now viewed by
transmitted light, not a speck or blemish will be seen upon it. When a
plate cleaned as above described is breathed upon, the moisture does not
evaporate slowly, but _flies off_. Do not be afraid of putting the glass
into an electrical condition with the silk rubber: on this account
objections have been raised to the use of silk: practically, however, I
find it a most valuable auxiliary in this starting-point of the process,
the perfect manipulation of which makes an important difference in the
value of the finished picture. What can be more inartistic and annoying
to an educated eye than spots, patches, stars, and sky rockets, the
forms and shapes of which rival, in numberless variety, a display of
fireworks? Let us not, therefore, be contented with pictures, however
good in other respects, presenting these deformities--so many blots on
the photographic escutcheon.
_To clean a glass after having used it, when not varnished._--Wash off
the collodion film with water, then clean the marked side with plain
tripoli and water, and dry as above.
_To coat the plate._--First remove all the particles of dried collodion
from the mouth of the bottle. Now pour upon the centre of the cleaned
glass as much collodion as it will hold. Do not perform this operation
hurriedly, take time, and systematically incline the plate in such a
manner that the collodion may run into each corner in succession; when
perfectly covered, pour off gently the excess into the bottle at one of
the corners nearest to you: with observation and practice dexterity is
easily acquired. There are many ways of coating the plate; each person
will adopt that which practice teaches him is best. The pneumatic
plate-holder is a convenient little instrument to use for holding the
plate whilst pouring on the collodion: it may be used for both small and
large plates.
Keep the corner of the glass plate in contact with the neck of the
bottle whilst pouring off the collodion; otherwise the film will be wavy
in places.
4. As soon as the collodion ceases to run, plunge the prepared glass
gently, without stopping, into the nitrate of silver bath, which is
prepared as follows. Into a 20-oz. stoppered bottle put nitrate of
silver, 1¼ ozs.; distilled water, 4 ozs.: dissolve. To this solution add
iodide of potassium, 4 grs., dissolved in 1 drachm of distilled water.
Mix these two solutions: the precipitate (iodide of silver) thus formed
is by shaking entirely dissolved. Add 16 ozs. of distilled water, when
the excess of iodide of silver is again thrown down, but in such a
finely divided state as to render the saturation of the bath with iodide
of silver perfect. Now drop in sufficient of the oxide of silver to turn
the turbid yellow solution a dirty brown colour; so long as this effect
is produced the quantity of oxide of silver, however much in excess, is
of no consequence; shake the bottle well for ten minutes or so at
intervals; then add alcohol, 30 minims, and filter; to the filtered
solution add dilute nitric acid of the strength stated, 5 minims. The
bath is now ready for use, and should be quite neutral.
5. Allow the prepared glass to remain in this bath from five to ten
minutes, according to the temperature. Move it up and down three or four
times whilst in the bath, in order to get rid of the greasy appearance
on the surface: drain it, but not too closely. When in the frame, place
upon the back a piece of common blotting-paper, to absorb moisture, and
the two lower silver wires should also be covered with slips of
blotting-paper; after which the sooner it is placed in the camera the
better.
6. The time of exposure can only be ascertained by practice--no rules
can be laid down; and I am unacquainted with any royal road, but that of
experience, leading to constant success in this most important point.
7. The plate having been taken from the camera, and placed upon a
levelled stand, or held in the hand, develop immediately the latent
image with the following solution:--
_Iron developing solution._--Protosulphate of iron, ¼ oz.; glacial
acetic acid, ¼ oz.; spirits of wine, ½ oz.; distilled water, 8 ozs.:
mix. Pour on of this solution only enough to cover the plate easily,
commencing at that edge of the negative which stood uppermost in the
camera; move the solution to and fro until it has become intimately
mixed with the silver on the plate; then pour off into the developing
glass, and _at once_ return it on to the plate. When as much intensity
has been obtained as possible with the iron developer, it should be
thoroughly removed by washing with water. Any intensity may be obtained
afterwards by using either of the following solutions:--
8. _Intensifying solution._--Pyrogallic acid, 6 grs.; glacial acetic
acid, ¼ oz.; distilled water, 6 ozs.: mix. A few drops of a 30-gr.
solution of nitrate of silver, the quantity to be regulated according to
the intensity required, to be added, at the moment of using, to as much
of the pyrogallic solution as may be necessary.
_Intensifying solution_ (another form).--1. Pyrogallic acid, 8 grs.;
citric acid, 20 grs.; distilled water, 2 ozs. 2. Nitrate of silver, 8
grs.; distilled water, 2 ozs. Mix small quantities of the solutions 1
and 2, in equal portions, the moment before using.
The pyrogallic solution, made with good acetic acid, may be kept for a
month or more in a cool place. Nevertheless, if the conditions of light
and situation are unfavourable, I should prefer this solution just made.
The iron solutions act best when freshly prepared.
It is supposed by some that a prolonged action of the iron developer
produces fogginess. This may be the case when impure or improperly
prepared collodion is used, but certainly not when the preparation is
pure and of the proper quality.
When the image is sufficiently intense, wash freely with common filtered
water; then pour on a saturated solution of hyposulphate of soda, which
should immediately remove the iodide of silver: wash again well with
water; allow as much as the plate will hold to soak in for at least a
quarter of an hour, changing the water occasionally, to remove all
traces of hyposulphate; lastly, wash the plate with a little distilled
water, stand up to dry, and, if required, varnish either with spirit or
amber varnish.
The following solution is also very commonly used for fixing the
negative:--Cyanide of potassium, ¼ oz.; water, 12 ozs.
Attention to the following rules and cautions will assist the operator
in the production of perfect pictures:--
1. Do not disturb the deposit which will occasionally be found at the
bottom of the bottle containing the collodion.
2. Remove all particles of dried film from the neck of the bottle before
pouring the collodion on the plate.
3. Never use damp cloths, leathers, or buffs, for giving the final
polish to the plate. Negatives with an indistinct and muddy surface are
frequently produced from this cause.
4. Let the film set properly before immersion in the nitrate of silver
bath: its condition can be ascertained by gently touching the lower part
of the coated plate with the end of the finger.
5. Never omit to pass a broad camel-hair brush over the plate just
before pouring on the collodion.
6. Bear in mind that, as light is the producing agent, so will it prove
a destructive one: not less than four folds of yellow calico should be
used to obstruct white light; and in that case the aperture covered
should be no larger than is necessary to admit sufficient light for
working by. Examine occasionally the yellow calico: when this material
is used to exclude white light, it becomes bleached by constant
exposure. Do not trust alone to any coloured glass; no glass yet made is
anti-actinic under all aspects of light and conditions of exposure.
7. When the negative requires intensifying, carefully wash off all
traces of the first developing solution before proceeding to intensify.
This operation may be performed either before or after the iodide is
removed by fixing.
8. Glass baths are preferable to porcelain, ebonite, or gutta-percha
baths for solution of nitrate of silver.
9. In using either spirit or amber varnish, before pouring it off, keep
the plate horizontal a few seconds. This gives time for soaking in, and
prevents the formation of a dull surface arising from too thin a
coating.
10. Rub the lenses occasionally with a soft and clean wash-leather; the
rapidity of action is much influenced by the brightness of the lenses:
their surfaces are constantly affected by moisture in the atmosphere,
which condensing, destroys the brilliancy of the image.
11. The white blotting-paper used for some photographic purposes is not
suitable for filtering solutions; that only should be employed which is
made for this purpose, and is sold under the name of filtering-paper.
12. _Hyposulphate of soda._--A great deal of rubbish is sold under the
name of this salt. As a test of its quality, 1½ drachms should entirely
dissolve in 1 drachm of water, and this solution should dissolve rather
more than 4½ grains of iodide of silver.
13. _Chemicals._--The purity of photographic chemicals cannot be too
strongly urged; the cheapest are not always the most economical. The
commercial preparations are generally not to be depended upon, as these,
though perhaps unadulterated, are, strictly speaking, not chemically
pure. It is best to procure them from well-known chemists, who
understand the purpose for which they are intended, and make the
preparation of these substances peculiarly a branch of their business.
14. Never leave chemical solutions exposed in dishes: when done with,
pour them back into glass-stoppered bottles, and decant for use from any
deposit, or filter if necessary.
15. In all photographic processes it is absolutely necessary to be
chemically clean; and this sometimes is not easy. As a rule, never be
satisfied with cleanly appearances only, but take such measures as shall
insure the absence of all extraneous matter in preparing the solutions,
cleaning the glasses, dishes, &c.
16. All stains on the hands, linen, &c. may be removed by means of
cyanogen soap or cyanide of potassium, which should be applied without
water at first, then thoroughly washed off. To assist the operation, the
hands may be now gently rubbed with a fine piece of pumice-stone, when
the stains quickly disappear.
For more perfect and complete directions the reader is referred to a
most excellent work, “The Modern Practice of Photography,” by R. W.
Thomas, F.C.S.
[Illustration]
PNEUMATICS.
“There is a tricksy spirit in the air
That plays sad gambols.”--BEN JONSON.
The branch of the physical sciences which relates to the air and its
various phenomena is called Pneumatics. By it we learn many curious
particulars. By it we find that the air has weight and pressure, colour,
density, elasticity, compressibility, and some other properties with
which we shall endeavour to make the young reader acquainted by many
pleasing experiments, earnestly impressing upon him to lose no
opportunity of making physical science his study.
The common leather sucker by which boys raise stones will show the
pressure of the atmosphere. It consists of a piece of soft but firm
leather, having a piece of string drawn through its centre. The leather
is made quite wet and pliable, and then its under part is placed on the
stone and stamped down by the foot. This pressing excludes the air from
between the leather and the stone, and by pulling the string a vacuum is
left underneath its centre; consequently the leather is firmly attached
to the stone, which enables you to lift it.
WEIGHT OF THE AIR PROVED BY A PAIR OF BELLOWS.
Shut the nozzle and valve-hole of a pair of bellows, and after having
squeezed the air out of them, if they are perfectly air-tight, we shall
find that a very great force, even some hundreds of pounds, is necessary
for separating the boards. They are kept together by the weight of the
air which surrounds them in the same manner as if they were surrounded
by water.
THE PRESSURE OF THE AIR SHOWN BY A WINE-GLASS.
Place a card on a wine-glass filled with water, then invert the glass:
the water will not escape, the pressure of the atmosphere on the outside
of the card being sufficient to support the water.
[Illustration]
ANOTHER.
[Illustration]
Invert a tall glass jar in a dish of water, and place a lighted taper
under it; as the taper consumes the air in the jar, the water, from the
pressure without, _rises up_ to supply the place of the oxygen removed
by the combustion. In the operation of cupping the operator holds the
flame of a lamp under a bell-shaped glass. The air within this being
rarefied and expanded, a considerable portion is given off. In this
state the glass is placed upon the flesh, and as the air within it cools
it contracts, and the glass adheres to the flesh by the difference of
the pressure of the internal and external air.
ELASTICITY OF THE AIR.
[Illustration]
This can be shown by a beautiful philosophical toy, which may easily be
constructed. Procure a glass jar such as is here represented, and put
water into it. Then mould three or four little figures in wax, and make
them hollow within, and having each a minute opening at the heel, by
which water may pass in and out. Place them in the jar, as seen in the
figure, and adjust them by the quantity of water admitted to them, so
that in specific gravity they differ a little from each other. The mouth
of the jar should now be covered with a piece of skin or india-rubber,
and then, if the hand be pressed upon the top or mouth of the jar, the
figures will be seen to rise or descend as the pressure is gentle or
heavy; rising and falling, or standing still, according to the pressure
made.
REASON FOR THIS.
The reason of this is, that the pressure on the top of the jar condenses
the air between the cover and the water surface; this condensation then
presses on the water below, and influences it through its whole extent,
compressing also the air in the figures, forcing as much more water into
them as to render them heavier than water, and therefore heavy enough to
sink.
THE AIR-PUMP.
The time was, and that not very long ago, when the air-pump was only
obtainable by the philosophical professor or by persons of enlarged
means. But now, owing to our “cheap way of doing things,” a small
air-pump may be obtained for about a guinea, and we would strongly
advise our young friends to procure one, as it will be a source of
endless amusement to them; and, supposing that they take our advice, we
suggest the following experiments.
[Illustration]
The air-pump consists of a bell glass, called the receiver, A, and a
stand, upon which is a perforated plate, B. The hole in this plate is
connected with two pistons, the rods of which are moved by a wheel
handle backwards and forwards, and thus pump the air out of the
receiver. When the air is thus taken out, a stop-cock is turned, and
then the experiments may be performed.
Under the receiver of an air-pump, when the air has been thoroughly
exhausted, light and heavy bodies fall with the same swiftness. Animals
quickly die for want of air, combustion ceases, a bell sounds faint, and
water and other fluids change to vapour.
TO PROVE THAT AIR HAS WEIGHT.
Take a florence flask, fitted up with a screw and fine oiled silk valve.
Screw the flask on the plate of the air-pump, exhaust the air, take it
off the plate, and weigh it. Then let in the air, and again weigh the
whole, and it will be found to have increased by several grains.
[Illustration]
TO PROVE AIR ELASTIC.
Place a bladder out of which all the air has apparently been squeezed
under the receiver, upon it lay a weight, exhaust the air, and it will
be seen that the small quantity of air left within the bladder will so
expand itself as to lift the weight. Put a corked bottle into the
receiver, exhaust the air, and the cork will fly out.
SOVEREIGN AND FEATHER.
[Illustration]
Place a nicely-adjusted pair of forceps at the top of the receiver,
communicating with the top of the outside through a hole, so that they
may be opened by the fingers. Then place on each of the little plates a
_sovereign_ and a _feather_. Exhaust the air from the receiver; and
having done so, detach the objects, so that they may fall. In the open
air the sovereign will fall long before the feather, but in vacuo, as in
the receiver now exhausted of its air, they will fall both together, and
reach the bottom of the glass at the same instant.
AIR IN THE EGG.
Take a fresh egg, and cut off a little of the shell and film from its
smaller end; then put the egg under a receiver, and pump out the air;
upon which all the contents of the egg will be forced out by the
expansion of the small bubble of air contained in the great end between
the shell and the film.
THE DESCENDING SMOKE.
Set a lighted candle on the plate, and cover it with a tall receiver.
The candle will continue to burn while the air remains, but when
exhausted will go out, and the smoke from the wick, instead of rising,
will descend in dense clouds towards the bottom of the glass, because
the air which would have supported it has been withdrawn.
[Illustration: AIR IN THE EGG.]
[Illustration: DESCENDING SMOKE.]
THE SOUNDLESS BELL.
Set a bell on the pump-plate, having a contrivance so as to ring it at
pleasure, and cover it with a receiver; then make the clapper sound
against the bell, and it will be heard to sound very well; now exhaust
the receiver of air, and then when the clapper strikes against the sides
of the bell the sound can be scarcely heard.
[Illustration: SOUNDLESS BELL.]
[Illustration: FLOATING FISH.]
THE FLOATING FISH.
If a glass vessel containing water, in which a couple of fish are put,
be placed under the receiver, upon exhausting the air the fish will be
unable to keep at the bottom of the glass, owing to the expansion of
the air within their bodies, contained in the air bladder. They will
consequently rise and float, belly upwards, upon the surface of the
water.
THE DIVING BELL.
The diving bell is a pneumatic engine, by means of which persons can
descend to great depths in the sea, and recover from it valuable
portions of wrecks and other things. Its principle may be well
illustrated by the following experiment. Take a glass tumbler, and
plunge it into the water with the mouth downwards, and it will be found
that the water will not rise much more than half way in the tumbler.
This may be made very evident if a piece of cork be suffered to float
inside the glass on the surface of the water. The air within the tumbler
does not entirely exclude the water, because air is elastic, and
consequently compressible, and hence the air in the tumbler is what is
called condensed. The diving bell is formed upon the above principle;
but instead of being of glass, it is a wooden or metal vessel, of very
large dimensions, so as to hold three or four persons, who are supplied
with air from above by means of powerful pumps, whilst the excess of air
escapes at the bottom of the bell, as may be seen any day at the Royal
Polytechnic Institution.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
EXPERIMENTS.
1. Place a cylinder of strong glass, open at both ends, on the plate of
the air-pump, and put your hand on the other end, and you will of course
be able to remove it at pleasure. Now exhaust the air from the interior
of the cylinder, and at each stroke of the pump you will feel your hand
pressed tighter and tighter on the cylinder, until you will not be able
to remove it: as soon as the air is again admitted to the interior of
the cylinder, the pressure within will be restored, and the hand again
be at liberty.
2. Tie a piece of moistened bladder very firmly over one end of a
similar glass cylinder, and place the open end on the plate of the pump.
As soon as you begin to exhaust the air from the interior, the bladder,
which was previously quite horizontal, will begin to bulge inwards, the
concavity increasing as the exhaustion proceeds, until the bladder, no
longer able to bear the weight of the superincumbent air, breaks with a
loud report.
3. The elasticity of air, or indeed of any gaseous body, may be shown by
introducing under the air-pump receiver a bladder containing a very
small quantity of air, its mouth being closely tied. As you exhaust the
air from the receiver, that portion contained in the bladder being no
longer pressed upon by the atmosphere, will gradually expand, distending
the bladder until it appears nearly full: on readmitting the air into
the receiver, the bladder will at once shrink to its former dimensions.
A shrivelled apple placed under the same conditions will appear plump
when the air is removed from the receiver, and resume its former
appearance on the readmission of the air.
4. There is a very pretty apparatus made for the purpose of showing the
pressure of the atmosphere, consisting of a hollow globe of brass, about
three inches in diameter, divided into two equal parts, which fit very
accurately together. It is furnished with two handles; one of them
screwed into a hollow stem, communicating with the interior of the
globe, and fitting on to the air-pump: the other is attached to a short
stem on the opposite side of the globe. In the natural state the globe
may easily be separated into its two hemispheres by one person pulling
the handles, but after the air has been exhausted from the interior it
requires two very strong men to separate the parts, and they will often
fail to do so. By turning the stopcock, and readmitting the air into the
interior of the globe, it will come asunder as easily as at first.
We are indebted to the weight of the atmosphere for the power we possess
of raising water by the common pump; for the piston of the pump
withdrawing the air from the interior of the pipe, which terminates in
water, the pressure of the atmosphere forces the water up the pipe to
supply the place of the air withdrawn. It was soon found, however, that
when the column of water in the pipe was more than thirty feet high, the
pump became useless, for the water refused to rise higher. Why? It was
found that a column of water about thirty feet high exerted a pressure
equal to the weight of the atmosphere, thus establishing an equilibrium
between the water in the pipe and the atmospheric pressure.
[Illustration]
This is the principle on which the barometer, or _measurer of weight_,
as its name imports, is constructed. The metal Mercury is about thirteen
and a half times heavier than water; consequently, if a column of water
thirty _feet_ high balances the pressure of the atmosphere, a column of
mercury thirty _inches_ high ought to do so also--and this is in fact
the case. If you take a glass tube nearly three feet long, and closed at
one end, and fill it with mercury; then, placing your finger on the open
end, invert the tube into a basin or saucer containing some of the same
metal; upon removing your finger (which must be done carefully, while
the mouth of the tube is completely covered by the mercury,) it will be
seen that the fluid will fall a few inches, leaving the upper part of
the tube empty. Such a tube with a graduated scale attached is in truth
a barometer, and as the weight of the atmosphere increases or decreases,
so the mercury rises or falls in the tube. This instrument is of the
greatest value to the seaman, for a sudden fall of the barometer will
often give notice of an impending storm when all is fine and calm, and
thus enable the mariner to make the preparations necessary to meet the
danger.
It was discovered by an Italian philosopher named Torricelli, and from
him the vacuum formed in the upper end of the tube above the surface of
the mercury has been called the Torricellian vacuum. It is by far the
most perfect vacuum that can be obtained, containing necessarily nothing
but a minute quantity of the vapour of mercury.
EXPERIMENT.
Pass a little ether through the mercury in the tube, and as soon as it
reaches the empty space it will boil violently, depressing the mercury,
until the pressure of its own vapour is sufficient to prevent its
ebullition. If you now cool the upper part of the tube, so as to
condense the vapour, the pressure being thus removed, the ether will
again begin to boil, and so alternately, as often as you please, in
order to show this fact with effect, the bore of the tube should not be
less than half an inch in diameter.
[Illustration]
EXPERIMENT.
To show that the heat abstracted by the boiling of one liquid will
freeze another, fill a tall narrow glass about half full of cold water
(the colder the better), and place in it a thin glass tube containing
some ether. Put them under the receiver of an air-pump. As you exhaust
the air, the ether will begin to boil, until at length, by continuing
the exhaustion, the water immediately surrounding the tube of ether
will freeze, and a tolerably large piece of ice may thus be obtained.
Ether evaporates so rapidly even under the pressure of the atmosphere,
that a small animal, such as a mouse, may be actually frozen to death by
constantly dropping ether upon it. If poured on the hand, it produces a
degree of cold that soon becomes, to say the least, unpleasant.
EXPERIMENT.
Place a flat saucer containing about a pound of oil of vitriol under the
receiver of the air-pump, and set in it a watch glass containing a
little water, supported on a stand with _glass_ legs. Exhaust the
receiver, when the water will evaporate, but without boiling; and the
vapour being absorbed as it forms by the oil of vitriol, the vacuum is
preserved, and the evaporation continues, until the vapour has
abstracted so much caloric from the remainder of the water that it is
all at once converted into ice.
In most elementary works on chemistry may be found a long table of
freezing mixtures, as they are called, some with and others without ice
or snow. We have selected a few from each division.
WITH ICE OR SNOW.
{ Snow or powdered ice 2 parts.
{ Powdered common salt 1 „
{ Snow 5 „
{ Powdered common salt 2 „
{ Powdered sal ammoniac 1 „
{ Snow 3 „
{ Dilute sulphuric acid 2 „
{ Snow 2 „
{ Crystallized muriate of lime 3 „
WITHOUT SNOW OR ICE.
{ Sulphate of soda 3 parts.
{ Dilute nitric acid 2 „
{ Nitrate of ammonia 1 „
{ Water 1 „
{ Phosphate of soda 2 „
{ Dilute nitric acid 1 „
{ Sulphate of soda 2 „
{ Muriatic acid 1 „
The effects of most of these mixtures may be considerably increased by
previously cooling the ingredients _separately_ in other freezing
mixtures.
In connexion with this branch of science, and especially with chemistry,
the youthful philosopher should practise the art of decanting air from
one jar to another standing over water, beginning by passing it from a
small to a larger jar, then with two of equal size; and when he can
accomplish the transfer without permitting even one bubble to escape, he
may essay the much more difficult task of transferring the air from a
large to a smaller jar.
[Illustration]
He should also practise using the blowpipe until he can keep up a steady
and uninterrupted flame for ten minutes or a quarter of an hour, without
stopping for breath. It is quite possible to replenish _wind_ in the
mouth, which alone ought to be used, without interrupting the breathing
for an instant, but it requires some practice.
[Illustration: (1) Box blowpipe, A, the stem; B, the mouthpiece; C, the
box, in which is placed a piece of sponge to absorb the moisture of the
breath; D, the extremity (this is moveable, and each blowpipe has
several, with different apertures); E, the hollow pivot, in which the
extremity and its arm turn. The box is opened by the milled ring seen at
the bottom.]
SPECTRUM ANALYSIS.
If the youthful student wishes to occupy his leisure in a most amusing
and instructive manner, and at the same time to acquire a ready method
of testing for the presence of the various metals, he cannot do better
than purchase from Mr. John Browning, of 111, Minories, the Amateur’s
Spectroscope, price two guineas; or, if sufficiently ingenious, a prism
and lenses may be purchased for sixteen shillings, and fitted up in
paper tubes. Indeed, it is always better to buy some complete set or
portion of a set of apparatus, instead of the trashy so-called “Boys’
Cabinets,” which contain very much that is useless and very little for
instructive experiments. The instrument enables the observer to
examine the properties of metallic salts when in the state of a glowing
or incandescent gas. Common light affords a continuous spectrum or band
of colours, red at one end and violet at the other, the intermediate
colours being orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo. The spectra of
the metals in the state of luminous vapour are not continuous, but are
represented by distinct bands or lines of light.
[Illustration: Solar Spectrum, and Spectra of the Alkanes and Alkaline
Earths. Copied from the Original Drawings of G. KIRCHHOFF and R.
BUNSEN.]
Every element, metallic or otherwise, when converted into a luminous
gas, produces lines which are always found in the same part of the
spectrum, and are therefore unalterable in position. The instrument
(Fig. 1) is called the Spectroscope.
[Illustration: _Fig. 1._--THE AMATEUR’S SPECTROSCOPE.
A, Tube with knife edges; B, the prism; C, the telescope; D, the lamp,
supplied with gas by pipe E; F, stand carrying the platinum wire. The
wire may be held in the hand, but is more convenient when attached to a
stand.]
The instrument (Fig. 2) will exhibit the dark fixed lines in the solar
spectrum, and also the bright lines in the spectra of incandescent
metals.
[Illustration: _Fig. 2._--THE HERSCHEL-BROWNING DIRECT VISION
SPECTROSCOPE.]
[Illustration: _Fig. 3._
A, another form of gas lamp; B, the flame; C, adjusting stand to carry
the platinum wire and the lamp.]
HOW TO USE THE SPECTROSCOPE.
Screw the tube carrying the knife edges at the small end into the prism
bore, and the telescope into its proper ring. Now place any common
bright light exactly in front of the knife edges, and while looking
through the telescope arrange the knife edges until a bright and
continuous spectrum is visible.
TO OBTAIN THE BRIGHT LINES IN THE SPECTRUM GIVEN BY ANY SUBSTANCE.
Remove the bright flame from the front of the knife edges, and
substitute in its place the flame of a common spirit lamp or, still
better, a gas-jet known as a Bunsen’s Burner. Take a piece of platinum
wire about the substance of a fine sewing needle; bend the end into a
small loop about the eighth of an inch in diameter; fuse a small bead of
the substance, or salt, to be experimented on into the loop of the
platinum wire, and attaching it to any sort of light stand or support,
bring the bead into the front edge of the flame, a little below the
level of the knife edges. If the flame be opposite the knife edges, on
looking through the eye-piece of the telescope the fixed lines due to
the substance will be plainly visible. When minute quantities have to be
examined, the substance should be dissolved, and a drop of the solution,
instead of a solid bead, be used on the platinum wire.
The delicacy of this method of analysis is very great. Swan found, in
1857 (Ed. Phil. Trans., vol. xxi. p. 411), that the lines of sodium are
visible when a quantity of solution is employed which does not contain
more than 1/2,500,000 of a grain of sodium.
To view Fraunhofer’s lines on the solar spectrum it is only necessary to
turn the knife edges towards a white cloud, and make the slit formed by
the knife edges very narrow by turning the screw at the side of them. In
every instance the focus of the telescope must be adjusted in the
ordinary way, by sliding the draw tube until it suits the observer’s
sight, and distinct vision is obtained.
It should be noted that lines at various parts of the spectrum require a
different adjustment in focussing the telescope.
The small prism turning on a joint in front of the knife edges is for
the purpose of showing two spectra in the field of view at the same
time. To do this it must be brought close to the front of the knife
edges. Then one flame must be placed in the position in which the flame
of the candle is shown in the small figure, and the other directly in
front of the slit. On looking through the telescope, as before
described, the spectra due to the two substances will be seen one above
the other.
When the slit is turned towards a bright cloud, and a light is used in
the position of the candle flame, the spectrum of any substance may be
seen compared with the solar spectrum. In this manner Kirchhoff
determined in the solar spectrum the presence of the lines of the
greater number of the elements which are believed to exist in the sun.
PROFESSOR STOKES’ ABSORPTION BANDS.
This instrument is expressly adapted to the prismatic analysis of
organic bodies, according to the method recommended by Professor Stokes
in his lecture at the Chemical Society, printed in the _Chemical News_.
To observe these bands it is only necessary to place a very dilute
solution of the substance in a test-tube, then fix the test-tube in the
small clip attached to a ring which slips on in front of the knife
edges. Upon bringing any bright light in front of the tube, on looking
through the telescope, if the instrument has been properly adjusted, a
bright spectrum will be seen, interrupted by the dark bands due to the
substance in solution.
One of the simplest and most interesting experiments of this kind can be
made by preparing dilute solutions of madder, port wine, and blood.
In these very dilute solutions no difference can be detected by the
unassisted eye, but on submitting them in the manner already described
to the test of spectrum analysis, very different appearances will be
presented.
The absorption bands may, however, be most conveniently examined and
accurately investigated by means of Sorby and Browning’s new
Micro-Spectroscope.
TO MAP OUT ANY SPECTRUM.
Place the eye-piece with cross wires in the telescope, with the cross in
the shape of an [X]. Then move the telescope so that the point where the
wires cross comes successively in contact with the various lines, noting
the readings of the nonius on the arc. From these readings, by the help
of any mechanical scale of equal parts, a map may be easily constructed.
By the assistance of spectrum analysis four new metals have been
discovered, viz. Cæsium, Rubidium, Thallium, Norium. It is often a cause
of grumbling with young beginners in chemistry that there is so much
washing of glasses and slopping required to obtain proper results from
tests; but here is a most refined mode of testing, which may be carried
on in the drawing-room, and so delicate that a portion of sodium salt
even less than 1/180,000,000th part of a grain can be easily detected.
Formerly the metal Lithium was considered to be a very rare one, but
since the use of the spectroscope, quantities less than the
1/6,000,000th of a grain have been detected; it now appears that lithium
is a very common metal, and exists in the human body, the sea, and may
be obtained from many other common sources. Lithium has been found in
the ashes of marine plants, the ashes of tobacco--in milk, coffee, tea,
human blood, and in muscular tissue; it has also been found in meteoric
stones.
The coloured plate is a faithful copy of Kirchhoff’s Diagram, and shows
the solar spectrum, also the spectra of potassium, sodium, lithium,
strontium, calcium, barium, rubidium.
PART IV.
Domestic Pets.
BEES.
CANARIES.
DOGS.
GOLD FISH.
GUINEA PIGS.
HEDGEHOGS.
JACKDAWS.
JAYS.
MAGPIES.
OWLS.
PARROTS.
PIGEONS.
POULTRY.
RABBITS.
RAVENS.
SILKWORMS.
SQUIRRELS.
WHITE MICE.
[Illustration: OUR DOMESTIC PETS.]
[Illustration]
BEES AND BEE-KEEPING.
In treating of that useful insect the honey-bee, we will first explain
briefly the domestic economy of the hive, and the distinction between
the different individuals composing the entire colony, and then pass on
to the more practical details of bee-keeping.
A beehive contains three kinds of individuals--a queen, drones, and
workers. The queen is a female, and is the mother of the community. The
drones are males, and the working bees neuters, being neither males nor
females. During the warmer part of the year the queen seems to be
incessantly employed in laying eggs. She is slow and majestic in her
motions, and differs from the workers in having a larger and longer
body, shorter wings, and a curved sting.
The drones are males; though much more bulky, they are not so long as
the queen, but much larger than the working bees. They live on honey,
but bring none home. When the season for swarming has passed, the
workers expel them from the hive, and none make their appearance till
the following spring.
The working bees are the smallest in the hive and by far the most
numerous; and they do the entire work of the community--they build the
cells, guard the hive and the queen, collect and store the honey,
elaborate the wax, feed the young, and expel the drones. The average
number of these three kinds of bees in a hive is one queen, two thousand
drones, and ten to twenty thousand workers, the numbers varying with the
strength of the hive and the season.
For the greater part of the year the queen lays only workers’ eggs; but
during the spring she also lays those which produce drones. As soon as
this takes place, the workers begin to construct royal cells, in which,
without discontinuing to lay the drone eggs, the queen deposits eggs
which are destined to produce queens.
[Illustration: QUEEN BEE.]
[Illustration: THE DRONE.]
[Illustration: WORKING BEE.]
The workers’ eggs hatch in a few days, and produce little white maggots,
which immediately open their mouths to be fed; these the workers attend
to with the greatest care. In six days each maggot fills up its cell; it
is then roofed in by the workers, spins a silken cocoon and becomes a
chrysalis, and on the twenty-first day it comes forth a perfect bee. The
drones emerge on the twenty-fifth day, and the queens on the sixteenth.
The combs of a beehive comprise a number of hexagonal cells, built by
the bees as receptacles for honey and for the nurseries of their young.
Each comb in a hive is composed of two ranges of cells, backed against
each other. There is a continued series of these double cells in every
well-filled hive, the spaces between them being just sufficient to allow
two bees, one on the surface of each comb, to pass without touching.
Each cell is six-sided, the six sides being perfectly equal. This is one
of the geometrical figures that ensures the greatest economy of material
and the largest space. The construction of several combs is usually
going on at the same time, until the hive is filled. The cells of the
drones are larger than those designed for the workers; and those
designed for the hatching of the young queens pear-shaped, with the
small end downwards. The finest honey is stored in new cells constructed
for the purpose of receiving it.
The usual modes of establishing an apiary are, either by the purchase of
stock or of swarms. When intending to purchase a stock, do not buy upon
recommendation, but learn to judge for yourself. If you observe the
bees crowding in and out of the hive during the middle of the day, a
considerable number of them having little yellow pellets or balls on
their hinder legs, a very favourable opinion may be formed of the health
and condition of the interior, and especially of the prolific state of
the queen. If the bees appear savage, and bold in their attacks, it is a
good sign.
In the purchase of swarms the young bee-keeper must beware of
imposition; for it very often happens that, instead of having the _first
swarm_, he is cheated by having a second thrust upon him. This is seldom
so large; but it has the advantage of a young queen, as the old queen
always goes off with the first swarm. A good swarm generally numbers
about twenty thousand bees, and may in country places be obtained for
from half-a-guinea to a guinea.
There are several distinct systems of bee-keeping, each of which
requires a short notice. First, the old-fashioned plan of keeping the
bees in a common bell-shaped straw hive, or skep. When this method is
followed, the hives are usually allowed to stand for two summers; at the
end of the second season the bees are destroyed by the fumes of burning
sulphur, and the honey taken. The plan is a very bad one, as the honey
obtained is mixed with bee bread, is rank in flavour, and dark in
colour, and is never worth more than about sixpence per pound.
[Illustration]
A great improvement is to have the hives made with flat tops, like the
straw hive shown at the right hand of the engraving. When the bees are
first hived, this is closed by a straw mat. In the spring of next year,
when the bees become numerous and cluster round the entrance, this mat
is removed, and a small hive, termed a “super,” or a box or glass,
neatly furnished with a piece or two of clear empty comb, is put over;
the bees ascend into this, build combs, which they store with pure
virgin honey, without brood or bee bread; and this, when full, is
removed, leaving the stock below undisturbed for the next season. In our
engraving the artist has drawn this hive too small; it should have been
as large as the common skeps which are shown on the left-hand side.
Flat-topped hives, that are able to be supered, may be made of wood,
like a common box. One of these is shown on the ground, and two, placed
one over the other, are shown behind the flat-topped straw hive. In
Ayrshire, where they are very skilled in bee-management, they use
eight-sided boxes, with narrow slides to close the openings in the top.
These boxes are placed one over the other, and large tops of pure virgin
honey, twenty to thirty pounds in weight, are not unfrequently taken
off. The back hive in our group is one with side boxes, or, as it is
sometimes called, a collateral hive. These are the most expensive in
first cost, and the least productive of all the varieties. The cottage
hives, with three little glasses, instead of one large one, are only
playthings, and not at all productive.
Frame hives, in which each comb is placed in a separate frame, so that
it can be taken out and examined, are very useful for making
observations on the natural history of the bees, but are not so well
suited for profitable purposes as the hives that we have described that
are arranged in storey or with large supers.
In removing a super of honey, it should be first loosened from the hive
by drawing a thin string between the two; and then, when the bees have
become quiet, taken quietly away, and covered over, until those
remaining in it have discovered that they are away from the queen, when
they will rapidly fly back to the hive, on being uncovered. But the
honey must not be left exposed, or it would attract all the bees in the
neighbourhood, and would rapidly be stored up in the hives.
In taking off the supers, it is best to be protected from the stings of
the bees. This is readily done by making a bag of leno, open at top and
bottom; in use, the top is tied round the hat, the bag encircles the
head and face, and the bottom is tucked under the collar of the coat,
which is buttoned closely round the neck. In this manner the face is
perfectly protected from stings; but with the knowledge, quietness, and
confidence acquired by practice, almost anything can be done to bees by
a skilled bee-master, even without a veil.
THE CANARY.
The canary is a justly favoured pet among boys, for it is a hardy bird
that requires a very small amount of trouble. It is a pleasant,
fascinating little being, full of quaint ways and sprightly attitudes,
and, better than all, the cage is its native element.
Though an ardent admirer of all birds, and indeed of everything which
draws the breath of life, we can never pass the cage wherein is confined
a lark, a nightingale, a bullfinch, or any other of our indigenous
birds, without a feeling of sadness and regret.
They are not cage birds, and never ought to be confined within the
narrow limits of wood and wire. Their attitudes show their uneasiness.
The mellow, exultant tone of the skylark sounds as joyously when the
bird is imprisoned within a cage as when it soars high in air, its wings
quivering in the breeze, its frame rejoicing in the glory of the
sunbeams, and its ken surveying the wide panorama which lies spread
beneath its gaze. But the gestures of the bird are full of eloquent
misery, and speak volumes to him who will stop and look with his eyes as
well as listen with his ears.
See how the bird flings itself upwards from the little patch of turf,
which is but a shallow mockery of the green sward to which the skylark
is accustomed--how it dashes itself against the roof of green baize,
which represents so feebly the expanse of azure sky--and how it learns
at last the lessons of experience, and stands helplessly in the bay
window of the cage, its wings shivering restlessly, and its feet
trampling impatiently, in lieu of the the upward leap and soaring flight
which it longs to undertake, but which it will never more be permitted
to experience. No more will it roam through the wide expanse of air, no
more will it seek for its mate, and know all the joys of nest and
children. Henceforth it is but a prisoner in solitary confinement,
without hope of escape, and its very individuality destroyed by
surrounding circumstances.
So with the generality of our cage birds. The man who would imprison the
nightingale, who would limit to one spot the bird that loves to wander,
and who would condemn to solitary confinement the creature which is
peculiarly destined for conjugal affection, which finds expression in
liquid melody, ought to be imprisoned for a month or two, just to see
how _he_ likes it. “I can’t get out,” is the lament uttered in silent
gesture by all birds that ought to roam in wild freedom, and have been
imprisoned in a cage. We always wish to open the cage door, and set free
the prisoner; at all events, to remove it to some spot where it might be
liberated without danger to itself.
But with the canary the case is different. The pretty little bird never
has known wider freedom than that of the cage, and a humane bird-keeper
will endow it with increased freedom by enlarging the size of its
dwelling. The free use of wings has never been known to the bird, nor
even to its parents; and the perch is to the canary more familiar than
the bough. Release an imprisoned lark, and after the first few moments
of surprise it will speed away exulting in its freedom. Release a
nightingale or a thrush, and it will dart swiftly to the well-known
shelter of the woods. But release a canary, and you have committed an
act of positive cruelty. The poor bird knows not where to go or how to
procure its food. Throughout all its little life it has been accustomed
to reside within the narrow limits of its cage, and to find its food and
water prepared without any expenditure of labour. Consequently, it has
no idea of searching for food, but sits bewildered on a branch of some
tree, and would perish with hunger simply because it does not know how
to procure food.
Ignorance is ever the parent of fear, and a canary-bird has been known
to perish of hunger when removed to a large from a small cage, simply
because it dared not fly down from the comparatively lofty perch on
which it had settled when first introduced, and to which it clung with
the tenacity of fear. Even the genuine British soldier can hardly be
more helpless when deprived of ordinary military routine than is a
canary-bird when set free and forced to fly alone into the world.
The very colour of the bird prevents it from obtaining food like others
of the same tribe. All the small birds are absurdly jealous of novelty,
and will mob and worry any feathered being to which they are not
accustomed. You may assemble a crowd of them at any time by fixing a
comb of scarlet cloth on the head of a sparrow, and glueing a few
scarlet hackles into its tail. The little birds will always gather round
an owl that has made its appearance in the daytime, and will scold the
intruder until one would think that their throats would be hoarse. Their
anger towards the owl is, however, mitigated by a wholesome dread of its
beak and talons, and it may therefore be imagined that when they find a
little yellow bird sitting all alone on a branch, and looking bewildered
at the position in which it finds itself, they are not very likely to
lose so excellent an opportunity of bullying a foreigner without danger
to themselves. Successive generations of captivity have rendered the
canary unfit for freedom, and therefore the young naturalist need not
think himself cruel because he keeps the bird in a cage.
As to cages, the simple form which has already been described in vol. i.
p. 21 of “Every Boy’s Magazine” will be found amply sufficient for all
purposes. The wires, however, should be closer together than is required
for squirrels, so that the cat may not be able to dart her lithe paw
between them and hook out the inmates. The size of the cage is of little
consequence, except that you can never make it too large. If a whole
room can be given up to the birds, the better they will be pleased and
the brighter they will look; and, if possible, it should be lighted from
above.
Wherever the birds may be placed, ventilation is of the greatest
consequence. We remember being once summoned to give our opinion upon
the continued illness of some canaries of which every care was taken.
They had fresh water daily, were plentifully supplied with sand, and
were fed with the proper seeds, and cresses, groundsel, and other green
meat, and yet they drooped and moped, and never seemed well. No fault
could be found with the arrangements, and therefore we looked for the
cause of illness in another direction. The air of the room seemed very
close when I entered it, and on examination we found that there was no
outlet whatever, the chimney having been blocked up and the windows
carefully shut, in order to prevent the birds from escaping. We at once
recommended that a pane of glass should be removed at the top of the
window, and a piece of perforated zinc inserted instead; and when this
was done the birds recovered themselves, and resumed their normal
aspect.
The two secrets--if secrets they can be called--in bird-keeping are a
good supply of fresh food and water and perfect cleanliness. The former
necessaries can be easily insured in a very simple manner, and should be
made after the pattern of the accompanying figures. Both are founded on
the same principle--namely, that of self-feeding from a reservoir.
[Illustration: Fig. 1.]
[Illustration: Fig. 2.]
The seed-box is thus constructed. Get an old cigar-box, from which the
aroma of tobacco has been removed by long airing, and take off the lid
and the whole of one side; cut off two-thirds of the lid-piece, bore
three holes in it, and fix it where the lid was, as at _a_; cut the rest
of the lid in two, and fix the pieces in the box, so as to separate it
into three compartments, fixing them with glue and a few very tiny
brads. You should use pieces of slender brass wire for the purpose. If
you left the box in this condition all the seed would run out at the
round holes, and you must therefore correct that error.
How this is done will be seen in fig. 2, which gives a section of the
seed-box.
Cut a squared piece of wood, which will just slide into the partition,
so as to make a flat flooring to it. But, instead of laying it flat,
place it in a sloping direction, as seen at _d_, so that a small space
is left between the end of the floor and the back of the box. The
reader will see that when the seed is poured into the partition it will
drop through the open space at the back, and fall into the bottom of the
box. The birds put their heads through the holes to eat the seeds, and
as fast as they peck them away below, more fall from above and supply
the deficiency.
In the front, and above the holes, fix a piece of glass, which is
represented by _b_ in fig. 2, and which is seen in its place in fig. 1.
The object of the glass is to permit the bird-keeper to see when there
is a sufficiency of seed. The sloping top is also of glass, which is
fixed by a strip of American leather, acting as a hinge. It is made of
glass, and set at a sharp angle, in order to prevent the birds from
perching on it, which they are certain to do if they can find the least
foothold. It will be found that the best cement wherewith to fix the
glass is gold-size, and that a coat or two of black sealing-wax varnish
makes a nice finish to the job.
The holes through which the birds feed should not be much larger than
the size of their heads. The reason of this arrangement is that the
canaries are apt to shell the seeds while their heads are over the
vessel in which the food is contained, so that the husks fall among the
seed, and it is not easy to discover when the supply is exhausted. But
no diurnal bird will feed in the dark, and as the canary effectually
darkens each hole by introducing its head, it will not crack and eat the
seed until it has withdrawn its head and restored itself to light.
The object of the partitions is that the birds can be supplied with
different kinds of seed, each of which can be restricted to its own
division. The receptacles should be of different sizes--the largest for
canary-seed, the next in size for rape, and the least for millet, among
which a little hemp may be shaken. In front of the holes, and about
three-quarters of an inch from them, should be fixed a perch, upon which
the birds can sit while they feed.
At the back of the seed-box are fastened a couple of stout hooks--those
which milliners call “stay-hooks” answer admirably--so that the box may
be hung on the wires at any convenient height. It should not be placed
on the ground, because in that case the canaries will stuff all the
refuse stems of the green-meat into the feeding-holes, and will probably
mix sand and husks with the seeds. They are as mischievous as monkeys,
and quite as ready at discovering and taking advantage of the slightest
opportunities of doing something which they know is forbidden.
The “fountain” from which they drink is made on a similar principle.
Fountains can be purchased at any bird-dealer’s; but as it is preferable
that boys should use their hands rather than drain their pockets, we
offer simple directions for making a fountain as efficacious, though not
quite so elegant, as those which are purchased in the shops.
The materials required for the purpose are very simple, and consist of
some wire, both stout and fine, of an empty Florence-oil flask, a
saucer, and some wood. The mode of employing them is shown by the
illustration (fig. 3).
[Illustration: Fig. 3]
Make three rings of stout wire, each diminishing in diameter, and
arrange them as seen at _b_, the smallest being uppermost. Four pieces
of stout wire are then firmly attached, so as to make a kind of conical
stand. Were not the birds so mischievous, this would be sufficient for
all purposes; but as they are sure to go and bathe in the water, they
must be kept out by intermediate wires, so as to make a kind of cage,
through which the birds can put their heads, but which will not permit
the passage of their bodies.
Then take your oil-flask, strip off all the rushen covering, and wash
the interior with strong soda until every trace of the oil is removed.
Place it in the wire frame, as shown at _c_, and try whether it stands
upright. If the wire ring should be too large, and allow of its slipping
through too far, cut a round hole of the proper size in a piece of
pasteboard or very thin wood, lay it on the ring, and then introduce the
flask.
Make a round stool or table, such as is seen in the illustration, and
fix the turned-up ends of the wires to it with small staples. If the
fountain were on the ground, the birds would fill the saucer with sand
and husks; and if it were not firmly fastened, it would be knocked over
by the fluttering wings of a passing bird. The stool must be wide and
strong, or the whole affair will be upset.
The mode of preparing the fountain is very simple. Fill the flask with
water, and stop up the mouth with a shallow cork. Place a saucer (like
_a_) under the wire frame, insert the flask, hold its mouth in the
saucer with one hand, and remove the cork with the other. The water will
immediately rush into the saucer, and will half fill it, but owing to
the pressure of the atmosphere no more water will descend. When,
however, the birds have drunk enough to bring the level of the water
below the mouth of the flask, air immediately rushes up in great
bubbles, down comes a corresponding amount of water, and a fresh supply
is thus afforded.
In canary-keeping much depends upon the kind of bird. We presume that a
good singer will be required, as well as a strong and healthy bird. If
you are not learned in canary lore, try to induce an experienced friend
to choose a bird for you; but if you are not fortunate enough to possess
such assistance, the following concise directions may aid you. Look at
the birds for sale, and note those that stand straightest on their
perches, and that hop quickly and smartly about the little apologies for
cages in which they are mostly confined. Next hear them sing before
deciding on your purchase, and select the one that possesses the
sweetest and fullest tone. The dealer can always make the bird sing when
he likes, and if any bird refuses to sing, do not buy it, however
handsome it may look. If possible, procure one that possesses the
nightingale’s song; you will have to pay rather heavily for it, but any
one who can afford such a bird will be amply repaid by the very great
superiority of the song, which is divested of that ear-piercing
shrillness so unpleasant in most canaries.
When you are satisfied with the song, look the bird well over to see
that it has no defects; and if you prefer the variegated breed, take
care of three principal points--namely, the top of the head, technically
called the “cap;” the markings on the back, called “spangles;” and the
number of quill feathers in the wings and tail. The cap must be uniform
and rich in colour, the spangles bold and well defined, and the quill
feathers not less than eighteen in each wing and twelve in the tail.
Imperfect or damaged feathers can easily be replaced by pulling them
out, for their places will soon be filled with new and perfect feathers.
Some persons prefer the yellow varieties, and many are fond of the
crested canaries.
We intentionally omit all mention of “fancy” canaries, for the fashion
changes with them as fast as it does with tulips or dress. The fashion
in canaries seldom outlives a year, and the prize bird of one year will
possibly be despised in the next season. Do not, therefore, be persuaded
to attempt the purchase of costly fancy canaries. They may certainly be
of great value when you happen to buy them, but in a few years no one
will think anything of them. Choose strong, sweet-voiced, and healthy
birds, with colours that please your eye, and leave the fancy canaries
to professional breeders.
As to the general management of the canary, it may be summed up by
saying that it chiefly consists in judiciously letting alone. Don’t
meddle with the birds more than is absolutely needed, and do not worry
them with medicines whenever they seem to be unwell. As, however, all
canaries are liable to certain ailments, in which a knowledge of the
proper treatment is highly useful, we will just give a few plain
directions.
One pest is vigorous throughout the year, and always ready to seize on
the birds, and that is the “red-mite,” a parasite known to all
bird-keepers.
If you find your birds restless, especially at night, and see them
continually pecking among the roots of the feathers, and especially if
they lose appetite, and become fretful and ill-tempered to their
companions, look out for the red-mite. You can always detect the tiny
but formidable foe by placing the bird in a dark room, and, after a few
hours, holding a bright lamp close by the cage. If there are any mites
about, you will soon see them crawling upon the perches, the wires, and
even showing themselves among the feathers. They are not larger than the
dot over the letter i, but their numbers are often very considerable,
and the injury they inflict is great.
Let not one escape, for it may be the parent of hundreds more. When the
red-mites have once obtained possession of a cage, their extirpation is
a task of very great difficulty to those who do not understand the
constitution of the creatures. So difficult, indeed, is the business,
that many fanciers will not even attempt it, but burn the cage and buy
another. The metal cages, which are now so common, are preferable to
those made of wood and wire, inasmuch as they present very few spots
wherein the red-mite can find a hiding-place, and for that reason metal
is to be preferred to wood. Even if they have gained admission to an
ordinary cage, they can be extirpated without very much trouble. We have
succeeded in doing so in several instances, and think that in a
fortnight any cage can be freed of its troublesome parasites.
First place the cage in the sun for a short time, so as to induce the
light-hating mites to leave the bird and hide themselves in the crevices
of the cage. Remove the bird, and transfer it to another cage, or even a
box, and let it wait. Take the cage and examine it well, introducing a
heated needle or thin blade of iron into every crevice. Next take some
insect-destroying powder, force it into a hollow paper cylinder, light
the paper, put it into the cage, and envelop the whole in a newspaper.
Leave it there for an hour, and when you remove it you will see dozens
of the red-mites, of all sizes, lying dead on the floor, or clinging
half-stupefied by the fumes of the powder. Scrape them all into boiling
water, and dust the whole of the cage with the powder.
By this time every mite will be dead; but there is a goodly store of
eggs which will be hatched in due time, and infest the cage anew. These
are destroyed by means of oil. Take a camel’s hair brush and some
salad-oil, and with the brush apply the oil to every crevice. If there
should be the tiniest scratch on the wood, touch it with the oil. Let
oil be applied to every spot where the wires enter the wood, where they
cross each other, and where the hinges of the door are fixed. Every egg
will thus be destroyed, and the cage freed.
About half an hour before you restore the bird to the cage hold it in
the left hand, and dust it well with the powder, blowing up the
feathers, so as to get it well to the roots. Scatter some of the powder
upon a piece of soft rag, and roll the bird in it, carefully binding
down its legs and wings, under each of which a pinch of powder must be
sprinkled. You can now attend to the head, which requires rather neat
handling, as the powder is very apt to settle upon the eyes and to worry
the bird. Let your feathered pet lie for half an hour in this beneficial
bondage, and then replace it in the cage, scattering some powder upon
the floor. The bird will shake its plumage sharply, and send a cloud of
dust flying, and in a minute or two will begin to peck among the
feathers and settle the plumage. The different aspect of the bird is
then quite remarkable, for it exchanges the fussy, anxious, fretful
moments for quiet ease, and even when it does peck among the feathers,
it does so gently and deliberately, and seems quite another bird.
Moulting is a disorder to which the canary is annually subject, and
which requires some little attention. Some time in the autumn all the
canaries exchange the feathers which have endured the wear and tear of a
twelvemonth for a completely new suit. Feathers are subject to damage in
many ways, and just before the moult takes place the bird is quite
ragged and disreputable in dress. Meanwhile the germs of new feathers
have been growing in the sockets which held the old suit, and in the
course of a few weeks all the feathers are shed and replaced by others.
It may easily be imagined that such an operation is not achieved
without much physical disturbance, and it is accordingly found that all
birds are more or less indisposed during the time of the moult.
Scarcely any two birds are affected in precisely the same manner, and
the “moulting sickness” tells with especial severity upon the young.
Quiet and nourishing food are the best remedies for the curious mixture
of languor and fever which is always visible among the birds; and the
most accomplished canary-breeders are in the habit of giving the yolk of
hard-boiled eggs, and even a little raw meat, scraped and cut very fine.
Sometimes, in their desire for animal food, the birds pluck the
newly-formed feathers from the bodies of their companions, and nibble
the still vascular and bleeding ends. Wine is recommended by some
fanciers, but we cannot agree with them. The moult is a natural ailment,
and the remedies which are best calculated to modify its effects upon
the health are those to which the natural instincts of the birds would
lead them.
Frequently the claws and bill of the canary become overgrown, and
produce very unpleasant results; the latter causing much difficulty in
taking food, and the former entangling the foot in the wires of the
cage. The remedy in either case is the same. Take the bird in the left
hand, and hold it against the light; the overgrown portions of the claws
will then be easily distinguished, inasmuch as a delicate scarlet line
runs along the centre of each claw and nearly reaches its extremity.
Taking this line as your guide, you carefully cut off the overgrown
parts with a sharp pair of scissors, and cause thereby immediate relief
to your feathered patient. The bill must be cut in the same way, but
requires a little more care and some neatness in trimming. No pain is
given to the bird when the operation is rightly conducted, for neither
bill nor claw possesses sensation.
Dysentery and diarrhœa are very common among cage birds, and should be
treated, the former with a drop or two of castor-oil, and the latter
with a lump of chalk to peck at, and a rusty nail in the water.
Sometimes the bird loses the feathers of the head and neck, and presents
a most ungainly appearance. In such cases rub the head with almond-oil,
and feed the bird for a few days on a mixture of lettuce, scalded bread,
olive-oil, and a sprinkling of maw seed. Health will soon return, and at
the next moult the bird will recover its lost plumage.
Broken legs are of frequent occurrence, and mostly happen by the bird
entangling itself in the wires and then struggling to free itself.
Overgrown claws are a fertile cause of this misfortune. Do not try to
bandage or in any way to meddle with the leg; but put the bird in a
separate cage, take away the perches, place the food and water within
reach, so that the patient may partake of them without needing to
stand, and wait until the limb is healed. The bones unite very rapidly,
and in a week or ten days the limb will be nearly as strong as before
the accident, and will betray no sign of the recent misfortune.
DOGS.
It is to be supposed that each reader of these pages is either the
possessor of a dog, or desires to obtain that privilege, and that he
will wish to learn in a few lines the best way of managing and training
his favourite.
There are many works which treat of the Dog; but all those which are
trustworthy are of very large dimensions, necessarily costly, and
contain a vast amount of information which is very valuable to the owner
of hounds, to the sportsman, or to the game-keeper, but is not required
by the generality of those to whom these words are addressed. We have,
therefore, endeavoured to condense into the few pages which can be
allotted to a single subject all the information which is absolutely
needed by those who keep dogs merely for amusement and the love of their
society.
Firstly, we may answer here a question that is often asked--namely,
which is the best breed of dogs for ordinary purposes? We of course
exclude all the strictly sporting dogs, such as the foxhound and
harrier, the greyhound, and perhaps the bull-dog, though there is
something to be said in favour of the last-mentioned, and somewhat
maligned, animal.
The tasks that we wish to impose on the dog are light and simple. We
want him to be watchful at night, to alarm the house at the sound of a
strange step on the premises; if possible, we want him to be courageous
enough to attack an intruder. We want him to be a pleasant companion in
our daily walks, to hunt after anything at which we may set him, to swim
after any object that we may point out, and to retrieve anything for
which we may send him. At the same time, we want him to be completely
under command, and to be obedient at the least word or sign.
Lastly, we want him to be cleanly and comfortable in the house, to know
how to keep out of the way when he is not wanted, and to be sufficiently
clever to learn all kinds of amusing performances.
Where, then, shall we find an animal that is capable of fulfilling all
these conditions?
There are several varieties of dogs which are well suited for general
purposes. There is the spaniel for example, faithful, affectionate,
clever, and docile. There is the poodle, perhaps the best “trick” dog
in the world, with his funny curly coat and his soft brown eye, full of
intelligence almost human. There is the Newfoundland dog, who is perhaps
almost too big to be a dweller within the house. There is the terrier,
an amusing, bright-eyed, agile-limbed, fussy animal. There is the
Italian greyhound, one of the most beautiful animals in the world, but
too delicate to please the taste of a boy. There is the Scotch terrier,
that odd, wiry-haired, clever creature, which has so often been
immortalised by affectionate owners.
[Illustration: THE SPANIEL.]
[Illustration: THE TERRIER.]
All these varieties are delightful animals, and we like them all. But
had we the choice of a dog, we should take neither of them, preferring a
mixture between the terrier and the bull-dog, provided, of course, that
each were of good breed. Many people fancy that a bull-terrier is a
dangerous dog to have about the house, and imagine that it is given to
biting without due cause, and is too savage to be turned into a pet.
But much of this misapprehension may be traced to the long-established
and popular error regarding the bull-dog. It is seldom that a favourable
account of this animal is given, and it is thought to be brutal, stupid,
vindictive, and irreclaimably ferocious. It is impossible to deny that
too many bull-dogs agree with this description; but it is equally
impossible to deny that whenever they possess such bad characters the
fault lies almost entirely with their master. “Like master, like dog,”
is an old and true saying, which has been based on the experience of
many years.
If the bull-dog is properly treated, if the owner makes the animal his
companion, and if he carefully studies its character, as every pet owner
ought to do, encouraging the good qualities, and gently reproving the
bad, it will be as gentle and much more quiet than a King Charles or a
toy terrier. Looks are certainly against the animal. There is, perhaps,
no creature with a more fell aspect than a thorough-bred bull-dog. Its
underhung jaw, its glittering teeth, its sunken eyes, its tremendous
chest, and lowering countenance are calculated to inspire terror rather
than interest.
Yet, when a bull-dog is managed with a due appreciation of canine
nature, its aspect thoroughly belies its true nature. We know a
thorough-bred bull-dog belonging to a friend, one of the fiercest and
most sullen-looking beasts imaginable. Every one gives the animal a very
wide berth; and we confess that when we first saw it we thought that its
owner was not acting very wisely in permitting it to walk about
unmuzzled. Yet this creature is playful and harmless as a kitten. Its
great jaws look positively awful as it opens its mouth, and until its
real qualities are known, it requires some little presence of mind to
withstand its playful rush.
For a pet, however, the bull-dog is scarcely suited, not being
sufficiently active or lively. The purely-bred English terrier, on the
other hand, is as mercurial a beast as one can wish to see; but it has
little steadiness of purpose, is apt to run riot, and is a rank coward,
not daring to face a rat, and having serious doubts before it can make
up its mind to attack a mouse; therefore the skilful dog-fancier
contrives a judicious mixture of the two breeds, and engrafts the
tenacity, endurance, and dauntless courage of the bull-dog upon the more
agile and frivolous terrier. Thus he obtains a dog that can do almost
anything, and though perhaps it may not surpass, it certainly rivals,
almost every other variety of the canine species in its accomplishments.
In the capacity for learning tricks it scarcely yields, if it does
yield at all, to the poodle. It can retrieve as well as the dog which is
especially bred for that purpose. It can hunt the fox with the regular
hounds. It can swim and dive as well as the Newfoundland dog. In the
house it is one of the wariest and most intelligent of dogs, permitting
no unaccustomed footstep to enter the domain without giving warning. It
will chase rabbits, weasels, rats, or, indeed, any game, with
unextinguishable ardour, and will fight any foe at which its master may
set it.
[Illustration: THE BULL DOG.]
One fault indeed it has. It is just a trifle too quarrelsome with other
dogs, and when it meets a strange individual of its own species, and has
gone through all the preliminaries of back-arching, bristle-setting,
_sotto voce_ growling, and the various performances with which two
strange dogs greet each other, it is a little too apt to cut matters
short by challenging the other to instant combat. Even this fault,
however, is easily overcome by a kind but firm master, who can impress
upon his pupil that it is not to fight anything at which he has not set
it.
And here let us make a few remarks upon the management of dogs.
Severity is not at all needed, but firmness of purpose is indispensable.
Patience and good temper are also two requisites, without which no one
should attempt to manage a dog. The animal must be made to feel that
when an order is given it has to obey at once, and not even the very
slightest act of disobedience should be passed unnoticed. He will soon
learn that lesson, and the rest is easy.
If you can procure a dog in his early puppyhood, it is certainly the
very best method, and you will not require a whip; but should the animal
have attained maturity, you may employ this instrument, but must use it
with the greatest discretion. If the dog is worthy of the name, you can
punish him in a far more effectual way by appealing to his sense of
shame than by flogging him; but if you once lose your temper, and begin
to inflict a beating on the animal, half your influence will vanish.
If the dog wilfully disobeys you, as will often be the case when he is
full-grown and is trying your mettle, take him by the neck, tell him how
wicked he has been, and give him one very sharp blow; not more than
one,--because if you do so he gets so frightened that he forgets all
about the scolding. Then let him have another chance, repeat the order,
and if he disobeys again, inflict another stroke. He is not likely to
offend a third time; and when he obeys the order, speak kindly to him,
praise him, and make much of him,--for you can do more with a dog by
praise than by rating.
With a dog which you have possessed from puppyhood there is seldom the
least necessity for severity. The creature is so accustomed to do what
his master desires, that he hardly conceives the possibility of
disobedience. Gentle firmness is all that is necessary in such a case;
indeed, we are always opposed to the infliction of pain, except in rare
instances, where it is the only means by which the animal can be taught
the necessity for obedience.
We cannot bear to see a dog look up to its master with the
half-frightened, half-shrinking expression which is observable in one
that has been accustomed to the whip. The animal ought to consider its
master as its best friend, and to run to him when it is in distress,
rather than to fear his presence and tremble at his voice.
The Rev. J. G. Wood, writing on this subject, says:--
“My dear old Rory used to be most abjectly miserable when he had
offended me. His frisky tail and pretentious ears would droop on such
occasions, his easy assured carriage would sink into a listless,
spiritless gait, he would hide his head like a naughty child, he would
not leave or enter the room openly, but would make the transit of the
apartment by slinking under the chairs and tables, so as to keep
himself out of sight as much as possible. He would crawl under my chair,
and after waiting some time in hopes that I should notice him, would
just push his nose against my heel, and then retreat again to his
hiding-place. He would not eat, nor drink, nor sleep, nor be comforted
by any one until I had spoken the desired words of forgiveness.
“And then, when the first words of reconciliation were spoken, how he
would advance with hope beaming in his countenance, still mixed with
diffidence, lest he should have mistaken the tone of voice. And when he
was quite certain that he was pardoned, when he felt my hand upon his
head, how wild he was with delight! How he would jump about, and run
from one person to another on his hind legs, and roll over on his back,
and pretend to bite every one in turn, and knock the cat over, and bark
until he had to be turned out of the room for the sake of preserving the
drums of our ears.
“Then how he would get out of the house, dash down the street at full
speed, come pelting back again, jump on the window sill, bang with his
tail for admission, and then walk quite soberly to his usual place, and
lie on the hearthrug just as if nothing had happened.
“There certainly are dogs whose feelings are quite beyond the reach of
human sympathies; but it is more than probable that their callousness is
attributable to the bad treatment of their owner, and not to any
inherent defect in the animal’s nature. In my little book, ‘Glimpses
into Petland,’ the reader may see an account of a ridiculous dog who
fairly got the better of me by simple vacuity and selfishness. I never
saw such a dog in my life, and I really do not want to see such another.
“Nothing could be made of him. He did not care for kindness; he could
not be influenced by the whip; he never thought of obeying orders; he
got into every scrape in which a dog could by any possibility fall; and
was altogether a hopeless subject. Had I been a novice in the management
of animals, I should have thought myself in fault; but being tolerably
experienced in such matters, I was at no loss to set the failure down to
its right source.
“Just before commencing this account, I received a letter from a
correspondent who had read the account of ‘Roughie,’ and wrote a
vindication of the Skye terrier, to which variety the dog belonged. My
correspondent stated that if the Skye terrier were obtained when young,
and well treated, it was one of the most affectionate and faithful
animals that could be found; but that if it were bandied about from one
master to another, it lost all its loving qualities, and became a
reckless, selfish beast. Such had evidently been the case with
‘Roughie,’ and thus his peculiar disposition was accounted for.”
We will now just run through the list of the dogs which are best suited
for pets. Of the bull-dog we have already spoken, as also of the
terrier, which, as we have said, should be, if possible, a mixture of
the two varieties. If you can secure a good healthy puppy from well-bred
parents, think yourself fortunate, and make much of the dog.
Do not crop his ears. If you have any sporting friends, they will advise
you to do so, tell you that it spoils the dog, and give you all kinds of
advice about it. Now, in the first place, it is reasonable to think that
the dog’s Maker knows best the kind of ear that is most suitable for the
dog, and frames it accordingly. If the short, cropped form had really
been the best, it would have been made after that pattern, and not left
to the scissors of the dog-doctor to complete the work.
So we say to our readers, defy the ridiculous prevailing fashion, and
oppose common sense to it. In a few more years this cropping process
will be pronounced obsolete and unnatural; so be amongst those who lead
opinion, and save your dogs the pain of that cruel and unnecessary
process. Not long ago worming was all the fashion. No dog was considered
safe unless it had been wormed; that is, unless the under side of the
tongue had been cut open, and the central tendon pulled out. Of course,
when a tendon is drawn from the living body and laid in the cold air, it
contracts and twists about. Therefore it was held to be a worm, and
everywhere believed to be the cause of hydrophobia.
Horses, again, were cropped in a most atrocious manner. Their ears were
clipped close to their head, and their tails were cut quite short,
leaving only a few inches of hair on the stump; so that the French
satirist was quite justified in his sneer against the English as a
people, who, he said, cut off the tails of their horses and the heads of
their kings. The French did both afterwards, with the addition of a
queen and a few princes. Nor was this all. The under side of the tail
was cut across in several places--nicking, the operation was called--and
then the tail was forcibly bent upwards, and tied in that position until
the wounds healed, and the member left immovable. Fancy the torture the
poor animals must have undergone, the fresh wounds being torn open and
exposed to the air!
Mr. Waterton, the venerable naturalist, remarks that in former days he
tried to aid the cause of humanity by his example, and rode a horse with
a proper allowance of tail and with uncropped ears. The experiment
failed. The “_arbitrium popularis auræ_” was pleased to declare itself
against ears and tails. There was such a commotion whenever the humane
rider ventured to show himself abroad on a horse which possessed the
abominations of ears and a tail--he was so mobbed, and his horse was so
reft of his tail by the urchins who wanted fishing-lines--that, for the
sake of the beast as well as himself, Mr. Waterton was obliged to
conform to the popular verdict, and dock the tail of his horse as a
compromise for his ears.
Now, however, the verdict of popular opinion has undergone a change, and
horses are permitted to wear their ears and tails; and the time will
come before very long when a dog will be thought as much disfigured by
having cropped ears as he is now thought to be when he is allowed to
wear those members in their natural proportions.
The only rational excuse that can be put forward for adopting such a
practice is that which is employed by the owners of game-cocks, when
they clip the combs of their feathered _protégés_. It is, that the
length of the ear affords a hold for an antagonist. But as it is not to
be supposed that any of my readers are likely to belong to that brutal
class of human beings who keep dogs for the purpose of making them fight
each other, we may pronounce that not one single valid reason can be
urged for depriving a dog of his ears.
There is the poodle, a delightful dog for a pet. They are docile in no
ordinary degree, and can learn all kinds of tricks without seeming to
take much trouble. Performing dogs mostly belong to this variety, and
very amusing are the tricks which they will learn. They will dance a
polka with easy skill. They will imitate a ball-room company with such
ludicrous burlesque that no one can resist the temptation of laughing.
They will walk about on their hind legs, on their fore legs, and have
even been seen to walk with the two legs of one side, the other legs
being held up in the air.
It was difficult to imagine how they could have been taught such a feat;
but it had been done by setting a board on edge, hitching the two legs
of the left side over the board, and making the dog walk along in this
attitude. After passing along the board three or four times, the dogs
found that they could lighten the labour by holding their upper legs
clear of the board, and so they soon learned to dispense with its
presence.
If you do have a poodle, you must wash him often and carefully, because
these long, curly-headed dogs are apt to give out a disagreeable odour
unless they are kept very clean. But do not on any account clip his hair
in the stupid and ugly fashion that is so often adopted, and which was
first imported from France.
In that country they shave all kinds of dogs in the same manner, leaving
only a ruff round the neck, a tuft on each leg, and a tuft on the end of
the tail. There are men and women who make the clipping of dogs a
profession. They have carts with pictures of dogs undergoing the
process, and they perambulate the streets in search of patients, just as
knife-grinders do in search of work.
When they have collected a goodly assemblage of dogs, they set off to
the river side, and take up their station under one of the bridges. The
poor dogs, which have been trailing behind the cart at the end of cords,
are now bound and muzzled, and miserable objects they look as they lie
on their sides awaiting the shears of the operator. The hair that is
removed is put into sacks, and sold, it is said, for manure; and the
dogs are returned to their owners, metamorphosed out of all knowledge,
and shivering at the slightest breeze.
[Illustration: THE POODLE.]
If your dog should be ever troubled with ticks and fleas, you may free
him from his foes in ten minutes. First tie up his mouth with a piece of
broad tape, to prevent him from licking off the substance which is to be
applied; and if he is not very well under command, tie his legs also.
Then lay him on a cloth, sprinkle him over with the insect-powder, which
may be procured in small quantities at No. 33, Newgate Street, and rub
the powder well into his fur from his nose to the tip of his tail. When
you have done this, roll the cloth round him, and pin it well together,
so as to envelop him entirely in its folds.
You may let him lie as long as you like, but ten minutes will mostly be
sufficient; then with a hard brush go all over him, and brush out all
the powder into the cloth. You will be surprised at the multitude of
parasites which will be lying dead and dying in the cloth. The powder,
insects, and all should be carefully shot into the fire, and your doggie
will be grateful to you for the relief which you have afforded him.
Perhaps next to the bull-terrier ought to come the Scotch terrier, a dog
that will hunt anything, and is always a quaint, independent beast, with
something of the lawless Highlander about him, but a capital companion
for any one who values dogs and knows how to treat them. Spaniels are
all beautiful creatures, very affectionate, and often very clever; but
their long, silky hair gets sadly bedabbled with mud and wet, and they
cannot be admitted into the house until they have undergone a careful
purification.
Whatever dog you may have, do not tie him up in a kennel, or, at all
events, allow the animal to enjoy human society for some hours daily.
Dogs are _made_ savage by this too frequent procedure, especially those
whose blood is purest and whose spirits are highest. A dog that is
chained to one spot is sure to be irritable and captious, just as would
be the case with a man who is tied to one spot. Even the kingly spirit
of Napoleon lost its grandeur and became peevish and fretful when that
restless and ambitious nature was confined within the narrow limits of a
rocky island; and we cannot expect that the mind of a dog should be
superior to that of an autocrat.
As to the food of the dog, there is one simple rule,--do not overfeed
him; and, above all, never let him have scraps at meal times. It is a
very tempting practice, for the dog is so insinuating in the manner of
his request, and his thanks are expressed so warmly, that some little
strength of mind is required to refuse his demands. Still it is one of
the occasions on which the dog’s owner must show his firmness, for there
are few more miserable beings than a fat, over-fed dog. His life is a
positive burden to him, and the only remedy is to starve him down to his
proper dimensions. Give the animal but little meat and plenty of
biscuit, feed it once only _per diem_, and you will be repaid by the
healthy and active condition of your pet.
Lastly, as it is likely that the dog may fall into one of those canine
ailments which are to dogs what measles and chicken-pox and
whooping-cough are to children, we will just give a brief piece of
advice.
Distemper is the most common and most annoying of those ailments; and if
the services of a professional dog-doctor can be had, let the animal be
placed under his care. If no such assistance can be obtained, the best
plan is to give the dog no solid food, but to administer gruel or weak
broth, to prohibit _every kind of exercise_, and see that the
ventilation and cleanliness of his house are as perfect as possible.
Leave the rest to nature; and when the patient is recovering, let it be
led about to exercise, so as to avoid over-fatigue, which would, as a
matter of course, throw him back again.
[Illustration]
GOLD AND SILVER FISH.
These are of the carp family, and have been known in this country from
the year 1691. They abound in the fresh-water ponds, lakes, and rivers
of China; nor are they, indeed, at the present time quite uncommon in
our own climate, being now naturalised in ponds, and breeding freely in
pure waters. At Hampton Court are to be seen some of the finest
specimens of the family, originally placed there by Mr. Jesse, to whom
the frequenters of that place of public resort are so much indebted.
They have increased to several hundreds, and many of them are of
prodigious size and very fat, being to fish what royal porters are to
men.
The colours of gold-fish are liable to the greatest variation: some are
nearly all gold, mingled with red; some are marked with a fine blue,
brown, or bright silver hue; but the usually predominant colour is that
of a brilliant gold. As an article of food, they are not used; and are
only valued for their beauty and gentleness. It is a curious fact in the
history of the gold-fish, that it will bear without injury the extremes
of heat and cold; as it will live equally well in a tank, in a glass
vase, and in a pond in the open air. Instances have been known of
gold-fish having been frozen hard and stiff in the water, but yet, upon
being gradually thawed, becoming perfectly healthy and well.
Although many preserves of gold and silver fish exist in this country,
the supply was principally from Portugal, where they abound. They are
brought over in large numbers about spring time; and then numerous
perambulatory gentlemen, having purchased a few small glasses of the
most inferior description, and fish at twopence each, very moderately
ask, and often receive, for a couple of fish, glass, and water the sum
of five shillings; but our young friends must beware of such persons,
for the fish they sell usually die in a few days or weeks.
The silver-fish differs from the gold-fish only in colour, which is
similar to silver tissue: it generally has scarlet fins, and is
curiously marked in different parts of the body. Both varieties are also
subject to variations in the fins, which are occasionally double; and
specimens have been seen with triple tails.
GLASSES.
The glasses, or globes, should be moderately large, with wide mouths,
and three-fourths filled with water. For two fish the globe should be at
least a foot in diameter; and for three or four fish, sixteen inches.
They should be kept in a cool place--never exposed to a burning sun, or
the heat of a fire. Too many should never be crowded into one glass. A
few branches of box should be kept in the globe, for them to rub
against, which should be changed once a week.
FEEDING.
Some persons fancy that gold and silver fish need no food. It is true
that they will subsist for a long time with nothing but water, when it
is pure and frequently changed. They are best pleased with such _jejune_
diet as bread or biscuit; but these should be given sparingly, lest,
turning sour, they corrupt the water. They will also feed on the aquatic
plant called lemna, or duck’s-weed, and also on small fry. Hawkins, the
editor of Walton, says that fine gravel should be strewed at the bottom
of the vessel that contains the fish; and he directs them to be fed on
bread and gentles, and to have their water frequently changed.
DISEASES.
You can easily tell when a fish is falling off in his health by
observing him frequently coming up to the surface of the water for air.
This shows he has not sufficient power in his gills to extract the air
from the water. He also looks dull, and his motions are languid; a hazy
or cobwebby appearance likewise seems to envelop his body, and perhaps
some of the scales will drop off. When a fish gets into this unhealthy
state, he should be immediately removed from the others, who should have
fresh water given them several days in succession. The best remedy for
diseased fish is to put them into a pond for a few weeks; and it is
especially necessary for female fish, which, if not so treated,
frequently die for want of spawning. A fish is sometimes saved by being
placed in a little artificial dam, made from some running stream in a
garden, for two or three days; but their diseases are at all times very
difficult to remedy. The best way is to prevent them by the
precautionary measures--plenty of room and pure water.
[Illustration]
THE GUINEA-PIG.
The guinea-pig, or restless cavy, is a prettily-marked, stupid, little
animal, which came originally from South America, and has long been a
favourite with most little boys, for when a boy becomes a youth he
aspires to keeping something more interesting than these senseless
little squeakers. Still it is a pretty sight to see the old ones
followed by two or three litters, and to watch their antics when
pleased, which consist of a squeak and a peculiar sharp turn, as if
they tried to jump out of their skins, but could not, for they are
fitted in too tightly for that. As for the use they are, why, they eat
and sleep--
“Just do nothing all the day,
And soundly sleep the night away.”
It is, however, a pretty, harmless, little animal; but as a pet is far
inferior to others that are more commonly kept. Though gentle and
inoffensive in its manners, it seems incapable of feeling the slightest
attachment for those who feed and caress it--even for its own offspring
it evinces little or no affection: it will not only suffer them to be
destroyed before its face, without making the smallest efforts to defend
them, but will even at times devour them itself. For all useful purposes
guinea-pigs are utterly valueless, though their flesh is used as an
article of food in their native country; and their skins,
notwithstanding the beautiful sleekness of their appearance, have as yet
been turned to no account by the furrier. Their only recommendations,
therefore, are the gentleness of their disposition, the cleanliness of
their habits, and the beautiful colouring of their coats. In this latter
respect they are very varied; black, white, bright reddish brown, and a
mixture of the three, called tortoiseshell, being the principal
varieties. The latter are the most prized, particularly where the dark
colours predominate.
In their native country they are generally of a pure white, with pink
eyes, and it is nothing unusual to have one out of a litter white with
pink eyes in this country.
Rats are supposed by many people to have a great antipathy to
guinea-pigs, carefully avoiding the place where they are confined. Under
this impression--which, however, is an erroneous one--they are
frequently kept by fanciers in their rabbit-houses and pigeon-lofts, as
a means of protecting their stock against the depredations of those
rapacious vermin. They are allowed to run almost anywhere, and to shift
for themselves: no attention whatever need be paid to the feeding of
them, the mere refuse scattered about the floor being sufficient for
their subsistence.
When, however, they are kept for amusement, their cages are generally
made precisely similar to the rabbit’s hutch, only of rather smaller
dimensions: their treatment, too, in most respects, is much the same as
that pursued with regard to that animal. Their ordinary food should be
oats given twice a day, and not too many at a time. They are also very
fond of bran, which is a cheap diet; and they will fatten upon it, and
keep healthy, if allowed plenty of exercise. Green meat should also form
a portion of their usual diet, particularly the wild sorts, such as
dandelions, sowthistle, plantain, &c.; tea-leaves they are remarkably
fond of, but these should only be given them now and then by way of a
treat; bread, also, they are very partial to, dipped in milk or water.
They are sold by all bird-fanciers; the prices varying from sixpence to
half-a-crown, according to their age, colour, &c.: as before remarked,
the dark rich-coloured tortoiseshell ones are considered the most
valuable.
[Illustration]
THE HEDGEHOG.
This, though a rough and prickly customer to handle, is a clean little
animal, and a great pet with country boys. If you have ever seen
one--and they are commonly sold at the shops kept by men who call
themselves bird-fanciers, or even hawked about the streets of London by
countrymen--if you have seen one, you are aware that, saving the belly,
they are covered with sharp spikes, and that when alarmed, or whenever
they please, they have the power of rolling themselves up into a tight
round ball, which shows nothing but spikes, and may be rolled along,
like a cricket-ball, without causing the little animal to uncoil itself,
while every spike is firm and erect as a needle, and almost as sharp.
While in this shape very few dogs can worry the hedgehog; and as for the
fox, who is rather partial to him, true to his wily nature, he rolls the
poor hedgehog along with his paws until he comes to a pool of water,
when the hedgehog unrolls himself, exclaiming, no doubt, “Hey! why,
what’s this? I can’t breathe!” and trying to peep about and see what’s
the matter, the fox, on the look-out, seizes him by the belly, and eats
him all up, saving the spines. Were you to thrust a dozen pins with
large heads through a piece of parchment, you would have an exact
representation of the spines of the hedgehog, every one of which is
retained inside the skin by the large pin-like head.
Some say that it sucks the cows, and draws off their milk; but this is
absurd, as its mouth is not adapted for sucking. Its favourite food are
insects and snails: it also feeds on frogs and mice, and will even kill
a snake, and eat it all up, beginning at the tail. The way it kills a
snake is very curious. It gives the snake a bite on the back, then
rolls itself up like a ball, remaining still as a stone for some time,
while the snake lashes and writhes about in agony; as soon as the snake
is a little quiet the hedgehog gives him another sharp bite on the
spine, and so continues until the snake is killed; then he begins at the
tail, as the Rev. J. G. Wood tells us in his “Illustrated Natural
History,” and eats him up “as one would a radish.” In a natural state it
sleeps all the winter, rolled up in a hole which it has filled with
grass, moss, or leaves; and when domesticated, it will hide itself in
some dark corner for weeks, and never once make its appearance, unless
it chances to awake and feel hungry; then some day you will see it come
creeping towards the fire, and be very glad to see it too. Hedgehogs are
great destroyers of beetles, eating them up as quickly as you would a
handful of raisins, and seeming fond of them. They need no looking after
at all, but will take care of themselves, though it is as well to have a
little hutch to put them into now and then. Their feeding-time is in the
night; and if there are black-beetles in the kitchen, the best plan is
to leave the hedgehog there, and let him devour all he can catch. They
have four or five young ones at a litter, which are born blind. It is no
uncommon sight to see a countryman with both old and young ones to sell.
You can buy a young hedgehog for sixpence, and an old one for a
shilling, or less than that even. We know of no animal that is less
trouble to keep, and in time it becomes so tame as to come out of its
hiding-place when called.
THE JACKDAW.
To procure a raven, an order to a dealer is almost necessary; but every
boy should be ashamed if he cannot catch a young jackdaw for himself.
These quaint birds make their nests in all kinds of places, especially
affecting old buildings, such as church towers, ruins, or colleges.
There is hardly an ancient church throughout the kingdom where a
basketful of young jackdaws could not be obtained within half an hour,
and old ruins positively swarm with them. It is curious to see how birds
of such different habits as jackdaws, owls, pigeons, and starlings will
roost amicably in the same locality, not appearing to have the least
distrust of each other, or making half the fuss about their
dwelling-places that is created nightly by the sparrows when settling to
rest.
Failing ruins and towers, he will take possession of deserted
rook-nests; and in cases of great distress, when the country is wide,
where men will not build towers, where rooks and crows will not build
nests, he is forced to fly for succour to the sea-shore and the warren,
and make his home with the gannets and the rabbits.
Many a person has been surprised, on looking into a deserted rabbit
burrow, to find it choked up with a strange mass of sticks and twigs,
and still more surprised when he has brought to view a couple of
jackdaw’s eggs, or hears the hungry cries of the young birds. This
seeming alliance of the rabbit and the jackdaw is not unique, for it is
observed in the Coquimbo owl, or burrowing owl, as it is sometimes
called, and the prairie dog of North America, both of which reside
within the same warren, and seem perfectly satisfied with each other’s
company.
[Illustration]
The sea-birds, too, receive the jackdaw into alliance, and whole
colonies of these grey-hooded birds may be seen hovering about the lofty
cliffs that bound our coasts, crying “Jack! Jack!” in inharmonious
chorus with the sea-birds’ wail.
Sometimes a young and too artless bird leaves its nest before it is
rightly able to use its wings, and is unable to ascend to the summit of
the cliffs, flapping idly about the shore, driven nearer and nearer to
the rocks by the advancing tide. The whole colony is roused by the
misfortune. They wheel about in the air over the unfortunate bird with
cries of distress; they do their best to encourage it to ascend; but
their endeavours are all in vain. Time after time it aims at gaining the
summit of the cliff, but strikes against the rock, and falls again to
the sands.
In some spots it contrives to gain an elevated perch, and then waits the
ebb of the tide; but in those places where the rocks afford no
resting-place within a moderate distance of the water’s edge the fate of
the poor bird is sealed.
Jackdaws are very easily tamed, and become very talkative, after their
fashion. Their vocabulary is, however, limited, and is mostly
restricted to the word “Jack,” which is uttered on every imaginable
occasion. If the bird sees its master coming, it calls “Jack!” in order
to express its joy; if it does not see him, it calls “Jack!” in order to
induce him to come. If it hears a strange noise, it uses the same remark
by way of giving notice; and if it hears its own name, it thinks itself
bound to repeat the word as a polite recognition.
It is a very vigilant bird, and is quite as useful as a watch-dog to
those who wish to gain early intelligence of strange visitors. It is not
nearly so mischievous as many of its compeers, but sits for the greater
part of the day on some chosen perch, and thence surveys the objects
around. A passing bee or beetle, however, immediately arouses its
energies: it pounces on them with unfailing certainty, batters them to a
shapeless pulp against a stone, and swallows them leisurely. It will
also catch mice, kill them by severe blows of the beak upon the head,
pull them to pieces, and eat them systematically, rejecting the skin as
indigestible and unsavoury.
As a general rule, it should be left out of the way of water; for it is
a positive slave to the bath, and would bathe so frequently that it
would not even give itself time to become dry. It may be fed on bread
and milk, oats, mice, small birds, insects, meat, or, indeed, upon
almost anything that can be eaten by the rapacious or frugivorous birds.
It is of an affectionate nature, and will attach itself firmly to those
who extend their sympathy towards it.
THE JAY.
The jay is a truly handsome bird, and will bear comparison with any of
the exotic species of the same genus. Although it does not possess the
exuberance of plumage nor the vivid brilliancy of colour that
distinguish many of the jays which inhabit the hotter parts of the
world, there is great beauty in the softly-toned hues of the general
plumage and the boldly-contrasted bars of azure and black upon the
wings. The moveable crest upon the head imparts a wonderful intelligence
to the expression, and when the bird ruffles up and displays these
ornamental plumes, a fresh charm is added to its appearance.
The jay is not nearly so common a pet as the magpie or jackdaw, probably
because it is a rare bird, and seems yearly to be diminishing in
numbers. It is not so impatient of captivity as the magpie, and will
bear confinement in a large cage with tolerable hardiness.
In its native state the jay seems to be rather more of a vegetarian than
the previously mentioned examples of the corvine birds. Still it will
eat meat, small birds, mice, insects, worms, &c., and has been known to
attack and devastate the nests of the thrush and other birds, and devour
the half-fledged young. But if any proprietor of a jay is desirous of
giving his pet an especial treat, he should supply him with a fresh egg.
Any egg will answer the purpose, but if the jay seems to have a
preference, the gaily-coloured egg of the thrush, perhaps, is most
attractive.
Like the magpie, he will soon learn to talk, and displays powers of
imitation scarcely, if at all, inferior to those enjoyed by that lively
bird. Even such sounds as the lowing of cattle, the grunting of pigs,
the bleating of sheep, or the neighing of horses, are reproduced with
marvellous fidelity by the jay, although its ordinary note is a soft and
rather pleasing cry.
[Illustration]
THE MAGPIE.
But what are we to say of the magpie, the very Mercury of the feathered
tribes,--light, active, eloquent, and the most accomplished thief in the
world? He wears all his bad qualities in the face, is not the least of a
hypocrite, and carries off his delinquencies with so impudent an air
that no one can help admiring him, however they may object to his
principles.
Not being so plentiful in England as the jackdaw, and building his nest
on the summits of lofty trees, he is not so readily procured as that
bird. He is, however, so extremely amusing in his manners, that most
persons would rather expend a little more money in procuring a healthy
magpie than give a much less sum for the more phlegmatic jackdaw. His
mischievous propensities are proverbial, and anybody who keeps one of
these birds must be prepared for the commission of every imaginable
delinquency. Nor must he blame the bird if it should happen to steal his
watch-chain, peck a hole through his best boots, fill his bed with
sticks and pebbles, upset his ink-bottle, tear his papers, put his kid
gloves into the dirtiest procurable puddle, or play practical jokes of a
similar kind; he has only himself to thank for his carelessness in
allowing it access to his domains.
But if he makes up his mind that under such provoking circumstances the
blame rests with himself, and that he will not be angry with the bird
for following the dictates of its instinct, he will find his magpie a
most entertaining companion, as full of odd tricks as a monkey, and as
playful as a kitten. It requires very little attention, and provided
that he be regularly fed, and furnished with a shelter in case of
inclement weather, he will live to a venerable old age.
The fertility of invention that characterises a magpie’s mind is
perfectly astonishing, and the anecdotes that are related by every one
who has watched his habits are as varied as they are wonderful. There is
an amount of self-reliance in the creature which betrays itself in every
gesture, as well as in the knowing twist of the head; and the triumphant
“carrack” that accompanies a successful piece of mischief and the
impudent flirt of the tail afford unmistakeable evidence of the bird’s
true character.
None of the corvine birds should be kept in cages. The jackdaw perhaps
suffers least from such captivity, and the magpie perhaps the most. It
has such a restless nature, that it is ever on the move, and if
confined, in a cage, may be seen hopping from perch to floor, and from
floor to perch, in miserable monotony of movement. Moreover, his
beautiful tail always suffers severely from contact with the bars of the
cage; and even if it is not rubbed down to a mere stump, as is
frequently the case, it is always rendered ragged and disreputable at
the tip.
As a general fact, the ordinary wicker cages are of small use. A lively,
active magpie, with all its senses developed, will make little of such a
cage. Sometimes he will direct his attention to the door, and never rest
until he has pulled it off the hinges. Sometimes he will set
deliberately to work, and peck so fiercely and continuously at the bars,
that he will break them away in splinters, and make his way out.
However, the best plan is to avoid cages; or if the bird really must be
placed in confinement, let the cage be roomy, and made of wire.
Perhaps the chief charm of the magpie is his great capability for
learning to talk, and his exceeding readiness to display that
accomplishment. Some individuals are more eloquent than others, have a
clearer articulation and a better memory,--just as is the case among
human beings. But though all magpies may not be peculiarly excellent in
their powers of conversation, they can all be taught to talk after a
fashion, and are seldom chary of exhibiting their powers.
A magpie has been known to imitate the human voice so perfectly that he
has induced his dupe to answer his queries, believing them to have been
made by the lad whose peculiar voice was so well simulated. Very little
trouble is needful to teach a magpie to talk, for his imitative
instincts are very largely developed, and he is sure to reproduce with
marvellous fidelity the various sounds which he may hear. He can bark
like a dog, mew like a cat, cry like a child, scream like a
costermonger, and occasionally swear like a trooper. But he means no
harm, and may be pardoned for the unrefined language he is sometimes in
the habit of using.
Magpies require plenty of water--not so much for drinking, although they
are always thirsty birds, but for washing. They are extremely fond of
bathing, and a plentiful supply of water is needful to keep their
beautiful plumage in proper condition. The food of the magpie is the
same as that of the jackdaw.
OWLS.
There are worse pets to be found than owls. They are not so immediately
engaging as many creatures that have already been mentioned, but by
proper management they can be made into very companionable birds,
quaint, grotesque, and affectionate withal.
The chief drawback to the owl as a pet is its nocturnal habits, which
cause the bird to sleep during the day and to be awake during the night.
To a certain degree this custom may be corrected. The chief reason why
the owl wakes at night is, that it preys upon mice and other nocturnal
creatures, whether mammals or insects, and must in consequence be able
to pounce upon them as they rove abroad.
Now, although at first to wake the owl will be found rather a tedious
business, and to keep it awake still more difficult, a present of a
mouse, or a small bird, or a large beetle, will generally rouse it, and
cause it to remain awake for some little time.
To change the creature into a wholly diurnal bird is impossible,
inasmuch as the entire bodily structure, as well as the temperament, is
that of a nocturnal being. The eyes, for example, are formed for vision
in a very dim light, being of very great size, and with pupils so large
that the ordinary light of day is painful to the bird, and dazzles it so
much that it cannot see sufficiently to direct its flight. Exceptional
cases have occurred, in which owls have been seen abroad in the daytime,
and been observed in the act of catching mice at mid-day; but such an
event occurs very seldom.
Even when the bird is placed in a comparatively dark room, where the
rays of the sun cannot beat upon it, the eyes are continually blinking
as long as they are open, and the large nictitating membrane is ever and
anon drawn over them. It may here be mentioned that the nictitating
membrane is a kind of inner eyelid, made of very elastic membrane, which
is gathered up in one corner of the socket, can be drawn over the eye by
means of special muscles, and returns by its own elasticity when the
tension is removed. It is peculiarly strong in birds of prey, and the
best examples of this curious structure are to be found in the owls.
[Illustration: WHITE, OR BARN, OWL]
In general, the owl sits, or rather stands, during the daytime, fast
asleep, having a very quaint aspect, the eyes being reduced to a mere
pair of lines, sloping towards the bill, and surrounded by the round
discs of stiff feathers which form a “splayed” window in the dense
plumage, and allow the bird a wider scope of vision than it would enjoy
if the aperture in the feathers were no larger than the eye itself.
Altogether the bird looks wonderfully like a Chinese mandarin of very
high rank, and consequently of great obesity; the sloping linear eyelids
being just as oblique as those of the Chinamen, and the two feather
discs representing the huge round spectacles with which the Chinese are
accustomed to aid their vision.
The position of the owl when at rest is rather curious. Instead of
sitting with its head reposing on the shoulder, its legs bent, and its
claws firmly grasping the perch, the bird stands stiffly upright, with
its legs perfectly straight and its head upright. Here we ought to
mention the popular error that birds sleep with their heads under their
wings. Not only is this mistake impressed upon the young, and fostered
by such familiar nursery-rhymes as that of “The north wind doth blow,”
but it is in force even among educated persons, who have learned to
observe as well as to think. In a recent controversy about fresh air and
human lungs some of the advocates for stuffiness and closed windows
employed as an argument the imagined fact that, when birds go to sleep,
they exclude fresh air by tucking their heads under their wings. The
force of their arguments and the accuracy of their facts were about on a
par. Many birds compose themselves to sleep, but no one ever yet saw a
bird put its head under its wing when going to roost. The real process
is simple enough, as any one can prove who will take the trouble to
watch a parrot or canary. The bird first settles itself in a comfortable
attitude, which varies according to the species, and then turns its head
round, and puts its beak among the loose feathers of the shoulder, the
wings being kept closed and held firmly against the body.
Owls may be procured in various methods. If the reader should happen to
possess proper premises, he will find that to attract owls will be as
easy as to buy them, and will give him better opportunities of studying
their habits. All that is required is the command of a retired spot,
where the birds will not be annoyed. A little ingenuity and the
expenditure of a few shillings will do the rest.
It is impossible to have a better or more complete plan of attracting
the owls than that which is employed by Mr. Waterton at Walton Hall. He
can, and does, attract all kinds of birds to his domain by the simple
plan of affording them a secure shelter and the prospect of food. In the
case of the owls the first precaution is the only one that is needful,
the birds being perfectly capable of finding food for themselves.
Possibly a few mice thrown on the ground might assist in attracting the
birds; but as they will come when no such precaution is taken, such bait
may be omitted.
There is a popular idea that neither the lion, the eagle, or the owl
will eat game which they have not killed. Nothing can be more opposed to
fact than such a notion: for the lion is generally killed by laying in
his haunts a dead animal, which he is sure to eat; the eagle is only too
glad to pick up a dead lamb; and the owl will carry off almost any
number of dead mice that are placed in its way.
If the reader wishes to attract owls to his premises, he must prepare
habitations for them. Knowing that the common barn owl, or white owl, as
it is sometimes called, is fond of resting in buildings, Mr. Waterton
has taken great pains to erect certain domiciles of which the owls are
likely to approve. A large hole made in an old ruin is sure to attract
the barn owl, especially if it be well sheltered with ivy, and a stout
perch across the cavity may be useful. There are owl-houses in different
parts of the domain, all tenanted by some bird, and most of them by the
inhabitant for whose use they were made.
The jackdaw is the most pertinacious usurper that can be imagined. Any
house that will suit an owl will suit a jackdaw, and the daw is so keen
at discovery and so quick at utilizing his faculties, that he takes
possession, and fills the hole with sticks, before the owls have a
chance of securing their home.
If the brown owl is wanted, there are few places like a hollow tree, an
article which can often be purchased very cheaply, set up in the
grounds, and its interior arranged for the reception of the birds.
A writer in the _Field_ newspaper has mentioned that he has been very
successful in attracting the brown owl by means of an empty
eighteen-gallon cask, made very clean, and fastened in a tree. A perch
was placed inside, a convenient entrance-hole cut, and a quantity of
very dry touchwood placed within. On this touchwood much of the success
seemed to depend, for wherever it was omitted the owls declined to take
possession of the cask. In order to fit it for its purpose, it was
carefully dried in an oven. The exterior of the cask was painted so as
to harmonize with the colours of the tree.
Should the reader be unable to fit up such a residence, he may always
purchase young owls at a cheap rate, and can train them after his own
fashion. In order to show how much amusement may be given by so despised
a bird as the owl, the following extract from a private letter is
interesting:--
“I saw a curious sight yesterday, which I think quite worth
communicating to you. Some folks about us have got a young owl just
fledged, and one of the boys had given him for his supper a dead swift,
rather high and gamey. While he was enjoying this dainty, a young tabby
kitten, æt. about eight weeks, came on the scene, and walking up to the
owl, deliberately invited herself to a share in the repast. Mr. Owl did
not express any objection, save by expanding his wings over his food,
_more suo_, whereupon pussy crept under the outstretched wing, and went
in for her share. It was droll enough to see the two going halves,
especially as every now and then the owl got pussy’s ear by mistake, and
she in like manner began gnawing at his claw.
“But the scene reached its climax by the appearance of five young
ducklings hatched on Thursday last” (the date of the letter shows that
it was written on Friday, and consequently that the ducklings in
question were just eight days old), “who surrounded the group, and did
what they could to help. The smell of the dead bird attracted, as I
suppose, many small flies, which hovered about and settled, now on the
owl, now on the cat, and now on the unfortunate swift. They had better
have stayed away, however, for the ducklings snapped them up as fast as
they alighted, while both the owl and the cat seemed quite to disregard
the pokes and pecks which their bodies received from the sturdy bills of
the ducklings.”
If the reader should keep owls in confinement, where they cannot procure
food for themselves, he must remember that they are hungry beings, and
give them plenty of food. They will eat almost any kind of meat, but are
very fond of mice and small birds, the latter of which they will mostly
contrive to swallow entire. There is no doubt that all the British owls
feed upon small birds when they can procure them. They have been
observed in the act of robbing the nests, in spite of the screams and
attacks of the angry parents, and the skulls, feathers, and bones of the
murdered birds have been seen in the pellets which all owls disgorge.
[Illustration: BROWN OWL.]
In common with most raptorial birds, the owls disgorge the indigestible
parts of their food, such as the bones, the feathers, and the skin; and
as the owl eats its prey entire, the amount of such substances is
remarkable. They are formed into egg-shaped masses, and may be found in
plenty in the nest or on the ground near the nest. In some parts of the
country these castings are called “quids.” When they are first ejected,
they are wet and rather tenacious; but they rapidly become dry, and can
then be crumbled down into a soft flock-like substance, which forms the
bed on which the eggs repose.
These eggs can easily be recognised by their peculiar shape and texture.
In form they are very globular, their shells are very thin, and the
surface is rough and chalk-like, as if some one had ground a piece of
chalk into coarse powder, mixed it with gum, and painted the egg with
the mixture. Any one who is experienced in such matters knows an owl’s
egg as soon as he handles it, even though he cannot see the object which
he touches.
Their method of eating mice is very curious, and that the owl should
derive any gratification from the process seems to be rather remarkable.
The owl catches the mouse with its foot--a member that is wonderfully
fitted for the purpose--and then shifts the mouse to its beak; in this
respect differing from the hawks, which hold the prey with the foot, and
only use the beak for the purpose of tearing it to pieces. At the
Zoological Gardens the falcons may be seen at feeding-time with the meat
in their claws, never taking it in the beak when they move, but hobbling
about with a lump of raw meat hanging to one foot, and presenting a very
absurd spectacle.
When the owl has settled itself into a comfortable position, it gives a
kind of snap and a gulp, and in a moment the head of the mouse is in its
throat. Another gulp and a shake of the head, and the mouse has
disappeared, with the exception of the tail, which hangs on one side of
the beak. This part of the process seems to afford the owl the greatest
satisfaction, for the bird remains for some time in this attitude,
standing perfectly still, but giving the tail an occasional roll in the
beak. Suddenly the head goes back with a jerk, the eyes close, there is
a mighty gulp, and the tail has followed the mouse into the bird’s
stomach. The whole process of swallowing the prey is very much like that
which may be observed in the toad, the gulping effort to swallow
appearing to be equally great in either case.
All owls can be treated in a similar manner, so that there is no need of
mentioning them individually. If, however, either of the eared owls can
be obtained, the young naturalist should not fail to do so. Owls kept in
captivity should not be placed in cages, provided that other
accommodation can be furnished, but should have a dark recess in which
they can sit during the day, and where they can always be found. They
are not easily seen by inexperienced eyes, as they have a habit of
choosing perches in spots where their colour harmonizes with that of the
locality. When properly treated, the owl can be made quite tame; but
unless it be taken when young, it is rather uncertain in temper, biting
very sharply. If any one approaches the owl, and hears a quick, snapping
sound, as if an elastic piece of wood were “flicked” against a table, he
may take it as a warning that the bird does not approve of him, and that
he had better not trust his hands too near the owl.
Any one can see how cat-like are the owls in their general physiognomy,
as well as in their nocturnal and mouse-loving habits; and they even
carry their feline propensities into peculiarities of diet. No animals
are less aquatic than the cat, and yet none are more fond of fish. Even
the best bred and most carefully-trained cat finds a difficulty in
resisting her appetite when she sees fish on the table, and she can
hardly have a greater treat than an occasional sprat, herring, or
plaice. Angler-cats are not uncommon: several that were accustomed to
haunt the water side have been known to catch the fish in shallow water,
and would even plunge into deep water for their prey. In like manner the
owl is a great fish-lover, and has been seen in the act of dropping into
the water, and rising again in the air with a fish in its claws. Now it
is an invariable rule with animals of all kinds, that these little
aberrations, if we may so term them, are conducive to health: a very
familiar instance is the occasional grass-eating propensities of the dog
and cat. The young naturalist will therefore consult the health of his
owl pets by giving them a fish now and then, as well as a few large
insects, in addition to their ordinary diet.
THE PARROT.
Among the vast multitude of birds which inhabit all parts of the earth,
or even among the many species which are found in our own country, it is
no easy matter to make a first choice. We will, however, commence with
the parrot; and before proceeding to describe the several species which
are generally in vogue among English fanciers, we may remark that the
parrots, paroquets, macaws, and cockatoos are found in almost every warm
portion of the globe. Many of the largest and most magnificent species
inhabit South America, while Australia is remarkable for possessing
several examples of this beautiful group of bird that are most
interesting to the young naturalist on account of their form, colour,
and habits.
One species, the Long-billed Parrot, or Nestor, scientifically called
_Nestor productus_, is now, as is feared, totally extinct, the last
known specimen having been shot some years ago. This curious bird was
notable for a wonderfully long upper mandible, very like a pickaxe in
shape, and employed in much the same service, being used for digging out
of the ground the roots and other vegetable substances on which the bird
was accustomed to feed. It is rather remarkable that, although this
strange land is very rich in the parrot tribe, none of them except the
cockatoo can be taught to speak, being apparently incapable of any
imitation of the human voice, and rarely uttering any sound except a
scream or a chuckle. Asia also possesses some very elegant species.
All the birds belonging to this tribe are furnished with rather big
heads, very large and curved beaks, with the upper mandible hooked well
over the lower, which is short and stout; and their toes are so formed
that they are divided into two opposable sets, so as to permit the bird
to grasp an object in its claws almost as if they were hands. In
climbing, an exercise of which the parrots are very fond, the young
naturalist will probably observe that the bird makes nearly as much use
of its beak as of its feet; and even when tame and accustomed to perch
on the hand of its owner, it aids itself in its movements by taking hold
of the fingers with its beak, although too gently to cause any injury.
The species which is most celebrated for talking is the Grey Parrot, a
well-known bird, living, when wild, in Western Africa, and being at once
identified by its grey plumage and short red tail. There are several
modes of obtaining this bird, such as requesting a naval friend to bring
one home on his return, or going and fetching one for yourself. But as
there are few who are so happy as to have an accommodating nautical
friend or relative, and still fewer who are able to undergo the perils
and hardships of a sea voyage, the best way is to go to a respectable
dealer, and give him an order for a young healthy bird. We say a young
bird, because the purchaser will then be able to teach it every word
that it speaks, and will find his feathered pet become far more familiar
than if it entered his possession when aged and with fixed habits.
Moreover, an older bird is very apt to pick up all kinds of phrases
employed by the sailors on board the ship in which it made its voyage;
and although such a vocabulary excites no particular surprise at sea, it
is rather too forcible and idiomatic for society.
The worst of the matter is, that the parrot is possessed of an iron
memory, and never seems to forget anything it has once learned, however
its acquirements may have been overlaid with fresh teachings. It has
often happened that a parrot which has behaved for a long time in the
most exemplary manner, and employed none but the most refined language,
has suddenly met with a sound which recalled all its old associations,
and induced the bird to pour forth a copious volley of language too loud
to be disregarded, and too plain to be misunderstood.
[Illustration: THE GREY PARROT.]
And parrots are just like children in their propensities for saying the
most dreadful things exactly at the most inconvenient times and to the
most fastidious persons, always choosing a dead silence for making some
deeply reprehensible remark, and invariably addressing their
observations to some lady or some staid ecclesiastical dignitary.
Parrots are marvellously nervous birds, and while young will often throw
themselves into such paroxysms of fear at the mere sight of a stranger,
that they will even endanger their lives. They have an odd and
unpleasant habit of scolding on such occasions, uttering loud, rough,
grating cries, as piercing to the ear as the sound of a file or a saw,
and stretching out their necks with ruffled feathers and agitated
gestures. Some birds retain this extreme timidity for a very long time,
in spite of all attempts to conciliate them.
As the management of the different species is nearly, if not quite,
identical, it is unnecessary to trouble the reader with a detailed
description of each kind of parrot and the mode of treating it; it will
be sufficient to tell him how to manage these birds generally, and give
a brief account of the country, form, and colour of those species which
are most commonly brought to this country. There are, indeed, so many,
that it is impossible to mention more than five or six sorts; but if the
reader desires to learn more about the parrot tribe, let him refer to
the Rev. J. G. Wood’s “Illustrated Natural History,” vol. ii., where he
will find the subject treated at length, and with large figures of all
the most remarkable species.
The Amazon, or Green Parrot, is so called from its colour, which is
mostly bright green, with some yellow and purple tints here and there.
This species is brought to England under the title of the Green Parrot,
the second species being more properly called the Festive Parrot. It is
much larger than the common species, being about fifteen or sixteen
inches in length, and having the feathers of the lower part of the back
of a deep vermilion.
Teaching this bird to talk is by no means a difficult task,--not nearly
so difficult, indeed, as hindering it from learning accomplishments
which it is not desired to possess, or inducing it to refrain from
producing objectionable sounds, whether articulate or otherwise.
In order to teach the parrot to imitate sounds, the best and simplest
mode is to take the bird into a perfectly quiet room, where it can hear
and see no one but the instructor, and will not have its attention
distracted by surrounding objects.
Then, after taking every care to render the feathered pet familiar,
speak the words, or produce the sounds, which the bird is required to
imitate, and be careful to avoid varying them even by the fraction of a
tone. You will soon see the pupil taking notice of the oft-repeated
sound, and it will presently hold its head aside, as if to catch the
tones more clearly. After a while it will try to imitate them, and as
soon as it makes an attempt, however imperfect, make much of the bird,
and give it a small morsel of some special dainty.
[Illustration: THE GREEN PARROT.]
Parrots are largely gifted with the faculty called by phrenologists
“love of praise,” and are in no slight degree incited by self-esteem; so
that it is possible to induce the bird to perform the oddest feats by
carefully working on these two propensities. They have an almost morbid
love of being noticed, and crave for words of praise with as much
appreciation as if they could understand their import. You can throw one
parrot into a very passion of jealousy by pretending not to hear it, and
talking to another bird.
One difficulty in the management of these birds is, that when you have
taught them to exercise their powers of imitation, they are apt to pick
up a kind of chance-medley of every sound they hear, instead of adhering
to one lesson and learning it thoroughly before they begin another.
Breaking them of the habit is a difficult task, but can be achieved with
ordinary care.
The simplest plan is to pounce at once on the obnoxious sound, and, by
never letting it pass unnoticed, give Polly an idea that it is not to be
uttered. If she persist in her delinquency, the best way is to scold
her, and put her at once into a dark closet, or throw a thick shawl over
the cage, so as to exclude the light. Parrots detest being left in the
dark, and it is surprising how soon the bird finds that her utterance of
the forbidden sound is sure to be followed by condign punishment, and
therefore ceases to be guilty of the offence.
Wherein shall our parrot live? This is a natural and a needful question,
and requires a few lines in reply.
Assuming that, in any case, the bird is to have plenty of room, as is
needful for a creature so restless and active, a cage is to be
recommended, unless the parrot is very tame, and there is no fear of
strange cats; we say strange cats, because Polly will generally contract
an alliance with the cat and dog of the household, and be on the most
friendly terms with them.
[Illustration]
A good form of cage is here given. As the reader will observe, it is
much wider across the top than is usually the case. This is to give the
bird room to traverse the cage, or luxuriate in its swing, without the
danger of rubbing its tail into a shabby and ragged condition. There is
a metal hoop suspended by a chain, and it is found that parrots are very
fond of getting into this hoop, and swinging about. The cage should be
made of galvanized iron wire, very strong, and at least five feet high.
We desire to dissuade our readers, in the strongest terms, from
purchasing cages made of brass wire for their parrot, or indeed for any
other bird. Brass is terribly apt to produce verdigris, especially in
London or in any other large town, and where gas is much used; and as
birds, and parrots especially, are fond of nibbling the wires, they may
be poisoned, and die a painful death.
Should, however, the bird be trustworthy, we would recommend one of the
common crutch perches, to which the bird is secured by a chain, having
one end fastened to a ring on its foot, and the other end affixed to the
crutch. If the room in which the bird is kept will permit the
arrangement, by far the best plan is to add a strong twisted wire to the
crutch, and carry it to the ceiling, as is done in the Crystal Palace.
The chain, instead of being fastened to the crutch, terminates in a
ring, which slides upon the upright wire, and permits the bird to mount
or descend at will.
[Illustration]
Polly will be charmed with this addition to her range of locomotion, and
the sight of his pet bird enjoying herself cannot fail to repay the
owner for the slight extra trouble he has taken.
Parrots are very fond of exercising their strong beaks, and are apt to
gnaw their perches so incessantly, that they cut them in two, despite
the hardness of the material. Prevention, they say, is better than cure;
and if the young parrot-owner will take care to give his bird now and
then a stout piece of elm wood, with the bark not removed, he will find
that Polly will prefer to tear and rasp away at the elm board to biting
her hard perch, where there is no bark to be stripped off.
[Illustration: THE COCKATOO.]
The pretty Cockatoos are always great favourites, their form being very
elegant, their colour delicate, and their talkative powers very great.
These birds are natives of Australia and the Indian Islands, and derive
their name from the peculiar cry of some members of their kind, which
exactly resembles the word cockatoo.
The two species generally found in captivity are the great Wide-crested
Cockatoo, known by the crest of broad and slightly-hollowed feathers
which decorate the head, and which can be raised and even thrown forward
when the bird is excited with pleasure or anger. The colour of this bird
is white, and the under surface of the crest is tinged with red. It
comes from the Moluccas, and is deservedly in favour as a pet, being
docile, affectionate, and very quaint in its habits.
The other species is the Lesser, or Sulphur-crested, Cockatoo, also from
the Moluccas and Indian Islands. It is easily known by the pointed
sulphur-yellow crest, which is continually being raised and thrown
forward. Both kinds can learn to talk to some extent, though they are
not such admirable linguists as their kinsmen the parrots.
The pretty Ring Paroquet is a native of the East Indies, and is a very
familiar inhabitant of our aviaries and cages. It is a gentle creature,
and most affectionate to a kind owner. It is mightily fond of walnuts,
and the bird can be kept in a state of great good-humour for an hour or
more by giving it half a one, and telling it to pick out the contents
with its hooked bill. The bird seems perfectly happy, holding the nut in
one claw, shifting it with great dexterity, so as to get it into the
best position for extracting the kernel, and uttering the while a
little, low chuckle of gratification. The colloquial powers of this bird
are moderate; but it does not learn so readily, nor repeat so
accurately, as the grey or green parrot.
The Macaws are notable for their very long tails, very big beaks, and
very brilliant colouring. The two species usually seen in England are
the Scarlet and the Blue-and-Yellow Macaw. They come from Southern
America, and have a most magnificent appearance while flying from tree
to tree, with the sunbeams flashing from their gorgeous plumage.
As a pet, the macaw is rather too noisy, and has a horribly loud and
dissonant yell by way of a cry. It is, however, a magnificent bird,
often measuring more than a yard in length. The colour of the plumage is
almost entirely of a rich glowing scarlet, relieved here and there by a
little blue, yellow, and green.
The Blue-and-Yellow Macaw is another native of tropical America, and
though not so gorgeously resplendent a bird as its scarlet relation, is
yet a remarkably handsome creature. As may be surmised from its popular
appellation, the colour is chiefly of the two tints blue and yellow,
mixing occasionally so as to produce green.
Without going too deeply into minute details, it will suffice to say
that the upper part of the back, the wings, and the tail are azure blue,
and the under part king’s yellow. On the forehead is a patch of green,
the chin is black, and the cheeks are white and naked, with the
exception of three narrow bands of very tiny feathers drawn successively
beneath the eyes.
The parrot tribe may be fed upon various vegetable substances, such as
grain of different kinds, seeds, nuts, Indian corn, and biscuits. The
stones of peaches are great favourites with these birds, who derive much
amusement from picking with their scoop-like tongues the soft fruit from
the interstices of the rough stone.
They ought not to have any kind of animal food, not even milk, which is
frequently recommended for their use, as their systems are apt to become
heated, and then they pull away their feathers in their attempts to
alleviate the irritation. Sometimes a parrot will pluck itself bare in
every part where its bill can reach, and so injure itself materially. A
capsicum pod now and then is, however, a treat, and may be given
sparingly. Be careful to use glass or earthenware pans for their food,
and see every morning that the cage and pans are quite clean and bright.
PIGEONS.
The practice of rearing pigeons for fancy or amusement has been for a
long time prevalent in England. In ancient times the “dove-cote” was a
general appendix to the family hall or farmer’s homestead; and at the
present time it may still occasionally be observed peering above the
trees in country districts; while in London the pigeon-loft, with its
“dormers,” “area,” “traps,” and other appliances, may be frequently seen
on the house-tops, more especially in the districts inhabited by the
working classes.
Pigeons live together in pairs; and when a cock and hen once form an
attachment, the union generally lasts during their lives. The pigeon in
a wild state breeds only twice or thrice in the season, but the domestic
birds will breed every six weeks, or during the greater part of the
year.
Whatever number of broods a pair of pigeons may bring up in a year, the
hen never lays but two eggs before she sits. She incubates for eighteen
days after the laying of the second egg. Both the cock and hen assist in
the hatching: the hen usually sits from the afternoon till about eleven
o’clock on the following morning; the cock then takes her place, and
sits while she goes out to feed and exercise herself, and generally
keeps on the nest until two or three o’clock in the afternoon.
When first hatched, the young are fed for about eight days with a milky
secretion prepared in the crop of the parents, and regurgitated into the
mouth of the young, and afterwards with grain and seeds the old ones
have picked up in the fields and treasured in their crops. In this mode
of supplying the young with food from the crop birds of the pigeon kind
differ from those of any other family.
[Illustration]
Formerly it was common to erect buildings as dove-cotes in the
neighbourhood of great country mansions: many of these were of
considerable size and elevation, as shown in the engraving. The custom,
however, has fallen into disuse, and pigeon-houses of more moderate
sizes are now generally employed.
A small one is very often formed from a wine-cask, which has holes cut
in its sides, and a small platform made before each, to form a
resting-place in front for the birds to alight upon. The interior is
divided into chambers by the carpenter, or any boy of common
carpentering ingenuity may readily do it himself. The cask is then
elevated on a stout thick scaffolding pole or the trunk of a straight
tree, and made perfectly secure. In arranging the internal chambers for
the birds care should be taken that they are large enough for them to
turn round in with ease. The cote should be fixed in a warmish spot, and
not exposed to cold easterly and northerly winds. The top of the cask
should be thatched or boarded, and this protection should come well over
the holes and sides of the cote, so as to protect it from the heat of
the sun in summer and the drifting of the rain in unseasonable weather.
[Illustration]
The young fancier may employ one after the fashion shown on the
following page: this, with its compartments, may be fixed up against the
south or south-west side of a stable, barn, or out-house. The outside
should be well painted, and the alighting places slightly slanted, so
that the water or rain may not lodge on them, but run off to the ground
outside. The whole should be so placed that it can be approached by a
ladder, which ought not to be permanently attached to the cote, or it
may be a means for the intrusion of cats and vermin.
It sometimes happens that a spare loft or room presents itself to the
young pigeon-fancier, which may be made use of for a pigeon-house. When
this is the case, it can easily be filled up with pigeon-boxes, which
may be arranged round the sides, while holes are made on the outside of
the building for the pigeons to fly in and out at. Broad flat perches
may also be placed across the room, upon which the birds may rest. The
boxes for the nests should be at least a foot square.
It is far more advantageous and profitable to keep pigeons in a spare
room than to employ the dove-cotes on a pole, or those fixed against the
side of a house, as double the number of young birds may be reared, the
nests being sheltered from the inclemency of the weather.
[Illustration]
As to the compartments, or nests, every one should be furnished with an
earthenware nest-pan, of a size adapted to the pigeons for which they
are intended. Sand or gravel should be sprinkled over the shelves and on
the floor, as the small stones with which it abounds are useful to the
birds in helping them to digest their food, and a little old
mortar-rubbish or pounded burnt oyster-shells should be given, to supply
the lime necessary for the shells of the eggs. Everything about them
should be kept very clean, and the whole apparatus, of whatever kind it
may be, should undergo a frequent and thorough purification, while the
nest-pans or boxes should be well cleaned after every hatching.
[Illustration]
There is a contrivance of great use which is employed for letting into
the loft those birds who may not happen to come home before the areas
are closed for the night. The object of this door, which is called the
“bolting wire,” is to let the birds in without letting those in the loft
pass out. It is made by placing before a square aperture cut in the
pigeon-house a couple of wires about three inches apart from each other
(as seen in the drawing): these swing loosely upon a piece of wood,
which turns on a wire, and their lower ends come over the lower ledge on
the inside. By this arrangement, when a bird outside presses against the
bars and tries to get in, the whole opens inwards, and he easily enters;
but if one from within tries to get out, the wires press against the
ledge at the bottom, and effectually prevent his egress.
Within the pigeon-house should be placed boxes for the grain, pulse, and
beans that the birds feed upon.
Pigeons are great devourers of food, and will eat any kind of grain,
such as wheat, barley, oats, peas, beans, vetches, Indian corn, tares,
&c. Small beans, called pigeon’s beans, are the best general food for
all pigeons. If possible, the peas, beans, or tares given to the birds
should be old, as new pulse is apt to disagree, and purge them. Hempseed
is very stimulating, and although pigeons are very fond of it, it should
be sparingly given.
Pigeons are very fond of lime and salt, and to supply themselves peck
out the mortar from between the tiles. To prevent this, it is best to
make them what is called a “cat,” which will be exceedingly grateful to
them, as it will tend to keep them in good health. This is done in the
following manner:--
Mix some sifted gravel or earth with old mortar-rubbish, or pounded
burnt shells, if this cannot be obtained; add a few handfuls of salt;
and make the whole into a mass with water. Portions of this may be put
into flower-pots, and placed in situations where the birds can get at
them easily.
[Illustration: MATING CAGE.]
Pigeons are often sadly annoyed by vermin. To prevent the increase of
these intruders, the most scrupulous attention should be paid to
cleanliness in every part of the houses, nests, and places of resort,
and the birds should be provided with shallow pans of water to wash in.
Sometimes there is a little trouble attending the mating of pigeons, and
it is of great importance that they should be properly matched, or the
young will not be purely bred. The mating coops should have a thin
lattice-work partition between them, so that the birds may make
acquaintance with each other, and match together, when they may be
placed in one pen. When they are properly mated, they may be left at
liberty to arrange and build their nests, which they will do very
readily. The illustration on the preceding page shows the construction
of the mating cage.
VARIETIES OF PIGEONS.
The Columbidæ, or family of pigeons, are one of the most numerous and
most widely distributed families of birds. They are all vegetable
feeders; and many congregate in flocks. But notwithstanding their
numbers, general distribution, and beauty, only two, out of a great
number of species, have been brought into subjection by man: these are
the common pigeon, or house pigeon, known as the Rock pigeon when in the
wild state, and abundant in several parts of the cliffy and caverned
shores of the British Islands, and the Collared, or Cream-coloured dove,
with a narrow black collar round the neck. This latter is frequently
kept in confinement: it breeds freely if in very large cages, and it may
be reared in the open air in this country if protected during severe
winters.
[Illustration]
BLUE ROCK DOVE.
The Blue Rock dove is the undoubted origin of all the different
varieties of domestic pigeons. It is a most beautiful bird; its general
colour is blue, with two black bars across the wings. In some few of the
large dove-cotes blue rocks still exist; but the pure race,
uncontaminated by intermixture with any of the numerous varieties of
domestic pigeons, is scarcely to be obtained except in the distant
islands of the Hebrides, or in remote districts unfrequented by man. It
is a swift flyer, a good forager, and a prolific bird; but its
comparative wildness renders it ill adapted for a domestic pet.
[Illustration]
THE ANTWERP, OR SMERLE.
Smerles are the Flying Pigeons of Belgium. These extraordinary birds,
that perform races of 500 miles, returning home to Brussels and the
adjacent towns from the south of France, and even from Spain, closely
resemble the blue rock in general form; but, as shown in the engraving,
the feathers of the wings are rather broader, and the head and beak
thicker and shorter. They are of various colours, as blue, checquered,
red, mealy, &c. Their desire to return home is so great that it is
useless to attempt to establish a stud of them, by liberating old birds,
however long they may be shut up; the only plan is to rear young from
them whilst confined in a room or loft, or to obtain young birds that
have never flown at the place of their birth. These, from the peculiar
noise they make, are termed “squeakers.”
We do not know any more delightful fancy for boys than Antwerps, as they
are strong, hardy, fertile, and require no special trouble; good water
and a little care in cleaning is all they ask; and they reward their
owners by being always ready to convey to their home messages from any
distance which they may have been trained to fly. The training is thus
accomplished: the young birds, when they can fly round with the others,
and dash about in the air in that vigorous style that characterises the
breed, are taken a short distance from home and set free. They rise, and
circling round and round, descry their home, and make straight for it.
Their next journey is longer, and so on; the distances are gradually
increased, until the birds will return even for several hundred miles.
When these birds are used to convey messages, the paper must be so
attached as not to impede their flight. The proper mode of doing this is
to write upon a strip of thin soft paper, about half an inch broad by
three or four inches long: this is rolled round the leg, and secured by
a thread. An ordinary letter, tied to the bird in the manner that is
often represented in engravings, would entirely prevent its flight.
[Illustration]
THE POUTER.
The breeds of pigeons that are most valued by fanciers are those that
differ in the greatest degree from the blue rock doves and the common
mongrel dove-house pigeons. Of these the Pouters, Carriers, and Tumblers
are the most esteemed. The pouter is a remarkable bird, distinguished by
the extraordinary power it possesses of inflating or blowing out the
neck: it is also characterised by the extreme length of its legs, which
should be feathered to the toes, and the length of the feathers of the
wings and tail. Pouters are of various colours: some are purely white,
but in general they are blue, or black, marked or pied with white upon
the crop, and with white flight feathers in the wings; there are also
red and yellow pied birds.
The properties for which a pouter is valued are usually stated as being
five in number; viz. length of leg, length of feathers, slenderness of
body, size of crop, and colour. Pouters possessing all these properties
of the breed in a very perfect degree are rare, and consequently very
valuable. Ten, or even twenty, pounds is no uncommon price for a pair of
birds sufficiently good to win prizes in the competitions at the
exhibitions of poultry and pigeons; but very fair specimens may be
bought at the dealer’s for a few shillings per pair.
Pouters are not such good nurses as many other pigeons, often neglecting
their young before they can feed themselves, when they die, unless fed
by being crammed with beans at least twice a day. For this reason we
would not recommend the young fancier to begin with this breed.
[Illustration]
THE CARRIER.
The Carrier of the present day is not, as its name might seem to imply,
ever used to carry messages, but is a high-class fancy variety, valued
in proportion to the perfection of its properties. In a good carrier the
beak is long, thick, and straight; the beak-wattle, or membrane at its
base, well developed, and standing well up from the head. The
eye-wattle, or membrane round the eye, should be large, flat, and
circular; the skull narrow and long; the neck very slender and long; the
plumage firm and glossy, the tail and flight feathers being long. The
colour most valued in carriers is a brilliant jet black: many first-rate
birds are what are called duns, a variety of brown. There are also white
and blue carriers, and occasionally pied birds are seen. The blacks and
duns are, however, the most perfect in properties; and they may be mated
together without risk, as they will always produce either black or dun
young birds, and not, as might be expected, a mixture of these colours,
or a bird intermediate in colour between the two.
Carriers are very fair sitters and nurses, but they are subject to
diseases of the eyes, and are not as well suited to young fanciers as
some of the other breeds.
[Illustration]
THE DRAGON.
For grace, style, and beauty there are no pigeons superior to Dragons.
They are almost everything a young fancier could desire--good homing
birds, able to do 50 or 100 miles with ease; active on the wing, close
sitters, good nurses, fertile breeders, requiring no special care;
full-sized birds, good in a pie, and not expensive in first cost. Their
general form is somewhat like that of the carrier, but they are much
more active, and far quicker in flight. Some of the best dragons are
blue; others are white, red, yellow, and black. They differ from the
carrier in the size of the eye and beak-wattle, and in the beak.
[Illustration]
THE TUMBLER.
The Tumblers are the very opposite of the breeds last described. Small
birds, with rounded heads, short beaks, and pretty little red prancing
feet, they are the very pets of the pigeon fancy. In colour the tumblers
vary very much. There are blues, blacks, and other self colours; then
some have white heads--these are termed bald heads; others have a white
mark below the under bill--so they are termed beards; but the variety
most valued is that termed the almond tumbler. In this breed every
feather of the plumage is variegated with black, yellow, and white, the
yellow forming the ground colour. These almond birds are reared by
experienced fanciers with beaks so short that they are hardly able to
bring up their own young, and others have to be employed for the
purpose. Birds of this extreme character are not suited to young
fanciers; but the ordinary flying tumblers, which can be bought at any
dealer’s for a few shillings per pair, are most pleasant pets--good
breeders, active and joyous on the wing, constantly turning somersaults
in the air, good in a pie, and able to fly home, if trained, some thirty
or forty miles with ease.
[Illustration]
THE BARB.
The Barb, or, as it used formerly to be called, the Barbary pigeon, from
the country from where it was originally obtained, is regarded with
great esteem by fanciers, and very good specimens cannot be obtained
except at high prices. In size the barb is rather a small bird. The
colours are usually black, dun, red, yellow, or white; blue barbs,
strange to say, are not known. The eye of the barb is surrounded by a
naked skin or wattle of a red colour; this should be circular in form,
and the larger it is the more the bird is valued: the skull should be
broad, and the beak short and stout. Barbs are good sitters, and bring
up their young ones very well. They are also striking in appearance, the
red eye-wattle contrasting well with the colours of the plumage.
[Illustration]
THE OWL.
Like the barbs, the best Owl pigeons also come from the north of Africa.
Formerly there was very common in this country an elegant, short-beaked
bird of a beautiful blue or silvery colour, known as the owl: this was
of medium size, and possessed rapid powers of flight. Beautiful as the
breed was, it has almost entirely been superseded at the pigeon shows by
a very _petite_, delicate, white breed, the first specimens of which
were brought to this country from Tunis about a dozen years since. A
very good specimen of this charming little variety is represented in our
engraving. Since that true blue and black owls of the small size have
also been introduced. The great drawback to this fairy-like little breed
is its delicacy. The young fancier would do well to choose for his first
favourites a hardier variety.
THE TURBIT.
The Turbit is a pigeon somewhat resembling the owl, but its head is
flatter, and it has a turned crown of feathers at the back of the neck.
In colour it is peculiar. The wings, with the exception of the larger
flight-feathers, are coloured, and the remainder of the body should be
white. There are turbits of all varieties of colour, or, as they are
termed, blue, black, red, yellow, and silver turbits.
THE FANTAIL.
There are a number of pigeons which are strikingly distinguished by
remarkable peculiarities in the form of the plumage; such are the
Fantail, the Trumpeter, and the Jacobin. The fantail is perhaps the best
known of these. The number of feathers in the tail of an ordinary pigeon
is fourteen, but in this breed it is greatly increased; in some
specimens even to three times that number, and thirty feathers are not
uncommon in good birds.
The carriage of the tail is also greatly changed; instead of being borne
behind, like that of an ordinary pigeon, it is held aloft, like the
expanded tail of a peacock.
[Illustration: THE FANTAIL.]
The engraving represents one of the best white fantails, the tail full,
carried well over the back, and the long swan-like neck thrown back so
as to touch the tail. Fantails are good hardy birds, and as they can be
bought at all prices, very well suit the young fancier. Moreover, they
soon become very tame, and may be reared almost everywhere.
[Illustration]
THE TRUMPETER.
The Trumpeter is not as common a variety as the fan-tail, but is fully
as remarkable. It derives its name from its peculiar voice, which is
quite unlike the ordinary coo, coo, of a common pigeon; and it is also
distinguished by the singular arrangement of the feathers on its head
and feet: the latter are feathered to so great an extent that the bird
appears to have four wings. Many of the larger quills on the feet of a
good trumpeter will exceed four inches in length if unbroken. Trumpeters
have a tuft over the beak and a turn of feathers at the back of the
head. They require to be kept most scrupulously clean; otherwise the
elegant appendages on the feet become clogged with dirt, and the birds
lose all their attractiveness and beauty.
[Illustration]
THE JACOBIN.
No variety of pigeon excels the little Jacobin in its quaint prettiness.
The tiny little head is half concealed in a recurved cowl of feathers
which runs down at the sides of the neck, and nearly meets in front.
The head, the flight feathers of the jacobin, and those of the tail,
should be purely white, those of the rest of the plumage coloured. The
most common colours are red or yellow; but there are also black jacks,
as they are sometimes called for shortness, and also blues, and some
that are entirely white. Jacks breed very freely, and we cannot
recommend a prettier pigeon, or one better adapted to the juvenile
fancier.
* * * * *
The foregoing breeds include all the best known varieties. It is true
there are many others described in the works on pigeons, but none better
fitted for the young and inexperienced fancier.
The breed known as Runts are characterised by their enormous size,
sometimes weighing even as much as four pounds or even four and a half
pounds a pair. But they do not fly well, and are more suited for pigeon
pies than for a fancier’s loft.
There are also the breeds known as Nuns, Spots, and Helmets, which are
white with more or less colour on the head, &c.; but for beauty of
marking none surpass those blue breeds that possess the arrangement of
colours in the plumage that characterises the original wild rock dove.
POULTRY.
FOWLS.
There are few occupations more attractive than the care and charge of
domestic poultry. It is most interesting to behold a hen with her
family, and to mark her care and tenderness for them; while to see the
little chicks themselves, picking and scratching about, basking in the
sun, or running hither and thither after the hen, or nestling under her
wings, is a very pleasant sight.
Like the pigeons, fowls are all descended from a single species of wild
bird, the common wild jungle fowl of India. This has been domesticated
from a very early period, and carried to all habitable parts of the
globe. A large number of different varieties exist in a domestic state,
none of which are known in the wild condition. The chief breeds known in
England at the present time are the Dorkings, Game, Spanish, Hamburghs,
Polish, Cochins, Brahmas, Malays, Bantams, Silky fowls, and the common
barn-door fowl, which is a very mongrel breed. The best known French
varieties are very valuable for economical purposes: they are Houdans,
Crève Cœurs, and the La Flèche breeds.
Fowls require both animal and vegetable food. When allowed to range at
large their great search is for worms and insects, which they obtain for
themselves. They must be supplied with grain, such as barley, oats, tail
wheat, &c.; and they should also be well furnished with raw vegetables,
grass, cabbage or lettuce leaves, unless they have a free range over the
fields. Boiled potatoes and other vegetables are also very serviceable
to them. The staple food should, however, be grain, and this may be
mixed with boiled potatoes. The quantity of barley for each fowl is
about a quart a week, if they are entirely fed by hand; but in barn or
stable yards they require much less. They should also always have a
plentiful supply of pure and clean water.
All fowls dependent upon man for food should be fed regularly twice or
thrice a day in the same place. The food should be given to them at
nearly the same hour--eight o’clock in the morning and four in the
afternoon, as in the spring and autumn birds retire early to roost, and
it is very bad management to call them from their perches for feeding.
Young chickens should be fed much more frequently if it is wished that
they should grow into fine, handsome birds.
FATTENING.
When fowls are to be fattened for the table, they must be fed oftener,
and with different descriptions of food, than when they are simply kept
for rearing stock or laying eggs. They then require ground barley or
oatmeal, which fattens them much quicker if mixed with milk. Indian corn
is also a capital fattener, and, as it is now cheap, may be used. Gross
food, made up of impure fat, grease, and flesh-food is very bad for
fowls. When fattening for the table, they should have their food three
times a day, at morning, noon, and evening; and they should be kept warm
and comfortable during the night.
Fowl houses should be warm and dry, and have compact earthen floors,
well raised, and littered down with gravel, from which the large stones
have been taken and the small ones left.
LAYING.
Nests (baskets or boxes) must be made for the hen, in which a chalk egg
or two should be put. The nests may be made of short straw. Some hens
will lay one egg every day, and others one every other day.
The eggs ought to be taken from the nest every afternoon, when no more
may be expected to be laid; for if left in the nest the heat of the
hens, when laying the next day, will render them less fit for domestic
use.
HATCHING.
When the hen has laid her number of eggs, nature has provided for their
being hatched by giving the bird an instinct to sit or incubate. This
instinct is made known by a particular sort of cluck, and by the hen
sitting steadily on the nest in which she has been in the habit of
laying.
In selecting the eggs to be sat upon by the hen, choose such as have
been recently laid, and not those of angular shape or extra size: the
latter are often double yolked, and rarely produce chickens.
The number of eggs to be hatched by the hen must in some degree depend
upon her size. A moderate-sized hen will very nicely cover eight or nine
eggs in the cold spring months, and twelve or thirteen in April or May.
An odd number is often chosen; but there is no advantage in so doing.
The hen having received her eggs may be then left to herself; she should
have water placed at a convenient distance, and her food may be given to
her near the place of sitting.
The hen sits on her eggs twenty-one days, during which period she seems
in a dozy state, and seems to require but little food or exercise. Some
hens will feed every day; but others will go for several days without
leaving the nest, or taking nourishment: these should be lifted off the
nest, and fed daily.
When chickens are hatching, which usually takes place twenty-one days
after the eggs are placed under the hen, it is best to leave them
entirely to themselves.
As soon as the hen becomes a mother, a great change is seen in her
character--all her former habits give way to maternal solicitude. A good
hen attends to her brood with the most persevering fondness; she will
attack the fiercest animal who dares to molest her progeny.
REARING OF CHICKENS.
When the chickens are hatched, they require no food till the following
day, when they may be fed with crumbs of bread slightly moistened with
milk, and egg beaten up with an equal quantity of milk, and then heated
so as to form a soft custard: this is the best food that can be given
them. They should also have a few grits, and after a few days some small
wheat.
If the weather is dry and warm, it is best not to coop the hens, as by
scratching they obtain a supply of insect food and worms for the chicks,
which is better than anything else that can be given them; but they
should not be let out in damp weather in long grass before the dew has
dried up. If cooped, the coop and hen should be placed in some nice dry
and sunny spot in the lawn or garden, within sight of the
dwelling-house, and where no cats are likely to prowl about. There
should be a little pan of water set within reach of the hen, near the
bars of the coop, and stones should be placed in it to prevent the young
brood from drowning themselves, and this water should be frequently
changed.
[Illustration]
The changes of weather should be watched, and when it sets in wet or
cold the young brood should be carefully protected by the removal of the
coop into some warm sheltered place, such as a stable, coach-house, or
outhouse; and so with care continue to be nursed, guarded, watched, and
attended to, till they are about seven weeks old, when they will of
themselves separate from their parent hen, take to the roost, and act
independently.
There is a great choice of breeds in the different varieties, and we
will state the advantages of each.
Dorkings are large heavy fowls, first-rate for the table, good sitters
and mothers: but rather delicate, require a good grass range, and do not
do well on damp soils.
Spanish are handsome fowls, lay numerous large eggs, do not sit; are not
so good for the table as the Dorkings, being longer in the limbs, and
not so fleshy.
Cochins and Brahmas are large domesticated fowls, very hardy; can be
kept in by a low fence; they are good layers, good sitters, good
mothers, and useful family fowls on the table.
Hamburghs are pretty, light, active, roaming fowls; they are called
everlasting layers, as they never wish to sit, but lay on incessantly,
except at moulting-time. They do not bear close confinement well, and
are difficult to keep in enclosed places, as they fly like pheasants,
and know not bounds.
The crested Polish, black, white, and spangled, are also non-sitters and
good layers; but they are not so hardy as the spangled Hamburghs.
Game are hardy, very fair layers, good sitters, the best of mothers;
plump on the table, though not very large; well able to take care both
of themselves and their chickens.
Bantams are pretty little pets, that may be suffered to roam about a
garden without doing any injury.
The French breeds--Houdans, Crève Cœurs, and La Flèche--are remarkable
for their good qualities as table fowls.
The White Silky fowls are a very singular breed, with divided feathers,
like wool or silk, black skins, and black bones. They have their good
points, however: they are admirable sitters and nurses, and bring up
young partridges and pheasants better than any other fowls. They are
also very good to eat, though their black skin renders them rather
unsightly on the table.
These varieties offer sufficient choice even to the most particular
amateur, who should make his selection in accordance with his wants and
his locality--according as he requires egg-producers or chickens for the
table, and whether he can afford his fowls the advantages of a free
range over green fields, or has to keep them in a confined space, near a
suburban residence.
THE PINTADO, OR GUINEA FOWL.
Guinea fowls associate readily with the common fowls in a poultry-yard;
but they have this peculiarity, that the cocks and hens are so nearly
alike that it is difficult to distinguish them, except by the voice, the
hens only uttering the constantly-reiterated cry of “Go back! Go back!”
The head is covered with a kind of casque, with wattles under the bill,
and the whole plumage is either black or dark grey sprinkled with
regular and uniform white spots. The pintado is a native of Africa.
These birds lay plenty of eggs, rather smaller than those of the common
hen, and speckled. They may be reared by placing the eggs under a hen;
but the chicks are extremely tender, and very often a sudden change of
the wind in March will sweep off a whole brood in a few hours. The young
should be fed with custard, &c., as ordered for fowls.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
DUCKS.
The common wild duck, or mallard, is the original stock of the
domesticated duck, and appears to have been reclaimed at a very early
period. The mallards come from the north of Europe, at the end of
autumn, and, migrating southward, arrive at the beginning of winter, in
large flocks, and spread themselves over all the loughs and marshy
waters in the British Isles.
The tame duck is a larger bird, and varies greatly in colour. Tame ducks
are easily reared: the best way to get them is to place duck’s eggs
under a hen, for the tame duck is often a careless mother; the hen, on
the contrary, generally hatches a duckling from every egg with which she
is entrusted. She does not conduct her young to the water, and generally
exhibits much anxiety when the young brood take to it; but she watches
over them, and is ever ready to defend them from danger. “The village
schoolboy,” as old Bewick says, “witnesses with delight the antic
movements of the little brood under the charge of a foster-mother, who
with anxious fears paddles upon the brink and utters her unavailing
cries or calls, while the ducklings, regardless of her warnings, and
rejoicing in the element so well adapted to their nature, are splashing
over each other beneath the pendant foliage, and diving their heads
beneath the water.”
[Illustration]
There are many varieties of the tame duck. One of those most in request
is the dark-coloured Rouen, which is very prolific in eggs. The
Aylesbury, or white variety, is large and profitable. The Muscovy duck
is a distinct species, and not a mere variety, much larger than the
common duck, and distinguished by a membrane of a red colour, covering
the cheeks and extending behind the eyes. There are also several other
foreign species, as the Mandarin and Carolina ducks, which are kept
rather for ornament than use.
Ducks sit for thirty days. They begin to lay in February, and when not
watched will lay abroad and conceal their eggs. They generally lay at
night, or very early in the morning. While sitting, the duck requires a
secluded and soft place. On hatching, she should be taken, with her
brood, and put under a coop; a shallow pan of water should be placed
near her for her drink and for that of the young ones, but it should be
very shallow. In a few days she may be let loose, when, with her brood,
she will immediately take to the water.
Young ducks should be fed upon oatmeal or barleymeal, and kept in a warm
place at night time, and not let out early in the morning. They should
at first be kept from water to swim in, as it always does them harm.
When the ducks grow large, they may be fed upon oats thrown into a pan
of water.
[Illustration: MUSCOVY DRAKE.]
THE RABBIT.
Of all domesticated animals dear to the British schoolboy’s heart the
rabbit is, perhaps, the most general favourite.
Rabbits may be kept simply as pets or curiosities, or as a commercial
speculation, and in either or all of these conditions they are sure to
answer the expectations of the owner, provided only that ordinary pains
be taken with them. As pets, they can be made tame, affectionate, and
playful; as curiosities, they can be modified, by careful breeding, into
the oddest shapes and most eccentric colouring; while, as a commercial
speculation, they can, with proper care and forethought, be rendered
extremely profitable, and will pay a heavy percentage on the original
outlay.
As an example of this fact we may mention the case of a young carpenter,
one of those steady, hardworking, intelligent men who are sure to get
on in the world, simply because they keep their eyes open to all that
passes, always watch for opportunities, and always seize them when
found. This man used to make a considerable addition to his income by
his rabbits, fattening and selling a large number annually, besides
steadily increasing his stock. He was ever watchful on their account,
and never went to a house where he was employed in his trade without
asking for the waste potatoes, crusts of bread, and similar substances,
which he used to take home and convert, by judicious mixture, into
nutritive diet for the rabbits.
As, however, there are but few boys who keep rabbits for the purpose of
making money by them, we will treat at greater length on their general
management than on the method of feeding them at the least cost and
selling them at the highest price.
Before rabbit-keeping is attempted it is necessary to prepare, very
carefully, a habitation for the future pet, and in the following pages
will be found full instructions for that task. It is hardly possible to
take too much trouble about the rabbit-house, and any abatement in this
respect is sure to prove the truth of the old proverb, that penny wisdom
is pound foolishness.
Two objects are to be considered in this matter; the first and most
important being the comfort and happiness of the creature who is
intended to live in the house, and the second the waste of time, money,
and patience, which the constant sickness and ultimate death of the
rabbit is sure to inflict upon a neglectful owner. So we advise the
intending rabbit-keeper to expend plenty of trouble upon his house or
hutch, and assure him that the healthy and thriving condition of his
pets will more than repay the trouble, and their rapidly-increasing
numbers more than defray the expenses originally incurred.
Should a single rabbit be at first kept--a good method, by the way, of
experimenting before undertaking the more arduous and responsible task
of setting up a regular establishment--a house or hutch like that which
is represented in the accompanying illustration will be all that is
needed.
[Illustration]
Such a one as this may be easily made by any boy of ordinary ingenuity,
as no great neatness in joints is needed, and the only requisites are
strength and compactness. Should not the young carpenter possess the
wood and tools needed for the entire construction of the hutch, his best
plan will be to purchase an old tea-chest or egg-box from the grocer’s,
and modify it into the necessary form. The box will cost about
fourpence, or sixpence at the most; the wire will cost a penny, and the
nails another penny.
If no tools can be borrowed, a boy can set himself up for ordinary work
at a very cheap rate, the following being all that is really needed:--
Saw, one shilling; hammer, eightpence; half-inch chisel, with handle,
sixpence; small three-cornered file, twopence; two bradawls, one large,
and the other rather small, twopence,--these will be without handles,
and the best way is to drive the “tang” of the bradawl into the end of a
stick of firewood, then cut the stick into a handle, shape it with a
knife, and bind the end with string or wire to prevent it from
splitting. These handles are just as useful as those which are
purchased, and have the advantage of costing nothing but a few minutes’
labour. The whole set of tools need not cost more than half-a-crown or,
at the most, three shillings.
As will be seen from the illustration, the hutch is divided into two
portions, that on the left hand being much the larger, and employed by
the rabbit as a day-room. That on the right is small, and is used as a
sleeping apartment. These two chambers are separated by a partition of
board, in which is cut a hole, through which the inmate can pass
backwards and forwards.
[Illustration]
As it is often necessary to confine the rabbit in either compartment
while the other is being cleansed, the aperture must be closed by means
of a sliding door drawn up and down through the roof, as seen at A. We
have found by experience that the purpose was fully answered by
substituting a strong iron wire for the wooden handle, and letting it
pass through the hole bored in the roof. We mention this, because it is
always best to know the simplest and easiest plan of proceeding. The
wire is firmly secured, as seen in the engraving. After cutting the
sliding door to the proper shape, bore a hole at _a_ with the little
bradawl. Sharpen one end of an iron wire (the same as that of which the
open front is made) and push it firmly into the hole. Now bend the wire
upwards, until it lies flat upon the wood, and then bend it over the
edge, as seen at _b_. Cut off an inch of wire, sharpen both ends, bend
them so as to form a staple, and drive the staple over the wire at b, so
as to hold it firmly in its place. Two small holes should be made with
the little bradawl in the proper direction, and the hammer must do the
rest. Bend up the wire again, cut it off to the proper length, and all
is ready for fixing, which is done as follows:--
Take the board which is to form the partition, and which is easiest made
from the lid of the box, and cut out a round, arched, or square hole
near the bottom, the hole being about an inch narrower every way than
the sliding door. Lay the door over the hole, and place on each side of
it a strip of wood a trifle thicker than the door. These slips are
technically called guides, because they guide the door in the right
direction: try whether the door will slide easily up and down them, and,
if so, nail them firmly in their places. Then get a second pair of
wooden slips, not so thick, but about half an inch wider than the first
pair; lay them on the guides so that they overlap the door, and then
nail them down. The door will then slide up and down when pulled or
pushed by the wire.
To make this part of the proceedings quite clear a section of the door
and slide is given below: _g_ represents the guides; _f_ the board and
their slips which overlap the door; and the door itself is shown by the
dotted lines _b_*. When fitted together the partition-board, with its
door and slides, is shown in the engraving. _a, a, a_ represents the
board itself; _b_ is the sliding door, and _c_ the wire by which it is
worked; _d_ is the hole of communication, which is opened or closed as
the door is moved up or down; which is here shown as half closed.
[Illustration]
The dividing-board being thus completed, mark the place where the wire
_c_ is to come through the roof, and bore a hole about half as large
again as the wire, so as to allow it to play freely. By the simple plan
of making a large nail or waste bit of wire red hot, and charring this
hole, the swelling by damp and consequent sticking of the wire will be
prevented.
All being ready, slip the dividing-board into the box, taking care to
insinuate the wire into its proper place, get it quite upright and
square, make sure that the sliding door plays without hitching, and then
nail it all tight. Bend the top of the wire into a loop, and the most
troublesome part of the business is over. The young carpenter must
remember that the dividing-board, with its sliding door, must be made
and fixed before anything else is done, as it not only strengthens the
box and keeps it in shape, but would demand twice as much trouble after
the door and front have been made.
We now come to an easier and more ornamental part of the work.
In the engraving both doors open from the front, the one being wired and
the other plain wood; but it is best to have the larger door open from
behind, as the wire-work is then twice as strong, and all the trouble of
making a hinged frame is dispensed with.
Put the box on the ground, and draw a line from one end to the other,
just half an inch from the edge. Mark the line off in half-inches, and
bore holes quite through the wood, one hole coming at every half-inch.
Repeat the same process immediately below, but be careful only to bore
the holes half through the wood, or the wire will of course fall
through.
Then cut your wire into lengths, measuring them by the depth of the box,
and cutting them about one-third of an inch shorter than the total
depth. Laying them against the end is a simple method of getting the
precise length. Sharpen one end of each piece of wire, push the
sharpened end through the hole at the top, draw the wire down, insinuate
the point into the hole below, and then, holding the middle of the wire
with the fingers of the left hand, in order to keep it from bending,
drive it down with the hammer until quite level with the top of the box.
When all the wires are thus driven home, nail a strip of wood over them
at the top, and they can never come out again.
It will be better to strengthen it further by passing a similar wire
horizontally across the others, driving each end into the wood, and
binding all together with fine wire. This will be a protection through
which not even a rat could crawl, and which no cat could tear away with
her hooked claws.
The door of the sleeping apartment is easily made of a single piece of
board, cut to the requisite shape, affixed by leathern or metal hinges,
and fastened by a simple hasp. The door of the day-room is made in a
similar manner, but opens from behind. A row of deep notches should be
cut at the bottom of this door, and corresponding holes bored through
the back of the sleeping-room floor, in order to let all the wet drain
away and keep the rabbit dry. The hutch should be made to slant a little
backwards so as to aid in the drainage.
Slate floors have been suggested, in order to prevent the ill-drained
moisture from soaking into the substance--a result which is sure to take
place, sooner or later, with a wooden floor. Slate, however, is rather
expensive, but it is easily cleaned, and can be thoroughly washed; so
that the suggestion is worthy of notice.
Having completed the hutch, we must next see about a feeding-trough. The
ordinary troughs are nothing more than long wooden boxes; those who use
them generally find that the food is much wasted by being scraped out
with the fore feet, and that the rabbit contracts a habit of sitting in
the trough, which, in course of time, renders it very offensive, and
makes the food unwholesome. But by a little exercise of ingenuity both
these annoyances can be prevented.
To check the scratching out of the food, run a strong wire from one end
of the trough to the other, about half an inch below the edge, and one
inch from the side. When the rabbit begins to scratch, the paws come
against the wire, and get so jarred that the creature soon relinquishes
the bad habit.
[Illustration]
The habit of squatting in the trough is easily prevented by a very
simple plan. A strong wire, about three or four inches long, according
to the depth of the trough, is set upright in the centre. Another wire
is arranged as seen in the illustration, the ends being driven firmly
into the wood of the trough, and the middle passing through a loop at
the end of the central wire. In the engraving, _a_ represents the wire
which prevents the animal from scratching, and _b_ that which keeps it
from getting into the trough. The edges, whether of the trough, the
sliding door, or the guides, must be either bound with tin or edged with
zinc wire, the latter being rather preferable.
The reader will observe that in the engraving of the hutch it is shown
standing on a table, the top of which projects far beyond the legs. The
object of this precaution is to keep off rats, which are the bane of all
rabbit-owners, and can climb up almost anything. They, cannot, however,
walk like a fly, in a reversed position, on a flat surface, and in
consequence, a projecting board of five or six inches in width is an
effectual protection against these pests.
The hutch is easily kept clean by attending to each apartment
separately. First close the sliding door, so as to confine the rabbit in
the apartment in which it happens to be, and with a hoe or similar
implement scrape the floor quite clean, afterwards rubbing it with a
wisp of straw. Take care that every scrap of refuse food has been
removed. Then close the outer door, open the slide, drive the rabbit
into the clean apartment, close the slide, and scrape and rub the second
chamber.
The trough should be removed when the day-room is cleaned, and
carefully examined before it is replaced. The hutch being clean, the
slide may be opened, and the animal allowed to run about. The hutch
should be cleansed at least every day, and if a second cleaning be added
it will not come amiss. This continual cleaning will involve some
trouble; but no one ought to keep a rabbit who neglects this essential
duty, or to undertake the charge of an animal unless he intends to make
it as happy as it can be in a state of imprisonment. A supply of straw
should be placed in the sleeping-room for a bed, and should be changed
daily.
If possible, the rabbit should be allowed to take a half-hour’s run
every day; but precautions must be taken against its burrowing habits
and the chance of finding and eating something poisonous. In the wild
state, a rabbit never eats anything that is injurious, but when
domesticated many of its instincts are in abeyance, and it will eat many
substances which it would reject when wild.
The best defence against burrowing is to have a brick floor for the
animal to run about on. There is also a substance called, I believe,
Parker’s cement, which, when laid down, becomes rapidly dry, and is so
hard that not even the teeth of a rat, much less the claws of a rabbit,
can work their way through it. This cement is mixed with water and sand
to the consistency of thick cream, and while settling is “flatted” with
boards, and makes an admirable level flooring, easily washed and as hard
as stone. On this substance the rabbit can be allowed to amuse itself
without danger, and when its time of recreation has expired it should be
caught and replaced in its hutch.
We may here mention that the proper method of taking up a rabbit is to
hold it by the ears with the right hand, and to support the body by
placing the left hand under it.
Should a number of rabbits be kept, it is as well to allow each family
to have a run in succession. It is very pretty to see the playful antics
of the young rabbits, the races they run with each other, the scufflings
they have in the corners, and the staid manner in which the mother sits
and looks on, and when they become too noisy silences them by a stamp of
her foot.
This gesture is used either as a signal of alarm or defiance, and the
force of the rabbit’s hind foot is really astonishing. We have known a
buck rabbit vanquish a large cat in a fair fight simply by jumping over
her back and kicking fiercely as he passed. He struck out whole bunches
of pussy’s fur, and the cat, unaccustomed to such treatment, ran away
and left her antagonist victorious and triumphant.
It is necessary to separate the rabbits in their exercise, and not to
permit two families to occupy the same ground at the same time, as they
are very quarrelsome animals, and will fight desperately among
themselves. In any case the buck rabbits should not be allowed to mix
with the others, for they are terrible bullies, and will assault and
kill even their own children, without the least remorse. When properly
tended, the rabbit becomes quite tame and familiar, and will come to its
owner at the sound of its name.
The food of rabbits is easily obtained, and consists of bran, pollard,
grain, and various vegetables. Parsley is an especial favourite, but
cabbage leaves should be avoided as far as possible, as they are apt to
have a bloating and puffy effect, and are often injurious, especially to
young rabbits, giving them the disorder that is well known under the
expressive term of “potbelly.”
The following is a list of vegetables which rabbits can always eat in
safety:--
Grasses of the finer sorts--the coarse, large-bladed grasses are not to
a rabbit’s taste--lettuce, parsley, carrots and their green tops,
turnip-tops, green ears of corn, sow or milk thistles, clover, tares,
vetches, beet-root and leaves, vine leaves occasionally, green furze
tops, potatoes, and Jerusalem artichokes. Cow-parsley, as it is
popularly called (_Myrrhis temulenta_), is a very favourite vegetable
with the rabbit: but unless the gatherer is perfectly acquainted with
its form and leafage, he will be wise to leave it standing; for it
marvellously resembles the common hemlock (_Conium maculatum_), which is
extremely poisonous; and unless the two plants be thoroughly known, the
rabbit may be poisoned through the mistaken kindness of the owner.
As this plant is a really valuable one, we will give a few simple and
plain directions for distinguishing it from hemlock.
Cow-parsley is about three feet in height, the leaves are greatly
branched, and the stem is ribbed, spotted with purple, and covered with
numerous short hairs slightly bent downwards. The hemlock in general
shape resembles the cow-parsley, but it may be known by the smooth
reddish purple spots and its unpleasant smell when the leaves are
grasped in the hand.
Various dry grains, such as barley, oats, and Indian corn, are useful to
the rabbit; and dry peas are also beneficial if sparingly given when the
creature has been partaking largely of green food. Very little water is
needed; but it is better to put into the hutch a small pan with a few
spoonfuls of water in it. A very little oil-cake is useful in the
winter. At first the rabbits do not like it, but they soon become
accustomed to its taste, and are then very fond of it.
Before proceeding to the mode of breeding rabbits, we will glance at the
varieties into which these creatures are modified by careful management.
The three chief points in a “fancy” rabbit are the ears, the dewlap, and
the curve of the back.
The ears must in every case be exceedingly long, and must never stand
upright, as in the common rabbit of the warren. The most perfect and
valuable form is the Full, Flat, or Perfect Lop. In this variety the
ears lie as if hinged to the head at their bases, and bent downward, so
that when the animal is reposing the tips should quite or nearly touch
the ground. The convex part of the ear must be upwards, or the value of
the creature is deteriorated.
The next valuable variety is termed the Oar-Lop, because the ears spread
horizontally from the head, like the oars of a waterman’s boat. A really
good Oar-Lop rabbit is seldom seen, and when found is thought by some to
be equal to the Perfect Lop, of which, indeed, it seems to be the
preliminary stage. In all cases the measurement across the ears from tip
to tip ought never to be less than sixteen inches; the more they exceed
that measurement, the more valuable is the animal.
[Illustration: PERFECT-LOP RABBIT.]
[Illustration: OAR-LOP RABBIT.]
The Horn-Lop is another very curious variety, deriving its name from the
position of the ears, which fall completely over the face, with their
points directed to the front. In some specimens they fall so completely
over the face that the edges pass over the eyes, and must act as a
partial barrier to perfect sight, like the leather blinkers that are so
absurdly attached to draught horses.
[Illustration: HORN RABBIT.]
The lopped ears do not show themselves when the rabbit is young, and for
the first month or two it is not easy to decide whether the little
creatures belong to the straight or the lop-eared variety. Moreover, it
often happens that one or two of each family retain the upright ears
throughout their whole existence; and it is of not unfrequent occurrence
that the “lop” is delayed for a very long time, and then suddenly makes
its appearance. Sometimes one ear will exhibit the lop most perfectly,
while the other remains upright or very slightly bent. Some fanciers
attach a piece of lead to the recusant ear in order to make it coincide
with the other, but we do not agree with the practice. The ear never
looks quite natural, and as the rabbit will have or, as the phrase is,
throw young ones with perfect lops, it may be kept for breeding if a
doe; if a buck, it can be fattened for the table.
The second point of interest is the dewlap, the large double pouch which
is seen under the chin and throat, and which is peculiar to the fancy
rabbit. If the dewlap be not large and full, with its two lobes well
developed, and sufficiently firm to form a cushion for the head while
the animal reclines, the rabbit will be thought worthless by fanciers.
The shape of the fancy rabbit is very different from that of the common
variety. It is altogether on a larger scale, and the back rises so much,
that its summit ought to be two inches higher than the top of the head.
The colour, again, is very important. It may be white, black, mottled,
tortoiseshell, blue, and in fact any colour except the plain grey.
Whatever it be, it must be arranged after a special position. On each
side of the nose must be a patch of the darker colour of the body,
forming what is called the “butterfly smut.” A large patch on the back
is called the “saddle,” and a row of spots termed the “chain” is drawn
in front of the body and seems to hang over the shoulder. The legs must
be white, and the tail and snout of the same colour.
Very few rabbits possess all these qualities; but even the combined
excellences of smut, chain, and saddle will fail to gain a high rank for
any rabbit which does not possess a good “carriage,” _i. e._ whose back
is not at least two inches above its head, and whose nose and ear-tips
do not nearly touch the ground. Some writers say that the fancy rabbits
are more delicate of health and less easy to rear than the common
variety; but we have bred many families of them, and never found any
difficulty in rearing them. Their superior size renders them valuable
for culinary purposes, and, as out of every family the greater number
are deficient in the requisite marks of a fancy rabbit, the table can be
well supplied with these fat and well-flavoured creatures.
The last variety we shall mention is the beautiful Angola rabbit,
remarkable for its long silken hair, a speaking likeness of which may be
seen in Landseer’s wonderful picture of Titania.
We will now devote a few words to the breeding of rabbits.
The rabbit will breed at a very early age, _i. e._ from eight months
upwards; but those who want healthy young ought not to allow the rabbits
to breed before they are one year old, or after they have completed
their fourth year. The buck and doe should be always kept in different
hutches, out of each other’s sight, and only allowed to remain together
for a very short time. The rabbit usually breeds four times in the year,
or even oftener; but as a general rule it is not advisable to allow more
than three breeds in the year.
When the doe rabbit feels the time approaching for her young to be born,
she begins to bite in little pieces the hay of her bed, and when she
does so a supply of very fine soft hay should be placed within her
reach. She then pulls this together in her sleeping-chamber, and mixes
it with downy fur plucked from her own body, ready for the reception of
the expected family.
It is as well to put a pan of water within reach, as the animal
generally thirsts after the young are born, and unless she can get at
water, is apt to eat the young merely on account of the moisture. One of
my own rabbits acted in a very odd manner. She called to one of her
family, telling it to come to her. The disobedient child refused, and
the mother accordingly seized it by one ear and dragged it along.
Unfortunately, she pulled so hard in one direction, and the young one
pulled so hard in the other, that the ear was fairly dragged from the
head. The mother treated the matter very easily, ate the severed ear,
caught hold of the other, and succeeded in reducing her offspring to
obedience.
While engaged in maturing her young, the mother requires a very ample
supply of food, eating nearly twice as much as at other times. She must
have plenty of green food, and a mash of barley meal and milk will be
found beneficial. For the first week or ten days the door of the
sleeping-room should not be opened, as the mother-rabbit is very jealous
of her young, and if they are handled, or even looked at, will sometimes
eat them. This is a terrible habit, and if a rabbit once act in that
manner, provided that she is well supplied with food and drink, the best
plan is to fatten her for the table.
The young are suckled for about five weeks, when the mother weans them,
and they learn to eat tender grass-blades, and other green food. If the
family be very large, there is sure to be at least one small and weakly
among the number. This should be removed and destroyed, so as to ensure
that only the strong and healthy are reared.
There are several diseases to which domestic rabbits are liable, but
these ailments are nearly all caused through negligence; and in a really
well-appointed and carefully-tended rabbitry a sickly animal is hardly
ever seen.
Except in the case of valuable fancy animals, the trouble and expense of
attempting the cure of a diseased rabbit are so great, that few will
find themselves repaid, even by the recovery of the invalid. Recovery,
however, is so very dubious, that in almost every case it is cheaper and
more humane to kill the animal at once, which is performed
instantaneously and painlessly by holding the creature up by the hind
legs, and with the edge of the right hand striking it a sharp blow
behind the ears. Let the young rabbit-keeper rest assured, that if one
of his pets should fall ill, the sickness will in ninety-nine cases out
of a hundred be chargeable to some negligence of his own.
THE RAVEN.
All the members of the Crow tribe have a decided family likeness; and,
as a general fact, the relationship can be recognised as long as they
belong to the British species. But as there are several foreign birds
which bear a decided resemblance to this tribe, though really belonging
to other families, it is needful to give a few hints as to the method by
which these may be distinguished. The young observer must look first at
the beak, then at the wings, and lastly at the legs. In all these birds
the beak is strong and conical, arched on the keel, _i. e._ the ridge
along the upper surface, with the sides rather flattened as far as the
tip. The nostrils are set at the base of the beak, and hidden by plumes.
The wings are never very large, and mostly pointed. The tarsi, _i. e._
the long, straight leg-bones, are of moderate length, and covered with
strong, shield-like scales.
The British representatives of this large family are the carrion crow,
the rook, the Royston or hooded or grey crow, the chough, the raven, the
jackdaw, the jay, and the magpie.
The Raven, once so plentiful over England, is now nearly extinct, except
in some of the wild uncultivated districts, where it still lingers,
uttering its hoarse, loud cry, flapping its broad wings, and committing
no small havoc among the young or feeble animals that have the
misfortune to dwell in its neighbourhood.
To procure a raven is now a difficult task, and can seldom be
accomplished except by giving an order to the regular dealers. We do not
advise any of our young readers to possess themselves of a raven unless
they have ample space for the bird, and are quite certain that it cannot
get into any mischief. Either a magpie, a jay, or a jackdaw, seems to be
possessed with an incessant spirit of mischief, but the raven seems to
have enough for the three, and as it possesses enormous muscular power
and irrepressible audacity, it is a peculiarly unsafe inmate of a house
or garden.
For our own part, we have been for some months undecided whether we
shall have a raven or not. We should greatly like to possess one of
these birds, but then we know that he would pull up all our newly-sown
seeds, bully our cat, peck the servants’ heels, get into the milk-pail,
tear our papers to pieces, and, in short, spoil everything within his
reach. We could, of course, chain him up, and clip his wings, or put him
into a metal cage, but we think all such proceedings to be needlessly
cruel, especially in the case of a bird like the raven, whose instinct
teaches it to roam far and wide, and whose opportunities of exercise
ought never to be confined to the limited space comprehended by a chain
or a cage.
When treated properly, the raven possesses a very mine of amusing and
companionable qualities, at all events to those who treat it kindly, and
whom it does not suspect of any intention to injure. It is a capital
talker, equalling the parrot in that respect, except that the voice is
very gruff and low, as if spoken from under a feather bed.
The raven is not long in taking the measure of its companions, and has a
supreme contempt for those who display weakness of mind or resources.
Nothing seems to make a raven so happy as frightening somebody. He likes
to come quietly behind a nervous person, deliver a heavy _dab_ at the
ankle with his iron bill, and then walk away as if he knew nothing about
the assault. He will frighten dogs half out of their senses, chase the
cats, drive the fowls about, and as to the horses, he mostly takes a
fancy to them, sitting on their backs, or walking calmly and
deliberately among their legs. Indeed the raven always has a great
affection for stable life. He likes to saunter in and out of the stalls,
to flap his way from one horse to another, to peck at strangers, to
patronise the helpers, to be on speaking terms with the grooms, and, we
regret to say, has a strange talent for picking up all the evil language
which is too often found in and about the stable-yard.
He encourages the presence of dogs and cats, because he always steals
their dinners; and if he can find an opportunity of making a sly raid
upon the luncheon of a groom, he is sure to seize it. He becomes the
patriarch of the yard, and stands by his dignity as such. He _won’t_
die, but lives on, year after year; sees successive generations of
horses, grooms, and proprietors pass away, and seems to despise them for
not living as long as himself. Time seems to have little power with him.
His feathers take a greyer hue when he is a century or two old, but in
disposition he remains ever young, malicious, crafty, active, quaint,
and voracious.
He will eat anything, and can be taught to devour the most remarkable
substances, provided that he thinks them very valuable, and not intended
for food. Raw meat is perhaps his favourite diet, and he is greatly
pleased with rats, mice, small birds, fat beetles, big grubs or worms,
and similar delicacies. But he will eat bread when he cannot get meat;
and if he can only be got to believe that the article is extremely
valuable, he will make a breakfast on a newspaper or a shirt-collar.
He can be easily induced to swallow even a black-lead pencil or a
pocket-handkerchief, by a very simple process. Drop the article as if
accidentally, search for it anxiously, go away without seeming to see
it, and hardly will your back be turned when the raven will have
snatched up the missing article and conveyed it to his storehouse.
If watched from a spot where the observer cannot be seen, he will be
noticed to proceed in a very methodical manner. He will first pick up
his prize, and walk about solemnly with it in his beak, as if displaying
a captured trophy of war. He will then put his foot on it, seize one
corner of the paper or handkerchief in his beak, and deliberately tear
it into strips, which he will probably swallow. As to the pencil, he
pegs at it with the point of his beak at a wonderful pace, making the
splinters fly in all directions, and ever and anon looking round, to see
that no one is watching him.
Clever as is the raven, and intelligent beyond the wont of birds, his
very superiority in this respect often has the effect of rendering him a
victim to superior powers. There is scarcely any bird that can be hoaxed
more readily than a raven, or that can be “drawn out” with greater ease.
Those who humour his ways can make a perfect puppet of him, and induce
him to play most undignified antics, without giving him the least idea
how thoroughly he is being imposed upon.
Our last advice is that, unless the reader can afford plentiful space
for his bird, and assure it a kind treatment, he will act wisely not to
attempt to procure a raven. Should, however, he be able to afford it
these necessaries of existence, by all means let him procure one of
these most amusing birds.
Ravens require scarcely any trouble, and when they have fairly
established themselves, will not desert their homes under any
circumstances. They ought to be fed once, and once only, _per diem_, for
they will find plenty of insects, worms, and other little delicacies,
without giving any trouble. They should always be furnished with a place
of retreat into which they can retire whenever they feel tired of the
world, and they like the hermitage to be deep, dark, and warm, sheltered
from wind and rain, and out of the way of inquisitive eyes.
Finally, a raven is an excellent judge of character, and if he is really
appreciated, he will become a firm and faithful friend.
[Illustration]
SILKWORMS.
“The proudest king
May thank the silkworm for his robe of state.”--AKENSIDE.
The rearing and management of silkworms is an innocent and agreeable
pastime both to boys and girls, and it is very interesting in many
points of view. One fact is, that while the caterpillars of all the
other tribes of moths and butterflies, when they have arrived at a
certain state of maturity, show a restless disposition, and wander about
and hide themselves in a variety of places in order to spin their
cocoons, the silkworm, on the contrary, is content to remain stationary
in the open tray or box in which it may be placed. After consuming its
immediate supply of mulberry leaves, it waits for a further quantity,
and when the period arrives for spinning its cocoon, instead of showing
any migratory disposition, it seems to place itself with confidence
under the care of man to provide it with a suitable place for its
convenience and protection.
The silkworm is systematically known under the name of the _Bombyx Mori_
of Linnæus, or the Mulberry-tree Moth, which in the winged state is of a
cream colour, with several transparent bands of a darker colour across
the anterior wings and a crescent-shaped central mark. The caterpillar
when full grown is nearly three inches in length, and is too well known
to our young friends to need any particular description. The eggs when
good are of a pale slate or dark lilac colour; they may be purchased in
Covent Garden market for about ten shillings per ounce; and care should
be taken to obtain them of a proper colour, because those that are of a
pale yellow are imperfect.
The silkworm when first hatched is black, and does not exceed in length
one-fourth of an inch. The desire for food is the first symptom it
exhibits of life, and at this period it is more active than at any
other. When about eight days have elapsed after its hatching, its head
becomes considerably enlarged, and it turns sick, refuses food, and
remains in a state of lethargy for about three days. This sickness would
appear to arise from the pressure of the animal’s skin, which has become
too tight for the increased bulk of its body. Indeed, the very great
difference in the size of the worm from the beginning to the end of the
caterpillar state is so great, that Nature has furnished it with several
skins, each of which it casts in succession.
[Illustration]
The body of the caterpillar is begirt by twelve rings, which approach to
or recede from each other according to its motion; there are nine
breathing-holes on each side of the body, seven eyes on each side of the
head, and two small orifices below the jaws, through which the worm
ejects its silken filament.
The art of using this filamentous substance seems to have originated
with the Chinese, and to have been discovered at a very early period,
and the raw material was purchased by the Persians, Tyrians, and Indians
for a long time before it was introduced into Europe. For many ages silk
bore an enormous price at Rome, but about the middle of the sixth
century two monks arrived at Constantinople from India, bringing with
them the white mulberry and the eggs of the silkworm, which have since
been reared in Italy, Spain, France, and other parts of Europe.
FOOD OF THE SILKWORM.
The silkworm feeds, as every one knows, on the leaves of the white
mulberry; or, when these cannot be obtained, upon those of the black
mulberry; or, in lieu of these, upon the leaves of the common garden
lettuce. The white mulberry is especially cultivated for the value of
its leaves, its fruit being insipid and very inferior to that of the
common species, the leaves of which are equally good in this country for
the food of the silkworm. There has been a variety lately introduced
from the Philippine Isles (_Morus multicaulis_), which has larger
leaves, and which is easily propagated by cuttings put into a cucumber
frame in October, and transplanted in the following May; yet, still, to
ensure success in the rearing of silkworms the young naturalist should
stick to the old black mulberry, as such trees are to be found in
various vicinities. To propagate this, a branch from another tree may be
set in the earth, which will frequently grow. The amiable Sir John
Philipport of Hammersmith, so celebrated for his “Elysian groves and
fountains fair,” and for his sterling English qualities, has in his
grounds a fine mulberry-tree, which he reared by placing a very loose
branch in the ground in the autumn of 1850, which threw out roots, and
started at once into a tree. The story of a gate-post made of a mulberry
trunk becoming, and now remaining, a fruitful tree, is well
authenticated. The leaves to be used should be those of a large and
well-grown, prolific tree, and they should be gathered with care, so
that the young buds of future leaves should in no way be injured;
moreover, a tree should never be stripped twice in a year.
HATCHING, FEEDING, AND TEMPERATURE.
[Illustration]
Having procured the eggs, which should be obtained about the latter end
of April--they are generally bought on slips of paper just as they were
laid by the moth--they should be placed in trays made of stout cartridge
or thin pasteboard of the form seen in the cut, and there should be
provided to go over the case some thin gauze. The trays may be placed in
a window facing the south, where they are fully exposed to the rays of
the sun; there they should remain undisturbed till they begin to hatch;
and as the young worms appear they should be removed into other trays,
and fed with the mulberry leaves. The temperature should be regulated
from sixty-six to seventy degrees, and the room ventilated, and
preserved equally free from damp or too much dryness. They should be
kept particularly clean, dead leaves and dung cleared carefully away,
and in lifting them from one tray to another they should not be touched
by the fingers, but removed by threads of cotton passed under their
bodies, or with a camel’s-hair pencil.
MOULTINGS.
The caterpillar has four moultings, which may be all accomplished in the
period of four days each, if the heat of the room be increased to from
ninety-five to one hundred degrees of Fahrenheit. When the heat is
regulated to a lower standard, the first moulting takes place on the
fourth or fifth day after hatching, the second in four days more, the
third in five or six days more, and the last in about eight days. Ten
days more are required after this moulting, so that in about thirty-two
days after hatching the caterpillar has attained its full size. During
all these changes of the worm it requires the nicest attention.
[Illustration]
THE COCOON.
At the end of the time mentioned above the worms change to a clear pink
or flesh colour, and look semi-transparent; they refuse their food,
become restless, and prepare to spin or form their cocoon. At this time
care should be taken to raise the walls of their tray habitation, or
they will climb over them and be lost. What is called the cocoon nest
should now be prepared by twisting the corners of a piece of
writing-paper, and raising its edges into the form of the lower shell of
an oyster. A number of these should be prepared and affixed to a piece
of tape, with their pointed ends downwards; and into each one a single
worm should be placed when it quits its food, and seems ready to spin:
it will then dispose its web in such a manner as to leave a cavity
within.
The cocoon consists of three distinct layers of silk: the first is loose
and flossy, and is unserviceable for the silk manufacture; the second is
closer, the silk crossing from side to side; and the third is still
finer, and is glued strongly together, so as to form a compact inner
coating.
THE AURELIA.
When the cocoon is completed, the enclosed caterpillar again casts its
skin, with the head and jaws attached to it, when it appears under the
form of a conical chrysalis of the ordinary shape. At first the
chrysalis, when opened, exhibits only a yellowish fluid, but by degrees
the various parts of the future moth appear, and in about a fortnight or
three weeks a slight swelling of the chrysalis indicates the approach of
another change; a rupture down its back succeeds, and by degrees the
moth bursts through its horny coating into the hollow chamber of the
cocoon, and if left to itself would soon eat its way out.
[Illustration]
WINDING THE SILK.
The chrysalis, however, must be prevented from eating through the
cocoon; and previous to the egress of the moth from its aurelian state,
the silk must be wound off. When, by taking up the cocoon, it is found
that the caterpillar has passed into the aurelian state--which may
easily be known by shaking it, as then the aurelia, from its harder
texture and shrunken size, will be heard to rattle--then it is time to
wind off the silk. The cocoon is placed in a cup of warm water, after
the loose outward silk has been removed, and then, an end being taken,
the whole continuous filament may be wound off on a piece of card. The
length of the thread of a cocoon varies from 600 to 1,000 feet; yet the
whole does not weigh more than three grains and a half. An ounce of eggs
will produce about 40,000 caterpillars, which will consume 1,073 lbs. of
leaves, and produce from 80 lbs. to 100 lbs. of cocoon, or about eight
pounds of raw silk.
[Illustration]
THE MOTH.
When the silk is wound off the aurelia presents itself, and being put in
a separate case, it remains motionless for about twenty days, when
suddenly it appears as a pale yellow moth, with wings which seem
scarcely adapted for flight. It crawls heavily about the place where it
has been hatched, having a slight tremor in its wings, and eats
nothing: the male speedily dies; the females hover about a while without
flying, and lay their eggs on the slips of paper presented to them for
that purpose. They then soon perish. The female moth generally produces
about 300 or 400 eggs.
[Illustration: THE MOTH.]
GENERAL REMARKS.
The place where silkworms are bred, should persons wish to pursue their
rearing upon a larger scale, must be free from noisome smells, cattle,
and all noises. Persons attending them must be scrupulously clean in
their persons, and wash themselves after every meal. Great attention
must also be paid to the temperature of the apartment in which they are
kept, which must also be free from all dust or smoke; and the most
thoughtful and tender care is requisite in everything connected with
their treatment and management.
[Illustration]
THE SQUIRREL.
The pretty little squirrel has long held a high place in the affections
of pet-lovers, and there are few who have not admired the brisk lively
movements, the full intelligent eye, and the soft bushy tail of this
creature. To possess a tame squirrel is often a legitimate object of boy
ambition, not unfrequently shared by their elders. In order to give our
readers a few hints as to the procuring, management, and taming of this
pretty playmate, we offer the following suggestions.
The first care of every intending possessor of a squirrel should be to
prepare a comfortable home for the expected guest, so that the little
creature may find its first association with captive life as agreeable
as it can be made. In point of fact, the young naturalist should try to
give to the squirrel’s future home the greatest possible resemblance to
the native domicile.
The very best house for a squirrel is an unused room, fitted up with
strong tree-branches, and furnished with a cosy little box, filled with
hay and dry mosses, by way of a bedchamber. As, however, such
accommodation is not readily found, we will just describe the mode of
making a very strong, sightly, and cleanly cage, at a comparatively
small expense, and possessing the advantage of coming to pieces when
needed, and being packed flat like a portfolio for removal. It will be
much cheaper than a purchased cage, quite as handsome, and more easily
cleansed.
[Illustration: FIG. 1.]
Make, or, if you are not a good workman, get a carpenter to make, a
shallow wooden tray about two inches deep, lined with tin, which should
be turned fairly over the edges, or sundry difficulties will appear in
course of time. (See fig. 1.) Then go to a wire-worker’s, and order him
to make two frames of galvanized iron wire, like fig. 2, and two more
like fig. 3, each being about half an inch shorter than the interior
length and width of the tray, into which they are intended to fit
easily. Also have another piece of similar wire made large enough to
bend over the arched tops of the end-pieces, so as to make a roof like
the transepts of the Crystal Palace. The edges of the side and
end-pieces should be very stout, but those of the roof only moderately
strong, or it will not bend easily. It will be better to have a square
opening at each end, which should be closed by a door of similar
materials. As this wirework will be of coarse manufacture, and have
tolerably wide intervals, the cost will be very moderate.
[Illustration: FIG. 2.]
After these frames have been procured, fit them together, and fasten
them by twisting bits of wire round the edges at intervals of three
inches or so. Put this frame into the tray, and the cage is complete.
The staples at the ends are useful for receiving the hooked end of a
slight iron rod, looped at the other end to the edging-wire, as seen in
fig. 4. These rods act as braces to keep the whole structure firm, and
also hold it down to the tray. Some suitable sticks or branches should
be fastened to the wires, as the squirrel is fond of playing about on
them.
This is the day-room of the squirrel, and its bedroom is merely a
proper-sized box, with wire-work substituted for the wooden bottom, a
hinged lid, and a hole cut in one end. This should be supported on four
legs; a nail at each corner (not a brass-headed nail) will answer the
purpose perfectly well. This box is simply placed in the tray at the
back of the cage. If it can be managed, a duplicate tray will be
exceedingly convenient, as the cage needs the extremest cleanliness, and
can be simply purified by changing the tray every morning, washing very
carefully the one just removed, and leaving it in the air till the next
day. A duplicate sleeping-box will be equally serviceable. The box
should be furnished with perfectly clean hay, mosses, lichens, &c.
[Illustration: FIG. 3.]
[Illustration: FIG. 4.]
The cage should never be less than two feet long, two high, and one foot
wide. All should be thus particular about the size of the cage, because
we hold it to be a cruel deed to take an active little creature like the
squirrel from its fields and wide woods, where it can sport at will over
unlimited space, and coop it up in a close, evil-smelling, little cage,
where its only exercise can be obtained by driving a wheel round, and
its wonderful faculty of leaping wholly checked. How much wheel-work
would the squirrel do if it had the choice of a tree or a wheel for its
exercise? Even in a cage, provided it be of a proper size, the little
creature would not trouble itself to get into a wheel, but prefer
clambering about the wires, and jumping from one side to another, in the
exuberance of its activity.
Many persons assert that the squirrel is quite fond of the wheel, and
delights in driving it; but they forget that the poor little creature is
driven to that as its last resource for needful exercise; and it no more
delights in pulling a wire wheel than the caged lion and tiger delight
in their restless pacing of their dens.
The exercise of the powers with which it is so liberally gifted is
essential to the health of the squirrel, and its health must suffer if
it be not permitted to leap. Look at it in a tree, and just see what
astonishing jumps the pretty creature takes; how it will spring fairly
from the ground to the trunk of a tree, making a jump of some six or
seven feet in length and four in height; how it gallops up the
perpendicular stem, with its tail laid behind it, like a fox’s brush;
how it scuttles up the branches, always contriving to keep the bough
between itself and the spectator; and then how, when it has arrived at
the topmost branch, and considers itself safe, it sits up in its own
charmingly impertinent position, spreads its tail over its head, and
looks down with a calmly supercilious contempt on the clumsy two-legged
animal below, who cannot run up a tree, and has no bushy tail for a
parasol.
No one who has once witnessed this sight could ever be guilty of such a
cruel act as penning up a squirrel in a small cage, where it has no room
to perform its pretty tricks; and if the reader cannot furnish his pet
with a proper house, we earnestly dissuade him from keeping a squirrel
at all.
Having prepared the house, the next business is to procure the
inhabitant. Be ever wary of those wandering dealers who carry a squirrel
about for sale in their arms, stroke its head, and put their fingers to
its mouth to show its tameness. In almost every case the man is a cheat,
and in many instances a cruel one.
The apparent tameness of some of these little creatures is caused by a
small dose of strychnine, which renders the animal dull and spiritless,
and is generally fatal in the course of a day or two; so that the
disappointed purchaser finds his pet dead and stiff at the bottom of its
cage before he has possessed it for many hours. Some of these men are
said to employ a preparation of opium for the same purpose.
In cases where these impostors wish to sell an old and cross-grained
squirrel as a gentle, young one, they pull out its front teeth, so that
the poor creature not only cannot bite, but feels such pain in its jaws
that it recoils whenever the cruel owner puts his finger to its mouth as
a proof of its good education and gentle disposition. As all rodent
animals depend solely on their beautifully-formed and chisel-shaped fore
teeth for their subsistence, the unfortunate squirrel is unable to eat,
and dies miserably of hunger.
Taking warning, therefore, of these hints, let every intending purchaser
of a squirrel be very wary respecting the seller, and examine the
squirrel’s eye, to see if it be bright and lively, and its mouth, to see
if the teeth be perfect. The age of the squirrel may also be known by
its teeth: if young, they are nearly white; if old, of a deep yellow.
Squirrels when taken after they have reached their full age are nearly
always vicious and ill-tempered.
The best way, therefore, to obtain a good squirrel is either to order it
from a respectable dealer, who will be sure to supply a young and
healthy animal, or to be independent of dealers, and take the creature
out of the nest.
For this purpose the young naturalist should go into the woods about the
middle of summer, and look carefully among the branches for the home of
the squirrel, called either a “cage” or a “drey,” according to the
locality. The nest is made on the exterior of leaves and fine twigs, and
lined with moss, lichens, and similar soft substances. There are two
kinds of nests, one used in summer and the other in winter. The winter
nest is very carefully concealed, being placed at the junction of
several large branches with the trunk, so as to shield it from prying
eyes below, the blasts of the keen winter wind, and to support its large
dimensions.
The summer cage, on the contrary, is not so carefully concealed, but is
placed upon a considerable elevation, and often upon boughs so slender
that they bend in a most alarming manner beneath the weight. Still, it
often happens that a nest can be reached without danger, in which may be
found one or two young squirrels of just the proper age.
When captured at an early age, the squirrel often becomes extremely tame
and confiding, and will play with its owner as if they had both lived in
the same nest. It is a pretty sight to witness the gambols of a squirrel
with its human playfellow, to see the active little animal jump on the
shoulders, run all over the body, perch on the head, poke its wise
little head into a pocket, and then with a quick dive of the ready paw
bring out a nut, which it straightway cracks and eats as merrily as if
in its native woods. Such a sight is pleasant for many reasons; not the
least being that it proves the kindly disposition of the boy with whom a
squirrel, though naturally timid, will thus fearlessly play, and it
gives promise of more extended sympathies when he attains to riper years
and more matured faculties.
The squirrel when in confinement is best fed on the substances which it
eats while in the wild state, such as nuts, acorns, corn, and similar
substances. It will also eat bread-and-milk, and likes to nibble a
biscuit by way of a treat. As the squirrel is known to be carnivorous to
a certain degree, it may be useful to give it occasionally a young bird,
or a few eggs of the thrush, sparrow, or any other common bird. We
cannot, however, give personal testimony to the good effect of this
diet. Hard shell-fruits, such as nuts, acorns, &c., are absolutely
necessary to this animal, as the structure of the teeth compels it to be
continually nibbling. In all the rodent animals the front teeth are four
in number, flat, slightly curved, and edged like a chisel. They play
against each other in such a manner that they mutually keep each other
sharp; and in order to supply the constant wearing away to which they
are subject, they grow throughout the whole lifetime of the animal,
being pushed forward by fresh growth at the base.
It sometimes happens that a rodent animal, such as a rat or a rabbit,
loses one of its teeth, and the consequence is that the corresponding
tooth in the jaw, finding nothing to check it, grows so long that it has
been known to reach even the forehead, to form a complete ring, and
sometimes to penetrate the other jaw. In all these cases the poor
creature was miserably thin, and would probably have died from gradual
starvation at no distant period.
The last-mentioned point in squirrel-keeping, though of course the most
important, is the absolute necessity for the most scrupulous
cleanliness. In their native state, all animals are clean to a degree
that might shame many a human being, and their instinctive sanitary
customs are most praiseworthy. Even the pig, for instance, so often
cited as an example of filthy habits, is when wild a model of
cleanliness, and when domesticated absolutely revels in a thorough
scrubbing with soap and hot water. The squirrel, in like manner, though
perfectly sweet and clean in a wild state, is sure to be most offensive
in captivity, unless the cage be carefully purified daily.
It is for this reason that we are so particular in recommending
galvanized iron for the materials of the cage, avoiding wood altogether,
as an evil odour readily penetrates wood, and can never be totally
expelled. The duplicate tray and sleeping-box will prove to be of the
greatest service in keeping the cage clean, and will save much trouble
to the proprietor and annoyance to the inhabitant.
Should the squirrel-rearer prefer to employ wood in any part of the
cage, he must be sure to bind with sheet-tin every edge and angle of the
woodwork, as the little creature will nibble at the exposed edges so
continually with its chisels of teeth, that it will speedily render the
article useless.
Before closing these remarks, let us enjoin on every intending rearer of
a pet to consider well before he undertakes the sole guardianship of any
creature, and to assure himself that he will perform with punctuality
and completeness the many little offices required by animals when taken
from their natural state of existence, debarred from the exercise of
their ordinary capacities, and rendered incapable of procuring food or
keeping themselves in that state of cleanliness which is the ordinary
condition of creatures in a state of nature.
He must make up his mind that the task will be somewhat troublesome, and
will now and then interfere with contemplated projects; but at the same
time he must rigidly determine that nothing shall cause him to forget,
or induce him to omit, one single duty towards the little creature under
his care. It is dumb, and has no language to declare its wants or
proclaim its injuries; and this very dumbness ought to incite in every
right-feeling heart a strong compassion for the helpless state in which
the creature is placed, an unshakeable resolution to make it as happy as
it can be under the circumstances.
It is possible to elevate the character of a kindly-treated pet to such
a degree, that it will voluntarily forsake the society of its own kind
for that of man, and even if granted its liberty, will refuse to avail
itself of the gift, and return to the protection of the sheltering hand.
By humane and sympathetic treatment a pet may be made happier than in
its native state, and be saved many pangs of suffering by a kindly
owner. All animals when wild have to pass through a sort of schooling,
and get sadly knocked about and bullied by their elders before they
attain maturity and strength to become bullies in their turn; but if
reared in gracious captivity, they will escape the ordeal through which
they must have passed.
Lastly, let the owner remember that his little favourite is wholly
dependent on him for every necessary and comfort of life, and that it
will be a piece of arrant cruelty--or, at all events, of inexcusable
thoughtlessness--to permit the captive to feel the pangs of hunger or
thirst, or to suffer the discomfort of an unclean home.
[Illustration]
WHITE MICE.
The mouse is a lively little animal, and one of the most timid, although
he eats in the trap as soon as he is caught. The brown mouse can very
rarely be tamed; but white mice are bred and brought up in a state of
domestication, and the young fancier can obtain a pair for a shilling at
any of the fanciers. The female has frequently six or eight broods in a
year, but at these times she must be separated from the buck, who very
frequently destroys the young ones.
Cages for white mice may be easily purchased by those who _have the
money_--mark that--and you may indulge yourselves, my young friends, to
any tune, from the sweet jingle of sixpence to the respectable clink of
a golden sovereign. The best kind of cage is that like a squirrel’s, but
on a small scale.
Some boys who have ingenuity will construct pretty little houses for
their white mice. We remember seeing one on which there was a mill, by
which the white mice, very much like millers in their looks, ground
their own corn by means of a turnabout fixed on a post of the dormitory,
and it was very amusing to see the little creatures come out of the
chimney and look about as unlike chimney-sweeps as white is to black.
The principal food for white mice is bread-and-milk, oatmeal grits, and
any other common food, except cheese, which is bad for them. They should
be kept particularly clean, and their cages ought to be arranged, and
beds made up every day, or they will give out a most disagreeable smell.
Piebald mice are sometimes produced by a union of the common field-mouse
with a white mouse: there are also some expensive varieties, such as the
black mouse, and the black and white mouse, which the young gentlemen
who have more money than wit may purchase for a few shillings each; but
we say sixpence: sixpence apiece is enough for any pets of this kind.
[Illustration: MISCELLANEOUS.--CONJURING, CHESS, ETC.]
PART V.
Miscellaneous:
INCLUDING
BAGATELLE.
BILLIARDS.
BOAT-BUILDING.
CARPENTERING.
CHESS.
CONJURING.
CRYPTOGRAPHY.
DEAF AND DUMB ALPHABET.
DOMINOES.
DRAUGHTS.
FIREWORKS.
GARDENING.
MIMICRY AND VENTRILOQUISM.
PUZZLES.
SHOWS.
STAMP-COLLECTING.
TINSELLING.
BAGATELLE.
Whatever diversity of opinion there may be with respect to the skill
required to excel at bagatelle, there can be none with regard to its
popularity. The familiar long green table, with its round end and nine
numbered cups let in level with the cloth, is found nearly everywhere.
The games played on a bagatelle board are various, the principal of
which are, English bagatelle (which is the ordinary game), French
bagatelle, Sans Egal, Mississippi, Tron Madame, the Cannon game or
Bagatelle _versus_ Billiards. Many of the strokes at billiards will be
found useful at bagatelle, but much less strength will be required.
ENGLISH BAGATELLE
May be played by any number of persons. The order of precedence is
settled by each person striking a ball up the board, and whoever gets
the highest number takes the lead and possession of the whole nine
balls. He places his ball on the white spot nearest the striking point,
and the black ball (which counts double) on the spot nearest the holes.
The black ball must be struck at the commencement of every round, but
afterwards the player can either play for the holes direct or by
striking the other balls. The mace or cue may be used, as agreed upon.
Any number of rounds may be played, and the score is counted from the
marked holes into which the balls are driven. The sides of the table are
filled with holes and pegs to mark the progress of the game.
THE FRENCH GAME
Differs from the English in two or three essential particulars. It is
generally played by two or four persons, who, instead of playing with
the whole nine balls, take it in turn to strike, and score all they make
until a hole is missed. The player forfeits one point if he misses the
black ball, which counts double, as in the English game. A hundred up is
the usual score, and occasionally different values are given to coloured
balls, so that a black counts double, a red the same, or adds two to the
score otherwise made.
SANS EGAL
Is a favourite game for two persons. The lead is decided as in the
English game, and each player has four balls of different colours. The
black ball is placed as in the English game, and the players take
alternate strokes. The one that holes the black ball counts it towards
his game, as well as all he may hole of his own; but should he hole any
of his adversary’s, the number is scored to the owner of them. The game
is played 21 or 31 up, and the winner of one round takes the lead in the
next.
THE CANNON GAME.
This is also called “Billiards _v._ Bagatelle,” and is played by two
persons,--101 up. Three balls of different colours are used--black, red,
and white: the choice of the two last, and the lead, is determined as in
the English game. The game is commenced by placing the black ball on the
spot; but should the player miss it, his opponent scores five; and if
the ball is holed at the same time, the number of the cup is also
counted to his opponent, who then takes the turn. The black ball
invariably counts double, and is taken out of the cup every time it is
holed and placed on “the spot,” as at the commencement. If the player’s
ball is holed after contact with the black ball, or after having made a
cannon, it counts the number of the cup, and is returned to him, when he
continues to play until he misses. A cannon scores two to the game, but
the black ball must be struck first, or else five is added to the
adversary’s score. There are a few other points to be observed. The
player continues playing after making a cannon, or after holing his own
or adversary’s ball, if he has struck the black ball first. Should any
ball rebound beyond the centre of the table or be forced off the board,
it must not be played that round, unless it is the black ball, which
must be placed on “the spot,” as at the commencement of the game.
MISSISSIPPI.
This is a variation of the game by means of a wooden perforated bridge,
each arch of which bears a particular number. The bridge is placed close
up to the circle, and each player strikes up one ball; he who gets the
highest number takes the lead, and plays the nine balls successively.
The balls must strike one of the cushions previous to entering the
bridge, otherwise the number will be scored to the adversary. The game
may be played 30, 60, or 100 up, as may be agreed on.
BILLIARDS.
Of all indoor games, billiards ranks highest. It is without doubt the
king, and reigns triumphant over chess, backgammon, parlour croquet; and
since those delightful miniature billiard tables have been introduced,
it is rapidly superseding bagatelle as a parlour game. These miniature
tables possess all the advantages of the larger and more aristocratic
tables. The same principles operate, the practice is similar, and the
laws which govern the play are alike; need it be a matter of wonder that
billiards is fast becoming as popular and universal as it is excellent?
When a boy first tries his hand at billiards, he is generally confounded
by the apparently erratic conduct of the balls. They are apt to diverge
into the strangest places, and somehow manage to remain precisely in
those spots where a practised player can make a good break from them.
This arises first from the want of a knowledge of the laws which
regulate moving bodies, the general principles of billiards, and an
acquaintance with the various “strokes,” and the effects they produce.
Thus to become a good billiard-player requires a nicety of touch, a good
eye, and sound judgment. These are to be acquired if the player attends
to the following principles and points of the game.
Most boys are aware that billiards is played on an oblong table twelve
feet long by six feet wide, inside the cushions: the smaller tables
preserve these general proportions. In France, for instance, the table
is some four feet by eight feet, and without pockets, it being used
solely for the cannon game; but English tables have invariably six
pockets, one at each corner and two at the sides. No good table is now
made without a slate bed, perfectly level, and covered with fine green
cloth. The old list cushions are now superseded by those made of
vulcanized india-rubber, which not only resists the deteriorating
influence of the weather, but increases the “speed” of the table. The
surface of the cloth is marked with three “spots.” The first “spot” is
placed about twelve inches from the upper end or top of the table, and
is known as “_the_ spot.” The second is placed two feet six inches from
the top, and the third is in the centre of the table. Two feet six
inches from the bottom of the table is the “baulk line,” on which is
inscribed a semicircle, called the “striking point,” shown on figs. 4 to
7. The position of the semicircle is also marked by three spots, one at
each end and one at the centre.
The moveable adjuncts to the table are cues, balls, butt, and a rest or
jigger. With respect to these one or two words of advice. See that your
cue is well balanced; beware of fancy cues; let the leathered tip be
moderately broad, and keep it always well chalked. The balls are perfect
spheres turned out of the centre of the tusk. It may be mentioned that
the ordinary length of a cue is four feet nine inches, and the diameter
of “match balls” is two inches and a sixteenth. The “butt” is a stiff,
thick cue, well leathered at the butt end, and is used occasionally for
pushing the ball when it is necessary to come off a cushion at an exact
angle. The uses of the “rest” and long cues are obvious.
Ere touching on the game itself, there are a few essential points which
claim the attention of a young player. They are these: 1. The attainment
of a good position. 2. The making of a firm “bridge.” 3. The acquirement
of a good, easy, but firm, stroke. The last two essentials depend in a
great measure on the first. It is obvious that the billiard player
requires an easy play for his right arm, and firmness in his left to
give solidity to the “bridge.” To ensure this he must stand firmly on
his right leg, so that it supports the weight of his body. The left leg
should be placed slightly in advance, and pressed gently to balance the
body only. This will throw additional weight on the left arm, which
rests on the table, and leave the right arm free. If the position is a
good one, the left leg may be lifted from the floor without disturbing
the body. To form the “bridge,” the left hand must be first extended on
the table, and the fingers drawn up straight towards the wrist, so as to
elevate the knuckles. If well done, the tips of the fingers, the wrist,
and ball of the thumb will touch the table. The point of the thumb must
be then kept slightly apart from the fingers to form a groove, in which
the cue can rest, as shown in fig. 1.
[Illustration: FIG. 1.--THE BRIDGE.]
The bridge should be formed almost six inches from the ball. To strike
well, surely, and firmly, the cue must be held in the grasp of the right
hand. This is essential, for unless the cue is so held it will be
impossible to make a good, and therefore a sure, stroke. All fancy modes
of holding the cue by the tips of the fingers should be avoided. The cue
may be laid on the groove of the bridge, and drawn back, and then firmly
and steadily send it forward in a straight line, keeping the right hand
well down behind you, so that the force of the blow comes from the
shoulder, not the elbow. The eye must be educated to guide the hand,
and, hit or miss, the stroke should be given at once. There should be no
hesitation, no see-sawing of the cue to and fro, and no violent motions
whatever. The body should be so placed as to give firmness to the
bridge, ease to the right arm--which should be kept straight, with the
point of the cue slightly above the surface of the cloth--and a general
freedom from constraint, which is highly essential to success.
The best method of practice for a young beginner is to place a ball
before his cue and strike it firmly and gently into different pockets,
or at different marked points of the cushion, until he can pocket the
ball and hit a given point with freedom and precision. The ball must be
fairly struck with the tip of the cue, not pushed or jerked forward; and
hence it will be necessary to draw back the point of the cue five or six
inches ere striking the ball. The stroke, though firm, must not be
violent, lest the natural angles of the table should be destroyed. If
the ball is watched carefully after it has struck the cushion, it will
be found to return at an exactly equal angle to the one at which it was
struck. In other words, “the angle of reflexion is equal to the angle of
incidence.” This is the first and most important rule of billiards, and
one that should never be forgotten. The variation of the strength and
direction of the stroke will be found to materially affect this law, and
enables the skilled player to make those formidable and seemingly
impossible strokes which secure him his victory. This peculiarity of the
angles is best illustrated, and the practice of the student advanced, by
placing another ball at a little distance before the player, which we
will call the object ball. If we place them in a line with one of the
marked places on the cushion, and strike the first ball fair in the
centre, and cause it to strike the object ball full,--if this is done,
it will strike the marked spot, and come off at the same angle as your
first ball would have done.
For the purposes of play the object ball is divided thus:--
[Illustration: 1. Full Ball.
2. Three-quarter Ball.
3. Half Ball.
4. Quarter Ball.
5. Eighth Ball.
6. Very fine Ball.
FIG. 2.--DIVIDING THE OBJECT BALL.]
Fig. 2, No. 1, shows the object ball struck full, fig. 2, No. 2, the
three-quarter ball, and so on. The half ball is the most important in
practice, as by it the natural angle is made, an angle that is of the
greatest importance at billiards, though each have their particular
uses, which the young player should endeavour to understand. He will
find that the balls diverge at different angles, more or less acute,
according as the object ball is struck “full” or “fine;” the fine ball
being precisely the reverse of the three-quarter ball.
[Illustration: FIG. 3.--THE PLAYER’S BALL DIVIDED FOR THE SIDE-STROKE.]
There are many ordinary hazards and cannons which can be made by simply
dividing the object ball, but the motion which the striking ball obtains
after contact with the object ball will be modified by the position of
the cue and the manner in which it is struck. First let us take the
position of the cue. For the full centre stroke or straight hazard the
ball must be struck well in the centre, and produce what is termed _the
retard_, or stop ball, if the object ball is struck full likewise. If
the striker’s ball is struck considerably above its centre, it produces
the _following stroke_. To make the ball _jump_, it must be struck
sharply on the top with a “downward, forward motion,” and this, if
carefully done, will cause the ball to jump over a neighbouring and
intervening ball. When the ball is struck low, it produces _the recoil_,
and the striker’s ball will return from the object ball to the player.
This leads the beginner to the greatest of all modern improvements in
the game, the _side-stroke_. It is found that it is much easier to
divide the striker’s ball with accuracy than the object ball, but when
both balls are divided with judgment the highest scientific play is
obtained. The application of _side_ and twist to the striker’s ball is
often misapplied by beginners, and is frequently the cause of
mischievous results; for all students should remember that “the harder
you strike the balls the more rapidly they fly apart;” and frequently a
modification of the strength of the stroke will achieve the desired
result better than the application of “side,” which may fail. It should
always be remembered that the ball must be struck on the side on which
it is intended to go after contact with the object ball, and that the
effect is not produced until after it has come in contact with another
ball or the cushion. It is used for the same purpose as the division of
the object ball, and accomplishes the same object. In order that it may
be properly understood we give in fig. 3 the player’s ball divided for
the side-stroke.
The student can only acquire a knowledge of the effect of the strokes
given at these varied points by practice, or from the instruction of an
expert teacher; all that a writer can do is to lay down well-defined and
easily-understood axioms, rules, and cautions. Thus, if the ball is
struck at _c c_, at the top, it becomes the following ball; at the
bottom _c c_, a recoil; at _f f_ it will give a strong side to the ball
at the lower angles, the screw or twist, which causes the balls to twist
back; the upper angles will give high right-hand side or left-hand side,
according to the side they are struck.
THE ANGLES OF THE TABLE
Should never be forgotten. They change infinitely, and if the student
has made good use of the hints given as to the elementary practice with
one ball, he will have acquired some valuable information, and soon see
the truth of the axiom, that the “angle of reflexion is equal to the
angle of incidence;” and the advantage of a knowledge of the angles of
the table will be best seen in making cannons, for many players will
make them off one, two, three, and even four cushions.
[Illustration: FIG. 4.--ANGLES OF THE TABLE.]
Fig. 4 shows a series of very useful angles, which may be advantageously
studied. The black lines represent the course of the ball before
reverberation, the dotted lines its course after the first reflexion,
and the faint lines its course after the second reflexion. In these
examples the ball is supposed to be struck fairly in the centre with
moderate force, except in case 1, where the effects of different
strengths is shown. An ordinary, moderate stroke would bring the ball
into the left-hand corner pocket, while a harder stroke would produce
the angles _a b_: if played with greater strength the angles _c d_ will
result. “_Bricole_” angles are made across the table, and are of course
proportionately more acute. The _Bricole_ game is being obliged to
strike a cushion, and make the ball reverberate or recoil from it
previous to hitting the adversary’s ball. This is a very great
disadvantage, and is used principally in “_cramp games_,” where the
advantage of one player is neutralized by this; or by playing cannons
against cannons and hazards, or four pockets to two, or five to one, or
cannons and winning hazards against the whole game.
All strokes at billiards are distinguished by the name of cannons or
hazards. Cannon is a contraction of _carambole_, and is a stroke in
which the player strikes both balls in succession with his own. The
“losing hazard” is when the player’s own ball is forced into either of
the six pockets, after contact with the other ball. The “winning hazard”
is made by forcing the ball played upon into either pocket after
contact.
[Illustration: FIG. 5.--CANNONS.]
Here are a few examples of cannons made from the cushion, without the
use of the side-stroke. They only indicate the infinite variety that can
be made.
[Illustration: FIG. 6.--WINNING HAZARDS.]
Some rather difficult, but useful, _winning hazards_ are shown in fig.
6. The stroke A is termed the “spot stroke.” This stroke is sometimes
made a score or more times in succession by a good player. It is one of
the best of winning hazards. It requires a nearly full ball of moderate
strength, and to repeat it from one side to the other you should
slightly divide your own ball by putting on a little side (see D _e_ in
fig. 3); and you will find your ball in the right position to repeat the
stroke. Sometimes it may be made by a slow hoist, which causes the ball
to come back to the starting-point; or the ball may be stopped a little
behind the object ball, and thus make a succession of hazards from the
same pocket. The champion billiard-player, Roberts, makes tremendous
breaks from the “spot stroke.” Get a good player to show the variety of
ways in which it can be made, and practise it. Here are a few examples
of the effect of dividing the object ball. Strokes 1 to 14 are made from
the baulk into the top end pockets by dividing the object ball from a
nearly full ball, as in 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, to an eighth in 1 and 9.
Stroke 5 represents a half ball vulgarly called a pair of breeches.
Stroke 11 should be made to hug the cushion. Strokes 15 and 16 must be
played gently with a half ball, and 17 with a quarter ball. Strokes 18
to 33 show a variety of cuts made by striking the ball in the direction
shown by the line between the white ball and the red.
Now for a few _losing hazards_. They require a little different
treatment. Here are a few.
[Illustration: FIG. 7.--LOSING HAZARDS.]
The first eight strokes require a screw, and more or less side,
according to their position; 9, 10, 11, and 12 require strong side, as
shown; and in 13 the striker’s ball must first strike the cushion
gently, rebound, hit the other ball, and fall into the corner pocket.
Stroke 14 is an ugly position for a beginner, yet it frequently occurs.
You must put on plenty of side to your own ball, which will remove the
object ball, and your ball will then roll along the cushion into the
pocket. Stroke 22 alone requires a word in explanation. It shows now the
losing hazard is made from baulk off the red on the spot. Put on a
strong-side twist, and practise it well. Remember that practice can
alone make perfect. Be always decided, play steadily, and do not lose
your temper.
Now for a few hints with respect to the games to be played. With every
billiard table a set of rules is supplied, and these must be studied and
obeyed, as regulating the game; but an endless variety of games may be
extemporised to suit the various parties and skill of the professors.
THE AMERICAN GAME
Is played with four balls, a light red, or pink, and dark red. The balls
are placed on the spots in the centre between the pockets. The baulk is
not confined to the semicircle, but you can place your ball anywhere
within the line which is extended level with the winning-hazard spot.
The game is usually played 63 up, and consists of winning hazards and
cannons. In this game “doubles” are of great advantage. Doubles are so
called when a player strikes his own or an object ball at a certain
angle of the cushion, so as to cause it to come off at an equal angle
and go into a pocket at the opposite side of the table. It is called a
“double double” if the ball returns and goes into a pocket on the side
of the table it first struck; and there is a game in which no score is
made unless the cushion is first struck with the ball.
PYRAMIDS, OR PYRAMID POOL,
Is played with fifteen red and one white ball. The red balls are
arranged in a triangle, thus:--
o o o o o
o o o o
o o o
o o
o
The first ball is placed on the winning-hazard spot. The white ball is
placed in baulk. The game is placed by holing all the red balls. A great
deal will depend in this on keeping the white ball safe, so that your
adversary may have to play a cramp stroke. It is a pretty game to play
with friends. Pyramids can be so modified as to suit a number of
players, each striking in succession, and scoring according to the
number of balls pocketed. A small stake is placed on each ball to give
an interest in the game. When played in this manner, the winner who
scores the greatest number takes the stakes.
“WINNING AND LOSING CARAMBOLE GAME”
Is played by either two or four persons. Winning and losing hazards,
cannons, and forfeits, go to make the score, which is usually 50. If
four players make a match, and play side against side, they play 63 up,
and the partners may instruct each other. This plan is open to
objection, and a far better one is for each to play his own game, and
handicap the inferior players by giving them ten or fifteen points at
the commencement. In this case, if either party gives a miss, it is far
better that he should lose one point than the others should take one
each. The white and spot white balls are then played alternately, as if
only two were playing. The game commences by stringing for the lead and
the choice of balls. The player must place his ball within the striking
ring, and stand within the limits of the corner of the table. He whose
ball rests nearest to the cushion at the baulk end of the table wins the
lead, and chooses his own ball. A few general hints respecting the rules
only is necessary. The red ball is placed on the lower of the two spots
at the bottom of the table, and replaced there when it is holed (_i. e._
pocketed) or forced over the edge of the table, or when the balls are
broken or, in other words, placed as at the commencement of a game.
Whoever breaks the balls leads off. With respect to scoring: if the
striker holes the white ball (called a white winning hazard), or if he
holes his own ball from the white ball (called a white losing hazard),
he gains two points; if he does both, he gains four points. If he holes
the red ball, he wins three; and if by the same stroke he holes his own
from the red, he wins three more.
POOL.
There are several ways of playing pool. There is the ordinary game, with
as many balls as there are players, or with two balls only, the players
playing in turns, and playing with alternate balls; playing with the
nearest ball; playing at the last player; or the player playing at
whichever ball he chooses. The most popular game is that in which the
player plays at the last player. When coloured balls are used, they are
played as the colours are placed on the marking board. Each player has
three lives at starting. But there is this drawback to pool: if the
player happens to lose all his lives in rapid succession, he is
condemned to inglorious idleness until the pool is played out, and then
the same thing may happen. This may be obviated by allowing the lives to
be unlimited, and paying nothing into the general pool, so that if a
player’s ball be pocketed, he has only to pay his stake and remain on
hand until his turn comes round again. In this manner the players may
continue their game for an unlimited period, and a new-comer may join
the game at any time.
There is a cannon game which affords excellent practice. All the pool or
pyramid balls are ranged in a line against the top and bottom cushion,
having the plain white ball in the middle. A cue is then laid flat
against them, and they are pushed along the table, so as to strike the
opposite cushion. The object of the player is to take the white ball and
make as many consecutive cannons as possible. Should his own ball run
into a pocket, he is obliged to stop and let the next player in; and if
any of the coloured balls run into a pocket, it must stay there, and of
course decrease the chances of a long series of cannons. This is much
more difficult than it looks.
There is a cannon game with one red and the two white balls. In this
pocketing either of the white balls causes two to be deducted from the
score, and pocketing the red ball loses three. The regular French game
consists of cannons only; misses and pockets do not count either way.
It is usually played on a French table, without pockets, with two and a
half inch balls, and a heavy one. The baulk is not confined to the
semicircle. At the commencement the red is placed on the winning spot,
and the non-striker’s ball on the centre spot in baulk.
ITALIAN SKITTLE POOL
Is an excellent game for boys. It is played thirty-one points up. Four
balls are used, two being white, one red, and one blue; and five
skittles are placed in the centre of the table. Each of the skittles is
numbered in the following order:--The first opposite the baulk is
numbered 1; the one to the right 2; the one opposite to the first 3; the
opposite to the second, on the left, 4; and the one in the centre 5. The
red ball is placed as in the cannon game, the blue one beneath it. The
two white balls are kept by the two players who have to play first.
There is a peculiarity in this game, from the fact that a number, from
one to sixteen, is chosen by the player at random, and the marker
secretly adds it to the score, and in order to win the pool the player
must make between the points of the game and those on the hidden ball
thirty-one points, neither more nor less: if he makes more he is
technically dead, and out of the game. The first player has to strike
the red ball, the second the blue one, while the following players may
use either. The points are made by knocking down the skittles, each of
which counts as many points as its number, and by whatever ball these
skittles are knocked down they always count. If a ball is knocked out of
the table, it destroys all the points made by the stroke. Any player
reaching twenty-nine or thirty points has a right to stop on his
declaring so, only the points he makes in his subsequent play count to
the advantage or disadvantage, whichever it may be, of the previous
player. The survivor from amongst all the players who have died by
overstepping the thirty-one points wins the pool. He who knocks down the
four outside skittles, leaving the centre one only standing, makes what
is called the royal, and wins the pool. There are some minute rules
about stopping, which must be declared immediately on reaching
twenty-nine or thirty points, and only one person can stop. The
advantage of stopping is the chance of being the survivor.
On a wet day, in a country house, the best round game is _Penny Pot_,
played like pool, and for every ball pocketed the player receives a
small stake, and plays until he ceases to score. After making a winning
hazard, the nearest ball is played on. A life is forfeited for every
miss, coup (_i. e._ playing a ball into a pocket without its touching
another ball), or losing hazard, and paid to the owner of the ball
played on.
[Illustration: BOAT BUILDING]
This truly English amusement cannot be too highly extolled, as it is
calculated to incite boys to emulate each other in acquiring proficiency
in an art which exercises their ingenuity and taste, while it inculcates
habits of patient industry. A good sailing ship is rather a troublesome
thing to construct; but when a lad sees it “walk the waters like a thing
of life” he experiences feelings which fully repay him for all his
labour. Every boy ought to learn to swim, if only to prevent anxious
parents including boat-sailing with dangerous pastimes that ought not to
be encouraged. We are always pleased to see boys sailing their miniature
vessels, and we cannot think that an occasional ducking ought to
interfere with an occupation so befitting to the youth of a great
maritime nation. As long as French boys amuse themselves with playing at
soldiers, we trust English boys will continue to build and sail their
model ships.
[Illustration]
If you wish to possess a good ship, you must make it yourself, as the
smartly-painted vessels of the toy-shops are usually made to sell, and
not to sail. To form the hull you will require a few carpenter’s tools,
such as a couple of chisels, a gouge, and a saw, in addition to that
invaluable instrument, a good pocket-knife. Having procured a suitable
piece of good white deal, with a straight grain, mark a line down the
middle, on the upper and lower sides, and at both ends; then mark out
with pencil the shape of the intended vessel, which should be broad in
proportion to length, and deep in proportion to the width. Most boys
shape their vessels before scooping them out, but it is far better to
reverse the process, and hollow out the wood before commencing the
outside. The deck is to be made of a thin piece of deal, and must be
fitted very accurately, so that no water may enter the hold. A flush
deck, without a raised edge or gunwale, is to be preferred, as such a
deck does not hold the water.
The mast should be made of strong, light wood; should be tapering, and
rather long. The less rigging there is the better; two shrouds and a few
stays will be enough. The best models for miniature ships are those
vessels that are rigged “fore and aft,” such as cutters and schooners;
square-rigged ships are unmanageable unless made very large.
[Illustration: CUTTER.]
Our first illustration shows a model cutter, with her sails set. The
principal sail is termed the mainsail, the one above it the gaff
topsail, and the triangular sail attached to the bowsprit the foresail
or jib.
The blocks used in rigging a model ship are to be made of boxwood or
alder. The latter is a softer wood than the former, and can be more
readily fashioned into shape with a penknife. The holes for the cords
should be bored through the pieces of wood before they are shaped into
blocks, as it is not easy to drill the blocks without splitting them.
The rudder should be attached to the keel by bent pins. The little
staples on the keel, in which the bent pins work, are to be formed of
brass wire. The stem of the rudder passes through a hole in the stern of
the vessel, and is provided with a tiller. Before launching the ship,
the tiller must be fixed so as to keep the rudder at the required angle.
Many boys fear to launch their ships in large ponds; but if a ship is
properly rigged, and answers to her rudder, there need be no doubt as to
her safe arrival at port.
[Illustration: SMACK.]
The smack is not so graceful as the cutter, but is a capital sailer. The
large sail is called a spritsail, from the spar or sprit which crosses
it diagonally from the mast to the upper aftmost corner.
[Illustration: SCHOONER.]
A schooner is a vessel with two masts, and fore-and-aft sails like
those of a cutter. The schooner-rig is not suited to very small boats.
[Illustration: LUGGER.]
The lugger is shown in the annexed engraving. The lug-sail which
distinguishes this rig is a square sail fastened to a yard that hangs
obliquely to the mast at one-third of its length. A lug-sail may be
fitted to a single-masted boat. The lugger is an excellent boat for
sailing, but it lacks the trim appearance of the cutter.
Cutters or schooners intended for fast sailing should have but one
foresail, as a large balloon-jib rigged with a boom holds more wind than
an ordinary jib and staysail. The ships should be well ballasted to
prevent the wind capsizing them, and their topmasts should be made
moveable, as in rough weather it will be found necessary to “strike”
them. Each boat may have two sets of sails--one set large, for light
winds, and the other considerably smaller, to be set up when the wind is
high. The sails should be made of very light stuff--thin calico is
best--and should have a line run round them, with loops for hooking them
on to the spars. Beware of putting too many blocks and useless ropes
about your boats, as the lighter the upper part of a vessel is the
better she will sail. In conclusion, spare no pains in finishing your
work neatly, so that your boats may bear witness to your skill and
patience.
[Illustration: THE RAW MATERIAL.]
[Illustration]
CARPENTERING.
“All made out of my own head.
And wood enough left for another.”
Nothing is more useful to a youth than to be able to do a little
carpentering. To be handy with a chisel and saw, a nail and a hammer,
saves many a pound in the course of the year. If you call in a carpenter
for a little work he is sure to spin out a “regular job.” I remember
once buying some oak saplings, which cost me eightpence a stick; and
wanting to build a summer-house, I required eight of them to be sawn
through, so I applied to a carpenter, and the sticks were cut, but to my
astonishment, sixteen shillings was charged for this little “job,”
although the wood cost me only five shillings and fourpence. I found out
afterwards that the proper price for sawing would have amounted to about
four shillings, so that twelve shillings profit was clapped on for the
benefit of my experience. I just mention this to show my young friends,
that if they wish to make summer-houses for their gardens, cages for
their birds, fowl-houses, rabbit-hutches, or boxes for their books, they
must learn to make them for themselves. I shall therefore offer them a
little advice upon “carpentering.”
THE SHOP AND BENCH.
Endeavour to procure some small outhouse, in which you may erect what is
called a carpenter’s or joiner’s bench. These may very often be bought
second-hand, or if not, can easily be procured at a reasonable rate. I
am very particular in recommending a bench, as without it you will find
many obstacles to your work. You must also provide yourself with a set
of tools,--gimlets, hammers, planes, saws, gouges, files, nails, screws,
and such articles of use.
[Illustration]
The bench is composed of a platform or top, supported by four stout
legs; A is what is called the bench hook; this ought to be fitted in
tight, so as to move up and down with a hammer only. The use of it is to
keep any wood steady you may have to plane: B is the bench screw, used
for keeping any wood firm and steady you may have to saw, which is to be
put in the grip and screwed tight. Sometimes the edges of wood require
to be planed, and then the wood is put in the grip or cheeks of the
bench and held tight while you plane it. The holes in the side of the
bench, C C, are for the insertion of a movable pin to support the end of
the board you have to plane or saw, which is not in the screw. The
height of your bench should be about 2 feet 8 inches. The common length
is from 10 to 12 feet, and the breadth about 3 feet 6 inches.
OF PLANES.
[Illustration]
C is what is called the jack plane, which is the first to be used. It is
about 17 inches in length, and is used to take the rough parts from a
piece of wood. It should be held steadily by fixing the right hand at
the handle (_h_), and the left over the top and side at (_s_), and
pushed forward on the wood, when the knife (_k_) will take off a shaving
which runs through the hole (_o_), and falls on the side. In using the
plane the endeavour should be to take off a clean shaving, which is
done by using the instrument uniformly and steadily over every surface
to be planed.
[Illustration]
D is another kind of plane, called the trying plane, having a double top
or handle. It is used to regulate and smooth, to a higher degree, the
surface of the wood that had previously been smoothed from the rough by
the jack plane. Its length is about 22 inches, and it is broader than
the jack plane. There is another plane called the _long_ plane, which is
used for facing a piece of stuff, which it does with the greatest
exactness; its length is about 2 feet 4 inches. There is also the
joiner’s plane, which is the longest of all the planes, being 30 inches
long. But the most handy of the planes to the boy carpenter is the
smoothing plane, E. It is the last plane used in joining, and gives the
utmost degree of smoothness to the surface of a piece of finished work;
it is about 7 inches in length, the sides of the stock are curved, and
resemble in figure a coffin; it is used in a similar way to the other.
[Illustration]
SAWS.
[Illustration]
There are many kinds of saws, but the most useful one is what is called
the “hand saw.” It has a blade or plate about 28 inches long; the teeth
of which are so formed as to allow you to cut the wood crossways as well
as lengthways. The handle of the saw is made so as to allow a full yet
free grasp of the hand, either for a pull or a thrust.
The _panel saw_. This saw has a plate nearly of the same size as a hand
saw, and is used for cutting very thin boards, which the rough teeth of
the hand saw would not cut through without breaking them.
[Illustration]
The _tenon saw_ is of a different shape to the others, and is made to
cut across the grain of the wood so as to leave the ends nicely even,
that it may fit to the piece it is joined to, which is called a
shoulder, being that part which comes in contact with the fibre of the
wood thus:
[Illustration]
To do this it requires that the teeth should be much smaller, and they
are therefore placed so close as eight or ten to the inch, according to
the length of the blade.
[Illustration]
The _dovetail saw_. There is another most useful saw it would be of
advantage for the young carpenter to have, namely, the dovetail saw. It
is about 9 inches long, and contains at least fifteen teeth in the inch.
It is used for cutting the dovetails of boxes. Its plate is very thin,
and it requires some care in using. It has a back for the purpose of
strength, formed of a thin piece of brass or iron, let in so as to give
the blade the requisite firmness necessary in using it.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
The _compass saw_. The plate of this kind of saw is very narrow, and not
more than one inch wide at the broadest part, gradually diminishing to
about a quarter of an inch at the lower end. It is about 15 inches in
length, and is used for cutting a piece of wood into a circular form,
and the plate being narrow allows it to follow the foot of the compass
to a very small diameter.
The _keyhole saw_. The keyhole saw is much smaller than the above. It is
used for cutting short curves, small holes, &c., such as a keyhole. The
handle is the same form as that of the chisel, a small slit being cut
through from end to end. It has a screw on one side, in order that the
blade may be set to any length, according to the circumference of the
hole to be cut.
[Illustration]
THE SPOKE SHAVE.
[Illustration]
This is a very useful tool. It is employed for smoothing the edges of
round pieces, or other ends requiring to be shaved down. It is a narrow
plane made of boxwood, and has generally a steel blade let into it to
cut; it is used by taking hold of each end with a hand, and moving it to
and fro over the wood to be shaved down.
STOCK AND BITS.
[Illustration]
There are about thirty-six bits to a set, all of different shapes and
sizes; but our young friends need not get quite so many: if they provide
themselves with a couple of a medium size, this will be sufficient, such
as the centre bit and the auger bit. The centre bit will cut holes
varying from a quarter of an inch to three quarters of an inch in
diameter, and is used by pressing the knob end against the chest, and
twirling the centre part round with the hand. It cuts a hole very clean,
leaving it quite smooth inside. The auger bit is for the same purpose,
and is used in the same manner. Another bit, called the taper shell bit,
is used for making holes wider, and is a very useful implement.
HOW TO MAKE A WHEELBARROW.
[Illustration]
One of the handiest things in a garden is a wheelbarrow, and one of the
prettiest for the young carpenter to exercise his ingenuity upon. To
make one, take a wide plank or board about an inch and a quarter thick.
Proceed to your bench, and having fitted it to its proper position, take
your jack plane and plane off the rough, next use your smoothing plane
to make it smooth. Then take your pencil and draw upon its side the
following figure, A. Then take your compass saw and cut round the marks
you have made: to do this you will have to fix your board in the screw
of your bench. When this is done take your spoke shave, and shave the
edges all round till they are very smooth and even, and you have one
side of your barrow. Lay this on another piece of board, and mark the
shape of it with your pencil; cut and shave it exactly as you did the
first side, so that when finished the two will exactly correspond; then
cut a piece off another board for the back and front of the barrow, of
the subjoined shape, by the same method you cut the sides, and plane and
finish them up in a similar way. Cut some tenons at the end of each
exactly to correspond with the mortices shown on the sides, D D; let
them be a trifle larger than the mortices, so that they will drive in
tight. Then cut the bottom out neatly, and nail it to the sides. Having
proceeded thus far, cut out the legs of your barrow, B, and nail one on
each side as shown in the figure. Give each leg a shoulder for the sides
to rest upon.
[Illustration]
_To make the wheel._ Take a piece of board, A, and strike a circle upon
it the size you wish your wheel to be of, B, and with the compass saw
cut close round to the stroke; cut out a square hole, C, in the centre
for the nave to join. Then get the blacksmith to put an iron rim round
the wheel to keep it from splitting, and a round pin in each side of the
nave, and put a staple in each side of the barrow to keep the wheel in
its place. Paint the whole of any colour you choose, and you will have
PUNCH’S COACH.
[Illustration]
THE WAY TO MAKE A BOX.
First ascertain the size you wish your box to be of. Then cut off your
stuff, but take care to cut it a quarter of an inch longer than the size
of your box from outside to outside. Should you want it deeper or
broader than the length of a deal, the widest of which is generally only
eleven inches; suppose, for instance, you wish your box to be 18 inches
deep, and you have only 9-inch deal to make it with, you will of course
have to join two together, or make what is called in carpentering a
_glue joint_. First, then, after you have cut off your stuff, take your
jack plane and “scuffle the rough off;” then put your board edgeways
into the bench-screw, and take your trying plane or long plane to get
the edge of the deals that are to be glued together perfectly straight
and even; and lastly, use the joiner plane, which will take off a nice
uniform shaving of the whole length of the board. Proceed exactly in the
same manner with the other board to be joined to the first. Then, after
having made each thoroughly smooth, clap the two together and see if
they will lie close in every part, if not, you must plane them till they
do, taking care to plane the edges perfectly square, or at right angles
to the surface of the board, for if you are not careful in this
particular, when your boards are glued together they will be of this
form. When you have joined them properly for glueing, let your glue be
nicely hot and not too thick, and hold both edges of the boards together
so that you can with a brush put the glue on both at one time, put the
two together very quickly, let one of them be in the bench-screw, and
while there rub the other backwards and forwards till the glue sets,
which it will soon do if well joined. Let the whole dry, and then the
glued part will be as strong as any other part of the board.
[Illustration]
After your sides, ends, bottom, and top are thus prepared, you must then
plane them up nicely, so that they are perfectly smooth and straight.
Use first the jack plane, then the trying plane. When this is done you
have to proceed to a nice little job, namely, to dovetail the corners
together, so as to form your box. In this process much depends upon the
planing and squaring of the stuff, for if you have not done this nicely
the dovetailing will be very imperfectly performed. Assuming that
everything has been well done, then take the two ends of the box, and
see that each is perfectly square and true to the other. Then allow
one-eighth of an inch more than the thickness of your sides, and set out
the ends, squaring it over on both sides, which when the dovetails are
cut out will form the inside of the box.
TO CUT THE DOVETAILS.
Take one “end-piece” of the box and place it endways into the
bench-screw, and mark out the dovetails on the edge of the board inside,
thus:
[Illustration]
then with your dovetail saw cut in into the marks down to the
lines squared over on the flat side like this--
[Illustration]
Then with a chisel cut out that part of the wood that is crossed, and
leave the other part, this being the part which will form the pins or
tails. Then take one side of your box and lay it flat on the bench, the
inside uppermost; then place the end you have cut on it, keeping the
edges flush, and mark round the shape of the pins, which will leave them
after this form--
[Illustration]
the black places being the mortices which are to be cut out. In cutting
out these you must be careful to cut within side of the stroke, so that
the mortices will be a little smaller than the pins, which will admit of
their being driven in quite tight, and will allow the glue to adhere to
them (for you have to glue these when you fix them). When you have thus
put the ends and sides together let them stand till the glue gets dry,
then take your planes and plane the quarter of an inch off the pins
which you allowed to be a little longer than the length of the box, and
you have then made the body of your box.
THE BOTTOM OF THE BOX.
[Illustration]
Cut your bottom the exact size of the box, nail the bottom on, and “get
out” a piece of wood (by cutting and planing in the usual manner) to
nail round so as to form a skirting to it, and at the same time hide the
joints of the bottom; “get out” a similar piece of wood to nail round
the top which will form the lid. Then get a pair of box joints and a
lock, and having put them on by a stroke of your own ingenuity you will
have a “box.”
[Illustration]
THE GAME OF CHESS.
It is the principal aim of this little treatise to assist the young
player in his examination of the theory of the openings in the game of
chess--a branch of study that to the beginner generally appears to be of
a most dull and uninviting character, but which, nevertheless, is of the
highest importance to all those who are ambitious of attaining to any
degree of proficiency in the game.
Before proceeding further, we would presume that the young player
possesses at least an elementary knowledge of the game, such as the
moves and value of the various pieces, the laws of checking, &c. Should
he not be thus fortunate, we would strongly advise him to have recourse
to the assistance of some chess-friend for an explanation of the
elementary principles; for, thanks to the almost daily increasing
knowledge of the game, there are few localities so remote that cannot
produce a brother of the free-masonry of chess. Though, in compliance
with the time-honoured custom of all writers on chess, we subjoin a
brief description of the various pieces and their moves, yet it is our
firm conviction that no beginner has ever succeeded in mastering by the
assistance of “the books” alone, the mere elementary principles of the
game.
In the following pages we have endeavoured to give a brief synopsis of
the most important of the openings, collected from the most approved
authorities, and at the same time to present to the tyro as it were a
passing glimpse of the chief modern discoveries.
If we have occasionally strayed from the beaten path, or insensibly
diverged into any of the as yet unexplored regions of chess, we would
fain crave the reader’s kind indulgence for any of those errors which
almost invariably find their way into variations that have not undergone
the “limæ labor,” or the test of actual play. Finally, should we have
had the good fortune by the following pages to assist a single beginner
in mastering any of the elementary difficulties which beset the rough
road that only leads to proficiency in chess--should there, through our
means, have been added but a single recruit to the ranks of Caissa, well
will our labour have been repaid!
THE LAWS OF THE GAME.
I.--The chess-board must be so placed that each player has a white
corner square nearest his right-hand. If the board have been improperly
placed, it must be adjusted, provided _four_ moves on each side have not
been played, but not afterwards.
II.--If a Piece or Pawn be misplaced at the beginning of the game,
either player may insist upon the mistake being rectified, if he
discover it before playing his fourth move, but not afterwards.
III.--Should a player, at the commencement of the game, omit to place
all his men on the board, he may correct the omission before playing his
fourth move, but not afterwards.
IV.--If a player, undertaking to give the odds of a Piece or Pawn,
neglect to remove it from the board, his adversary, after _four_ moves
have been played on each side, has the choice of proceeding with or
recommencing the game.
V.--When no odds are given, the players must take the first move of each
game alternately, drawing lots to determine who shall begin the first
game. If a game be drawn, the player who began it has the first move of
the following one.
VI.--The player who gives the odds has the right of moving first in each
game, unless otherwise agreed. Whenever a Pawn is given, it is
understood to be always the King’s Bishop’s Pawn.
VII.--A Piece or Pawn touched must be played, unless at the moment of
touching it the player say “_J’adoube_” or words to that effect; _but if
a Piece or Pawn be displaced or overturned by accident, it may be
restored to its place_.
VIII.--While a player holds the Piece or Pawn he has touched, he may
play it to any other than the square he took it from; but, having
quitted it, he cannot recall the move.
IX.--Should a player take one of his adversary’s Pieces or Pawns,
without saying “_J’adoube_” or words to that effect, his adversary may
compel him to take it; but if it cannot be legally taken, he may oblige
him to move the King; should his King, however, be so posted that he
cannot be legally moved, no penalty can be inflicted.
X.--Should a player move one of his adversary’s men, his antagonist has
the option of compelling him--1st, to replace the Piece or Pawn and move
his King; 2d, to replace the Piece or Pawn and take it; 3d, to let the
Piece or Pawn remain on the square to which it had been played, as if
the move were correct.
XI.--If a player take one of his adversary’s men with one of his own
that cannot take it without making a false move, his antagonist has the
option of compelling him to take it with a Piece or Pawn that can
legally take it, or to move his own Piece or Pawn which he touched.
XII.--Should a player take one of his own men with another, his
adversary has the option of obliging him to move either.
XIII.--If a player make a false move, _i. e._ play a Piece or Pawn to
any square to which it cannot legally be moved, his adversary has the
choice of three penalties; viz., 1st, of compelling him to let the Piece
or Pawn remain on the square to which he played it; 2d, to move
correctly to another square; 3d, to replace the Piece or Pawn and move
his King.
XIV.--Should a player move out of his turn, his adversary may choose
whether both moves shall remain, or the second be retracted.
XV.--When a Pawn is first moved in a game, it may be played one or two
squares; but in the latter case the opponent has the privilege of taking
it _en passant_ with any Pawn which could have taken it had it been
played one square only. A Pawn cannot be taken _en passant_ by a Piece.
XVI.--A player cannot castle in the following cases:--
1. If the King or Rook have been moved.
2. If the King be in check.
3. If there be any Piece between the King and Rook.
4. If the King pass over any square attacked by one of the adversary’s
Pieces or Pawns.
Should a player castle in any of the above cases, his adversary has the
choice of three penalties; viz., 1st, of insisting that the move remain;
2d, of compelling him to move the King; 3d, of compelling him to move
the Rook.
XVII.--If a player touch a Piece or Pawn that cannot be moved without
leaving the King in check, he must replace the Piece or Pawn and move
his King; but if the King cannot be moved, no penalty can be inflicted.
XVIII.--If a player attack the adverse King without saying “Check,” his
adversary is not obliged to attend to it; but if the former, in playing
his next move, were to say “Check,” each player must retract his last
move, and he that is under check must obviate it.
XIX.--If the King has been in check for several moves, and it cannot be
ascertained how it occurred, the player whose King is in check must
retract his last move and free his King from the check; but if the moves
made subsequent to the check be known, they must be retracted.
XX.--Should a player say “Check,” without giving it, and his adversary,
in consequence, move his King, or touch a Piece or Pawn to interpose, he
may retract such move, provided his adversary have not completed his
last move.
XXI.--Every Pawn which has reached the eighth or last square of the
chess-board, must be immediately exchanged for a Queen or any other
Piece the player may think fit, even though all the Pieces remain on the
board. It follows, therefore, that he may have two or more Queens, three
or more Rooks, Bishops, or Knights.
XXII.--If a play remain, at the end of the game, with a Rook and Bishop
against a Rook; with both Bishops only; with Knight and Bishop only,
&c., he must checkmate his adversary in fifty moves on each side at
most, or the game will be considered as drawn; the fifty moves commence
from the time the adversary gives notice that he will count them. The
law holds good for all other checkmates of Pieces only, such as Queen,
or Rook only, Queen against a Rook, &c. &c.
XXIII.--If a player agree to checkmate with a particular Piece or Pawn,
or on a particular square, or engage to force his adversary to stalemate
or checkmate him, he is not restricted to any number of moves.
XXIV.--A stalemate is a drawn game.
XXV.--If a player make a false move, castle improperly, &c. &c., the
adversary must take notice of such irregularity before he touches a
Piece or Pawn, or he will not be allowed to inflict any penalty.
XXVI.--Should any question arise, respecting which there is no law, or
in case of a dispute respecting any law, the players must refer the
point to the most skilful disinterested bystanders, and their decision
must be considered as conclusive.
THE KING’S KNIGHT’S OPENING.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
Black has now only three satisfactory methods of defence; viz., 2. P. to
Q’s 3d; 2. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d; 2. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d. He may, however,
adopt five other modes of play; viz., P. to K. B’s 3d; Q. to K. B’s 3d;
B. to Q’s 3d; P. to Q’s 4th; and P. to K. B’s 4th. Of these the first
three are utterly untenable, and the last two are highly dangerous.
Should he play 2. P. to K. B’s 3d, you reply with 3. Kt. takes K’s P.,
checking with Q. at K. R’s 5th, if the Kt. be taken. Should he play 2.
Q. to K. B’s 3d, or B. to Q’s 3d, you equally reply with B. to Q. B’s
4th, with the advantage. If he adopt 2. P. to Q’s 4th, you play 3. P.
takes P., following it up with Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d, if he retake with
Queen. If he play 2. P. to K. B’s 4th, you reply 3. Kt. takes K’s P., or
B. to Q. B’s 4th, and obtain the better game shortly. Having disposed of
these unsafe defences, we will now return to the examination of the
three satisfactory replies:--P. to Q’s 3d; K’s Kt. to B’s 3d; Q’s Kt. to
B’s 3d. For the last two, see Games II. and III.
GAME I.--PHILIDOR’S DEFENCE.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 2. P. to Q’s 3d.
3. P. to Q’s 4th.
This is your best reply; if instead you play,--
3. B. to Q’s B’s 4th, he plays-- 3. B. to K’s 2d. (best.)
3. P. takes P. (best.)
4. Q. takes P. 4. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
If you play 4. Kt. takes P., probably his best reply is P. to Q’s 4th.
5. B. to Q. Kt.’s 5th. 5. B. to Q’s 2d.
6. Q. to Q’s sq. 6. B. to K’s 2d, or K’s Kt. to K’s
2d.
7. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d, with the better position.
You may also, instead of 4. Q. takes P., try K’s B. to Q. B’s 4th.
Black’s best reply seems to be Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
GAME II.--PETROFF’S DEFENCE.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 2. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
This defence was brought into notice by Petroff some years ago, and has
been approved of by many of the leading players. It is an excellent
defence when receiving the odds of a piece.
3. Kt. takes K’s P. 3. P. to Q’s 3d.
4. Kt. to K. B’s 3d. 4. Kt. takes K’s P.
5. P. to Q’s 4th, (or Var. A.) 5. P. to Q’s 4th.
6. B. to Q’s 3d. 6. B. to K’s 2d, (not to Q’s 3d.)
7. Castles. 7. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
8. P. to Q. B’s 4th. 8. Q’s B. to K’s 3d.
9. P. to Q. R’s. 3d. 9. Castles.
10. Q. to Q. B’s 2d, with a slightly better game.
_Variation A. on White’s 5th Move._
White has another move at this point, which seems at least as good as 5.
P. to Q’s 4th; viz., Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
WHITE. BLACK.
5. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 5. Kt. takes Kt.
6. Q’s P. takes Kt. 6. B. to K’s 2d.
7. B. to Q’s 3d.
White has the better opened game.
GAME III.--THE GIUOCO PIANO.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 2. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
This is recommended by nearly all authors, as Black’s best reply. Of
late, however, there has been an opinion prevalent among many of our
best players, that it is inferior to K’s Kt. to B’s 3d, or even P. to
Q’s 3d. For our own part, we incline to the old move of Q’s Kt. to B’s
3d, but doubt whether there is any defence by which Black can acquire a
_perfectly even_ game.
3. B. to Q. B’s 4th. 3. B. to Q. B’s 4th. (best.)
4. P. to Q. B’s 3d. 4. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. (best.)
5. P. to Q’s 4th. 5. P. takes P.
6. P. to K’s 5th, (or Var. A.) 6. P. to Q’s 4th. (best.)
7. K’s B. to Q. Kt.’s 5th. 7. K’s Kt. to K’s 5th.
8. P. takes P. 8. B. to Q. Kt.’s 3d. (best.)
9. Castles. 9. Q’s B. to K. Kt.’s 5th.
10. B. takes Kt. (ch.) 10. P. takes B.
11. Q’s B. to K’s 3d, or Q’s Kt. 11. Castles.
to B’s 3d.
These are the moves given in the Handbook, and the game is dismissed as
equal. In actual play, however, we should take Black’s game for choice.
_Variation A. on White’s 6th Move._
WHITE. BLACK.
6. P. takes P. 6. B. to Q. Kt.’s 5th (ch.)
White’s 6th move is recommended by the German masters, and in our
opinion is preferable to P. to K’s 5th; Black’s best reply is to
check,--
7. B. to Q’s 2d. 7. B. takes B. (ch.)
8. Q’s Kt. takes B. 8. P. to Q’s 4th.
9. P. takes P. 9. Kt. takes P.
10. Q. to Q. Kt.’s 3d. 10. Q’s Kt. to K’s 2d.
11. K’s R. to K’s sq.
We much prefer White’s game.
GAME IV.--THE EVANS’ GAMBIT.
It would be impossible, in the narrow limits assigned to our treatise,
to enter into the merits of this opening; we shall therefore give one or
two of the leading variations, and refer learners, who may be desirous
of a more comprehensive analysis, to Mr. Walker’s excellent articles on
this popular opening, in Vol. ix. of the “Chess Player’s Chronicle,” the
“Handbook,” and Mr. Boden’s useful little work, entitled “A Popular
Introduction to Chess.”
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 2. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
3. B. to Q. B’s 4th. 3. B. to Q. B’s 4th.
4. P. to Q. Kt.’s 4th. 4. B. takes Q. Kt.’s P.
5. P. to Q. B’s 3d. 5. B. to Q. B’s 4th.
6. Castles. 6. P. to Q’s 3d. (best.)
7. P. to Q’s 4th. 7. P. takes P.
8. P. takes P. 8. B. to Q. Kt.’s 3d.
9. B. to Q. Kt.’s 2d. 9. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
Instead of 9. B. to Q. Kt.’s 2d, you may adopt several other modes of
play; viz., 9. B. to Q. R’s 3d; 9. R. to K’s sq.; 9. P. to K. R’s 3d; 9.
Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d. To the two first of these, Black equally replies with
Q’s B. to K. Kt.’s 5th, with the better game. (For 9. P. to K. R’s 3d,
and 9. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d, see Variations A. and B.)
10. P. to Q’s 5th. 10. Q’s Kt. to K’s 2d. (best.)
11. B. takes K’s Kt. 11. P. takes B.
12. K’s Kt. to Q’s 4th.
White has rather the better game.
_Variation A. on White’s 9th Move._
WHITE. BLACK.
9. P. to K. R’s 3d. 9. Kt. to Q. R’s 4th.
This is the move usually recommended for the defence. Black may however
adopt, 9. P. to K. R’s 3d, apparently with little disadvantage.
10. B. to Q’s 3d. 10. K’s Kt. to K’s 2d.
11. P. to Q. R’s 4th. 11. Castles.
12. R. to Q. R’s 2d. 12. K. to R’s sq.
13. R. to K’s 2d. 13. P. to K. B’s 4th.
The game is about equal.
_Variation B. on White’s 9th Move._
WHITE. BLACK.
9. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
We have long suspected that the force of this form of the attack has
been vastly underrated. The following variations are taken from an able
analysis by Mr. G. B. Fraser, of Dundee, who has kindly presented the
result of his labours in the investigation of this attack at our
disposal:--
9. B. to K. Kt.’s 5th.
This move is considered by all the modern writers on Chess to be Black’s
best reply.
10. Q. to Q. R’s 4th. 10. B. takes Kt.
In reply to White’s last move, Black may play either 10. Q. to Q’s 2d,
or 10. B. to Q’s 2d, instead of the move in the text. If he adopt 10. Q.
to Q’s 2d, White replies with B. to Q. Kt.’s 5th, apparently winning a
piece. It has been suggested to us that perhaps Black’s best move is 10.
K. to B’s sq., to which White might reply with K. Kt. to his 5th; and on
Black’s moving K. Kt. to R’s 3d, advance the P. to Q’s 5th. (For B. to
Q’s 2d, see Variation A.)
11. P. to Q’s 5th. 11. B. to K. Kt.’s 5th. (best.)
12. P. takes Q’s Kt. 12. P. takes P.
Black might play also Q’s R. to Q. Kt.’s sq., whereupon follows,--
13. P. takes P. (dis. ch.) 13. B. to Q’s 2d.
14. Q. to Q. Kt.’s 3d, and wins.
13. P. to K’s 5th.
White might also with advantage take the Q. B’s P. checking, although
the move in the text seems stronger.
13. B. to K’s 3d.
If he play,--
13. Q. to Q’s 2d.
14. P. takes P. 14. P. takes P.
15. Kt. to Q’s 5th, and wins.
14. B. takes B. 14. P. takes B.
15. Q. takes P. (ch.) 15. K. to B’s sq.
16. B. to Q. R’s 3d, with a winning game.
_Variation A. on Black’s 10th Move._
WHITE. BLACK.
10. B. to Q’s 2d.
11. Q. to Q. Kt.’s 3d. 11. Kt. to Q. R’s 4th. (best.)
12. B. takes K. B’s P. 12. K. to B’s sq.
13. Q. to Q’s 5th. 13. Kt. to K. B’s 3d.
14. Q. to K. Kt.’s 5th. 14. K. takes B.
15. P. to K’s 5th. 15. P. to K. R’s 3d.
This is Black’s best reply. If he retire the Kt. to his square, or to
K’s square, or K. Kt.’s 5th, White will obtain a winning game, by 16. Q.
to K. B’s 4th. (ch.)
16. Q. to K. B’s 4th. 16. P. to K. Kt.’s 4th. (best.)
17. Q. to Q’s 2d.
This seems White’s most promising move. He may also play 17. Q. takes
Kt., upon which Black exchanges Queens with the better game.
17. Kt. to K. R’s 2d.
18. P. to Q’s 5th. 18. B. to K. B’s 4th.
Black might also take Pawn with Pawn, and the game would probably be
continued thus:--
18. P takes P.
19. Kt. takes P. (ch.) 19. K. to Kt.’s 2d.
20. B. to Q. Kt.’s 2d. 20. Kt. to K. B’s 3d.
21. K. to R’s sq. 21. R. to K’s sq.
22. P. to K. B’s 4th, and will win.
19. P. to K’s 6th. (ch.) 19. K. to K’s 2d.
20. Kt. to Q’s 4th. 20. B. to K. Kt.’s 3d.
21. P. to K. B’s 4th, with a fine attack.
Instead of retiring his Bishop to Q. B’s 4th, as in Game IV., Black may,
though apparently less advantageously, play him to Q. R’s 4th.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 2. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
3. B. to Q. B’s 4th. 3. B. to Q. B’s 4th.
4. P. to Q. Kt.’s 4th. 4. B. takes P.
5. P. to Q. B’s 3d. 5. B. to Q. R’s 4th.
6. P. to Q’s 4th. (best.) 6. P. takes P.
7. Castles. 7. P. to Q’s 3d.
8. Q. to Q. Kt.’s 3d. 8. Q. to K. B’s 3d. (best.)
9. P. takes P., with a very fine game.
N.B.--Should Black at his 7th move, instead of 7. P. to Q’s 3d, play P.
to Q. B’s P., or K’s Kt. to B’s 3d, you, in reply, advance P. to K’s
5th, with a powerful attack.
THE GAMBIT DECLINED.
We now come to consider the consequences of Black’s not accepting the
gambit pawn at move 4.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 2. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
3. B. to Q. B’s 4th. 3. B. to Q. B’s 4th.
4. P. to Q. Kt.’s 4th. 4. B. to Q. Kt.’s 3d
5. B. to Q. Kt.’s 2d. 5. P. to Q’s 3d.
6. P. to Q’S 4th.
We prefer White’s game.
There is also another method of declining the Gambit, which, although
hitherto unanalysed, seems to present some interesting features.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 2. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
3. B. to Q. B’s 4th. 3. B. to Q. B’s 4th.
4. P. to Q. Kt.’s 4th. 4. P. to Q’s 4th.
5. P. takes Q’s P. 5. Kt. takes Q. Kt.’s P.
6. P. to Q. B’s 3d. 6. Kt. takes Q’s P.
7. Q. to Q. Kt.’s 3d. 7. P. to Q. B’s 3d.
8. B. takes Kt. 8. Q. takes B. (best.)
9. Q. takes Q. 9. Q. takes Q.
10. Kt. takes K’s P. Even Game.
It is very possible some of White’s moves may be improved upon, but the
foregoing variation seems satisfactorily to demonstrate that Black can
gain no advantage.
Before taking our leave of this beautiful opening, we would again remind
the young player, that it is perfectly immaterial, whether Black at move
5 captures the gambit pawn with B. or Kt., if with the latter White
equally replies with P. to Q. B’s 3d; and on Black’s retiring the Kt. to
Q. B’s 3d (best), the position becomes the same as given in a previous
variation.
GAME V.--RUY LOPEZ KNIGHT’S GAME.
We will now proceed to examine this, perhaps, the strongest and most
embarrassing attack the board affords. It is through fear of this
variation, that many of our best players have abandoned the usual
defence of 2. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d, and turned to the King’s Knight’s
defence, or the old move of P. to Q’s 3d.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 2. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
3. B. to Q. Kt.’s 5th. 3. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
By playing your Bishop thus, you again threaten to win his K’s P. The
move in the text, commonly known as the Berlin defence, is perhaps as
good a reply as the position admits. He has, however, three other
plausible moves; viz., B. to Q. B’s 4th; B. to K’s 2d; P. to Q’s 3d,
which will be touched upon hereafter.
4. P. to Q’s 4th. 4. P. takes P.
This move (or perhaps still better, 4. Castles) appears to yield a far
stronger attack than the old move of Q. K’s 2d. Black, instead of P.
takes P., might either reply with 4. K’s Kt. takes K’s P., or 4. Q’s Kt.
takes Q’s P. If the former, perhaps castling at once is your best
reply; if the latter, you take Kt. with K’s Kt., and then play P. to K’s
5th, as in the present variation.
5. P. to K’s 5th. 5. Kt. to K’s 5th.
6. Castles. 6. B. to K’s 2d. (best.)
7. Kt. takes P. 7. Kt. takes Kt. (or Var. A.)
8. Q. takes Kt. 8. P. to K. B’s 4th.
9. P. takes P. _en passant_. 9. Kt. takes P.
10. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
White has a very fine game.
We will now turn our attention to the other modes of play Black may
adopt at his 3d move, instead of K’s Kt. to B’s 3d; viz., B. to Q. B’s
4th; P. to Q’s 3d; B. to K’s 2d. (see Variations B. C.)
_Variation B. on Black’s 3d Move._
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 2. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
3. B. to Q. Kt.’s 5th. 3. B. to Q. B’s 4th.
4. P. to Q. B’s 3d. 4. K’s Kt. to K’s 2d. (best.)
5. Castles. 5. Castles.
6. P. to Q’s 4th. 6. P. takes P.
7. P. takes P. 7. B. to Q. Kt.’s 3d.
8. P. to Q’s 5th. 8. Q’s Kt. to his sq.
White may also play 8. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d with advantage.
9. P. to Q’s 6th. 9. P. takes P.
10. Q. takes P. 10. B. to Q. B’s 2d.
11. Q. to Q. R’s 3d. 11. P. to Q’s 4th.
12. K’s R. to Q’s sq. 12. B. to Q’s 3d.
The move 12. K. R. to Q’s sq. is recommended in the Handbook as giving
White an advantage of position. The reply, however, in the text, which
occurred to the writer in actual play, seems calculated to free Black
from his embarrassment.
_Variation C. on Black’s 3d Move._
WHITE. BLACK.
3. P. to Q’s 3d.
4. P. to Q’s 4th. 4. B. to Q’s 2d.
5. Castles.
Black has a tolerably safe though constrained position.
N.B.--For 3. B. to K’s 2d, see the games illustrative of this opening.
GAME VI.--THE SCOTCH GAMBIT.
This opening derives its name from having been adopted in the great
match by correspondence between the London and Edinburgh Chess Clubs.
The attack consequent on this opening at one time considerably
embarrassed Mr. Cochrane, who considered there was no satisfactory
defence to it. Major Jaenisch, however, with characteristic patience and
analysis, has proved the contrary.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 2. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
3. P. to Q’s 4th. 3. P. takes P.
If he play 4. Kt. takes P., you reply with either Kt. takes Kt., or Kt.
takes K’s P., and obtain the better position.
4. B. to Q. B’s 4th. 4. B. to Q. B’s 4th.
This is now acknowledged to be Black’s best move; for 4. B. to Q. Kt.’s
5th. (ch.) see Variation A.
5. P. to Q. B’s 3d. 5. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. (best.)
And the position is the same as given in the leading variation of the
Giuoco Piano, see page 622. Should Black instead play: P. takes Q. B’s
P., you take his K. B’s P. with your B. (ch.); and if he takes the
Bishop with King, play Q. to Q’s 5th (ch.), and then take his Bishop.
_Variation A. on Black’s 4th Move._
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 2. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
3. P. to Q’s 4th. 3. P. takes P.
4. B. to Q. B’s 4th. 4. B. to Q. Kt.’s 5th. (ch.)
5. P. to Q. B’s 3d. 5. P. takes P.
6. Castles. 6. P. to Q. B’s 7th.
Instead of 6. Castles, you might adopt Mr. Cochrane’s method of
continuing the attack, by 6. P. takes P.
N.B.--It would be very bad play of Black to take the Q. Kt.’s P.,
instead of the move in the text.
7. Q. takes P. 7. P. to Q’s 3d.
8. P. to Q. R’s 4th. 8. B. to Q. R’s 4th.
9. P. to Q. Kt.’s 4th. 9. B. to Kt.’s 3d.
10. Q. to Q. Kt.’s 3d, with a fine game.
There is another not uninteresting method of attack, which White might
adopt at his fifth move, instead of 5. P. to Q. B’s 3d; viz., K’s Kt. to
his 5th.
5. K’s Kt. to his 5th. 5. K’s Kt. to R’s 3d. (best.)
6. Kt. takes K. B’s P. 6. Kt. takes Kt.
7. B. takes Kt. (ch.) 7. K. takes B.
8. Q. to R’s 5th. 8. P. to K. Kt.’s 3d.
9. Q. takes B. 9. P. to Q’s 4th.
Black’s 9th move was first suggested in an able analysis on this
variation by Messrs. Jaenisch and Schummoff, in the “Chess Player’s
Chronicle” for July, 1850. It is far superior to the old move of P. to
Q’s 3d, and without great care on your part will give him an
irresistible attack.
10. Castles. 10. P. takes P.
This is your strongest move, and appears to have been overlooked by the
talented authors of the article in question:--
10. P. to Q. B’s 3d. (best.) 10. R. to K’s sq.
If Black play 10. P. to Q’s 6th, you reply with Q. to Q. B’s 4th (ch.),
winning the King’s Pawn.
11. B. to K. Kt.’s 5th. 11. Q. to Q’s 3d.
12. Q. takes Q. 12. P. takes Q.
13. P. takes P. 13. Kt. takes P.
14. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
And Black will have great difficulty in avoiding the loss of a Pawn.
There is another variation of this opening hitherto, we believe,
unanalysed, which, although it presents many points of interest, seems
altogether unknown to the majority of amateurs.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 2. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
3. P. to Q’s 4th. 3. P. takes P.
4. B. to Q. B’s 4th. 4. B. to Q. B’s 4th.
5. Castles. 5. P. to Q’s 3d.
6. K’s Kt. to his 5th. 6. K’s Kt. to R’s 3d.
7. P. to K. B’s 4th. 7. P. to Q’s 6th. (dis. ch.)
If he play 7. B. to K. Kt.’s 5th, your best reply seems to be Q. to K’s
sq., although you might obtain a strong but hazardous attack by playing
Q. to her 3d, and afterwards, on his attacking her, with Q’s Kt. to Q.
Kt.’s 3d.
8. K. to R’s sq. 8. P. takes P.
9. Q. takes P. 9. Q’s Kt. to Q’s 5th.
10. Q. to Q. B’s 3d.
And although minus a Pawn, you have a fine game. If he now play P. to K.
B’s 3d, you reply with B. to K’s 3d.
THE KING’S BISHOP’S OPENING.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. K. B. to Q. B’s 4th. 2. K. B. to Q. B’s 4th.
By this move you attack his weakest point, viz. the K. B’s P. Most of
the classical writers on Chess concur in recommending the same move as
Black’s best reply. Major Jaenisch and the German authors unanimously
recommend 2. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d in preference, the move generally adopted
in actual play. (See Game III.)
White has now several methods of continuing the attack. He may play the
move recommended by Philidor, viz. P. to Q. B’s 3d, to which Black may
reply with either K’s Kt. to B’s 3d, or Q. to K. Kt.’s 4th, or P. to Q’s
4th, in every case with at least an equal game.
You may also play K’s Kt. to B’s 3d, and upon Black’s bringing out his
Q’s Kt., the position is resolved into the Giuoco Piano.
If you play Q. to K. R’s 5th, (a move frequently adopted by young
players,) Black will reply with Q. to K B’s 3d, or to K’s 2d, with no
inferiority of position. Besides these moves you have two others at
command, viz. Q. to K’s 2d, and P. to Q. Kt.’s 4th, which we will
proceed to examine.
GAME I.--THE LOPEZ GAMBIT.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. K. B. to Q. B’s 4th. 2. K. B to Q. B’s 4th.
3. Q. to K’s 2d. 3. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
By playing thus you threaten at once to take his K. B’s P. (ch.), and if
K. takes B, to win his Bishop in return by the check of the Q. The move
in the text is Black’s best reply, any other move would leave you with
at least an even position.
4. P. to Q. B’s 3d. 4. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
Instead of P. to Q. B’s 3d, you may take the adverse K. B’s P (ch.); see
Variation A.
5. P. to K. B’s 4th. 5. B. takes K’s Kt.
6. R. takes B. 6. Castles.
7. P. to Q’s 3d. 7. P. to Q’s 4th.
With a superior game.
_Variation A. on White’s 4th Move._
WHITE. BLACK.
4. B. takes K. B’s P. (ch.) 4. K. takes B.
5. Q. to Q. B’s 4th. (ch.) 5. P. to Q’s 4th.
6. Q. takes B. 6. P. takes K’s P.
7. Q. to Q. B’s 4th (ch.) 7. B. to K’s 3d.
8. Q. takes P. 8. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
Black has by far the better game.
GAME II.--THE DOUBLE GAMBIT.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. K’s B. to Q. B’s 4th. 2. K’s B. to Q. B’s 4th.
3. P. to Q. Kt.’s 4th. 3. B. takes P.
4. P. to K. B’s 4th. 4. P. to Q’s 4th.
His best move. If, in lieu of P. to Q’s 4th, he adopt P. takes K. B’s
P., you reply with K’s Kt. to B’s 3d, and obtain a fine attack.
5. P. takes Q’s P. 5. P. to K’s 5th.
If you play B. takes P., Black replies with P. to Q. B’s 3d, with the
better game.
6. K’s Kt. to K’s 2d. 6. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
7. Castles. 7. Castles.
8. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 8. P. to Q. B’s 3d.
9. P. takes P. 9. Q’s Kt. takes P.
Black has the better game, thereby proving that the Double Gambit, if
correctly met, is disadvantageous to the first player.
GAME III.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. K’s B. to Q. B’s 4th. 2. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
3. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 3. Kt. takes K’s P. (best.)
Your third move is probably the best on the board; 3. P. to Q’s 4th, and
3. P. to Q’s 3d, seem much inferior, as Black immediately gains the
attack.
4. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 4. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
Your fourth move was introduced two or three years ago, and was first
analysed by Mr. Boden, in his “Popular Introduction,” where Black’s
reply, of 4. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d, is recommended as his best; we believe,
however, he can at least as advantageously play 4. Kt. takes Q’s Kt.,
or, as has been suggested to us, 4. P. to Q’s 4th.; see Variation A.
5. Kt. takes K’s P. 5. P. to Q’s 4th.
6. B. to Q. Kt.’s 3d. 6. B. to Q’s 3d.
Equal game.
_Variation A. on Black’s 4th Move._
WHITE. BLACK.
4. Kt. takes Q’s Kt.
5. Q’s P. takes Kt. 5. P. to Q. B’s 3d.
He may also play 5. P. to K. B’s 3d, by which he preserves his Pawn,
though with a somewhat inferior position.
6. Kt. takes K’s P. 6. P. to Q’s 4th.
7. B. to Q’s 3d. 7. B. to Q’s 3d.
8. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 8. Castles.
9. Castles.
Black has no inferiority of position.
THE KING’S GAMBIT.
GAME I.
This beautiful and brilliant début, which, as Mr. Staunton observes,
gives birth to the most intricate and beautiful combinations the
chess-men are susceptible of, has been a universal favourite with every
class of players from the earliest stages of European Chess up to the
present day. In order to facilitate the analysis of this opening, as far
as our narrow limits will permit, we shall divide it into its three
principal heads; viz., The King’s Knight’s Gambit, The Allgaier Gambit,
and the King’s Bishop’s Gambit, and afterwards devote a few words to the
Gambit Declined.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. P. to K. B’s 4th. 2. P. takes P.
3. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 3. P. to K. Kt.’s 4th.
This is Black’s best move, indeed the only one to retain the gambit
pawn. He, however, may obtain a nearly equal game by 3. P. to Q,’s 4th.
If he play 3. B. to K’s 2d, commonly known as the Cunningham Gambit,
White replies with B. to Q. B’s 4th, and on Black’s checking with B. at
R’s 5th, plays K. to B’s sq., with a much better game.
4. B. to Q. B’s 4th. 4. B. to K. Kt.’s 2d (best), or
Var. A.
5. P. to Q B’s 3d. 5. P. to K. R’s 3d. (best.)
Should Black play the obvious-looking move of 4. P. to Q’s 3d, White
gains a striking advantage by the following mode of play:--
6. Q. to Q. Kt.’s 3d. 6. Q. to K’s 2d.
7. Q. to Q. Kt.’s 5th. (ch.) 7. B. on P. interposes.
8. Q. takes K. Kt.’s P., &c.
6. P. to Q’s 4th. 6. P. to Q’s 3d.
7. Castles. 7. Q’s Kt. to Q’s 2d.
This is usually considered his best move, though Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d, or
K’s Kt. to K’s 2d, are perhaps equally good.
8. P. to K. Kt.’s 3d. 8. P. to K. Kt.’s 5th.
If he takes P. with P., you get a fine attack by B. takes K. B’s P.
(ch.)
9. Kt. to K. R’s 4th, (or to K’s 9. Kt. to Q. Kt.’s 3d.
sq.)
10. B. to Q. Kt.’s 3d. 10. P. to K. B’s 6th.
He has a Pawn more, and a strong position.
N.B.--Instead of 5. P. to Q. B’s 3d, you may also play 5. P. to K. R’s
4th, with a good attack.
THE SALVIO GAMBIT.
_Variation A. on Black’s 4th Move._
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. P. to K. B’s 4th. 2. P. takes P.
3. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 3. P. to K. Kt.’s 4th.
4. B. to Q. B’s 4th. 4. P. to K. Kt.’s 5th.
5. Kt. to K’s 5th. 5. Q. to K. R’s 5th. (ch.)
Instead of 5. Kt. to K’s 5th, you may castle, for which see Game II.
(The Muzio Gambit.)
6. K. to B’s sq. 6. K’s Kt. to R’s 3d.
7. P. to Q’s 4th. 7. P. to K. B’s 6th.
8. P. takes P. 8. P. to Q’s 3d.
9. B. takes K’s Kt. 9. Q’s P. takes Kt.
And Black has a fine Game.
You seem to have no better move than 9. B. takes K’s Kt.; if you play
Kt. to Q’s 3d, he replies with K. Kt.’s P. takes P., and your game is
gone.
GAME II.--THE MUZIO GAMBIT.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. P. to B’s 4th. 2. P. takes P.
3. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 3. P. to K. Kt.’s 4th.
4. B. to Q. B’s 4th. 4. P. to K. Kt.’s 5th.
5. Castles. 5. P. takes Kt.
This sacrifice of the Kt., daring as it may appear at first sight, is,
nevertheless, considered by modern analysis to be quite sound.
6. Q. takes P. 6. Q. to K. B’s 3d. (best.)
7. P. to K’s 5th. 7. Q. takes K’s P.
Your 7th move is given by most of “the books” as the best. We have found
Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d at this point a strong move in actual play.
8. P. to Q’s 3d. 8. K’s B. to R’s 3d.
9. Q’s B. to Q’s 2d. 9. K’s Kt. to K’s 2d.
10. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 10. P. to Q. B’s 3d.
Some authors recommend Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d as more attacking than the move
in the text. It has however been proved untenable in the “Handbook”
(page 281.)
11. Q’s R. to K’s sq. 11. Q. to Q. B’s 4th. (ch.)
12. K. to R’s sq. 12. P. to Q’s 4th.
Mr. Staunton recommends 12. R. to K. B’s 2d, instead of retiring the
King to R’s sq. We have tried this move in actual play, following it up
with Q’s R. to K. B’s sq., which seems to give White an overwhelming
attack.
13. Q. to K. R’s 5th. 13. Q. to Q’s 3d.
14. B. takes Q. P. 14. P. takes B.
15. Kt. takes Q’s P. 15. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
16. Q’s B. to his 3d. 16. Q. to K. Kt.’s 3d.
17. R. takes Kt. (ch.) 17. K. to B’s sq.
The moves up to this point, both for attack and defence, are given by
Jaenisch and the “Handbook” as the best the board affords; with the best
play, probably the game ought to be drawn.
We much regret that our space will not allow of a more elaborate
analysis of this beautiful gambit; we trust, however, that the above
variations will show the young player the difficulty and resource of
this opening.
We cannot quit the subject without alluding to a defence lately
introduced by Messrs. Kling and Horwitz, which consists in Black’s
playing Q. to K’s 2d at his 5th move, instead of taking the Kt. With all
deference and respect for the wonderful and almost inexhaustible power
of analysis displayed by these two eminent players, we must confess that
we have our doubts as to the soundness of the move in question. The
young players, however, will find it full analysed in Kling and
Horwitz’s “Chess Studies,” one of the most valuable and interesting
works on Chess of modern days, which needs not our recommendation to
find its way to the book-shelf of every lover of Chess.
GAME I.--THE ALLGAIER GAMBIT.
This opening, the invention of which is erroneously ascribed to
Allgaier, has of late years become a favourite with all classes of
players, though we agree with Mr. Boden in considering that its
resources have been considerably overrated, although not perhaps from
the same reason as adduced in his “Popular Introduction.”
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. P. to K. B’s 4th. 2. P. takes P.
3. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 3. P. to K. Kt.’s 4th.
4. P. to K. R’s 4th. 4. P. to K. Kt.’s 5th.
You may here play your Kt. to K’s 5th, or to K. Kt.’s 5th. Modern
authorities agree in recommending the former, as giving a more lasting
attack. As, however, some very embarrassing positions may arise from
playing the Kt. to his 5th, we will examine the consequences resulting
from it at present, leaving the move of 5. Kt. to K’s 5th for after
examination, (Game II.).
5. Kt. to Kt.’s 5th. 5. P. to K. R’s 3d. (best.)
6. Kt. takes K. B’s P. 6. K. takes Kt.
7. B. to Q. B’s 4th. (ch.) 7. P. to Q’s 4th.
Your 7th move gives a far more embarrassing attack than the old move of
Q. takes K. Kt.’s P., to which Black replies, K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. with a
winning position.
In the present game Black’s reply of P. to Q’s 4th is his only move. If
he retire K. to Kt.’s sq., you must gain some advantage by Q. takes K.
Kt.’s P., &c.
8. B. takes P. (ch.) 8. K. to K’s sq.
In our opinion the move of K. to K’s sq. is preferable to K. to Kt.’s
2d. At all events the defence seems much simpler, and at least as
satisfactory.
9. P. to Q’s 4th. 9. P. to K. B’s 6th. (best.)
10. P. takes P. 10. B. to K’s 2d.
With a winning game.
GAME II.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. P. to K. B’s 4th. 2. P. takes P.
3. K. Kt.’s to B’s 3d. 3. P. to K. Kt.’s 4th.
4. P. to K. R’s 4th. 4. P. to K. Kt.’s 5th.
6. Kt. to K’s 5th. 5. P. to K. R’s 4th.
Black’s 5th move has been recommended by almost all the authorities as
the correct reply; although the moves 5. P. to Q’s 3d; 5. B. to K’s 2d;
or 5. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d, seem, to say the least, equally advantageous
for the second player.
6. B. to Q. B’s 4th. 6. Kt. to K. R’s 3d.
7. P. to Q’s 4th. 7. P. to K. B’s 6th.
8. P. takes P. (best.) 8. P. to Q’s 3d.
9. Kt. to Q’s 3d. 9. B. to K’s 2d.
10. B. to K’s 3d.
This is the move given by the “books;” B. to K. B’s 4th, however,
appears at least as good.
10. B. takes K. R’s P. (ch.)
11. K. to Q’s 2d. 11. P. takes P.
12. Q. takes P. 12. B. to K. Kt.’s 5th.
13. Q. to K. B’s 4th. 13. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
One of the advantages of the move 10. B. to K. B’s 4th, as suggested
above, seems to be that the White Q. could not be played to K’s 3d,
instead of the more assailable part of K. B’s 4th.
14. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
And the game, in spite of the formidable appearance of the adverse
Bishops, seems in White’s favour, from the disposition of his forces, so
well calculated for a vigorous assault.
N.B.--It would be very unadvisable for Black to reply to White’s move of
Kt. to Q. B’s 3d. with Kt. takes Q’s P.
14. Kt. takes Q’s P.
15. B. takes Kt. 15. B. to K. Kt.’s 4th.
16. B. takes K’s R. 16. B. takes Q. (ch.)
17. Kt. takes B.
And White has a more than ample equivalent for his lost Queen, and a
considerable superiority of position.
GAME I.--THE BISHOP’S GAMBIT.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. P. to K. B’s 4th. 2. P. takes P.
3. B. to Q. B’s 4th. 3. Q. to K. R’s 5th. (ch.)
Black’s 3d move is the one generally recommended at this point. He has,
however, the option of several other moves, the most important of which
seems to be P. to Q’s 4th. (See Game II.)
4. K. to B’s sq. 4. P. to K. Kt.’s 4th. (best.)
If Black, instead of the move in the text, play B. to Q. B’s 4th, a move
frequently adopted by young players, you reply with P. to Q.’s 4th and
K’s Kt. to B’s 3d, with a fine position.
5. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 5. B. to K. Kt.’s 2d. (best.)
6. P. to Q’s 4th. 6. P. to Q’s 3d.
7. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 7. Q. to K. R’s 4th.
8. P. to K. R’s 4th. 8. P. to K. R’s 3d.
9. P. to K’s 5th. 9. P. takes P.
Major Jaenisch, to whom we owe almost all our knowledge of this fine
opening, at one time we believe recommended 9. B. to K. Kt.’s 5th for
Black, instead of P. takes P., but has we believe qualified his opinion
in favour of the move in the text.
10. Q’s Kt. to Q’s 5th. 10. K. to Q’s sq.
11. P. takes P. 11. B. to Q’s 2d.
12. K. to Kt.’s sq. 12. Q. to K. Kt.’s 3d.
13. P. takes P. 13. P. takes P.
14. R. takes R. 14. B. takes R.
15. K’s Kt. takes P. 15. Q. takes K’s Kt.
This sacrifice is the invention of Petroff, the great Russian master;
and without the greatest care in the defence, will give you an
overpowering attack.
16. Q’s B. takes P. 16. Q. to K. Kt.’s 3d. (best.)
17. P. to K’s 6th. 17. P. takes P.
18. Kt. takes Q. B’s P. 18. P. to K’s 4th.
19. Kt. to K’s 6th. (ch.)
GAME II.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. P. to K. B’s 4th. 2. P. takes P.
3. B. to Q. B’s 4th. 3. P. to Q’s 4th.
We would recommend this defence to the young player, (especially when
receiving the odds of a piece,) as it leads at once to at least an even
game, and avoids an intricate and difficult series of moves, the least
error in which would be fatal.
4. B. takes P. 4. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
5. Q. to K’s 2d. 5. Kt. takes B.
This is probably your best move, though Kt. to Q. B’s 3d, may be played
without danger.
6. P. takes Kt. (dis. ch.) 6. B. to K’s 2d.
7. Q. to K. B’s 3d. (best.) 7. B. to K. R’s 5th. (ch.)
8. P. to K. Kt.’s 3d. 8. P. takes P.
9. P. takes P. 9. B. to K. Kt.’s 4th.
10. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
The game is about even.
Instead of Black’s 8th move of P. takes P., Mr. Staunton suggests the
highly ingenious move of castling; and the game would probably be
continued thus:--
8. Castles.
9. Kt. to K’s 2d. (best.) 9. R. to K’s sq.
This is your best reply, if you capture either B. or P. you lose in a
few moves. (See the “Handbook,” p. 335.)
10. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 10. B. to K. B’s 3d.
We do not see that Black has anything better.
11. Q’s Kt. to K’s 4th.
And White has some little advantage. It is worth while remarking, that
if Black now adopt the tempting move of B. to K. Kt.’s 5th, White will
win at least a pawn. We leave the “modus operandi” for the investigation
of the young player.
We cannot take our leave of this inexhaustible opening, without once
more recommending the amateur who is ambitious of becoming initiated
into the mysteries of the Bishop’s Gambit, to study the admirable
articles on this début, published by Major Jaenisch, in the late volumes
of the “Chess-Player’s Chronicle,” which exhibit, perhaps, the most
patient and profound analysis the annals of Chess have ever produced.
THE GAMBIT REFUSED.
The refusal of the gambit, though it may be done with perfect safety,
generally leads to a dull and uninteresting game; we would therefore
advise the young player to accept the proffered pawn, more especially
when receiving the odds of a piece, as he will gain more knowledge of
the game by observing the manner in which a fine player pursues his
attack, than can be obtained from all the works that have ever been
written on the subject.
GAME I.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. P. to K. B’s 4th. 2. B. to Q. B’s 4th.
This has usually been received as the best method of declining the
gambit, though a preference has sprung up lately in favour of P. to Q’s
4th (See Game II.). Major Jaenisch recommends K’s Kt. to B’s 3d, to
which you reply with P. takes P.; and upon his taking K’s P. with Kt.,
you play K’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
3. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 3. P. to Q’s 3d.
4. P. to Q. B’s 3d. 4. B. to K. Kt.’s 5th.
5. P. to K. R’s 3d. 5. B. takes Kt.
We believe your 5th move is now more generally preferred to B. to K’s
2d. You may also play 5. P. to Q’s 4th., though it is somewhat
hazardous.
6. Q. takes B. 6. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
7. B. to Q. B’s 4th, or Kt.’s 5th.
And the game is about even.
GAME II.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. P. to K. B’s 4th 2. P. to Q’s 4th.
3. P. takes Q’s P. 3. P. to K’s 5th. (best.)
You may also play 3. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d., apparently without danger.
4. P. to Q’s 4th. 4. Q. takes Q’s P.
Your 4th move seems far stronger than the usually received play of B. to
Q. Kt.’s 5th. (ch.)
5. P. to Q. B’s 4th. 5. Q. to Q’s sq.
6. B. to Q. B’s 4th.
You have the better game.
THE CENTRE GAMBIT.
This opening, though passed over by many of the books, frequently gives
birth to many beautiful and critical positions, and unless properly
opposed, is very embarrassing.
GAME I.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. P. to Q’s 4th. 2. P. takes P.
3. B. to Q. B’s 4th. 3. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
You may also play here P. to K. B’s 4th, a move as yet, we believe,
unanalysed. (See Game II.) Black’s reply is the correct one, whereby he
reduces the game to a position similar to one in the K. Kt.’s defence to
the King’s Bishop’s game. (For B. to Q. Kt.’s 5th. (ch.) see Variation
A.)
4. P. to K’s 5th. 4. P. to Q’s 4th.
5. B. to Q. Kt.’s 3d. 5. Kt. to K’s 5th.
Retiring the Bishop thus is far better than taking the Kt. with K’s P.
(See the Giuoco Piano for a similar position.)
6. K’s Kt. to K’s 2d. 6. P. to Q. B’s 4th.
If you play 6. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d., Black will gain some advantage by B.
to Q. Kt.’s 5th. (ch.)
7. P. to K. B’s 3d. 7. Kt. to K. Kt.’s 4th.
8. Kt. to K. B’s 4th. 8. P. to Q. B’s 5th.
9. B. to Q. R’s 4th. (ch.) 9. Kt. to Q. B’s 3d.
10. B. takes Kt. (ch.) 10. P. takes B.
11. Q. takes P.
Even game.
These are the moves given by Jaenisch, who seems to consider the
position in Black’s favour.
_Variation A. on Black’s 3d Move._
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. P. to Q’s 4th. 2. P. takes P.
3. B. to Q. B’s 4th. 3. B. to Q. Kt.’s 5th. (ch.)
4. P. to Q. B’s 3d. 4. P. takes P.
5. P. takes P. 5. Q. to K. B’s 3d.
6. P. takes B. 6. Q. takes Q’s R.
Perhaps your soundest move at this point is 6. Q. to Q. Kt.’s 3d, as
recommended in the German Handbook, although, by the mode of play in the
text, you get an attack that amply compensates for the loss of the
“exchange.”
7. Q. to Q. Kt.’s 3d. 7. Q. to K. B’s 3d.
8. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
Afterwards playing Kt. to K’s 2d, with a fine position.
GAME II.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to K’s 4th. 1. P. to K’s 4th.
2. P. to Q’s 4th. 2. P. takes P.
3. P. to K. B’s 4th. 3. B. to Q. B’s 4th.
This appears to be his best reply.
4. B. to Q. B’s 4th. 4. P. to Q’s 3d.
By your last move you threatened to take his K. B’s P. (checking) and if
he took your Bishop with King, to play Q. to K. R’s 5th. (ch.) &c. If
Black, instead of P. to Q’s 3d, play K’s Kt. to B’s 3d, you reply with
P. to K’s 5th; and upon his playing P. to Q’s 4th, you must gain some
advantage by capturing his Kt. with K’s P.--a mode of play not feasible
in a similar position in the Giuoco Piano.
5. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 5. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
If he play B. to K. Kt.’s 5th, you reply with P. to K’s 5th, and should
he take P. with P. you get a winning position by B. takes K. B’s P.
(ch.)
6. Castles. 6. P. to Q’s 6th.
7. K. to R’s sq. 7. P. takes P. (dis. ch.)
8. Q. takes P.
And though minus a pawn, you have an ample equivalent in the attack. It
is highly probable that many moves, both of attack and defence, in this
somewhat novel variation may be improved upon. I only regret that I am
precluded, both by want of time and space, from going further into the
variations.
THE QUEEN’S GAMBIT.
GAME I.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to Q’s 4th. 1. P. to Q’s 4th.
2. P. to Q. B’s 4th. 2. P. takes P.
It is considered more advisable to decline the gambit. (See Game II.) By
taking the Pawn, Black generally subjects himself to some slight
inferiority of position.
3. P. to K’s 3d. 3. P. to K’s 4th.
Your move of P. to K’s 3d, appears somewhat preferable to P. to K’s 4th,
as recommended by the “classical” writers on Chess, to which Black would
equally reply with P. to K’s 4th, with an even game. It is worth while
remarking, that if he attempt to sustain the gambit pawn by P. to Q.
Kt.’s 4th, you gain the advantage. (See Variation A.)
4. K’s B. takes P. 4. P. takes Q’s P.
5. P. takes P. 5. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
6. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 6. B. to Q’s 3d.
7. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 7. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
8. Castles. 8. Castles.
9. P. to K. R’s 3d. 9. P. to K. R’s 3d.
White has perhaps a slightly better position.
_Variation A. on Black’s 3d Move_.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to Q’s 4th. 1. P. to Q’s 4th.
2. P. to Q. B’s 4th. 2. P. takes P.
3. P. to K’s 3d. 3. P. to Q. Kt.’s 4th.
4. P. to Q. R’s 4th. 4. B. to Q’s 2d.
If he play P. to Q. B’s 3d, you take Pawn with Pawn, and on his
retaking, win a piece by Q. to K. B’s 3d.
5. P. takes P. 5. B. takes P.
6. P. to Q. Kt.’s 3d. 6. Q. to Q’s 4th.
7. P. takes P. 7. B. takes P.
8. Q. to Q. R’s 4th. (ch.) winning a piece.
These moves are from Mr. Staunton’s Handbook.
GAME II.
WHITE. BLACK.
1. P. to Q’s 4th. 1. P. to Q’s 4th.
2. P. to Q. B’s 4th. 2. P. to K’s 3d.
This is now acknowledged to be his best method of declining the gambit.
3. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 3. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
4. P. to K’s 3d. 4. P. to Q. B’s 4th.
Your 4th move is the one given by all “the books.” In the late match
between Messrs. Löwenthal and Harrwitz, the latter several times adopted
the move of 4. Q’s B. to K. B’s 4th, at this juncture, with advantage, a
sortie hitherto denounced by most of the modern writers on Chess.
5. K’s Kt. to B’s 3d. 5. Q’s Kt. to B’s 3d.
6. P. to Q. R’s 3d. 6. P. to Q. R’s 3d.
There is no advantage on either side.
We will now briefly examine those other methods of opening a game, which
either player may adopt in lieu of 1. P. to K’s 4th, or 1. P. to Q’s
4th.
The most important of these the second player has at his command to
reply to 1. P. to K’s 4th, are, 1. P. to Q. B’s 4th, and 1. P. to K’s
3d. It is true there are other moves, such as 1. P. to Q’s 4th; 1. P. to
K. Kt.’s 3d.; 1. P. to Q. Kt.’s 3d.; 1. P. to Q’s 3d.; but they are of
so rare occurrence in actual play, we shall hardly be justified in our
narrow limits for entering into an analysis of them.
[Illustration]
[Illustration]
THE YOUNG CONJUROR
INCLUDING SLEIGHT OF HAND WITH OBJECTS OR CARDS, WITH AND WITHOUT
APPARATUS.
From the very early ages of the world the art of legerdemain, commonly
called conjuring, has been known and practised. In some of the old
heathen ceremonies the priests made use of skilful deceptions, in order
to impose upon the people; and in ancient Egypt, in Greece, and in Rome,
the worship of the gods was frequently associated with mere tricks,
which were used for the purpose of obtaining an influence by a pretence
of extraordinary and supernatural powers. Among the Eastern nations
juggling was a profession, and to this day the jugglers of Hindustan and
other Oriental nations are so skilful that they are able to deceive even
the most acute observers. In our own country, after the Norman Conquest,
the juggler (who was called jongleur, or joculator) was a minstrel as
well as a conjurer, a reader of the stars or astrologer, and at the same
time a jester, a merry-andrew, and a teller of droll stories. These
jongleurs travelled from place to place, and exhibited at fairs,
feasts, and merrymakings, as well as in the houses of noblemen, where
they diverted the company in the great halls. In the fourteenth century
they gave more attention to tricks and feats of skill, and became known
as tregetours. The performances of some of these gentry were so
marvellous, that the common people believed them to be the result of
witchcraft, and classed the tregetour with the warlock and the sorcerer.
Chaucer, who no doubt had frequently an opportunity of seeing the tricks
exhibited by the tregetours of his time, says, “There I sawe playenge
jogelours, magyciens, tragetours, phetonysses, charmeresses, old
witches, and sorceresses;” and the old poet goes on to say of them,
“Sometimes they will bring on the similitude of a grim lion, or make
flowers spring up as in a meadow; sometimes they cause a vine to
flourish, bearing white and red grapes, or show a castle built with
stone, and when they please they cause the whole to disappear:” and in
another part of his works he says:--
“There saw I Coll Tregetour
Upon a table of sycamour
Play an uncouthe thynge to tell;
I sawe hym cary a wyndemell
Under a walnot shale.”--_House of Fame_, book iii.
Our learned monarch James I. was perfectly convinced that these and
other inferior feats exhibited by the tregetours of his day could only
be performed by diabolical agency. The profession had already fallen
very low, and at the close of the reign of Queen Elizabeth the
performers were ranked by the moral writers of that time not only with
ruffians, blasphemers, thieves, and vagabonds, but also with Jews,
Turks, heretics, pagans, and sorcerers; and in more modern times, by way
of derision, the juggler was called a mocus-pocus, or hokus-pokus, a
term applicable to a pickpocket or a common cheat.
The following pages are not intended to make the young reader either a
cheat or a trickster; there is nothing perhaps so utterly contemptible
in every-day life as trickery and deceit, and we would caution our young
friends not to cultivate a love of deception, which is only allowable in
such feats of amusement, because it is in fact not deception at all,
when everybody expects to be puzzled, and is only left to find out the
mystery the best way he can.
With this sage advice we shall present a collection of amusing conjuring
tricks, premising that a considerable number of tricks usually embodied
in this division will be found in that part of our work relating to
Scientific Experiments and Amusements, as they more properly belong to
“Natural Magic,” and are to be referred to the various operations of
nature in the several departments of art, science, and philosophy.
SLEIGHT OF HAND.
It is intended in the following pages to lay more stress upon those
tricks which require no apparatus than upon those for which special
apparatus or the assistance of a confederate is required. No one is
nearly so well pleased by a trick whose essence evidently lies in the
machinery, while every one feels pleasure at seeing a sleight of hand
trick neatly executed. The audience often despise all the numerous
boxes, bottles, variegated covers, and other gimcracks which are
generally seen on a conjuror’s table; and are seldom so pleased with any
performer as with one who does not even require a table, but presses
into his service articles borrowed from his audience. The spectators
should never be able to say, “Ah! the trick lies in the box: he dares
not show it to us!”
The following tricks have almost all been successfully performed, and
have caused some reputation in the magic art. Some of them are the
invention of one of the most eminent “conjurors” of modern times.
1. THE FLYING SHILLING.
This trick must be frequently practised before it is produced in public.
Borrow two coloured silk handkerchiefs from the company, and have
_three_ shillings in your hand, but only show _two_, keeping the other
one firmly fixed against the first joint of the second and third
fingers. You must also have a fine needle and thread stuck inside the
cuff of your coat. Then take one of the handkerchiefs, and put in _both_
shillings, but pretend that only _one_ is in the handkerchief; then put
the handkerchief into a hat, leaving one corner hanging out. Now hold up
the _third_ shilling (which the spectators imagine is the _second_), and
ask one of the company to lay the second handkerchief over it. You then
ask him to hold the shilling tight between his finger and thumb, while
you twist up the handkerchief. While doing so, with both hands concealed
under the handkerchief, you pass a few stitches under the shilling, and
replace the needle. This being done, spread one corner of the
handkerchief over the hand of the person who is still holding the
shilling, and, taking hold of another corner, tell him to drop the
shilling when you have counted three. At the word “three” he lets go the
shilling, and you whisk the handkerchief into the air, when the shilling
appears to have vanished, but is really held in the handkerchief. You
then tell the astonished individual to draw the other handkerchief out
of the hat by the corner that is hanging out. The two shillings are
heard to fall into the hat, and every one is persuaded that you have
conjured one of the shillings out of the person’s hand, and sent it into
the hat.
2. ANOTHER METHOD.
Perhaps the spectators may ask to see it again, or demand to mark the
shilling. In this case, vary it as follows. Ask some one (always choose
the most incredulous of the party) to mark a shilling of his own and
give it you. Take the same handkerchief and give him the shilling to
hold that is already enclosed in it, as in the last trick, dropping the
marked shilling into the palm of your hand. Twist it up as before, and
then leave it entirely in his hands. Direct him to place it on a table,
and cover it with a basin or saucer. Ask him to give you a cup or
tumbler, and hold it under the table, beneath the place where the saucer
is. Then tell him to knock three times on the saucer, and at the third
knock let the marked shilling fall into the tumbler. Hand him the
tumbler, and while he is examining the shilling to see if it is the same
one that he marked, take up the saucer, and shake out the handkerchief
that is lying under it, as in the last trick. You must then return the
handkerchief, and while you pretend to be searching for the marks, draw
out the thread that held the shilling and drop the coin into the palm of
your hand, taking care to rub between your finger and thumb the spot
where the threads had been, in order to eradicate the marks. This
variation seldom fails to confuse the company.
You must remember to keep talking the whole time, and always try to make
a joke, or otherwise to distract the attention of the audience, while
you are executing the necessary changes.
3. THE BEADS AND STRINGS.
[Illustration]
Ask some lady to lend you the beads off her bracelet, or have by you
five or six beads, which you may hand round for examination. Then get
some one to cut two pieces of thin string of equal length, and twist
them about your fingers, appearing to lay them side by side, but in
reality placing them as in the figure, and then, by twisting them
together with apparent carelessness, the manner in which they are
arranged will not be seen, particularly if you keep the point of
junction hidden either by a finger, or by throwing the shade of your
hand upon it.
When the beads are returned, thread them all, taking care to pass the
centre bead over the point of juncture. You then bring the ends of the
string 1 and 2 together and tie them so, doing the same with 3 and 4.
Now give the tied ends to two persons, directing them to hold them
tight. You need not fear that the beads will come off, even if they pull
hard. Then grasp the beads with both hands, directing the holders to
slacken the strings. You then, under cover of the left hand, which is
placed above the beads, slip the centre bead to one side, and draw out
the two loops which have been hidden in it. The beads will then easily
come off into your right hand. Tell the holders to pull hard, which they
will do, and the same moment remove your hands, showing the empty
strings and all the beads in your right hand. Then hand round the beads
and strings as before. Remember to rub out the marks in the strings
caused by the loops before you remove your hands.
4. TO GET A RING OUT OF A HANDKERCHIEF.
Bend a piece of gold wire into the form of a ring, having previously
sharpened both ends. You have a real ring made of the same piece of
wire, and concealing the false ring in the palm of your hand, offer the
real one to be inspected. When it is returned, borrow a handkerchief,
and, while taking it from the lender, slip the real ring into your left
hand, and take the false one at its point of junction. Throw the
handkerchief over the ring, and give it to some one to hold between his
finger and thumb. Let the handkerchief fall over it, and give a piece of
string to a second spectator, directing him to tie it round the
handkerchief, about two inches below the ring, so as to enclose it in a
bag, and tell him to do so as tightly as he can. While he is doing this,
take up your conjuring wand, a rod of some hard wood, about eighteen
inches long, and when the knot is tied, step forward, passing the rod
into your left hand, taking care to slip over it the real ring, which
has lain concealed there. Slip your left hand to the centre of the rod,
and direct each of the two persons to hold one end of it in his right
hand. Then tell the one who has the ring and handkerchief, to lay them
on your left hand, which you immediately cover with your right. Then
tell them to spread another handkerchief over your hands, and to say
after you any nonsense that you like to invent.
While they are so doing, unbend the false ring, and draw it through the
handkerchief by one of its points, carefully rubbing between the thumb
and finger the place where it came through. Hang the empty handkerchief
over the ring which is on the rod, and take away your hands, which you
exhibit empty, as you have stuck the false ring inside your cuff. Take
away the upper handkerchief, and let a third person come to examine,
when he will find the ring gone out of the handkerchief, and hung upon
the rod.
5. TO TIE A KNOT IN A HANDKERCHIEF WHICH CANNOT BE DRAWN TIGHT.
[Illustration]
Cast an ordinary knot on a handkerchief, and give the end out of your
right hand to some spectator, and tell him to pull hard and sharp when
you count three. Just as he pulls, slip your left thumb under the
handkerchief, as drawn in the cut, and it will be pulled out quite
straight without any knot at all. You must let go the end that hangs
over the left hand, and grasp the handkerchief between the thumb and
forefinger.
6. THE THREE CUPS.
[Illustration]
This is an admirable delusion, but requires very careful management, and
should be practised repeatedly before it is exhibited publicly. You get
three tin cups, of the shape shown in the cut. They should have two or
three ridges running round them at the mouth, in order to give a better
hold. Four balls should now be made of cork, and carefully blackened.
One of the balls is held concealed between the roots of the third and
fourth fingers, while the other three are handed round for examination,
together with the cups. When they are returned, the young conjuror
begins by placing each ball under a cup, or, if he chooses, asks one of
the spectators to do so for him. While this is being done, he slips the
fourth ball to the tips of the second and third fingers. He then lifts
up cup No. 1, replacing it on the table a few inches from its first
position, and at the same time slips the fourth ball under it. He takes
up ball No. 1, and pretends to throw it away, but in reality he slips it
into the place which the fourth ball had occupied. He does the same with
the three cups, and then commences a sham search after the lost balls,
in which he accidentally (!) knocks over one of the cups, and, to his
pretended astonishment, finds a ball under it. He then knocks over both
the other cups, and finds in them the two missing balls.
He again places the balls under the cups, taking care to slip the fourth
ball under cup No. 3. He then takes up cup No. 1 and pretends to throw
the ball into No. 3, but hides it as before. As there are already two
balls in No. 3, the spectators imagine that he really has thrown the
ball into it. He replaces cup No. 3 over both balls, and slips among
them ball No. 1. He then takes up cup No. 2, and goes through the same
process, and on knocking over cup No. 3, all three balls are found
together under it, and while the spectators are being astonished, ball
No. 2 can be quickly got rid of.
A rather startling termination to this trick can be managed by taking up
one of the cups with its mouth upwards, holding the finger and thumb
close to its mouth. Then by throwing another cup into it, letting go the
first and catching the second, you appear to have thrown the second cup
through the first.
7. TO TIE A HANDKERCHIEF ROUND YOUR LEG, AND GET IT OFF WITHOUT UNTYING
THE KNOT.
Hold the handkerchief by both ends, lay the centre of the handkerchief
on your knee, and pass the two ends below, appearing to cross them, but
in reality hitching them within each other, as represented in the
engraving, which shows the manner in which this is managed. Draw this
loop tight, and bring back the ends to the same side on which they were
originally, and tie them above. If the loop is properly made, it will
stand a good pull. Then, after showing the spectators how firmly it is
tied, put your hand under the knot, and by giving it a sharp pull, it
will come off.
[Illustration]
The engraving represents the manner in which the loop is made, but it
must be made considerably smaller than it is shown, or it will be seen.
In fact, it ought not to be a loop at all, as it should be almost
concealed under the fold of the handkerchief. Do not show this in public
until you can tie it with rapidity and precision.
8. THE MAGIC BOND.
[Illustration]
Take a piece of string, and tie the two ends together with a weaver’s
knot, as that holds the best, and arrange it over the fingers as
represented in the engraving. Having done so, let the long loop hang
loose, lift both loops off the thumb, draw them forward until the string
is quite tight, and then put them behind the hand, by passing them
between the second and third fingers. Then pull the part of the string
that is across the roots of the fingers, and the whole affair will come
off.
9. THE OLD MAN AND HIS CHAIR.
[Illustration: _Fig. 1_]
Take the same piece of string as in the last trick, hold your left hand
with the palm uppermost, and hang the string over the palm. Spread all
the fingers, and with the right hand bring forward the loop that hangs
behind, by passing it over the second and third fingers. Loose the loop,
take hold of the part of the string that crosses the hand, and pull it
forwards. When tight, pass it to the back of the hand, the reversal of
the movement that brought it forwards. Loose the loop, insert the
fore-finger and little finger of the right hand under the string that
encircles the left fore-finger and little-finger, and pass the two loops
to the back of the hand, as shown in the cut, Fig. 1. Tuck both loops
under the cross-string at the back, and your preliminaries are
completed. Then begin your story: “There was once upon a time an old
man, who stole a pound of candles. Here they are.” You then hold your
left hand as at the commencement, hook the right fore-finger under the
cross-piece at the back, and draw it downward until it is long enough to
be passed over the second and third fingers to the front. Pass it over,
and draw it slowly upwards, when the similitude of a pound of candles
hanging by their string will be seen. (See Fig. 2.) “The old man, being
tired, hung up his candles,” you then hang the long loop over your
thumb, “and sat down in his high-backed chair, which you see here.” You
then hitch the right fore-finger and middle finger under the two loops
that will be found hanging behind the left hand, bring them to the
front, raise them perpendicularly, and the chair will be seen as in Fig.
3. The thumb must be raised perpendicularly, and brought as much as
possible into the centre of the hand, or the chair will be all aside.
[Illustration: _Fig. 2_]
[Illustration: _Fig. 3_
1. Right fore-finger.
2. Right middle-finger.]
[Illustration: 1. Fore-finger of left hand.
2. Little finger of left hand.
3. Fore-finger of right hand.
4. Middle finger of right hand.
_Fig. 4_]
[Illustration: _Fig. 5_
1. Right middle-finger.
2. Right fore-finger.]
[Illustration: 1. Right fore-finger.
2. Left hand.
_Fig. 6_]
“When the old man was rested, it began to become dark, and he took a
pair of scissors to cut down a candle for himself. Here are the
scissors.” While you are saying this, you slip the loop off the thumb,
and you get Fig. 4. Move the blades and handles of the scissors, as if
cutting something with them. “Just as he had lighted it, in came a
policeman, and produced his staff, with the Queen’s crown at the top.”
Now let go the little finger of the left hand, and the loop will run up
the string towards the right hand, producing Fig. 5. “The old man in
vain tried to resist, for the policeman called a comrade to his
assistance, and they tied a cord round the old man’s arms in a tight
knot, like this,”--slip the right middle-finger out of its loop, and you
will obtain Fig. 6,--“and carried him off to prison.”
10. TO TIE A KNOT ON THE LEFT WRIST, WITHOUT LETTING THE RIGHT HAND
APPROACH IT.
[Illustration: _Fig. 1_]
[Illustration: _Fig. 2_]
Take a piece of thick pliant string by each end, and with a quick jerk
of the right hand cast a loop on it as in Fig. 1. The jerk must be given
upwards and towards the left hand, and its impetus will cause the loop
to run up the string until it falls over the left wrist, as in Fig. 2.
The moment that the forward jerk is given the right hand should be drawn
back, so that the loop is drawn tight directly it has settled on the
wrist. Both ends should be let fall when the knot is firm. This is a
very nice little sleight of hand to practice in the intervals between
more showy tricks, and, although rather difficult to learn, is soon
acquired.
11. THE HANDCUFFS.
[Illustration]
Let two persons, A and B, have their hands tied together with string, so
that the strings cross, as represented in the engraving. The object is,
to free themselves from each other without untying the knot. It is
executed in the following manner.
Let B gather up the string that joins his hands, pass the loop under the
string that binds either of A’s wrists, slip it over A’s hand, and both
will be free. By a reversal of the same process, the string may be
replaced.
12. TO PULL A STRING THROUGH YOUR BUTTON-HOLE.
Take a piece of string about two feet in length, and tie the ends
together. Pass it through a button-hole of your coat; hitch one thumb at
each end, hook the little fingers into the upper strings of the opposite
hand. Then draw the hands well outward, and the string will look very
complicated, as in the engraving.
[Illustration]
To get out the string, loose the hold of the right thumb and left little
finger, and separate the hands smartly, when the string will appear to
have been pulled out _through_ the substance of your coat.
It is an improvement of the trick, if, immediately on loosing the hold
of the right thumb, you change the string from the right little finger
on to the thumb.
13. THE CUT STRING RESTORED.
[Illustration: 1. The twisted string. 2. The manner of holding it.]
Tie together the ends of a piece of string, pass one hand through each
end, twist it once round, and put both ends into the left hand. Draw the
right hand rapidly along the double strings until you come to the place
where the strings have crossed each other, as seen in the engraving.
Conceal the junction with the thumb and finger of the right hand; hold
the strings in a similar manner with the left hand, and tell some one to
cut the string between them. You show that the string has been divided
into two pieces, and say that you will join them with your teeth. Put
all four ends into your mouth, and remove with your tongue the little
loop that has been cut off. When you take the string out of your mouth,
the spectators will not notice the absence of so small a portion of its
length, and will fancy that you really have joined them.
14. THE GORDIAN KNOT.
[Illustration: 1]
[Illustration: 2]
Take a silk handkerchief, and lay it on a table. Take each of the
corners, and lay them across each other in the middle of the
handkerchief, which will then be square, as in the cut, Fig. 1. Do the
same with the new corners, and go on until the handkerchief is reduced
to the size of your hand. Then with your left finger and thumb take hold
of the centre, taking care to grasp all the four corners that lie there,
and with the right finger and thumb take hold of the outer layer of
silk, and pull it towards you as far as it will come. Then turn it a
little on your left hand, and repeat the operation until it is all
screwed up into a tight ball, as is represented in the engraving, Fig.
2. No ends will be then perceptible, and a person who is unacquainted
with the mode will never be able to untie it. Of course you must prepare
it previously. When the person to whom you give it has failed to untie
it, you take the ball in your hand, and holding it behind your back, you
reverse the method by which it was tied, and when it is loose a good
shake will release it.
15. THE KNOT LOOSENED.
[Illustration]
This is a very amusing deception. You ask any one for a handkerchief,
and tie the ends firmly together in a double knot, allowing him to feel
it, or pull the ends as tight as he pleases. You then throw the centre
of the handkerchief over the knot, and ask the person to hold it tight
between his finger and thumb. You ask him if the knot is still there, to
which he will answer in the affirmative. You then take hold of any part
of the handkerchief, and direct the holder to drop the handkerchief at
the word “three.” You count, “one, two, three,” at which word he looses
his hold of the handkerchief, and there is no vestige left of the knot.
The method of managing this trick is as follows:--Take the handkerchief
and tie the ends in a simple knot, keeping _one end tight_, and the
other end loose. We will call the tight end A, and the loose one B. Keep
A _always_ in the right hand, and on the stretch horizontally, and the
handkerchief will look as in the cut. Do this when you tie it the second
time, and draw B tight, which will then form a double tie round A, but
will not hold it firm. When you throw the handkerchief over the knot,
you draw out A with the finger and thumb of the left hand, and the knot
will apparently remain firm, although in reality it is nothing but a
double twist of silk, which of course falls loose when the handkerchief
is dropped.
16. TO PUT NUTS INTO YOUR EAR.
Take three nuts in the left hand, show them, and take out one of them
between your right finger and thumb, and another between the first and
third finger. This latter is not seen by the company. You then put one
of them in your mouth and retain it there, unknown to the spectators,
while you exhibit the second as the one that you put into your mouth.
This second one you carry to your ear, as if you meant to insert it
there, and on replacing it in your left hand, only two nuts will be left
instead of three, the third of which appears to have gone into your ear.
17. TO CRACK WALNUTS IN YOUR ELBOW.
Conceal a very strong walnut in your right hand, and take two other
walnuts out of the dish. Place one of them on the joint of your arm, and
say that you are going to break it by the power of your muscles. You
will now have one walnut in your arm and two in your right hand. Close
your left arm, and strike it an apparently violent blow with the right
hand, at the same time clenching the right hand violently, which will
smash the second walnut in it, and the spectators hearing the crash will
be sure to fancy that it is caused by the demolition of the walnut in
your arm. Then open you arm very gently (for fear of dropping any of the
fragments, you must say), and, when pretending to take out the walnut
which you had placed there, you substitute for it the broken one from
your right hand.
18. TO TAKE FEATHERS OUT OF AN EMPTY HANDKERCHIEF.
Procure at the military clothier’s four or five large plumes, such as
are worn by officers. Take off your coat, and lay the plumes along your
arms, the stem being toward your hand. Now put on your coat again, and
the feathers will lie quite smoothly and unsuspected. Borrow a
handkerchief from one of the spectators, and wave it about to show that
it is empty. Throw it over your left hand, and with the right draw out
one of the plumes from up the coat-sleeve, at the same time giving it a
flourish in the air, which will loosen all the fibres of the feather,
and make it appear much too large to have been concealed about the
person. Wave the handkerchief again, and repeat the operation until all
the plumes are gone. You can carry enough plumes under the sleeve to
cover a table with, and if you prepare a board or an ornamental vase
full of holes, you can place the plumes upright as you take them out.
TRICKS REQUIRING SPECIAL APPARATUS.
None of the following tricks are wholly managed by the apparatus, as
such performances are unworthy of notice. Therefore, every trick
mentioned in the following pages must be carefully practised in private
before it is produced in public. The apparatus, of course, cannot be
inspected by the audience, and for that reason it is better to mix them
with those tricks which have been already mentioned, in order that
suspicious persons may be quieted by an occasional permission to inspect
the objects used in the performances.
The young conjuror should always vary the mode of performance in the
non-essentials, and should study combinations of one trick with another,
by which means he will produce more astonishing results than if he
restricted himself to the methods mentioned in this work. He should also
invariably make a little speech, acknowledging that he is only deceiving
the eye and not the mind, and should therefore request the company not
to ask any questions, or to demand inspection of any of his apparatus.
19. THE DIE TRICK.
Get a wooden die about two inches and a half square (1), and a hollow
tin die exactly the size of the wooden one, but without one of the sides
(2). Then paint them both exactly alike, as in the engraving. It will be
better to let an _accidental_ flaw appear on the same side of each. Then
get a tin cover (4) that exactly fits the dies. Now for the trick
itself.
[Illustration]
Borrow two hats, and while you turn your back upon the audience as you
go to your table, slip into one of them the false die. Place both hats
on the table, and send round the real die and cover for inspection. When
they are returned, say, “Now, ladies and gentlemen, it is my intention
to place these hats one above another, thus.” You then place the two
hats as in No. 3, the hollow die being in the bottom hat. “I shall then
cover the die thus,” which you do, “and after I have knocked on the
cover, I shall take it off, and you will find that the die is not under
the cover, as it is now,” taking it off, “but inside the hat, like
this.” You then put the real die into the hat. “You do not believe me,
ladies and gentlemen, but I will soon convince you.” You then take out
the false die, and replacing the upper hat, put the die on the upper hat
(of course, with the open side downward) and place the cover over it.
Pick up your conjuring wand, give it a few flourishes, and bring it down
on the cover. Grasp the cover tightly near the bottom, when both cover
and false die will come up together; put the end of your wand into them,
and give them a good rattle. Then knock off the upper hat with a blow of
the wand, and push the lower one off the table, so that the die tumbles
out of it. Always use plenty of gesture about your tricks.
20. THE PENETRATIVE PENCE.
Get a brazier to cut out all the interior of five pence, only leaving
the rims. He must then bore out nearly all the interior of a sixth
penny, merely leaving a shell of copper at the top. A long rivet must
then be let into the rim as shown in Fig. 1, No. 2, and a hole must be
drilled in each of the five rings, as in No. 3. The rivet is to be
passed through the holes in the rings, and fastened below, so that all
the rings can play easily upon it. Fig. 1, No. 1, is a section of the
entire apparatus, the dotted lines representing the rivet. They can then
be placed as shown in Fig. 2, No. 1, and no one will imagine that they
are only shams, as you can rattle them or move them about upon each
other. A leathern cover, Fig. 2, No. 2, is then made, which passes
easily over the heap of pence, but being pliable, is capable of picking
up the hollow pence with it, when it is held firmly. To the under
surface of the table you fasten a little shelf, Fig. 2, No. 3, which
moves on a hinge, and is let fall by placing the foot on the pedal, Fig.
2, No. 4, which draws the catch.
[Illustration: _Fig. 1_
_Fig. 2_]
To perform the trick, place six real pence on the little shelf, and have
the sham pence on the table. Take them up and rattle them, and put them
down as in Fig. 2, No. 1. Keep a sixpence in the palm of your hand, pick
up the sham pence, and as you put them down, slip the sixpence under
them, as you do the ball in trick 6. Take the cover, and put it over the
sham pence, make a short speech, and knock the cover with your wand, at
the same time pressing the pedal with your foot, which will cause all
the six real pence to tumble down with a great crash. Take up the cover
and false pence together, put the end of your wand into them and hold
them up triumphantly, showing the spectators that the six pence have
been replaced by a silver sixpence. While you are picking up the pence,
slip the sham ones out of the cover into your left hand, and take some
opportunity of letting the empty cover roll towards the audience, one of
whom you ask to pick it up and bring it you. This manœuvre generally
disarms all suspicion, for the picker-up is sure to examine it very
closely.
I have only given mere outlines of this really excellent trick, which
may be varied in a hundred ways, and is capable of combination with
other tricks to a large extent. It will add to its complicity, if a set
of six half-pence is also made like the pence. For the pedal may be
substituted a lever running immediately under the surface of the table,
if the performer prefers to have a short cloth on it. There should be
always two cloths on the table,--the lower one thick and soft, to
prevent jingling of objects, and the upper one white, as it displays
everything better than a coloured one. The ingenuity of the young
conjuror will easily find methods of varying this trick.
[Illustration]
21. THE DOLL TRICK.
Get a comical looking doll, and cut off his head diagonally, taking care
to do it very neatly. Drive a peg into the neck, and bore a hole in the
body, into which the peg fits, as in the cut. Paint his body and head
carefully, and if you put a gold chain or two round his neck, it will
conceal the line of junction. Make also a coat of silk, and sew a pocket
inside the edge of the skirt.
Take up the doll, and say, “Now, ladies and gentlemen, here is a very
learned man. Observe the development of his forehead, the sagacity of
his nose, the eloquence of his lips, the dignity of his spectacles, and
the philosophy of his pigtail. He is professor of astronomy at
Timbuctoo, and here is his gown of office. See how handsome he looks in
it. He is going to Amsterdam to see the eclipse of the last new comet.
He has the honour to wish you all farewell before starting on his
journey. Now, professor, we are waiting to see you go. Oh! you want
funds, do you? I beg your pardon; here is a shilling for you.” So
saying, you take your right hand from under the gown, taking with it the
body, and put the body into your pocket, while you jingle some silver.
The head is now supported by your left hand. Pretend to give him some
money, and then say, “What! you won’t go unless you have more! Get
along!” Hit the head a hard rap with your right hand, which drives it
into the pocket, which you hold open for it with your left thumb and
little finger. “Oh dear! the doctor is dead, and cannot be found.”
Saying this, you grasp the gown by the place where the head is, and
shake it about to show that it is empty. If you like, you can make
another oration and hold a dialogue, making the doctor resuscitate
himself, which is of course done by taking the head out of the pocket
with the left hand, and working it about by the peg.
22. THE FLYING COINS.
Take two sovereigns, or rather brass imitations, and grind them down
until they are reduced to half their thickness. Do the same with two
shillings, and fasten them accurately together, so that you will have
two coins, each having one silver face, and one brass face. Take one of
them in each hand, showing the silver side of one and the brass side of
another, and offer to change them without moving your arms. Shut your
hands, and the coins will turn over. Then, on opening them again, they
will appear to have changed from one hand into the other.
23. THE VANISHED GROAT.
Put a little wax on the nail of the middle finger of the right hand, and
take a fourpenny piece into the palm of the same hand. Close the hand,
pressing the wax on the coin. Then rapidly open it, and the silver piece
will adhere to the wax, and be quite concealed behind the finger when
you hold your hand up.
24. THE RESTORED DOCUMENT.
Make a memorandum book, and line the cover with paper which has been
previously rubbed with a mixture of lamp-black and oil. The paper must
be loosely affixed, so that it can be raised up, and a leaf from the
memorandum book placed under it. You must also make a flat box, having a
double opening.
You now take a leaf out of the memorandum book, and ask some one to
write a sentence, at the same time offering him the book to write upon.
The pencil with which you furnish him is very hard, and he is forced to
press upon the paper in order to mark. In so doing, the black is
transferred by the pressure of the pencil from the blackened paper to
the white leaf that has been placed under it, and of course makes an
exact copy of the writing. You then give the man his document, put the
memorandum book in your pocket, and go out of the room to fetch your
box, which you have _forgotten_. While you are out of the room, you take
out the leaf from under the black paper, and put it into one side of the
flat box, and shut down the cover that hides it. You bring in the box,
apologising for your absence, and give the box, open at the _other_
side, into the writer’s hands. Tell him to burn his writing in a candle,
and to place the ashes in the box. He does so, and closing the box,
returns it to you. You then flourish about a little with the box, wave
it in the air, bring it down with a bang on the table, strike it with
your wand, and then, opening it as at first, you produce the duplicate
leaf, which the writer acknowledges to be his own hand-writing. If the
lamp-black should have come off and smeared the paper, you can account
for it by observing that it is very difficult to get rid of all traces
of the burning.
25. THE MAGIC RINGS.
Get a blacksmith to make a number of rings, about six or seven inches in
diameter, as in the cut. A is made with a spring opening on one side, B
is a set of two rings forged permanently within each other, C is a set
of three rings formed in the same manner, and D D are two simple rings.
The rings should be about the thickness of a rather large blacklead
pencil.
[Illustration]
Lay the rings on one another, and they will all appear to be separate
and distinct; D D should be the uppermost rings, then B, then A, and
then C. Hand round D for inspection, and if any more are desired, hand
round the other D. When returned, you hang them over your left arm, or
grasp them in your hand, and tell the company that you are going to
weave all the rings together. You clash them together, and after going
through some complicated movements, bring out B, which the spectators
will think you have just fastened together. Hand them round. When they
are returned, mix them all up, and bring out C. Then take A in your
hand, and passing one of the outer rings of C through the opening, you
have four rings together. Then add D and you have five. Take off D and
substitute B, which will give you six. So you go on, weaving them into
all kinds of fantastic shapes. You must always conceal the joint in A
with your thumb, and contrive as often as you can to have one at least
of the rings D at liberty. This is a capital trick, and may be
diversified to any extent, especially if the number of rings is
increased.
26. THE FISH AND INK TRICK.
This is really a first-rate delusion. You bring before the spectators a
glass vase, full of ink. You dip a ladle into it, and pour out some of
the ink upon a plate, in order to convince the audience that the
substance in the vase is really ink. You then throw a handkerchief over
the vase and instantly withdraw it, when the vase is found to be filled
with pure water, in which a couple of gold fish are swimming.
This apparent impossibility is performed as follows. To the interior of
the vessel is fitted a black silk lining, which adheres closely to the
sides when pressed by the water, and which is withdrawn inside the
handkerchief during the performance of the trick. The ladle has a hollow
handle with an opening into the bowl. In the handle is a spoonful or so
of ink, which runs into the bowl when it is held downwards during the
act of dipping it into the vase.
27. THE CANNON BALLS.
The performer of this trick borrows a number of hats, and places them on
the table. He then returns each person his hat, and on turning it over,
a thirty-two pounder cannon ball rolls out.
The method of performing this delusion is as follows. Get a turner to
make a number of wooden balls, each the size of a thirty-two pounder
cannon ball, and let a hole be bored in each which will admit the
middle finger. The balls are arranged hole upwards on a shelf on your
table on the side opposite to the audience, so that the balls are nearly
level with the top of the table. When you take a hat off the table, you
slip your fore or middle finger into the ball just as you would into a
thimble, and by bending the finger, bring the ball into the hat.
[Illustration]
Any object may be brought into a hat in this manner, a great cabbage,
for instance, having a hole cut in the stalk.
28. THE SHILLING IN THE BALL OF COTTON.
Get a tinman to make a flat tin tube, which will just allow a shilling
to pass through it. Wind a quantity of worsted round it, so as to make
it into a ball.
These preliminaries having been accomplished, perform any trick that
will get a shilling out of sight, such as No. 1 or 2. Then tell the
spectators that you will bring the marked shilling into the middle of a
ball of worsted. Take down the ball from the place where it is lying,
drop the shilling into the tube, and withdraw the tube, leaving the
shilling in the ball. A good squeeze or two will hold it tight, and
obliterate every mark of the tube. Place the ball in a tumbler, take the
end of the worsted, and give it to some one to unwind. This being done,
the shilling will be found in the very centre of the ball, with the end
of the worsted wrapped tightly round it.
29. THE EGG AND BAG TRICK.
Get a chintz or cloth bag made double, and between the two bags make six
or seven pockets, each of which will hold an egg, and having an opening
into the bag. Fill the pockets with eggs, and you are ready for the
performance.
Hold the bag by the place where the eggs are, shake it, turn it inside
out and show that there is nothing in it. Then tell the spectators that
you are sure that there is a hen in the bag. Put your head near the
mouth of the bag, and make a clucking like a hen. You then say, “I knew
I was right, and she has laid an egg.” So saying, you put your hand into
the bag and take out one of the eggs, taking care to pretend to grope in
one of the corners for it.
This is repeated until all the eggs but one are gone. You then, after
taking out the last egg, say that some people think that the eggs are
not real, but you will convince them by ocular inspection. Saying this,
you break the egg in a saucer with your right hand, and while the people
are occupied with it, you drop the bag behind your table, or hang it on
a hook out of sight, and take up another exactly like it, into which you
have put a hen. “These are real eggs,” you then say, “and if any one
doubts their reality, they cannot doubt that this is a real hen.” You
then turn the bag upside down, and shake out the hen. If any one wishes
to inspect that bag, he can do so without being much wiser for it.
30. THE DANCING EGG.
Send for some eggs, and take care to place among them one which has been
emptied of its contents, and to which is fastened a long hair, at the
other end of which is tied a crooked pin. Borrow a small stick from one
of the spectators, and as you go behind your table contrive to hook the
bent pin into your coat, passing it over the stick. Then place the egg
on an inverted hat, and ask for some music, and directly it begins to
sound, a slight and imperceptible depression or elevation of the stick
will cause the egg to twist and roll about upon it as if it had life.
You must be careful to turn gently round now and then, so as apparently
to vary the distance of the egg from the body.
31. BELL AND SHOT.
Get a wooden bell made, so thick that there is a considerable space
between the outer and inner surfaces, especially on the upper part of
the bell. A hollow must be cut in this, and the handle so made, that
when it is at rest, it is forced upwards by a spring, and draws up the
round piece of wood to which the clapper chain is attached, and closes
the aperture, as shown in the engraving.
[Illustration]
You have a cardboard measure, which is of precisely the same capacity as
the cavity in the bell, and just wide enough to hold a farthing. Into
this you privately put a farthing, and then fill up the measure with
shot, heaping it a little, to compensate for the farthing. You make up a
tale about a man going out shooting, and ringing the bell of the
gunmaker’s shop. (You then ring your wooden bell.) How the man bought a
measure full of shot for a farthing, (you pour the shot into the bell
and back again two or three times,) but was so long haggling over three
shots, that the gunmaker took away the shot, (here you again pour the
shot into the bell, and by pressing on the handle, allow them all to run
into the hollow,) and kept the farthing for his trouble. The man went
out of the shop, but soon came in again, and rang furiously. (Here you
again ring the bell, which is now apparently empty, and invert the
measure on the table. The farthing not being held by the finger and
thumb will now fall on the tablecloth.) Then finish the story with an
account of the manner in which the man got back his farthing. When you
have finished, invert the bell over the empty measure, and on pressing
the handle, the shots will refill it. Do not touch, it until you have
done another trick or two, and then, when you put the bell aside, ring
it again, and remark that the purchaser was a silly fellow after all,
for here are his shots in his measure.
32. THE BURNED HANDKERCHIEF RESTORED.
[Illustration]
Get a tinman to make a double canister, such as is shown in the cut,
with an opening at each end. This must so slide within a tin tube, that
either end can be concealed within it alternately, as seen in the
engraving, where the end A is shown, and B is concealed. In this
position it looks like an ordinary canister. The interior is divided
into two parts. Into B put a piece of cambric made to look like a
handkerchief.
Borrow a cambric handkerchief, and say, “Now, ladies and gentlemen, I
shall burn this handkerchief to ashes, place them in this canister” (so
saying, you put it into A), “and when I have uttered a spell, it will be
restored perfectly whole. Will the owner say what mark it has?” While
the audience are looking towards the owner, you turn the canister over,
and push up the canister until the shoulder of B is on a level with the
top of the tube. When the mark has been declared, you open B, take out
the cambric, and pretend to verify the mark. You then put it into a
candle flame, and when it has burnt entirely to ashes, put the ashes
into B, shut it up, and rapidly reverse it as you turn round to your
audience, so that A is uppermost again. Then, utter any nonsense you
like, open A and take out the handkerchief uninjured. It rather adds to
the trick if you drop a little eau de cologne into A before commencing.
33. THE FIRE-EATER.
If the young conjuror is desirous of appearing in the character of a
fire-eater, it is very easily managed. He must prepare a piece of thick
string, by soaking it in a solution of nitre, and then drying it. He
cuts off a piece about an inch in length, lights one end, and wraps it
up in a piece of tow which he holds in his left hand. The trifling smoke
will be concealed by a huge bundle of loose tow also carried in the left
hand.
He takes a handful of tow in his right hand, puts it into his mouth,
chews it up, and appears to swallow it. He then takes another handful,
and with it the piece in which is the string. As he puts this into his
mouth, he takes out the piece which he has already chewed. By taking
breath through the nostrils, and breathing it out through the mouth,
smoke begins to issue forth, and the whole interior of the mouth is soon
lighted up with a glow. When the mouth is shut, and the tow pressed
together, the fire goes out, except the piece of prepared string. More
tow is then taken into the mouth, and treated in the same manner.
In this short account of conjuring, I have purposely avoided such tricks
as require expensive apparatus. Such apparatus is either entirely beyond
a boy’s reach, or at all events he ought not to be encouraged in the
notion of spending much money on objects of no real use. A boy of any
ingenuity will make the greater part of the apparatus himself, or at
least he can do the painting and polishing of his machinery. I have
mentioned no machinery that need cost more than two or three shillings
at the outside, and not that, if a boy is acquainted with the use of
tools.
TRICKS WITH CARDS.
In accordance with the previous rule, the principal stress is laid on
card tricks that require no apparatus, and may be performed with
ordinary cards.
1. TO MAKE THE PASS.
This is a necessary beginning for card tricks. “Making the pass” is the
technical term for shifting either the top or the bottom card to any
place in the pack that you like. It is almost impossible to describe it,
and I can only say that it will be learnt better in five minutes from a
friend, than in as many hours from a book. As, however, a friend is not
always to be found who can perform the pass, I will endeavour to
describe it.
[Illustration]
The cards are held in both hands, right hand underneath and left above,
as in the engraving, where, as the _bottom_ card is to be raised to the
top, the little finger is seen between that card and those above it. By
a quick movement of the right hand, the bottom card is slipped away
towards the left, and is placed upon the top card, under shadow of the
left hand, which is raised for the moment to allow of its passage.
This movement must be assiduously practised before it is exhibited in
public, as nothing looks more awkward than to see it clumsily performed,
in which case two or three cards generally tumble on the floor.
2. TO TELL A CARD BY ITS BACK.
While shuffling the pack, cast a glance at the bottom card, make the
pass, and bring it to the top. Continue to shuffle, and lay upon it by
degrees as many cards as you like, say six. Then lay the pack on the
table, face downwards, and divide it into seven heaps, beginning at the
bottom, and leave the seventh heap larger than any of the others.
When you have done this, take one card from the top of the seventh heap,
appear to calculate, and lay it, face upwards, on one of the other
heaps. Do so with five more cards, thus leaving your slipped card at the
top of the seventh heap. You then announce that by the aid of the six
cards you will name the seventh. You name it accordingly, after
carefully studying the other cards, and on asking a spectator to take it
up, it will be seen that you are right.
If you place five cards above the slipped card, you will lay out six
heaps, and if eight cards, there will of course be nine heaps.
3. THE CARD NAMED WITHOUT BEING SEEN.
As in the last trick, cast a glance at the bottom card, say the ace of
spades. Lay out the pack in as many heaps as you like, noting where that
one is laid which contains that bottom card. Ask any one to take up the
top card of any heap, look at it, and replace it. You then gather up the
heaps apparently by chance, but you take care to put the heap containing
the bottom card upon the card which has been chosen. You then give any
one the cards to cut, and on counting them over, the card that
immediately follows the ace of spades is the card chosen.
If by any accident the two cards should be separated when cut, the upper
card of the pack is the chosen one, and can be picked out with seeming
care.
4. THE CARD TOLD BY THE OPERA GLASS.
Make out a table, such as is given on the next page, Fig. 1, and place
it in an opera-glass, so that the figures will be visible when you look
through it. For convenience, I have made mine as seen in Fig. 2, the
numbers 1, 2, 3 in each series being understood. The best plan is to
write the numbers, or cut them out of a book, and paste them on a
circular piece of cardboard, which must then be soaked in oil, so as to
make it semi-transparent. The light will then easily pierce through it,
and the figures will be better visible than if it were opaque.
It will be seen that Fig. 2 contains as much matter as Fig. 1, and that
two-thirds of the figures are saved by it.
+------------+--------------+-------------+
| 1. 131 | 10. 132 | 19. 133 |
| | | |
| 2. 231 | 11. 232 | 20. 233 |
| | | |
| 3. 331 | 18. 332 | 21. 333 |
+------------+--------------+-------------+
| 4. 121 | 13. 122 | 22. 123 |
| | | |
| 5. 221 | 14. 222 | 23. 223 |
| | | |
| 6. 321 | 15. 322 | 24. 323 |
+------------+--------------+-------------+
| 7. 111 | 16. 112 | 25. 113 |
| | | |
| 8. 211 | 17. 212 | 26. 213 |
| | | |
| 9. 311 | 18. 312 | 27. 313 |
+------------+--------------+-------------+
FIG. 1.
-------+-------
/ | \
/ | \
/ | \
/ 1. 31. | 10. 32. \
/ | \
/ 4. 21. | 13. 22. \
/ | \
/ 7. 11. | 16. 12. \
| | |
+---------------+--------------+
| |
\ 19. 33. /
\ /
\ 22. 23. /
\ /
\ 25. 13. /
\ /
\ /
\ /
---------------
FIG. 2.
These preliminaries being arranged, tell any one to take any
twenty-seven cards out of a pack, and to think of any one of them. Deal
them into three heaps, and ask him in which heap it is, and what number
from the top he would like it to come after the third deal. Suppose he
chooses it to be the twenty-sixth card, you take up your opera-glass,
and look for the number 26. This you will find last but one, arranged
thus,--26. 213. The meaning is, that if the chosen card is to be the
twenty-sixth, the heap in which it was found must be for the first time
placed second, the second time first, and the last time third. So you
pick up the cards, taking care to keep that heap number two. You again
deal them in three heaps, and this time you place the heap in which is
the chosen card at the top, being number one. Deal them a third time,
and on gathering up the heaps, place it at the bottom.
Then, on counting from the top, the chosen card will be found to be the
twenty-sixth.
5. THE FOUR KINGS.
Take the four kings out of a pack of cards, and also two other court
cards, which are not to be shown. Spread out the kings before the
spectators, but conceal the two court cards between the third and fourth
kings. Lay the cards face downwards on the table. Take off the bottom
card, which is of course one of the kings; show it as if by accident,
and place it on the top. Take the next card, (which is one of the court
cards,) and place that in the middle of the pack. Take the third card,
(_i. e._ the second court card,) and place that also near the middle of
the pack. There will then be one king at the top and three at the
bottom. Ask any one to cut the cards, and to examine them when he will
find all four kings together in the middle of the pack.
It is better to use court cards to place between the third and fourth
kings, because if the cards should slip aside, they would not be so
readily distinguished as common cards.
AUDACITY.
Several tricks may be successfully played by sheer audacity. A whole
party has been astonished by the performer holding a pack of cards over
his head, and naming each. The fact was, that he was standing exactly
opposite a large mirror, in which the cards were reflected, while the
spectators, having their backs to the mirror, suspected nothing.
Here are one or two tricks that depend on audacity for success.
6. THE CARD FOUND AT THE SECOND GUESS.
Offer the cards to any one, and let him draw one. You then hold the
cards behind your back, and tell him to place his card on the top.
Pretend to make a great shuffling, but only turn that card with its back
to the others, still keeping it at the top. Then hold up the cards with
their faces towards the spectator, and ask him if the bottom card is
his. While doing so, you inspect his card at your leisure. He of course
denies it, and you begin shuffling again furiously. “Let me do that,” he
will probably say; so, as you are perfectly acquainted with his card,
you let him shuffle as much as he likes, and then, when you get the
cards back again, shuffle until his card is at the bottom. Then pass
them behind your back, make a ruffling noise with them, and show him his
own card at the bottom.
7. THE CARD FOUND UNDER THE HAT.
Have a needle stuck just inside your sleeve. Hand the cards, &c. just as
in the preceding trick, and tell the taker to put the card on the top.
Take out the needle, and prick a hole nearly through the top _left_-hand
corner. Replace the needle, shuffle the cards, or let any one shuffle
them. Place the pack on the table, cover them with a hat, and the marked
card will be known by a little raised knob on the _right_-hand top
corner. Draw out card by card, saying whether it is that card or not,
until you come to the marked one, which you throw on the table
carelessly, and when you are about taking out another card, stop
suddenly, and pretend to find, by some magic process, that it is the
chosen card.
8. TO CALL THE CARDS OUT OF THE PACK.
Tell the spectators that you will call six cards out of the pack. Secure
a card,--say the ace of spades,--in the palm of your hand. Throw the
pack on the table, face downwards, spread out the cards, give one of the
spectators your conjuring wand, and tell him, when you name a card, to
touch one, which you will take up.
First name the ace of spades. He touches a card, which you take up
without showing the face of it. This card may be, say the eight of
diamonds. Put it into your left hand, and place it upon the ace of
spades which is already there, so that the two look like one card. Then
call for the eight of diamonds. Another card is touched, say the queen
of clubs. This you put with the others, and, after pretending to
calculate, call for the queen of clubs.
Proceed in this manner until six cards have been drawn. Then substitute
the last card drawn (which is of course a wrong one) for the ace of
spades, and conceal it in the palm of your hand. Then strew the others
on the table, and while the eyes of the spectators are fixed upon them,
get rid of the card in your left hand.
It is a good plan to ask some one to write down the names of the cards
as they are called, and then to have the list called over, in order that
every one may see that there has been no mistake.
9. HEADS AND TAILS.
While you are shuffling the cards, contrive to arrange quietly all their
heads one way, or as many as possible, rejecting all the diamonds except
the king, queen, knave, and seven, and passing them to the bottom. Put
the pack upon the table, take off a number of the upper cards, and offer
them for some one to choose a card from. While he is looking at it, turn
the cards round, and offer them to him, in order that he may replace it.
Shuffle the cards, and on looking them over, the chosen card will be
standing with its head one way, while the others are reversed.
10. THE SURPRISE.
When you have discovered a card, the following plan will make a
_striking_ termination to the trick. Get the card to the bottom of the
pack, and tell one of the spectators to hold the cards by one corner as
tightly as he can. Give them a sharp rap with your finger,--not with
your hand,--and all the cards will be struck out of his hold, and fall
on the floor, except the bottom card, which will remain between his
finger and thumb. It has a rather more dashing effect, if you put the
chosen card at the top, and strike them upwards, when the whole pack
will fly about the room, like a flock of butterflies, only leaving the
top card in the person’s grasp.
11. THE REVOLUTION.
Another neat way of finishing a trick is as follows. Get the card to the
top of the pack; and taking care that all the cards are even, drop the
pack on the floor, taking care just as you let go, to slip the top card
a little off the rest of the pack. In falling, the resistance of the air
will turn the card over, and it will rest with its face upwards on the
top of the pack.
12. THE SLIPPED CARD.
Ascertain the bottom card of the pack; hold the cards in your left hand,
with their faces downwards. Place your right hand upon them, and with
your right fore-finger slide them slowly over each other, asking some
one to stop any card he chooses, by putting his finger upon it. When he
has done so, open the pack at that card, but while opening it, make the
pass, and bring the bottom card under the one touched. Hold up the
cards, and ask the chooser to be sure of his card; hand all the cards to
him, and let him shuffle as much as he chooses. Afterwards discover the
card in any manner that you prefer. The following is a good plan.
13. THE NAILED CARD.
Take a flat-headed nail, and file it down until its point is as sharp as
a needle, and the head quite flat. The nail should be about half an inch
long, or even shorter if anything. Pass the nail through the centre of
any card,--say the ace of spades,--and conceal it in your left hand.
Take another pack of cards, get the ace of spades to the bottom, and
perform the preceding trick. When the cards are returned, shuffle them
about, and exchange the pierced card for the other. Put the pierced card
at the bottom of the pack, and throw the cards violently against a door,
when the nail will be driven in by the pressure of the other cards
against its head, and the chosen card will be seen nailed to the door.
The nail should be put through the face of card, so that when the others
fall on the floor, it remains facing the spectators.
14. TO ASCERTAIN THE NUMBER OF POINTS ON THREE UNSEEN CARDS.
In this amusement the ace counts eleven, the court cards ten each, and
the others according to the number of their spots.
Ask any one to choose any three cards, and lay them on the table, with
their faces downwards. On each of these he must place as many as with
the number of the card will make fifteen. He gives you the remaining
cards, and when you have them in your hand, you count them over on the
pretence of shuffling them, and by adding sixteen, you will have the
number of points on the three cards.
For example, the spectator chooses a four, an eight, and a king. On the
four he places eleven cards, on the eight seven, and on the king five.
There will be then six cards left. Add to these six sixteen, and the
result will be twenty-two, which is the number of points on the three
cards, the king counting ten, added to the eight and the four.
15. TO TELL THE NUMBERS ON TWO UNSEEN CARDS.
As in the preceding trick, the ace counts eleven, and the court cards
ten each. Let the person who chooses the two cards lay them on the table
with their faces downward, and place on each as many as will make their
number twenty-five.
Take the remaining cards and count them, when they will be found to be
just as many as the points in the two cards. For example, take an ace
and a queen, _i. e._ eleven and ten, and lay them on the table. On the
ace you must put fourteen cards, and on the queen fifteen. There will be
then fifteen cards in one heap and sixteen in the other: these added
together make thirty-one cards: these subtracted from the number of
cards in the pack, _i. e._ fifty-two, leave twenty-one, the joint number
of the ace and the queen.
16. THE PAIRS RE-PAIRED.
Tell out twenty cards in pairs, and ask ten people to take a pair each,
and remember them. Take up the pairs in their order, and lay them on the
table in order, according to the accompanying table, which forms a
memoria technica, and may be construed. Mutus gave a name to the Coci,
(a people who have yet to be discovered.)
M U T U S [14]
1 2 3 2 4
D E D I T
5 6 5 7 3
N O M E N
8 9 1 6 8
C O C I S
10 9 10 7 4
[14] The figures represent the pairs, _i. e._ the 1 under M signifies
that M belongs to the _first_ pair.
Arranging these words in your mind on the table, take the first card of
the first pair, lay it on M in Mutus, and the second on the M in Nomen.
The next pair goes entirely in Mutus, being two U’s. The first card of
the second pair goes on T in Mutus, and the second on T in Dedit; and so
on until all the cards are laid in their places.
Ask each person in succession in which rows his cards are, and you can
immediately point them out. For example, if he says the second and third
row, you point out the second and fourth cards in those rows, because
they both represent the letter E. If another says the first and last
rows, you point out the last card in each, because the cards represent S
in Mutus and S in Cocis. It will be seen that the whole table consists
of ten letters, each repeated.
17. THE QUEEN DIGGING FOR DIAMONDS.
Select from a pack the aces, kings, queens, and knaves, together with
four common cards of each suit. Lay down the four queens in a row, and
say, “Here are four queens going to dig for diamonds. (_Lay a common
diamond over each queen._) They each took a spade with them (_place a
common spade on each diamond_) and dug until they were nearly tired.
Their four kings, thinking that they might be attacked by robbers, sent
four soldiers to keep guard. (_Lay an ace on each spade._) Evening came,
and the queens had not returned, so the kings, fearing that they might
have come to harm, became uneasy and set off themselves. (_Place a king
on each ace._) They were only just in time, for as they came along, they
met their queens being carried off by four villains (_lay a knave on
each king_), who, although only armed with clubs (_place a common club
on each knave_), had overpowered the guards and driven them off. But the
four kings, being possessed of bold hearts (_lay a common heart over
each king_), soon vanquished the villains, and bound them.” Gather up
the cards, place the heaps upon each other and direct some one to cut
them. Have them cut four or five times, and continue to do so until a
common heart appears at the bottom. Then continue the tale, and say,
“The party then returned home in the following order. First the queen
(_lay down the top card_) with the diamonds which she had found (_lay
down the second card, which will be a diamond_) in one hand, and her
spade (_the third card will be a spade_) in the other, &c. &c.” You
continue dealing out the cards in that manner, and it will be found that
they will be in precisely the same order as when they were taken up.
18. THE TRIPLE DEAL.
Take any twenty-one cards, and ask some to choose one from them. Lay
them out in three heaps, and ask the person who took the card in which
heap it is. You may turn your back while he searches. Gather them up and
put that heap between the other two. Do this twice more, and the chosen
card will always be the eleventh from the top.
19. THE QUADRUPLE DEAL.
This is a variation of the preceding. Take twenty-four cards, and lay
them in four heaps. Act as in No. 18, putting the heap in which is the
chosen card second. The tenth card will be the one thought of.
TRICKS WITH CARDS, THAT REQUIRE APPARATUS.
One or two of these tricks must suffice, because, in general, the
apparatus required for cards is exceedingly expensive. Those that are
here given require but little apparatus, and any boy with the use of his
hands can make it.
20. THE CARDS IN THE VASE.
Make a vase with five divisions, two of which hold an entire pack of
cards, and the remaining three are only large enough just to admit one
card each, as in the figure. A strong silk thread is fastened at A,
passes over the three little compartments, through the bottom of the
vase, and running over two pulleys, terminates in the weight at B.
[Illustration]
Take three cards, say the ace of spades, the ten of diamonds, and the
king of hearts, out of a pack of cards, and put one into each of the
little divisions, pressing the thread down into the bottom of each
division. If the cards are left, the weight will descend, and the string
being tightened, will push the cards upwards. So a kind of trigger shelf
is made, on which the weight rests. The remainder of the pack you put
into division 2.
When you show the trick, you take another pack of cards exactly like
that which is already in the vase, and handing it to three persons
successively, compel them to choose the ace of spades, the ten of
diamonds, and the king of hearts.[15] Let some one shuffle the cards,
and when this is done, put the pack into division 1. Tell the spectators
that when you have struck three times on the table, the cards will come
out of the vase. At the third stroke, loosen the catch on which the
weight stands, by means of a string that communicates with your table,
and the three cards will rise slowly up. In order to show that the cards
have really vanished from the pack, take the pack out of division 2 and
let any one examine it.
[15] This may be done by making the pass.
If you prefer, you can draw the thread yourself, by having a kind of
pedal under your table, to which the other end of the string is
attached, instead of being fastened to the weight B. If you prefer the
weight, you must have a small shelf for the weight to rest upon, when it
has descended sufficiently low, or the cards will be forced entirely out
by the thread. C is a representation of one of the divisions, showing
the semi-circular cut that is made in them for the convenience of taking
out the cards.
21. THE METAMORPHOSIS.
In this most excellent trick you choose from the pack the four eights
and the two of diamonds; you put the four eights in the left hand and
the two on the table; you take in the two, placing an eight on the
table, and they are all two’s. You exchange the two for the eight, and
they all become black cards; you again exchange the eight for the two,
and they all turn red; and after again exchanging, you have, as before,
the four eights and the two of diamonds.
The method of accomplishing this trick is as follows: Get three plain
white cards, exactly like playing cards, and paint them as in the
engraving. Mix them with an ordinary pack, and when you are searching
for the four eights, with which you say you are going to perform a
trick, take them from the pack, and with them an ordinary eight of clubs
and a two of diamonds.
[Illustration: _Fig. 1_]
Show the cards as in Fig. 2, making the spectators observe that there
are the four eights. Put the two of diamonds behind the eight of clubs,
and lay the eight on the table. The two must be inserted before the
eight is removed, or the mystery of the marking will be apparent. Close
the cards, turn them over, and spread them out, when they will appear
as in Fig. 3. Take in the eight and lay the two on the table; close the
cards, and while shuffling them, turn card No. 2 the other way upwards.
The cards will then all appear black, as in Fig. 4. Take in the two and
remove the eight, turn them over, and spread them out, when they will
appear all red, as in Fig 5. Finally, take in the eight, replacing the
two on the table, reverse No. 2, and you will have the four eights and
the two of diamonds just as they were at first. You must invent plenty
of talk during your changes. If the spectators say that the cards are
double, spread them out, and hold them up to the light, (for the light
cannot penetrate through the places where the cards are placed over each
other,) and if they are still sceptical, hand them the two of diamonds
to look at, and in a moment or two hand them the eight of clubs, asking
them whether they would like to examine a black card also. This will
effectually disarm suspicion.
[Illustration: _Fig. 2_]
[Illustration: _Fig. 3_]
[Illustration: _Fig. 4_]
[Illustration: _Fig. 5_]
22. TO CHANGE A CARD IN A PERSON’S HAND.
Cut very neatly the spots from a three of spades. Lay the pierced card
on an ace of diamonds, and rub pomatum on the ace of diamonds through
the places which the spades occupied. Remove the pierced card, and
sprinkle the ace of diamonds with jet powder, which adhering to the
pomatum, will transform the card into a three of spades.
Place the transformed card at the bottom of the pack, and show a person
what card it is. Make him declare it that every one may hear, then place
it on the table, face downwards, and push it over the cloth to the
spectator, which action will rub off all the jet powder. Tell him to
place his hand on the card. Let a three of spades be at the top of the
pack, and an ace of diamonds the second from the bottom. Show another
person the ace of diamonds, and ask him to tell the name of the card
openly. Put the pack down, face downwards, And in so doing, make the
pass, and bring the three of spades to the bottom.
Tap the hand of the person who is guarding the card, and then tell him
to take up the card and show it to the spectators, when it will be seen
to be the ace of diamonds. Simultaneously, you take up the pack, and
show the three of spades at the bottom.
CRYPTOGRAPHY.
The meaning of the word “Cryptography” is, as is well known, “hidden or
secret writings,” and was used in ancient times, when conspiracies were
common, and murders an every-day occurrence, as the means of
communicating from one person to another in such a manner that it could
not be read by any one save those who were admitted into the secret of
its construction.
A widespread conspiracy, or, as it would be more properly termed,
rebellion, could not be carried on between persons at a distance from
each other unless they resorted to cryptography; in fact, the means of
correspondence was in those times of so slow and dangerous a nature,
that without the utmost care and secrecy in the arrangement of the
cipher it would certainly have been discovered, and then death would be
the consequence.
In order to mature their designs in safety, and to throw off all
suspicion, men were obliged to put their wits to work and invent some
way of informing each other of everything that did transpire, so that no
one else should be the wiser for it: thus was cryptography discovered;
and wonderful cunning and ingenuity were displayed in its construction,
as will be seen by the examples that are given.
It was also used in former times in transacting affairs of state, in
communicating messages from one general to another in time of war, and
in many other ways of a more innocent nature, too numerous to mention.
Now, at the present time, when all is peace and prosperity, and news is
brought to our very doors by post and telegraph, cryptography is only
interesting as a curious study, or to amuse ourselves in an idle hour by
finding out its hidden mysteries.
The first and most common form of cryptograph we read of was by the
transposition of letters, and is, as we may see, capable of great
improvement; indeed, it is the basis on which most of the letter ciphers
are formed at the present day.
We give the following as an example:--
For--a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z.
Use--d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z a b c.
The sentence, “We meet to-night,” in this cipher would become, “Zh phhw
wr-qljkw.”
The next is formed on the principle of the above, but is rather more
intricate: for instance, if we wanted to inform some one that, “All
going on well, send supplies as soon as possible,” we should put it down
in the following order:--
a g s p s o
l o e l o s
l n n i o s
g w d e n i
o e s s a b
i l u a s l
n l p s p e
You must read it down the first perpendicular column, then down the
second, and so on. You must then form the letters in the horizontal
columns into imaginary words, and place them down on paper as you would
a common sentence, thus:--“Ag spso loelos lnn iosgwden ioes sab iluas
lnlp spe.”
You must arrange with your correspondent beforehand that the width of
the horizontal column should consist of six letters (or more, if you
like); so by placing the letters six in a line, one under the other,
without regard to words, the puzzle is easy to solve.
Another good cipher is by using the figures 1 and 2 differently arranged
for every letter in the alphabet, as will be seen by the following
key:--
a b c d e f g h i
11111 11112 11121 11122 11211 11212 11221 11222 12111
j k l m n o p q r
12112 12122 12211 12212 12221 12222 21111 21112 21121
s t u v w x y z
21122 21211 21212 21221 22222 22212 22221 22122
Now if we wanted to write the words “Come now,” we should do it in this
way, knowing that there are five figures to every letter, and when a
word is formed there is a comma:--
11121122221221211211, 122211222222222.
The next was a favourite of that unfortunate king, Charles I.:--
[Illustration]
The next is rather good and somewhat difficult:--
Divide a piece of cardboard into twenty-six departments, and in each
place a letter; then take another piece (small enough that the letters
on the first piece can be seen), and fit it into the centre of the
first, dividing this into the same number of departments; then put a
piece of thread through the centre of both, so that you can turn the
smallest card round, filling the spaces up with letters in any way you
like. Thus:
[Illustration]
In using the dial, turn it round until, say, the letter m in the middle
card comes under the letter A in the outer circle; next take what you
want to write, and find it letter by letter in the outer circle, putting
down on paper what appears directly under it in the inner circle.
Now if you want to write “I shall come soon,” first write the letters A
m, so as to enable your correspondent to fix his dial like your own, as
the A is in the outer circle and the m under it in the inner--“Am d
ufmyy rjxi ujjk.”
You may arrange your dial in any way you like, but must be sure to place
what letter is under the A at the beginning of your cipher.
The next is something like the last:--
[Illustration]
Now if you want to tell some one that “They are all coming over,” you
must write it down and place the figures 5, 4, 3 over every letter in
succession. Thus:--
5 4 3 5 4 3 5 4 3 5 4 3 5 4 3 5 4 3 5 4.
T h e y a r e a l l c o m i n g o v e r.
Then look for the letter T in the dial; the figure 5 being over it, you
must look for the fifth letter from it, which is O: put it down, and go
on to the next letter in the message, H; find H in the circle, and as 4
is over it, put down the fourth letter from it, D: for E, with the 3
over it, we must write down the third letter from E; and for the next
letter, Y, 5 being over it, the fifth letter; and so on, always counting
in the direction of the arrows. The cipher will run eventually: “Odbt
woz wig ylhekb kszn.”
The way to read this cipher is to put 543 down the same as before, and
to count them on the circle in the opposite way to which the arrows are
pointing.
The most famous and complex cipher perhaps ever written was by Lord
Bacon. It was arranged in the following manner:--
aaaaa stands for a
aaaab „ b
aaaba „ c
aaabb „ d
aabaa „ e
aabab „ f
aabba „ g
aabbb „ h
abaaa „ i & j
abaab „ k
ababa „ l
ababb „ m
abbaa „ n
abbab „ o
abbba „ p
abbbb „ q
baaaa „ r
baaab „ s
baaba „ t
baabb „ u & v
babaa „ w
babab „ x
babba „ y
babbb „ z
Now, suppose you want to inform some one that “All is well;” first place
down the letters separately according to the above alphabet--
aaaaa ababa ababa abaaa baaab babaa aabaa ababa ababa.
Then take a sentence five times the length in letters of “All is
well,”--say it is, “We were sorry to have heard that you have been so
unwell.”
Then fit this sentence to the cipher shown above, like this--
a a a a a a b a b a a b a b a a b a a a b a
W e w e r e _s_ o _r_ r y _t_ o _h_ a v _e_ h e a _r_ d
--- --- --- --- --- ---
a a b b a b a a a a b a a a b a b a a b a b a.
t h _a__t_ y _o_ u h a v _e_ b e e _n_ s _o_ u n _w_ e _l_ l.
------ --- --- --- --- --- ---
Marking with a dash every letter that comes under a B. Then put the
sentence down on your paper, printing all marked letters in italics, and
the others in the ordinary way, thus--
“We were _s_o_r_ry _t_o _h_av_e_ hea_r_d th_at_ y_o_u hav_e_ bee_n_ s_o_
un_w_e_l_l.”
The person who receives the cipher puts it down and writes an A under
every letter except those in italics; these he puts a B under; he then
divides the cipher obtained into periods of five letters, looks at his
alphabet, and finds the meaning to be, “All is well.”
Here is a specimen of a music cryptograph:--
[Illustration]
The next is good, but rather lengthy:--
a b c d e f g h
.:... :...: .::.. ...:. ....: .:.:: ..:.. :....
i j k l m n o p
::... ..::. .:.:. :.:.. ...:: ..:.: :::.. .:::.
q r s t u v w x
::::: ::.:: :.:.: ::..: :.::. ::::. .:::: :::.:
y z
:.::: .::.:
Here is the key of another:--
1 2 3 4 5
a b e d e--1
f g h i k--2
l m n o p--3
q r s t u--4
v w x y z--5
In picking out the letter you want, you must see under what number it
stands, then see what number is at the end of the line, then put those
two figures together, and they will represent the letter: thus, 15
represents V; 23, M; 43, O; and 55, Z.
The sentence, “We meet to-night,” would be--2551, 23515144, 4443,
3342223244.
The next is a very difficult and complex cryptograph to decipher.
Draw a table of four columns, like the figure below. In the first column
place the six different arrangements of the figures 1, 2, 3, and number
the other columns 1st, 2d, and 3d respectively:--
+-----+---------+---------+---------+
| | 1st. | 2d. | 3d. |
+-----+---------+---------+---------+
| 123 | t y c n | h r e m | e a o i |
| 132 | b e f s | y h i s | g t r t |
| 213 | e r e e | t m x w | a e n t |
| 231 | e r m c | k m a r | a h h y |
| 321 | l m r t | i c i h | l o e g |
+-----+---------+---------+---------+
You must agree with your correspondent how many letters wide each of the
three columns shall be--we will say four. Then take your sentence--say
it is, “They are coming by the first steamer next week from America; we
hope they will come right.” You must then place every letter down
separately, writing the figures in the first column in succession over
them, thus--
1 2 3 1 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 1 3 1 2 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 3 2 2 1 3 2
T h e y a r e c o m i n g b y t h e f i r s t s t e a m
3 1 3 1 2 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 1 3 1 2 3 2 1 1 2 3 1
e r n e x t w e e k f r o m A m e r i c a w e h o p e t h e
3 2 2 1 3 2 3 1 3 1 2 3 2 1.
y w i l l c o m e r i g h t.
Over the first letter, “t,” stands “1,” therefore write “t” in the
column marked first; over “h” is “2,” therefore write “h” in the second
column; over “e” is “3,” then put “e” in the third column, and so on;
but when four letters are written abreast you must begin a new line.
After doing the above, you must take the letters in each column
separately (beginning with the first), and form them into imaginary
words, putting a dot under the last letter of each column to show your
correspondent that the column ends there; thus--
Tycnb efse ree ermc w pee lmr[t.] hrem yhistmx wk mar eot wi ci[h.]eaoi
gtrtae ntfoei ah hyl oe[g.].
The person receiving the message knows the width of the column (four
letters), the arrangement of the figures 1, 2, 3, and the use of the
dots, and reconstructs his table directly; he then puts the letters in
order by a backward process to the one we have gone through, and reads
the message.
The next is a cipher of a different kind:--
O P | A B | C D
.| . |.
-----+-----+-----
| |
M N .| Q R |. E F
| . |
-----+-----+-----
.| . |.
K L | I J | G H
\ S T /
\ /
\ . /
W X . >-< . U V
/ . \
/ \
/ Y Z \
The dots stand for the last letter in each square: thus O would be ___|,
and P the same with a dot put in the middle, thus _._|. A |___| and B
|_._|
The sentence, “ROUTLEDGE’S MAGAZINE FOR BOYS,” would be
+---+ | / \ / ---+ +--- | +--- +--- \ /
| . | | < \. / .| | |. | | \ /
+---+ ---+ \ \/ | +--- +--- | +--- \/ ,
---+ | | +--- | | /\ +---+ ---+ +---
| | | | | | /. \ | | .| |
---+ +---+ | +---+ / \ | | ---+ +--- ,
+--- | +---+
|. | | . |
+--- ---+ +---|,
| | | /\ \ /
| . | | / \ \ /
+---+ ---+ / \ \/ .
In finding out the meaning of a cryptograph, you must first settle in
your mind to what class of cipher it belongs, whether it is written by
means of letters, figures, or signs; having done so, you must go to work
with patience, and try to find out, by means of perseverance and study,
what each figure, sign, or letter represents; as even the above
specimens of cryptography can be so altered and improved upon, yet
continuing in their original form to some extent, that it would be
impossible to give positive rules to enable any one to decipher any kind
of cryptograph; in fact, it can only be done by those who have made it
their study for years, and consequently have had great experience in the
matter.
Most of the examples given will only enable one to decipher the most
simple kinds, such as are generally found in magazines, &c.; for if that
intricate cipher of Lord Bacon’s were put in a book for boys, it would
be a waste of paper, as we will venture to say that not one in a
thousand would be able to find it out.
* * * * *
There is another class of cryptographs which we have not yet noticed,
and which are done by means of sympathetic inks, a list of which will
consequently be interesting.
_Inks which appear when heated, and become invisible when cooled_:--
Solution of nitro-muriate of cobalt; when heated turns green.
Solution of acetate of cobalt, with a little nitre; rose-colour when
warm.
_Inks which remain visible when heated, but do not disappear when
cooled_:--
Onion-juice, yellow; equal parts of copper and sal-ammoniac in water,
yellow; aquafortis, spirits of salt, oil of vitriol, and salt and water,
yellow or brown.
_Inks which appear when exposed to light_:--
Diluted solution of nitrate of silver.
Diluted solution of terchloride of gold.
[Illustration: PETER POUNCE, THE FIRST TEACHER OF THE DEAF AND DUMB,
INSTRUCTING A BOY.]
THE DEAF AND DUMB ALPHABET.
Amongst the many useful inventions which have been planned for the
solace of individuals deprived of some portion of their senses, the art
by which deaf and dumb persons are taught to express their own thoughts,
and to comprehend those of others, is one of the most noble. The
earliest attempt at a method of teaching the deaf and dumb was made in
Spain, towards the end of the sixteenth century, by a Benedictine monk
named Peter Pounce; and without doubt he must have formed his idea from
observing the natural propensity of the dumb to supply the want of the
organs of speech by making signs. After the essay of Peter Pounce many
successful trials were made, and in 1692 John Conrad Amman, a Swiss
physician, reduced the plans to a fixed method, or art, and published
the scheme of it at Amstelod. The first asylum for the deaf and dumb in
London was founded in the year 1792.
THE ALPHABET.
[Illustration: A]
[Illustration: B]
[Illustration: C]
A is expressed by touching the top of the thumb of the left hand with
the forefinger of the right.
B. Join the forefinger and thumb of each hand, and place the backs of
the forefinger nails together.
C. Bend the fingers and thumb of the left hand, so as to form three
parts of a circle.
[Illustration: D]
[Illustration: E]
[Illustration: F]
[Illustration: G]
D. Bend the fingers and thumb of the right hand into a semicircle, and
then join them to the forefinger of the left, which keep in a straight
line.
E. Touch the top of the forefinger of the left hand with the forefinger
of the right.
F. Place the forefinger of the right hand across the backs of the first
and second fingers of the left.
G. Clench both hands, and put one fist upon the other.
[Illustration: H]
[Illustration: I]
[Illustration: J]
H. Pass the palm of the right hand across that of the left, sweeping it
along to the tips of the fingers, as if brushing something off.
I. Touch the top of the second finger of the left hand with the
forefinger of the right.
J. Clench the hands together, as directed for the letter G.
[Illustration: K]
[Illustration: L]
[Illustration: M]
K. Form a semicircle with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand,
and join it to the forefinger of the left, which must be kept straight
out; both forefingers must meet at the second joints.
L. Place the forefinger of the right hand across the centre of the palm
of the left, so that the top of the finger may be exactly in the middle
of the palm.
M. Place three fingers of the right hand flat upon the palm of the left.
N. Place two fingers of the right hand flat upon the palm of the left.
O. Touch the top of the third finger of the left hand with the
forefinger of the right.
[Illustration: N]
[Illustration: O]
[Illustration: P]
[Illustration: Q]
P. Place the tips of the forefinger and thumb of the left hand in a
semicircular form against the first and second joints of the forefinger
of the right, which should be kept straight.
Q. Form a circle with the forefinger and thumb of the left hand, and
then curve the forefinger of the right into the shape of a hook, and
place it exactly where the other fingers join.
[Illustration: R]
[Illustration: S]
[Illustration: T]
R. Bend the forefinger of the right hand and rest it on the palm of the
left.
S. Bend the little finger of each hand and lock them together.
T. Fix the tip of the forefinger of the right hand against the middle of
the lower edge of the left.
[Illustration: U]
[Illustration: V]
[Illustration: W]
[Illustration: X]
[Illustration: Y]
[Illustration: Z]
U. Touch the top of the little finger of the left hand with the
forefinger of the right.
V. Place the first and second fingers of the right hand, apart, upon the
palm of the left.
W. Lock the fingers of one hand between those of the other.
X. Cross the forefingers at the second joints.
Y. Extend the thumb and forefinger of the left hand, and at the lower
part of the fork so made place the forefinger of the right hand.
Z. Elevate one hand towards the face, and rest the elbow upon the palm
of the other.
The end of every sentence is indicated by snapping the second finger and
thumb of the right hand. This result is requisite to avoid the confusion
which might result from running the sentences into each other.
THE NUMBERS
Are denoted by holding up one finger to signify 1, two fingers for 2,
the open hand for 5, both hands for 10, and so on.
DOMINOES.
There was a time when dominoes was a much more favourite game than at
present. In many old houses beautifully finished sets of dominoes are
yet kept, a memento of the favour in which the game was once, and still
deserves to be, held. For boys it is second to none, as it improves
their power of calculation, exercises their judgment, and leads them to
acquire a habit of estimating chances in connexion with numbers, which
is exceedingly useful in after-life.
The ordinary game of dominoes is played with twenty-eight pieces, which
include every combination of numbers, from double-blank to double-6; but
boxes of dominoes are not uncommon which have fifty-two pieces, or even
eighty-five pieces, one including double-9’s, and the latter
double-12’s. These are more used in the north than the south. The
dominoes are usually made of oblong pieces of ivory, frequently cemented
to an ebony back; whilst on the front they are divided into two parts by
a fine line across the middle, and marked with round black spots. These
are 1 and 1, 1 and 2, and so on to 6; then 2 and blank, 2 and 1, and so
on. Where a set of dominoes is not handy, a pack of what printers call
third-large cards may be made available, if they are marked with a pen,
and the backs kept perfectly clean. These may be shuffled and dealt in a
similar manner to playing cards; but the dominoes must be placed face
downwards on the table and “shuffled” by being well mixed together.
The turn to commence is called “the pose,” and is the same in all games
of dominoes. After the players have drawn from the bulk the number of
dominoes each requires, double-6 is called for, and he who has it plays
first. If it is not in hand, then the highest double plays; if no
doubles are out, then the call is from the highest domino to the lowest,
as 6--5, 6--4, and so on.
THE ORDINARY BOY’S GAME
Is played in two modes. The first is called the _French game_. After the
dominoes are well shuffled, each player (usually two) draws from the
bulk the number of dominoes agreed upon. Seven is the common number, and
this leaves fourteen dominoes on the table. The dominoes are either held
in the hand, or set on their sides on the table, so that the pips are
visible to the player only. In the north of England a small tin, angular
frame is used to hold the dominoes. The player holding the highest
double then plays first, and then each plays in turn by placing a domino
of the same number of pips to the domino played at either end when you
both have played. If your opponent cannot do this it is called “a go,”
and you can then play for him, until he can play. If you can play to
both ends, do not do so until you have exhausted your hand at one end,
and be sure to get out your doubles at the earliest opportunity, unless
by so doing you close both ends against yourself. By pursuing this plan
you can, when pressed, play at the ends closed against your adversary
the domino you have reserved for that purpose. When you have played all
your dominoes out, you win the game; or when neither can play, he that
has the lowest number of pips, not pieces, wins the game. It is best,
however, to play a definite number up, such as 30, 50, or 100. In these
cases the game is better played by the
_Second mode_, which is commenced in the same manner; but when you play
a double, and it is your turn, you can play it out and still keep your
turn. When your adversary cannot play, you play _for him_, and _for
yourself_ too, before he can play again. The game is counted thus:--When
one has played all his dominoes out, he counts the number of pips in his
adversary’s hand, and scores them in his favour; if neither can play,
the one who has the fewest left counts the other’s numbers, and
subtracts the number of his own, and scores the balance in his own
favour. Formerly the whole number was scored, but this is dispiriting to
the loser. In this game it is better to try to play so that neither can
go on again than to play out all the dominoes. By a little practice it
will be seen that heavy dominoes do not always lose, or light ones win.
In playing these and any game at dominoes it should be understood that a
domino once played should not be recalled, as it frequently destroys all
interest in the game. Sometimes it is understood that if the domino is
not placed on the table you may recall it; but it is better to play it
at once, as a skilful player can easily calculate the chances in his
favour.
There are two or three variations on the first method. In one the winner
of the game scores all the points left in his own hand (if any), as well
as those in his opponent’s. Another method is, when one player cannot
go, the other is not bound to proceed, even if able, but can at once
shut the game and count, if he likes to do so. Another variation is to
permit the second player, if he chooses, to take all the dominoes but
two left on the board. If he does not choose, the next player may draw
as many as he chooses (always excepting two); and if one cannot play, he
must draw until he can do so. The pose in this game is alternate, or is
taken by the winner.
ALL FIVES
Is a game played by four persons, two against two, each player taking
five dominoes. It may, however, be played by two persons only, when
seven dominoes are given to each, and none are afterwards added. The
score seldom exceeds 31, or any smaller number, and is marked on a
cribbage-board. The object of this game is to play so that the two ends
of the dominoes, after you have played, are a multiple of five. Thus the
first player endeavours to make a point by putting down a 5 and blank, 4
and 1, 3 and 2, each of which counts 5: if he has the double-5 it counts
2. The other players follow on in the same way, endeavouring to make 5,
10, 15, or 20, for which they score 1, 2, 3, or 4 respectively. This
game requires great caution, so as to prevent your opponent from
scoring, if you cannot do so yourself. 20 is the largest number that can
be made: thus, if there is a 4 at one end and a 6 at the other end, the
next player, having the double-6, plays it to the 6, and the following
player, having the double-4, plays it to the 4; doubles in this, as in
all other games of dominoes, being laid across, there are 12 at one end
and 8 at the other, making 20, or four fives. When one hand is played
out, or neither can go, the lowest number counts one towards game. This
is peculiarly a game of stratagems, and when one holds the double-5, he
generally tries to keep it until there is a 5 at each end, when he plays
it and scores 3, and generally, in that case, 1 for game as well.
THE MATADORE GAME
Is on an entirely different principle. You do not fit the same numbers
together, as in other games at dominoes, but you must add a number
which, when joined to one already there, makes seven. The double-blank,
the 4--3, 6--1, and 5--2, are termed matadores, and can be played at any
stage, and either end turned outward at will, for your opponent to play
to. Three dominoes only are taken at the outset, and if one of the
players cannot “go,” he must draw until he can do so, unless the number
of dominoes left on the board is reduced to two. The game is played 30,
50, or 100 up, and the winner counts to his score his opponent’s pips.
ALL THREES
Is a capital game for boys, and exercises the players in the four rules
of arithmetic. It is played similarly to the All Fives, only 3 is the
multiple instead of 5: thus, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, and 18 points count 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, and 6, respectively.
TIDLEY-WINK
Is a good round game. Any number can play, so long as there are two or
more dominoes left on the board, after three dominoes each have been
taken. The pose is settled as before; but the leader has the privilege
of playing to his double, if he can do so, and any person having a
double in his turn can play to it, if he can. The game runs round, and
the first person who plays out pronounces himself “Tidley-Wink,” and is
the winner.
THE FORTRESS.
When four persons are playing, this will be found one of the most
amusing of games. It is sometimes called “Sebastopol.” All the dominoes
are divided equally amongst the players. The double-6 is played first,
and then every person must play a 6 to the double, and thus form a
cross. The person who has not a 6 loses his turn. The play then proceeds
in the usual way, only that the player can choose which corner he likes
to play at. The result is a curious irregular figure resembling the
ground-plan of a fortress, with bastions, &c.; hence its name.
WHIST DOMINOES
Is also played by four persons, seven dominoes being given to each. The
persons in this case are partners, and sit opposite to each other. This
game is led off as all others, but requires considerable powers of
memory to play it properly, for it is necessary to remember not only the
numbers played, but who played it, and under what circumstances, so as
to help your partner’s hand and checkmate your opponent’s. Several other
games of dominoes may be played; but the foregoing, with their
numberless variations, will enable any one to master the principles of
any other introduced.
[Illustration]
DRAUGHTS.
“White to black and black to white.
Now give the challenge--wage the fight.”--CLARKSON.
[Illustration]
Draughts is a modern invention, and is a good preliminary to chess. It
is not so intricate a game, for the pieces are of equal value till they
become kings, and can only move one way; but like chess, success depends
entirely upon skill, and one false move frequently occasions the loss of
the game. Draughts seems to have come into vogue in Europe about the
middle of the fourteenth century, and for a long time there were two
methods of playing it; the one commonly used in England being the French
game, which is played upon a chess-board, and the other the Polish game,
which requires a board with ten squares or chequers in each row, and
twenty men. The men in the Polish game can only move forwards as they do
in the French game, but they have the privilege of taking backwards and
forwards, and the king, when made, if not opposed by two men close
together, can move from one corner of the board to the other The Polish
game admits of most variety, and is in our opinion infinitely the best,
but it is little played in this country, except by foreigners, many of
whom during the Great Exhibition year proved themselves adepts at the
game.
HOW TO PLAY THE GAME.
The draughtboard consists of sixty-four squares, black and white, and
there are twelve men, or pieces, of a white colour, and twelve of a
black colour to be used. The board should be placed with an upper white
corner towards the right hand. The players select each twelve men of the
colour they prefer. The pieces, or men, are to be thus placed on the
board: the black pieces on the _first_ twelve white squares, and the
white on the _last_ twelve white squares. When they are thus placed the
game begins.
THE MOVES.
The pieces move forward diagonally, and it is the object of the players
to take all each other’s men; the player who has the _black_ pieces
taking the _white_, and the player who has the white men taking the
_black_. The first player--say Black--moves his piece angularly to the
first white square, and then, if nothing intervenes between his piece
and that of his opponent, and there is a vacant square in his line left
behind him, the _white_ can pass his piece over him to the space so
unoccupied, and take his man, which is withdrawn from the board. The
same may be repeated by the adversary; and thus the players go on taking
each other’s pieces till one or the other cannot move, or all the pieces
are taken. When a piece, however, arrives at the last row of the enemy’s
ground, it becomes what is called a king, and is crowned by another
piece being placed on it. It may then be moved backwards and forwards at
pleasure, and can take both ways. When a player neglects to take a
piece, he is what is called _huffed_, that is, he loses the piece that
ought to have been moved.
LAWS OF THE GAME.
1. The moves are alternate, the first move being determined by lot.
2. The choice of men to be also decided by lot, but they should be
changed every three games.
3. Whichever piece is touched must be played.
4. No player can remain more than five minutes without playing. He may
be warned at the end of five minutes.
5. Neither player must leave the room without permission of his
adversary.
6. In case of huff, the opponent, in lieu of taking a piece for the
omission, can insist on his being taken.
7. Each party must sit free so as not to obstruct a view of the board,
and no pointing at pieces is allowed.
8. When a false move is made, the piece must be moved to whatever square
the opponent dictates.
9. All disputes between players to be referred to a third party.
10. Bystanders must make no remarks during the game.
GAMES FOR PRACTICE.
Playing draughts is a game which is best learned by experience and
repeated defeats. It requires circumspection and caution, and especially
demands calculation of the effects of the different moves upon the
fortune of the game. The moves should be calculated mentally. The men
should be kept as much in the centre of the board as possible; and the
gentlemanly player will consider all drawn games as won by his opponent,
and never triumph over the vanquished. The following games will give the
young player a good general idea of draughts, but his success as a
player will depend entirely upon his own application and habit of
thought:--
GAME I.
No. Colour. from to
1. B. 11 15
2. W. 22 18
3. B. 15 22
4. W. 25 18
5. B. 8 11
6. W. 29 25
7. B. 4 8
8. W. 25 22
9. B. 12 16
10. W. 24 20
11. B. 10 15
12. W. 27 24
13. B. 16 19
14. W. 23 16
15. B. 15 19
16. W. 24 15
17. B. 9 14
18. W. 18 9
19. B. 11 25
20. W. 32 27
21. B. 5 14
22. W. 27 23
23. B. 6 10
24. W. 16 12
25. B. 8 11
26. W. 28 24
27. B. 25 29
28. W. 30 25
29. B. 29 22
30. W. 26 17
31. B. 11 15
32. W. 20 16
33. B. 15 18
34. W. 24 20
35. B. 18 27
36. W. 31 24
37. B. 14 18
38. W. 16 11
39. B. 7 16
40. W. 20 11
41. B. 18 23
42. W. 11 8
43. B. 23 27
44. W. 8 4
45. B. 27 31
46. W. 4 8
47. B. 31 27
48. W. 24 20
49. B. 27 23
50. W. 8 11
51. B. 23 18
52. W. 11 8
53. B. 18 15
&c.
White loses.
GAME II.
No. Colour. from to
1. B. 11 15
2. W. 22 18
3. B. 15 22
4. W. 25 18
5. B. 8 11
6. W. 29 25
7. B. 4 8
8. W. 25 22
9. B. 12 16
10. W. 24 20
11. B. 10 15
12. W. 21 17
13. B. 7 10
14. W. 27 24
15. B. 8 12
16. W. 17 13
17. B. 9 14
18. W. 18 9
19. B. 5 14
20. W. 24 19
21. B. 15 24
22. W. 28 19
23. B. 14 17
24. W. 32 27
25. B. 10 14
26. W. 27 24
27. B. 3 7
28. W. 30 25
29. B. 6 9
30. W. 13 6
31. B. 1 10
32. W. 22 13
33. B. 14 18
34. W. 23 14
35. B. 16 30
36. W. 25 21
37. B. 10 17
38. W. 21 14
39. B. 30 25
40. W. 14 9
41. B. 11 15
42. W. 9 6
43. B. 2 9
44. W. 13 6
45. B. 15 18
46. W. 6 2
47. B. 7 10
48. W. 2 6
49. B. 10 14
50. W. 6 9
51. B. 25 21
52. W. 31 26
53. B. 14 17
&c.
Drawn.
FIREWORKS.
Our book is intended for the gratification of boys. We know full well
the intense delight taken by boys in risking their limbs or their lives,
especially when such risk is accompanied with noise. Boys always have
done so, and always will do so in spite of the very best of advice or
precautions. As, therefore, it is impossible to keep them from making
noises and endangering themselves, we have in the following pages
endeavoured to show them how to make as much noise as possible with as
little danger as possible.
What is there that makes the most noise and is most dangerous?
Gunpowder, of course. Therefore, we have given descriptions of the best
methods of employing this material, feeling quite sure that of accidents
with gunpowder nine out of every ten are caused by ignorance. We knew a
boy who lost the use of a thumb, and took all the skin off the palm of
his right hand, by ignorant management of powder. He had read of
blasting rocks, and nothing would satisfy him but blasting a bank. So he
bored a deep hole in it with a stick, filled the hole with gunpowder,
and then poked a lighted lucifer into the powder. The consequence was,
that his face was so scorched as not to be recognised, all his eyebrows
and eyelashes and most of his hair were burned off, while his right hand
was injured as has been already mentioned. Now that boy had been
studiously kept out of the way of powder by female relatives, and was
naturally profoundly ignorant of its effects. Had he been taught to
handle it, he would not now be forced to keep his right hand closed, or
to write by holding the pen between the fingers of his clenched hand.
GUNPOWDER.
It will not be very advisable for the firework boy to make his own
powder, but still it will not be amiss that he should know how it is
prepared. Pulverise separately 5 drams of nitrate of potass, 1 dram of
sulphur, and 1 dram of newly burnt charcoal, mix them together in a
mortar with a little water, so as to make the compound into a dough,
which roll out into round pieces of the thickness of a pin upon a slab.
This must be done by moving a board backwards and forwards until the
dough is of a proper size. When three or four of these pieces are ready
put them together thus,--
[Illustration]
and cut them off into small grains. Place these grains on a sheet of
paper in a warm place where they will soon dry, but away from a fire.
During granulation the dough must be prevented from sticking by using a
little of the dry compound powder. This mode of granulation, though
tedious, is the only one to be used for so small a quantity for the sake
of experiment. In making powder in a large way it is granulated by
passing the composition through sieves.
HOW TO MAKE TOUCH-PAPER.
Dissolve in a little spirits of wine or vinegar a little saltpetre, then
take some purple or blue paper, and wet it with the above liquor and it
will be fit for use. When pasting paper on any of the following works
take care that the paste does not touch that part which is to burn. The
method of using this paper is to cut it into slips long enough to go
once round the mouth of a serpent, cracker, &c.
CASES FOR SQUIBS, FLOWER-POTS, ROCKETS, ROMAN CANDLES, ETC.
Procure a hard wooden cylinder, or, if possible, one made of metal,
whose diameter corresponds with that of the interior of the proposed
case. Roll round it several folds of cartridge paper, and paste the
edges well, so that it may be held securely. Tie it round until dry.
[Illustration]
TO CHOKE THE CASES.
When the cases are thus made they will require to be tied at the lower
end. This is called choking them, and as much force is required it is
necessary. Fix a wire into a small solid cylinder (_d_). Take another
short piece (_b_) an inch or two long, with a hole up it to admit the
other end of the wire, fit it on and pass it up the case. Then having
fastened a piece of whipcord to a post, wind it round the part left
hollow by the wire, which should be about half an inch from the end;
pull it tight with the right hand and work the case round with the left.
Cut out a piece of touch paper two inches long and an inch and a half
broad, wind it round the choke, and tie it on with a piece of fine
string--twist it to a point. The cases are best choked while damp.
[Illustration]
COMPOSITION FOR SQUIBS, ETC.
Gunpowder half a pound, charcoal 1 ounce, brimstone 1 ounce, or in like
proportion; grind them in a muller or pound them in a mortar. Or you may
take 1 part steel filings, 1 charcoal, 1 sulphur, and 4 powder, which is
a very good mixture, and can be rubbed together in a mortar.
HOW TO FILL THE CASES.
Your cases must be very dry when ready, and should be put into an iron
or wooden mould; first put in a thimble full of your powder, and ram it
down very hard with your ruler, then put in a little more till the case
is full, ramming it down hard every time. If you have no mould, hold the
case in your left hand with the twisted touch-paper downwards, and fill
it after the same manner. When you have filled within an inch of the
top, fill up this with loose powder not rammed, for a bang, and fold in
the ends; after filling a dozen or two melt some pitch in a small ladle,
and smear the ends of the case with it by means of a small brush.
TO MAKE CRACKERS.
Cut some stout cartridge-paper into pieces three inches and a half broad
and one foot long, fold down one edge of these pieces lengthwise about
three quarters of an inch broad, then fold the double edge down a
quarter of an inch, and turn the single edge back half over the double
fold. Open it, and lay all along the channel which is formed by the
folding of the paper some meal powder, then fold it over and over till
the paper is doubled up, rubbing it down at every turn; this being done
bend it backwards and forwards two inches and a half, or thereabouts, at
a time, as often as the paper will allow. Hold all these folds flat and
close, and with a small pinching cord give one turn round the middle of
the cracker and pinch it close; bind it with packthread as tight as you
can, then in the place where it was pinched prime one end and cap it
with touch-paper.
When these crackers are fired they will give a loud report at every turn
of the paper; if you want a great number of these, you have only to cut
the paper longer, or join it on to a greater length; but if they are
made very long you must have a piece of wood with a groove in it deep
enough to let in half the cracker, which will hold it straight while you
are pinching it.
[Illustration]
ROMAN CANDLES AND STARS.
[Illustration]
These are best made with the following ingredients: 1 ounce of powder, 1
ounce of sulphur, and 2 ounces of nitre. Some persons, however, prefer 1
part sulphur, 1 charcoal, 1 iron filings, 4 of powder, and 8 of nitre.
The composition being made, in filling the cases fill the contrary way
to a squib--stop up the choke by driving down a piece of paper. Put in 1
quill of gunpowder loose and 1 star made in the following manner: 1
ounce of camphor, 1 of sulphur, 2 of meal powder, 1 ounce of the
coloured fires, moisten them with oil of turpentine, and work them into
little round balls. Having placed a star within the case, put in above
it 3 quills of the composition, ram down, then powder, star, and
composition alternately, till the case is full. Paste touch-paper round
the top and twist to a point.
ROCKETS.
[Illustration]
There are several recipes for making rockets, the best of which is 3
ounces of charcoal, 6 of sulphur, 8 of nitre, 32 of meal powder. Another
very good one is, 3 ounces of iron filings, 4 of powdered charcoal, 8 of
sulphur, 16 of nitre, and 64 of meal powder. If a smaller quantity is
wanted divide each proportion by 2, if a still smaller divide by 4. In
this cut _s_ is the loose gunpowder with eight or ten stars upon it; _c_
is that part of the rocket in which the composition is to be rammed
hard, _p_ the priming or quick match, _t_ the touch paper. The cases are
to be put into a mould and the composition must be well rammed. The
cases should be four times the thickness of those for squibs.
RAINS.
[Illustration]
Sometimes gold or silver rains are added to rockets, which give them a
very beautiful appearance. A gold rain is made of 2 parts sawdust, 4
sulphur, 4 meal powder, 6 glass dust, 16 nitre, in all 32 parts. A
silver rain may be made of 2 parts salt prunella, 8 sulphuret of
antimony, 8 sulphur, 8 meal powder, and 14 nitre, in all 32 parts.
CATHERINE WHEELS.
These are very pretty fireworks, and are made to turn on a pivot. There
are many recipes for the composition of which they are formed; 1 part
camphor, 1 sulphur, 1 nitre, 2 meal powder. Another is, 3 parts iron
filings, 4 sulphur, 12 nitre, 16 meal powder. This composition is to be
rammed into small cases, and bound round a small wheel, having a hole
for a pivot in the centre.
VARIOUS COLOURED FIRES.
The following recipes will give the young firework maker a great variety
of the most beautiful fires. They should never be fired in a room,
however, and always away from a dwelling.
CRIMSON FIRE.
The principal ingredient in this is nitrate of strontium, of which 40
parts are taken, with 13 of sulphur, 15 of chlorate of potass, 4 of
sulphuret of antimony, and 2 of lamp-black. These, as all the
ingredients for the other fires, should be rubbed in a ladle, and they
may be used in a ladle or iron dish set on the ground.
BLUE FIRE.
The ingredients of blue fire are 20 parts; 12 of nitre, 4 of sulphur, 2
of sulphuret of antimony, and 2 of lamp-black.
GREEN FIRE.
The ingredients for green fire are in 54 parts; 42 of nitrate of
barytes, 8 of sulphur, 3 of chlorate of potass, and 1 of lamp-black.
PURPLE FIRE.
The best recipe for purple fire is of 60 parts; 25 of nitre, 25 of
nitrate of strontium, 7 of sulphur, 2 of realgor, and 1 of lamp-black.
WHITE FIRE.
The best and purest white fire is made of 24 parts of nitre, 7 of
sulphur, 2 of red arsenic, and 1 of lamp-black.
SPUR FIRE.
9 parts of nitre, 4 of sulphur, and 3 of lamp-black, well rubbed
together.
BLUE LIGHTS.
These are made of 4 parts of sulphur, 2 of nitre, and 1 of powder, and
are rammed into squib-cases the contrary way.
PORT OR WILDFIRES.
Saltpetre 4 parts, meal powder 6 parts, and sulphur 3 parts. The
composition to be moistened with linseed oil.
SLOW FIRE FOR WHEELS.
Saltpetre 4 parts, sulphur 2 parts, and meal powder 2 parts.
DEAD FIRE FOR WHEELS.
Saltpetre 5 parts, sulphur 1 part, lapis calaminaris 1 part, and
antimony 1 part.
CAUTIONS.
Such are the principles and methods by which fireworks may be made; but
we would advise our young friends to be very cautious, and never to
attempt making any fireworks by candle-light; always to select some
outhouse for their operations; to see that no iron or steel implements
are about the place in which their fireworks are being manufactured, or
they may go off before they wish it; to use wooden or brass implements
in the bruising, grinding, and sifting of their mixtures; and never to
bring the fireworks, or any of their ingredients, into the
dwelling-house, or they may suddenly receive a
“Heavy blow and great discouragement.”
TO MAKE AN ILLUMINATED SPIRAL WHEEL.
[Illustration]
Procure a circular horizontal wheel two feet in diameter with a hole
quite through the nave, then take four thin pieces of deal three feet
long each, and three-quarters of an inch broad each. One end of each of
these pieces is to be nailed to the felloe of the wheel at an equal
distance from one another; and the other end nailed to a block with a
hole in its bottom, which must be perpendicular with that in the block
of the wheel, but not so large. The wheel being thus made, a hoop planed
down very thin must be nailed to the felloe of the wheel, and wound
round the four sticks in a spiral line from the wheel to the block at
the top; on the top of this block a case of Chinese fire must be fixed,
and on the wheel any number of cases, which must incline downwards and
burn two at a time. The axis of the wheel must be a little longer than
the cone, and made very smooth at the top, on which the upper block is
to turn and the whole weight of the wheel to rest. The entire framing of
the wheel, with its connecting tubes, is shown in the above cut.
THE GRAND VOLUTE.
[Illustration]
Should my young friends wish to prepare a grand volute illuminated with
a revolving wheel; the first step is to procure a large circular wheel,
and on its rim lay as many four-ounce cases as will complete the circle,
only allowing a sufficient distance between the cases that the fire may
pass free, which may be done by cutting the upper part of the end of
each a little shelving. On each spoke fix a four-ounce case about three
inches from the rim of the wheel. These cases are to burn one at a
time. On the front of the wheel form a spiral line with strong wire, on
which tie port-fires, placing them on a slant with their mouths to face
the same way as the cases on the wheel; all these port fires must be
fired with the second cases of the wheel. Let there be a series of
wooden spokes all made to screw into a block into the centre. When the
large wheel begins to discharge the fireworks, the spiral wheel will of
course revolve and produce a very beautiful illuminated cone.
A BRILLIANT YEW-TREE.
To prepare a brilliant yew-tree, a frame like the one represented in the
drawing must be firmly attached to the ground. When the branches are
fixed, place illuminating port-fires on the top of each, as many as is
convenient; behind the top of the stem fasten a gerb or white fountain,
which must be fired at the beginning of the illumination on the tree. A
series of these, varying in the angular directions taken by the boughs,
produce a very fine effect.
[Illustration]
Such are a few general directions respecting the making of fireworks;
but we have again to advise our young friends to be cautious of the
gunpowder, and to keep away from the fire, or from a light, or from
flames, steel, iron, or any other matter likely to cause a spark.
[Illustration]
GARDENING.
“’Tis a delightful task
To rear the tender flower, to see the bud
Put forth its bloom, the little seedling sprout
From its dark grove, to meet the sunbeams, and
To drink the gracious rain. Here Innocence
May well amuse herself, and blithe Industry
Make mate with ants, and bees, and busy things,
From morn to evening daily.”--MARTIN.
Gardening is one of the most delightful occupations for young persons.
It combines innocent amusement, exercise of the healthiest kind, skill,
forethought, method, taste, and is full of instruction,--leading the
mind, not only to the wonderful operations of nature, but to the great
Originator and Preserver of all things.
Gardening was the first of the arts. Before man had fallen from his
“high estate,” and lost his heirship of heaven, he was placed by his
Creator in a garden, and ordered to dress it and to keep it. The
sustenance of man in all countries is derived, directly or indirectly,
from the vegetable kingdom: it is supposed that he first made his
appearance in that fertile and fruitful land from whence we get our best
grasses. It was natural, then, that some rude kind of gardening should
first occupy the attention of primitive man. In a savage state, now,
in many countries, plants supply all the wants of man to an extent
greater even than we are apt to suppose, from the necessity and
possibility of a greater variety of animal food in our own climate.
[Illustration: MISCELLANEOUS.--GARDENING, FENCING, ETC.]
From the earliest times of profane history, gardens are alluded to. The
gardens of the Hesperides abounded with fruit of the most delicious
kind, and the hanging gardens of Babylon were among the wonders of the
world. The gardens of the Persians are called by Xenophon, “delightful
places, fertile and beautiful;” and the gardens of Alcinous abounded
with fruits, grapes, and various horticultural wonders. The philosophers
of Athens walked in ornamental gardens, among shady groves, statues, and
fountains.
There are many so-called styles of gardening, but these are readily
divisable into two varieties--the geometrical and natural style. In the
first may be comprised all gardens laid out with straight or geometrical
lines. In the second, which is often called the English style, we
include gardens and parks where the irregularity that we observe in
pretty wild places, or in Nature’s own gardens, are preserved more or
less judiciously and tastefully. On the one hand, we take Nature for a
model; on the other, we merely apply geometrical lines to the garden and
its contents. As the geometrical garden is merely a thing of straight
lines, it is very much easier to dispose than the natural, with which a
great many people make sad mistakes, and then blame the style instead of
their own taste. It is very much easier to make straight walks, and
circles, and figures of all kinds in a garden, than to imitate on a
small scale the variety, and indefinite, ever-pleasing character
exhibited by Nature where she most attracts us with floral beauty.
However, to see some specimens of the various styles of gardens will
give a better idea of their worth, and main features, than any reading.
We will indicate a few of the places where good examples are to be seen.
The Crystal Palace is perhaps the best place to observe their
differences, particularly as most boys visit that attractive place. The
great terraces and fountains are, of course, in the geometrical style;
while the more remote, or outer parts of the grounds, are a good example
of the natural or English style of laying out grounds. The irregular
“lakes,” surrounded by vegetation, the rock cropping out here and there,
the natural-looking grouping of fine trees, and the freely rolling
beautiful green grass mounds, &c. are, though perhaps not the most
frequented, certainly among the best features of the Crystal Palace. The
Royal Botanic Gardens in the Regent’s Park is also a good, a very good
example of the best method of laying out gardens in the English style.
It is disfigured, however, by a small, mean kind of geometrical garden,
which we must not be supposed to praise. On the other hand, the garden
of the Royal Horticultural Society at South Kensington is a capital
example of a completely opposite style--the Italian and geometrical;
and once having seen these, any boy can at once distinguish between the
two, and probably say which he most admires.
In France, during the reign of Louis XV., the bad and artificial method
was carried to excess;--clipped hedges, always laid out in straight
lines--flower-beds tortured into fantastic shapes--trees cut into the
form of pyramid haystacks, animals, &c. The gardens were like the
manners and dress of that period, in which scarcely anything natural was
left. The Dutch imitated the French: and this kind of gardening
continued to prevail till attacked by Addison, in the “Spectator,” and
Pope, in his Fourth Moral Epistle.
[Illustration: A GARDEN IN THE TIME OF LOUIS XV.]
However, the boy’s garden is so small as a rule, that to attempt any
kind of ambitious “laying out” would be nonsense; and having thus
explained what is meant by different “styles” in gardening, we proceed
to show how the boy’s garden should be laid out.
ON LAYING OUT A SMALL GARDEN.
[Illustration]
The size of a piece of ground which we should recommend to the young
gardener ought to be about 33 yards long, and about 25 broad. It should
be divided into four portions, as in the diagram. A B C D are four
paths, 5 feet wide, which might be gravelled, and the edges should be
planted with box, or some neat and tiny flowering plant. The borders
should be about 2 feet in width; and this, with the breadth of the path,
will take 9 feet, or 3 yards, from the 25 yards of width; which will
leave 11 yards, or 11 yards broad, for each of the four compartments.
The length of the four compartments--reduced by 9 feet, or 3 yards, as
before, for the cross-path and two borders--will allow each of the four
compartments to be 15 yards in length; so that each quarter of the
garden would contain 15 yards multiplied by 11 yards, and would equal
165 square yards, which again multiplied by 4, would give 660 square
yards of surface, which would be amply sufficient for a young person to
obtain something like an idea of gardening, and at the same time be a
profitable advantage. This will be found too large, however, except for
those who wish to work at gardening in earnest, and have, moreover,
plenty of time and thought to give to the matter. One half the size will
be found to suit a greater number. In such, the same plan and
proportioning may be carried out.
PLANTING THE GROUND WITH TREES, FLOWERS, ETC.
In the foregoing diagram, the borders are for flowers, and the other
parts of the compartments for the raising of vegetables; but here and
there a space should be left for the planting of fruit-trees,
rose-trees, currants, gooseberries, raspberries, &c. The places marked
by dots (*) are where fruit-trees may be planted, which should consist
of some of the best sorts of apple, cherry, pear, and plum-trees, which
ought to be planted from four to five yards apart. In the borders,
rose-trees, both of the standard and common kind, might be planted, as
indicated by the dots (*); and at the four corners, where the paths
intersect, climbing-roses should be placed, having strong poles upon
which their tendrils and branches may run. The spaces in the border may
be appropriated to the various kinds of flowers, at the choice of the
young gardener.
THE NOBLEST KIND OF GARDENING FOR BOYS.
There is one kind of gardening the results of which will afford a higher
satisfaction to boys, when they become men, than any other pastime or
exercise they can possibly engage in, and that is the planting of fine
hardy trees. These will not require much attention, or any beyond the
planting. They will grow freely and vigorously when you are at school or
asleep, soon find their own supply of moisture by striking their roots
deeply into the ground, and are able to withstand our cold and cloudy
climate at all seasons. Nearly all intelligent and educated men are
admirers of fine trees. Many who care nothing about our ordinary
low-lying plants, take the highest interest in fine hardy trees--the
late Prince Consort and the present Emperor of the French, for instance.
Generally we display this interest in trees by planting them extensively
when we come to be men; but how much would many lovers of trees not give
to have commenced their tree-planting at an early age, so that they
might walk under giant groves of their own planting! The Indian says,
“He has not lived in vain who has planted a tree;” and certainly it is a
noble thing to embellish the earth with its finest ornaments, and plant
tiny shoots that will in time become great trees, and shed leaves over
the graves of our children for ages. And it is well to observe in the
beginning, that a tree of thoroughly hardy and vigorous disposition is
one of the most lasting things on earth. Though a living thing,
susceptible, like ourselves, of almost every change of atmosphere, cold
or heat, it often survives great monuments of stone, and may live and
see extinguished not only many generations of men but even the lives of
nations.
The age of many trees has been computed upon fair proof to be greater
than that of the Pyramids of Egypt. There are trees in America which
were of colossal development ere that country was discovered, so that
the growth of a mighty nation may require but little time compared to
that witnessed by the giant Wellingtonia, whose bark you may have seen
at the Crystal Palace. In our own country the age of many oaks and yews
is proverbial. But apart altogether from the mighty age which our finest
trees attain, let us venerate them for their beauty, dignity, and
utility. What so full of life and change, so inexhaustive in their
well-built and subtle ramifications, as the branches and branchlets of a
fine tree! “The pillars of the valleys, the fringes of the hills,” as an
eloquent writer calls them, “so stately, so eternal” are, while the most
useful of all things to man, at the same time the most beautiful natural
objects which he can contemplate. Nothing adds so much to the beauty of
park, pleasure ground, or garden, as the planting of handsome and
suitable trees: in fact, they are the only true and pleasing ornaments
of such. What constitutes the difference between the aspect of naked,
blast-swept, and desolate-looking heaths, or lowland--monotonous ground
of any kind, in fact--and one of those grand parks of old England, say
Goodwood, or Richmond, or indeed any pleasure ground such as you may see
in almost every parish, with every shady ferny corner, or lane opening,
or tree-fringed sloping grass mound, a picture of fresh and changeful
loveliness? Why, simply the presence of trees. With them you may impart
every charm to the wildest heath or flattest prairie--with them the
highest and grandest beauty may be imparted to the charmingly undulated
surface of a great part of the British Isles.
So much for the trees and their attractions. What is next to be done? It
is to be hoped that every boy fond of gardening has already made up his
mind to plant a tree, or several. We have seen a great many little boys’
gardens, but it was the fate of most of them to become disused and
neglected, dug up or forgotten, when the little gardeners had arrived at
the “big boy,” or manhood stage. The inmates being small and fleeting,
of course every trace soon departed. But by adopting the kind of
gardening here recommended, a pleasing and stately souvenir of pleasant
early days will be the result. It must not, however, be attempted in the
ordinary little boy’s garden, which is usually a small patch under a
wall, or in some obscure spot totally unfit for trees. If you once make
up your mind to plant a tree, the first thing to do is to choose a good
position for it. It should be one in which it will grow well, and in
which the tree will not be in the way of anything else. This will save
it from being disturbed after it gets to some size, and your hopes from
being disappointed in a way you least expected. And lastly, it will be
very desirable to so place the tree that its effect when grown up may be
a good and beautiful one. It is, for instance, very bad management to
plant the noble Wellingtonia, or Cedar of Lebanon, near a house. This is
very often done in suburban and villa gardens, but if the trees attain
their natural size they spoil the house, or must be cut down. The finest
cedar of Lebanon we know of is planted within twenty feet of a house,
and completely overshadows it; yet so noble is the tree that the owner
would not touch it on any account: he would give a great deal, however,
to have it in a proper position. The planting of a large kind of tree
where it may, when grown up, stop a pleasant view, is also a great
mistake.
From these instances it will be seen that the position is a subject of
the highest importance in tree-planting. Now, as of course every boy
cannot be a judge of tree-planting, it will be found the best plan to
consult papa or the gardener about it. They will be so well pleased at
the idea of your planting a tree instead of a geranium or a wallflower,
that you are sure to be encouraged with advice and assistance. To plant
it in the ordinary boys’ garden would be a great mistake. It should be
at once put in a position in which it might flourish undisturbed for
ages. Generally, hardy trees are not fastidious as to soil. Mere
planting is all the noble hardy ash, the graceful birch--the lady of the
woods--the spreading beech, and others of our native trees require. But
when we come to plant the grandest of all trees--the Wellingtonia and
the Cedar of Lebanon, with many of the nobler pines of North America--if
the soil be not naturally very good, we must make a preparation for the
young plant. This is to be done by digging out a hole and taking the bad
soil out at the bottom, leaving the top spit at one side, and then
filling in the opening, say six feet wide or so, with good soil taken
from a pasture and chopped up with a spade. This should be raised above
the surface to allow for subsequent sinking, and also to keep the neck
of the young tree a little above the level ground. The part meant by the
neck, is the base of the stem, or, in other words, the part where root
begins and stem terminates.
As most gardens or pleasure grounds are well drained, the little planter
is not likely to have much to contend with on that score, but where the
bottom or lower soil is of a disagreeable nature, gardeners very often
place a quantity of broken bricks or rough stones in the bottom of the
hole, and over them place turf to prevent the top soil from falling
down.
The best time for planting is in the autumn--say September, October, or
November; but any time through the autumn, winter, or early spring will
do, provided the ground be not saturated with rain, and all other
circumstances be favourable. The choosing of a good young tree is an
important point. Do not have anything to do with those grown in pots;
the roots of such are usually contorted round the ball, and in a very
bad condition to make good trees. Nice symmetrical plants growing in a
nursery, say at about from two to four feet high, are the best. The
price of even the best of such will not amount to more than that of an
ordinary toy, while in the case of the common native trees, and such
things as the willows, that grow freely from a sucker, it is a mere
trifle. Indeed, in the case of boys who live where there is anything
like an extensive garden or grounds, most probably good young trees will
be at hand ready to plant. It will be well to have the assistance of the
gardener in planting a rare thing like the Wellingtonia, though after a
little practice an intelligent boy can do it easily. The main points
are, to place the roots of the tree on soil made pretty firm, to spread
the roots out carefully before covering them, and finally, if the
weather or soil should happen to be very dry, to give the ground a
_thorough_ soaking of water. This will refresh the little root fibres,
make them “take kindly to the earth,” and, in short, put the little tree
in a fair way for its long life. And as boys may frequently have
occasion to water their gardens, as well as other people, we may assure
them that one thorough good watering is better than a dozen bad ones. A
bad watering is one in which the surface of the soil is merely wetted,
and if you poke down a little way you find the soil quite dry: a good
watering is one in which the water descends deep and far into the soil,
as deep or deeper than the roots go, in fact. The dragging about of
water in pots is a very laborious and awkward affair. If the little
gardener can secure the loan of the water-barrel on wheels, and have it
filled quite full, and the contents gently supplied to the root of his
tree, he will save himself much trouble, and probably have no further
attention to pay to it in that way during the course of his life. By the
way, have you ever heard the little story about the famous Jean Jacques
Rousseau and his little tree? If not, here it is.
When he was a little pupil about ten years of age, his master planted a
walnut-tree to give a grateful shade to a place immediately outside the
house. The planting of this walnut-tree was attended with some ceremony,
little Rousseau and his friend, a fellow-boarder, acting as godfathers,
singing songs of triumph around it. The master and his assistants formed
a kind of basin around the tree, or, in other words, made a little
embankment of earth around it, so that the water could not escape. Jean
Jacques and his companion saw and were much interested in all this, made
up their minds that it was a nobler thing to plant trees than to plant
colours on a breach, and at once became very anxious to plant. This they
soon did by cutting a slip of willow, and planting it with due ceremony
on the terrace near the august walnut-tree that had been planted by the
master. They made a basin of earth round it in imitation of the bigger
one, and then came their grand difficulty--how to water it. They were
not permitted to fetch any, or they would have gladly done so, though it
was at a distance. The tree was safe for a short time from some cause or
other, and began to put forth a few leaves, which they hoped would in
due time afford them shelter and shade; but hot days came, and it was
apparent that unless the little tree had water it would surely die. What
was to be done? Well, it is pretty evident that either of them could
think a little, even at that age, for the little rogues made up their
minds to make a tiny grass-covered canal between the large basin and
their little one, so that when the master came to water his big tree,
the water might run from his basin to theirs! Their first essay failed;
the earth fell in, and they were miserable for a moment, but soon set to
work again. This time they cut an old box into narrow planks, and lined
the furrow with them, made the slope so that the water would be sure to
run as desired, and covered the trench over so that nobody could see it,
putting a grating of twigs over the upper end, so as to hide appearances
and keep out rubbish, and waited in hope and fear for the result. The
master and his men came and poured in the water, which soon ran through
the furrow to the little tree. This was too much for our otherwise
sagacious little gardeners. They roared with delight at the success of
their plan, and betrayed it to the master, who immediately sent for a
pick-axe, and cut up their little trench, shouting at the same time, “An
aqueduct! an aqueduct!” They were of course sorry, but soon took heart,
and planted another tree, which lived to be a big one. To have set this
slip in competition with a large one, Rousseau tells, gave him a degree
of glory he had not known before, and says that he had a juster idea of
it at that age than Cæsar had at thirty.
We will next turn to the selection of trees, and to the various wants of
those who are likely to plant. The most popular trees in England at
present are those noble evergreen pines. They are not all suited for
town gardening, but very much so for most parts of the country. Around
the beautiful mausoleum raised to contain the remains of the late Prince
Consort at Frogmore, there is a row of these trees, mostly tapering and
slender in habit, and very dark green. They have been planted by the
various members of the Royal family _in memoriam_. The late Prince was
very fond of these pine-trees, and many country gentlemen take the
greatest interest in their planting. We merely tell you this to point
out that the planting of trees is an object of ambition with many of the
best and the highest in the land. When Her Majesty, and many other
distinguished persons, visit a nobleman’s place or a public park, one of
the most graceful acts they can do is to plant a tree; and the custom is
very general. Let us hope, then, that many boys will imitate the example
of Rousseau, and say, why should not we too plant trees? But to return
to our pines, or conifers, as they are called. The race is a wonderfully
beautiful one--so much so, that you must take care, or you may plant
things that will do very well for a few years, perhaps, but get quite
killed by the first very severe frost. It is a sad sight to see a tree
which has perhaps grown to considerable size and beauty killed to the
very ground by a frost such as we had in January, 1866--some of our
noblest pines perished then; and therefore a list of the most thoroughly
hardy kinds must prove useful. The giant Wellingtonia of California is
fortunately hardy in all parts of these islands. So is the great
arbor-vitæ of Nootka Sound (_Thuja gigantea_), a specimen of which
obtained the first prize for trees of this kind at the great Paris
Exhibition. One of the most beautiful of all pines, one which has its
“leaves,” or little branchlets rather, as graceful as those of a fern,
is Thujiopsis borealis, and it too is perfectly hardy. We regret that
hard names must be used, but then, as thousands of our plants are not
natives of England, they have of course no recognised English name, and
to translate the scientific one would simply produce an awkward
barbarism. In addition to the above, the following trees of this fine
family may be planted with the confidence that we shall not see them
perish in the vigour and beauty of youth:--Lawson’s cypress (we give you
the English name where possible). Nearly all kinds of juniper. Picea
Pinsapo, nobilis, and Nordmanniana, all noble trees--also amabilis and
cephalonica. Abies Albertii, Morinda, Menziesii, the Cedar of Lebanon,
and the Deodar cedar--these are hurt now and then, but on the whole are
hardy enough generally. The common spruce fir; the Scotch fir, always a
picturesque tree. The deciduous cypress, a fine tree for the margins of
water, where after a time its roots send up most curious knobs, in many
cases nearly as big as a beehive, above the ground. It is quite
extraordinary to see the specimens of this noble tree in the pleasure
grounds at Syon, the Duke of Northumberland’s fine place near Brentford.
The new Japanese larch (_L. Kæmpferi_), the Austrian pine, the Swiss nut
pine (_P. Cembra_), the Corsican pine. The youthful gardener, who lives
near a large nursery, park, or place like Kew, Glasnevin Botanic
Gardens, near Dublin, the Botanic Gardens at Edinburgh, the gardens of
the Crystal Palace, at Sydenham, or many places of this kind, would do
well to examine specimens of the kinds named, or indeed any others, so
that he may take his choice; making sure to inquire, however, that the
particular kind he selects is perfectly hardy: a tree may be quite hardy
in one part of the country, and quite tender in another. The curious and
fine monkey puzzle (_Araucaria imbricata_), for instance, has been
killed in some parts by severe frosts, in others it has always escaped
with impunity. It is always easy to ascertain facts of this kind in a
neighbourhood, and of course we should make a point of cultivating the
things that are best suited to our climate and soil.
So much for coniferous trees. We will next turn to a far nobler group,
so far as regards our wants--deciduous trees, or those that lose their
leaves in winter. These are generally quite hardy, and make large and
long-lived trees. They may be grown in many places where the pines would
not live, and are therefore admirably suited for places in and near
towns. They should be preferred by all boys who live in suburban
gardens, as in such the leaves of pines and evergreens are sure to be
soiled and disfigured, if not half-killed, by smut. Many of these
deciduous trees flower beautifully, and in not a few the leaves, even in
our dull clime, assume rich and varied tints in autumn. The following
list includes the noblest, best, and hardiest known:--The great
Columbian maple, the silvery maple (_A. eriocarpum_), the red maple (_A.
colchicum rubrum_), the Norway maple, the purple-leaved sycamore, and
the variegated negundo; the double horse chesnut (the flower of this
lasts very much longer than the single kind), the red chesnut, the
Hungarian lime-tree, and the Mississippi lime, the tree of heaven
(_Ailanthus glandulosa_), the tulip-tree, the Japanese sophora (a noble
tree, fine for dry soils), the Kentucky coffee-tree (not a large tree,
but with very graceful leaves), the hawthorns in variety, both red and
white. Some of the hawthorns bear handsome fruit, and of such the most
distinct is Aronia, Layi, Celsiana and Douglasii. The flowering ash, the
showy Chinese Pyrus spectabilis, the American ash, the Canadian ash or
lancewood; the Cornish, Chichester, and Irish elms (the last being a
tree of large growth) and also most particularly the weeping variety of
the wych elm; the black walnut, and the yellow-twigged willow; the
silver-leaved poplar, the Carolina poplar, and of course the Lombardy
poplar; the splendid western plane, which does so well in towns, the
Eastern plane, and the Spanish plane. Lastly, we will name the noble
oaks, both the American and our own. The American oaks are among the
finest trees of the world. The best of them are Q. ambigua, Prinus, the
champion oak, the scarlet oak, the black oak, and the willow oak. Any of
these will form long-lived and noble trees.
The preceding remarks and instructions generally apply to the wants of
boys whose parents have gardens of some size. But a very large class are
not so fortunate--have not sufficient space to develop a good tree, and
perhaps live in or near towns, where it may be difficult to grow a good
one. For convenience sake, we will divide these into two classes--those
who have small gardens in the country, and those who have small gardens
in or near towns or cities. In the former, it will be better to pay full
attention to subjects of a comparatively dwarf though hardy and
long-lived habit, and to fine hardy shrubs like the hollies, &c. Except
on the very margins of a small country place, it is a mistake to plant
great trees, as at some time they are pretty sure to become an
overshadowing nuisance, too near the house to be seen to advantage, and
also too near to be agreeable or healthful. Of beautiful dwarf evergreen
trees suited for such, there is nothing better than the comparatively
new Retinosporas, which are at once graceful, hardy, and beautiful.
They are natives of Japan, and in any large nursery various handsome and
comparatively dwarf pines may be selected suitable for the same purpose.
For the town or suburban garden the best things are decidedly beautiful
dwarf and free-flowering deciduous trees, like the almond, the various
finely coloured double peaches, the beautiful double cherries, the
Chinese crab, the silvery eleagnus, the better kinds of hawthorn, and if
there be room for a large tree, the plane is the best. Of course there
is great difference in the climate and atmosphere of what are called
suburbs. Thus, in many of the suburbs of London it is nearly impossible
to get a pine-tree to live, while in the suburbs of many other towns and
cities the choicest trees flourish freely. But ten or twelve years’
increase of smoke and increase of houses may make a sad difference to
the pleasantest of suburbs, and things that flourished healthfully at
one time may gradually perish from increasing smut and vileness of
atmosphere. The best trees of the pine tribe for town planting are the
dwarf and beautiful Thuja aurea, well suited, from its dwarf size, for
the pleasure ground or flower garden; the Austrian pine, the common
arbor-vitæ, and perhaps a few others; but as a rule, it is better not to
plant pines where they will be exposed to the evil effects of a city
atmosphere. On the other hand, all trees that lose their leaves in
winter are likely to do well in such places, because they are leafless
and quite at rest in the winter, when every chimney is vomiting forth
poison, and the air is thick with filth. Then, when the atmosphere
begins to clear, and the spring returns, they put forth their leaves and
expose them during the best of the year, while the poor pine or
evergreen has to stand exposed at all seasons.
THE BOY’S FLOWER GARDEN.
Of course every boy who cares about gardening will have a little flower
garden. That is the first thing he is likely to attempt, and, perhaps,
on the whole, that which he may attempt with the greatest certainty of
success. A nice little varied flower garden is a source of interest and
pleasant exercise for a boy nine months out of twelve. But it is not by
imitating the common style of flower garden that a boy can make his
little piece pretty and interesting for the length of time we have
named. Nothing can be more bald and awkward-looking, more miserable in
aspect, than most flower gardens he is likely to see at the present day;
and therefore he must not attempt to imitate them, but follow the
instructions to be presently given. The reason why the greater number of
flower gardens of the present time are bad and miserably vulgar-looking,
is that those who arrange them simply use a few sorts of plants, and
many of them in great excess, so that an oppressive kind of monotony is
produced, which is anything but agreeable in the flower garden; and,
besides, nearly every flower garden you enter is very like every
other--no life or interest to be seen in them as a rule; but, on the
other hand, a great deal of mere gaudiness.
In addition to these demerits, the ordinary type of flower garden is
usually filled with tender plants--plants which must be put out in the
ground when the frosts are quite gone, in the beginning of June, and
taken up again as soon as they reappear in autumn--leaving the ground
bare for the winter and long spring. Now, even if this were the most
beautiful way of managing a flower garden, it would not suit the boy
gardener. He has, as a rule, no time to attend to tender plants, and if
he once plants his garden, keeps it clean, and adds a new member to it
now and then, it is perhaps as much as can be expected, considering how
many other things he has to do. Besides, he goes away to school now and
then, and what is to become of his tender plants then? Most boys will be
proud to take care of their own things, and will be much better
satisfied with a hardy little plant, which cannot suffer when they go
away for six weeks at a time, than with one that may go off with the
first frost. Clearly the best thing for the young gardener to do is to
cultivate the most interesting and pretty of the hardy flowers of all
seasons. Usually these are infinitely more interesting than the tender
exotics of the grand flower garden. Many of them are English plants,
notably the beautiful lily of the valley, the pink, the carnation, the
graceful Solomon’s seal, the various lovely primroses and polyanthuses,
and a host of others. Yes, you will do most wisely by adopting all those
charming old inmates of our gardens, which, independently of their
associations, are not to be surpassed for their beauty by any
tenderlings. It will be our pleasant duty to point out to you the kind
that you may grow with the greatest ease, and pick out for you the most
beautiful kinds known. It is most essential to be very careful about the
plants you put in your little flower garden, for your space is generally
small, and there is in consequence the greater necessity to take care
that every spot of it is occupied with a “good thing,” as gardeners are
wont to say. There are hundreds of plants mentioned in garden books, and
sold in nurseries, that are little better than weeds, and which would,
therefore, sadly disfigure your garden. Presently we shall write you a
list, which may be implicitly depended upon--every plant being
beautiful, hardy, and in all respects suited to your wants.
As boys are usually allotted but a small portion of border for their
flower garden, it is better to adopt the mixed border system, that is, a
mixture of different kinds, tastefully arranged, and have nothing to do
with what is called “bedding-out,” or planting great masses of one
thing. By the mixed system, you will be enabled to enjoy a little of
everything, and at all seasons, from the time that the crocus opens its
brightly-burnished golden blossoms in early spring, till the Christmas
rose ventures to show its large white flowers in the depth of winter. Do
you like exquisitely coloured little flowers in the dawn of
spring--little brightly blue things that “come before the swallow
dares?” You can grow such without expense or trouble in your little
parterre. The charming bushes of dwarf shrubs, and large border flowers,
which bloom in May, must have charms for you as for all of us, and these
too you may have in perfection; while the roses of June and July, the
lilies of August, and the grand gladiolus of the autumn, will all be
perfectly at home in your borders, as will every good and beautiful
flower garden plant. In laying out your small patch of flower garden, it
is best to confine yourself to a central bed (which may be square,
round, or oval), and borders around that, and not to attempt anything
elaborate in the way of laying. Attempts to lay out small bits of ground
in a geometrically elaborate or Lilliputian imitation of the natural
style, is almost sure to end in the production of something ridiculous
or cockneyfied. Confine your attention chiefly to the plants, laying out
the ground in a convenient manner. Let the design be subordinate
altogether to the plants. All trivial artificial ornaments, in the way
of shells, coloured gravel, statuettes, sundials, &c. should be left out
of the plan altogether. The most beautiful gardens are those in which
plant-beauty, and that alone, is conspicuous. If you can make the
visitor forget all about design--forget everything but the fact that he
is in a beautiful and varied garden, with nature’s own gems, free and
healthy, on every side, you will attain the highest success of which the
ancient art of gardening is capable.
We will suppose, then, that you have selected your little bit of ground.
The next thing to do is to prepare it thoroughly. Now, in ordinary cases
this is not half done. We are going to recommend you to plant permanent
things, plants which will not require removal for many years, and you
will not have a thorough opportunity of preparing the ground after you
once plant. Therefore, the preparation of the ground is of tenfold
greater importance in your case than in that of the ordinary gardener,
whose beds of geraniums, or suchlike, are empty in winter, so that he
has an opportunity of dressing and digging them every year.
Before marking the walks or anything of the kind, when, in fact, your
little piece of ground comes into your hands at first, remove all
matters from its surface, add manure to it in abundance, and have the
whole dug as deep as you can go, without bringing up the bad subsoil at
the bottom. If the ground be sandy, so much the better; then all you
have do is to give it plenty of cow, or any other rich manure that comes
to hand. If, on the other hand, it be of a clayey, stiff, tenacious
nature, like much of the ground to the north side of London, you must
act quite differently. Most pretty border plants like a light, warm,
free or sandy soil, and abhor a heavy, wet one. The way to cure, if we
may so speak, or, in other words, improve the very stiff soil, is to add
plenty of sand, leaf-mould, horse manure, or gritty scrapings from
roads, or any other loosening material of this kind that you can
obtain. Dig it in deep, and dig the ground over again, so that it may be
thoroughly incorporated with the soil. All this should be done in
autumn, if you have the time--in early autumn, if possible. When well
done, and the ground levelled, then you may mark your little walks--with
a line--and your central bed; and if in this operation you can get the
gardener to assist you, do so by all means. In many cases the gardener
gets ready the boys’ garden, and presents it to him ready for planting,
and that is the best way; for the planting and attention required
afterwards will be as much as you can do, if you do it well. A word or
two as to edgings for the borders and the bed. Don’t have anything to do
with those nasty stone edgings, so much advertised of late, as they look
very ugly and out of place in a garden. The neat little edging of box
is, perhaps, the prettiest as well as the oldest in existence. But we
are inclined to think that little edgings of plants that flower are the
best for your case. Try to be original with your edging as with
everything else, if possible, and whatever may be used as an edging near
your garden, avoid, and have something distinct. We know of about one
hundred pretty plants for making edgings, but can only mention such here
as you are likely to be able to obtain without difficulty. The best are
the rosy thrift (_Armeria vulgaris rubra_), a lovely spring plant; the
pretty little white and blue campanula pumila, and its white variety;
the large blue gentian of the Alps (_G. aculis_), this is plentiful in
Scotland, but not about London; the pretty little blue aubrietia, to be
obtained everywhere; the variegated cocksfoot grass (_Dactylis glomerata
variegata_;--what a pity it is that we are obliged to use such names);
and the double daisy in various colours. Should you make a box edging,
use the dwarfest and best kind; and if you happen to notice any other
dwarf hardy plants that make tasteful edgings, use any you fancy, by all
means. The more variety we have the better, and the only thing that it
is particularly desirable you should avoid is any forms of those
crockery wares, or artificial stone edgings, as they are all as bad and
ugly as need be.
We will now follow with a list of the most suitable plants for your
garden. To each plant a figure will be attached, to indicate the
position it should occupy in your beds or borders. We will, for
convenience sake, throw the various heights of the plants used into
three classes--1, for the smallest plants, or those fitted for the front
of the border; 2, for the medium-sized, or those suitable for the middle
parts; and finally, 3, for the taller kinds, which require to be placed
at the back, or near the back of the border. Doubtless you will make a
point of growing the rose; that is deservedly everybody’s favourite. You
may plant the rose either in the back part of your border, as a standard
in the middle, as a dwarf bush, or on the front edge, pegged down close
to the earth--not a bad way of growing it, by the way. But avoid the
standard rose, if you can; it is ugly, awkward, and by no means so
satisfactory as a rose “growing upon its own roots:” that means, a kind
not grafted upon another, but quite on its own resources. Roses
generally are grafted upon free growing common kinds, known as stocks.
The most pleasing in the end, and by far the most satisfactory, are the
roses upon their own roots. They make dwarf but long-lived and vigorous
bushes--the very best things you can employ in the middle parts of your
borders. If there be sufficient room, have a dozen kinds of roses, each
different. Every spring, from deaths during the winter, and changes of
one kind or another, you will have to look over your borders to fill up
vacancies. It is best done about the end of May, when you may exactly
see the state of the plants in the border, by filling up the majority of
these vacancies with the better kinds of bedding plants, &c. By doing so
you may enjoy both phases of gardening--the beautiful and interesting
hardy flowers, to be presently named, and the brilliant and common
flowers of the summer parterre, the pretty kinds of verbenas, the dwarf
and neat lobelias, the variegated and other geraniums, and in fact, any
kind of bedding plant that comes to hand.
Next, for the selection of the more valuable and more uncommon hardy
flowers, leaving out all such as are difficult to obtain. Among
all the flowers of spring, few are better known than some of the
anemones--apennina (1), fulgens (1), coronata (1), sylvestris (1), and
Honorine Iobert (2), are the very best. Among them we have the sweetest
blue, the brightest scarlet, and the purest white. Of the columbines
(_Aquilegias_), the best for your purposes are the common border
varieties. They are mostly fitted for the central line of the border. Of
the magnificent delphiniums, so richly blue, tall, and stately, there
are many beautiful new kinds--so many that I need not enumerate them,
but most nurserymen are pretty sure to have varieties of them. Being
tall, they are mostly suited for the back, or nearly the back portions
of the borders: if you have a central bed, they will also look very
well towards the middle of it. By the way, the middle of such bed might
well be devoted to a choice shrub or two, say a good rhododendron or
kalmia--that is, if the soil would suit such. The peony is almost too
big for such little gardens; but a plant or two may be ventured in some
unimportant spot. The yellow bachelor’s button (_Ranunculus acris_, fl.
pl. 2), is very pretty, and so exceedingly is Dielytra spectabilis (2).
Baptisia australis (3). Coronilla varia (2). Galega officinalis alba
(3). Lathyrus grandiflorus (3), a climbing plant, very fine for going up
a low trellis. The white and red everlasting peas (3), also climbers.
Orobus vernus (2). The perennial Lupin (3). Achillea ægyptiacum (2), A.
aurea (1), A. Eupatorium (3), and A. millefolium roseum (2)--all fine
and free. Of Michaelmas daisies (_Asters_), A. versicolor (1), elegans
(3), turbinellus (2), Amellus (2), will be found highly beautiful. The
Pyrethum in fine variety of beautiful colour and size: they have been
raised of late years in great quantity by Mr. Salter of the Hammersmith
nurseries, and are admirably suited to the middle line of borders,
therefore the figure 2 will indicate their position to a T; their colour
is rich and distinct in the extreme. The fine autumnal flowering Phlox
(3) is also sold in great and beautiful variety, and should have a
place in every good collection. Six or eight of the best kinds should
be in the boy’s garden. Nearly every nurseryman supplies them cheap.
In the harebell family (_Campanulas_) we will find some very fine,
particularly pumila (1), carpatica (1), persicifolia (3), and P. alba
(3), grandis (2), macrantha (3), rotundifolia (2). The fleur-de-lis, or
Iris, has some beautiful varieties, of which the best are germanica (2),
florentina (2), pallida (2), De Bergii (2), pumila (1). Tritoma grandis
(3), and glaucescens (3), are noble things for the back of a border.
The double wallflowers (2), the alpine wallflower (1) (_Cheiranthus
alpinus_). The Potentillas (2). Veronica amethystina (2), and corymbosa
(2). The Virginian tradescantia (2); the crimson loose-strife (3);
Lythrum roseum superbum. I give you the hard names so that you may have
the less difficulty in procuring the plants, for many may know them by
their Latin name, who would not know them by their common one, and _vice
versâ_. The American cowslip (1): this being a very chaste and pretty
plant, have as much as you can of it. Salvia argentea (2). This plant
has grand silvery leaves, and should be in every collection. Perennial
candy tuft, 1 (_Iberis_). There are three kinds of this--corræafolia,
saxatilis, and Garrexiana, all good, hardy, and beautiful. Arabis alpina
(1); Aubrietia purpurea (1); Alyssum saxatile (1): all three very easy
to grow, and very common. The beautiful little Hepaticas in various
colours, blue, white, and red. You must secure a stock of these, above
all things; they are among the prettiest of spring flowers, and will
“set off” charmingly the front parts of your borders. There is a fine
new kind of hepatica (_H. angulosa_), a noble kind, which you will also
do well to obtain: give it a rather shady position in light soil. One or
two tufts of the Christmas rose will be quite enough. When this begins
to show its flowers, a few weeks before Christmas, you will do well to
cover the plant with a hand-glass, leaving a little air at the top. This
will prevent the flowers from being injured or hurt by rain; they will
grow very much larger and whiter than if left exposed. Of Pentstemons
(2), a good variety should be grown, especially if the soil be light and
good, such as they delight in. Sedum fabaria (2), is a fine autumnal
flowering plant, which must not be forgotten. Rudbeckia Newmannii (3), a
very fine autumnal bloomer. Lithospermum fruticosum (1), a wonderfully
pretty plant for the fronts of borders. Any kind of pink (1) that you
can conveniently obtain, should be grown; they are sweet, hardy, neat,
and, in a word, perfect for your purposes. They are considerably varied
of late years, and highly useful for cutting for bouquets, &c. The front
of the border is the best place for them. Immediately behind them, and
scarcely so far back as the line of the second row, is the place for the
carnations and picotees, which of course you will be sure to cultivate.
There is nothing more beautiful in our gardens than many of these, so
beautifully and richly coloured, and so delicately and exquisitely
margined and striped. Linum narbonense (2), and Perenne album (2), noble
kinds of hardy flax, are also good. The Œnothera tribe will furnish
some beauty: notably the sweetly coloured Œ. acaulis (1), which opens
its very large flowers in the evening, and keeps them open till nearly
breakfast-time in the morning; the noble yellow macrocarpa; and the
large evening primrose (_Œ. Lamarkiana_). Some dwarf tiny shrubs, that
flower freely, will look beautiful in your border, and of such you
cannot find one more beautiful than the early spring flowering heath,
1 (_Erica carnea_); it is a mass of handsome bloom, and very hardy and
neat in habit. Other capital little shrubs are Daphne Cneorum, sweet and
pretty--various dwarf kinds of native heaths, and Genista tinctoria (1),
and sagittalis (1).
In addition to the above, it need hardly be added, that such universally
esteemed plants as the lily of the valley (1), the primrose (1), and the
polyanthus, should be well represented. Latterly there have been raised
considerably varied kinds of primrose and polyanthus, and nothing can be
more charming than mixed masses of such. From a packet of seed of each
(ask for that of the ordinary mixed kinds), you may raise a considerable
variety of beautiful kinds. Double daisies (1), too, in various colours,
will be found very pretty in the spring, as will the numerous kinds of
pansy (1), the gentian, and the forget-me-not. By the way, you must not
forget some tufts of the common forget-me-not; it does very well as a
border plant in all but the driest soils. At Trentham it is tastefully
employed to form a margin round some pretty little gardens, dedicated to
the various younger members of the family; and we have known people to
be so full of gratitude to a departed dog, as to plant a ring of it
round the little monumental slab which indicated his place of burial in
the garden border. The various pretty and very dwarf kinds of saxifrage
(1), and Sedum (1), too, you will find neat and distinct for the very
front of your border, in which you will of course arrange the dwarfest
plants.
One word more. It would be a pity to confine you to this or any other
selection. The more varied your garden is, and the more distinct from
that of your friends or neighbours, the better. The selection above
given is as good as can be made, and may save you from getting a lot of
ugly weeds in your garden, under the name of flowers; but in addition to
these, you would do well to add any other pretty plant met with in your
rambles, and which seems to you worthy of a place; while with friends
who cultivate plants, you may exchange any that you have plenty of, for
new varieties, or anything that you may fancy.
THE BOY’S FRUIT GARDEN.
There are few boys who cannot appreciate the virtues of a delicious
melting pear or good apple; and our object in writing this paper is to
tell them how to grow such in a comparatively short space of time. In
old times, and, indeed, generally at present, people plant for those who
come after them--“plant for their heirs,” in fact,--plant trees that
will come into bearing in twelve years or so; and therefore some may
say, why offer the boys such a far-off treat? But times change, and the
system which produces the finest fruits now in our markets, happens to
be exactly suited to the boy’s garden. Large and beautiful apples have
been sold in Paris during the past spring for as much as three francs
a-piece! These were in many, or in nearly all cases, grown upon little
trees not more than a foot from the ground, and several of them not more
than two or three years old! The French are the best growers of apples
and pears in existence; and in France originated this dwarf method of
growing them. The way they do it is as follows:--The best kinds of
apples are grafted on a variety known as the Paradise, which induces a
very dwarf growth and early fertility in the kinds grown upon it. We
have seen these fruiting, this year, at two years of age, bearing fine
fruit, much better than you see on trees developed to full size. They
are grown in two ways, generally as cordons, and occasionally as little
standards. The “cordon” is simply a single plant of apple, trained along
a wire, supported about a foot from the ground. The little standard, or
bush, is simply a diminutive Lilliputian kind of tree--just such as a
boy would wish for in his garden. Not taller, if as tall as himself, he
can shorten the shoots and gather the fruit with the greatest ease. The
culture of these little trees is so simple that no boy need fail with
them. A sunny spot should in the first instance be chosen, that is, if
the young gardener can get it; and it is not often that he is allowed
any but a bye nook of some kind or other; and no wonder, because
hitherto boys’ gardens have simply been short-lived little exhibitions
of untidiness, never yielding any result and very little beauty. But the
young gardener who manages well his fairy part of fruit garden, will
soon produce a little feature that any place might be proud of. Next, as
to how to do it.
Very little ground is required. A small patch will afford space for a
great number of little trees. A sunny open spot should be selected,
where the trees will have all the advantages of sun and air to perfect
their fruit, and render their shoots short, firm, and fertile, instead
of sappy, gross, and useless. The soil should be of a slightly sandy or
loamy nature, and not wet. If the ground be badly drained, and water
lies in it much, it is almost hopeless to attempt fruit-growing, and
the little gardener had in that case better turn his attention to
something with which his soil and circumstances are likely to agree. One
of the chief points in gardening is to choose the course most suited for
your own soil, climate, and position. Thus the boy who lives in a great
city, or the suburb of one, and who has to contend with the smoke and
other evils incident to such, must pursue a very different plan of
gardening to the boy who lives in the country, and has all the
advantages of pure, sweet air for his plants. The best of all soils for
our little fruit-trees, is one moderately sandy, yet not too loose and
free, with what we may term a free bottom, that is, a sandy or other
subsoil beneath, which will permit the water to pass off freely from the
fertile or upper earth. But although this is the best soil, there are
few others that we need reject--the worst, perhaps, being deep, stiff,
soap-like clay. The best time to plant is in the autumn. Be sure you ask
for the young apple-trees grafted on the “Paradise,” and the pears on
the Quince stock. Both apples and pears may be grown as little standard
trees or as cordons. In planting, do not put the roots deep, and spread
them out even, forming first a rather firm and slightly convex surface,
on which to place the little plant. This will be found to suit very much
better than making a loose sort of hole into which to put the roots.
It should be borne in mind that when fruit-trees send their roots deep
into rich or cold ground, they produce a lot of coarse, useless wood,
barren of fruit, or nearly so. To counteract this tendency, what is
called root-pruning has been resorted to. It simply consists in taking
up the trees once in two years or so, and replanting them--at least,
this is the way with our little trees. It may not be necessary on many
soils; but where it is, it may be readily done during pleasant dry
weather in autumn. The check given to the tree by the disturbance,
causes it to form fertile buds and a stubby habit. It is well that the
young amateur gardener should know this, so that he may apply a remedy
if his fruit-trees grow too strong and prove barren. But generally they
are fertile enough, and even sometimes produce a successful crop the
first year after planting; the second year they should bear well. The
accident of a severe frost while the trees are in flower, will of course
always do mischief, and may ruin a crop; but all are liable to this, as
well as our Lilliputians. It is best to plant the erect little trees in
a small square--pears and apples separate, for uniformity sake--and to
place the cordons around this, just as the French make a sort of edging
of them in their gardens. Indeed, if the boy cannot obtain a neat little
sunny square for his tiny trees, he will hardly fail to succeed in
getting permission to arrange a few in cordon fashion along the edge of
some border. It is simply done by either driving down a strong wooden
post, or an iron one, so as to support a wire at about ten inches or a
foot from the ground. Beneath that, the trees are to be planted, say at
a distance of six or eight feet, and tied along the wire. When once this
is done there is no further trouble, except to pinch back the shoots in
summer so as to keep them close and compact. This operation requires a
little attention. The main stem, which is of course tied carefully but
not too tightly to the wire sends out side shoots in the summer. When
these are about four, or say from three to five inches long, they are to
be pinched back, or in other words, nipped off, within about an inch of
the base of the young shoot, in the case of apple-trees--in the case of
pear-trees it should be left somewhat longer. This is for the summer
pruning; in winter it may be necessary to go over the trees with a
knife, and remove or shorten awkward spurs, or cut out dead bits here
and there; but the summer pinching is the chief thing to be done in the
matter. When the trees produce too plentiful a crop of fruit, these
should be thinned when very young, so that those left may assume the
splendid flavour and size which makes fruit grown in this way superior
to that grown in the old and large tree system. I will now give you a
list of the best kinds to use in this way, and which can be bought in
any respectable nursery. Of apples the very best are Colville Blanche
and Reinette de Canada, Cox’s orange pippin, Hawthornden, Herefordshire
Pearmain, Greaves’ pippin, or any other first-class kind of apple. Of
pears, Marie Louise, Winter Nelis, Beurré Diel, Jargonelle, Beurré
d’Amanlis, and Joséphine de Malines, will be found very suitable for the
dwarf bush or cordon style, as will most first-class pears.
_Cropping the Ground._
DIGGING.
When land is first brought under the spade it should be well dug, and it
ought to be trenched up; that is, a full spit or spadeful should be
taken and thrown somewhat higher than the general level of the ground,
and turned, so that the under part of the soil is brought to the
surface; in doing this effectually a sort of trench will be left at the
part where the spade goes in, and at the end of digging a piece of
ground in this manner this trench will be required to be filled up. It
is usual for gardeners to provide for this at the onset by bringing a
barrow full of the mould from the part at which the spade is first put
in, and filling up the trench so left at the end of the process. Common
digging, when the ground is not to be trenched, consists in turning it
over regularly and evenly with the spade. When manure is necessary, it
is either hoed over the ground and dug in as the digger proceeds, or in
trenching it may be laid in each successive trench as it is made, which
will of course be covered by the next line of digging. Flower-beds are
best turned up with a small three-pronged spade-fork; and it is often
necessary to use the same instrument when digging between strawberry and
other roots, which is technically called forking. The earth in this
process is not turned over, but only broken up and loosened, and the
handle of the fork not turned in the process, but drawn gently backwards
with a kind of knock, which can be easily acquired by practice.
HOEING.
[Illustration]
The hoe is of very great use in a garden. There are generally three
kinds of hoes: 1st, the narrow; 2d, the broad; and 3d, the Dutch hoe.
The small hoe is used for hoeing in flower-beds; the broad one for
earthing up peas, potatoes, &c., and the Dutch hoe is of service in dry
weather in clearing the ground quickly of weeds. The two former hoes are
used by drawing the handle to you, and hence called _draw hoes_; but the
Dutch hoe is used by thrusting forward, when the weeds cut up by it fall
through the hollow portion at (_a_) clear of the operation. In hoeing
the hoer should be particularly careful to go quite to the roots of the
weeds, and clear of the roots of the plants. In hoeing up peas he should
be careful to draw the earth nicely among the haulms; and in hoeing up
cabbages not to sprinkle the dirt among the tender leaves forming the
heart of the plant.
RAKING.
There are two kinds of rakes,--the broad and narrow. The broad rake is
for raking over seed beds, and the narrow one for raking borders among
flowers, &c. In the use of the rake the gardener should first lightly
drag off all the weeds and stones from the soil. In holding the handle
of the rake high, all the loose stones, weeds, &c., will be easily drawn
from the ground without the mould; when the handle is held low, the
teeth of the rake enter the ground and scratch it up, which is sometimes
necessary to be done; but the little gardener should be careful not to
rake away his soil; and the little hard balls of earth that come over
with the stones, &c. should be pulverised by the back of the rake.
WEEDING.
The garden should always be kept perfectly clear of weeds; a weed in a
garden is a disgrace to the gardener, and unless a young person makes
up his mind to be very particular in this he had better never think of
gardening. Chickweed, dandelion, plantain, bindweed, and every other
description of extraneous growth should be quickly removed, and that
worst of all weeds, called the gardener’s plague, “couchgrass,” should
be extirpated entirely, as should all suckers from the roots of trees.
Weeds, if not in seed, should be thrown into the manure pit, but sticks
or stones should never be mixed with them.
SOWING SEEDS.
[Illustration: DIBBER.]
The ground having been dug and raked, and otherwise prepared, is fit for
the reception of the seed. Radishes, carrots, parsnips, are sown by the
hand broadcast; the way of sowing carrot seed is to mix it with the
earth in a large flower-pot, and then to scatter it very thinly over the
bed: at least, that way is suited to the boy’s garden; in the open
garden and the field they sow carrots and parsnips in drills. Peas are
sown in drills about three inches deep and four feet apart. Broad beans
are put in with a dibber in straight lines about five inches apart, the
rows being four feet from each other. French beans are sown thinly in
drills about four feet apart. Scarlet runners are put in by the dibber
singly about three inches apart, and should have bean sticks placed near
them as soon as they appear, upon which to climb. Cabbage-plants should
be put in by the dibber about nine inches apart, in rows about four feet
distant from each other. Cauliflowers should be planted eighteen inches
apart either way, as should Scotch kale and sprouting brocoli. Spinach
may be sown thinly in drills three feet apart, or broadcast in beds.
Lettuce-seed, cabbage-seed, cauliflower-seed, and all kinds of
flower-seeds should be first sown in warm situations in good mould very
thinly, and then the plants should be transplanted as they grow of
sufficient size. Potatoes should be planted with the dibber nine inches
apart, in rows three feet apart, as should Jerusalem artichokes. Onions
should be sown broadcast, in beds about six feet wide and fifteen or
twenty long. The beds for parsnips and carrots may be six feet wide and
thirty long.
TRANSPLANTING.
[Illustration: TROWEL.]
This is a most important operation, and is indispensable in the art of
gardening. A vast number of seeds must be sown in beds, and afterwards
transplanted into their final situations; this is particularly the case
with regard to flowers. The instrument with which transplanting is
performed is called a trowel, of which there are both small and large.
In using it the principal thing to be attended to, is to take the best
and most vigorous of the plants raised in the seedbed, without injuring
their roots, and with the earth around them, and placing them, with as
little disturbance of their roots as possible, in their new situations.
In transplanting shrubs, &c. from pots, the planter should very slightly
break the earth round the roots of the plant, so that its fibres may
have free play in the new earth. In transplanting shrubs, &c. particular
care should be taken in digging them up, so that the young fibres of the
roots are not injured. When shrubs, &c. are first transplanted, they
should be moderately watered, and of course it is bad management to
plant shrubs at a time when they are likely to suffer from sun. The
right time to transplant is in the autumn and spring, when the ground is
nice and dry, and “in good working order,” as gardeners term it.
WATERING.
Nature is the best waterer of plants, and it is good policy to leave the
matter as much as possible in her hands; but we must assist her now and
then by applying it ourselves. In watering, pond water is much better
than pump water; and in warm weather, if no pond water can be procured,
it is well to pump the water into some large tank or tub, and let it
stand for some hours exposed to the sun and air before using it. Morning
and evening are the proper times for watering; the middle of the day, or
during a hot sunshine, is a very improper time for using the
watering-pot in summer-time, although it is the best time for using it
in the winter. In watering plants in flower-pots the finger should be
first passed round the pot where the mould joins the sides of the pot,
so as to close up the little crack or crevice between them, otherwise
the water will pass down this crack, and go out at the hole at the
bottom of the pot without affording it any benefit. In watering, never
let the water pass from the watering-pot close to the stem, but rather
turn up the earth in a little circular space for a few inches round the
plant, so that the water may soak down to the extremities of the roots,
where the spongelets are which draw up the nutriment from the earth to
support the plant. When you water, water well and thoroughly, and then
there will be little need to do it often. To water frequently, and give
a little at a time, is very bad gardening.
VARIOUS MODES OF PROPAGATION.
Plants are reproduced or propagated in various ways; some by seeds, some
by offsets, as tulips and hyacinths; some by dividing the root, some by
layers, some by cuttings. Currant and gooseberry-trees, as well as
rose-trees, and also the vine, are propagated by cuttings; _i. e._
pieces of the young last-year branches are cut off about six inches in
length, and, the top being taken off, are placed with the thickest end
in the ground. Strawberries are reproduced by dividing the root, or by
taking the runner which the plant has itself fixed in the ground as the
nucleus of a new plant, and putting it in a proper situation.
Raspberries give out suckers from the parent root, which may be taken
off and replanted, like the lilac, the rose, and many other plants; but
in taking them off, which is generally done by a spade, they should be
taken pretty near to the parent stem, and should have fibrous roots
attached. In taking offsets, such as those of bulbous roots, it is only
necessary to take those which nature herself separates from the parent
bulb; in tubers, such as the artichoke and potato, the tubers of middle
size are to be taken and planted; or in regard to the latter root, the
eyes or shoots only are sometimes planted, the root being cut into
various portions.
LAYERS.
If we observe the strawberry plant, we find that at a certain season of
the year it throws out offsets, and at certain distances a knob or knot
arises, from which roots shoot into the earth, while from its upper
centre a bud appears, and then a new plant is formed. The process of
layering is to artificially produce this, and similar operations of
nature. Some plants throw out roots whenever their stump or branches
come in contact with the soil, but others require the assistance of art.
The art of layering, therefore, consists in taking the shoot of a
growing plant as near the root as possible; this is first to be cut half
through, and then a slit is made in an upward direction, and, a piece of
twig being placed in the divided part, the shoot is pegged down with the
joint buried in the ground. After a time this joint begins to throw out
roots, and when these are firmly established and begin to draw nutriment
from the earth, the shoot may be detached from its parent stem, and it
then becomes a new plant. Layers may be made in the spring months, and
also in the month of July.
PIPINGS
Are cuttings of carnations, pinks, &c. They are tubular stems, having
joints at certain distances, and they are pulled asunder by the fingers
at these joints; the lower leaves are then pulled off, and the pipe is
placed in some nicely prepared soil, leaving its upper portion,
consisting of the sprouting leaf bud, to grow, while the lower pipe
shoots into a root.
GRAFTING.
Grafting, inarching, and budding, are generally performed in the month
of March. The operation of inarching is sometimes performed by nature.
When two branches of a tree lie in contact, the rough winds of winter
often cause them to rub against each other, so that a wound is produced
in one or both, and the juices that flow from the wounded parts
gradually cause an incorporation of the substances, so that the two
branches become united into one. This is not to be wondered at in
branches of the same tree, or in those of the same kind, but it is a
matter of some surprise to find that a tree bearing small and
unpalatable fruit may be cut down, and the remaining part grafted with a
scion from a species bearing large and delicious fruit, instead of the
small sour fruit of the stalk. Thus it is then that by grafting, we
preserve and multiply a favoured variety of trees which could not be
propagated from seeds with any certainty of success.
In order to the full success of this operation, grafting must be
performed according to the rules that experience has laid down. The
first is to graft or unite only such species as have a relationship
subsisting between them. The operation never succeeds unless this union
of nature is attended to, and the plants belong to the same genus. The
next rule requires that the inner bark of the scion, and the inner bark
of the stalk, be exactly united together, in order to facilitate the
free course of the sap.
The most common method of grafting is whip-grafting, or tongue-grafting.
The name of whip-grafting is given from the method of cutting the stock
and the scion sloping on one side so as to fit each other, and then
tying them together in the manner of a whip-thong to the shaft or
handle. The scion and stock are cut obliquely, and as nearly as possible
at corresponding angles. The top of the stock is then cut off nearly
horizontally, and a slit is made near the centre of it downwards, and a
similar one in the scion upwards. The tongue, or wedge-like process
forming the upper part of the sloping face of the scion, is then
inserted downwards in the cleft of the stock, the inner barks being
brought closely to unite on one side so as not to be displaced by tying,
which ought to be done immediately with a riband, or matting, or bass,
brought in a neat manner several times round the stock. The next
operation is to clay the whole over an inch thick all round, for about
half an inch or more below the bottom of the graft to an inch over the
top of the stock, finishing the coat of clay in a kind of oval form,
closing it effectually, so that no light, wet, nor wind, may penetrate.
TONGUE-GRAFTING.
Tongue-grafting is not very different to whip-grafting, and is performed
as follows. The stock being ready, cut it off at three or four inches
from the ground, and, with a very sharp, straight, and narrow-bladed
knife, cut a thin slip of wood and bark upwards from about two inches
below the top of the shortened stock. Make this cut at one pull of the
knife, inserting the edge rather horizontally, and when it has gone
through the bark and into the wood a little short of the middle, pull
straight upwards. Then at less than half-way down this cut a thin
tongue, not more than three-eighths of an inch long. Proceed in the same
way with the thick part of the scion, making a sloping cut of about the
same length as the cut of the stock, and make a tongue to correspond
with that in the stock. Bring the four edges of the bark, that is, the
two edges of the cut in the top of the stock and the two corresponding
edges of the cut in the bottom of the scion, to meet precisely, which
can never be the case unless the first cut in the stock and that in the
scion is even as a die, and performed with a knife as sharp as a razor.
The two parts thus formed, the tongues and the stock clasping one
another must be bound up as before.
BUDDING.
Budding is the art of taking a bud from one tree and making it grow on
another. A bud can only be planted upon a tree of the same kind as
itself, and the operation is generally performed in the month of August.
The bud should be taken from a shoot of the same year’s growth, and, in
taking it, should be neatly cut out by incisions made above it, below
it, and longitudinally on either side, and the piece taken should
include the bud, without injury to the bark, and a small piece of wood
of an oblong form pointed at its extremity. A place is now cut to
receive the bud in the shoot of a stock, and the best place is near the
fork of a branch; the method of cutting is similar to that adopted for
taking out the bud, and the bark is open on both sides of the slit, and
the piece of bark to which the bud is attached is then filled in, and
the bark of the stock closed over it; the two parts are then bound
together with strips of fresh matting tied in bows and ends, for the
purpose of being easily loosened as the bud increases in growth. The
operation of budding requires the aid of a budding-knife, which may be
readily purchased, and the success of the operation depends upon the
care and nicety with which it is performed.
INARCHING.
We have already mentioned how nature performs what is called inarching.
The gardener’s art consists simply in bending a branch partly cut
through, and inserting the belt thus formed into a slit made downwards
in the stock to receive it. The parts being nicely fitted are bound with
matting. In five or six months the head of the stock may be cut off, and
the plant removed.
GRAFTING-CLAY.
Most of the operations of grafting require clay to be put round the
parts. This is made of three parts of stiff yellow clay to one of
horse-dung fresh as it falls, with a little cut hay, well mixed
together; another kind of clay is made of a pound of pitch and a pound
of yellow wax, mixed with two pounds of cow-dung. The use of them in
covering the grafting posts is to keep them moist and cool till a proper
union has taken place.
PRUNING.
The proper time for pruning trees is in December or January, for then
the sap is down, and no injury can be done; and the art in pruning
consists in cutting away the “water shoots,” or non-bearing wood, “dead
wood,” and “superfluous wood.” The water shoots, as they are called,
appear to be strong growing branches, but generally produce neither
flowers nor fruit; the superfluous wood are those shoots which grow in
the way of each other, or cross each other, which should always be
removed. The great principle in pruning a fruit tree is to leave all the
tree free and open, so that the air and sunshine may pass through it,
and to preserve the buds of the bearing wood. The shoots should be cut
off as near to the stem or branch as possible, and all growths or
suckers which appear below the crown of the tree should be taken off.
The present practice of thumb-pruning is very excellent; by this means
the superfluous shoots, &c., are removed by the thumb nail as soon as
they appear, and thus the tree does not exhaust itself by the growth of
useless wood. The young pruner should be very careful in cutting away,
and recollect that what he cuts off he cannot put on again.
TRAINING.
The training of trees applies principally to those that are fastened to
wooden trellises, to poles, or to walls. The principle of the art is to
extend the bearing branches of a tree or plant, so as to improve its
growth, its beauty, and its produce. Peaches, nectarines, apricots,
vines, &c., are trained against walls by shreds of cloth being placed
round the branches, and the two ends nailed to the wall. In doing this,
care should be taken to give the branch room to play, and yet to confine
it, not to hurt the tender fruit-shoots in the operation, and to let all
the branches be free of each other. Roses and jasmines are often trained
round verandahs by their different parts being tied with ropes’ end or
tarred twine to different parts of the trelliswork. Sometimes flowers
are trained by being tied to stakes or long poles, and others are
brought to pass through the round of an ornamental ladder, or through
the meshes of wirework of different forms. But in every kind of training
the principle is the same, namely that of keeping the branches clear of
each other, and of preserving the flowering and bearing shoots. Neatness
and taste are also indispensable requisites to the training and
management of trees and flowers, whether for use or ornament.
INSECTS AND DEPREDATORS.
There are various kinds of depredators which find their way into
gardens;--worms, slugs, caterpillars, moles, ants, birds, butterflies,
snails, &c. These must be got rid of, or kept down, otherwise the
gardening labours are soon at an end. In wild nature all the above
“vermin,” as some people designate them, are of the greatest service in
some way or other; even worms and moles, which are very destructive in
gardens, are of great service on commons, and therefore in destroying
them we should always do so with as little pain as possible to the
individuals; and, as prevention is better than cure, the young gardener
should look out in winter for the eggs of various moths and butterflies,
which may be often seen encircling the twigs of trees, or under the
eaves of paling, &c., and destroy them. Caterpillars are best got rid of
by picking them from the plants; and slugs, and snails, and worms, are
often eradicated by turning a brood of young ducks into the ground for a
short time, where they can do no injury to the beds. They may also be
entrapped by laying cabbage leaves in different parts of the garden,
under which they will creep in the night time. Moles must be caught with
a mole-trap set in the line of their march. It consists simply of a bent
stick, and a wire formed into a noose, slightly attached to the neck of
a peg, into which the animal runs his head and gets strangled, by the
elasticity of the rod drawing up the noose when the peg is disturbed.
Ants are best got rid of by destroying their nest and eggs, the latter
of which are excellent food for young chickens, pheasants, &c. The most
destructive insect is the aphis, which attacks the rose, and this is
best destroyed by the fumigation of tobacco-smoke, either through a pair
of common bellows, or by means of the whirl-fumigator, which may be
purchased for a few shillings; but the most certain mode of destruction
is to obtain a few “golden beetles,” and put near the plants infected by
aphides; these are their natural enemies, and where they are placed the
aphides will soon become extinct.
[Illustration]
PROTECTION FROM FROST.
The common trees and fruits of the garden require but little care as
regards frost in our comparatively mild winters, but many plants, trees,
and shrubs, coming originally from warmer climates, require much
attention during winter to keep them alive. It is useless to attempt
preserving geraniums, myrtles, and a great many of our common summer
plants, without keeping them through the winter in a greenhouse of some
kind or other. A small greenhouse may now be cheaply erected, but for
the preservation of a small number of plants the greenhouse pit is the
cheapest and most convenient substitute. It consists only of a hole
twelve feet by four dug in the ground to the depth of six feet, having
at the top a skylight. It should if possible be dug in a sheltered
situation, open to the south and well backed behind, and the glass-top,
which should merely consist of one frame laid in a slanting position to
the south over the top of the hole, the back of which is raised to
support it, the front being slightly lowered. The entrance to the pit is
at the side, to which a stout wooden door nailed over with straw bands
should be attached, and two or three steps should lead to the interior
of the pit, where a few shelves may be arranged upon which to place the
flowers, &c. In this pit flowers, cuttings, bulbs, and a variety of
other things, may be preserved through the winter, with very little cost
or trouble, and it will be of a great deal of use in many other
respects.
[Illustration]
THE YOUNG GARDENER’S CALENDAR FOR THE WORK TO BE DONE IN ALL THE MONTHS
OF THE YEAR.
JANUARY.
In January, if the weather will permit, manure the ground, and dig the
manure in. Plant out some strong early cabbage in warm situations: plant
early kinds of Windsor beans. Sow peas, early Warwick, in drills two
feet and a-half asunder; sow a first early crop of spinach; sow early
radishes, and cover them with straw two inches thick, then uncover every
mild day, and cover again in the evening. Plant in the flower border the
various bulbs, such as snowdrops, crocuses, daffodils, jonquils, &c.,
and also their offsets. Plant also the hardy herbaceous plants, such as
asters, golden rods, campanulas, Canterbury bells, &c. Keep gravel walks
clean.
FEBRUARY.
Peas, beans, spinach, lettuce, carrots, parsnips, beet, &c., may now be
sown; and in hotbeds cucumbers, small salading, melons, lettuce, &c.
Give air to plants under frames in the natural ground. Dig and prepare
the compartments of beds and borders; sow many sorts of hardy annual
flower seeds; the tender sorts in hotbeds, such as larkspurs,
candy-tuft, yellow lupines, pansies, virgin stock, sweet scabious
mignonette, ten-weeks stock, &c. And for edgings of border, plant box,
thrift, daisies, parsley, strawberries, &c.
MARCH.
Still continue to prepare an appropriate ground by digging and manuring,
sow again peas, beans, &c., if necessary, and especially a bed of
turnips. Now is the time also to sow small herbs, as thyme, savory; you
may also now plant various slips or cuttings of rosemary, rue, wormwood,
and lavender. These should be the outward shoots produced last year,
five or six inches long, and should be planted in a shady border, six
inches apart. Now also may be sown nasturtiums, which may be sown in
patches, dibbed in six inches apart, or in drills, near a rail or
running fence. Potatoes may also be now planted in open weather. In
planting them, take care to get the best sorts, and pick out some of the
finest of a moderately large size, and then divide the tubers into two
or three parts, leaving an eye or two to each; plant the pieces in rows
about eighteen inches from each other, and about four inches deep. Now
also is the time for pruning the various fruit trees, planting fresh
sets of raspberries, strawberries, &c. In the flower garden the tender
annuals are to be sown in hotbeds, such as cockscomb, balsam,
china-aster, tobacco, convolvulus, &c. Ranunculuses, anemones, and the
hardy annuals, may be sown in the open ground, and transplanting of all
kinds of plants, shrubs, &c., may now be performed.
APRIL.
This is a transplanting month, particularly for cabbages and
cauliflowers, all which should be now taken and put out for summer use.
Celery should also now be pricked out. Continue to plant, if necessary,
pot herbs and sweet herbs, such as rooted slips of balm, penny royal,
and camomile. It is a good time also to plant out slips of mint from the
roots; other crops of peas may also now be sown, as also a late crop of
beans. Now also you may sow gourds and pumpkins in a frame. All pruning
must be finished. Insects must be looked after on fruit trees. Vines may
be laid down in layers; wall-fruit thinned; strawberry beds weeded, and
kept very clean; new-budded and new-grafted trees well examined to see
if the clay keeps close to the grafts. In the flower garden or borders
some of the tender annuals may now be pricked out, and some of the
others sown in the frame, such as Prince’s feather, capsicum,
love-apples, Indian corn, gourds, sweet balsam, marvel of Peru; stocks,
and the hardy annuals, may now be sown in the open ground, as Adonis
poppy, sweet peas, catch-fly, annual sunflower, larkspur, lupines,
Venus’s looking-glass. The best way to sow sweet peas is in pots, and
protect them well from the birds, who will otherwise not leave one.
Inarching may now be performed on evergreens and other plants, which you
may wish to propagate this way.
MAY.
Lettuces will now want tying up. Peas will require sticking. Do not tie
your lettuces up too tightly, and when you stick your peas put in the
stick in a slanting direction. Clear and thin carrots and parsnips,
leaving the largest plants at least four inches from each other; thin
also onions; plant out cauliflowers. Sow brocoli seeds for the crop to
come in on the following winter and early spring. Sow and plant savoys;
top the broad beans that are now in blossom, which will make the pods
set sooner and swell faster. Plant the various kinds of French beans,
such as the white speckled, in drills about three feet apart, and sow
them thin. Prick out and plant celery; continue to sow radishes and
small salading for daily use. Water new planted crops, and now let more
than common care be taken to destroy weeds amongst crops of every kind;
and now is the time for using your Dutch hoe freely among the rows of
peas, beans, and spinach; but do not leave your weeds about in the
drills or borders; clear all carefully away, and keep the garden clean
and neat.
JUNE.
Look after your melons, pumpkins, gourds, and cucumbers, in frames; let
them be well supplied with fresh air and water. To save cauliflower
seed, mark some of the best and earliest plants, with the largest and
whitest and closest flower heads, which should not be cut, but left to
run to seed. Peas may still be sown, and French beans also, as may
cabbage and colewort seed. Gather mint, balm, and other aromatic herbs,
towards the end of this month, for drying. Examine any new planted
trees, see that they are not too dry, and that they are well secured.
Water should be given to those that show any symptoms of flagging; water
them well, but not frequently. Take care that your strawberry beds are
also well watered. Hang up nets before early cherry-trees against walls,
and over small trees, to protect them from the birds. Most of the tender
annuals may be now finally planted out, and now is the time to take up
the roots of tulips, crown imperials, jonquils, &c., and to take away
the offsets. Continue to support with sticks all the tall growing
flowering plants. Cut box-edgings, and regulate your flower borders,
keeping your plants well watered if the weather should be very dry.
JULY.
You may now sow a batch of turnips for winter or autumn use, and also
some carrot seed to raise young carrots for use later in the autumn.
Celery may be transplanted, winter spinach may be sown, lettuces may be
planted out, coleworts may be sown. Gather your cucumbers as they
appear, and gather all sorts of seeds as they ripen in dry weather,
pulling up the stems with the seed where it can be done. Bring out the
cockscombs, double balsams, and all other curious annuals kept till this
time in frames. Transplant annuals into the borders. Lay carnations and
sweetwilliams; propagate pinks by pipings; transplant perennial plants.
Take up bulbous roots, cut box-edgings, regulate your flower borders.
Plant cuttings and slips of succulent plants; shift geraniums and other
plants into larger pots, if necessary.
AUGUST.
Cauliflower seed must be sown between the 18th and the 24th. Celery
should now be transplanted into trenches, and lettuce planted out. In
the end of the month the dry flower stems of aromatic plants, such as
hyssop, sage, lavender, should be cut down. Now look well out for
various seeds as they ripen, which gather by cutting or pulling off the
seed-stalks, then place them in the full sun against a hedge or wall to
get them thoroughly dry. All flowers should now be carefully attended,
and watered when necessary. The pink pipings should now be planted out
in beds, and the seeds of many bulbous flowers, such as tulips,
hyacinths, lilies, may be sown to obtain new varieties. Flower borders
should occasionally be gone over with a sharp hoe, after which they
should be raked over neatly, and all weeds and litter cleared away.
SEPTEMBER.
Lettuces may now be planted in frames, or in very warm borders, for
winter use. Brocoli, cabbage and savoy plants may also be planted out,
and young plants pricked out into nursery beds. Celery should be earthed
up, and you should tie up the leaves of endive to blanch the plants
white. The spinach sown in August should be thinned and cleared out, and
small salading should be sown once a-week or fortnight. Gather ripe
seeds as before, and see that the birds do not devour them. Now is a
good time to plant the strong runner plants into separate beds, and at
about fifteen inches asunder either way. Towards the end of the month
hyacinth and tulip roots may be planted, as well as any other bulbous
root. Anemone and ranunculus seed may be sown, and perennial plants
transplanted. Continue to keep the flower borders always very clean, and
begin digging vacant beds and borders for future planting.
OCTOBER.
Now the apples and pears begin to ripen. Seeds are still to be looked
for and preserved, vacant spaces of ground are to be dug up and manured.
Fruit trees may now be transplanted, and currant and gooseberry-trees
may be planted. Recollect that the currant-trees may be cut close down
to the fruit buds, but the gooseberry only half way down the last year’s
wood. Cut out irregular growths and suckers, and keep them trained to a
single stem below. Strawberry beds should this month have their winter
dressing of manure, and all the runners cleared away close to the head
of the main plants. Raspberry plants may be pruned, the old stems cut
away, and the last year’s suckers’ stems selected for the next year’s
bearings, and each of them shortened one-third in height. In the
flower-garden the borders should be nicely dressed, and all kinds of
plants may be transplanted, or their roots divided, and bulbs not yet
planted may be put into the earth. Plant all kinds of shrubs and
evergreen trees.
NOVEMBER.
Now is the time for digging up potatoes, and taking up carrots,
parsnips, onions, &c., and storing them for winter use. Winter spinach
should be weeded, and the red beet-root dug up. Onions may be pricked
out to come in early in the spring. Trees may be pruned; all sorts of
fruit trees and bulbous roots planted. Now tender plants should be
removed to the pit or greenhouse.
DECEMBER.
Peas may be sown in a warm sheltered spot to come in early in the
spring, as may Windsor and broad beans. Celery should be well earthed
up, and all vacant ground manured, dug, or trenched. Secure the roots of
newly planted trees from the frost by laying dungy litter round them,
and the same may be done to the spots in which hyacinths, tulips,
anemones, and ranunculuses are planted. Small young tender seedling
flower plants also require care at this season. The borders may now be
finally cleared and laid nice and smooth, the remainder of pot plants
removed to the greenhouse or pit, which should be closed during the
night, and only opened in fine mild weather; as the frost comes on place
mats above the glass during the night, which should be removed in the
morning. All leaves from trees, &c., should be collected in a pit for
manure, free from sticks or stones, and the whole garden put into order
for the frost.
MIMICRY AND VENTRILOQUISM.
“How can I become a ventriloquist?” is the frequent thought of a boy;
and he is told, probably, that it is an exceptional faculty, and cannot
possibly be acquired. This is not so; perseverance and practice are
alone necessary to produce those wonderful results which never fail to
captivate the public, if the student has a fair musical ear, and a
talent for imitation which few boys are without. The deceptive nature of
the sounds are the result of certain natural principles, which are
called in to aid the experimenter. Those who have seen any professors of
the ventriloquial art now living must have been struck by the apparent
ease with which the effects are produced. This is not only the result of
practice, but the careful attention to certain acoustic principles which
regulate the direction of sounds. A sudden change in the direction of
sound is oftentimes very perplexing to the ear, even when the eye can
assist the other organs. The change of direction of the sound of a peal
of bells, which is often interrupted by intervening buildings, is a
familiar instance of this, their sound appearing to come from different
places as the hearer changes his position. We can easily imagine that
when the hearer is still, and the source of the sound moves, the
deception becomes much greater, if skilfully applied to the purpose.
The first great secret is to take a full and deep inspiration, so that
the lungs may be well filled, to be used as a Highlander uses the
windbag of his bagpipes, as required. If we remember that the larynx,
which is the cavity in the throat behind the tongue, is capable of
considerable flexibility, as well as the trachea or windpipe, we have
good materials for ventriloquial effect; thus the mouth and tongue have
really, but not apparently, a great deal to do with the modifications of
the assumed voice. A clever ventriloquist recommends the mouth to be
kept closed, and the tongue rolled back, so as to regulate, as it were,
the sound which is formed in the larynx. This may be done by
strengthening the abdominal muscles; and it is probably from this being
so frequently done, that the name of “belly-speaking” arose. The highest
perfection of ventriloquism is speaking with the lips closed, and
apparently without an effort of any kind. Some old and some modern
professors had this marvellous power in perfection.
It has been recently observed that by constant practice the veil of the
palate can be so exercised that it can be raised or depressed at will,
so as to dilate or contract the inner nostrils. The effect of this
contraction is the same as Mr. Hardy’s rolled tongue; it muffles, as it
were, the sound, renders it weak and dull, as if coming from a distance.
On the other hand, if the nostrils are dilated to any extent, the sound
gradually becomes apparently closer and closer, because it is more
distinct.
The uncertainty of the direction of sound greatly aids the
ventriloquist. If a man and a woman are placed at either end of a
tolerably large room, and each imitates with tolerable success the voice
of the other, the confusion between the eye and the ear is so great that
it becomes next to impossible to know which it was that spoke. It is
thus necessary that the ventriloquist should either by word or gesture
direct the attention of his hearers to the spot from whence they expect
the sound to proceed. Really, in practice, there is little difference
between the sound of a muffled voice, whether it is outside the door,
above the ceiling, or down in the cellar. It is possible to acquire such
a knowledge of the modifications of sound by distance, obstructions, or
other causes, as to imitate them with wonderful accuracy. The late Mr.
Love used to carry on a dialogue with a person in a box, and by a
masterly modulation of his voice he gave it a muffled tone when he sat
upon the box, and different degrees of sharpness as he gradually opened
the lid.
The best practice is to begin with imitations only of different voices,
until some progress is made. Then commence to practise the muffled voice
until the audience are satisfied that it is done tolerably well, for the
operator cannot judge of the effect it is producing save by experience.
The voice may now be changed until the second voice is marked by some
distinguishing characteristic, such as bass, alto, gruff, or speaking.
Then the distant voice may be tried, to be modulated as before as
success is attained.
A well-known ventriloquist used to make some excellent effects by
speaking with a closed mouth when drawing an inspiration, instead of the
usual method of speaking during the expiration of the breath.
We will suppose a ventriloquist about to give an illustration of his
art. He first takes care that none of his audience are between the line
of his mouth and the spot from which the sound appears to proceed. Thus
the simplest cause of ventriloquial effect is produced by standing with
your back to the audience and your face to the door. With closed jaws
you direct a muffled voice against the door. The sound which reaches the
ears of the audience is a voice apparently outside the door, but in
reality it is an echo of the artificial voice only. Take a simple
example. You knock at the door, and in your natural voice you inquire if
anyone is there. Assuming the muffled tone, you say that “it’s a
friend,” and then inquire his name and business. The answers being
given, you slightly open the door and the corner of your lips at the
same time, and then the voice loses its muffled tone, and appears more
distinct as it comes closer. The deception is more difficult to
maintain, and the ventriloquist suddenly turns round and shows that the
voice is in reality a mere shade.
If we try the ceiling voice, or the familiar “man on the roof,” we
should use the upper notes, and reserve the lower notes for the “man in
the cellar.” In either of these illusions the lips should not be opened
at all. The modulation of tones should be managed in the larynx, by the
action of the tongue only, unless the voice is supposed to come down the
chimney into the room. In either case the mouth should be turned to the
place from whence the sound is supposed to proceed; and when speaking in
his natural tones, the performer should address himself directly to the
audience; always using appropriate gestures to signify the ascent or
descent of the owner of the fictitious voice.
These two voices are in reality the only true ventriloquial voices. The
variation of tone and accent depends more on the organs of imitation
than on true ventriloquism, though when both arts are combined the
effect is so much enhanced as to become perfectly marvellous. One of the
simplest sounds to produce is that of the humming-bee, wasp, or
bluebottle fly. The first sound is produced in the chest, the latter by
the lips. It is always well to attempt to catch the insect after it has
indicated its presence. This enables the sound to be raised in tone, and
occasionally muffled when the offending suppositious insect is inclosed
in the handkerchief.
The imitation of a knife-grinder is easily done, the grinding being
produced by a sharp hissing sound through the teeth, and the “buffing”
or polishing, by gently closing the lips and drawing the breath through
them until they vibrate--a not uncommon schoolboy accomplishment. The
sawing of wood, the frying of a pancake, the uncorking of a bottle, and
the gurgling noise of pouring out the liquid, may all be successfully
imitated; but these are much less striking and ingenious than true
ventriloquism.
[Illustration]
PUZZLES.
1. THE DIVIDED GARDEN.
A person let his house to several inmates, who occupied different
floors, and having a garden attached to the house, he was desirous of
dividing it among them. There were ten trees in the garden, and he was
desirous of dividing it so that each of the five inmates should have an
equal share of garden and two trees. How did he do it?
[Illustration]
2. THE VERTICAL LINE PUZZLE.
Draw six vertical lines, as below, and, by adding five other lines to
them, let the whole form nine.
| | | | | |
| | | | | |
| | | | | |
3. THE CARDBOARD PUZZLE.
Take a piece of cardboard or leather, of the shape and measurement
indicated by the diagram, cut it in such a manner that you yourself may
pass through it, still keeping it in one piece.
[Illustration]
4. THE BUTTON PUZZLE.
In the centre of a piece of leather make two parallel cuts with a
penknife, and just below a small hole of the same width; then pass a
piece of string under the slit and through the hole, as in the figure,
and tie two buttons much larger than the hole to the ends of the string.
The puzzle is, to get the string out again without taking off the
buttons.
[Illustration]
5. THE CIRCLE PUZZLE.
Get a piece of cardboard, the size and shape of the diagram, and punch
in it twelve circles or holes in the position shown. The puzzle is, to
cut the cardboard into four pieces of equal size, each piece to be of
the same shape, and to contain three circles, without cutting into any
of them.
[Illustration]
6. THE CROSS PUZZLE.
Cut three pieces of paper to the shape of No. 1, one to the shape of No.
2, and one to that of No. 3. Let them be of proportional sizes. Then
place the pieces together so as to form a cross.
[Illustration]
7. THREE-SQUARE PUZZLE.
Cut seventeen slips of cardboard of equal lengths, and place them on a
table to form six squares, as in the diagram. It is now required to take
away five of the pieces, yet to leave but three perfect squares.
[Illustration]
8. CYLINDER PUZZLE.
[Illustration]
Cut a piece of cardboard about four inches long, of the shape of the
diagram, and make three holes in it as represented. The puzzle is, to
make one piece of wood pass through, and also exactly to fill, each of
the three holes.
9. THE NUNS.
Twenty-four nuns were arranged in a convent by night by a sister, to
count nine each way, as in the diagram. Four of them went out for a walk
by moonlight. How were the remainder placed in the square so as still to
count nine each way? The four who went out returned, bringing with them
four friends; how were they all placed still to count nine each way, and
thus to deceive the sister, as to whether there were 20, 24, 28, or 32,
in the square?
[Illustration]
10. THE DOG PUZZLE.
The dogs are, by placing two lines upon them, to be suddenly aroused to
life and made to run. Query, How and where should these lines be placed,
and what should be the forms of them?
[Illustration]
11. CUTTING OUT A CROSS.
How can be cut out of a single piece of paper, and with one cut of the
scissors, a perfect cross, and all the other forms as shown in the cuts?
[Illustration]
12. ANOTHER CROSS PUZZLE.
With three pieces of cardboard of the shape and size of No. 1, and one
each of No. 2 and 3, to form a cross.
[Illustration]
13. THE FOUNTAIN PUZZLE.
A is a wall, B C D three houses, and E F G three fountains or canals It
is required to bring the water from E to D, from G to B, and from F to
C, without one crossing the other, or passing outside of the wall A.
[Illustration]
14. THE CABINET-MAKER’S PUZZLE.
A cabinet-maker had a circular piece of veneering, with which he has to
veneer the tops of two oval stools; but it so happens that the area of
the stools, exclusive of the hand-holes in the centre, and the circular
piece, are the same, (as that of the circle.) How must he cut his stuff
so as to be exactly sufficient for his purpose?
15. THE STRING AND BALLS PUZZLE.
Get an oblong strip of wood or ivory, and bore three holes in it, as
shown in the cut. Then take a piece of twine, passing the two ends
through the holes at the extremities, fastening them with a knot, and
thread upon it two beads or rings, as depicted above. The puzzle is to
get both beads on the same side, without removing the string from the
holes, or untying the knots.
[Illustration]
16. THE DOUBLE-HEADED PUZZLE.
Cut a circular piece of wood as in the cut No. 1, and four others, like
No. 2. The puzzle consists in getting them all into the cross-shaped
slit, until they look like Fig. 3.
[Illustration]
17. THE ROW OF HALFPENCE.
Place ten halfpence in a row on the table. Then take up one of them and
place it on another, never in any case passing over more than a penny
(that is to say, two halfpence). Repeat the operation until no halfpenny
remains by itself in the row.
18. TYPOGRAPHICAL ADVICE.
You are to read the following directions:--
If your B m t put :
When your IS . putting :
19. THE LANDLORD MADE TO PAY.
A well-known miser once invited his tenants to dinner at an inn, and to
the surprise of the landlord, asked him to join the party. When the bill
was brought in, the miser proposed that they should cast lots who should
pay the whole score for the twenty-one persons who had dined. It was
agreed that they should be counted by the days of the week, and that
every time the counter called “Saturday,” the person so named should
leave the room until there was only one man left, and he should be
paymaster. How did the miser contrive to throw the expense on the
landlord?
20. FATHER AND SON.
An old country squire planted a number of oaks when his son was born,
and on the twenty-seventh birthday of the young man there was a tree for
every year, and yet though there were only 27 trees, there were ten rows
and six trees in each row, which made sixty, the age of the squire
himself. How did he manage it?
ANSWERS TO PUZZLES.
1. THE DIVIDED GARDEN ANSWER.
[Illustration]
2. ANSWER TO VERTICAL LINE PUZZLE.
___
|\ | | |\ | |
| \ | | | \ | |---
| \| | | \| |___
3. ANSWER TO CUT CARD PUZZLE.
Double the cardboard or leather lengthways down the middle, and then cut
first to the right, nearly to the end (the narrow way), and then to the
left, and so on to the end of the card; then open it and cut down the
middle, except the two ends. The diagram shows the proper cuttings. By
opening the card or leather, a person may pass through it. A laurel leaf
may be treated in the same manner.
[Illustration]
4. ANSWER TO THE BUTTON PUZZLE.
Draw the narrow slip of the leather through the hole, and the string and
buttons may be easily released.
5. ANSWER TO THE CIRCLE PUZZLE.
[Illustration]
6. ANSWER TO THE CROSS PUZZLE.
[Illustration]
7. ANSWER TO THE THREE-SQUARE PUZZLE.
Take away the pieces numbered 8, 10, 1, 3, 13, and three squares only
will remain.
ANSWER TO NO. 8.
[Illustration]
Take a round cylinder of the diameter of the circular hole, and of the
height of the square hole. Having drawn a straight line across the end,
dividing it into two equal parts, cut an equal section from either side
to the edge of the circular base, a figure like that represented by the
woodcut in the margin would then be produced, which would fulfil the
required conditions.
9. ANSWER TO THE NUNS’ PUZZLE.
[Illustration]
10. THE DOGS’ PUZZLE ANSWERED, SEE DOTTED LINES
[Illustration]
11. ANSWER TO CUTTING OUT A CROSS PUZZLE.
[Illustration]
Take a piece of writing paper about three times as long as it is broad,
say six inches long and two wide. Fold the upper corner down, as shown
in Fig. 1; then fold the other upper corner over the first, and it will
appear as in Fig. 2; you next fold the paper in half lengthwise, and it
will appear as in Fig. 3. Then the last fold is made lengthwise also, in
the middle of the paper, and it will exhibit the form of Fig. 4, which,
when cut through with the scissors in the direction of the dotted line,
will give all the forms mentioned.
12. ANSWER TO ANOTHER CROSS PUZZLE.
[Illustration]
13. ANSWER TO THE FOUNTAIN PUZZLE.
[Illustration]
14. ANSWER TO THE CABINET-MAKER’S PUZZLE.
[Illustration]
The cabinet-maker must find the centre of the circle, and strike another
circle, half the diameter of the first, and having the same centre.
Then cut the whole into four parts, by means of two lines drawn at right
angles to each other, then cut along the inner circle, and put the
pieces together as in the above diagram.
15. ANSWER TO THE STRING AND BALLS PUZZLE.
Draw the loop well down, slipping either ball through it. Push it
through the hole at the extremities, pass it over the knot, and draw it
through again. The same process must be repeated with the other ball;
the loop can then be drawn through the hole in the centre, and the ball
will slide along the cord until it reaches the other side. The string is
then replaced, having both balls on the same side.
This plan of passing the loop over the knot is a key to all the puzzles
of this nature.
There is another and perhaps a neater way of performing this trick. Draw
the loop through the central hole, and bring it through far enough to
pass one of the balls through. Having done this, draw the string back,
and both balls will be found on the same side.
16. ANSWER TO THE DOUBLE-HEADED PUZZLE.
Arrange them side by side in the short arms of the cross, draw out the
centre piece, and the rest will follow easily. The reversal of the same
process will put them back again.
[Illustration]
17. THE ROW OF HALFPENCE.
To perform this trick successfully, you must place the fourth on the
first, seventh on the third, fifth upon the ninth, the second upon the
sixth, and the eighth upon the tenth.
18. TYPOGRAPHICAL PUZZLE.
This puzzle should be read thus:--
If your grate be (great B) empty, put coal on.
When your grate is (great IS) full, stop putting coal on.
19. THE LANDLORD MADE TO PAY.
The counting, which stopped at every seventh man, was made to begin at
the sixth from the landlord, who sat at the end of the table.
20. FATHER AND SON.
The trees were planted in this form:--
[Illustration]
[Illustration: SHOWS.]
Under this head we describe those shows which may be exhibited by any
ingenious youth for the amusement of a large circle of friends. Parents
frequently employ the itinerant Punch-and-Judy man to astonish and
delight a juvenile party with his comical puppets; and we are convinced
that they act wisely, as children of all ages enjoy nothing so much as a
good show. The reader, by following our directions, may exhibit the
freaks of Punch and Judy, the dancing figures of the Fantoccini, the
grotesque shadows of the Gallanty Show; in fine, he may become quite an
expert showman.
[Illustration: PUNCH & JUDY]
By following our directions, the reader may, with comparatively little
trouble, construct some comical puppets, and acquire sufficient skill in
working them, to give private representations of the celebrated drama of
“Punch and Judy,” which never fails to excite the laughter of old and
young.
In carving the heads of the puppets, the ingenuity of the reader will be
most severely taxed. Each head must be fashioned out of a piece of soft
wood, with a sharp penknife, and then painted with oil colours. An old
wooden doll will be a capital model for the reader to work from, only he
must cut much deeper, in order to make the features of his puppets
sufficiently prominent. Punch’s nose and chin may be formed of separate
pieces of wood, and then fastened on to the face with a little glue. Our
artist has drawn a full-length figure of Punch (see next page), and the
faces of the other characters in the drama--namely, 1. Judy; 2. Beadle;
3. Foreigner; 4. Ghost; 5. Doctor; 6. Clown; 7. Jones; 8. Hangman. The
carver should study these illustrations attentively, and endeavour to
imitate them. The eyes of the Ghost are two black beads, which may be
fixed by pins, or loosely attached by short pieces of thread, so that
they may roll about in their saucer-like sockets. The eyes of the other
puppets may be formed of white beads, fixed by black-headed pins in
small cavities made to receive them. The hair and beard of the
Foreigner, and the Clown’s three tufts, may be made of any kind of fur;
the Hangman’s wig, and the Doctor’s scanty locks, of worsted. Each head
should be about the size of an ordinary hen’s egg, and should have a
hole made at the bottom, large enough to receive the tip of the
showman’s finger.
[Illustration]
Punch is the only puppet that exhibits his legs to the audience, and
therefore the only one requiring lower limbs; these legs, as well as the
hands of all the characters, are to be cut out of wood and painted.
The cloth figures of the puppets must be so constructed, that the
exhibitor can easily slip them over his hand and wrist; to these hollow
bodies the heads and hands are to be securely fastened with a little
glue, or some small tacks. Punch’s figure may be formed of red merino,
or any other gay-coloured stuff; the “goodly hunch” and prominent
stomach must not be forgotten; these important appendages may be stuffed
with cotton or tow. Judy’s dress may be made of cotton print; the
Beadle’s, of blue cloth, edged with gold lace; the Foreigner’s, of
almost any kind of stuff; the Doctor’s, of black cloth; and the dresses
of Jones and the Hangman, of any sober-coloured stuffs. The Ghost must
be enveloped in a long white linen gown; and the popular favourite, the
Clown, must be arrayed in the true pantomimic style. In constructing the
dresses, the reader will have his patience sorely tried, unless he can
persuade a few young ladies to aid him with their nimble fingers.
Motion is given to each of the puppets by the showman’s hand, the
forefinger of which moves the head, while the thumb and second finger
work the two arms; the annexed engraving will elucidate this operation.
[Illustration]
We have not yet alluded to two important characters in the
drama--namely, the Baby and the eccentric dog Toby. Any little doll may
be dressed in long-clothes to represent the Baby, so the reader may be
spared the trouble of carving another head. The part of Toby is
generally filled by a living performer, but as we do not suppose the
reader to be the owner of a properly-trained cur, we recommend him to
procure one of those barking or squeaking dogs which are sold at the
toy-shops; with such a Toby, the fun of the piece will be increased
rather than diminished.
Punch’s stick must be about a foot long, and quite half an inch thick;
it must be formed of tough wood, as some rough work is performed with it
during the progress of the drama. The gallows must be of the letter [F]
form, and must have two holes bored through the end of the projecting
beam; the cord having been knotted at one end, is to be passed through
each hole.
Having described the puppets, we will now say a few words about the show
in which they are to be exhibited. The dingy curtains which conceal the
street performer of Punch, are supported by a tall rectangular frame of
wood, which the reader could not imitate without considerable labour and
some knowledge of carpentry. The show we recommend is simply a box about
three feet square, open in front and at bottom; this is hung upon nails
against the wall, above the head of the amateur showman, who is hidden
from view by curtains which reach from the box to the floor. The box may
be a large tea-chest inverted, with the lid and one of its sides
removed. The inside of the box should be hung with green-baize, or any
other dark-coloured stuff. A proscenium cut out of pasteboard, and
tastefully painted, should be fastened in front of the box, so as to
conceal the unsightly edges of the wood. A shelf of wood about four
inches wide should project beyond the proscenium, so as to form a little
stage upon which Punch may drum his legs, lay down his stick, and place
the dead bodies of his victims; this shelf may be fixed by screws
passing through the two sides of the box.
During the performance the puppets must be kept in an open box hanging
against the wall within reach of the showman.
The reader having prepared everything, should learn the drama, and
practise the different voices which he intends to give to the different
characters. He will probably be some time before he can acquire the
peculiar squeak of Punch, which is generally supposed to be produced by
an instrument called a “squeaker.” With none of squeakers we have seen
could any distinct words be uttered, and we therefore recommend the
reader to trust to his own powers of mimicry. With regard to the musical
accompaniments, the amateur showman should get some kind sister or
cousin to sit at the piano, the notes of which are much more pleasing
than those of the Pandean pipes and drum.
[Illustration: FANTOCCINI]
About sixty years ago, a puppet-show was exhibited at the west-end of
London, with the Italian title of Fantoccini, which greatly attracted
the notice of the public, and was spoken of as an extraordinary
performance; it was, however, nothing more than a revival of the old
puppet-show, which drew crowded and fashionable audiences during the
reign of Queen Anne, and rivalled the more pompous exhibitions of the
larger theatres. In the present day Fantoccini are exhibited in the open
streets by the itinerant showman, whose ragged coat and battered hat
show how puppets have fallen in the estimation of the fashionable
public.
Any ingenious youth may amuse and astonish a large circle of friends
with an exhibition of dancing puppets, as the different figures are not
difficult to construct, and their motions are very easily managed. The
puppets may be common wooden dolls dressed up in appropriate costumes.
The arms and legs are to be loosely attached to the bodies, so that they
may be moved about in any direction by threads fastened to their
extremities. These threads may be formed of black sewing-silk, or
strong black cotton. All the threads proceeding from the different limbs
and joints of a puppet are to be attached to a stick in such a manner as
to allow the figure to stand in a natural attitude; the annexed
engraving shows two puppets thus supported.
[Illustration]
The puppet-show may be formed in the following simple manner:--Take a
tall, three-sided clothes-horse, and place its outer edges against the
wall so that it may inclose a square space; then hang curtains or shawls
over the horse, leaving no part uncovered except a rectangular space
close to the floor in front; to this opening you may, if you think
proper, fix a painted proscenium. Now place a small towel-horse, hung
with black stuff, at the distance of a foot behind the proscenium, to
serve as a background to the stage, and to conceal your legs while you
are engaged in working the puppets: having done this, lay down a little
green-baize carpet on that part of the floor which represents the stage,
and your puppet-show will be complete. The puppets may be illuminated by
candles placed on the floor in front of the proscenium. The spectators
are to be stationed as far from the show as possible, so that they may
not perceive the threads.
The performer takes his seat behind the small horse, and holding the
stick to which the threads are fastened in his left hand, he manages the
motions of the puppet with the fingers of his right hand. When the
motions are very complicated, the showman may attach the stick to a
string hanging from a rod placed across the top of the show, and employ
the fingers of both hands in working the figure. With very little
practice the amateur puppet-man may acquire great proficiency in the art
of giving lifelike movements to the dolls.
The reader may dress up his puppets in any fancy costumes, but he must
endeavour to give to each its appropriate action. The following
characters may perhaps be allowed to figure in his Fantoccini:--
THE SAILOR.
This puppet, which is represented in our illustration, is a popular
favourite. The doll should have whiskers of Berlin wool glued on its
cheeks, and a trim black silk pigtail attached to the back of the head.
It is to be dressed in the conventional naval costume, namely, a blue
jacket, loose white trousers, and a straw hat. On its entrance it should
be made to bow to the audience in a characteristic manner, by inclining
its body and kicking one leg behind it. The _Sailor’s Hornpipe_ is then
to be struck up by the pianist, and the puppet made to dance to the
music. If the showman can manage six strings at once, two threads, not
shown in our illustration, may be attached to the knees.
THE JUGGLER
May be dressed in a fanciful Eastern costume; a string is to be attached
to the head, and another to each of the hands. A gilded ball, having a
hole pierced through it, is strung on each hand-thread, and to each ball
a fine silken thread is attached. Our illustration shows how the five
threads are to be attached to the supporting-stick. A little practice
will enable the showman to work this puppet so dexterously that the
spectators will be fairly puzzled to tell how the rapid tossing and
catching of the balls is managed.
THE HEADLESS MAN.
This puppet may be dressed according to the reader’s fancy; its head is
not fastened to the body, but is strung on a thread attached to the
neck. When the showman has made the doll dance for a short time, he
pulls the head from the body by means of a thread fastened to it, and
makes the headless puppet dance on as if nothing had happened.
THE MILKWOMAN.
A puppet, dressed like a woman with a yoke of milkcans, makes its
appearance and performs a country jig. Before the dance is concluded a
little white doll jumps out of each can. The milkwoman tries to catch
the dolls, but they fly out of sight. The trick is easily managed; to
the head of each little doll is fastened a thread, which the showman
pulls at the proper time. The yoke may be cut out of a piece of soft
deal, and the cans may be made of pasteboard covered with tinfoil.
[Illustration]
POSTAGE STAMP COLLECTING, OR PHILATELY.
Our young readers may vainly turn over the pages of any existing
dictionary to find the scientific alias of the heading of this article.
We trust the omission will be soon supplied, _Philately_, or Postage
Stamp Collecting, having reached the dignity of a recognised science.
The word is the English rendering of the French term _Philatélie_,
bestowed by a distinguished Parisian amateur in substitution for what
was called _timbromania_, the latter portion of which word caused an
unpleasant association of ideas, and gave rise to many a sneer from the
wiseacres who had not sense enough to understand the real utility of the
pastime. It is derived from the Greek φιλος and ὰτέλεια, the nearest
equivalent traceable in classical lore to a modern postage stamp.
To schoolboys in general be ascribed the honour of introducing the
elegant and instructive fancy forming the subject of our dissertation.
The young students of the college of Louvain in particular claim to have
been the earliest collectors: thence the fancy spread over France and
Germany, inoculating many an English pupil in continental seminaries, by
whom it was transmitted home. Some Louvain scholars informed us last
year that it had been long prohibited by the professors, as tending to
induce inattention to their regular tasks! We think this a mistaken
notion; convinced that a knowledge of geography, history, and the values
of foreign coins is materially facilitated by the study of postage
stamps; which, moreover, induces neatness, regularity, and a sure refuge
from ennui on a rainy day. Before the reign of postage stamps, who ever
heard of the obscure city whence emanates that unit of a strange set of
five, engraved at page 759, or the equally mysterious Thurn and Taxis?
What can give a better idea of the chances and changes fewer than ten
years have produced in the vast tract of land known as the Danubian
Principalities, whose stamps are representatives of Moldavia alone, of
Moldo-Wallachia united, and of the same countries resuming their ancient
denomination of Roumania, first under Prince Couza, now under Prince
Charles of Hohenzollern?
[Illustration]
At the head of this paper is a reprint of an engraving taken from an old
work on ancient and modern posts, printed at Paris in 1708. It portrays
the various methods of transmitting news in use before the present
almost universal system. The left-hand tower bears a lighted beacon; on
the top of the right and central towers are men supposed to be shouting
messages to be passed onwards from place to place, in the way some of
our young classical scholars will remember is mentioned by Cæsar, book
vii. chapter 3. The carrier pigeon above, and the dog in the foreground,
represent other well-known modes. The former was, and still is, common
in the East, and by no means disused here in the case of races,
prize-fights, &c.; the latter was employed by the Portuguese during
their East Indian conquests, and has been used until a late period by
the Peruvians and other Americans.
An early anticipation of the modern post-paid envelope is still in
existence, appropriately addressed to the celebrated authoress of “Cyrus
the Great,” the originator of ἄγγαρα (_angara_), or posting-stations;
but, strange to say, Persia, the earliest postal pioneer, has not yet
adopted the stamp system, though essays have been submitted to the
State.
[Illustration]
The Californian Pony Expresses, and the earliest emission of Buenos
Aires, are exemplars of this primitive way of communication. The
last-named stamp has been supposed merely an essay; but we have seen it
post-marked. A modification of the same is the Humboldt Express of
Langton and Co. and a sort of travestie, the United States local of D.
O. Blood.
Other methods of transmitting correspondence, &c. are typified by the
sailing vessels of British Guiana, the steamers on the extinct stamps of
Buenos Aires, and the Pacific Steam Navigation Company; those of La
Guaira and the Russian for the Levant sea-ports. An American idea, even
too go-ahead for the reckless Yankees, for we cannot hear that it was
ever put in practice, is also here embodied.
[Illustration]
Nearly two centuries after the plan was broached in Paris appeared the
well-known absurd Mulready envelope, an extraordinary evidence of
official vagaries, that such an abortion should have received preference
over hundreds of essays, of which the cut pictures by no means the best!
[Illustration]
The current envelopes for Great Britain, simple and compound, comprising
every value from one penny to one shilling and sixpence, excepting only
elevenpence and one shilling and fivepence, are certainly perfection;
but are so little known or used that few are aware of other than the
penny ones. We think our undeservedly vaunted penny label far surpassed
in its own style by that of the islands of Antigua or St. Vincent, and
the St. Kitt’s essay here given.
[Illustration]
In the third year after the introduction of postal labels in Great
Britain, the canton of Zurich would appear to have entertained the idea
of imitating our example, the wonderfully rare if not unique pair of
essays bearing the date of 1843 testifying visibly to that intention.
Brazil, however, in the same year actually produced its first set, and
is entitled to all the merit of seconding this marvellously successful
move of ours. This was the large figure series, continued in the same
style till those lately superseded, of which the red 280 and the yellow
430 reis alone remain in use.
Although the Zurich above alluded to was never in circulation, a pair
something like it was so, either in the same or following year. The
canton of Geneva next followed the lead. One of its stamps is unique on
account of the custom of dividing it when but half value was needed.
The canton of Basle next joined the philatelic ranks, followed after
three years’ interval by Vaud and Neufchatel. A twelvemonth previously
our transatlantic brethren in the United States started the 5 cents
bronze bearing the head of Franklin, and the large 10 cents with that of
Washington.
In the same year (1847) a decree for the adoption of postage stamps in
Belgium was made, which was carried into effect a year and a half
afterwards. Six months in advance appeared the beautifully engraved
effigies of the French Republic; during the course of twenty years
followed the counterfeit presentments of the Presidency, the uncircled,
and the laurelled heads of the Emperor Napoleon.
[Illustration]
The ensuing year witnessed emanations from Austria, Bavaria,
Lombardo-Venetia, Prussia, Saxony, Sardinia, and the first of the
interminable issues of Spain: also the long solitary pair recording the
abortive insurrection of Schleswig Holstein in 1848-50. The postal
representatives of Schleswig, of Holstein, and of the two States in
combination, now number two dozen!
This succession of stamps will ever possess a strong historical interest
in consequence of their country’s connexion with the startling events
attendant on the continental convulsions of 1866. A similar value in
relation to European annals, entitling them to the style and title of
Paper Medals, must be laid on the now extinct hosts of Hanoverian labels
and envelopes, with those of the defunct office of Thurn and Taxis,
overwhelmed by the needle-guns of Prussia, after an existence of more
than three hundred years.
An approximate idea of the number of postage stamps, current and
extinct, may be obtained from the latest edition of any good catalogue.
That of Oppen’s Album (10th edition) contains about 2,800 distinct
individual stamps, but includes no varieties of colour other than those
recognised by the most fastidiously disposed collectors, such as the
light and dark blues of Thurn and Taxis, first issue; neither does it
take much note of proofs or essays, or any of railway or local British
labels, or of differences in watermark or mode of perforation; which
latter variations are now considered important by the higher order of
philatelists.
The stamp-issuing localities amount at present to 122, 51 being in
Europe; of these no fewer than seven have enlisted within the past
twelvemonths, viz. Servia, the Virgin Islands, Guatemala, Salvador (see
p. 758), Heligoland, Breslau, and Turk’s Island. The latter is
exquisitely engraved, but with the exception of the pink, the colours
are execrable. The first two, and the Breslau local are appended.
[Illustration]
Excluding the United States locals, whose name is legion, as well as
those of Hamburg, most of which are spurious, the emissions of Spain
count the highest. They amount to nearly ninety impressions for general
postal purposes, besides several telegraphic and exclusively official
issues. The later portraitures of Her Catholic Majesty, if correct,
prove how very well she carries her age, with the assistance, perhaps,
of some Spanish Madame Rachel. Compare one of the current set with those
depicted at pages 759 and 767 and note the dates.
The United States of North America, and those of Colombia, or the
Granadine Confederation, afford us each the liberal allowance of between
fifty and sixty varieties in colour, device, or value: the stamps of the
former country, which are usually models of choice engraving, bear
almost invariably the heads of their worthies, such as the late
President Lincoln, and General Thomas (Stonewall) Jackson.
[Illustration]
The memory of the great Confederate struggle will be ever preserved by
the postage stamps issued from various cities in the revolting States;
such as Memphis, Baton Rouge, Mobile, Charleston, New Orleans, &c. These
had fancy devices, but the features of Jefferson Davis and J. C. Calhoun
will reach posterity on two of the Confederate issues. On one of them
also figures “Hickory” Jackson, a hero of the war in 1812.
It is a singular fact that the illustrated postage stamp magazines, &c.
are purchased by non-philatelic collectors for the purpose of cutting
out the miniature portraits of celebrities, whose effigies are otherwise
less conveniently attainable.
[Illustration]
The palm of beauty will be assigned _nem. con._ to the current pair of
Nova Scotia types. There are three of each, one representing the full
front bust of our gracious Queen in state attire; the other Her
Majesty’s profile: the former in _scarlet_, _green_, and _black_; the
latter in _lilac_, _blue_, and _black_. Of these the pair of _black_ are
by far the most effective. One of them is more or less perfectly
rendered by the Newfoundland 12 cents, and the South Australian two
shilling, and fourpenny stamps; the other by the 24 cents of the former
colony.
There are numerous other exquisite specimens of the engraver’s art to be
found in a collection of postage stamps. The French republics, the Greek
Mercuries, the Russian and Polish adhesives, and the Hong Kongs are
admirable.
The current Saxons, Bavarians, all the Portuguese, and the lately
emitted Heligolands are the best examples of the relief or cameo style:
engravings of these give but a poor idea of the original. The same
method of type is much less effective in the Prussians, Oldenburgs,
Schleswigs and Holsteins; but radiates in full effulgence in the
faultless envelopes of our own country, in those of Baden, Hanover, and
the extinct Saxons and Prussians; with our colonials of Ceylon and the
Mauritius.
The American Bank Note Company, we must perforce, most unpatriotically,
admit to be unrivalled in plain engraving; of which the Nova Scotias,
and some others noted above are instances: the trio of large newspaper
and periodical labels issued last year in the United States, which bear
the profiles of Washington, Franklin, and Lincoln respectively, and the
Central-Fair locals too, are wellnigh perfection. The symbolical
Newfoundlands are equally noteworthy.
To the same, or a branch firm, we believe ourselves indebted for the
lovely landscapes of Guatemala, Nicaragua, Costa Rica, and Salvador.
[Illustration]
The swans of Western Australia, repeated in such variety of colour, ever
attract attention; as do the keys of Bremen, the castles of Hamburg, the
compounds of mysterious Bergedorf, the eagles of Lubeck, the quaint
emissions of the Argentine Confederation, and the crossed keys and tiara
of the Papal States, after the eye is wearied by the incessant array of
heads and armorial bearings exhibited by the majority of stamp-emitting
countries.
The adhesives of the kingdoms once composing the Two Sicilies are both
equally remarkable; that of Naples for its singularity, that of Sicily
from its peculiar boldness of design and rich colouring.
[Illustration]
The first stamps of Luxembourg, those of the Dutch East Indies, and
Holland, exhibit marvellous variations in the portraiture of one and the
same individual sovereign.
[Illustration]
The marketable value of a postage stamp for collections does not,
however, by any means, depend upon its beauty or deformity. The greater
portion of the more attractive in appearance are purchasable at a very
low figure: the most beautiful of all, the Nova Scotian black profile,
can be had at its natal place for one cent, or an English halfpenny. The
circular specimen of meagre ugliness below may be worth a couple of
sovereigns, even when cancelled; a moderately well-stored juvenile album
could be purchased for the price of an unused specimen, were such
existing, which we strongly doubt. That of Romagna and the early Van
Diemen’s Land are little better.
[Illustration]
Some of the frightful libels on the august countenances of the Emperor
Napoleon, the Queen of Spain, and our own Sovereign, fetch also
exorbitant fancy prices. The French affair goes by the name of the
Cayenne essay; possibly because its concoctor was, or at least, deserved
to be, transported thither for his impudence. The Queens’ profiles on
their colonial stamps for the Philippines and the Mauritius are mere
caricatures.
Slight improvement on the British Guiana stamp is made by some of the
Honolulu emissions; also the local Bavarian; the Bollo Straordinario of
Tuscany; the 10 and 15 centimes à percevoir of France; and the Land Post
trio of Baden. The latter have the advantage of being printed on yellow
paper.
Some of the Sandwich Islands stamps, nevertheless, far outstrip the
productions of some countries that were highly civilized long ere the
full dress of one of their natives consisted of aught save a few beads.
Portraits of the great, the late, and the regnant kings bearing the
joint name of Kamehameha exist on stamps: the one given does but scant
justice to its chastely designed original.
[Illustration]
The French labels just alluded to are placed by the postal authorities
on insufficiently paid letters. They are only surreptitiously
purchasable at the post-offices, not being for public use; but this bit
of red-tapeism is easily evaded for a con-sid-er-ation. Of similar
character are the Bavarian before-mentioned, and the Italian segnatassa,
figured above. A collector in Leghorn, unable to procure one of these
latter, wrote a letter to himself without stamping it, expecting one of
the then new labels to be affixed before delivery. Such was the case;
but the letter lying on the hall-table, a friend of ours innocently
abstracted the stamp and inclosed it to ourselves as the last new postal
curiosity.
Besides such slightly abnormal deviations from the general run of
postage stamps, may be enumerated the “too late” label formerly used by
the colony of Victoria, now particularly _recherché_ by philatelists,
especially in an uncancelled state. This individual is unique in its
application; but there are several impressions exclusively devoted to
the _registration_ of letters. Those of Victoria, New South Wales, and
Queensland (like the cut, but the word “registered” substituted for the
value) are well known; and the recently emitted Prussians, one of which
is given on the next page, are of somewhat kindred nature.
The quaint centre device is an offshoot from that fertile field for
philatelists, New Granada, alias the United States of Columbia; the R
standing for _registrados_ (registered).
[Illustration]
Besides strictly governmental issues, many private firms and individuals
have been tacitly allowed to issue postage stamps, more or less
partaking of the character of regular official emanations. Such are
those of the United States, amounting to upwards of five hundred; some
of which, though catalogued, never did duty, and were only concocted for
sale. They are now, we believe, all extinct. Some of them are
represented on previous pages. The City of Hamburg has produced upwards
of a hundred, of which the greater part are impostors. An unimpeached
one will be found depicted farther on.
The pages devoted to the U. S. locals by those who collect them, present
a most varied and extraordinary appearance, from the endless varieties
of device and colour employed. Profiles, busts, figures of men and
animals, numerals, plain inscriptions, symbolical and allegorical
representations meet the eye, varied with all the colours in and out of
the rainbow.
[Illustration]
Dresden, Breslau, Montreal, Shanghai, Constantinople, Edinburgh,
Glasgow, and London, also contribute their quota towards the ranks of
locals. These are all emissions of private firms: those of the third
place mentioned are more than doubtful; the latter are now prohibited by
law.
To these may be added those of Throndhjems (Drontheim), Tammerfors,
Helsingfors, with the Levant, Danubian, and Pacific Steam Companies. The
legally authorised issues of Malta, the Danish West Indies, &c. and the
very low values of continental stamps, may be likewise termed locals;
not being available out of their own birthplace. The La Guairas, one of
which is figured at page 754, must not be omitted from the list.
[Illustration]
Still farther than the unaccredited locals from a strictly legitimate
postal collection are the numerous labels issued by the several
railroads. They amount to a considerable number altogether, ranging in
value from one farthing to five shillings.
Many of the foreign telegraph stamps are extremely tasty, especially the
Belgian and Spanish: these, however, are not usually admitted into
collections. Still less are our own now disused “Customs” labels, which
far exceed the postals in beauty; as do our receipt, bill, and legal
adhesives, some of which are as high as 5_l._ or more in value.
The “needle-gun” war of 1866 introduced quite a novel genus of postage
envelopes. They were employed in Prussia, Saxony, &c.; some for the use
of civilians writing to their friends or relatives at camp; others for
the exclusive service of the military. Some Brazilian youths, of more
ingenuity than probity, concocted an imitation of these, and passed them
off _at a price_ among dealers and amateurs, as being employed for a
similar purpose in the conflict between the Brazilians and Paraguayans.
The highest priced postage stamps were the once rare Pony Expresses (see
page 753), one of which cost 4 dollars (16_s._ 8_d._) The 2 dollar one
ranks next; then the five shilling of New South Wales, the Mauritius,
and our own; the 96 cents of Hong Kong, the 8 reales of Mexico, the 90
cents of the United States, the 1 scudo of Rome, and the 25 piastres of
Turkey. The Ceylons are the most numerous in varieties of value, having
no fewer than thirteen, from one halfpenny to two shillings. From four
to six is the average number of monetary denominations for the same
country. Some have more, as Hong Kong, which counts ten. The United
States have the same number, besides four additional values in
envelopes. New South Wales has eight, and Victoria nine values. France
has nine at present, but a higher priced stamp is announced. Liberia,
Turk’s Island, and British Honduras have only three; Grenada, Nicaragua,
British Columbia, and Antigua, issue but two; and Vancouver’s Island,
Malta, Sierra Leone, and Corrientes, only one. The last-named locality,
being a small province of the Argentine Republic, has issued the same
die for two several values. It was originally marked _un real_, but this
was subsequently erased, no designation of value appearing. Three
centavos was then its price. It is impressed in _black_, on _blue_, as
well as _green_ paper. Like the New Caledonian, it was printed in sheets
from a single block, each impression slightly differing.
This is one of the few exceptions to the rule of postage stamps bearing
a facial value. The earlier issues of the Mauritius, Trinidad, and
Barbadoes partake of the same defect, being distinguishable by colour
only. The Ionian Islanders were in a like category: but the sole
existing specimens of this inconvenience are the halfpenny and penny
Barbadians, and the whole set of St. Lucias.
The result of this is, that the values of more than one of the early
stamps of the Mauritius are still a subject of debate among some erudite
philatelists. One of these stamps is sometimes found endorsed with
“eightpence” in black letters, another with “fourpence.” This clumsy
method is even yet being adopted in a few instances, we suppose to save
the expense of a new plate. The original sixpenny of St. Helena is
printed in three different colours besides its own _blue_, and does duty
in _green_, _carmine_, and _red_, cruelly tattooed with printed
characters according to the stated value. The ninepenny of South
Australia, doffing its modest hue for a bright orange, hand-stamped with
black, is worth a penny more than heretofore. In like manner, the
Italian government, wishing to put the screw on its faithful subjects,
raised the tariff on home letters from 15 to 20 centesimi, and barred
out the original value. The provisional East Indian may be joined to
this uncomely group of disfigured identities, as also the newly emitted
set for Singapore.
[Illustration]
The impressions of Nevis; those now current of the Cape of Good Hope;
and what are termed the Sydney stamps of New South Wales, are elegantly
symbolical of their respective localities.
The adhesives of British Columbia, Sierra Leone, and British Honduras,
claim a very high rank for elegance of design and correctness of
execution among our colonials. The extinct shilling stamp of Victoria
may worthily dispute with its lately superseded sixpenny the unenviable
distinction of ugliness.
Excluding the railway stamps, and the United States newspaper labels,
Liberia produces the largest stamps; Mecklenberg Schwerin and Brunswick
the smallest. The latter two countries present the singularity of
allowing the four small stamps to be used singly or in combination.
The inscriptions on stamps being of course in the language of their
native country, many impressions necessarily bear a particularly quaint
appearance; as those of Egypt, Turkey, Cashmeer, Shanghai, Poland,
Moldavia (see page 765), and Servia (see p. 756). The early emission of
the Argentine Confederation is also an oddity.
[Illustration]
The shapes of postage stamps present but little variation; a very large
majority being more or less unequally sided rectangles. Few are
perfectly square. The set of Bergedorf, and the disused Danish and Thurn
and Taxis adhesives are instances, the former showing the further
peculiarity of different sizes in regular gradation according to value.
The impressions run sometimes on upright, sometimes on oblong
rectangles. The narrowest of the latter is one of those of Wells, Fargo,
and Co.; of the former, a very rare English essay, too elaborate for
description.
[Illustration]
Some few are octagonal, more or less irregular; some oval; some
perfectly round; some indescribable, as the one-and-ninepenny Ceylon;
and the ninepenny envelope of the Mauritius. The earlier emissions of
Nova Scotia and New Brunswick were printed in such a way as to render
the stamp lozenge-shaped.
[Illustration]
A small minority are triangular; the superseded stamps of the Cape of
Good Hope, a solitary type of Newfoundland, and one of New Granada, are
the only ones we can recollect ever seeing, except a black Austrian
newspaper adhesive. The Langton local is unique in form.
[Illustration]
Many stamps have been issued exclusively for newspapers, _feuilletons_,
and printed matter in general, such as some Austrian and Venetian
impressions. The B. G. and tassa gazzette of Modena, the 6 c. and 9
centesimi of Parma, and others, were of like nature; as are the lower
priced French, Italians, and Belgians. That of Frankfort is not
adhesive, but hand-stamped, like those on our own newspapers, and is by
some considered inadmissible in strictly postal collections.
The _returned letter_ stamps must not pass unmentioned. That of
Wurtemberg was long “alone in its glory;” but Munich, Augsburg,
Nuremberg, and other Bavarian cities, have lately adopted them. Those
forming the seal on returned letters in our own country are collected by
some amateurs.
[Illustration]
The enormous accumulation of proofs and essays, all which are ignored by
many philatelists, are not to be lightly rejected. The former are
certainly _articles de luxe_ or _fantaisie_, being simply veritable
stamps printed in abnormal colours, as some of the United States, &c. Of
the latter are three sorts--those by authorisation; those proposed by
enterprising individuals to various governments; and those invented for
sale to entrap the unwary.
The best, as in the case of England, were not always chosen: look at the
essay of Pellas the Genoese, and admire Italian discrimination--if you
can. The Sicilian, on the other hand, is indubitably inferior to the
adopted design. In the centre lies the audacious offspring of the Fenian
rebellion.
[Illustration]
Several essays proposed for Governments which have not yet instituted
the postage stamp system, are surpassingly beautiful in device and
execution. Those by M. Riester, of Paris, are particularly elegant,
Bolivia for example. The _Poisson d’Avril_ (April Fool) stamp is a
curiosity in philatelic lore; it was gravely chronicled as emanating
from Moresnet, and deceived the very knowing ones. (See cut at foot of
next page.)
The longest reign in postal annals is twelve years; the defunct Dutch
having lasted that period. Of the Spanish sets only two have outlived a
twelvemonth unchanged. The 1 franc of the French empire, and the first
issue of Schleswig-Holstein (see p. 755), were current rather more, the
25 centimes of the Empire and the Italian (represented below) less than
a year. The ½ tornese, Neapolitan arms, and the same _transmogrified_
into the Cross of Savoy, endured each about a month. The ½ schilling
_violet_, and 3 sch. _rose_ of Bergedorf, were a _nine_ days’ wonder.
[Illustration]
Among the notabilities of a choice postage-stamp collection may be
chronicled the Connel essay. A New Brunswick postmaster of that name
took the liberty of having his own physiognomy transferred to a sheet of
postage stamps;--the result was his resignation. The tenpenny above
depicted is unique, and was long supposed to be from Van Diemen’s Land;
but we rather believe it an English essay.
The space allowed us compels an abrupt conclusion. We had intended
touching on the eight various distinct modes of perforation, besides
variations; and the distinguishing watermarks of various issues. We
should also have liked to describe the amusing and exciting humours of
‘Change, which many of our readers may remember witnessing in Lombard
Street and its neighbourhood, or in the gardens of the Luxembourg and
the Tuileries in Paris, during the early days of stamp-collecting; but
we trust enough has been written to excite the interest of many who have
purchased this volume on other accounts, yet may thus be induced to
become votaries to the interesting and instructive pursuit of Philately.
[Illustration]
TINSELLING.
Should the reader feel inclined to try his hand at tinselling, he must
procure one of those full-length theatrical portraits that are sold at
the shops for a penny each. He ought to select one of the best-known
figures, as he will then have no difficulty in procuring the embossed
gold and silver work with which it is to be adorned. The whole figure
must be carefully painted with water-colours, and the artist should take
pains with those parts which are not intended to be covered or cut away.
Having finished the preliminary operation of colouring, the artist
should neatly cut away those parts of the engraving which represent
drapery, and place under the spaces thus formed, satin, silk, or velvet
of the proper colour, which may be secured to the back of the picture
with a little gum.
Many tinsellers employ regular print-colourers to shade their silks and
satins, but we strongly advise the reader to trust to his own abilities,
and boldly set work to indicate the folds of the drapery by proper
shadows. The pieces cut out of the engraving will show him where the
different shadows ought to fall, and as for the colours to be used, we
may state as a general rule that silk, satin, or velvet of a certain
colour ought to be shaded with darker tints of the same colour.
Gum-water should be mixed with the colours used in shading, to prevent
them running when applied to the woven fabric.
The artist may now proceed to the work of tinselling, which consists in
gumming little spangles and embossed ornaments over certain parts of the
picture. Every piece of armour, every button, every jewel, and every
weapon, should be represented in embossed work. All the pieces required
for tinselling a figure may be purchased at the proper shops. In the
figure of the warrior, the breastplate, shield, sword, and jewels would
have to be formed of pieces of gilt or silver paper cut and stamped into
proper shapes and patterns. The price of each piece of embossed work
depends of course upon its size or elaborateness. When the picture is
finished, it should be mounted on fine card-board, and placed in a neat
frame.
THE AMERICAN GAME OF BASE-BALL.
The national game of ball of the American people, though having its
origin in the English game of rounders, nevertheless possesses
sufficiently marked features to entitle it to the distinction claimed
for it. Unlike the schoolboy pastime from which it originated, it
requires manly qualities in a high degree to excel in it. In fact, the
difference between base-ball as played in America, and rounders as
played in England, is as great as the contrast between the graceful and
daring movements of an accomplished skater of the present time, and
those of the skaters who, with pieces of ivory fastened to their feet,
used to strive to glide over the ice in the year 1600. In base-ball, as
in rounders, you use a bat and a ball and run round bases; but there all
resemblance ceases.
The American game of base-ball, as now played, is not more than ten
years old, for its date only extends back to the period just previous to
the organization of the National Association of Base-Ball Players, which
Association formed the present code of rules, and is the only authorized
body having any supervisory power over the game. In fact, the history of
the game commences with the formation of the National Association,
inasmuch as the rules previously in vogue were crude and irregular, and
different in one locality from what they were in another. Since the
organization of the National Association and the meeting of the first
annual convention, however, the game has spread throughout the country,
and entirely superseded every other game of ball as a national pastime.
At first the Association consisted of delegates from clubs, but now it
is composed of a congregation of representatives from State base-ball
associations, governed by the National Association proper, each State
association having immediate control of the affairs of its own clubs,
and possessing its own judiciary committee to settle disputes, but no
supervisory control over the playing rules of the game, that matter
being placed in the hands of a committee of rules of the parent
Association, to which is also attached a judiciary committee, forming a
court of appeal from the decisions of State judiciary committees, and
also a court to adjudicate upon disputes between clubs of two States.
At the last convention of the “_National Association of Base-Ball
Players_,” which was held in Philadelphia, Dec. 11, 1867, and in which
clubs from all sections of the country, from Maine to Iowa, and Michigan
to Kentucky, were represented, the following code of rules was adopted
to govern the play during the season of 1868:--
RULES AND REGULATIONS
ADOPTED BY THE NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF BASE-BALL PLAYERS.
RULE I.--THE BALL, BAT, AND BASES.
SEC. 1. The ball must weigh not less than five, nor more than five and
one-quarter, ounces avoirdupois. It must measure not less than nine and
one-quarter, nor more than nine and one-half, inches in circumference.
It must be composed of india-rubber and yarn, and covered with leather,
and, in all match games, shall be furnished by the challenging club, and
become the property of the winning club as a trophy of victory.
SEC. 2. The bat must be round, and must not exceed two and a half inches
in diameter in the thickest part. It must be made of wood, and shall not
exceed forty-two inches in length.
SEC. 3. The bases must be four in number, placed at equal distances from
each other, and securely fastened upon each corner of a square whose
sides are respectively thirty yards. They must be so constructed and
placed as to be distinctly seen by the umpire, and must cover a space
equal to one square foot of surface. The first, second, and third bases
shall be canvas-bags, painted white, and filled with some soft material;
the home base and pitcher’s points to be each marked by a flat plate,
painted white.
SEC. 4. The base from which the ball is struck shall be designated the
home base, and must be directly opposite to the second base; the first
base must always be that upon the right-hand side, and the third base
that upon the left-hand side of the striker, when occupying his position
at the home base. And in all match games a line connecting the home and
first base, and the home and third base, shall be marked by the use of
chalk, or other suitable material, so as to be distinctly seen by the
umpire. The base-bag shall be considered the base, and not the post to
which it is, or should be, fastened.
RULE II.--THE PITCHING DEPARTMENT.
SEC. 1. The pitcher’s position shall be designated by two lines two
yards in length, drawn at right angles to the line from the home to the
second base, having their centres upon that line at two fixed iron
plates, placed at points fifteen and sixteen and one-third yards distant
from the home-base. The pitcher must stand within these lines, and must
deliver the ball as near as possible over the centre of the home base,
and fairly for the striker.
SEC. 2. Should the pitcher repeatedly fail to deliver to the striker
fair balls, for the apparent purpose of delaying the game, or for any
cause, the umpire, after warning him, shall call one ball, and if the
pitcher persists in such action, two, and three balls; when three balls
shall have been called, the striker shall take the first base; and
should any base be occupied at that time each player occupying it or
them shall take one base without being put out. All balls delivered by
the pitcher, striking the ground in front of the home base, or pitched
over the head of the batsman, or pitched to the side opposite to that
which the batsman strikes from, shall be considered unfair balls.
SEC. 3. The ball must be pitched, not jerked or thrown, to the bat; and
whenever the pitcher moves with the apparent purpose or pretension to
deliver the ball, he shall so deliver it, and must have neither foot in
advance of the front line at the time of delivering the ball; and if he
fails in either of these particulars, then it shall be declared a balk.
The ball shall be considered jerked, in the meaning of the rule, if the
pitcher’s arm touches his person when the arm is swung forward to
deliver the ball; and it shall be regarded as a throw, if the arm be
bent at the elbow, at an angle from the body, or horizontally from the
shoulder, when it is swung forward to deliver the ball.
SEC. 4. No player shall be put out on any hit ball on which a balk or a
ball has been called; and neither shall a strike or a foul ball be
called, or a base run on such a hit ball. But bases can be taken on
third-“called” balls, and on “balked” balls, in accordance with Section
2 of Rule II.
RULE III.--THE BATTING DEPARTMENT.
SEC. 1. The striker, when about to strike the ball, must stand astride
of a line drawn through the centre of the home base, not exceeding three
feet from either side thereof, and parallel with the front line of the
pitcher’s position, and he must not take any backward step when striking
at the ball. The penalty for an infringement of this rule shall be the
calling of one strike; and when three such strikes have been called, the
striker shall be declared out. If a ball on which such a strike is
called be hit and caught, either fair or foul, the striker shall be
declared out. No base shall be run on any such called strike, and any
player running the bases shall be allowed to return to the base he has
left, without being put out. As soon as the striker has struck a fair
ball, he shall be considered “a player running the bases.”
SEC. 2. Players must strike in regular rotation, and, after the first
innings is played, the turn commences with the player who stands on the
list next to the one who was the third player out.
SEC. 3. Should a striker stand at the bat without striking at fair
balls, for the apparent purpose of delaying the game, or of giving
advantage to a player, the umpire, after warning him, shall call one
strike, and, if he persists in such action, two, and three strikes. When
three strikes are called, and the ball be caught, either before touching
the ground or upon the first bound, the striker shall be declared out,
provided the balls struck at are not those on which balls or balks have
been called, or not those struck at for the purpose of wilfully striking
out. If three balls are struck at and missed, and the last one is not
caught, either flying or upon the first bound, the striker must attempt
to make his run, and he can be put out on the bases in the same manner
as if he had struck a fair ball.
SEC. 4. The striker is out if a foul ball is caught, either before
touching the ground or upon the first bound; or if a fair ball is
struck, and the ball be held before touching the ground; or if a fair
ball is struck, and the ball be held by an adversary on first base,
before the striker touches that base.
RULE IV.--RUNNING THE BASES.
SEC. 1. Players must make their bases in the order of striking; and when
a fair ball is struck, and not caught flying, the first base must be
vacated, as also the second and third bases, if they are occupied at the
same time. Players may be put out on any base, under these
circumstances, in the same manner as when running to the first base.
SEC. 2. Any player running the bases is out, if at any time he is
touched by the ball, while in play, in the hands of an adversary,
without some part of his person being on the base.
SEC. 3. No run or base can be made upon a foul ball. Such a ball shall
be considered dead, and not in play, until it shall first have been
settled in the hands of the pitcher. In such cases players running bases
shall return to them, and may be put out in so returning, in the same
manner as when running to first base. Neither can a run or base be made
when a fair ball has been caught without having touched the ground; but
such a ball shall be considered alive and in play. In such cases, also,
players running bases shall return to them, and may be put out in so
returning, in the same manner as when running to first base; but
players, when balls are so caught, may run their bases immediately after
the ball has been settled in the hands of the player catching it.
SEC. 4. When a balk is made by the pitcher, every player running the
bases is entitled to one base, without being put out.
SEC. 5. A player making the home base shall be entitled to score one
run.
SEC. 6. If two hands are already out, no player running home at the time
the ball is struck can make a run to count in the score of the game, if
the striker is put out.
SEC. 7. Players running bases must touch them, and, so far as possible,
keep upon the direct line between them, and must touch them in the
following order--first, second, third, and home; and if returning, must
reverse this order; and should any player run three feet out of this
line, for the purpose of avoiding the ball in the hands of an adversary,
he shall be declared out; or if he fail to touch each base he runs to he
shall be declared out, unless he return to such base before the ball be
held on it.
SEC. 8. If the player is prevented from making a base by the
intentional obstruction of an adversary, he shall be entitled to that
base, and shall not he put out. Any obstruction that could readily have
been avoided shall be considered as intentional.
RULE V.--THE GAME.
SEC. 1. The game shall consist of nine innings to each side, when,
should the number of runs be equal, the play shall be continued until a
majority of runs, upon an equal number of innings, shall be declared,
which shall conclude the game. An innings must be concluded at the time
the third hand is put out.
SEC. 2. In playing all matches, nine players from each club shall
constitute a full field; and they shall be members of the club which
they represent. They also must not have been members of any other club,
either in or out of the National Association, for thirty days
immediately prior to the match. Positions of players and choice of
innings shall be determined by captains previously appointed for that
purpose by the respective clubs. Every player taking part in a regular
match game, no matter what number of innings are played, shall be, in
the meaning of this section of the rules, considered a member of the
club he plays with.
SEC. 3. When a club sends a challenge to play a first-nine match game of
base-ball, and the same is accepted, the first game shall be played upon
the grounds of the challenging club, within fifteen days from the date
of the acceptance of the challenge; the second game shall be played upon
the grounds of the challenged club within fifteen days thereafter; and
if a third game be necessary, it shall be played upon grounds to be
mutually agreed upon, within fifteen days from the date of the second
game; _provided_: that the above arrangement may be varied by mutual
consent. And when a first-nine match game is to be played, the
contestants shall present on the field their recognized first-nines, as
far as practicable.
SEC. 4. Whenever a match shall have been determined upon between two
clubs, play shall be called at the exact hour appointed; and should
either party fail to produce their players within thirty minutes
thereafter, the party so failing shall admit a defeat, and shall deliver
the ball before leaving the ground, which ball shall be received by the
club who are ready to play, and the same shall be considered as won, and
so counted in the list of matches played; and the winning club shall be
entitled to a score of nine runs for any game so forfeited, unless the
delinquent side fail to play on account of the recent death of one of
its members, and sufficient time has not elapsed to enable them to give
their opponents due notice before arriving on the ground.
SEC. 5. No person who shall be in arrears to any other club than the one
he plays with, shall be competent to take part in any match game.
SEC. 6. No player, not in the nine taking their positions on the field
in the _third_ innings of a game, shall be substituted for a player,
except for reason of illness or injury.
SEC. 7. No match game shall be commenced when rain is falling; and
neither shall any such game be continued after rain has fallen for five
minutes. No match game shall be postponed unless by the mutual consent
of the contesting clubs.
SEC. 8. Every match game shall be decided by the best two games out of
three, unless a single game shall be mutually agreed upon by the
contesting clubs; and all matches shall terminate before the close of
the season.
SEC. 9. No person who shall be in arrears to any other club, or who
shall at any time receive compensation for his services as a player,
shall be competent to play in any match. No players, who play base-ball
for money, shall take part in any match game; and any club giving any
compensation to a player, or having, to their knowledge, a player in
their nine playing in a match for compensation, shall be debarred from
membership in the National Association; and they shall not be considered
by any club belonging to this Association as a proper club to engage in
a match with; and should any club so engage with them, they shall
forfeit membership.
RULE VI.--MISCELLANEOUS.
SEC. 1. If an adversary stops the ball with his hat or cap, or if a ball
be stopped by any person or persons not engaged in the game, no player
running the bases can be put out unless the ball shall first have been
settled in the hands of the pitcher while he stands in the line of his
position.
SEC. 2. Any player who shall intentionally prevent an adversary from
catching or fielding the ball, shall be declared out; or if any player
be prevented from making a base by the intentional obstruction of an
adversary, he shall be entitled to that base, and shall not be declared
out, even if touched with the ball.
SEC. 3. If a fair ball be held by a player before touching the ground,
after rebounding from the hands or person of a player, it shall be
considered a fair catch. And if a foul ball be similarly held after
touching the ground but once, it shall be considered a fair catch.
SEC. 4. If the ball, from the stroke of a bat, first touches the ground,
the person of a player, or any other object, behind the line or range of
home and the first base, or home and the third base, it shall be termed
foul, and must be so declared by the umpire, unasked. If the ball first
touches the ground either upon or in front of the line or range of those
bases, it shall be considered fair.
SEC. 5. Clubs may adopt such rules respecting balls knocked beyond or
outside of the bounds of the field, as the circumstances of the ground
may demand; and these rules shall govern all matches played upon the
ground, provided that they are distinctly made known to the umpire
previous to the commencement of the game.
SEC. 6. The captains of each nine shall alone be allowed to appeal for
the reversal of a decision of the umpire.
SEC. 7. No base can be run, or player be put out, on a dead ball.
RULE VII.--DUTIES OF THE UMPIRE.
SEC. 1. The umpire shall take care that the regulations respecting the
ball, bats, bases, and the pitcher’s and striker’s positions, are
strictly observed, and he shall require the challenging club to furnish
a ball, on which the size, weight, and the name of the manufacturer
shall be stamped. He shall be the sole judge of fair and unfair play,
and shall determine all disputes and differences which may occur during
the game. He shall take special care to declare all foul balls and
balks, immediately upon their occurrence, in a distinct and audible
manner. He shall, in every instance, before leaving the ground, declare
the winning club, and shall record his decision in the books of the
scorers. The umpire shall also require that the game be recorded by a
scorer for each of the contesting clubs. In all matches the umpire shall
be selected by the captains of the respective sides, and shall perform
all duties above enumerated.
SEC. 2. The umpire in any match shall determine when play shall be
suspended; and, if the game cannot be fairly concluded, it shall be
decided by the last equal innings, provided five innings have been
played; and the party having the greatest number of runs shall be
declared the winner.
SEC. 3. When the umpire calls “play,” the game must at once be proceeded
with; and the party failing to take their appointed positions in the
game within five minutes thereafter shall forfeit the game. When the
umpire calls “time,” play shall be suspended until he calls “play”
again.
SEC. 4. When the umpire “calls” a game, it shall end; but when he merely
suspends play for any stated period, it may be resumed at the point at
which it was suspended, provided such suspension does not extend beyond
the day of the match.
SEC. 5. No person engaged in a match, either as umpire, scorer, or
player, shall be either directly or indirectly interested in any bet
upon the game. Nor shall any person be permitted to act as umpire or
scorer in any match unless he shall be a member of the National
Association, or of a State branch thereof. Neither shall the umpire or
scorer be changed during a match, unless with the consent of both
parties, except for reason of illness or injury, or for a violation of
the above rules.
SEC. 6. No decision given by the umpire shall be reversed upon the
testimony of any player; and no decision whatever shall be reversed,
except for a palpable infringement of the rules, and then only on an
appeal by the captain.
SEC. 7. No person shall be permitted to approach or to speak with the
umpire, scorers, or players, or in any manner to interrupt or interfere
during the progress of the game, unless by special request of the
umpire. Any match game played by any club in contravention to the rules
adopted by the National Association, shall be considered null and void,
and shall not be counted in the list of match games won and lost.
* * * * *
For the information of clubs desirous of joining the National
Association, or of organising a State branch thereof, we give below
those portions of the constitution of the Association bearing upon the
subject:--
ARTICLE 3, SECTION 1. This Association shall be composed of delegates
from the several State base-ball associations which have been duly
admitted to a representation in the convention forming this
constitution, or which may be admitted to a representation in the manner
hereinafter provided. Each State association shall be entitled to one
delegate for every ten clubs, or fractional part of ten clubs, belonging
to such association. No individual club shall be entitled to
representation in this Association unless located in a state, territory,
or district, where there are not sufficient clubs to form a State
association. Each delegate shall be entitled to one vote, and no vote by
proxy shall be allowed.
SEC. 2. Any State base-ball association desiring to be represented in
this Association shall present to the recording secretary, at least
thirty days previous to the annual meeting of this Association, a
written official certificate, signed by the president and secretary of
the State association they represent, giving the names and number of the
clubs composing said association, date of their organization, names of
their officers, and number of members belonging to each club; also the
date of organization of the State association, and the names of their
delegates. Territories and the district of Columbia shall be considered
as states within the meaning of this section.
SEC. 3. All applications shall be immediately submitted to the committee
on nominations; but no such application shall be received by said
secretary unless presented thirty days previous to the annual meeting.
Said committee shall thereupon ascertain the condition, character, and
standing of such State base-ball association, and report the same at the
annual meeting, with the said application and their opinion thereon; and
a ballot shall thereupon be had at such meeting, upon the admission of
such State base-ball association, when, if two-thirds of the members
present vote in favour thereof, such State base-ball association shall
be declared duly entitled to representation in this Association. Any
informality or irregularity in the form or substance of the application
may be waived by a two thirds vote of the members present at the annual
meeting.
SEC. 4. No State association shall be represented in the Association
unless composed of ten clubs, numbering at least eighteen active members
each, or by any delegate under twenty-one years of age; nor shall any
State base-ball association be so represented until its delegates have
paid a fee hereinafter designated.
SEC. 5. Any State association organized after the adjournment of the
annual meeting of this Association, may be elected probationary members
thereof, after conforming to the requirements of sections second, third,
and fourth, by the nominating committee. They shall be liable to the
payment of dues and assessments, and be eligible to all the privileges
of regular members of the Association until the next annual meeting, at
which time they must be duly elected in the same manner as all regular
members.
THE GAME OF BASE-BALL.
As before asserted, the American game of base-ball requires a high
degree of physical ability, and the possession of manly characteristics
to excel in it; for although in theory a schoolboy could easily
comprehend the system, in practice an amount of manly vigour, courage,
and physical endurance is requisite, surprising to those who regard the
game in the light only of an improved edition of the old English
school-game of rounders.
The theory of base-ball is as simple as that of any field sport in
vogue, and therein lies one of its attractive features. But yet to play
the game up to its highest point of excellence requires as great a
degree of mental ability, and the possession of as many manly physical
attributes, as any known game of ball. The theory of base-ball is as
follows:--In the first place, a level field for play is selected, about
three hundred feet wide and five hundred long. A space of ground is then
marked out in the form of a square, with one corner as the position of
the home base, and the other corners for the first, second, and third
bases, the first base being on the right of the batsman, as he stands at
home base, and the third base on the left. The contestants in a game
consist of nine players on each side, and these nine players occupy the
following positions: catcher, pitcher, first, second, and third basemen,
short-stop, and left, centre, and right fielders. The first six players
above-named form the “_in-fielders_,” and the last three the
“_out-fielders_,” the nine taking the field being known as the
“out-hand,” or “field.” After the parties toss for the innings, the
losing side go to the bat, and the winning party to the field, and each
man to his position. The pitcher then delivers the ball to the batsman
of the opposite nine, who endeavours to send it out of reach of the
opposing field party, and far enough into the field to admit of his
running round the four bases, in which case he scores one run, provided
he is not put out in the interim. He is followed by his companions, one
after the other in regular rotation, until three of the batting side are
put out, when the field side take the bat and have their innings. Nine
innings constitute a full game, and no game is considered as played
unless five full innings have been completed. The ball--the only trophy
in a match--goes to the party making the most runs in a full game, or in
any number of even innings played not less than five.
In case of a tie at the close of the ninth innings, the game, unless by
mutual consent, must be prolonged innings after innings, until one or
other of the contesting sides obtains the most runs. And if anything
occur to interrupt or put a stop to the game before five innings on each
side have been played, the game must be drawn. The rules and regulations
of the game define all further particulars in reference to it.
HOW TO PLAY EACH POSITION.
GENERAL RULES.
There are nine positions in a base-ball field, two less than in a field
of cricketers in a match. The catcher plays behind the batsman to
receive the ball from the pitcher. The pitcher stands near the centre of
the in-field, forty-five feet from home base, and he is allowed only to
“_pitch_” the ball to the bat, not to throw it, jerk it, or bowl it. The
first base man attends to balls fielded to him on the base, his
principal duty being to hold the ball, while having one foot on the
base, before the batsman reaches it. The second and third basemen have
not only to hold the ball, but also to touch players running to the
bases before they can touch the bases. The short-stop attends to the
duties of backing up the pitcher and basemen generally, and of stopping
balls from the bat, and sending them to the bases, when the ball happens
to come within reach. The principal duties of the three out-fielders are
to catch long high balls, and to return in ground balls sent to their
positions. But the following are special instructions to occupants of
each position in the nine:--
THE CATCHER.
This player is expected to catch or stop all balls pitched or thrown to
the home base. He must be fully prepared to catch all foul balls,
especially “tips,” and be able to throw the ball accurately and swiftly
to the bases, and also to keep a bright look-out over the whole field.
“Foul balls” are those high balls which are hit so as to fall to the
ground _back_ of the line of the bases, from home to first base and home
to third. “Tips” are also foul balls, coming sharply from the bat to the
catcher.
When a player has made his first base, the catcher should take a
position nearer the striker, in order to take the ball from the pitcher
before it bounds; and the moment the ball is delivered by the pitcher,
and the player runs from the first to the second base, the catcher
should take the ball before bounding, and send it to the second base as
swiftly as possible, in time to cut off the player before he can touch
the base. In throwing to the base it would be as well, in the majority
of cases, to send the ball a little to the right of the base. The same
advice holds good in reference to a player running from the second base
to the third.
The catcher should have a thorough understanding with the pitcher in
regard to a code of signals by means of which he can not only direct the
pitcher to throw to a base to catch a player napping off the base--as a
wicket-keeper does the batsman when out of his ground in cricket--but
also so as to direct him where to send a ball to the bat, high or low,
in or out, as the peculiarity of the batsman’s play may require. The
catcher needs to be a swift and accurate thrower to the bases, a plucky
player in facing and stopping swiftly-pitched balls, and a patient
player in his efforts to prevent passed balls from inaccurate pitching.
When facing a swift pitcher, his aim should be to stop the ball, and to
be on the _qui vive_ for sharp “tips.” Off slow pitching more activity
is required, as the chances offered for difficult catches from foul
balls are greater.
As the position occupied by the catcher affords him the best view of the
field, the person filling it is generally chosen captain, although the
pitcher is sometimes selected for that position. We would suggest,
however, that some other player than the pitcher be chosen for captain,
from the fact that the physical labour attached to that position tends
to increase the player’s excitement, especially if the contest is a
close one, and it is requisite that the captain should be as cool and
collected as possible. The catcher, whenever he sees two or more
fielders running to catch a ball, should designate by name the one he
deems most likely to catch it, in which case the others should refrain
from the attempt to catch the ball on the fly, and strive only to catch
it in case of its being otherwise missed.
THE PITCHER.
More skill and judgment is requisite in this position than in any other
in the game. In fact, half the battle almost in a contest depends upon
the ability of the pitcher; and yet the best man in the position is
comparatively useless in a nine unless he be well supported in the
field. In cricket a bowler can take wickets when unassisted by a good
field party, but in base-ball a pitcher’s skill is entirely thrown away
unless well supported in the field, especially by the in-field portion
of the nine.
The pitcher’s position is within the lines of a space of ground six feet
by four in extent, located on the line between home and second base, the
front line of the position being distant forty-five feet from the home
base. The pitcher, in delivering the ball to the bat, is prohibited from
either throwing, jerking, or bowling the ball, and he is also prohibited
from making any motion in his delivery which will admit of a ball being
thrown, such as bending his arm outward at the elbow, &c. And if he
makes any one of the series of motions he uses in delivering the ball,
and fails to deliver it, then he incurs the penalty of a “balk,” in
which case players running the bases, but not the striker, are allowed
to take one base. The rules governing the delivery of the ball also
require the pitcher to deliver the ball _over_ the home base--which is
sixteen inches in width--and “fairly for the striker,” viz. within the
legitimate reach of the bat, and as near as possible to the point
indicated by the batsman, the boundary line in question extending from
within a foot of the ground to the height of the batsman’s head. The
pitcher in his style of delivery, may adopt any movement he likes,
provided he moves to deliver while standing _within_ the lines of his
position. It is regarded as throwing the ball, however, if it be
delivered in any way except by a straight arm, swinging
_perpendicularly_ with the body; and it is considered as “jerked,” if
the arm touches the side of the body in delivery. He should remember
that the rules define _unfairly_-pitched balls to be those pitched over
the head of the batsman; to the side opposite to that he strikes from;
on the ground before reaching the home base, or pitched so as to hit the
batsman when he is standing in his legitimate position--viz. _astride_
the line of the home base, and distant one foot from it. The pitcher
should be exceedingly cautious, and on the alert in watching the bases
when the players are attempting to run, and in such cases should
endeavour his utmost to throw a swift and true ball to the basemen. When
a player attempts to run in to the home base while he is pitching, he
should follow the ball to the home base as soon as it leaves his hand,
and be ready at the base to take it from the catcher. The pitcher will
frequently have to occupy a base on occasions when the proper guardian
has left it to field the ball. And in cases where a foul ball has been
struck, and the player running a base endeavours to return to the one he
has left, he should be ready to receive the ball at the point nearest
the base in question, in order to comply with that section of the rules
wherein in such cases it is required that the ball be settled in the
hands of the pitcher before it is in play. The pitcher has to face the
most dangerous balls sent from the bat, and therefore he requires to be
a plucky, courageous fellow, not afraid of being hurt. He should also be
an accurate thrower at short distances, and a sure catch. But the most
important requisite in the position, next to the ability to pitch the
ball accurately, is good judgment in pitching according to the skill and
peculiarities of his opponents at the bat.
THE BASE PLAYERS.
THE FIRST BASEMAN.
The principal duty of this fielder is to hold the ball in hand, with
some part of his person touching the first base, _before_ the batsman
reaches it. If held simultaneously with the base runner’s touching the
base, the latter is not out. The first baseman’s position, in the
beginning of an innings, is about twenty feet back of his base and
towards second base, but not too far away from the foul ball line or
from his base, as the majority of balls, which come anywhere near enough
for him to field, are hit within twenty feet of his base. The moment the
ball is struck, and he finds that it does not come near him, he should
promptly return to his base, and stand in readiness, with one foot on
the base, to receive the ball from any player who may have fielded it.
As we said before, the striker can be put out at this base without being
touched by the ball, provided the fielder, with the ball in hand,
touches the base with any part of his person _before_ the striker
reaches it. The player will find it good practice to stand with one foot
on the base, and see how far he can reach and take the ball from the
fielder; this practice will prepare him for balls that are thrown short
of the base. In the same manner he should learn to jump up and take high
balls. This position requires the player filling it to be the very best
of catchers, as he will be required to hold very swiftly-thrown balls.
The moment he has held the ball, he should promptly return it to the
pitcher, or to either of the other bases a player is running to, as in
some instances two, and sometimes three, players are put out by
promptitude in this respect.
THE SECOND BASEMAN.
This position requires its occupant to be a very active fielder indeed,
and especially a good judge of fly balls, and a sure catch. He should
also be a swift and accurate thrower at short distances. His position,
in the beginning of an innings, is at “right short,” that is, about
twenty or thirty feet back of his position and towards the foul ball
line, in fact nearly opposite the short-stop’s position on the other
side. But he should take his position according to the known
peculiarities of the batsman he faces. He should back up the pitcher
well, allowing no balls to pass both that player and himself too. When
the striker reaches the first base, the second baseman should
immediately return to his base and stand prepared to receive the ball
from the catcher, and put out his opponent by touching him with the
ball, which it is requisite to do on this base as well as on the third
and home bases, except in the cases of balls caught on the fly, or foul
balls, in both of which instances a player can be put out in returning
to the base he has left, in the same manner as when running to the first
base, viz. by the ball being held by the baseman, with some part of his
person on the base, before the base runner reaches it. When the catcher
fails to throw the ball with accuracy to the second baseman, the latter
should by all means manage to stop the ball, if he cannot catch it in
time to put out his opponent. He should also promptly return the ball to
the pitcher. He should be especially on the look-out for a double play
when a base runner is on first base, in which case all that the baseman
has to do, to put two players out, is to field the ball from the bat
sharply, or receive it from short-stop or the third baseman, and first
touching second base with ball in hand, to send the ball to first base
in time to cut off the player running there. When a base runner, too, is
on first base, and a high ball is hit for the second baseman to catch,
if he sees the base runner standing near his first base ready to run
back on the catch being made, he should manage to let the ball pass
through his hands, partly checked in its progress, but not held, in
which case the base runner being thereby forced from his first base can
be easily captured at second. Should the second baseman, however, see
the base runner trying to get to second, he should hold the fly ball,
and return it promptly to first base, thereby putting two players out on
a double play--one on the catch, and the other on returning to his base
on the catch, as base runners have to do in such cases.
THE THIRD BASEMAN.
This position is the most difficult one, to play skilfully, of any of
the three bases, as the throwing to first base from this position
requires a stronger arm than that from short-stop or second base, while
the third baseman has the most difficult catches to make on foul balls
of any in-fielder except the catcher. Besides which, errors in the way
of failures to stop balls thrown or batted to this position are more
important in their results than at any other base, as an error at third
base gives a run, while at first or second only a lost base is the
result. The third baseman, after fielding a ball from the bat, has to
throw it generally from a hundred and twenty-five to a hundred and fifty
feet to the first base, while the short-stop has not to throw it a
hundred, and the second base player generally not more than about eighty
or ninety. A good third base player can readily play at first or second
with comparative ease, but skilful players on the first and second bases
cannot as readily play third base. In fact, it is a position requiring
more practice to excel in it than that of either of the other bases.
This position is no place for a left-handed man, first base being the
only suitable place in the infield for such a player. When three men are
on the bases, the third baseman frequently has a fine opportunity
afforded him for double plays. Suppose, for instance, that each base is
occupied, and a ball is sent direct to the third baseman, his point of
play is to throw the ball to the pitcher or catcher at home base, and
for the player receiving it to return it promptly to third base, and if
this is done sharply two players can be readily put out on the one ball.
The rule for all basemen is to cut off the player nearest to home base.
For instance, if three men are on the bases, and a ball is hit to the
first baseman, the latter, instead of putting the striker out, should
throw the ball home, unless there was no fielder near enough to take it.
So in the case of a ball hit to short-stop, under similar circumstances,
unless two men are out, in which case the surest play should be
selected.
THE SHORT-STOP.
This is the position in the field for the most active of the six
in-fielders. Of course, like all in-fielders, his duties include the
stopping of hot ground-balls, and in throwing the same accurately to the
base the striker of the ball happens to be running to, generally the
first base. But his principal work is to back up all the in-fielders. He
should be on the alert the moment the ball is hit, and if it does not
come within his reach, he should be ready to get on a base to receive
it, or to back up the fielder it is thrown in to; in fact, the
short-stop should be the “general utility” man of the nine, and
especially active in saving the pitcher from over work in fielding. The
short-stop should be a fearless fielder, and one ready and able to stop
a swift ground-ball; and if he can throw swiftly and accurately, it
would be as well to be a little deliberate in sending the ball to the
first base, as it is better to be sure and just in time, than to risk a
wild throw by being in too great a hurry. His position is generally in
the centre of the triangle formed by the second and third bases and the
pitcher’s position, but he should change it according to his knowledge
of the striker’s style of batting. He must be on the alert to take foul
balls on the bound, that are missed on the fly by either the third
baseman or pitcher, or indeed any other player he can get near enough to
be of assistance to in this respect. In doing this, however, he should
be careful not to interfere with the fielder who is about catching the
ball so as to prevent him doing so. An effective short-stop and a good
first base player, especially if they are familiar with each other’s
play, will materially contribute to the successful issue of a
well-contested game.
THE OUT-FIELDERS.
A great deal depends upon the skill of the three out-fielders of a nine,
when the pitching is of medium pace, and plenty of chances for catches
are offered off the pitching. The principal qualifications of
out-fielders are: the power to throw a ball in well nearly a hundred
yards, and the ability to judge high fly balls and to catch surely. The
three positions require equally good fielders, though, if the nature of
the ground requires one man better than another, the best judge of a
ball should be placed in the difficult position. Out-fielders should
watch the batsman closely, and either lay out well for the heavy
hitters, or get closer in for those who strive to hit “safe” balls just
over the heads and out of reach of the in-fielders. After the ball has
been either caught or stopped, the out-fielder should promptly return
it, either to the base requiring it, or to the pitcher. Out-fielders
should never hold the ball a moment longer than is necessary to throw
it. Another point of their fielding should be to start the moment the
ball is hit, and try their utmost to take it on the fly, and not wait
until it is about touching the ground. Bear in mind that it is easier to
run forward to take a ball than, by being too eager, to try and take it
by running backward; remember, however, that a ball hit high to long
field invariably appears to be coming further than it really does.
THE BATSMAN.
The position of the batsman is expressly defined by the rules, which
require that the striker, when about to strike the ball, must stand
_astride_ the line of the home base. This line is six feet in length,
running through the centre of the home base, and parallel with the front
line of the pitcher’s position. He can take a step forward, but he is
prohibited from taking any backward step. The batsman is known as the
“striker,” and so considered in the rules, until he has struck a fair
ball, when he immediately becomes “a player running the bases,” and
ceases to be the “striker.” When the batsman takes his position at the
home base, viz. standing astride the line of the base, and not less than
one foot to the left of it, the umpire asks him where he wants a ball,
and the batsman responds by saying “knee high,” or “waist high,” or by
naming the character of the call he wants pitched to him, the pitcher
being required by the rules to deliver to the batsman a ball within the
legitimate reach of his bat, and as near the place indicated as he can,
and also to pitch _over_ the home base; and if he fails to do this
twice, the umpire, after first warning him of the penalty he incurs, is
required to call a ball for every unfair ball delivered after the
warning has been given, and when three such balls have been called the
batsman drops his bat and goes to first base.
In striking at the ball it must be hit _fairly_ to entitle the batsman
to run for his first base, and it is only hit “fairly” when sent to the
field in _front_ of the lines of the bases reaching from home to first
base and home to third base. If the ball from the bat first touches the
ground _back_ of these lines, it is considered “foul,” and in that case,
though the batsman can be caught out, he cannot run to his base. The
moment the batsman hits a fair ball, therefore, he drops his bat and
runs to first base, and if he reaches it before the ball is held by the
baseman while touching the base, the striker escapes being put out; but
if the ball be held by the baseman, while on his base, _before_ the
batsman reaches it, the latter is out. The batsman is liable to be put
out in the following manner. If the ball he hits “fair” should be caught
by any of the fielders before touching the ground; or if a ball he hits
“foul” should be caught by any of the fielders either “on the fly” or on
the first bound; or if he strikes at the ball three times and fails to
hit it each time, and the ball, on the third strike, be held on the
bound, or, if not so held, it be held on the first base before the
striker reaches it, the batsman is out; and lastly, he is out if he
takes a step backward three times when striking at a ball. These are the
various ways in which the batsman or striker can be put out. After
making his first base, and thereby becoming a “base runner,” he is
liable to be put out as follows. If he be touched by any fielder with
the ball in hand and in play, when he is off a base, he is out; also, if
when running to a base on a foul ball, he fail to get back to the base
before the ball, in play, is held by the baseman; or, if in running to a
base on a fair fly ball, he be similarly off his base when the ball is
held by the base player after being caught; also, if he fail to reach
the next base to the one he occupies when a fair ball is hit, and not
caught, and the ball be held on the base he is running to before he
reaches it, he is out.
BASE-RUNNING.
The moment the striker hits a fair ball he ceases to be the “striker,”
and becomes at once “a player running the bases,” and he then becomes
liable to be put out in the several ways alluded to under the head of
“The Batsman,” viz. by being “forced off” his base; by being “run out;”
and by being put out in returning on a fly or foul ball. We will now
illustrate more particularly the manner in which the base-runner can be
thus put out. When, as above referred to, the striker has made his first
base, and become a “base-runner,” and he is occupying the first base
when a fair ball is hit, the moment such a ball be struck that moment he
ceases to have any right to occupy the first base, he being what is
termed “forced off” by the batsman. In such case he must try and make
his second base before the ball is held by a fielder on the base. If he
fails to do this he is out. When occupying the first base, too, when a
fair ball is hit and is held on the fly, he is required to return and
touch the base before he can legally run for the next base; but the
moment he has touched the base, after the catch has been made, he can
then run for the next base. If, however, the ball that is hit be a foul
ball, then he must not only return to the base he left when the ball was
struck, but he must remain on it until the ball has been settled in the
hands of the pitcher before he can again attempt to run to the next
base. If at any time, too, when the ball is in play, he be caught off a
base, and be touched by the ball in the hands of any fielder, he is also
out. If, too, in running round the bases at any time he should fail to
touch any of the bases, he must return and touch the base he failed to
touch when first running round, and in such case, if the ball be held on
the base before he can touch it, he is out; and he must also return to
touch the base, in such case, the same way as he ran round, he not being
allowed to cross over from home base to second, or from third to first.
Base-runners should, however, remember that they have a right to return
to the base they have left--except when “forced off” by the
batsman--until they touch the next base; and no base-runner, occupying a
base, can force another off the next base, unless he himself be forced
off by the batsman, or by a base-runner who is forced off by the
batsman. That is, a player occupying the second base, when there is no
one on the first base, cannot force a base-runner off the third. When
all the bases are occupied, and the batsman hits a fair ball which is
not caught, then each base-runner is obliged to vacate the base he
occupies and run to the next, and in this case all that is necessary to
put either base-runner out, is simply for any fielder to hold the ball
on the base the base-runner is trying to reach before the latter reaches
it. It should be borne in mind that the moment the batsman is put out by
a fair fly catch, or put out at first base, that moment the base-runners
preceding him cease to be “forced” to leave their bases, and in this
case they must be touched by the ball, in the hands of a fielder, before
they can be put out. Base-runners, too, when high balls are hit into the
outer field, and in such way as to make a catch apparently certain,
should stand on their bases in readiness to run to the next base the
moment the ball is held by the out-fielder. When a base-runner is on the
first base, and a high ball is “popped up,” which looks as if it would
surely be caught by the short-stop or pitcher, or indeed by any
in-fielder, the base-runner has a double difficulty to escape from,
inasmuch as, if the ball is caught on the fly, he has to return to the
base he left when the ball was hit; but should the ball, instead, be
purposely dropped before being held, he then becomes obliged to run for
his second base, and is in such case liable to be easily put out from
being forced off his first base. Either horn of the dilemma is bad, but
the safest way generally is to anticipate the ball being caught, and to
stand ready to get back to first base easily, as the effort to drop the
ball for a double play is one not often successful. A base-runner, when
on first base at a time when another is on the third, can safely run
down to second, except where two hands are out, as the catcher in the
former case sacrifices the one base to prevent the player on the third
from getting a chance to run home. When two hands are out, however, it
does not matter so much, as the catcher can far easier put the third
hand out by a throw to second than can the base-runner at the third get
home before the third hand be put out. In the position in a game when
two hands are out and a base-runner is running home, the run he would
otherwise make does not count, if the batsman be put out before he makes
his first base; and neither does it count in such case, if the
base-runner in question fails to touch the home base before the third
hand is put out. Players who desire to become expert as base-runners
should not only familiarise themselves with the theory of base-running
by attentive study of the rules, but they must realize by practical
experience all the points of play above alluded to before they can
successfully exemplify their theoretical knowledge, or derive any
advantage from it. It is one thing to be thoroughly acquainted with the
manner in which any special object in view should be attained, but it is
altogether a more difficult matter to practically illustrate your
theory; and an afternoon’s experience in running bases against a field
of practical experts would soon show you the fallacy of trusting to
thorough theoretical knowledge for success.
ON FIELDING GENERALLY.
Skill in fielding is the first requisite of an expert base-ball player.
What is called a “muffin” player is one who is a mere tyro in handling
the ball. Muffins can bat well, and yet not be anything but “muffins.”
Occasionally, too, we find an effective pitcher who is a “muffin” in
fielding. But a player who can field well, though he may not be a
skilled batsman, or even able to pitch effectively, is nevertheless
eligible to a position in the first nine of a club, when a good batsman
who is not a good fielder would be very properly ruled out. Among the
requisites of a first-class fielder are: first, the moral qualifications
of courage, nerve, control of temper and coolness of judgment in
emergencies, together with perseverance in the face of difficulties and
in contending manfully against large odds. The physical ability
necessary consists of the strength to throw a ball a hundred yards; the
agility to catch a flying ball close to the ground, or two or three feet
above your head; the activity to pick up a ball while running; the
quickness of the eye to judge the fall of a high ball, or the rebound of
a foul one; and the endurance to stand the fatigue of a long game.
Among the general rules worthy the attention of fielders are the
following:--
The most important rule is the one which commands obedience to the
directions of the captain of the nine. Fielders should also bear in mind
that the captain of the nine is alone the spokesman of the party and the
commander of the field.
_Secondly._ No out-fielder should hold a ball a moment longer than it is
necessary for him to handle it in throwing. In the in-field, however, a
ball can be sometimes held by the fielder with safety and advantage.
_Thirdly._ Never stand still in your position simply because the ball
happens to go in another direction than the position you occupy, but
always be on the move to aid the other fielders or to back them up.
Activity in the field, and judgment in being prompt in support, is one
of the important requisites of a first-class fielder.
_Fourthly._ Play earnestly at all times, whether in an ordinary practice
game or in a match. Get into the habit of doing your best on all
occasions. It is invariably the mark of a vain and conceited ball player
to walk on the field and play in a game as if he was conferring a favour
by participating in the contest; and players who play with an air of
indifference as to the result of the game, or who become despondent when
the odds are against them, are no players for a first class nine.
_Fifthly._ Next to seeing a man field well, the most attractive thing is
to see a player take things easily and good-naturedly. If you miss a fly
ball, allow an important ball to pass you, or fail to handle a ball in
time on a base, nothing is more boyish than to vent your ill-temper on
some one who may have balked you in catching it, or thrown it to you
badly. Control yourself and take it smilingly, or if you lack the moral
courage to do that, keep your tongue still at least. Your good-natured
fellows, who play their best all the time, and yet take everything bad
or good with a good-natured smile, are as desirable as companions on a
ball field as your growlers are to be detested.
_Sixthly._ When an error of play is committed, do your best at once to
remedy the evil by using your best efforts to get at the ball either
after “muffing” it, letting it pass you, or failing to hold it. Some
players after missing a ball will walk after it like an ill-tempered,
sulky ten-year old.
_Seventhly._ There is no habit fielders have that is more characteristic
of school-boys, or which leads to more unpleasantness and ill-feeling in
a match, than that of finding fault with those who commit errors of play
in the field. Every man in the field tries to do his best for his own
credit sake, and if he fails censure but adds to his chagrin without in
the least improving his play; on the contrary, fault-finding is only
calculated to make him play worse. In no game are the amenities of
social life more necessary to a full enjoyment of the pastime than in
base-ball. Particularly acceptable are words of commendation for good
play and remarks calculated to remove the annoyance arising from errors
in the field, to young ball players, and these form some of the
strongest incentives to extra exertion on their part, besides promoting
kindly feelings on the field and during the game. The fact is, such men
as your constitutional grumblers are the nuisances of a ball field, and
destroy all the pleasure which would otherwise result from the game.
Every manly player will keep silent when he sees an error committed, or
if he makes any remark at all, will apologize for it in some way. Those
who find fault and growl at errors of play are of the class who prefer
to gratify their malice and ill-temper at the expense of the unlucky
fielder who happens to “muff” a ball or two in a game.
_Lastly._ Remember that the winning of the trophy is one of the main
objects in view, and as it is not the most important thing in life to
win it, or a very great disaster to lose it, the less you act as if it
was, the less likelihood of the spectators suspecting you of having some
ulterior object in view, such as the winning of a sum of money, for
instance. To conclude, however, let it be remembered by every player in
a match that a _creditable_ victory abides only with that party who, in
winning the match, have marked their play as much by their courtesy of
demeanour, liberality of action, and the good-nature they have displayed
in the contest, as by their skill in the several departments of the
game.
THE UMPIRE AND HIS DUTIES.
The position of an umpire in a base-ball match is one marked by onerous
and important duties. Before proceeding to comment on what these duties
are particularly, we will first give the rules of the game applicable
to the position which are included in Rule VII. of the code of rules and
regulations:--
SEC. 1. The umpire shall take care that the regulations respecting the
ball, bats, bases, and the pitcher’s and striker’s positions, are
strictly observed, and he shall require the challenging club to furnish
a ball, on which the size, weight, and the name of the manufacturer
shall be stamped. He shall be the sole judge of fair and unfair play,
and shall determine all disputes and differences which may occur during
the game. He shall take special care to declare all foul balls and balks
immediately upon their occurrence, in a distinct and audible manner. He
shall, in every instance, before leaving the ground, declare the winning
club, and shall record his decision in the books of the scorers. The
umpire shall also require that the game be recorded by a scorer for each
of the contesting clubs. In all matches the umpire shall be selected by
the captains of the respective sides, and shall perform all the duties
above enumerated.
SEC. 2. The umpire in any match shall determine when play shall be
suspended; and if the game cannot be fairly concluded, it shall be
decided by the last equal innings, provided five innings have been
played, and the party having the greatest number of runs shall be
declared the winner.
SEC. 3. When the umpire calls “play,” the game must at once be proceeded
with; and the party failing to take their appointed positions in the
game within five minutes thereafter shall forfeit the game. When the
umpire calls “time,” play shall be suspended until he calls “play”
again.
SEC. 4. When the umpire “calls” a game, it shall end; but when he merely
suspends play for any stated period, it may be resumed at the point at
which it was suspended, provided such suspension does not extend beyond
the day of the match.
SEC. 5. No person engaged in a match, either as umpire, scorer, or
player, shall be either directly or indirectly interested in any bet
upon the game. Nor shall any person be permitted to act as umpire or
scorer in any match unless he shall be a member of the National
Association, or of a State branch thereof. Neither shall the umpire or
scorer be changed during a match, unless with the consent of both
parties, except for reason of illness or injury, or for a violation of
the above rules.
SEC. 6. No decision given by the umpire shall be reversed upon the
testimony of any player; and no decision whatever shall be reversed,
except for a palpable infringement of the rules, and then only on an
appeal by the captain.
SEC. 7. No person shall be permitted to approach or to speak with the
umpire, scorers, or players, or in any manner to interrupt or interfere
during the progress of the game, unless by special request of the
umpire. Any match game played by any club in contravention to the rules
adopted by the National Association shall be considered null and void,
and shall not be counted in the list of match games won and lost.
It will be seen by the above rules, that among the most important are
those requiring each player first, to be a member of a club belonging to
the National Association, or a State branch thereof. Secondly, that he
is to be considered the sole judge of fair and unfair play, and one from
whose decision there is no appeal, except in certain instances where the
rules are grossly misinterpreted, in which case the injured parties can
appeal for redress to the judiciary committee of their State
association. Also, that from the time “play” is called until the period
the umpire either suspends play by calling “time,” or closes the game by
“calling” it, the game must be proceeded with, or otherwise the party
failing to play forfeits the ball. Also that the umpire is required to
see that the ball played with is one having the maker’s name stamped on
it, and likewise the figures indicating the size and weight of the ball.
HINTS TO UMPIRES.
The umpire should invariably render his decision in accordance with the
_first impressions_ of the point of play made on his mind. If he
hesitates at all, the influence of any particular bias he may have will
affect his judgment, and very likely make his decision a partial one. Be
prompt, therefore, to decide according to the very first impression
made. Promptness in deciding is strong testimony in favour of impartial
judgment, and is always satisfactory to contestants. He should also see
that the _foul ball posts_ are in position, and especially that the rule
requiring _chalk lines_ from home to first base, and home to third, be
complied with. He should keep silent when a fair ball is struck, but if
asked if it be a fair ball, he can of course say so; but he is not
required to call fair balls.
The umpire, before calling “play,” should see that the captains of the
contesting sides are mutually agreed upon what the rules of the ground
are for the match. Thus, for instance, that a ball going over a fence
shall give but one base, or that a ball taken on the fly from a tree, or
the roof of a house, or the side of a fence, shall be regarded as a
bound catch, and only legitimate in the case of a foul ball; or that a
ball passing the catcher, and being stopped by a fence too close to the
home base, shall give one base, &c.
One of his most difficult duties is that of calling balls for unfair
delivery in pitching, and also in calling strikes on the batsmen for not
hitting at fair balls.
The umpire should first instruct himself in regard to the definition of
unfair balls, and the following rules will give him the required
information:--
_Firstly._ A ball that strikes the ground in front of the home base is
not a fair ball; as, in the first place, by striking the ground before
reaching the baseman, it becomes a “bowled” ball, and secondly, because
it is not pitched “over the home base,” and “fairly for the striker;”
for unless it goes over the home base before touching the ground, it is
not “pitched,” but “bowled” over, and unless so pitched, it cannot be
“fairly for the striker.”
_Secondly._ A ball that is pitched on the side opposite to that the
batsman habitually strikes from is not a fair ball, because not pitched
“for the striker.”
_Thirdly._ A ball that is pitched so as to hit the striker--provided he
is standing in his legitimate position, viz. astride the line of the
home base, and one foot to the left of the base--is not a fair one, for
the same reason. The striker should, however, stand far enough from the
base to admit of the ball being pitched over it without its striking
him.
_Fourthly._ Balls, too, which are pitched beyond the legitimate reach of
the batsman, either in front of him or over his head, are, for the same
reason, not fair balls.
All of the above balls are “unfair” balls, and must be called when it is
legitimate to call a ball at all, that is, first, after two unfair balls
have been pitched, and secondly, after the pitcher has _then_ been
warned of the penalty--this warning being given in the form of the
words, “ball to the bat,” or some exclamation of similar purport.
Should the striker not stand in his position, as required by the rules,
or should he hit at balls at a different height to that he calls for, in
such case the umpire is not required to call any of the above delivered
balls as unfair balls except those out of the batsman’s reach.
* * * * *
We now proceed to close our instructions in the game with a chapter on
scoring, which is a part of base-ball requiring a considerable degree of
statistical and analytical talent to do it well.
ON SCORING IN BASE-BALL.
The present system of scoring was first introduced by the writer in
1867, and since then has been adopted by every competent scorer in the
country. The scorer of a base-ball match has either a simple task to
perform, or a duty requiring his close attention to every movement of
the players in the field. To record the “outs” and “runs” in a match
requires simply the use of the figures 1, 2, 3 for the score of outs in
each innings, and dots for each run scored, and at the close of the game
these are added up and the total of each placed opposite the name of the
batsman making them; the score of runs made each innings being recorded
at the foot of each column of the innings. To score a game properly,
however, considerable work is necessary, as will be seen by the
following.
INSTRUCTIONS TO SCORERS.
The following diagrams show the blank forms of the score-sheets used in
recording the play, and also the total result, in a match game of
base-ball; and we present these blanks before proceeding with our
instructions in scoring:--
No. I.
_Diagram of Score Sheet used to record the Movements of the Players in a
Match Game._
The Score of the ___________________ Club of ___________________
+-----+-----+-----+-----+--------+------------------------------+
|Base |Bases|Bases| | | |
|run- | on | on |Total| Play | Played at .............. 186.|
|ning.| er- |hits.|score. called.| |
| |rors.| | | | |
+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+---+
|H.|L.|B.|M.|B.|T.|O.|R.|BATSMEN.|1.|2.|3.|4.|5.|6.|7.|8.|9.|10.|
+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+---+
| | | | | | | | |1. | | | | | | | | | | |
+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+---+
| | | | | | | | |2. | | | | | | | | | | |
+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+---+
| | | | | | | | |3. | | | | | | | | | | |
+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+---+
| | | | | | | | |4. | | | | | | | | | | |
+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+---+
| | | | | | | | |5. | | | | | | | | | | |
+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+---+
| | | | | | | | |6. | | | | | | | | | | |
+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+---+
| | | | | | | | |7. | | | | | | | | | | |
+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+---+
| | | | | | | | |8. | | | | | | | | | | |
+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+---+
| | | | | | | | |9. | | | | | | | | | | |
+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+---+
| | | | | | | | |Total | | | | | | | | | | |
+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+---+
| | | | | | | | |Grand | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |total | | | | | | | | | | |
+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+---+
+---------+-----+-----------------+-----+-----+
| Game |Posi-| Good Plays in |Total|As- |
| ended. |tion.| the Field. | put |sist-|
| | | |out. |ing. |
+---------+ +--+--+--+--+--+--+ | |
|FIELDERS.| |B.|F.|L.|D.|K.|R.| | |
+---------+-----+--+--+--+--+--+--+-----+-----+
|1. | | | | | | | | | |
+---------+-----+--+--+--+--+--+--+-----+-----+
|2. | | | | | | | | | |
+---------+-----+--+--+--+--+--+--+-----+-----+
|3. | | | | | | | | | |
+---------+-----+--+--+--+--+--+--+-----+-----+
|4. | | | | | | | | | |
+---------+-----+--+--+--+--+--+--+-----+-----+
|5. | | | | | | | | | |
+---------+-----+--+--+--+--+--+--+-----+-----+
|6. | | | | | | | | | |
+---------+-----+--+--+--+--+--+--+-----+-----+
|7. | | | | | | | | | |
+---------+-----+--+--+--+--+--+--+-----+-----+
|8. | | | | | | | | | |
+---------+-----+--+--+--+--+--+--+-----+-----+
|9. | | | | | | | | | |
+---------+-----+--+--+--+--+--+--+-----+-----+
| | | | | | | | | | |
+---------+-----+--+--+--+--+--+--+-----+-----+
| | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
+---------+-----+--+--+--+--+--+--+-----+-----+
Winning Club .................... Scorers ......................
Umpire .......................... Duration of game .............
The letters on the left refer to the batting score, as follows:--R, for
runs; O, for outs; T, for the number of times the first base is made on
hits; B, for number of bases on hits; M, for first base on muffs; B, for
first base on called balls; L, for left on bases after clean hits; and
H, for home-runs. On the right, the letters refer to the fielding only:
B, for outs on bases; F, for fair fly-catches; L, for foul fly-catches;
D, for foul bound catches; K, for outs on strikes; R, for run out; the
last two columns being for the record of the total number of players put
out by each fielder, and the total number of times each assisted in
putting out players.
The following diagram presents the blank form used to record the
particulars of a match game at its close:--
No. II. _Batting Score._
_______________________ Club. _______________________ Club.
+-------------+----+----+----+----++-------------+----+----+----+----+
| PLAYERS. |POS.| O. | R. | B. || PLAYERS. |POS.| O. | R. | B. |
+-------------+----+----+----+----++-------------+----+----+----+----+
| 1. | | | | || 1. | | | | |
+-------------+----+----+----+----++-------------+----+----+----+----+
| 2. | | | | || 2. | | | | |
+-------------+----+----+----+----++-------------+----+----+----+----+
| 3. | | | | || 3. | | | | |
+-------------+----+----+----+----++-------------+----+----+----+----+
| 4. | | | | || 4. | | | | |
+-------------+----+----+----+----++-------------+----+----+----+----+
| 5. | | | | || 5. | | | | |
+-------------+----+----+----+----++-------------+----+----+----+----+
| 6. | | | | || 6. | | | | |
+-------------+----+----+----+----++-------------+----+----+----+----+
| 7. | | | | || 7. | | | | |
+-------------+----+----+----+----++-------------+----+----+----+----+
| 8. | | | | || 8. | | | | |
+-------------+----+----+----+----++-------------+----+----+----+----+
| 9. | | | | || 9. | | | | |
+-------------+----+----+----+----++-------------+----+----+----+----+
| Totals | | | | || Totals | | | | |
+-------------+----+----+----+----++-------------+----+----+----+----+
_Innings._
+----------+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+-------+
| CLUBS. | 1. | 2. | 3. | 4. | 5. | 6. | 7. | 8. | 9. | |TOTALS.|
+----------+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+-------+
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
+----------+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+-------+
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
+----------+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+-------+
Home runs ____________________________________________________________
No. of times first base on hits _____________ times ___________ times.
No. of times first base by errors ___________ times ___________ times.
No. of times first base on three balls ______ times ___________ times.
Total bases on hits __________________________________________________
Times left on bases after clean hits _________________________________
_Fielding Score._
Base play--put out by ________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Fly catches __________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Foul bound catches ___________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Catches on strikes ___________________________________________________
Double plays _________________________________________________________
Outs on bases _____________________ times _____________________ times.
Outs on foul balls ________________ times _____________________ times.
Total errors of play _________________________________________________
Umpire, Mr. ______________ of the ______________ Club, of ____________
Owners, Messrs. _______________________ and __________________________
Time of game ______________________ hours ___________________ minutes.
In recording a game on score-sheet No. 1 we proceed as follows:--Under
the heading of “Batsmen” we place the names of the batting nine, and
under the heading of “Fielders” we place the names of the opposing nine.
These names are recorded on the two score-sheets of the score-book; the
names of the two nines thus appearing on the book twice, once as batsmen
and once as fielders. Over the heading “Batsmen” we record the time of
commencing the game, and this is done only on the page of the nine who
first go to the bat; the figures of the hour of closing the game being
recorded over the heading “Fielders,” on the page of the nine who last
go to the bat; and over the figures of the “innings” we record the name
of the grounds the match was played on, and the date of the game.
Each fielder is numbered from 1 to 9, and in recording by whom players
are put out these figures are used to indicate the name of the fielder.
In recording the positions of the fielders we simply use the initials of
the words of the position, thus C for “catcher,” P for “pitcher,” &c.
Instead of using C for “centre field,” we use M for “middle field,” as C
is used for “catcher.” The figures 1, 2, 3 are used to indicate the outs
of each innings, and a dot thus (.) for each run. Dots only are used in
recording the details of the batting on the left hand of the
score-sheet, and also for recording the particulars of the fielding on
the left. Thus, if the batsman secures his first base by a “clean
hit”--that is, not by means of a wild throw, a dropped fly ball, or a
palpably muffed ball--we place a dot in the square of the column of
“times bases on hits” opposite the batsman’s name; and if instead he be
put out on the fly, we place a dot in the square of the column headed
“fly catches,” on the right, and opposite the fielder’s name. Now the
above score only gives the data for estimating the skill of the batsman
as far as his score of bases on hits, or on muffs, &c. is concerned, and
of the skill of the fielder as far as the record of the totals of his
work in the field is concerned. To complete the score, however,
something more has to be done, and that is, to record how and by whom
each batsman is put out; and how this is to be done we now proceed to
show.
The scorer must first make himself familiar with the following
abbreviations of words used to indicate the various movements and
actions of the fielders, and these abbreviations will be found very easy
to commit to memory. They are as follows:--
A, Put out at first base.
B, „ second base.
C, „ third base.
H, „ home base.
F, Put out on fly catch.
K, „ three strikes.
R O, Put out between bases.
L F, „ on foul fly.
L D, „ on foul bound.
T F, „ on tip fly.
T D, „ on tip bound.
H R, „ for home run.
As before stated, the figures 1, 2, 3 are used for recording the outs,
and dots for runs; with small figures thus, 1st, 2d, 3d, to indicate
being left on the bases.
The key to the above abbreviations is as follows. The first three
letters of the alphabet indicate the first three bases, and we use the
initial letters of the words _Home_, _Fly_, _Run Out_, and _Tip_, and
the last letter of the words _Struck_, _Foul_, and _Bound_. Thus L
stands for foul and F for fly, and both together for “foul fly.” The
above system will be found to include everything necessary in recording
the important details of a game, to the extent of showing the good plays
made at the bat and in the field. In “reporting” the details of a match,
however, we necessarily require a still more elaborate system, and our
short-hand system for the use of reporters will be found in detail in
our “BOOK OF REFERENCE,” published in New York.
In order to illustrate fully the working of the system of scoring above
described, we will proceed to score an imaginary game as follows:--
Suppose the fielders in their places and the batsman in his, and the
scorers ready to record the game. “Play” is called, and the time of
beginning the game at once recorded. The first striker then hits a ball,
which is caught on the fly by the left-fielder, who is the seventh
striker, we will say, on the other side. On the square of the first
innings opposite the name of the first striker you first write down the
figure 1, indicating the first hand out, and above it write the figure 7
and the letter F, and your record will then appear thus:
.......
: 7 F :
: 1 :
.......
the 7 representing the name of the fielder, and the letter F the initial
of the word fly, showing by whom and in what manner the player was put
out. Opposite the name of the seventh fielder, too, under the head of
“On fair fly,” you write down a dot, which gives him credit for the fly
catch in the score of good plays. The second striker now takes the bat,
and, hitting a low grounder to centre-field, makes his second base just
before the ball is well fielded in to the second baseman. To record this
properly you place a dot opposite the batsman’s name to the left under
the head of “number of _times_” bases are made on hits; and in the next
column you place two dots, showing the number of _bases_ made on the
hit; or, if you like to be more particular, you can write the figure 2
in place of the two dots, and then you will know the bases he made on
each hit. The third striker now comes to the bat, and hits a ball to
short-stop, who passes it to the first baseman in time to put the player
out. You now have to record the second hand out, and you do it thus:
first, the figure 2 for second hand out, and the figure 3 for the name
of the short-stop, who is the third striker on the list of names on the
other side, and then 4 for the first baseman, who is the fourth
striker. The square will then appear thus:
.......
:3-4 A:
: 2 :
.......
thereby showing that the batsman was the second hand out by a ball
fielded to the first base player by the short-stop. You then, opposite
the fielders’ names to the right, under the head of “number of times
assisting,” place a dot opposite the third fielder’s name, and under the
head of “on bases,” a dot opposite the name of the fourth fielder, thus
crediting the short-stop with the assistance rendered and the first
baseman with putting the batsman out. The fourth striker now takes the
bat and strikes out, and you then record the out by the figure 3 for the
third hand out, and the letter K for struck out (in this instance, as in
one or two others, as we have shown, we use the last letter of the
word), and under the head of “on third strike,” opposite the fielder’s
name acting as catcher, we place a dot. This closes the innings. When
the game is closed, we add up the total outs and runs charged and
credited to each batsman, and place the totals under the heading of
“Outs and Runs” to the left of the batsmen’s names. The above will
suffice to show the general plan of scoring we adopt in this system. The
statistics of the batsman’s play, to the left of the batsmen’s names,
include his total score of outs and runs, the total number of _times_
the first base is made, and the number of _bases_ made on clean hits;
and a similar record of bases made on “muffed” and wildly thrown balls,
and on balked and called balls, together with the number of times
base-runners are left on bases, and the number of clean home runs. The
statistics of the fielding, to the right of the fielders’ names, include
the totals of outs on bases, on fair fly catches, on foul fly and foul
bound catches, on three strikes, from being run out, the totals of the
players put out, and of times assisting to put them out.
The American game of base-ball will be found an excellent substitute for
cricket in England, for those who have not the leisure time for the
English game, as a full game of nine innings a side can be played in
three hours at most. It is a more vigorous exercise than cricket, and in
a closely contested match, fully as exciting to spectators, when
understood. For boys, after school hours, it is far better than cricket,
owing to the short time required to play a game.
AMERICAN BILLIARDS.
The four ball, or “American game” of billiards, differs both from the
English and French game, and in a measure combines the merits of both.
Though it does not require the skill the French game does, it avoids, by
custom, the simple, mechanical “hazard” feature of the English game, as
first-class American billiard-players at the hazard and carom game never
hole the spot ball consecutively, as in the English game. In fact, the
hazard feature of the American game is rapidly falling into disuse, the
four ball carom game taking its place.
The American tables now are made without side pockets, and no saloon has
any tables of this kind, except for playing pool; the four pocket tables
and carom tables without pockets being the only style in vogue now. The
four pocket tables were introduced by Michael Phelan, Esq., the “father”
of the game in America.
The general principles of the American game, which unites those of all
others, are as follows:--
THE CAROM.
To make a carom, the player must cause his own ball to strike two or
more balls in the same shot.
When he strikes his adversary’s ball, and either the light or dark red,
he scores _two_.
When he strikes the two red balls, or, in billiard phrase, _caroms_ on
them, he scores _three_.
THE HAZARD.
There are two sorts of hazards--_winning_ and _losing_.
A WINNING HAZARD is made by pocketing the adversary’s ball, or either of
the red balls.
In the first case, the player scores _two_; in the second, he scores
_three_.
When the player pockets his own ball it is a LOSING HAZARD. If his ball
is pocketed after having struck the white or adversary’s ball, _two_
points are added to the adversary’s score.
If the ball is pocketed after having struck either of the red balls,
_three_ points are added to the adversary’s score.
If the ball be pocketed after having made a carom or winning hazard, the
player cannot score the count he may have made.
A _miss_, or a failure on the part of the player to strike any other
ball with his own, counts _one_ for the opponent.
The word _carom_, used in this portion of the work, is derived from the
French word “_carombolage_.” In England the word “cannon” is used, an
evidently corrupt derivation.
In learning all games of billiards practical experience is the best
teacher. No amount of intellectual study can impart to a novice the
manual dexterity and adroitness essential to the display of the beauties
of the game. But months of labour and learning by practical experience
alone may be avoided by learning thoroughly beforehand the principles of
the science afterwards to be practised as an art.
Among the most important things in billiards is a good attitude, and to
attain this should be the student’s first effort. Good attitude is the
‘groundwork’ of a player’s success. If his attitude be ungraceful, viz.
strained or unnatural, his playing will assuredly be unreliable.
The student’s attitude must, in the first place, be perfectly easy and
natural. His left foot should be slightly advanced, in a straight line,
the right drawn backwards and pointing outwards, to the extent and at
the angle most familiar and convenient to the player. The left arm
should be extended and supported on the table by the tips of the fingers
and the junction of the palm and the wrist (which position of the hand
constitutes the _natural bridge_). His body should be perfectly
balanced, and should form an acute angle with the side of the table at
which he stands. The tapering end of the cue should rest in the natural
groove formed by the elevation of the thumb; the thick end should be
grasped in the right hand, loosely while being drawn back preparatory to
the stroke, and firmly at the moment of contact with the ball. The cue
should be held in a perfectly horizontal position, except in the case of
some particular strokes, which will be described in the proper place.
Beginners should pay especial attention to this. It should be impelled
chiefly by the fore-arm, while the body should remain perfectly steady,
as the slightest swaying motion of it will give a false direction to the
stroke. The speed of the cue, and not the weight of the body, gives
strength to the stroke.
In the instructions in the game contained in the body of this work, the
fundamental principles of the game are fully exemplified and enlarged
upon. But there are exceptions to these fundamental rules to which we
now briefly refer, and among them may be prominently named the results
of the different degrees of strength with which the cue ball is struck,
inasmuch as important modifications of the angles of incidence and
reflexion are produced by the varieties of strength in the impulsion of
the ball.
It is a general law that the angle of incidence is equal to the angle of
reflexion; this law is, however, modified in billiards by the degree of
strength with which the cue ball is struck. The angle which the
cue-ball will take after striking a cushion, being materially altered by
the force imparted to it, the greater the strength the more acute will
the angle of reflexion become.
When the ball, instead of being played against a fixed and inert body,
such as a cushion, is played against a moveable sphere, such as itself,
the angle formed by the line of direction of the object-ball, and the
line of the subsequent course of the cue-ball, will be more _obtuse_ the
greater the strength communicated to the cue-ball.
Without an approximate knowledge of the different degrees of strength to
be imparted in order to produce different angles, the pupil labours
through a maze of uncertainty; and if not of a patient and reflective
tendency, is inclined to arrive at the hasty and erroneous conclusion,
that chance constitutes an important element in successful billiard
playing.
Before commenting further on the game we will proceed to give the rules
of the American four ball game, and also of the French three ball game
as played in America; and here we would acknowledge our indebtedness to
Messrs. Phelan and Collender, the great billiard-table manufacturers of
the United States, for the privilege of quoting from their complete
publications on the science and practice of the game of billiards.
RULES OF THE AMERICAN FOUR BALL GAME, BY MICHAEL PHELAN, ESQ.
ON STRINGING FOR THE LEAD.
Whoever, playing from within the “string-line” against an outside
cushion, brings the returning cue-ball nearest the head cushion, which
is the one at which the players stand, is entitled to choice of balls
and lead. Provided--
1. That, in stringing, the player’s ball has not touched his opponent’s
while the latter was at rest. 2. Nor has fallen into any of the pockets.
In either case the player loses choice and lead. 3. Should the
cue-balls, both being in motion, come in contact, the strokes are
invalid, and must be played over.
2. In “stringing,” it is required that both cue-balls shall be struck
simultaneously, or so nearly together that one ball cannot reach the
lower cushion before the other has been put in motion.
NOTE.--It will be well for players to bear in mind also that in
“stringing” for the lead both cue-balls should be struck, if not
simultaneously, at least so near together that one ball cannot reach the
lower cushion before the other has been put in motion.
ON LEADING.
1. The player who wins the choice of balls and lead must either roll his
ball down towards the lower cushion, as an object for his adversary to
play at, or else compel his adversary to lead off as above described.
2. In leading, the player’s ball must be played from within the
string-line, and struck with sufficient strength to carry it beyond the
deep-red ball on its appropriate spot at the foot of the table. But it
must not be played with such strength as to repass, after coming in
contact with the lower cushion, the deep-red ball. Nor yet must it touch
either red ball, nor lodge on the cushion, nor fall into a pocket, nor
jump off the table. In any of the cases mentioned in this section, or in
case the cue-ball is not struck with sufficient strength to pass beyond
the deep-red, it shall be optional with the adversary (Player No. 2) to
make No. 1 spot his ball on the pool spot nearest the lower cushion, or
lead again: or he may take the lead himself.
3. No count or forfeiture can be made or incurred until two strokes have
been played.
4. Once the lead is made, the game is considered as commenced, and
neither player can withdraw except under circumstances specified on page
803.
ON OPENING THE GAME.
1. The game is opened by player No. 2 playing on the white ball at the
foot of the table.
2. Should he fail to hit the white first, or fail to hit it at all, he
forfeits one point, which shall be added to his adversary’s score.
Should he pocket himself after hitting a red ball first, he loses three
points, even though he may have subsequently hit the white.
ON FORFEITURES.
1. If the striker fails to hit any of the other balls with his own, he
forfeits _one_ point, which, as well as other forfeitures, must be added
to his adversary’s score. (See note, page 812.)
2. The striker forfeits _two_ when the ball that he plays with is
pocketed, or lodges on the cushion, or goes over the table, after having
struck or been in fixed contact with the other white, no matter whether
it has touched one or both of the reds.
[An exception to this clause will be found in Sec. 2, on “Opening the
Game.”]
3. The striker forfeits _three_ when the ball that he plays with is
pocketed, or lodges on the cushion, or goes over the table, after having
come in contact with one or both of the reds, and not the white. The
same applies if neither red nor white be struck.
4. If the player cause any ball to jump off the table, and should it, by
striking any of the bystanders, be flung back upon the table, it must
still be treated as if it had fallen to the floor. If a red ball, it
must be spotted; if a white, held in hand. Should it be the last
striker’s ball, he forfeits two or three, the same as if he had gone
into a pocket.
ON FOUL STROKES.
The penalty of a foul stroke is, that the player cannot count any points
he may have made by such stroke, and his adversary is entitled to the
next play. The following, in addition to those already mentioned, are
foul strokes:--
1. If either player plays with his opponent’s ball, the stroke is foul;
and, if successful, he cannot count, provided the error is found out
before a second shot is made.
2. Should two or more strokes have been made previous to the discovery,
the reckoning cannot be disturbed, and the player may continue his run
with the same ball, or he may have the balls changed. The same privilege
is extended to the opposing player when his turn comes to play.
3. Should it be found that both players have used the wrong ball
successively, he who was first to play with the wrong ball cannot put in
a claim of foul against his opponent, as the latter, in using the wrong
ball, was simply playing from his proper position on the table.
[It is the position of the cue-ball, and not its mere colour or
designation, that governs. Aside from this, before one player can charge
another with error, it must be shown that no act of his contributed to
that error.]
4. Though the striker, when playing with the wrong ball, cannot count
what points he may make, except in those cases mentioned above,
nevertheless, whatever forfeitures he may incur while playing with the
wrong ball, he is bound to pay, as if he had been playing with his own.
5. Should, however, both the white balls be off the table together, and
should either player, by mistake, pick up the wrong one and play with
it, the stroke must stand, and he can count whatever he has made.
[As he plays from his proper position, it is immaterial, because no
advantage is to be gained, which ball he uses. In this case, as in the
others where it is permitted to play with the wrong ball, the balls
should be changed at the conclusion of the run. This will prevent
confusion and disputes.]
6. If the striker play at a ball before it is fully at rest, or while
any other ball is rolling on the table, the stroke is foul.
7. If, after going into a pocket, a cue-ball or an object-ball should
rebound and return to the bed of the table, it must be treated as a ball
not pocketed.
8. If the player, when playing with the butt or side of his cue, does
not withdraw the butt or side before the cue-ball touches the
object-ball, the stroke is foul.
9. A stroke made while a red ball is off the table, provided its spot is
unoccupied, is foul. When its proper spot is occupied, the red must
remain off the table until its spot is vacated and all the balls have
ceased rolling. [See following rule.]
10. If the game being played is one in which hazards, or pockets, do not
count, a red ball that has been pocketed or forced off the table shall
be spotted on another spot, provided its own is occupied, and provided
also the non-striker’s ball is off the table at the time. If the
light-red, it shall be placed on the dark-red spot; and if that spot is
occupied, the light-red shall be placed on the pool spot at the foot of
the table. If the dark-red, it shall be placed on the light-red spot,
&c. If both reds are off the table at the same time, and their spots are
occupied by the two whites, one of the reds may be placed on the pool
spot. The other must remain off the table until its proper spot is
vacant.
NOTE.--In the full game, or when pockets are counted, the old rule
applies, and the red ball, when its spot is occupied, must remain off
the table until its spot is uncovered and all the balls have ceased
rolling.
11. If, after making a successful stroke, the player obstructs or
otherwise affects the free course of any ball in motion, the stroke is
foul, and he cannot score the points made thereby.
12. A touch is a shot. And if, while the balls are at rest, a player
touches or disturbs any ball on the table other than his own, it is
foul. He has, however, the privilege of playing a stroke for safety,
provided his own ball has not been touched, but he can make no count on
the shot.
13. In playing a shot, if the cue leaves the ball and touches it again,
the stroke is foul.
14. If the striker, through stretching forward or otherwise, has not at
least one foot on the floor while striking, the shot is foul, and no
points can be reckoned.
15. If, when the player’s ball is in hand, he does not cause it to pass
outside the string before touching any of the object-balls or cushion
(except in the case mentioned in the following rule), the stroke is
foul, and his opponent may choose whether he will play with the balls as
they are, have them replaced in their original positions, or cause the
stroke to be played over; or, should the player make a losing hazard
under such circumstances, the penalty may be enforced.
16. Playing at a ball whose base or point of contact with the table is
outside the “string,” is considered playing out of the “string;” and the
stroke is a fair one, even though the side which the cue-ball strikes is
hanging over, and therefore within the “string.”
17. Playing directly at a ball that is considered in the “string” is
foul, even though the cue-ball should pass wholly beyond the “string”
line before coming in contact.
18. Giving a miss inside the “string,” when the player is in hand, is
foul. But he may, for safety, cause his ball to go out of the “string”
and return.
19. If a player alters the stroke he is about to make, at the suggestion
of any party in the room,--even if it be at the suggestion of his
partner in a double match,--the altered stroke is foul.
20. Placing marks of any kind whatever, either upon the cushions or
table, is foul; and a player, while engaged in a game, has no right to
practise a particular stroke on another table.
ON CASES WHERE THE BALLS ARE IN CONTACT.
[At the request of a majority of the leading players, amateur and
professional, the rule observed since 1858, under which no count could
be effected unless the striker first played upon some ball other than
that with which his own was in contact, has been amended as below. The
new rule came into effect January 1, 1867.]
1. When the cue-ball is in contact with any other ball, the striker may
effect a count either by playing first upon some ball other than that
with which his own is in contact, or by playing first against the
cushion, or by a _masse_. In either of the two last-mentioned cases, it
is immaterial which ball the returning cue-ball strikes first.
2. Should the cue-ball be in contact with all the other balls on the
table,--or, if with two balls only, while the remaining ball is on the
table, in such a way that the striker cannot play either on the free
ball or the cushion _first_,--it shall be optional with him to have all
the balls taken up and the reds spotted as at the commencement of the
game. It shall also be at his option to take the lead himself or compel
his opponent to lead.
[This is the same as starting the game anew, except that there is no
occasion to “string” for the lead and choice of balls.]
ON WITHDRAWING FROM, WITHOUT FINISHING A GAME.
1. The player may protest against his adversary standing in front of
him, or in such close proximity as to disarrange his aim.
2. Also, against loud talking or any other annoyance by his opponent,
while he is making his play.
3. Also, against being refused the use of the bridge, or any other of
the instruments used in that room in playing, except when a special
stipulation to the contrary was made before commencing the game.
4. Or in case his adversary shall refuse to abide by the marker’s,
referee’s, or company’s decision on a disputed point, which it was
agreed between them to submit to the marker or company for arbitration.
In any one, or all of the foregoing cases, if the discourtesy be
persisted in, the party aggrieved is at liberty to withdraw, and the
game shall be considered as drawn, and any stakes which may have been
depending on it must be returned.
5. Should the interruption or annoyance have been accidental, the
marker, if so requested by the player, who is entitled to repeat his
stroke, must replace the balls as near as possible in the position they
occupied before the player made the stroke in which he was interrupted.
ON CASES IN WHICH THE MARKER MUST REPLACE THE BALLS, IF CALLED ON, AS
NEARLY AS POSSIBLE IN THEIR FORMER POSITION.
1. In the case mentioned in the 5th paragraph of the preceding rule.
2. Where any of the balls, when at rest, are moved by accident.
3. Where any of the balls, while rolling, are suddenly obstructed either
by accident or design on the part of any person other than the player.
In this case, the marker, if so requested by the players or referee,
shall place the interrupted ball as nearly as possible in the situation
which it would apparently have occupied had it not been stopped.
4. Where the cue-ball, resting on the edge of a pocket, drops into it
before the striker has time to play.
5. Where the object-ball, in a similar position, is rolled back into the
pocket by any of the ordinary vibrations of the table or atmosphere.
6. In all the cases aforementioned where it is specified that in
consequence of a foul stroke the player’s opponent shall have the option
either of playing at the balls as they are, or causing them to be
replaced by the marker.
7. When either or both of the red balls are pocketed, or forced off the
table, it is the marker’s duty to spot them before another stroke is
played--except (the game being played is caroms and pockets) the spot
appropriate to either be occupied by one of the playing balls, in which
case the red one must be kept in hand until its position is uncovered.
8. If, after playing a ball, the player should attempt to obstruct or
accelerate its progress by striking it again, blowing at it, or any
other means, his opponent may either play at the balls as they stand, or
call upon the referee or marker to replace them in the position they
would otherwise have occupied.
9. It is the duty of each player to see that a ball is properly spotted
before the next stroke is made. As in the case where a player is in
hand, a claim of foul, after the cue-ball has been struck in the one
instance, and the red ball disturbed in another, cannot be entertained.
All claims to the effect that the red ball is not on its spot, or that
the striker’s ball is not inside the “string” when he is about to play
after having been in hand, should be made _before_ the stroke is played,
as it can seldom be decided _after_ the stroke, whether there was any
ground for the claim.
ON THE DUTY OF THE PLAYERS TO EACH OTHER.
1. Each player must look after his own interest, and exercise his own
discretion. His opponent cannot be compelled to answer such questions
as, “Is the ball outside or inside the string?” “Are the balls in
contact?” and so forth. These are questions for the player’s own
judgment to decide.
2. When the cue-ball is very near another ball, the player must not play
directly upon that ball without having warned his adversary that they do
not touch, and given him or his umpire time to be satisfied on that
point.
3. It is obligatory upon the adversary or umpire to call “time!” or give
some other notice of his approach, if, while the player is preparing to
make a stroke, either of them desires to look at the balls, or submit a
question to the referee.
4. Each player should attend strictly to his own game, and never
interfere with his adversary’s, except in the cases mentioned in Section
9, on p. 804, or when a foul stroke or some other violation of these
rules may call for forfeiture.
ON THE DUTY OF THE MARKER AND THE SPECTATORS TO THE PLAYERS.
1. In a single game, no one, except the player and his umpire, has a
right to interfere with the play, or point out an error which either has
been or is about to be committed. The player to whose prejudice the foul
stroke is being or has been made, should find that out for himself.
2. Even after a stroke has been made, no one in the room has any right
to comment upon it, either for praise or blame: for the same stroke may
occur again in the course of the game, and the player’s play may be
materially altered by the criticism to which he has just been listening.
3. Let the marker and spectators keep their places as much as possible,
for if they crowd or move around the table they are _liable_ to
interfere with the players, and certain to distract their attention.
4. When the spectators are appealed to by the marker or referee for
their opinion on a point which he has been asked, but finds himself
unable to decide, such of them as are well acquainted with the game
should answer according to the best of their knowledge and belief. Those
who know little or nothing of the game would oblige themselves and
others by at once confessing their incompetency. Either they may not
have seen the disputed stroke, or, seeing it, may not have been familiar
with its merits.
THE THREE-BALL CAROM GAME.
This is considered by many the finest and most scientific game of
billiards in vogue. The game is played with three balls only, two white
and one red, and on a carom table. The red is placed on the spot
assigned to the dark-red in the American four-ball game. At the
commencement of the game one of the white balls is placed on the
light-red, or upper spot, connected with which is a described radius or
semicircle of six inches, usually marked on the cloth with chalk. The
other white ball, being “in hand,” may be played from any part of this
semicircle, which answers for what is known as the “string” in the
four-ball game, and whenever the cue-ball is “in hand” the player has
the right of playing it from this half circle. Points are reckoned by
caroms, which ordinarily count one point each; but when the rule of
counting, as in the four-ball game, is allowed, then misses count, but
not otherwise.
In France, where the three-ball game had its origin, there is no
standard code of rules to govern it. In America the following rules are
observed:--
1. The game is begun by stringing for the lead and choice of balls, as
in the four-ball game, the same regulations governing. In “stringing,”
the players should endeavour to strike the cue-balls simultaneously, and
he whose ball stops nearest the cushion at the head of the table shall
have the choice either of playing first or of making his adversary do
so--a privilege which thereafter shall belong to both players
alternately.
2. Unless a special agreement be entered into between the players and
the table-keeper, the game commonly consists of twenty-one points, if
each carom counts one only, and of forty-five when each carom counts
two, and misses are scored.
3. The first to play places his ball in any part of the semicircle, at
his option. He then plays at the ball on the deep-red spot, and has no
right to hit the white first without having caused his ball to touch the
cushion at some point outside of the “string.”
4. Player No. 2, whose ball has been placed on the spot, plays in his
turn. On a carom table he has the right to play on either ball, even
though both should be within the “string.” On a pocket table it is his
privilege to have the red placed on its appropriate spot, or he may
elect to play the balls as they are. Should he adopt the latter course
in this instance, or at any other time he happens to be in hand on a
pocket table, he must, before hitting either of the balls in the
“string,” cause his own to pass outside.
5. When a player is in hand on a carom table, and the other balls are
within the “string,” he may play directly upon either. But on a pocket
table, he can only play as described in Section 4. Furthermore, he must
confine his ball to the semicircle, and not let the lower half of his
body pass beyond the right line which the edge of the side cushion would
describe if prolonged.
6. The player must have at least one foot on the floor.
7. A ball exactly on the “string line” is considered within the string.
8. The carom is good, and the points count for the player, even though
his ball should be lost; and he continues to play. [A ball is considered
lost which goes into a pocket, jumps off the table, or remains on a
cushion.]
9. A pushing stroke subjects the player to the loss of the point or
points he may have made by that stroke, and puts his ball out of hand.
10. A player who plays before all the balls have ceased rolling loses
his stroke, and his hand is out.
11. When the cue-ball is in contact with one or more balls, all are
taken up and placed as at the commencement of the game; and the player,
being considered in hand, continues his play.
12. If the balls are disturbed accidentally, through the medium of any
agency other than the player himself--as, for instance, through the
interference of his opponent, or the marker, or other outside
party--they must be replaced, and the player allowed to play.
13. If, in playing, or after having played, the player disturbs any ball
other than his own, he cannot make a counting stroke, but he may play
for safety. But if he touches his own ball, except with the cue, or if
he touches it more than once with that instrument, the stroke is foul,
and he cannot play for safety.
14. A player has no right to disturb the balls, and ought not to do it
without the consent of his adversary.
15. When the cue-ball is very near another ball, the player ought not to
play without warning his adversary that they do not touch, and giving
him time to satisfy himself on that point.
16. Playing with the wrong ball is foul. The rules as to playing with
the wrong ball in the four-ball game are applicable to the three-ball
game.
17. Blowing on a ball, or using any other means to alter its course or
position, is foul. If the player so offending is in play, he must yield
the table to his adversary, should the latter demand it. In all cases,
the opposing player shall have the privilege either of having the ball
or balls replaced, or played with as they are.
18. If a lost ball, on being put back on the table, disturbs another,
the ball so disturbed must be put in its place again by the marker or
referee, and the player whose turn it is to play shall proceed.
19. The red ball being lost, and its spot being occupied, it shall be
placed on the “string” spot; if this latter should happen to be occupied
also, then the red shall be placed on the pool spot at the foot of the
table. A white ball being lost and its spot being occupied, shall be
placed on the deep-red spot, or if that is occupied, on the pool spot,
provided that it is not the turn of the player whose ball is lost to
play. In that case, there is no occasion for spotting the lost ball.
20. On a carom table, a lost white ball that has been placed on the
“string” spot cannot be moved after the opposing player has played a
stroke while the ball was in this position; but on a pocket table, where
the owner of a white ball that has been lost is compelled to play
outside of the “string,” he can, when his turn comes, play from any
point within the semicircle, provided that his ball has not been struck
by another. On a pocket table, it is held that a ball is in hand until
it has been struck or moved from its position, it having been placed on
the spot simply to afford the in-striker a chance to count. On the
contrary, on a carom or pocket-less table, custom has made the rule that
a lost ball ceases to be in hand after one stroke has been played; and,
in consideration of this ruling, the player, instead of being allowed to
shift the position of his ball, is privileged, in this country, to play
at any ball irrespective of its being in or out of the “string,” and
regardless, also, of whether he stands at the head or at either side of
the table.
[_Explanation._--The two rules last preceding may be further explained
in this wise: Either on a pocket or a carom table, a ball that rolls on
to and occupies the “string” spot in the course of play cannot be moved
aside to permit the spotting of a white ball that has become “lost.” The
lost ball must be spotted on the dark-red, or the pool spot, as directed
in rule 19, if its owner is not entitled to the next play, or within the
semicircle if he is. But when, on a carom table, a white ball has been
placed on the “string” spot by either player, instead of having rolled
thereon, it may be moved aside to accommodate a “lost” white ball,
provided that subsequent to the placing of the ball as mentioned _no
stroke has been played_. In marked contrast with this, a white ball that
has been placed on the “string” spot _on a pocket table_, may be moved
aside at any time in order to permit the spotting of a “lost” white
ball, provided always that the first-mentioned ball has not been touched
while occupying the spot.]
21. A player who abandons a game declares it lost by so doing.
There is a pretty variation of this game called the “Pillet Game,” in
which the above rules are varied only to the extent of requiring the
cue-ball to touch the cushion first before a carom can count, the score
in this game being ten points up only.
HINTS TO AMATEURS.
The old adage, “Experience is a great teacher,” holds equally true in
billiards as in any other of the many occupations of life. There is no
royal road to learning, but the student of the present day enjoys vast
facilities over his ancestors in the acquirement of every variety of
knowledge. Every new fact promulgated aids in the development of
additional facts, which, though ever existent, have but just been
discovered. Bearing these axioms in mind, we propose to embody in the
present article a few hints to billiard players, which will enable the
tyro at once to benefit by the information which the proficient has only
obtained by years of practice and observation.
Remember that all players have equal rights, and that no gentleman will
take any advantage of an antagonist excepting such as he may be fairly
entitled to by superiority of judgment or of skill.
Never make any remark or unnecessary noise when your adversary is about
to play, but stand away from the table and not opposite the pocket at
which he may be playing.
Do not play carelessly, or strike at random, but with some definite
object in view; and if no eligible stroke presents itself, endeavour to
leave the balls as safe for your opponent as your skill will permit.
Never despair of winning a game; care and caution frequently insure
success, even against apparent impossibilities. Fortune may seem to be
against you, but remember that in the long run luck will invariably
succumb to skill.
Attempt only strokes which seem to be within the compass of your
abilities, except the necessities of the case require a deviation from
this rule. This, however, is only to be considered a general law, and
not by any means imperative.
Effecting the stroke at hand is but a part of the game, and the player
should endeavour, in making this shot, to leave the balls in a position
where a second count can be secured.
By way of illustration of some of the “points” in the game of billiards,
we present below a few diagrams, and the first is that illustrative of
the method of taking advantage of the chances for making points. The
following is an explanation of abbreviations used in describing
diagrams:--
A. stands for above the _centre_ of the ball; B. for below it; R. to the
right of it; L. to the left; and D. for diagonal. Q. P. means the
strength or quantity of power with which the cue-ball must be struck. We
describe as follows: Q. P. No. 1, strength enough to make the ball roll
from the string to the lower cushion and back to the head cushion. Q. P.
No. 2, from the string to the lower cushion, back to the head cushion,
and from that to opposite the centre pocket. To propel it from the
string to the opposite cushion, thence back to the head, and from that
back to the lower cushion is Q. P. No. 3. Q. P. No. 4, is sufficient
force to propel the ball from the string to the lower cushion, back to
the head cushion, back to the lower cushion again, and thence half way
down the table.
In playing billiards we frequently find the balls in a position where a
count can be effected in several different ways. In such cases, it is
advisable for the player to take into consideration the probabilities of
effecting the stroke, and the position of the balls thereafter. If the
stroke be at all doubtful, he should play where he would have the
greatest prospect of success, or, in other words, “take the chances.”
We will suppose the cue-ball to be in hand, and the player desirous of
securing a good “break.” The diagram below illustrates the position.
[Illustration]
If, in the above case, the student is playing the usual game, it would
be advisable for him to play on the object-ball, so as to pocket it and
return over line 1, in this way taking three chances to make a count. If
he is playing caroms alone, it would be better for him to play on the
left of the object-ball, so as to draw it back in the string, as near
the other balls as possible. To make the first stroke: strike the
cue-ball ¼ A., ¼ R., with Q. P. 2½; and if the object-ball be pocketed
in the corner, as represented, the carom will be made on one of the
balls numbered 2 and 3. To make the second stroke: strike the cue-ball ¼
A., ½ R., with Q. P. 2½, the object-ball to be hit ⅜ L.
BRINGING THE BALLS TOGETHER.
The grand strength and science of the game consists in managing the
balls so as to leave them in a favourable position for the next play, or
if the player considers it impossible to count, to leave them as safe as
may be for his antagonist.
We cannot insist too strongly upon a perfect mastery of this art. After
the player has acquired a thorough practical knowledge of the philosophy
of the _follow_, the _force_ and the _twist_, the next great essential
is the exercise of judgment with regard to the feasibility of strokes
and their relative relation to the game. The term _judgment_ is applied
to the choice of strokes. The player, for instance, may have two
apparent shots; the first may recommend itself to him because it is more
facile, but if made will leave the balls safe, while the second,
although more difficult, will, if successful, leave the balls in a
position where a second count or even a run can be effected. _Judgment_,
therefore, would dictate that he should attempt the second, rather than
the first.
The diagram annexed will illustrate our remarks.
[Illustration]
Strike the cue-ball ¼ B., ⅜ L., with Q. P. 2½, the object-ball to be hit
so as to make it roll over the lines, as represented, and the player
will have a break of balls, which, with judicious management, will
enable him to effect a long run.
With one more illustration of this feature of scientific play we close
our article.
To play the balls as shown in the illustration following the player must
strike the cue-ball a little below the centre, and with a deadened
stroke, caroming gently on the second ball; the object-ball about
one-third to the right. This carom should be practised until each
position has become familiar to the player.
[Illustration]
In either practice or ordinary play the beginner should never play
carelessly, or strike at random, but with some definite object in view;
and if no eligible stroke presents itself, endeavour to leave the balls
as safe for your opponent as your skill will permit.
[_Note._--There are two exceptions to this rule. The first occurs in
leading off, and has already been explained. The second is where the
cue-ball, while at rest, is in contact with another ball. Then the
player does not forfeit. It is impossible to cause the cue-ball to hit,
by a direct stroke, the ball with which it is in contact, and the player
should not be penalized for failing to accomplish an impossibility. But,
as it is possible for him to count by playing _away_ from that ball--for
example, by striking some other ball, or a cushion, _first_, or by
taking up all the balls if his own is in contact with two or more--it is
a settled ruling that, in case he should pocket his ball either by
accident or design, or send it over the table, or cause it to lodge upon
the cushion, he must pay forfeit--_two_ points, if his ball was in
contact with a white, and _three_ if with a red.]
THE CANADIAN GAME OF LA CROSSE.
The game of La Crosse, now known as the “National game” of the new
dominion of Canada, is of Indian origin, and is the oldest and only
legitimate American game of ball now in vogue. La Crosse was played
among the American Indians before the tread of a “pale face” invaded the
“native heath” of the red man, and consequently our British friends
cannot claim the credit of even originating the basis of this game, as
in base-ball, though La Crosse resembles the Scotch game of Golf.
An attractive feature of La Crosse is that it can be played when
base-ball or cricket cannot. No rolling or levelling of grounds are
required, and but a merely nominal expense for _materiel_. The rules of
La Crosse are simple enough for a child to comprehend them; but yet it
is a game capable of yielding a great degree of exciting sport, both to
the young and old as participants, and to both sexes as spectators.
Moreover, wherever there is an ordinary field or common, if the grass be
not too long, a ground is ready for a match. As regards the physical
requisites and advantages, the former are the possession of pedestrian
skill and endurance to a more or less degree, with considerable activity
of movement, while the latter consist of the benefits the excitement of
a contest and the rapid exercise the game yields, agility, speed, and
endurance being developed in the process of becoming a skilful player in
the game.
La Crosse is played by twelve men on each side. These twelve players
occupy the following positions, viz.: goal-keeper, point, cover-point,
centre, home, and seven fielders. The goal-keeper’s duty is to defend
the goal; point is the player occupying the position out in the field,
and nearest the goal-keeper; cover-point fronts the latter’s position;
the “centre” is the player who faces the playing party in the centre of
the field; home is the position of the player who stands nearest the
goal of the opposing twelve; and the fielders skirmish round generally.
Each contesting twelve elect a captain to superintend the game, and they
choose umpires and toss for choice of goal.
There are two umpires, and these select a referee, whose decision on
disputed points is final.
The “crosse” is a species of battledore, the ball being in the place of
the shuttlecock, the difference being, that the portion of the bat
formed by network is of a similar form to an English kite (see diagram).
The network requires to be strung tightly together, so as not to “bag,”
but to be quite level.
The ball is made of soft spongy rubber, not exceeding eight inches in
circumference.
The goals consist of flag-poles, with flags, the poles standing six feet
above the ground, and six feet apart generally, but the distance is
optional on mutual agreement by the captains of the contesting sides. In
front of each goal, and distant six feet therefrom, is drawn a line,
called the “goal crease,” and within this line the players of the
opposite side to that the goal belongs to are prohibited from standing,
unless the ball is near the flags. The position of the umpires is behind
the above goal flags. The goal-keeper, while defending the goal, may
stop the ball in any manner he chooses.
The game consists of each party striving, by means of the crosse, or
netted bat each player uses, to send the ball to the goal of their
adversaries; and in doing this the ball must not be handled, or even
touched by the hand, except it falls into a hole, in which case the man
handling it must bat it direct to the nearest opponent; and except by
the goal-keeper while defending his goal.
But the appended rules describe all further laws of the game.
It was not until 1867 that a regular code of rules was adopted for the
government of all regular La Crosse clubs. These laws were enacted at
the Convention of La Crosse Clubs, September 26, 1867, and are now the
rules of play for Canada.
A Canadian writer on the game says:--“Although our early days were
devoted to cricket, we must confess to a decided preference for our own
game, with its athletic struggles. There is nothing like La Crosse. No
other game throws such a fascination over the spectator, who seems
riveted to the spot in admiration of the dashing and skilful play of the
champion twelve. For beauty and variety, skilful play and sober
excitement, it has no equal.”
Any information required about the game by those desirous of forming
clubs, will be furnished by addressing the Secretary of the Montreal La
Crosse Club, Montreal, Canada.
The following are the recognised code of rules governing La Crosse in
the Canadas, where it has been adopted as the “National game” of the new
dominion:--
LAWS OF LA CROSSE.
THE CROSSE.
RULE 1.--The “crosse” may be of any size to suit the player, but the
network must not be bagged: it must be flat when the ball is not on it.
A leading or outside string, above the level of the others, may be used.
It may rest on the top of the stick, but must not have anything under to
increase its height.
THE BALL.
RULE 2.--The ball shall be india-rubber sponge, not less than eight, and
not more than nine, inches in circumference. In matches it shall be
furnished by the challenged party.
THE GOALS.
RULE 3.--The goals may be placed at any distance from each other, and in
any position agreeable to the captains of both sides. The top of the
flag-pole shall be six feet above the ground, including any top
ornament, and six feet apart, and in a match may be furnished by either
party.
THE GOAL CREASE.
RULE 4.--There shall be a line or crease, to be called the goal-crease,
drawn in front of each goal, at a distance of six feet from the flags,
within which no opponent shall stand, unless the ball is actually near
or nearing the flags.
SPECTATORS.
RULE 5.--Spectators must stand at least twenty feet from the goals.
UMPIRES.
RULE 6.--There shall be two umpires at each goal, one for each side.
Unless otherwise agreed upon by the captains, they shall not be members
of either club engaged in a match, nor can they be changed during a
match, except for reasons of illness or injury. They must be thoroughly
acquainted with the game, and in every way competent to act. Before a
match begins, they shall see that all the regulations respecting the
crosse, ball, goal, goal-crease, &c. are strictly complied with, and in
deciding whether or not a crosse is bagged they shall take the opinion
of the captains and the referee. During the game they shall stand behind
the flags, and shall have power to decide all disputes, subject to Rule
7, and suspend from play any player infringing these laws. No umpire
shall, either directly or indirectly, be interested in any bet upon the
result of the match. No person shall speak to the umpires, or distract
their attention when the ball is near or nearing their goal.
REFEREE.
RULE 7.--The umpires shall select a referee, to whom all disputed games
whereon they are a tie may be left for decision. He shall take the
evidence of the players particularly interested, the respective opinions
of the different umpires, and, if necessary, the opinions and offers of
the captains, in cases where the discontinuance of the game is
threatened. His decision shall in all cases be final.
CAPTAINS.
RULE 8.--Field captains, to superintend the play, may be appointed by
each side previous to a match, who shall toss up for choice of goal, and
select umpires. They shall report any infringement of the laws to the
umpires. They shall be members of the club by whom they are appointed,
and may or may not be players in a match; and if not, they shall not
carry crosses.
DESIGNATION OF PLAYERS.
RULE 9.--The players of each side shall be designated as follows:--
1. Goal-keeper, who defends the goal.
2. Point, who is first man out from goal.
3. Cover-point, who is in front of point.
4. Centre, who “faces” in the centre of the field.
5. Home, who is nearest the opponent’s goal.
The remaining players shall be termed “fielders.”
NUMBER OF PLAYERS.
RULE 10.--Twelve players on a side shall constitute a full field, and
they must have been regular members of the club they represent, and of
no other club, for thirty days prior to a match.
CHANGE OF PLAYERS.
RULE 11.--No change of players shall be made after a match has been
commenced, except for reasons of accident or injury during the match.
When a match has been agreed upon, and one side is deficient in the
number of players, their opponents may either limit their own players’
numbers to equal them, or compel them to fill up the complement.
SPIKED SOLES.
RULE 12.--The players shall not wear spiked soles to their shoes.
TOUCHING THE BALL WITH THE HAND.
RULE 13.--The ball must not be touched with the hand, save in the cases
of Rules 14 and 15.
GOAL-KEEPER.
RULE 14.--The goal-keeper, while defending the goal within the
goal-crease, may stop balls in any manner.
BALL TAKEN UP WITH THE HAND.
RULE 15.--Whenever the ball is taken up, or out of a hole, with the
hand, during the progress of a game, it must be faced for with the
nearest opponent.
ACCIDENTAL GAME.
RULE 16.--Should the ball be accidentally put through a goal by one of
the players defending it, it is game for the side attacking that goal.
Should it be put through a goal by any one not actually a player, it
shall not count for or against either side.
HOLDING, STRIKING, AND PUSHING.
RULE 17.--Players shall not hold each other, nor grasp an opponent’s
crosse; neither shall they deliberately strike or trip each other, nor
push with the hand.
CHANGING SIDES.
RULE 18.--After each game the players shall change goals, unless
otherwise agreed upon.
PENALTIES FOR FOUL PLAY.
RULE 19.--Any player convicted of deliberate foul play, or infringement
of these rules, shall be suspended from play by the umpires, at request
of his captain.
DECIDING A MATCH.
RULE 20.--A match shall be decided by winning three games out of five,
unless otherwise agreed upon.
AMENDING LAWS.
RULE 21.--Any amendment, revision, or alteration, proposed to be made in
any part of these laws, shall be made only at the Annual Conventions of
“The National La Crosse Association of Canada,” and by a three-fourths’
vote of the members present.
R. CLAY, SON, AND TAYLOR, PRINTERS, BREAD STREET HILL.
TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES:
This text follows the original work as much as possible.
Inconsistencies in lay-out, spelling, hyphenation, capitalisation,
etc. have been retained, except as mentioned below.
The Table of Contents in the original work usually does not
show all levels; this has not been changed. (Sub-)section headers
show different levels, based on the text. The sub-sections under
Baseball, American Billiards and La Crosse are not mentioned in the
original Table of Contents, these have not been added.
Remarks on the text:
Page 75, hang from the strong downwards: possibly typographical
error.
Page 127, orbele poplar: possibly error or variant spelling of
abele poplar (white poplar).
Page 130, table: Smith’s scores are not according to the
calculation given in the text; this has not been changed.
Page 389, illustration plate electrical machine: reference
letters B are not visible in the original illustration.
Page 459, first illustration: reference letters D, E and F are not
visible in the original illustration.
Page 487, spectra: the scans available of this edition show a
fraction of letters in the right-hand margin of the page. A later
edition (1881) of the book shows the same illustration, the symbols
for the elements have been taken from that edition. The “metal
discovered by Professor Bunsen” is rubidium. Page 490 lists the same
elements.
Page 569: Angola rabbit it possibly a misspelling of Angora
rabbit; the word occurs in other publications of the same period,
and has not been changed.
Page 615: “they will be of this form.” Illustration moved
to under paragraph; ... on the edge of the board inside, thus:
illustration moved to before paragraph.
Page 627, (or Var. A.): there is no Var. A. for this game in the
original work.
Page 650, Fig. 6: reference number 1 is missing from the
original illustration.
Page 670, ... and ask some to choose ...: possibly (part of) a
word is missing (someone, some person or similar).
Page 682, Amstelod.: Amstelodanum (Amsterdam).
Page 697, realgor: possibly error or variant of realgar.
Page 724, In order to the full success ...: possibly a word is
missing (In order to achieve ... or similar).
Page 764: Mecklenberg Schwerin: possibly error or English variant
spelling for Mecklenburg Schwerin.
Page 798, carombolage: the French word is carambolage.
Page 812, a similar form to an English kite (see diagram): the
diagram is not present in the original work
Changes made to the text:
Some missing punctuation, repeated words and typographical
errors have been corrected silently.
Footnotes have been moved to underneath paragraph they refer to.
i.e. and i. e. have been standardised to i. e.
Some illustrations have been moved from within text to
underneath/above paragraph. Several tables and forms have been moved
and re-arranged; therefore page numbers referring to illustrations
are not necessarily correct in this text.
Parts of some illustrations have been enhanced for better
visibility.
Page vii: Snow-Ball changed to Snow-Balls; Will you ’List
changed to Will you List (both as in text)
Page viii: The Hoop added (as in text)
Page ix: Under-hand-hand bowling changed to Under-hand bowling;
Single Wicket changed to The Laws of Single Wicket (as in text)
Page x: The Britzschaka, New Brougham and The Family Coach
deleted from ToC, these are illustrations, not sections; BROADSWORDS
treated as hierarchically higher level section, as in the text
Page xiii: Phantasmacope changed to Phantasmascope
Page xv: To crack Walnuts on your Elbow changed to To crack
Walnuts in your Elbow (as in text)
Page xvi: The Row of Halfpence added
Page 1: Heading PART I added for consistency with other parts
Page 16: National-school doys changed to National-school boys
Page 17: water slashed over changed to water splashed over
Page 31: the second mode changed to The second mode
Page 124: fixed their staes changed to fixed their stakes
Page 155: snooters changed to shooters
Page 166: alloted changed to allotted
Page 170: illustration rotated 90°
Page 172: illustration (post) rotated 90°
Page 189, illustration: d changed to D as in text
Page 208: coupé sur peint changed to coupé sur point
Page 212, figure Target: inverted R changed to 1
Page 218: Page 605 changed to Page 219
Page 265, illustration: 7 changed to 4 as in text
Page 302: proportionably changed to proportionally
Page 310: not two high changed to not too high
Page 315, first illustration: text paragraph changed to caption
Page 328: free from noles changed to free from holes
Page 359: Is is a powerful supporter changed to It is a powerful
supporter
Page 370, sal ammoniac: NH₄C₂ changed to NH₄Cl
Page 371: section title IODINE--BROMINE--FLUORINE changed to
IODINE as in ToC (sections on Bromine and Fluorine follow on same
and next page)
Page 381: hickel changed to nickel
Page 391, illustration ringing bells: reference letter A added
Page 392: the knob E changed to the knob F
Page 405: jet-d’eau changed to jet d’eau
Page 406: jet-d’-eau changed to jet d’eau
Page 408: superscripts in chemical formula changed to subscripts
as elsewhere
Page 448: a open umbrella changed to an open umbrella
Page 453: representatation changed to representation
Page 489: Kirchoff changed to Kirchhoff; fraction 1/2,500,00:
the numerator was lacking in the original, numerator 1 has been added
Page 490: Kirchoff’s changed to Kirchhoff’s
Page 495: combe changed to combs
Page 505, Frequently the claws ...: “former” and “latter”
reversed
Page 549, illustration Tumbler: moved to before section, caption
deleted for consistency with other breeds
Page 551, illustration Fantail: moved to before section, caption
deleted for consistency with other breeds
Page 554: hither and hither changed to hither and thither; créve
cœur changed to crève cœur
Page 557: créve cœur changed to crève cœur
Page 593: indiarubber changed to india-rubber as elsewhere
Page 640, Variation A. on Black’s 3d Move: column headers BLACK
and WHITE changed to WHITE and BLACK
Page 642, GAME II, White’s second move: 1. changed to 2.
Page 676, Charles I. code: letter r inserted
Page 678: coded messages corrected to be in agreement with cipher
given and coding procedure
Page 709: Mississipi changed to Mississippi
Page 712: Liliputian changed to Lilliputian
Page 719: Beurre Diel changed to Beurré Diel (as in Beurré
d’Amanlis, same sentence)
Page 737, Cross Puzzle illustration: pieces renumbered according
to solution
Page 760: à perçevoir changed to à percevoir
Page 767: Van Dieman’s Land changed to Van Diemen’s Land
*** End of this LibraryBlog Digital Book "Every Boy's Book: A Complete Encyclopædia of Sports and Amusements" ***
Copyright 2023 LibraryBlog. All rights reserved.